This is a modern-English version of In Search of the Castaways; Or, The Children of Captain Grant, originally written by Verne, Jules.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
IN SEARCH OF THE CASTAWAYS
or THE CHILDREN OF CAPTAIN GRANT
By Jules Verne
From The Works Of Jules Verne
Edited By Charles F. Horne, Ph.D.
VOLUME FOUR
SOUTH AMERICA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME FOUR
THE three books gathered under the title “In Search of the Castaways” occupied much of Verne’s attention during the three years following 1865. The characters used in these books were afterwards reintroduced in “The Mysterious Island,” which was in its turn a sequel to “Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea.” Thus this entire set of books form a united series upon which Verne worked intermittently during ten years.
THE three books collected under the title “In Search of the Castaways” occupied much of Verne’s attention during the three years after 1865. The characters featured in these books were later brought back in “The Mysterious Island,” which was itself a sequel to “Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea.” As a result, this whole series of books forms a cohesive collection that Verne worked on sporadically over a span of ten years.
“In Search of the Castaways,” which has also been published as “The Children of Captain Grant” and as “A Voyage Around the World,” is perhaps most interesting in connection with the last of these titles. It is our author’s first distinctly geographical romance. By an ingenious device he sets before the rescuers a search which compels their circumnavigation of the globe around a certain parallel of the southern hemisphere. Thus they cross in turn through South America, Australia and New Zealand, besides visiting minor islands.
“In Search of the Castaways,” which has also been published as “The Children of Captain Grant” and “A Voyage Around the World,” is probably most interesting regarding the last of these titles. It is the author’s first clearly geographical adventure. Using a clever plot device, he presents the rescuers with a quest that requires them to sail around the globe along a specific parallel in the southern hemisphere. In doing so, they travel through South America, Australia, and New Zealand, as well as visiting smaller islands.
The three great regions form the sub-titles of the three books which compose the story. In each region the rescuers meet with adventures characteristic of the land. They encounter Indians in America; bushrangers in Australia; and Maoris in New Zealand. The passage of the searching party gives ground,—one is almost tempted to say, excuse,—for a close and careful description of each country and of its inhabitants, step by step. Even the lesser incidents of the story are employed to emphasise the distinctive features of each land. The explorers are almost frozen on the heights of the Andes, and almost drowned in the floods of the Patagonian Pampas. An avalanche sweeps some of them away; a condor carries off a lad. In Australia they are stopped by jungles and by quagmires; they hunt kangaroos. In New Zealand they take refuge amid hot sulphur springs and in a house “tabooed”; they escape by starting a volcano into eruption.
The three major regions form the subtitles of the three books that make up the story. In each region, the rescuers face adventures typical of the area. They encounter Native Americans in America, bushrangers in Australia, and Maoris in New Zealand. The journey of the searching party provides a solid reason for a detailed description of each country and its people, step by step. Even the smaller incidents in the story are used to highlight the unique characteristics of each land. The explorers are nearly frozen on the heights of the Andes and almost drown in the floods of the Patagonian Pampas. An avalanche sweeps some of them away, and a condor carries off a boy. In Australia, they are hindered by jungles and quagmires as they hunt kangaroos. In New Zealand, they seek refuge amid hot sulfur springs and in a “tabooed” house; they escape by triggering a volcanic eruption.
Here then are fancy and extravagance mixed with truth and information. Verne has done a vast and useful work in stimulating the interest not only of Frenchmen but of all civilised nations, with regard to the lesser known regions of our globe. He has broadened knowledge and guided study. During the years following 1865 he even, for a time, deserted his favorite field of labor, fiction, and devoted himself to a popular semi-scientific book, now superseded by later works, entitled “The Illustrated Geography of France and her Colonies.”
Here are fantasies and extravagance combined with truth and information. Verne has done a tremendous job in sparking interest not just among the French but also among all civilized nations about the lesser-known areas of our world. He has expanded knowledge and directed study. In the years after 1865, he even temporarily stepped away from his preferred genre of fiction to focus on a popular semi-scientific book, now outdated by newer publications, called “The Illustrated Geography of France and her Colonies.”
Verne has perhaps had a larger share than any other single individual in causing the ever-increasing yearly tide of international travel. And because with mutual knowledge among the nations comes mutual understanding and appreciation, mutual brotherhood; hence Jules Verne was one of the first and greatest of those teachers who are now leading us toward International Peace.
Verne has probably played a bigger role than anyone else in driving the steadily growing trend of international travel. And because increased knowledge among nations leads to mutual understanding and appreciation, it fosters a sense of brotherhood; therefore, Jules Verne was one of the first and greatest teachers guiding us toward International Peace.
IN SEARCH OF THE CASTAWAYS
or
SOUTH AMERICA
CHAPTER I THE SHARK
ON the 26th of July, 1864, a magnificent yacht was steaming along the North Channel at full speed, with a strong breeze blowing from the N. E. The Union Jack was flying at the mizzen-mast, and a blue standard bearing the initials E. G., embroidered in gold, and surmounted by a ducal coronet, floated from the topgallant head of the main-mast. The name of the yacht was the DUNCAN, and the owner was Lord Glenarvan, one of the sixteen Scotch peers who sit in the Upper House, and the most distinguished member of the Royal Thames Yacht Club, so famous throughout the United Kingdom.
ON the 26th of July, 1864, a stunning yacht was cruising through the North Channel at full speed, with a strong breeze coming from the N.E. The Union Jack was flying at the mizzen-mast, and a blue standard with the initials E. G., stitched in gold and topped with a ducal coronet, fluttered from the top of the main-mast. The yacht was named the DUNCAN, and its owner was Lord Glenarvan, one of the sixteen Scottish peers in the Upper House and the most prominent member of the Royal Thames Yacht Club, famous throughout the United Kingdom.
Lord Edward Glenarvan was on board with his young wife, Lady Helena, and one of his cousins, Major McNabbs.
Lord Edward Glenarvan was on board with his young wife, Lady Helena, and one of his cousins, Major McNabbs.
The DUNCAN was newly built, and had been making a trial trip a few miles outside the Firth of Clyde. She was returning to Glasgow, and the Isle of Arran already loomed in the distance, when the sailor on watch caught sight of an enormous fish sporting in the wake of the ship. Lord Edward, who was immediately apprised of the fact, came up on the poop a few minutes after with his cousin, and asked John Mangles, the captain, what sort of an animal he thought it was.
The DUNCAN was newly built and had been on a trial trip a few miles outside the Firth of Clyde. As she was returning to Glasgow, the Isle of Arran was already visible in the distance when the sailor on watch spotted a massive fish swimming in the ship's wake. Lord Edward, who was quickly informed about it, came up on the deck a few minutes later with his cousin and asked John Mangles, the captain, what kind of animal he thought it was.
“Well, since your Lordship asks my opinion,” said Mangles, “I think it is a shark, and a fine large one too.”
“Well, since you asked for my opinion,” said Mangles, “I think it’s a shark, and a really big one at that.”
“A shark on these shores!”
“A shark on our shores!”
“There is nothing at all improbable in that,” returned the captain. “This fish belongs to a species that is found in all latitudes and in all seas. It is the ‘balance-fish,’ or hammer-headed shark, if I am not much mistaken. But if your Lordship has no objections, and it would give the smallest pleasure to Lady Helena to see a novelty in the way of fishing, we’ll soon haul up the monster and find out what it really is.”
“There’s nothing unlikely about that,” replied the captain. “This fish belongs to a species that’s found in all latitudes and in every sea. It’s the ‘balance-fish,’ or hammer-headed shark, if I'm not mistaken. But if your Lordship has no objections, and it would bring even a little joy to Lady Helena to see something new in the way of fishing, we’ll quickly haul up the monster and see what it really is.”
“What do you say, McNabbs? Shall we try to catch it?” asked Lord Glenarvan.
“What do you think, McNabbs? Should we try to catch it?” asked Lord Glenarvan.
“If you like; it’s all one to me,” was his cousin’s cool reply.
“If you want; it’s all the same to me,” was his cousin’s calm response.
“The more of those terrible creatures that are killed the better, at all events,” said John Mangles, “so let’s seize the chance, and it will not only give us a little diversion, but be doing a good action.”
“The more of those awful creatures we take out, the better, anyway,” said John Mangles, “so let’s take this opportunity; it will not only give us some entertainment, but we’ll also be doing something good.”
“Very well, set to work, then,” said Glenarvan.
“Alright, let’s get to work then,” said Glenarvan.
Lady Helena soon joined her husband on deck, quite charmed at the prospect of such exciting sport. The sea was splendid, and every movement of the shark was distinctly visible. In obedience to the captain’s orders, the sailors threw a strong rope over the starboard side of the yacht, with a big hook at the end of it, concealed in a thick lump of bacon. The bait took at once, though the shark was full fifty yards distant. He began to make rapidly for the yacht, beating the waves violently with his fins, and keeping his tail in a perfectly straight line. As he got nearer, his great projecting eyes could be seen inflamed with greed, and his gaping jaws with their quadruple row of teeth. His head was large, and shaped like a double hammer at the end of a handle. John Mangles was right. This was evidently a balance-fish—the most voracious of all the SQUALIDAE species.
Lady Helena soon joined her husband on deck, quite excited about the prospect of such thrilling sport. The sea was beautiful, and every movement of the shark was clearly visible. Following the captain’s orders, the sailors threw a strong rope over the starboard side of the yacht, with a big hook at the end, hidden in a thick chunk of bacon. The bait hooked immediately, even though the shark was a good fifty yards away. He started making a beeline for the yacht, splashing the waves wildly with his fins and keeping his tail perfectly straight. As he got closer, his large, bulging eyes looked greedy, and his wide-open jaws revealed a quadruple row of teeth. His head was big and shaped like a double hammer on the end of a handle. John Mangles was right. This was clearly a balance-fish—the most voracious of all the SQUALIDAE species.
The passengers and sailors on the yacht were watching all the animal’s movements with the liveliest interest. He soon came within reach of the bait, turned over on his back to make a good dart at it, and in a second bacon and contents had disappeared. He had hooked himself now, as the tremendous jerk he gave the cable proved, and the sailors began to haul in the monster by means of tackle attached to the mainyard. He struggled desperately, but his captors were prepared for his violence, and had a long rope ready with a slip knot, which caught his tail and rendered him powerless at once. In a few minutes more he was hoisted up over the side of the yacht and thrown on the deck. A man came forward immediately, hatchet in hand, and approaching him cautiously, with one powerful stroke cut off his tail.
The passengers and sailors on the yacht were watching the animal's every move with great interest. He quickly got close to the bait, flipped onto his back to take a shot at it, and in an instant, the bacon and everything else had vanished. He had hooked himself now, as the huge tug he gave the cable showed, and the sailors started to pull in the creature using tackle attached to the mainyard. He fought back fiercely, but his captors were ready for his struggle and had a long rope with a slipknot prepared, which caught his tail and rendered him powerless immediately. A few minutes later, he was lifted over the side of the yacht and dropped onto the deck. A man stepped forward right away, hatchet in hand, and cautiously approached him, then with one powerful swing, chopped off his tail.
This ended the business, for there was no longer any fear of the shark. But, though the sailors’ vengeance was satisfied, their curiosity was not; they knew the brute had no very delicate appetite, and the contents of his stomach might be worth investigation. This is the common practice on all ships when a shark is captured, but Lady Glenarvan declined to be present at such a disgusting exploration, and withdrew to the cabin again. The fish was still breathing; it measured ten feet in length, and weighed more than six hundred pounds. This was nothing extraordinary, for though the hammer-headed shark is not classed among the most gigantic of the species, it is always reckoned among the most formidable.
This wrapped up the situation, as there was no longer any fear of the shark. However, while the sailors' desire for revenge was satisfied, their curiosity remained strong; they knew the creature didn't have a very refined taste and that the contents of its stomach might be worth checking out. This is a common practice on all ships when a shark is caught, but Lady Glenarvan chose to skip the gross investigation and went back to the cabin. The fish was still alive; it measured ten feet long and weighed over six hundred pounds. This wasn’t unusual since, although the hammer-headed shark isn’t considered one of the largest species, it is always ranked among the most dangerous.
The huge brute was soon ripped up in a very unceremonious fashion. The hook had fixed right in the stomach, which was found to be absolutely empty, and the disappointed sailors were just going to throw the remains overboard, when the boatswain’s attention was attracted by some large object sticking fast in one of the viscera.
The massive creature was quickly torn apart in a very crude way. The hook had lodged right in its stomach, which turned out to be completely empty, and the frustrated sailors were about to toss the remains overboard when the boatswain noticed something large stuck in one of the internal organs.
“I say! what’s this?” he exclaimed.
“I can't believe this!” he exclaimed.
“That!” replied one of the sailors, “why, it’s a piece of rock the beast swallowed by way of ballast.”
"That!" replied one of the sailors, "it's a chunk of rock the creature swallowed for ballast."
“It’s just a bottle, neither more nor less, that the fellow has got in his inside, and couldn’t digest,” said another of the crew.
“It’s just a bottle, nothing more or less, that the guy has in him and can’t digest,” said another member of the crew.
“Hold your tongues, all of you!” said Tom Austin, the mate of the DUNCAN. “Don’t you see the animal has been such an inveterate tippler that he has not only drunk the wine, but swallowed the bottle?”
“Shut up, all of you!” said Tom Austin, the mate of the DUNCAN. “Can’t you see the animal has been such a heavy drinker that he not only drank the wine but swallowed the bottle too?”
“What!” said Lord Glenarvan. “Do you mean to say it is a bottle that the shark has got in his stomach.”
“What!” said Lord Glenarvan. “Are you saying that the shark has a bottle in its stomach?”
“Ay, it is a bottle, most certainly,” replied the boatswain, “but not just from the cellar.”
“Ay, it’s definitely a bottle,” replied the boatswain, “but not just from the cellar.”
“Well, Tom, be careful how you take it out,” said Lord Glenarvan, “for bottles found in the sea often contain precious documents.”
“Well, Tom, be careful how you take it out,” said Lord Glenarvan, “because bottles found in the sea often have valuable documents inside.”
“Do you think this does?” said Major McNabbs, incredulously.
“Do you really think this does?” said Major McNabbs, stunned.
“It possibly may, at any rate.”
"It might, anyway."
“Oh! I’m not saying it doesn’t. There may perhaps be some secret in it,” returned the Major.
“Oh! I’m not saying it doesn’t. There might be some secret in it,” replied the Major.
“That’s just what we’re to see,” said his cousin. “Well, Tom.”
“That’s exactly what we’re here to see,” said his cousin. “Well, Tom.”
“Here it is,” said the mate, holding up a shapeless lump he had managed to pull out, though with some difficulty.
“Here it is,” said the mate, holding up a misshapen lump he had managed to pull out, though with some effort.
“Get the filthy thing washed then, and bring it to the cabin.”
“Get that dirty thing cleaned up, then bring it to the cabin.”
Tom obeyed, and in a few minutes brought in the bottle and laid it on the table, at which Lord Glenarvan and the Major were sitting ready with the captain, and, of course Lady Helena, for women, they say, are always a little curious. Everything is an event at sea. For a moment they all sat silent, gazing at this frail relic, wondering if it told the tale of sad disaster, or brought some trifling message from a frolic-loving sailor, who had flung it into the sea to amuse himself when he had nothing better to do.
Tom complied, and in a few minutes came back with the bottle and placed it on the table where Lord Glenarvan, the Major, the captain, and of course Lady Helena were seated, because, they say, women are always a bit curious. Everything is an event at sea. For a moment, they all sat in silence, staring at this delicate relic, wondering if it carried the story of a tragic disaster or a trivial message from a fun-loving sailor who tossed it into the sea to entertain himself when he had nothing better to do.
However, the only way to know was to examine the bottle, and Glenarvan set to work without further delay, so carefully and minutely, that he might have been taken for a coroner making an inquest.
However, the only way to find out was to check the bottle, and Glenarvan got to work right away, so carefully and thoroughly that he could have been mistaken for a coroner conducting an investigation.
He commenced by a close inspection of the outside. The neck was long and slender, and round the thick rim there was still an end of wire hanging, though eaten away with rust. The sides were very thick, and strong enough to bear great pressure. It was evidently of Champagne origin, and the Major said immediately, “That’s one of our Clicquot’s bottles.”
He started by closely examining the outside. The neck was long and slim, and there was still a piece of wire hanging from the thick rim, although it was corroded with rust. The sides were very thick and strong enough to withstand a lot of pressure. It was clearly from Champagne, and the Major immediately said, “That’s one of our Clicquot’s bottles.”
Nobody contradicted him, as he was supposed to know; but Lady Helena exclaimed, “What does it matter about the bottle, if we don’t know where it comes from?”
Nobody argued with him, since he was expected to know; but Lady Helena exclaimed, “What does it matter about the bottle if we don’t know where it comes from?”
“We shall know that, too, presently, and we may affirm this much already—it comes from a long way off. Look at those petrifactions all over it, these different substances almost turned to mineral, we might say, through the action of the salt water! This waif had been tossing about in the ocean a long time before the shark swallowed it.”
“We’ll find that out soon enough, and we can already say this much—it comes from a long way away. Look at those fossils all over it, these different materials almost turned to stone, we could say, through the saltwater’s action! This object had been floating in the ocean for a long time before the shark ate it.”
“I quite agree with you,” said McNabbs. “I dare say this frail concern has made a long voyage, protected by this strong covering.”
"I completely agree with you," said McNabbs. "I assume this delicate object has traveled a long way, safeguarded by this sturdy wrapping."
“But I want to know where from?” said Lady Glenarvan.
“But I want to know where it’s from?” said Lady Glenarvan.
“Wait a little, dear Helena, wait; we must have patience with bottles; but if I am not much mistaken, this one will answer all our questions,” replied her husband, beginning to scrape away the hard substances round the neck. Soon the cork made its appearance, but much damaged by the water.
“Just a moment, dear Helena, hold on; we need to be patient with bottles; but if I’m not mistaken, this one will give us all the answers,” her husband responded, starting to scrape off the hard substances around the neck. Soon the cork showed up, but it was badly damaged by the water.
“That’s vexing,” said Lord Edward, “for if papers are inside, they’ll be in a pretty state!”
"That's frustrating," said Lord Edward, "because if the papers are inside, they'll be in bad shape!"
“It’s to be feared they will,” said the Major.
“It’s to be feared they will,” said the Major.
“But it is a lucky thing the shark swallowed them, I must say,” added Glenarvan, “for the bottle would have sunk to the bottom before long with such a cork as this.”
"But it’s a good thing the shark swallowed them, I have to say," added Glenarvan, "because the bottle would have sunk to the bottom eventually with a cork like this."
“That’s true enough,” replied John Mangles, “and yet it would have been better to have fished them up in the open sea. Then we might have found out the road they had come by taking the exact latitude and longitude, and studying the atmospheric and submarine currents; but with such a postman as a shark, that goes against wind and tide, there’s no clew whatever to the starting-point.”
"That's true," replied John Mangles, "but it would have been better to have fished them up in the open sea. Then we could have figured out the route they took by determining the exact latitude and longitude, and analyzing the atmospheric and underwater currents. But with a postman like a shark, who goes against the wind and tide, there's no clue at all to the starting point."
“We shall see,” said Glenarvan, gently taking out the cork. A strong odor of salt water pervaded the whole saloon, and Lady Helena asked impatiently: “Well, what is there?”
“We'll see,” said Glenarvan, gently pulling out the cork. A strong smell of salt water filled the entire saloon, and Lady Helena asked impatiently, “So, what is it?”
“I was right!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “I see papers inside. But I fear it will be impossible to remove them,” he added, “for they appear to have rotted with the damp, and are sticking to the sides of the bottle.”
“I was right!” Glenarvan exclaimed. “I see papers inside. But I’m afraid it will be impossible to get them out,” he added, “because they seem to have rotted from the moisture and are stuck to the sides of the bottle.”
“Break it,” said the Major.
"Break it," said the Major.
“I would rather preserve the whole if I could.”
“I would prefer to save everything if I could.”
“No doubt you would,” said Lady Helena; “but the contents are more valuable than the bottle, and we had better sacrifice the one than the other.”
“No doubt you would,” said Lady Helena; “but the contents are more valuable than the bottle, and it’s better to lose the one than the other.”
“If your Lordship would simply break off the neck, I think we might easily withdraw the papers,” suggested John Mangles.
“If you could just break the neck, I think we could easily pull the papers out,” suggested John Mangles.
“Try it, Edward, try it,” said Lady Helena.
“Go for it, Edward, go for it,” said Lady Helena.
Lord Glenarvan was very unwilling, but he found there was no alternative; the precious bottle must be broken. They had to get a hammer before this could be done, though, for the stony material had acquired the hardness of granite. A few sharp strokes, however, soon shivered it to fragments, many of which had pieces of paper sticking to them. These were carefully removed by Lord Glenarvan, and separated and spread out on the table before the eager gaze of his wife and friends.
Lord Glenarvan was very hesitant, but he realized there was no other choice; the precious bottle had to be broken. They needed to get a hammer to do this, as the material had become as hard as granite. However, a few sharp strikes quickly shattered it into pieces, many of which had bits of paper attached to them. Lord Glenarvan carefully removed these pieces of paper and laid them out on the table for the eager eyes of his wife and friends.
CHAPTER II THE THREE DOCUMENTS
ALL that could be discovered, however, on these pieces of paper was a few words here and there, the remainder of the lines being almost completely obliterated by the action of the water. Lord Glenarvan examined them attentively for a few minutes, turning them over on all sides, holding them up to the light, and trying to decipher the least scrap of writing, while the others looked on with anxious eyes. At last he said: “There are three distinct documents here, apparently copies of the same document in three different languages. Here is one in English, one in French, and one in German.”
ALL that could be found on these pieces of paper were a few words here and there, with most of the lines nearly completely washed away by the water. Lord Glenarvan examined them closely for several minutes, flipping them over, holding them up to the light, and trying to read any bit of writing, while the others watched with worried expressions. Finally, he said: “There are three separate documents here, seemingly copies of the same document in three different languages. Here’s one in English, one in French, and one in German.”
“But can you make any sense out of them?” asked Lady Helena.
“But can you make any sense of them?” asked Lady Helena.
“That’s hard to say, my dear Helena, the words are quite incomplete.”
"That's hard to say, my dear Helena; the words are pretty vague."
“Perhaps the one may supplement the other,” suggested Major McNabbs.
“Maybe one could complement the other,” suggested Major McNabbs.
“Very likely they will,” said the captain. “It is impossible that the very same words should have been effaced in each document, and by putting the scraps together we might gather some intelligible meaning out of them.”
“Very likely they will,” said the captain. “It’s impossible for the exact same words to have been erased from each document, and by putting the scraps together we might be able to make some sense out of them.”
“That’s what we will do,” rejoined Lord Glenarvan; “but let us proceed methodically. Here is the English document first.”
"That's what we'll do," replied Lord Glenarvan, "but let's go step by step. Here's the English document first."
All that remained of it was the following:
All that was left of it was this:
62 Bri gow sink stra aland skipp Gr that monit of long and ssistance lost
62 Bri gow sink stra aland skipp Gr that monit of long and ssistance lost
“There’s not much to be made out of that,” said the Major, looking disappointed.
“There's not much to gain from that,” said the Major, looking disappointed.
“No, but it is good English anyhow,” returned the captain.
“No, but it’s still good English,” the captain replied.
“There’s no doubt of it,” said Glenarvan. “The words SINK, ALAND, LOST are entire; SKIPP is evidently part of the word SKIPPER, and that’s what they call ship captains often in England. There seems a Mr. Gr. mentioned, and that most likely is the captain of the shipwrecked vessel.”
“There’s no doubt about it,” said Glenarvan. “The words SINK, ALAND, LOST are complete; SKIPP is clearly part of the word SKIPPER, which is often what they call ship captains in England. There seems to be a Mr. Gr. mentioned, and that’s most likely the captain of the shipwrecked vessel.”
“Well, come, we have made out a good deal already,” said Lady Helena.
"Well, come on, we've figured out quite a bit already," Lady Helena said.
“Yes, but unfortunately there are whole lines wanting,” said the Major, “and we have neither the name of the ship nor the place where she was shipwrecked.”
“Yes, but unfortunately there are entire lines missing,” said the Major, “and we don’t have the name of the ship or the location where it sank.”
“We’ll get that by and by,” said Edward.
“We'll take care of that later,” said Edward.
“Oh, yes; there is no doubt of it,” replied the Major, who always echoed his neighbor’s opinion. “But how?”
“Oh, definitely; there’s no doubt about it,” said the Major, who always agreed with his neighbor's opinion. “But how?”
“By comparing one document with the other.”
“By comparing one document to another.”
“Let us try them,” said his wife.
“Let’s give them a try,” said his wife.
The second piece of paper was even more destroyed than the first; only a few scattered words remained here and there.
The second piece of paper was even more damaged than the first; only a few scattered words were left here and there.
It ran as follows:
It went like this:
7 Juni Glas zwei atrosen graus bringt ihnen
7 Juni Glass two roses gray brings them
“This is written in German,” said John Mangles the moment he looked at it.
“This is written in German,” said John Mangles as soon as he looked at it.
“And you understand that language, don’t you?” asked Lord Glenarvan.
“And you get that language, right?” asked Lord Glenarvan.
“Perfectly.”
"Exactly."
“Come, then, tell us the meaning of these words.”
“Come on, then, tell us what these words mean.”
The captain examined the document carefully, and said:
The captain looked over the document closely and said:
“Well, here’s the date of the occurrence first: 7 Juni means June 7; and if we put that before the figures 62 we have in the other document, it gives us the exact date, 7th of June, 1862.”
“Well, here's the date of the event first: 7 Juni means June 7; and if we put that before the numbers 62 we have in the other document, it gives us the exact date, June 7, 1862.”
“Capital!” exclaimed Lady Helena. “Go on, John!”
“Capital!” shouted Lady Helena. “Keep going, John!”
“On the same line,” resumed the young captain, “there is the syllable GLAS and if we add that to the GOW we found in the English paper, we get the whole word GLASGOW at once. The documents evidently refer to some ship that sailed out of the port of Glasgow.”
“On the same line,” continued the young captain, “there’s the syllable GLAS, and if we add that to the GOW we found in the English paper, we get the whole word GLASGOW right away. The documents clearly refer to some ship that left the port of Glasgow.”
“That is my opinion, too,” said the Major.
"That's what I think, too," said the Major.
“The second line is completely effaced,” continued the Captain; “but here are two important words on the third. There is ZWEI, which means TWO, and ATROSEN or MATROSEN, the German for SAILORS.”
“The second line is totally wiped out,” continued the Captain; “but here are two important words on the third. There is ZWEI, which means TWO, and ATROSEN or MATROSEN, the German word for SAILORS.”
“Then I suppose it is about a captain and two sailors,” said Lady Helena.
“Then I guess it’s about a captain and two sailors,” said Lady Helena.
“It seems so,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“It seems so,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“I must confess, your Lordship, that the next word puzzles me. I can make nothing of it. Perhaps the third document may throw some light on it. The last two words are plain enough. BRINGT IHNEN means BRING THEM; and, if you recollect, in the English paper we had SSISTANCE, so by putting the parts together, it reads thus, I think: ‘BRING THEM ASSISTANCE.’”
“I have to admit, my Lord, that the next word confuses me. I can’t make any sense of it. Maybe the third document will help clarify things. The last two words are pretty clear. BRINGT IHNEN means BRING THEM; and, if you remember, in the English paper we had SSISTANCE, so if we piece it together, it reads something like this, I believe: ‘BRING THEM ASSISTANCE.’”
“Yes, that must be it,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “But where are the poor fellows? We have not the slightest indication of the place, meantime, nor of where the catastrophe happened.”
“Yes, that must be it,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “But where are those poor guys? We have no clue where it is, and we don’t know where the disaster took place.”
“Perhaps the French copy will be more explicit,” suggested Lady Helena.
“Maybe the French version will be clearer,” suggested Lady Helena.
“Here it is, then,” said Lord Glenarvan, “and that is in a language we all know.”
“Here it is, then,” said Lord Glenarvan, “and that's in a language we all understand.”
The words it contained were these:
The words it had were these:
troi ats tannia gonie austral abor contin pr cruel indi jete ongit et 37 degrees 11” LAT
troi ats tannia gonie austral abor contin pr cruel indi jete ongit et 37 degrees 11” LAT
“There are figures!” exclaimed Lady Helena. “Look!”
“There are shapes!” exclaimed Lady Helena. “Look!”
“Let us go steadily to work,” said Lord Glenarvan, “and begin at the beginning. I think we can make out from the incomplete words in the first line that a three-mast vessel is in question, and there is little doubt about the name; we get that from the fragments of the other papers; it is the BRITANNIA. As to the next two words, GONIE and AUSTRAL, it is only AUSTRAL that has any meaning to us.”
“Let’s get to work,” said Lord Glenarvan, “and start from the beginning. I think we can figure out from the incomplete words in the first line that a three-mast vessel is involved, and there’s little doubt about the name; we get that from the fragments of the other papers; it’s the BRITANNIA. As for the next two words, GONIE and AUSTRAL, only AUSTRAL holds any meaning for us.”
“But that is a valuable scrap of information,” said John Mangles. “The shipwreck occurred in the southern hemisphere.”
“But that's a valuable piece of information,” said John Mangles. “The shipwreck happened in the Southern Hemisphere.”
“That’s a wide world,” said the Major.
“That’s a big world,” said the Major.
“Well, we’ll go on,” resumed Glenarvan. “Here is the word ABOR; that is clearly the root of the verb ABORDER. The poor men have landed somewhere; but where? CONTIN—does that mean continent? CRUEL!”
“Well, we’ll keep going,” Glenarvan continued. “Here’s the word ABOR; that’s clearly the base of the verb ABORDER. The poor guys have landed somewhere; but where? CONTIN—does that mean continent? CRUEL!”
“CRUEL!” interrupted John Mangles. “I see now what GRAUS is part of in the second document. It is GRAUSAM, the word in German for CRUEL!”
“CRUEL!” interrupted John Mangles. “I see now what GRAUS is part of in the second document. It is GRAUSAM, the German word for CRUEL!”
“Let’s go on,” said Lord Glenarvan, becoming quite excited over his task, as the incomplete words began to fill up and develop their meaning. “INDI,—is it India where they have been shipwrecked? And what can this word ONGIT be part of? Ah! I see—it is LONGITUDE; and here is the latitude, 37 degrees 11”. That is the precise indication at last, then!”
“Let’s keep going,” said Lord Glenarvan, getting really excited about his task as the unfinished words started to take shape and reveal their meaning. “INDI—could it be India where they’ve been shipwrecked? And what could this word ONGIT be part of? Ah! I get it—it’s LONGITUDE; and here’s the latitude, 37 degrees 11”. That’s the exact indication at last, then!”
“But we haven’t the longitude,” objected McNabbs.
“But we don’t have the longitude,” McNabbs protested.
“But we can’t get everything, my dear Major; and it is something at all events, to have the exact latitude. The French document is decidedly the most complete of the three; but it is plain enough that each is the literal translation of the other, for they all contain exactly the same number of lines. What we have to do now is to put together all the words we have found, and translate them into one language, and try to ascertain their most probable and logical sense.”
“But we can’t get everything, my dear Major; and at least it's something to have the exact latitude. The French document is definitely the most complete of the three; but it's clear that each one is a literal translation of the others, as they all have the same number of lines. What we need to do now is gather all the words we’ve found, translate them into one language, and try to figure out their most likely and logical meaning.”
“Well, what language shall we choose?” asked the Major.
“Well, which language should we pick?” asked the Major.
“I think we had better keep to the French, since that was the most complete document of the three.”
“I think we should stick with the French version since it was the most complete document of the three.”
“Your Lordship is right,” said John Mangles, “and besides, we’re all familiar with the language.”
“Your Lordship is right,” said John Mangles, “and besides, we all know the language.”
“Very well, then, I’ll set to work.”
“Alright, then, I’ll get to work.”
In a few minutes he had written as follows:
In just a few minutes, he had written this:
7 Juin 1862 trois-mats Britannia Glasgow sombre gonie austral a terre deux matelots capitaine Gr abor contin pr cruel indi jete ce document de longitude et 37 degrees 11” de latitude Portez-leur secours perdus. [7th of June, 1862 three-mast BRITANNIA Glasgow] foundered gonie southern on the coast two sailors Gr Captain landed contin pr cruel indi thrown this document in longitude and 37 degrees 11” latitude Bring them assistance lost
7th June 1862 three-masted BRITANNIA Glasgow sank gonie southern on the coast two sailors Captain Gr landed contin pr cruel indi threw this document at longitude and 37 degrees 11” latitude Bring them help lost. [7th of June, 1862 three-mast BRITANNIA Glasgow] foundered gonie southern on the coast two sailors Gr Captain landed contin pr cruel indi thrown this document in longitude and 37 degrees 11” latitude Bring them assistance lost
Just at that moment one of the sailors came to inform the captain that they were about entering the Firth of Clyde, and to ask what were his orders.
Just then, one of the sailors came to tell the captain that they were about to enter the Firth of Clyde and to ask what his orders were.
“What are your Lordship’s intentions?” said John Mangles, addressing Lord Glenarvan.
“What are your Lordship’s plans?” John Mangles asked, addressing Lord Glenarvan.
“To get to Dunbarton as quickly as possible, John; and Lady Helena will return to Malcolm Castle, while I go on to London and lay this document before the Admiralty.”
“To get to Dunbarton as quickly as possible, John; and Lady Helena will return to Malcolm Castle, while I head to London and present this document to the Admiralty.”
The sailor received orders accordingly, and went out to deliver them to the mate.
The sailor got the orders and went out to give them to the mate.
“Now, friends,” said Lord Glenarvan, “let us go on with our investigations, for we are on the track of a great catastrophe, and the lives of several human beings depend on our sagacity. We must give our whole minds to the solution of this enigma.”
“Alright, everyone,” said Lord Glenarvan, “let’s continue our investigation because we’re onto something major, and the lives of several people depend on our insight. We need to focus completely on figuring out this mystery.”
“First of all, there are three very distinct things to be considered in this document—the things we know, the things we may conjecture, the things we do not know.”
“First of all, there are three clear things to consider in this document—the things we know, the things we can guess, and the things we don’t know.”
“What are those we know? We know that on the 7th of June a three-mast vessel, the BRITANNIA of Glasgow, foundered; that two sailors and the captain threw this document into the sea in 37 degrees 11” latitude, and they entreat help.”
“What do we know? We know that on June 7th, a three-mast ship, the BRITANNIA from Glasgow, sank; that two sailors and the captain threw this document into the sea at 37 degrees 11” latitude, and they’re asking for help.”
“Exactly so,” said the Major.
"Exactly," said the Major.
“What are those now we may conjecture?” continued Glenarvan. “That the shipwreck occurred in the southern seas; and here I would draw your attention at once to the incomplete word GONIE. Doesn’t the name of the country strike you even in the mere mention of it?”
“What are those now we might guess?” continued Glenarvan. “That the shipwreck happened in the southern seas; and I’d like to point out right away the unfinished word GONIE. Doesn’t the name of the country catch your attention just by mentioning it?”
“Patagonia!” exclaimed Lady Helena.
“Patagonia!” shouted Lady Helena.
“Undoubtedly.”
"Definitely."
“But is Patagonia crossed by the 37th parallel?” asked the Major.
“But is Patagonia crossed by the 37th parallel?” the Major asked.
“That is easily ascertained,” said the captain, opening a map of South America. “Yes, it is; Patagonia just touches the 37th parallel. It cuts through Araucania, goes along over the Pampas to the north, and loses itself in the Atlantic.”
“That’s easy to figure out,” said the captain, opening a map of South America. “Yeah, it is; Patagonia just reaches the 37th parallel. It runs through Araucania, goes across the Pampas to the north, and disappears into the Atlantic.”
“Well, let us proceed then with our conjectures. The two sailors and the captain LAND—land where? CONTIN—on a continent; on a continent, mark you, not an island. What becomes of them? There are two letters here providentially which give a clew to their fate—PR, that must mean prisoners, and CRUEL INDIAN is evidently the meaning of the next two words. These unfortunate men are captives in the hands of cruel Indians. Don’t you see it? Don’t the words seem to come of themselves, and fill up the blanks? Isn’t the document quite clear now? Isn’t the sense self-evident?”
"Well, let's move on with our guesses. The two sailors and the captain LAND—land where? CONTIN—on a continent; on a continent, mind you, not an island. What happens to them? There are two letters here, conveniently, that give a hint about their fate—PR, which must stand for prisoners, and CRUEL INDIAN clearly refers to the next two words. These unfortunate men are captives in the hands of cruel Indians. Can't you see it? Don't the words seem to fill in the gaps by themselves? Isn't the document pretty clear now? Isn't the meaning obvious?"
Glenarvan spoke in a tone of absolute conviction, and his enthusiastic confidence appeared contagious, for the others all exclaimed, too, “Yes, it is evident, quite evident!”
Glenarvan spoke with complete certainty, and his enthusiastic confidence seemed to rub off on the others, as they all shouted, too, “Yes, it’s clear, very clear!”
After an instant, Lord Edward said again, “To my own mind the hypothesis is so plausible, that I have no doubt whatever the event occurred on the coast of Patagonia, but still I will have inquiries made in Glasgow, as to the destination of the BRITANNIA, and we shall know if it is possible she could have been wrecked on those shores.”
After a moment, Lord Edward said again, “In my opinion, the theory is so believable that I have no doubt the event happened on the coast of Patagonia, but I will still have inquiries made in Glasgow about the destination of the BRITANNIA, and we’ll find out if it’s possible she could have been wrecked on those shores.”
“Oh, there’s no need to send so far to find out that,” said John Mangles. “I have the Mercantile and Shipping Gazette here, and we’ll see the name on the list, and all about it.”
“Oh, there’s no need to look that far to find out,” John Mangles said. “I have the Mercantile and Shipping Gazette right here, so we can check the list and get all the details.”
“Do look at once, then,” said Lord Glenarvan.
“Please take a look right now,” said Lord Glenarvan.
The file of papers for the year 1862 was soon brought, and John began to turn over the leaves rapidly, running down each page with his eye in search of the name required. But his quest was not long, for in a few minutes he called out: “I’ve got it! ‘May 30, 1862, Peru-Callao, with cargo for Glasgow, the BRITANNIA, Captain Grant.’”
The file of papers for the year 1862 was quickly brought over, and John started flipping through the pages quickly, scanning each one for the name he needed. But he didn’t have to search for long, as a few minutes later he exclaimed, “I found it! ‘May 30, 1862, Peru-Callao, with cargo for Glasgow, the BRITANNIA, Captain Grant.’”
“Grant!” exclaimed Lord Glenarvan. “That is the adventurous Scotchman that attempted to found a new Scotland on the shores of the Pacific.”
“Grant!” exclaimed Lord Glenarvan. “That's the adventurous Scotsman who tried to establish a new Scotland on the shores of the Pacific.”
“Yes,” rejoined John Mangles, “it is the very man. He sailed from Glasgow in the BRITANNIA in 1861, and has not been heard of since.”
“Yes,” replied John Mangles, “that's definitely him. He left Glasgow on the BRITANNIA in 1861, and no one has heard from him since.”
“There isn’t a doubt of it, not a shadow of doubt,” repeated Lord Glenarvan. “It is just that same Captain Grant. The BRITANNIA left Callao on the 30th of May, and on the 7th of June, a week afterward, she is lost on the coast of Patagonia. The few broken disjointed words we find in these documents tell us the whole story. You see, friends, our conjectures hit the mark very well; we know all now except one thing, and that is the longitude.”
“There’s no doubt about it, not a hint of doubt,” repeated Lord Glenarvan. “It's definitely that same Captain Grant. The BRITANNIA left Callao on May 30th, and on June 7th, a week later, it got lost along the coast of Patagonia. The few fragmented words we find in these documents reveal the whole story. You see, friends, our guesses were spot on; we know everything now except one thing, and that’s the longitude.”
“That is not needed now, we know the country. With the latitude alone, I would engage to go right to the place where the wreck happened.”
"That's not necessary right now, we know the area. Just based on the latitude, I could take us straight to where the wreck occurred."
“Then have we really all the particulars now?” asked Lady Helena.
“Do we really have all the details now?” asked Lady Helena.
“All, dear Helena; I can fill up every one of these blanks the sea has made in the document as easily as if Captain Grant were dictating to me.”
“All, dear Helena; I can fill in every one of these blanks the sea has made in the document just as easily as if Captain Grant were telling me what to write.”
And he took up the pen, and dashed off the following lines immediately: “On the 7th of June, 1862, the three-mast vessel, BRITANNIA, of Glasgow, has sunk on the coast of Patagonia, in the southern hemisphere. Making for the shore, two sailors and Captain Grant are about to land on the continent, where they will be taken prisoners by cruel Indians. They have thrown this document into the sea, in longitude and latitude 37 degrees 11”. Bring them assistance, or they are lost.”
And he picked up the pen and quickly wrote the following lines: “On June 7, 1862, the three-mast ship, BRITANNIA, from Glasgow, sank off the coast of Patagonia in the southern hemisphere. Heading towards the shore, two sailors and Captain Grant are about to reach land on the continent, where they will be captured by ruthless Indians. They tossed this document into the sea, at longitude and latitude 37 degrees 11”. Help them, or they're finished.”
“Capital! capital! dear Edward,” said Lady Helena. “If those poor creatures ever see their native land again, it is you they will have to thank for it.”
“Capital! capital! dear Edward,” said Lady Helena. “If those poor creatures ever see their homeland again, it’s thanks to you.”
“And they will see it again,” returned Lord Glenarvan; “the statement is too explicit, and clear, and certain for England to hesitate about going to the aid of her three sons cast away on a desert coast. What she has done for Franklin and so many others, she will do to-day for these poor shipwrecked fellows of the BRITANNIA.”
“And they will see it again,” said Lord Glenarvan; “the statement is too clear and straightforward for England to hesitate in helping her three sons stranded on a deserted coast. What she has done for Franklin and many others, she will do today for these poor shipwrecked men of the BRITANNIA.”
“Most likely the unfortunate men have families who mourn their loss. Perhaps this ill-fated Captain Grant had a wife and children,” suggested Lady Helena.
“Most likely the unfortunate men have families who mourn their loss. Perhaps this doomed Captain Grant had a wife and children,” suggested Lady Helena.
“Very true, my dear, and I’ll not forget to let them know that there is still hope. But now, friends, we had better go up on deck, as the boat must be getting near the harbor.”
“That's very true, my dear, and I won’t forget to remind them that there is still hope. But now, friends, we should probably head up on deck, as the boat must be getting close to the harbor.”
A carriage and post-horses waited there, in readiness to convey Lady Helena and Major McNabbs to Malcolm Castle, and Lord Glenarvan bade adieu to his young wife, and jumped into the express train for Glasgow.
A carriage and post-horses were waiting there, ready to take Lady Helena and Major McNabbs to Malcolm Castle, while Lord Glenarvan said goodbye to his young wife and jumped onto the express train for Glasgow.
But before starting he confided an important missive to a swifter agent than himself, and a few minutes afterward it flashed along the electric wire to London, to appear next day in the Times and Morning Chronicle in the following words: “For information respecting the fate of the three-mast vessel BRITANNIA, of Glasgow, Captain Grant, apply to Lord Glenarvan, Malcolm Castle, Luss, Dumbartonshire, Scotland.”
But before he began, he sent an important message with a faster courier than himself, and a few minutes later it traveled along the electric wire to London, where it appeared the next day in the Times and Morning Chronicle with the following words: “For information regarding the fate of the three-masted vessel BRITANNIA, of Glasgow, Captain Grant, please contact Lord Glenarvan, Malcolm Castle, Luss, Dumbartonshire, Scotland.”
CHAPTER III THE CAPTAIN’S CHILDREN
LORD GLENARVAN’S fortune was enormous, and he spent it entirely in doing good. His kindheartedness was even greater than his generosity, for the one knew no bounds, while the other, of necessity, had its limits. As Lord of Luss and “laird” of Malcolm, he represented his county in the House of Lords; but, with his Jacobite ideas, he did not care much for the favor of the House of Hanover, and he was looked upon coldly by the State party in England, because of the tenacity with which he clung to the traditions of his forefathers, and his energetic resistance to the political encroachments of Southerners. And yet he was not a man behind the times, and there was nothing little or narrow-minded about him; but while always keeping open his ancestral county to progress, he was a true Scotchman at heart, and it was for the honor of Scotland that he competed in the yacht races of the Royal Thames Yacht Club.
LORD GLENARVAN’S wealth was immense, and he dedicated it entirely to doing good. His kindness was even greater than his generosity, as the former had no limits, while the latter naturally had some. As Lord of Luss and “laird” of Malcolm, he represented his county in the House of Lords; however, with his Jacobite beliefs, he wasn’t particularly concerned about the approval of the House of Hanover. He was regarded coldly by the State party in England due to his stubborn adherence to the traditions of his ancestors and his strong opposition to the political overreach from the South. Yet, he was not a man out of touch with the times, and there was nothing petty or narrow-minded about him. While he always welcomed progress in his ancestral county, he was a true Scotsman at heart, and it was for the honor of Scotland that he participated in the yacht races of the Royal Thames Yacht Club.
Edward Glenarvan was thirty-two years of age. He was tall in person, and had rather stern features; but there was an exceeding sweetness in his look, and a stamp of Highland poetry about his whole bearing. He was known to be brave to excess, and full of daring and chivalry—a Fer-gus of the nineteenth century; but his goodness excelled every other quality, and he was more charitable than St. Martin himself, for he would have given the whole of his cloak to any of the poor Highlanders.
Edward Glenarvan was thirty-two years old. He was tall and had somewhat stern features; however, there was a remarkable sweetness in his expression and a touch of Highland poetry in his entire demeanor. He was known to be excessively brave, filled with daring and chivalry—a Fergus of the nineteenth century; but his goodness surpassed all his other qualities, and he was more charitable than St. Martin himself, as he would have given the entire cloak off his back to any of the poor Highlanders.
He had scarcely been married three months, and his bride was Miss Helena Tuffnell, the daughter of William Tuffnell, the great traveler, one of the many victims of geographical science and of the passion for discovery. Miss Helena did not belong to a noble family, but she was Scotch, and that was better than all nobility in the eyes of Lord Glenarvan; and she was, moreover, a charming, high-souled, religious young woman.
He had barely been married for three months, and his wife was Miss Helena Tuffnell, the daughter of William Tuffnell, the famous explorer, one of the many people affected by the quest for geographical knowledge and the desire for discovery. Miss Helena didn't come from a noble family, but she was Scottish, which was more important than any title to Lord Glenarvan; plus, she was a lovely, principled, and spiritual young woman.
Lord Glenarvan did not forget that his wife was the daughter of a great traveler, and he thought it likely that she would inherit her father’s predilections. He had the DUNCAN built expressly that he might take his bride to the most beautiful lands in the world, and complete their honeymoon by sailing up the Mediterranean, and through the clustering islands of the Archipelago.
Lord Glenarvan remembered that his wife was the daughter of a well-known traveler, and he figured she might inherit her father's love for adventure. He had the DUNCAN constructed specifically so he could take his bride to the most stunning places in the world, finishing their honeymoon by sailing up the Mediterranean and through the beautiful islands of the Archipelago.
However, Lord Glenarvan had gone now to London. The lives of the shipwrecked men were at stake, and Lady Helena was too much concerned herself about them to grudge her husband’s temporary absence. A telegram next day gave hope of his speedy return, but in the evening a letter apprised her of the difficulties his proposition had met with, and the morning after brought another, in which he openly expressed his dissatisfaction with the Admiralty.
However, Lord Glenarvan had now gone to London. The lives of the shipwrecked men were at stake, and Lady Helena was too worried about them to mind her husband’s temporary absence. A telegram the next day gave hope for his quick return, but in the evening, a letter informed her of the challenges his proposal had encountered, and the following morning brought another letter in which he openly expressed his frustration with the Admiralty.
Lady Helena began to get anxious as the day wore on. In the evening, when she was sitting alone in her room, Mr. Halbert, the house steward, came in and asked if she would see a young girl and boy that wanted to speak to Lord Glenarvan.
Lady Helena started to feel anxious as the day went on. In the evening, while she was sitting alone in her room, Mr. Halbert, the house steward, came in and asked if she would meet with a young girl and boy who wanted to talk to Lord Glenarvan.
“Some of the country people?” asked Lady Helena.
“Some of the locals?” asked Lady Helena.
“No, madame,” replied the steward, “I do not know them at all. They came by rail to Balloch, and walked the rest of the way to Luss.”
“No, ma'am,” replied the steward, “I don’t know them at all. They took the train to Balloch and walked the rest of the way to Luss.”
“Tell them to come up, Halbert.”
“Tell them to come up, Halbert.”
In a few minutes a girl and boy were shown in. They were evidently brother and sister, for the resemblance was unmistakable. The girl was about sixteen years of age; her tired pretty face, and sorrowful eyes, and resigned but courageous look, as well as her neat though poor attire, made a favorable impression. The boy she held by the hand was about twelve, but his face expressed such determination, that he appeared quite his sister’s protector.
In a few minutes, a girl and a boy came in. They were clearly siblings, as their resemblance was obvious. The girl was around sixteen, and her tired but pretty face, sorrowful eyes, and resigned yet brave expression, along with her neat but modest clothes, made a good impression. The boy she was holding by the hand was about twelve, but his face showed such determination that he seemed like his sister's protector.
The girl seemed too shy to utter a word at first, but Lady Helena quickly relieved her embarrassment by saying, with an encouraging smile: “You wish to speak to me, I think?”
The girl appeared too shy to say anything at first, but Lady Helena quickly eased her embarrassment by saying, with a reassuring smile: “I think you want to talk to me, right?”
“No,” replied the boy, in a decided tone; “not to you, but to Lord Glenarvan.”
“No,” the boy replied firmly, “not to you, but to Lord Glenarvan.”
“Excuse him, ma’am,” said the girl, with a look at her brother.
“Excuse him, ma’am,” the girl said, glancing at her brother.
“Lord Glenarvan is not at the castle just now,” returned Lady Helena; “but I am his wife, and if I can do anything for you—”
“Lord Glenarvan isn’t at the castle right now,” Lady Helena replied; “but I’m his wife, and if there’s anything I can do for you—”
“You are Lady Glenarvan?” interrupted the girl.
"You’re Lady Glenarvan?" the girl interrupted.
“I am.”
"I'm here."
“The wife of Lord Glenarvan, of Malcolm Castle, that put an announcement in the TIMES about the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA?”
"The wife of Lord Glenarvan, from Malcolm Castle, who put an ad in the TIMES about the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA?"
“Yes, yes,” said Lady Helena, eagerly; “and you?”
“Yes, yes,” said Lady Helena, eagerly. “And you?”
“I am Miss Grant, ma’am, and this is my brother.”
“I’m Miss Grant, ma’am, and this is my brother.”
“Miss Grant, Miss Grant!” exclaimed Lady Helena, drawing the young girl toward her, and taking both her hands and kissing the boy’s rosy cheeks.
“Miss Grant, Miss Grant!” exclaimed Lady Helena, pulling the young girl toward her, taking both her hands and kissing the boy’s rosy cheeks.
“What is it you know, ma’am, about the shipwreck? Tell me, is my father living? Shall we ever see him again? Oh, tell me,” said the girl, earnestly.
“What do you know, ma’am, about the shipwreck? Please tell me, is my father alive? Will we ever see him again? Oh, please tell me,” said the girl, urgently.
“My dear child,” replied Lady Helena. “Heaven forbid that I should answer you lightly such a question; I would not delude you with vain hopes.”
“My dear child,” replied Lady Helena. “God forbid that I should take your question lightly; I wouldn’t mislead you with false hopes.”
“Oh, tell me all, tell me all, ma’am. I’m proof against sorrow. I can bear to hear anything.”
“Oh, please tell me everything, ma’am. I can handle sorrow. I can take anything you have to say.”
“My poor child, there is but a faint hope; but with the help of almighty Heaven it is just possible you may one day see your father once more.”
“My poor child, there’s only a slim chance; but with the help of all-powerful Heaven, it might be possible for you to see your father again someday.”
The girl burst into tears, and Robert seized Lady Glenarvan’s hand and covered it with kisses.
The girl broke down in tears, and Robert grabbed Lady Glenarvan’s hand and showered it with kisses.
As soon as they grew calmer they asked a complete string of questions, and Lady Helena recounted the whole story of the document, telling them that their father had been wrecked on the coast of Patagonia, and that he and two sailors, the sole survivors, appeared to have reached the shore, and had written an appeal for help in three languages and committed it to the care of the waves.
As soon as they calmed down, they fired off a ton of questions, and Lady Helena told them the whole story about the document. She explained that their father had been shipwrecked on the coast of Patagonia and that he and two sailors, the only survivors, seemed to have made it to land. They had written a plea for help in three languages and entrusted it to the ocean.
During the recital, Robert Grant was devouring the speaker with his eyes, and hanging on her lips. His childish imagination evidently retraced all the scenes of his father’s shipwreck. He saw him on the deck of the BRITANNIA, and then struggling with the billows, then clinging to the rocks, and lying at length exhausted on the beach.
During the recital, Robert Grant was intently watching the speaker and hanging on her every word. His vivid imagination clearly replayed all the moments from his father’s shipwreck. He pictured him on the deck of the BRITANNIA, then battling the waves, then holding onto the rocks, and finally collapsed and exhausted on the beach.
More than once he cried out, “Oh, papa! my poor papa!” and pressed close to his sister.
More than once he shouted, “Oh, dad! my poor dad!” and huddled close to his sister.
Miss Grant sat silent and motionless, with clasped hands, and all she said when the narration ended, was: “Oh, ma’am, the paper, please!”
Miss Grant sat quietly and still, with her hands clasped, and all she said when the story finished was: “Oh, ma’am, the paper, please!”
“I have not it now, my dear child,” replied Lady Helena.
“I don’t have it right now, my dear child,” replied Lady Helena.
“You haven’t it?”
“You don’t have it?”
“No. Lord Glenarvan was obliged to take it to London, for the sake of your father; but I have told you all it contained, word for word, and how we managed to make out the complete sense from the fragments of words left—all except the longitude, unfortunately.”
“No. Lord Glenarvan had to take it to London for your father's sake; but I've told you everything it said, exactly as it was, and how we pieced together the full meaning from the fragments of words left—everything except for the longitude, unfortunately.”
“We can do without that,” said the boy.
"We can manage without that," said the boy.
“Yes, Mr. Robert,” rejoined Lady Helena, smiling at the child’s decided tone. “And so you see, Miss Grant, you know the smallest details now just as well as I do.”
“Yes, Mr. Robert,” responded Lady Helena, smiling at the child’s firm tone. “And so you see, Miss Grant, you know even the smallest details just as well as I do.”
“Yes, ma’am, but I should like to have seen my father’s writing.”
“Yes, ma’am, but I would have liked to see my father’s handwriting.”
“Well, to-morrow, perhaps, to-morrow, Lord Glenarvan will be back. My husband determined to lay the document before the Lords of the Admiralty, to induce them to send out a ship immediately in search of Captain Grant.”
“Well, maybe tomorrow, tomorrow, Lord Glenarvan will be back. My husband decided to present the document to the Lords of the Admiralty to convince them to send out a ship right away to look for Captain Grant.”
“Is it possible, ma’am,” exclaimed the girl, “that you have done that for us?”
“Is it possible, ma’am,” the girl exclaimed, “that you did that for us?”
“Yes, my dear Miss Grant, and I am expecting Lord Glenarvan back every minute now.”
“Yes, my dear Miss Grant, and I’m expecting Lord Glenarvan back any minute now.”
“Oh, ma’am! Heaven bless you and Lord Glenarvan,” said the young girl, fervently, overcome with grateful emotion.
“Oh, ma’am! Thank you so much, and thank you to Lord Glenarvan,” said the young girl, fervently, overwhelmed with gratitude.
“My dear girl, we deserve no thanks; anyone in our place would have done the same. I only trust the hopes we are leading you to entertain may be realized, but till my husband returns, you will remain at the Castle.”
“My dear girl, we don’t deserve any thanks; anyone in our position would have done the same. I just hope that the hopes we’re helping you to hold onto may come true, but until my husband gets back, you’ll stay at the Castle.”
“Oh, no, ma’am. I could not abuse the sympathy you show to strangers.”
“Oh, no, ma’am. I can’t take advantage of the kindness you show to strangers.”
“Strangers, dear child!” interrupted Lady Helena; “you and your brother are not strangers in this house, and I should like Lord Glenarvan to be able on his arrival to tell the children of Captain Grant himself, what is going to be done to rescue their father.”
“Strangers, dear child!” interrupted Lady Helena; “you and your brother aren’t strangers in this house, and I’d like Lord Glenarvan to be able, when he arrives, to tell Captain Grant’s children what will be done to rescue their father.”
It was impossible to refuse an invitation given with such heart, and Miss Grant and her brother consented to stay till Lord Glenarvan returned.
It was impossible to decline an invitation that was given with such sincerity, and Miss Grant and her brother agreed to stay until Lord Glenarvan returned.
CHAPTER IV LADY GLENARVAN’S PROPOSAL
LADY HELENA thought it best to say nothing to the children about the fears Lord Glenarvan had expressed in his letters respecting the decisions of the Lords of the Admiralty with regard to the document. Nor did she mention the probable captivity of Captain Grant among the Indians of South America. Why sadden the poor children, and damp their newly cherished hopes? It would not in the least alter the actual state of the case; so not a word was said, and after answering all Miss Grant’s questions, Lady Helena began to interrogate in her turn, asking her about her past life and her present circumstances.
LADY HELENA thought it would be best not to mention anything to the children about Lord Glenarvan's concerns in his letters regarding the decisions from the Lords of the Admiralty about the document. She also didn’t bring up the possibility that Captain Grant might be held captive by the Indians in South America. Why bring sadness to the poor children and crush their newly formed hopes? It wouldn’t change the situation at all, so she kept quiet. After answering all of Miss Grant’s questions, Lady Helena began to ask her about her past and her current situation.
It was a touching, simple story she heard in reply, and one which increased her sympathy for the young girl.
It was a heartfelt, straightforward story she heard in response, and one that deepened her compassion for the young girl.
Mary and Robert were the captain’s only children. Harry Grant lost his wife when Robert was born, and during his long voyages he left his little ones in charge of his cousin, a good old lady. Captain Grant was a fearless sailor. He not only thoroughly understood navigation, but commerce also—a two-fold qualification eminently useful to skippers in the merchant service. He lived in Dundee, in Perthshire, Scotland. His father, a minister of St. Katrine’s Church, had given him a thorough education, as he believed that could never hurt anybody.
Mary and Robert were the captain’s only children. Harry Grant lost his wife when Robert was born, and during his long voyages, he left his kids in the care of his cousin, a kind old lady. Captain Grant was a brave sailor. He not only had a deep understanding of navigation but also of trade—a double skill that was incredibly useful for captains in the merchant service. He lived in Dundee, in Perthshire, Scotland. His father, a minister at St. Katrine’s Church, had provided him with a solid education, believing that education could never be a disadvantage to anyone.
Harry’s voyages were prosperous from the first, and a few years after Robert was born, he found himself possessed of a considerable fortune.
Harry's journeys were successful right from the start, and a few years after Robert was born, he realized he had a substantial fortune.
It was then that he projected the grand scheme which made him popular in Scotland. Like Glenarvan, and a few noble families in the Lowlands, he had no heart for the union with England. In his eyes the interests of his country were not identified with those of the Anglo-Saxons, and to give scope for personal development, he resolved to found an immense Scotch colony on one of the ocean continents. Possibly he might have thought that some day they would achieve their independence, as the United States did—an example doubtless to be followed eventually by Australia and India. But whatever might be his secret motives, such was his dream of colonization. But, as is easily understood, the Government opposed his plans, and put difficulties enough in his way to have killed an ordinary man. But Harry would not be beaten. He appealed to the patriotism of his countrymen, placed his fortune at the service of the cause, built a ship, and manned it with a picked crew, and leaving his children to the care of his old cousin set off to explore the great islands of the Pacific. This was in 1861, and for twelve months, or up to May, 1862, letters were regularly received from him, but no tidings whatever had come since his departure from Callao, in June, and the name of the BRITANNIA never appeared in the Shipping List.
It was then that he laid out the grand plan that made him popular in Scotland. Like Glenarvan and a few noble families in the Lowlands, he had no desire for a union with England. He believed that the interests of his country were not aligned with those of the Anglo-Saxons, and to allow for personal growth, he decided to establish a large Scottish colony on one of the continents. He might have thought that someday they would gain their independence, just like the United States did—an example that Australia and India would likely follow in the future. But whatever his hidden motivations were, that was his vision for colonization. However, as one might expect, the Government opposed his plans and put enough obstacles in his way that it would have crushed an ordinary person. But Harry refused to be discouraged. He appealed to the patriotism of his fellow countrymen, put his wealth at the service of the cause, built a ship, and filled it with a select crew. Leaving his children in the care of his elderly cousin, he set off to explore the vast islands of the Pacific. This was in 1861, and for twelve months, or until May 1862, letters were consistently received from him, but nothing had come through since his departure from Callao in June, and the name of the BRITANNIA was absent from the Shipping List.
Just at this juncture the old cousin died, and Harry Grant’s two children were left alone in the world.
Just at this point, the old cousin died, and Harry Grant’s two kids were left all alone in the world.
Mary Grant was then only fourteen, but she resolved to face her situation bravely, and to devote herself entirely to her little brother, who was still a mere child. By dint of close economy, combined with tact and prudence, she managed to support and educate him, working day and night, denying herself everything, that she might give him all he needed, watching over him and caring for him like a mother.
Mary Grant was just fourteen, but she decided to face her situation with courage and fully dedicate herself to her little brother, who was still just a child. Through careful budgeting, along with sensitivity and wisdom, she managed to support and educate him, working day and night, giving up everything so she could provide for him, and looking after him like a mother.
The two children were living in this touching manner in Dundee, struggling patiently and courageously with their poverty. Mary thought only of her brother, and indulged in dreams of a prosperous future for him. She had long given up all hope of the BRITANNIA, and was fully persuaded that her father was dead. What, then, was her emotion when she accidentally saw the notice in the TIMES!
The two children were living in this emotional way in Dundee, patiently and bravely dealing with their poverty. Mary only thought about her brother and fantasized about a successful future for him. She had long since lost all hope for the BRITANNIA and was convinced that her father was dead. So, what was her reaction when she unexpectedly saw the notice in the TIMES!
She never hesitated for an instant as to the course she should adopt, but determined to go to Dumbartonshire immediately, to learn the best and worst. Even if she were to be told that her father’s lifeless body had been found on a distant shore, or in the bottom of some abandoned ship, it would be a relief from incessant doubt and torturing suspense.
She didn't hesitate for a second about what to do; she was set on going to Dumbartonshire right away to find out the truth, whether it was good or bad. Even if she found out that her father’s lifeless body had been discovered on a remote beach or trapped inside some old ship, it would still be a relief from the constant uncertainty and unbearable worry.
She told her brother about the advertisement, and the two children started off together that same day for Perth, where they took the train, and arrived in the evening at Malcolm Castle.
She told her brother about the ad, and the two kids set off together that same day for Perth, where they took the train and arrived in the evening at Malcolm Castle.
Such was Mary Grant’s sorrowful story, and she recounted it in so simple and unaffected a manner, that it was evident she never thought her conduct had been that of a heroine through those long trying years. But Lady Helena thought it for her, and more than once she put her arms round both the children, and could not restrain her tears.
Such was Mary Grant’s sad story, and she shared it in such a straightforward and genuine way that it was clear she never believed her actions had been heroic during those long, challenging years. But Lady Helena saw it that way, and more than once she hugged both children and couldn’t hold back her tears.
As for Robert, he seemed to have heard these particulars for the first time. All the while his sister was speaking, he gazed at her with wide-open eyes, only knowing now how much she had done and suffered for him; and, as she ended, he flung himself on her neck, and exclaimed, “Oh, mamma! My dear little mamma!”
As for Robert, he seemed to be hearing all of this for the first time. While his sister talked, he looked at her with wide eyes, realizing just how much she had done and suffered for him; and when she finished, he threw his arms around her neck and exclaimed, “Oh, Mom! My dear little Mom!”
It was quite dark by this time, and Lady Helena made the children go to bed, for she knew they must be tired after their journey. They were soon both sound asleep, dreaming of happy days.
It was pretty dark by this time, and Lady Helena had the kids go to bed since she knew they must be tired after their trip. They were soon both fast asleep, dreaming of happy times.
After they had retired. Lady Helena sent for Major McNabbs, and told him the incidents of the evening.
After they had settled down, Lady Helena called for Major McNabbs and told him about the events of the evening.
“That Mary Grant must be a brave girl,” said the Major.
"Mary Grant has to be a brave girl," said the Major.
“I only hope my husband will succeed, for the poor children’s sake,” said his cousin. “It would be terrible for them if he did not.”
“I just hope my husband succeeds, for the sake of the poor kids,” said his cousin. “It would be awful for them if he doesn’t.”
“He will be sure to succeed, or the Lords of the Admiralty must have hearts harder than Portland stone.”
“He's bound to succeed, or the Lords of the Admiralty must have hearts tougher than Portland stone.”
But, notwithstanding McNabbs’s assurance, Lady Helena passed the night in great anxiety, and could not close her eyes.
But despite McNabbs’s reassurance, Lady Helena spent the night feeling very anxious and couldn’t sleep.
Mary Grant and her brother were up very early next morning, and were walking about in the courtyard when they heard the sound of a carriage approaching. It was Lord Glenarvan; and, almost immediately, Lady Helena and the Major came out to meet him.
Mary Grant and her brother were up very early the next morning, walking around the courtyard when they heard the sound of a carriage coming. It was Lord Glenarvan; and, almost right away, Lady Helena and the Major came out to greet him.
Lady Helena flew toward her husband the moment he alighted; but he embraced her silently, and looked gloomy and disappointed—indeed, even furious.
Lady Helena rushed toward her husband as soon as he got off; but he hugged her without saying a word, looking unhappy and let down—actually, he seemed really angry.
“Well, Edward?” she said; “tell me.”
“Well, Edward?” she said. “Tell me.”
“Well, Helena, dear; those people have no heart!”
“Well, Helena, dear; those people are so heartless!”
“They have refused?”
“Did they refuse?”
“Yes. They have refused me a ship! They talked of the millions that had been wasted in search for Franklin, and declared the document was obscure and unintelligible. And, then, they said it was two years now since they were cast away, and there was little chance of finding them. Besides, they would have it that the Indians, who made them prisoners, would have dragged them into the interior, and it was impossible, they said, to hunt all through Patagonia for three men—three Scotchmen; that the search would be vain and perilous, and cost more lives than it saved. In short, they assigned all the reasons that people invent who have made up their minds to refuse. The truth is, they remembered Captain Grant’s projects, and that is the secret of the whole affair. So the poor fellow is lost for ever.”
“Yes. They have denied me a ship! They talked about the millions that had been wasted looking for Franklin and said the document was unclear and impossible to understand. Then, they mentioned that it had been two years since they were stranded, and there was little chance of finding them. Besides, they insisted that the Indians who captured them would have taken them deep into the interior, and it was impossible, they claimed, to search all through Patagonia for three men—three Scotsmen; that the search would be pointless and dangerous, and cost more lives than it would save. In short, they gave all the excuses that people come up with when they've made up their minds to say no. The truth is, they remembered Captain Grant's plans, and that's the real reason behind everything. So the poor guy is lost forever.”
“My father! my poor father!” cried Mary Grant, throwing herself on her knees before Lord Glenarvan, who exclaimed in amazement:
“My dad! my poor dad!” cried Mary Grant, dropping to her knees in front of Lord Glenarvan, who exclaimed in surprise:
“Your father? What? Is this Miss—”
“Your father? What? Is this Miss—”
“Yes, Edward,” said Lady Helena; “this is Miss Mary Grant and her brother, the two children condemned to orphanage by the cruel Admiralty!”
“Yes, Edward,” said Lady Helena; “this is Miss Mary Grant and her brother, the two kids sentenced to an orphanage by the heartless Admiralty!”
“Oh! Miss Grant,” said Lord Glenarvan, raising the young girl, “if I had known of your presence—”
“Oh! Miss Grant,” said Lord Glenarvan, lifting the young girl, “if I had known you were here—”
He said no more, and there was a painful silence in the courtyard, broken only by sobs. No one spoke, but the very attitude of both servants and masters spoke their indignation at the conduct of the English Government.
He said nothing more, and a heavy silence fell over the courtyard, interrupted only by sobbing. No one uttered a word, but the silent stances of both the servants and the masters expressed their outrage at the actions of the English Government.
At last the Major said, addressing Lord Glenarvan: “Then you have no hope whatever?”
At last, the Major said to Lord Glenarvan, “So you don't have any hope at all?”
“None,” was the reply.
“None,” was the response.
“Very well, then,” exclaimed little Robert, “I’ll go and speak to those people myself, and we’ll see if they—” He did not complete his sentence, for his sister stopped him; but his clenched fists showed his intentions were the reverse of pacific.
“Alright, then,” shouted little Robert, “I’ll go talk to those people myself, and we’ll see if they—” He didn't finish his sentence because his sister interrupted him, but his clenched fists made it clear that he wasn't in a peaceful mood.
“No, Robert,” said Mary Grant, “we will thank this noble lord and lady for what they have done for us, and never cease to think of them with gratitude; and then we’ll both go together.”
“No, Robert,” said Mary Grant, “we’ll thank this noble lord and lady for what they’ve done for us, and we’ll never stop being grateful to them; and then we’ll both go together.”
“Mary!” said Lady Helena, in a tone of surprise.
“Mary!” Lady Helena said, sounding surprised.
“Go where?” asked Lord Glenarvan.
"Where to?" asked Lord Glenarvan.
“I am going to throw myself at the Queen’s feet, and we shall see if she will turn a deaf ear to the prayers of two children, who implore their father’s life.”
“I’m going to throw myself at the Queen’s feet, and we’ll see if she ignores the pleas of two children who are begging for their father’s life.”
Lord Glenarvan shook his head; not that he doubted the kind heart of her Majesty, but he knew Mary would never gain access to her. Suppliants but too rarely reach the steps of a throne; it seems as if royal palaces had the same inscription on their doors that the English have on their ships: Passengers are requested not to speak to the man at the wheel.
Lord Glenarvan shook his head; not because he doubted the kind heart of her Majesty, but he knew Mary would never be able to see her. People seeking help rarely reach the foot of a throne; it feels like royal palaces have the same sign on their doors that the English put on their ships: Passengers are requested not to speak to the man at the wheel.
Lady Glenarvan understood what was passing in her husband’s mind, and she felt the young girl’s attempt would be useless, and only plunge the poor children in deeper despair. Suddenly, a grand, generous purpose fired her soul, and she called out: “Mary Grant! wait, my child, and listen to what I’m going to say.”
Lady Glenarvan understood what was going on in her husband’s mind, and she knew the young girl’s efforts would be pointless and would only push the poor kids into deeper despair. Suddenly, a bold, generous idea ignited her spirit, and she called out: “Mary Grant! Wait, my child, and listen to what I’m about to say.”
Mary had just taken her brother by the hand, and turned to go away; but she stepped back at Lady Helena’s bidding.
Mary had just taken her brother by the hand and was about to leave, but she stepped back at Lady Helena’s request.
The young wife went up to her husband, and said, with tears in her eyes, though her voice was firm, and her face beamed with animation: “Edward, when Captain Grant wrote that letter and threw it into the sea, he committed it to the care of God. God has sent it to us—to us! Undoubtedly God intends us to undertake the rescue of these poor men.”
The young wife approached her husband, tears in her eyes, though her voice was strong and her face lit up with enthusiasm: “Edward, when Captain Grant wrote that letter and tossed it into the sea, he entrusted it to God. God has brought it to us—to us! Clearly, God wants us to help rescue these poor men.”
“What do you mean, Helena?”
“What do you mean, Helena?”
“I mean this, that we ought to think ourselves fortunate if we can begin our married life with a good action. Well, you know, Edward, that to please me you planned a pleasure trip; but what could give us such genuine pleasure, or be so useful, as to save those unfortunate fellows, cast off by their country?”
“I mean this: we should consider ourselves lucky if we can start our married life with a good deed. Well, you know, Edward, that to make me happy, you planned a pleasure trip; but what could bring us more genuine happiness, or be more helpful, than saving those unfortunate guys, abandoned by their country?”
“Helena!” exclaimed Lord Glenarvan.
“Helena!” shouted Lord Glenarvan.
“Yes, Edward, you understand me. The DUNCAN is a good strong ship, she can venture in the Southern Seas, or go round the world if necessary. Let us go, Edward; let us start off and search for Captain Grant!”
“Yes, Edward, you get me. The DUNCAN is a solid ship; she can take on the Southern Seas or sail around the world if we need to. Let’s go, Edward; let’s set off and find Captain Grant!”
Lord Glenarvan made no reply to this bold proposition, but smiled, and, holding out his arms, drew his wife into a close, fond embrace. Mary and Robert seized her hands, and covered them with kisses; and the servants who thronged the courtyard, and had been witnesses of this touching scene, shouted with one voice, “Hurrah for the Lady of Luss. Three cheers for Lord and Lady Glenarvan!”
Lord Glenarvan didn’t respond to this daring suggestion, but smiled and, opening his arms, pulled his wife into a tight, loving hug. Mary and Robert took her hands and showered them with kisses; the servants crowding the courtyard, who had seen this heartwarming moment, shouted together, “Hooray for the Lady of Luss! Three cheers for Lord and Lady Glenarvan!”
CHAPTER V THE DEPARTURE OF THE “DUNCAN”
WE have said already that Lady Helena was a brave, generous woman, and what she had just done proved it in-disputably. Her husband had good reason to be proud of such a wife, one who could understand and enter into all his views. The idea of going to Captain Grant’s rescue had occurred to him in London when his request was refused, and he would have anticipated Lady Helena, only he could not bear the thought of parting from her. But now that she herself proposed to go, all hesitation was at an end. The servants of the Castle had hailed the project with loud acclamations—for it was to save their brothers—Scotchmen, like themselves—and Lord Glenarvan cordially joined his cheers with theirs, for the Lady of Luss.
We've already mentioned that Lady Helena was a brave and generous woman, and what she just did proved it without a doubt. Her husband had every reason to be proud of such a wife, one who could understand and share all his views. The idea of going to Captain Grant's rescue came to him in London when his request was denied, and he would have beaten Lady Helena to it, but he couldn't bear the thought of being apart from her. However, now that she was the one suggesting they go, all doubts were gone. The staff at the Castle greeted the plan with loud cheers—after all, it was to save their fellow countrymen—Scotchmen, like them—and Lord Glenarvan enthusiastically joined in their cheers for the Lady of Luss.
The departure once resolved upon, there was not an hour to be lost. A telegram was dispatched to John Mangles the very same day, conveying Lord Glenarvan’s orders to take the DUNCAN immediately to Glasgow, and to make preparations for a voyage to the Southern Seas, and possibly round the world, for Lady Helena was right in her opinion that the yacht might safely attempt the circumnavigation of the globe, if necessary.
Once the decision to leave was made, there was no time to waste. A telegram was sent to John Mangles the same day, delivering Lord Glenarvan’s orders to take the DUNCAN straight to Glasgow and to get ready for a journey to the Southern Seas, and possibly around the world, since Lady Helena was correct in her belief that the yacht could safely attempt to sail around the globe if needed.
The DUNCAN was a steam yacht of the finest description. She was 210 tons burden—much larger than any of the first vessels that touched the shores of the New World, for the largest of the four ships that sailed with Columbus was only 70 tons. She had two masts and all the sails and rigging of an ordinary clipper, which would enable her to take advantage of every favorable wind, though her chief reliance was on her mechanical power. The engine, which was constructed on a new system, was a high-pressure one, of 160-horse power, and put in motion a double screw. This gave the yacht such swiftness that during her trial trip in the Firth of Clyde, she made seventeen miles an hour, a higher speed than any vessel had yet attained. No alterations were consequently needed in the DUNCAN herself; John Mangles had only to attend to her interior arrangements.
The DUNCAN was a top-of-the-line steam yacht. She weighed 210 tons—much bigger than any of the first ships that reached the shores of the New World, considering the largest of the four ships that sailed with Columbus was only 70 tons. She had two masts and all the sails and rigging of a typical clipper, which allowed her to take advantage of any favorable winds, although she mainly depended on her mechanical power. The engine, built on a new system, was a high-pressure one, generating 160 horsepower and driving a double screw. This made the yacht incredibly fast; during her trial run in the Firth of Clyde, she reached 17 miles per hour, a speed no other vessel had achieved yet. As a result, no changes were needed for the DUNCAN itself; John Mangles just had to focus on her interior arrangements.
His first care was to enlarge the bunkers to carry as much coal as possible, for it is difficult to get fresh supplies en route. He had to do the same with the store-rooms, and managed so well that he succeeded in laying in provisions enough for two years. There was abundance of money at his command, and enough remained to buy a cannon, on a pivot carriage, which he mounted on the forecastle. There was no knowing what might happen, and it is always well to be able to send a good round bullet flying four miles off.
His first priority was to expand the bunkers to hold as much coal as possible, since it's hard to get fresh supplies along the way. He had to do the same with the storage rooms and did such a great job that he ended up stockpiling enough provisions for two years. He had plenty of money available, and there was enough left to purchase a cannon on a pivot carriage, which he installed on the forecastle. You never know what might happen, and it's always a good idea to be able to fire a solid round bullet four miles away.
John Mangles understood his business. Though he was only the captain of a pleasure yacht, he was one of the best skippers in Glasgow. He was thirty years of age, and his countenance expressed both courage and goodness, if the features were somewhat coarse. He had been brought up at the castle by the Glenarvan family, and had turned out a capital sailor, having already given proof, in some of his long voyages, of his skill and energy and sang-froid. When Lord Glenarvan offered him the command of the DUNCAN, he accepted it with right good will, for he loved the master of Malcolm Castle, like a brother, and had hitherto vainly sought some opportunity of showing his devotion.
John Mangles knew his stuff. Even though he was just the captain of a pleasure yacht, he was one of the best skippers in Glasgow. He was thirty years old, and his face showed both bravery and kindness, though his features were a bit rough. He had grown up at the castle with the Glenarvan family and had become a great sailor, already proving his skill and energy and composure on some of his long journeys. When Lord Glenarvan offered him the chance to command the DUNCAN, he gladly accepted, as he loved the master of Malcolm Castle like a brother and had been looking for a way to show his loyalty.
Tom Austin, the mate, was an old sailor, worthy of all confidence. The crew, consisting of twenty-five men, including the captain and chief officer, were all from Dumbartonshire, experienced sailors, and all belonging to the Glenarvan estate; in fact, it was a regular clan, and they did not forget to carry with them the traditional bagpipes. Lord Glenarvan had in them a band of trusty fellows, skilled in their calling, devoted to himself, full of courage, and as practiced in handling fire-arms as in the maneuvering of a ship; a valiant little troop, ready to follow him any where, even in the most dangerous expeditions. When the crew heard whither they were bound, they could not restrain their enthusiasm, and the rocks of Dumbarton rang again with their joyous outbursts of cheers.
Tom Austin, the mate, was an experienced sailor you could trust. The crew, made up of twenty-five men, including the captain and chief officer, were all from Dumbartonshire, seasoned sailors, and part of the Glenarvan estate; it was practically a close-knit group, and they made sure to bring along their traditional bagpipes. Lord Glenarvan had a loyal team who were skilled at their jobs, dedicated to him, brave, and just as adept at using firearms as they were at sailing; a courageous little crew, ready to follow him anywhere, even on the riskiest adventures. When the crew learned their destination, they couldn't contain their excitement, and the cliffs of Dumbarton echoed with their joyful cheers.
But while John Mangles made the stowage and provisioning of the yacht his chief business, he did not forget to fit up the rooms of Lord and Lady Glenarvan for a long voyage. He had also to get cabins ready for the children of Captain Grant, as Lady Helena could not refuse Mary’s request to accompany her.
But while John Mangles focused on stocking and preparing the yacht, he didn’t overlook setting up the rooms for Lord and Lady Glenarvan for an extended trip. He also needed to prepare cabins for Captain Grant’s children since Lady Helena couldn’t turn down Mary’s request to join her.
As for young Robert, he would have smuggled himself in somewhere in the hold of the DUNCAN rather than be left behind. He would willingly have gone as cabin-boy, like Nelson. It was impossible to resist a little fellow like that, and, indeed, no one tried. He would not even go as a passenger, but must serve in some capacity, as cabin-boy, apprentice or sailor, he did not care which, so he was put in charge of John Mangles, to be properly trained for his vocation.
As for young Robert, he would have hidden himself somewhere in the hold of the DUNCAN rather than be left behind. He would have gladly taken a job as a cabin-boy, just like Nelson. It was impossible to say no to a little guy like that, and, in fact, no one even tried. He wouldn't settle for just being a passenger; he had to serve in some way, whether as a cabin-boy, apprentice, or sailor—he didn't care which. So, he was put in charge of John Mangles to be properly trained for his role.
“And I hope he won’t spare me the ‘cat-o-nine-tails’ if I don’t do properly,” said Robert.
“And I hope he won’t hold back the ‘cat-o-nine-tails’ if I don’t do things right,” said Robert.
“Rest easy on that score, my boy,” said Lord Glenarvan, gravely; he did not add, that this mode of punishment was forbidden on board the DUNCAN, and moreover, was quite unnecessary.
“Don’t worry about that, my boy,” said Lord Glenarvan, seriously; he didn’t mention that this way of punishment was not allowed on the DUNCAN, and also, it was completely unnecessary.
To complete the roll of passengers, we must name Major McNabbs. The Major was about fifty years of age, with a calm face and regular features—a man who did whatever he was told, of an excellent, indeed, a perfect temper; modest, silent, peaceable, and amiable, agreeing with everybody on every subject, never discussing, never disputing, never getting angry. He wouldn’t move a step quicker, or slower, whether he walked upstairs to bed or mounted a breach. Nothing could excite him, nothing could disturb him, not even a cannon ball, and no doubt he will die without ever having known even a passing feeling of irritation.
To finalize the passenger list, we need to mention Major McNabbs. The Major was around fifty years old, with a calm face and even features—a man who followed orders without question, possessing an excellent, even perfect, temper; modest, quiet, peaceful, and friendly, he agreed with everyone on every topic, never arguing, never disputing, never getting upset. He wouldn’t move any faster or slower, whether he was walking upstairs to bed or climbing a wall. Nothing could stir him, nothing could rattle him, not even a cannonball, and he’ll likely go to his grave without ever experiencing even a moment of irritation.
This man was endowed in an eminent degree, not only with ordinary animal courage, that physical bravery of the battle-field, which is solely due to muscular energy, but he had what is far nobler—moral courage, firmness of soul. If he had any fault it was his being so intensely Scotch from top to toe, a Caledonian of the Caledonians, an obstinate stickler for all the ancient customs of his country. This was the reason he would never serve in England, and he gained his rank of Major in the 42nd regiment, the Highland Black Watch, composed entirely of Scotch noblemen.
This man was remarkably gifted, not just with the usual physical bravery seen on the battlefield, which comes from sheer muscle power, but he also possessed something far more admirable—moral courage and inner strength. If he had any flaw, it was his extreme Scottishness, a true Caledonian to his core, stubbornly holding onto all the traditional customs of his homeland. This was why he refused to serve in England; instead, he earned his rank of Major in the 42nd regiment, the Highland Black Watch, which was made up entirely of Scottish noblemen.
As a cousin of Glenarvan, he lived in Malcolm Castle, and as a major he went as a matter of course with the DUNCAN.
As a cousin of Glenarvan, he lived in Malcolm Castle, and as a major, he naturally accompanied the DUNCAN.
Such, then, was the PERSONNEL of this yacht, so unexpectedly called to make one of the most wonderful voyages of modern times. From the hour she reached the steamboat quay at Glasgow, she completely monopolized the public attention. A considerable crowd visited her every day, and the DUNCAN was the one topic of interest and conversation, to the great vexation of the different captains in the port, among others of Captain Burton, in command of the SCOTIA, a magnificent steamer lying close beside her, and bound for Calcutta. Considering her size, the SCOTIA might justly look upon the DUNCAN as a mere fly-boat, and yet this pleasure yacht of Lord Glenarvan was quite the center of attraction, and the excitement about her daily increased.
So, this was the crew of the yacht, unexpectedly called to embark on one of the most amazing journeys of modern times. From the moment she arrived at the steamboat dock in Glasgow, she captured everyone's attention. A large crowd came to see her every day, and the DUNCAN became the main topic of interest and conversation, much to the annoyance of the various captains in the port, including Captain Burton, who was in charge of the SCOTIA, a beautiful steamer docked right next to her and headed for Calcutta. Considering her size, the SCOTIA could rightly view the DUNCAN as just a small boat, yet this pleasure yacht belonging to Lord Glenarvan was the real center of attention, and the excitement around her grew every day.
The DUNCAN was to sail out with the tide at three o’clock on the morning of the 25th of August. But before starting, a touching ceremony was witnessed by the good people of Glasgow. At eight o’clock the night before, Lord Glenarvan and his friends, and the entire crew, from the stokers to the captain, all who were to take part in this self-sacrificing voyage, left the yacht and repaired to St. Mungo’s, the ancient cathedral of the city. This venerable edifice, so marvelously described by Walter Scott, remains intact amid the ruins made by the Reformation; and it was there, beneath its lofty arches, in the grand nave, in the presence of an immense crowd, and surrounded by tombs as thickly set as in a cemetery, that they all assembled to implore the blessing of Heaven on their expedition, and to put themselves under the protection of Providence. The Rev. Mr. Morton conducted the service, and when he had ended and pronounced the benediction, a young girl’s voice broke the solemn silence that followed. It was Mary Grant who poured out her heart to God in prayer for her benefactors, while grateful happy tears streamed down her cheeks, and almost choked her utterance. The vast assembly dispersed under the influence of deep emotion, and at ten o’clock the passengers and crew returned on board the vessel.
The DUNCAN was set to leave with the tide at three o’clock in the morning on August 25th. But before they left, a moving ceremony took place that was witnessed by the good people of Glasgow. At eight o’clock the night before, Lord Glenarvan, his friends, and the whole crew—from the stokers to the captain—who were taking part in this selfless voyage, left the yacht and went to St. Mungo’s, the ancient cathedral of the city. This historic building, beautifully described by Walter Scott, remains standing amid the ruins of the Reformation; and it was there, under its tall arches, in the grand nave, in front of a large crowd, and surrounded by tombs as closely packed as in a cemetery, that they all gathered to seek God’s blessing on their journey and to place themselves in the care of Providence. The Rev. Mr. Morton led the service, and when he finished and gave the benediction, a young girl’s voice broke the solemn silence that followed. It was Mary Grant, who prayed passionately for her benefactors, with grateful tears streaming down her cheeks, almost choking her words. The large gathering dispersed, filled with deep emotion, and at ten o’clock, the passengers and crew returned to the vessel.
CHAPTER VI AN UNEXPECTED PASSENGER
THE ladies passed the whole of the first day of the voyage in their berths, for there was a heavy swell in the sea, and toward evening the wind blew pretty fresh, and the DUNCAN tossed and pitched considerably.
The ladies spent the entire first day of the voyage in their cabins because the sea was really rough, and by evening the wind picked up a bit, causing the DUNCAN to sway and rock quite a bit.
But the morning after, the wind changed, and the captain ordered the men to put up the foresail, and brigantine and foretopsail, which greatly lessened the rolling of the vessel. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were able to come on deck at daybreak, where they found Lord Glenarvan, Major McNabbs and the captain.
But the next morning, the wind shifted, and the captain ordered the crew to raise the foresail, brigantine, and foretopsail, which significantly reduced the rocking of the ship. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were able to come on deck at dawn, where they found Lord Glenarvan, Major McNabbs, and the captain.
“And how do you stand the sea, Miss Mary?” said Lord Glenarvan.
“And how do you like the sea, Miss Mary?” said Lord Glenarvan.
“Pretty well, my Lord. I am not very much inconvenienced by it. Besides I shall get used to it.”
“Pretty well, my Lord. It doesn't bother me too much. Besides, I’ll get used to it.”
“And our young Robert!”
“And our young Rob!”
“Oh, as for Robert,” said the captain, “whenever he is not poking about down below in the engine-room, he is perched somewhere aloft among the rigging. A youngster like that laughs at sea-sickness. Why, look at him this very moment! Do you see him?”
“Oh, about Robert,” said the captain, “whenever he’s not messing around down in the engine room, he’s hanging out somewhere up in the rigging. A kid like him doesn’t even care about sea sickness. Just look at him right now! Do you see him?”
The captain pointed toward the foremast, and sure enough there was Robert, hanging on the yards of the topgallant mast, a hundred feet above in the air. Mary involuntarily gave a start, but the captain said:
The captain pointed to the foremast, and sure enough, there was Robert, hanging on the yards of the topgallant mast, a hundred feet up in the air. Mary instinctively jumped, but the captain said:
“Oh, don’t be afraid, Miss Mary; he is all right, take my word for it; I’ll have a capital sailor to present to Captain Grant before long, for we’ll find the worthy captain, depend upon it.”
“Oh, don’t worry, Miss Mary; he’s fine, trust me; I’ll have a great sailor to introduce to Captain Grant soon, because we’ll definitely find the good captain.”
“Heaven grant it, Mr. John,” replied the young girl.
"Heaven help us, Mr. John," replied the young girl.
“My dear child,” said Lord Glenarvan, “there is something so providential in the whole affair, that we have every reason to hope. We are not going, we are led; we are not searching, we are guided. And then see all the brave men that have enlisted in the service of the good cause. We shall not only succeed in our enterprise, but there will be little difficulty in it. I promised Lady Helena a pleasure trip, and I am much mistaken if I don’t keep my word.”
“My dear child,” said Lord Glenarvan, “there’s something so fortunate about the whole situation that we have every reason to be optimistic. We’re not going of our own accord; we’re being led. We’re not searching; we’re being guided. And just look at all the brave men who have joined the cause. Not only will we succeed in our mission, but it shouldn’t be too hard either. I promised Lady Helena a fun trip, and I’d be very surprised if I didn’t keep that promise.”
“Edward,” said his wife, “you are the best of men.”
“Edward,” his wife said, “you are the best man I know.”
“Not at all,” was the reply; “but I have the best of crews and the best of ships. You don’t admire the DUNCAN, I suppose, Miss Mary?”
“Not at all,” was the reply; “but I have the best crew and the best ship. You don’t admire the DUNCAN, I suppose, Miss Mary?”
“On the contrary, my lord, I do admire her, and I’m a connoisseur in ships,” returned the young girl.
“Actually, my lord, I do admire her, and I’m an expert in ships,” replied the young girl.
“Indeed!”
"Absolutely!"
“Yes. I have played all my life on my father’s ships. He should have made me a sailor, for I dare say, at a push, I could reef a sail or plait a gasket easily enough.”
“Yes. I’ve played on my dad’s ships my whole life. He should have made me a sailor, because I bet I could handle reefing a sail or braiding a gasket pretty easily if I had to.”
“Do you say so, miss?” exclaimed John Mangles.
“Is that what you think, miss?” exclaimed John Mangles.
“If you talk like that you and John will be great friends, for he can’t think any calling is equal to that of a seaman; he can’t fancy any other, even for a woman. Isn’t it true, John?”
“If you talk like that, you and John will be great friends, because he can’t think any job is greater than that of a seaman; he can’t imagine any other, even for a woman. Isn’t that right, John?”
“Quite so,” said the captain, “and yet, your Lordship, I must confess that Miss Grant is more in her place on the poop than reefing a topsail. But for all that, I am quite flattered by her remarks.”
“Absolutely,” said the captain, “and yet, my Lord, I have to admit that Miss Grant belongs on the deck more than handling a topsail. But still, I am genuinely flattered by her comments.”
“And especially when she admires the DUNCAN,” replied Glenarvan.
“And especially when she admires the DUNCAN,” Glenarvan replied.
“Well, really,” said Lady Glenarvan, “you are so proud of your yacht that you make me wish to look all over it; and I should like to go down and see how our brave men are lodged.”
"Well, honestly," said Lady Glenarvan, "you're so proud of your yacht that you make me want to check it out completely; and I'd like to go down and see how our brave men are settled in."
“Their quarters are first-rate,” replied John, “they are as comfortable as if they were at home.”
“Their quarters are top-notch,” replied John, “they're as comfortable as if they were at home.”
“And they really are at home, my dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan. “This yacht is a portion of our old Caledonia, a fragment of Dumbartonshire, making a voyage by special favor, so that in a manner we are still in our own country. The DUNCAN is Malcolm Castle, and the ocean is Loch Lomond.”
“And they really are at home, my dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan. “This yacht is a piece of our old Scotland, a bit of Dumbartonshire, making a journey through special favor, so in a way we’re still in our own country. The DUNCAN is Malcolm Castle, and the ocean is Loch Lomond.”
“Very well, dear Edward, do the honors of the Castle then.”
“Alright, dear Edward, you can take care of the Castle then.”
“At your service, madam; but let me tell Olbinett first.”
“At your service, ma'am; but let me inform Olbinett first.”
The steward of the yacht was an excellent maitre d’hotel, and might have been French for his airs of importance, but for all that he discharged his functions with zeal and intelligence.
The steward of the yacht was an excellent maitre d’hotel, and he might have been French for his sense of importance, but despite that, he carried out his duties with enthusiasm and skill.
“Olbinett,” said his master, as he appeared in answer to his summons, “we are going to have a turn before breakfast. I hope we shall find it ready when we come back.”
“Olbinett,” said his master, as he showed up in response to his call, “we're going to take a walk before breakfast. I hope it will be ready when we get back.”
He said this just as if it had been a walk to Tarbert or Loch Katrine they were going, and the steward bowed with perfect gravity in reply.
He said this just as if they were simply going for a walk to Tarbert or Loch Katrine, and the steward nodded seriously in response.
“Are you coming with us, Major?” asked Lady Helena.
“Are you coming with us, Major?” Lady Helena asked.
“If you command me,” replied McNabbs.
“If you order me,” replied McNabbs.
“Oh!” said Lord Glenarvan; “the Major is absorbed in his cigar; you mustn’t tear him from it. He is an inveterate smoker, Miss Mary, I can tell you. He is always smoking, even while he sleeps.”
“Oh!” said Lord Glenarvan, “the Major is lost in his cigar; you can’t pull him away from it. He’s a dedicated smoker, Miss Mary, I can tell you. He’s always smoking, even when he’s asleep.”
The Major gave an assenting nod, and Lord Glenarvan and his party went below.
The Major nodded in agreement, and Lord Glenarvan and his group went downstairs.
McNabbs remained alone, talking to himself, as was his habit, and was soon enveloped in still thicker clouds of smoke. He stood motionless, watching the track of the yacht. After some minutes of this silent contemplation he turned round, and suddenly found himself face to face with a new comer. Certainly, if any thing could have surprised him, this RENCONTRE would, for he had never seen the stranger in his life before.
McNabbs was left alone, talking to himself as usual, and soon found himself surrounded by even thicker clouds of smoke. He stood still, watching the path of the yacht. After a few minutes of this quiet reflection, he turned around and was suddenly face to face with a newcomer. If anything could have surprised him, this meeting would, because he had never seen the stranger before.
He was a tall, thin, withered-looking man, about forty years of age, and resembled a long nail with a big head. His head was large and massive, his forehead high, his chin very marked. His eyes were concealed by enormous round spectacles, and in his look was that peculiar indecision which is common to nyctalopes, or people who have a peculiar construction of the eye, which makes the sight imperfect in the day and better at night. It was evident from his physiognomy that he was a lively, intelligent man; he had not the crabbed expression of those grave individuals who never laugh on principle, and cover their emptiness with a mask of seriousness. He looked far from that. His careless, good-humored air, and easy, unceremonious manners, showed plainly that he knew how to take men and things on their bright side. But though he had not yet opened his mouth, he gave one the impression of being a great talker, and moreover, one of those absent folks who neither see though they are looking, nor hear though they are listening. He wore a traveling cap, and strong, low, yellow boots with leather gaiters. His pantaloons and jacket were of brown velvet, and their innumerable pockets were stuffed with note-books, memorandum-books, account-books, pocket-books, and a thousand other things equally cumbersome and useless, not to mention a telescope in addition, which he carried in a shoulder-belt.
He was a tall, thin man who looked worn out, around forty years old, and he resembled a long nail with a big head. His head was large and broad, his forehead high, and his chin very pronounced. His eyes were hidden behind huge round glasses, and there was a certain uncertainty in his gaze that’s typical of night vision people, or those with a unique eye structure that makes their vision poor during the day but better at night. His face showed that he was lively and intelligent; he didn't have the sour expression of those serious types who never laugh on principle and mask their emptiness with a serious demeanor. He seemed quite the opposite. His casual, cheerful demeanor and laid-back, informal style made it clear that he knew how to see the bright side of people and situations. Yet, even though he hadn't spoken yet, he gave off the impression of being a big talker, and also someone who is absent-minded, looking but not really seeing, listening but not truly hearing. He wore a travel cap and sturdy, low yellow boots with leather gaiters. His brown velvet pants and jacket were filled with countless pockets stuffed with notebooks, memo pads, account books, wallets, and a ton of other cumbersome and useless items, not to mention a telescope he carried on a shoulder strap.
The stranger’s excitement was a strong contrast to the Major’s placidity. He walked round McNabbs, looking at him and questioning him with his eyes without eliciting one remark from the imperturbable Scotchman, or awakening his curiosity in the least, to know where he came from, and where he was going, and how he had got on board the DUNCAN.
The stranger's excitement was in stark contrast to the Major's calmness. He walked around McNabbs, looking at him and silently questioning him with his eyes, but not getting a single response from the unflappable Scotsman, nor stirring his curiosity at all about where he came from, where he was going, or how he had boarded the DUNCAN.
Finding all his efforts baffled by the Major’s indifference, the mysterious passenger seized his telescope, drew it out to its fullest extent, about four feet, and began gazing at the horizon, standing motionless with his legs wide apart. His examination lasted some few minutes, and then he lowered the glass, set it up on deck, and leaned on it as if it had been a walking-stick. Of course, his weight shut up the instrument immediately by pushing the different parts one into the other, and so suddenly, that he fell full length on deck, and lay sprawling at the foot of the mainmast.
Finding all his efforts frustrated by the Major’s indifference, the mysterious passenger grabbed his telescope, extended it to its full length, about four feet, and started scanning the horizon, standing still with his legs apart. He looked through it for a few minutes, then lowered it, set it down on the deck, and leaned on it as if it were a walking stick. Naturally, his weight caused the instrument to collapse immediately by pushing its parts into one another so suddenly that he fell flat on the deck and landed sprawled at the base of the mainmast.
Any one else but the Major would have smiled, at least, at such a ludicrous sight; but McNabbs never moved a muscle of his face.
Anyone else but the Major would have at least smiled at such a ridiculous sight; but McNabbs never changed a muscle in his face.
This was too much for the stranger, and he called out, with an unmistakably foreign accent:
This was too much for the stranger, and he called out, with a clearly foreign accent:
“Steward!”
"Server!"
He waited a minute, but nobody appeared, and he called again, still louder, “Steward!”
He waited a minute, but no one showed up, so he called again, even louder, “Steward!”
Mr. Olbinett chanced to be passing that minute on his way from the galley, and what was his astonishment at hearing himself addressed like this by a lanky individual of whom he had no knowledge whatever.
Mr. Olbinett happened to be walking by at that moment on his way from the kitchen, and he was shocked to hear himself being spoken to like this by a tall person he didn't know at all.
“Where can he have come from? Who is he?” he thought to himself. “He can not possibly be one of Lord Glenarvan’s friends?”
“Where could he have come from? Who is he?” he thought to himself. “He can’t possibly be one of Lord Glenarvan’s friends?”
However, he went up on the poop, and approached the unknown personage, who accosted him with the inquiry, “Are you the steward of this vessel?”
However, he went up on the deck and approached the unfamiliar person, who asked him, “Are you the steward of this ship?”
“Yes, sir,” replied Olbinett; “but I have not the honor of—”
“Yes, sir,” replied Olbinett; “but I don’t have the honor of—”
“I am the passenger in cabin Number 6.”
“I’m the passenger in cabin Number 6.”
“Number 6!” repeated the steward.
“Number 6!” the steward repeated.
“Certainly; and your name, what is it?”
“Sure! What's your name?”
“Olbinett.”
“Olbinett.”
“Well, Olbinett, my friend, we must think of breakfast, and that pretty quickly. It is thirty-six hours since I have had anything to eat, or rather thirty-six hours that I have been asleep—pardonable enough in a man who came all the way, without stopping, from Paris to Glasgow. What is the breakfast hour?”
“Well, Olbinett, my friend, we need to think about breakfast, and fast. It’s been thirty-six hours since I’ve eaten, or more accurately, thirty-six hours since I’ve been asleep—understandable for someone who traveled non-stop all the way from Paris to Glasgow. What time is breakfast?”
“Nine o’clock,” replied Olbinett, mechanically.
"9 o'clock," replied Olbinett, mechanically.
The stranger tried to pull out his watch to see the time; but it was not till he had rummaged through the ninth pocket that he found it.
The stranger tried to take out his watch to check the time, but he didn't find it until he searched through the ninth pocket.
“Ah, well,” he said, “it is only eight o’clock at present. Fetch me a glass of sherry and a biscuit while I am waiting, for I am actually falling through sheer inanition.”
“Ah, well,” he said, “it’s only eight o’clock right now. Bring me a glass of sherry and a biscuit while I wait, because I’m actually about to faint from hunger.”
Olbinett heard him without understanding what he meant for the voluble stranger kept on talking incessantly, flying from one subject to another.
Olbinett listened to him without grasping his meaning because the chatty stranger continued talking non-stop, jumping from one topic to another.
“The captain? Isn’t the captain up yet? And the chief officer? What is he doing? Is he asleep still? It is fine weather, fortunately, and the wind is favorable, and the ship goes all alone.”
“Where’s the captain? Isn’t he up yet? And what about the chief officer? Is he still asleep? Luckily, the weather is nice, the wind is on our side, and the ship is sailing smoothly on its own.”
Just at that moment John Mangles appeared at the top of the stairs.
Just then, John Mangles showed up at the top of the stairs.
“Here is the captain!” said Olbinett.
“Here’s the captain!” said Olbinett.
“Ah! delighted, Captain Burton, delighted to make your acquaintance,” exclaimed the unknown.
“Ah! I'm thrilled, Captain Burton, really glad to meet you,” exclaimed the stranger.
John Mangles stood stupefied, as much at seeing the stranger on board as at hearing himself called “Captain Burton.”
John Mangles stood frozen, both shocked to see the stranger on board and surprised to hear himself being called “Captain Burton.”
But the new comer went on in the most affable manner.
But the newcomer continued in the friendliest way.
“Allow me to shake hands with you, sir; and if I did not do so yesterday evening, it was only because I did not wish to be troublesome when you were starting. But to-day, captain, it gives me great pleasure to begin my intercourse with you.”
“Let me shake your hand, sir; if I didn't do it last night, it was only because I didn't want to be a bother when you were leaving. But today, captain, I'm really happy to start my conversation with you.”
John Mangles opened his eyes as wide as possible, and stood staring at Olbinett and the stranger alternately.
John Mangles opened his eyes as wide as he could and stood staring back and forth between Olbinett and the stranger.
But without waiting for a reply, the rattling fellow continued:
But without waiting for a response, the noisy guy went on:
“Now the introduction is made, my dear captain, we are old friends. Let’s have a little talk, and tell me how you like the SCOTIA?”
“Now that we've been introduced, my dear captain, we're old friends. Let’s have a little chat, and tell me how you like the SCOTIA?”
“What do you mean by the SCOTIA?” put in John Mangles at last.
“What do you mean by the SCOTIA?” John Mangles finally asked.
“By the SCOTIA? Why, the ship we’re on, of course—a good ship that has been commended to me, not only for its physical qualities, but also for the moral qualities of its commander, the brave Captain Burton. You will be some relation of the famous African traveler of that name. A daring man he was, sir. I offer you my congratulations.”
“By the SCOTIA? Well, that’s the ship we’re on, of course—a great ship that’s been recommended to me not just for its physical features, but also for the character of its captain, the brave Captain Burton. I assume you’re related to the famous African explorer of that name. He was quite a daring man, sir. Congratulations to you.”
“Sir,” interrupted John. “I am not only no relation of Burton the great traveler, but I am not even Captain Burton.”
“Sir,” John interrupted. “I’m not related to Burton the great traveler at all, and I’m definitely not Captain Burton.”
“Ah, is that so? It is Mr. Burdness, the chief officer, that I am talking to at present.”
“Really? I’m currently talking to Mr. Burdness, the chief officer.”
“Mr. Burdness!” repeated John Mangles, beginning to suspect how the matter stood. Only he asked himself whether the man was mad, or some heedless rattle pate? He was beginning to explain the case in a categorical manner, when Lord Glenarvan and his party came up on the poop. The stranger caught sight of them directly, and exclaimed:
“Mr. Burdness!” exclaimed John Mangles, starting to suspect what was going on. He wondered if the man was crazy or just some careless fool. He was about to explain the situation clearly when Lord Glenarvan and his group appeared on the deck. The stranger spotted them immediately and shouted:
“Ah! the passengers, the passengers! I hope you are going to introduce me to them, Mr. Burdness!”
“Ah! The passengers, the passengers! I hope you’re going to introduce me to them, Mr. Burdness!”
But he could not wait for any one’s intervention, and going up to them with perfect ease and grace, said, bowing to Miss Grant, “Madame;” then to Lady Helena, with another bow, “Miss;” and to Lord Glenarvan, “Sir.”
But he couldn't wait for anyone to step in, so he approached them with complete ease and grace, saying, bowing to Miss Grant, “Madame;” then to Lady Helena, with another bow, “Miss;” and to Lord Glenarvan, “Sir.”
Here John Mangles interrupted him, and said, “Lord Glenarvan.”
Here John Mangles cut in and said, “Lord Glenarvan.”
“My Lord,” continued the unknown, “I beg pardon for presenting myself to you, but at sea it is well to relax the strict rules of etiquette a little. I hope we shall soon become acquainted with each other, and that the company of these ladies will make our voyage in the SCOTIA appear as short as agreeable.”
“My Lord,” continued the stranger, “I apologize for stepping forward, but at sea it's good to ease up on the strict rules of etiquette a bit. I hope we can quickly get to know each other, and that the company of these ladies will make our journey on the SCOTIA feel as short as it is enjoyable.”
Lady Helena and Miss Grant were too astonished to be able to utter a single word. The presence of this intruder on the poop of the DUNCAN was perfectly inexplicable.
Lady Helena and Miss Grant were too shocked to say a word. The presence of this intruder on the back of the DUNCAN was completely baffling.
Lord Glenarvan was more collected, and said, “Sir, to whom have I the honor of speaking?”
Lord Glenarvan was calmer and said, “Sir, who do I have the honor of speaking to?”
“To Jacques Eliacin Francois Marie Paganel, Secretary of the Geographical Society of Paris, Corresponding Member of the Societies of Berlin, Bombay, Darmstadt, Leipsic, London, St. Petersburg, Vienna, and New York; Honorary Member of the Royal Geographical and Ethnographical Institute of the East Indies; who, after having spent twenty years of his life in geographical work in the study, wishes to see active service, and is on his way to India to gain for the science what information he can by following up the footsteps of great travelers.”
“To Jacques Eliacin Francois Marie Paganel, Secretary of the Geographical Society of Paris, Corresponding Member of the Societies of Berlin, Bombay, Darmstadt, Leipzig, London, St. Petersburg, Vienna, and New York; Honorary Member of the Royal Geographical and Ethnographical Institute of the East Indies; who, after spending twenty years dedicated to geographical research, wishes to engage in active exploration and is headed to India to gather as much information as possible for the science by retracing the paths of great travelers.”
CHAPTER VII JACQUES PAGANEL IS UNDECEIVED
THE Secretary of the Geographical Society was evidently an amiable personage, for all this was said in a most charming manner. Lord Glenarvan knew quite well who he was now, for he had often heard Paganel spoken of, and was aware of his merits. His geographical works, his papers on modern discoveries, inserted in the reports of the Society, and his world-wide correspondence, gave him a most distinguished place among the LITERATI of France.
THE Secretary of the Geographical Society was clearly a pleasant person, as everything was said in a really charming way. Lord Glenarvan knew exactly who he was now, since he had often heard Paganel mentioned and recognized his achievements. His geographical works, his articles on modern discoveries published in the Society's reports, and his global correspondence earned him a highly distinguished position among the LITERATI of France.
Lord Glenarvan could not but welcome such a guest, and shook hands cordially.
Lord Glenarvan couldn't help but welcome such a guest and shook hands warmly.
“And now that our introductions are over,” he added, “you will allow me, Monsieur Paganel, to ask you a question?”
"And now that we've finished our introductions," he added, "may I ask you a question, Monsieur Paganel?"
“Twenty, my Lord,” replied Paganel; “it will always be a pleasure to converse with you.”
“Twenty, my Lord,” replied Paganel; “it will always be a pleasure to talk with you.”
“Was it last evening that you came on board this vessel?”
“Did you come on board this ship last night?”
“Yes, my Lord, about 8 o’clock. I jumped into a cab at the Caledonian Railway, and from the cab into the SCOTIA, where I had booked my cabin before I left Paris. It was a dark night, and I saw no one on board, so I found cabin No. 6, and went to my berth immediately, for I had heard that the best way to prevent sea-sickness is to go to bed as soon as you start, and not to stir for the first few days; and, moreover, I had been traveling for thirty hours. So I tucked myself in, and slept conscientiously, I assure you, for thirty-six hours.”
“Yes, my Lord, around 8 o’clock. I hopped into a cab at the Caledonian Railway, and from there, I went straight to the SCOTIA, where I had already booked my cabin before leaving Paris. It was a dark night, and I didn’t see anyone on board, so I located cabin No. 6 and went right to my berth because I had heard that the best way to avoid seasickness is to go to bed as soon as you set sail and not get up for a few days; plus, I had been traveling for thirty hours. So, I snuggled in and slept soundly, I promise you, for thirty-six hours.”
Paganel’s listeners understood the whole mystery, now, of his presence on the DUNCAN. The French traveler had mistaken his vessel, and gone on board while the crew were attending the service at St. Mungo’s. All was explained. But what would the learned geographer say, when he heard the name and destination of the ship, in which he had taken passage?
Paganel's audience now understood the entire mystery of how he ended up on the DUNCAN. The French traveler had confused his ship and boarded it while the crew was at the service at St. Mungo’s. Everything was explained. But what would the knowledgeable geographer say when he learned the name and destination of the ship he had boarded?
“Then it is Calcutta, M. Paganel, that you have chosen as your point of departure on your travels?”
“So, Calcutta is the place you’ve chosen as your starting point for your travels, M. Paganel?”
“Yes, my Lord, to see India has been a cherished purpose with me all my life. It will be the realization of my fondest dreams, to find myself in the country of elephants and Thugs.”
“Yes, my Lord, seeing India has been a lifelong goal for me. It will be the fulfillment of my biggest dreams to finally be in the land of elephants and Thugs.”
“Then it would be by no means a matter of indifference to you, to visit another country instead.”
“Then it would certainly be important to you to visit another country instead.”
“No, my Lord; indeed it would be very disagreeable, for I have letters from Lord Somerset, the Governor-General, and also a commission to execute for the Geographical Society.”
“No, my Lord; it would be quite unpleasant because I have letters from Lord Somerset, the Governor-General, and I also have a commission to carry out for the Geographical Society.”
“Ah, you have a commission.”
"Ah, you have a gig."
“Yes, I have to attempt a curious and important journey, the plan of which has been drawn up by my learned friend and colleague, M. Vivien de Saint Martin. I am to pursue the track of the Schlaginweit Brothers; and Colonels Waugh and Webb, and Hodgson; and Huc and Gabet, the missionaries; and Moorecroft and M. Jules Remy, and so many celebrated travelers. I mean to try and succeed where Krick, the missionary so unfortunately failed in 1846; in a word, I want to follow the course of the river Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou, which waters Thibet for a distance of 1500 kilometres, flowing along the northern base of the Himalayas, and to find out at last whether this river does not join itself to the Brahmapoutre in the northeast of As-sam. The gold medal, my Lord, is promised to the traveler who will succeed in ascertaining a fact which is one of the greatest DESIDERATA to the geography of India.”
“Yes, I have to embark on a fascinating and significant journey, the plan for which has been created by my knowledgeable friend and colleague, M. Vivien de Saint Martin. I will be following the path of the Schlaginweit Brothers; and Colonels Waugh and Webb, and Hodgson; and Huc and Gabet, the missionaries; and Moorecroft and M. Jules Remy, along with so many renowned travelers. I intend to try and succeed where Krick, the missionary, unfortunately failed in 1846; in short, I want to trace the course of the river Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou, which flows through Tibet for a distance of 1,500 kilometers, along the northern base of the Himalayas, and finally determine whether this river connects to the Brahmaputra in the northeast of Assam. The gold medal, my Lord, is promised to the traveler who can uncover a fact that is one of the greatest DESIDERATA for the geography of India.”
Paganel was magnificent. He spoke with superb animation, soaring away on the wings of imagination. It would have been as impossible to stop him as to stop the Rhine at the Falls of Schaffhausen.
Paganel was amazing. He spoke with great energy, taking off on the wings of his imagination. It would have been just as impossible to stop him as it would be to stop the Rhine at the Falls of Schaffhausen.
“Monsieur Jacques Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, after a brief pause, “that would certainly be a grand achievement, and you would confer a great boon on science, but I should not like to allow you to be laboring under a mistake any longer, and I must tell you, therefore, that for the present at least, you must give up the pleasure of a visit to India.”
“Monsieur Jacques Paganel,” Lord Glenarvan said after a short pause, “that would definitely be a great accomplishment, and you would be doing a huge favor for science, but I don’t want you to be under any illusions any longer, so I have to tell you that for now, at least, you'll have to give up the idea of visiting India.”
“Give it up. And why?”
"Let it go. Why?"
“Because you are turning your back on the Indian peninsula.”
“Because you are turning your back on the Indian subcontinent.”
“What! Captain Burton.”
“What! Captain Burton?”
“I am not Captain Burton,” said John Mangles.
“I am not Captain Burton,” John Mangles said.
“But the SCOTIA.”
“But the SCOTIA.”
“This vessel is not the SCOTIA.”
“This ship is not the SCOTIA.”
It would be impossible to depict the astonishment of Paganel. He stared first at one and then at another in the utmost bewilderment.
It would be impossible to describe Paganel's shock. He looked first at one and then at another in total confusion.
Lord Glenarvan was perfectly grave, and Lady Helena and Mary showed their sympathy for his vexation by their looks. As for John Mangles, he could not suppress a smile; but the Major appeared as unconcerned as usual. At last the poor fellow shrugged his shoulders, pushed down his spectacles over his nose and said:
Lord Glenarvan was completely serious, and Lady Helena and Mary expressed their sympathy for his frustration through their expressions. As for John Mangles, he couldn't hold back a smile; but the Major seemed as indifferent as ever. Finally, the poor guy shrugged his shoulders, adjusted his glasses down his nose, and said:
“You are joking.”
"You must be joking."
But just at that very moment his eye fell on the wheel of the ship, and he saw the two words on it: Duncan. Glasgow.
But just at that very moment, he noticed the ship's wheel, and he saw the two words on it: Duncan. Glasgow.
“The DUNCAN! the DUNCAN!” he exclaimed, with a cry of despair, and forthwith rushed down the stairs, and away to his cabin.
“The DUNCAN! the DUNCAN!” he shouted in despair, then hurried down the stairs and ran to his cabin.
As soon as the unfortunate SAVANT had disappeared, every one, except the Major, broke out into such peals of laughter that the sound reached the ears of the sailors in the forecastle. To mistake a railway or to take the train to Edinburgh when you want to go to Dumbarton might happen; but to mistake a ship and be sailing for Chili when you meant to go to India—that is a blunder indeed!
As soon as the unfortunate SAVANT vanished, everyone, except for the Major, erupted into such fits of laughter that the sound reached the ears of the sailors in the forecastle. Mistaking a railway or taking a train to Edinburgh when you meant to go to Dumbarton could happen; but mistaking a ship and ending up sailing for Chile when you intended to go to India—that's a real blunder!
“However,” said Lord Glenarvan, “I am not much astonished at it in Paganel. He is quite famous for such misadventures. One day he published a celebrated map of America, and put Japan in it! But for all that, he is distinguished for his learning, and he is one of the best geographers in France.”
“However,” Lord Glenarvan said, “I’m not really surprised by that from Paganel. He’s quite known for such mistakes. One time he published a well-known map of America and included Japan in it! Still, he’s recognized for his knowledge and is one of the top geographers in France.”
“But what shall we do with the poor gentleman?” said Lady Helena; “we can’t take him with us to Patagonia.”
“But what are we going to do with the poor guy?” said Lady Helena; “we can’t bring him with us to Patagonia.”
“Why not?” replied McNabbs, gravely. “We are not responsible for his heedless mistakes. Suppose he were in a railway train, would they stop it for him?”
“Why not?” replied McNabbs, seriously. “We aren't responsible for his reckless mistakes. If he were on a train, would they stop it for him?”
“No, but he would get out at the first station.”
“No, but he would get off at the first stop.”
“Well, that is just what he can do here, too, if he likes; he can disembark at the first place where we touch.”
“Well, he can do that here too if he wants; he can get off at the first place where we dock.”
While they were talking, Paganel came up again on the poop, looking very woebegone and crestfallen. He had been making inquiry about his luggage, to assure himself that it was all on board, and kept repeating incessantly the unlucky words, “The DUNCAN! the DUNCAN!”
While they were talking, Paganel came back up on the deck, looking very downcast and discouraged. He had been checking on his luggage to make sure it was all on board and kept repeating the unfortunate phrase, “The DUNCAN! the DUNCAN!”
He could find no others in his vocabulary. He paced restlessly up and down; sometimes stopping to examine the sails, or gaze inquiringly over the wide ocean, at the far horizon. At length he accosted Lord Glenarvan once more, and said—
He couldn't find any other words in his vocabulary. He walked back and forth nervously; occasionally stopping to check the sails or look curiously out at the vast ocean and the distant horizon. Finally, he approached Lord Glenarvan again and said—
“And this DUNCAN—where is she going?”
“And this DUNCAN—where is she headed?”
“To America, Monsieur Paganel,” was the reply.
“To America, Mr. Paganel,” was the reply.
“And to what particular part?”
“And to which specific part?”
“To Concepcion.”
"To Concepción."
“To Chili! to Chili!” cried the unfortunate geographer. “And my mission to India. But what will M. de Quatre-fages, the President of the Central Commission, say? And M. d’ Avezac? And M. Cortanbert? And M. Vivien de Saint Martin? How shall I show my face at the SEANCES of the Society?”
“To Chile! To Chile!” yelled the unfortunate geographer. “And my mission to India. But what will M. de Quatre-fages, the President of the Central Commission, say? And M. d’Avezac? And M. Cortanbert? And M. Vivien de Saint Martin? How am I going to face the meetings of the Society?”
“Come, Monsieur Paganel, don’t despair. It can all be managed; you will only have to put up with a little delay, which is relatively of not much importance. The Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou will wait for you still in the mountains of Thibet. We shall soon put in at Madeira, and you will get a ship there to take you back to Europe.”
“Come on, Monsieur Paganel, don’t lose hope. We can handle this; you just need to deal with a small delay, which isn’t a big deal. The Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou will still be waiting for you in the mountains of Tibet. We’ll be stopping in Madeira soon, and you’ll catch a ship there to take you back to Europe.”
“Thanks, my Lord. I suppose I must resign myself to it; but people will say it is a most extraordinary adventure, and it is only to me such things happen. And then, too, there is a cabin taken for me on board the SCOTIA.”
“Thanks, my Lord. I guess I have to accept it; but people will say it’s an incredible adventure, and only I seem to experience such things. Plus, I have a cabin reserved for me on the SCOTIA.”
“Oh, as to the SCOTIA, you’ll have to give that up meantime.”
“Oh, regarding the SCOTIA, you'll have to let that go for now.”
“But the DUNCAN is a pleasure yacht, is it not?” began Paganel again, after a fresh examination of the vessel.
“But the DUNCAN is a pleasure yacht, right?” Paganel began again, after taking another look at the vessel.
“Yes, sir,” said John Mangles, “and belongs to Lord Glenarvan.”
“Yes, sir,” John Mangles said, “and it belongs to Lord Glenarvan.”
“Who begs you will draw freely on his hospitality,” said Lord Glenarvan.
“Whoever asks you can take advantage of his hospitality,” said Lord Glenarvan.
“A thousand thanks, my Lord! I deeply feel your courtesy, but allow me to make one observation: India is a fine country, and can offer many a surprising marvel to travelers. These ladies, I suppose, have never seen it. Well now, the man at the helm has only to give a turn at the wheel, and the DUNCAN will sail as easily to Calcutta as to Concepcion; and since it is only a pleasure trip that you are—”
“A thousand thanks, my Lord! I truly appreciate your kindness, but let me make one point: India is a wonderful country with many surprising wonders for travelers. These ladies, I assume, have never visited it. Well, the person in charge just needs to steer the ship, and the DUNCAN will sail just as smoothly to Calcutta as it will to Concepcion; and since this is just a pleasure trip you are—”
His proposal was met by such grave, disapproving shakes of the head, that he stopped short before the sentence was completed; and Lady Helena said:
His proposal was met with such serious, disapproving shakes of the head that he stopped mid-sentence; and Lady Helena said:
“Monsieur Paganel, if we were only on a pleasure trip, I should reply, ‘Let us all go to India together,’ and I am sure Lord Glenarvan would not object; but the DUNCAN is going to bring back shipwrecked mariners who were cast away on the shores of Patagonia, and we could not alter such a destination.”
“Mr. Paganel, if this were just a vacation, I would say, ‘Let’s all go to India together,’ and I’m sure Lord Glenarvan wouldn’t mind; but the DUNCAN is headed to rescue shipwrecked sailors who ended up on the shores of Patagonia, so we can’t change that plan.”
The Frenchman was soon put in possession of all the circumstances of the case. He was no unmoved auditor, and when he heard of Lady Helena’s generous proposition, he could not help saying,
The Frenchman quickly learned all the details of the case. He wasn't an indifferent listener, and when he heard about Lady Helena's generous offer, he couldn't help but say,
“Madame, permit me to express my admiration of your conduct throughout—my unreserved admiration. Let your yacht continue her course. I should reproach myself were I to cause a single day’s delay.”
“Madam, let me express how much I admire your behavior throughout—my complete admiration. Please let your yacht stay on its course. I would regret it if I caused even a single day’s delay.”
“Will you join us in our search, then?” asked Lady Helena.
“Will you join us in our search, then?” Lady Helena asked.
“It is impossible, madame. I must fulfill my mission. I shall disembark at the first place you touch at, wherever it may be.”
“It’s impossible, ma'am. I have to complete my mission. I'll get off at the first place you stop, no matter where that is.”
“That will be Madeira,” said John Mangles.
"That’s Madeira," said John Mangles.
“Madeira be it then. I shall only be 180 leagues from Lisbon, and I shall wait there for some means of transport.”
“Madeira it is then. I’ll be just 180 miles from Lisbon, and I’ll wait there for some way to travel.”
“Very well, Monsieur Paganel, it shall be as you wish; and, for my own part, I am very glad to be able to offer you, meantime, a few days’ hospitality. I only hope you will not find our company too dull.”
“Sure thing, Monsieur Paganel, it’ll be just as you want; and for my part, I’m really happy to offer you a few days of hospitality in the meantime. I just hope you won’t find our company too boring.”
“Oh, my Lord,” exclaimed Paganel, “I am but too happy to have made a mistake which has turned out so agreeably. Still, it is a very ridiculous plight for a man to be in, to find himself sailing to America when he set out to go to the East Indies!”
“Oh, my Lord,” Paganel exclaimed, “I’m actually quite happy that I made a mistake that turned out so well. Still, it’s a pretty ridiculous situation for a man to find himself in, sailing to America when he intended to go to the East Indies!”
But in spite of this melancholy reflection, the Frenchman submitted gracefully to the compulsory delay. He made himself amiable and merry, and even diverting, and enchanted the ladies with his good humor. Before the end of the day he was friends with everybody. At his request, the famous document was brought out. He studied it carefully and minutely for a long time, and finally declared his opinion that no other interpretation of it was possible. Mary Grant and her brother inspired him with the most lively interest. He gave them great hope; indeed, the young girl could not help smiling at his sanguine prediction of success, and this odd way of foreseeing future events. But for his mission he would have made one of the search party for Captain Grant, undoubtedly.
But despite this sad thought, the Frenchman accepted the delay gracefully. He was friendly and cheerful, even entertaining, and charmed the ladies with his good humor. By the end of the day, he was friends with everyone. At his request, the famous document was brought out. He examined it closely and thoroughly for a long time and eventually declared that no other interpretation was possible. Mary Grant and her brother sparked his keen interest. He gave them great hope; indeed, the young girl couldn't help but smile at his optimistic prediction of success and his unusual way of foreseeing future events. If it weren't for his mission, he would have undoubtedly joined the search party for Captain Grant.
As for Lady Helena, when he heard that she was a daughter of William Tuffnell, there was a perfect explosion of admiring epithets. He had known her father, and what letters had passed between them when William Tuffnell was a corresponding member of the Society! It was he himself that had introduced him and M. Malte Brun. What a rencontre this was, and what a pleasure to travel with the daughter of Tuffnell.
As for Lady Helena, when he found out she was William Tuffnell's daughter, he couldn’t stop showering her with compliments. He had known her father and remembered all the letters they exchanged when William Tuffnell was a member of the Society! He was the one who introduced him to M. Malte Brun. What a meeting this was, and what a joy it was to travel with Tuffnell's daughter.
He wound up by asking permission to kiss her, which Lady Helena granted, though it was, perhaps, a little improper.
He ended by asking if he could kiss her, which Lady Helena agreed to, even though it was maybe a bit inappropriate.
CHAPTER VIII THE GEOGRAPHER’S RESOLUTION
MEANTIME the yacht, favored by the currents from the north of Africa, was making rapid progress toward the equator. On the 30th of August they sighted the Madeira group of islands, and Glenarvan, true to his promise, offered to put in there, and land his new guest.
MEANTIME, the yacht, benefiting from the currents from northern Africa, was quickly moving toward the equator. On August 30th, they spotted the Madeira group of islands, and Glenarvan, true to his word, offered to stop there and let his new guest disembark.
But Paganel said:
But Paganel said:
“My dear Lord, I won’t stand on ceremony with you. Tell me, did you intend to stop at Madeira before I came on board?”
“My dear Lord, I won’t stand on formality with you. Tell me, did you plan to stop at Madeira before I got on board?”
“No,” replied Glenarvan.
“No,” Glenarvan replied.
“Well, then, allow me to profit by my unlucky mistake. Madeira is an island too well known to be of much interest now to a geographer. Every thing about this group has been said and written already. Besides, it is completely going down as far as wine growing is concerned. Just imagine no vines to speak of being in Madeira! In 1813, 22,000 pipes of wine were made there, and in 1845 the number fell to 2,669. It is a grievous spectacle! If it is all the same to you, we might go on to the Canary Isles instead.”
“Well, then, let me make the best of my unfortunate mistake. Madeira is an island that's too well-known to hold much interest for a geographer anymore. Everything about this place has already been said and written. Plus, it's completely declining when it comes to wine production. Can you believe there are hardly any vines left in Madeira? In 1813, they produced 22,000 pipes of wine, and by 1845, that number plummeted to 2,669. It's a sad sight! If it’s alright with you, we could head over to the Canary Islands instead.”
“Certainly. It will not the least interfere with our route.”
“Of course. It won't interfere at all with our route.”
“I know it will not, my dear Lord. In the Canary Islands, you see, there are three groups to study, besides the Peak of Teneriffe, which I always wished to visit. This is an opportunity, and I should like to avail myself of it, and make the ascent of the famous mountain while I am waiting for a ship to take me back to Europe.”
“I know it won’t, my dear Lord. In the Canary Islands, there are three groups to study, in addition to Mount Teide, which I’ve always wanted to visit. This is a chance, and I’d like to take advantage of it and climb the famous mountain while I wait for a ship to take me back to Europe.”
“As you please, my dear Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, though he could not help smiling; and no wonder, for these islands are scarcely 250 miles from Madeira, a trifling distance for such a quick sailer as the DUNCAN.
“As you wish, my dear Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, though he couldn't help but smile; and it's no surprise, because these islands are barely 250 miles from Madeira, a short distance for such a fast ship as the DUNCAN.
Next day, about 2 P. M., John Mangles and Paganel were walking on the poop. The Frenchman was assailing his companion with all sorts of questions about Chili, when all at once the captain interrupted him, and pointing toward the southern horizon, said:
Next day, around 2 PM, John Mangles and Paganel were walking on the deck. The Frenchman was bombarding his companion with questions about Chile when suddenly the captain interrupted him and pointed toward the southern horizon, saying:
“Monsieur Paganel?”
"Mr. Paganel?"
“Yes, my dear Captain.”
“Yes, my dear Captain.”
“Be so good as to look in this direction. Don’t you see anything?”
“Could you please look this way? Don’t you see anything?”
“Nothing.”
"Nothing."
“You’re not looking in the right place. It is not on the horizon, but above it in the clouds.”
“You’re not looking in the right spot. It’s not on the horizon, but above it in the clouds.”
“In the clouds? I might well not see.”
“In the clouds? I probably won't see.”
“There, there, by the upper end of the bowsprit.”
“There, there, at the upper end of the bowsprit.”
“I see nothing.”
"I see nothing."
“Then you don’t want to see. Anyway, though we are forty miles off, yet I tell you the Peak of Teneriffe is quite visible yonder above the horizon.”
“Then you don’t want to look. Anyway, even though we are forty miles away, I tell you the Peak of Teneriffe is clearly visible over there above the horizon.”
But whether Paganel could not or would not see it then, two hours later he was forced to yield to ocular evidence or own himself blind.
But whether Paganel couldn't see it or just didn't want to, two hours later he had to admit the obvious truth or admit he was blind.
“You do see it at last, then,” said John Mangles.
“You finally see it, then,” said John Mangles.
“Yes, yes, distinctly,” replied Paganel, adding in a disdainful tone, “and that’s what they call the Peak of Teneriffe!”
“Yes, yes, clearly,” replied Paganel, adding in a contemptuous tone, “and that’s what they call the Peak of Tenerife!”
“That’s the Peak.”
"That's the Peak."
“It doesn’t look much of a height.”
“It doesn’t seem like much of a height.”
“It is 11,000 feet, though, above the level of the sea.”
“It is 11,000 feet above sea level.”
“That is not equal to Mont Blanc.”
“That doesn't compare to Mont Blanc.”
“Likely enough, but when you come to ascend it, probably you’ll think it high enough.”
"That’s probably true, but when you actually try to climb it, you’ll likely find it’s high enough."
“Oh, ascend it! ascend it, my dear captain! What would be the good after Humboldt and Bonplan? That Humboldt was a great genius. He made the ascent of this mountain, and has given a description of it which leaves nothing unsaid. He tells us that it comprises five different zones—the zone of the vines, the zone of the laurels, the zone of the pines, the zone of the Alpine heaths, and, lastly, the zone of sterility. He set his foot on the very summit, and found that there was not even room enough to sit down. The view from the summit was very extensive, stretching over an area equal to Spain. Then he went right down into the volcano, and examined the extinct crater. What could I do, I should like you to tell me, after that great man?”
“Oh, climb it! Climb it, my dear captain! What would be the point after Humboldt and Bonplan? Humboldt was a brilliant mind. He climbed this mountain and provided a description that covers everything. He tells us that it has five different zones—the zone of the vines, the zone of the laurels, the zone of the pines, the zone of the Alpine heaths, and finally, the zone of barrenness. He stood on the very peak and found there wasn’t even enough space to sit down. The view from the top was vast, covering an area as large as Spain. Then he went all the way down into the volcano and looked at the extinct crater. What could I possibly do, I’d like you to tell me, after that great man?”
“Well, certainly, there isn’t much left to glean. That is vexing, too, for you would find it dull work waiting for a vessel in the Peak of Teneriffe.”
“Well, there really isn’t much left to figure out. That’s frustrating, too, because you would find it boring just waiting for a ship at the Peak of Teneriffe.”
“But, I say, Mangles, my dear fellow, are there no ports in the Cape Verde Islands that we might touch at?”
“But I ask you, Mangles, my friend, are there no ports in the Cape Verde Islands that we could stop at?”
“Oh, yes, nothing would be easier than putting you off at Villa Praya.”
“Oh, yes, it would be super easy to drop you off at Villa Praya.”
“And then I should have one advantage, which is by no means inconsiderable—I should find fellow-countrymen at Senegal, and that is not far away from those islands. I am quite aware that the group is said to be devoid of much interest, and wild, and unhealthy; but everything is curious in the eyes of a geographer. Seeing is a science. There are people who do not know how to use their eyes, and who travel about with as much intelligence as a shell-fish. But that’s not in my line, I assure you.”
“And then I would have one significant advantage—I would find fellow countrymen in Senegal, which isn’t far from those islands. I know people say the area lacks interest and is wild and unhealthy, but everything is fascinating to a geographer. Observing is a science. Some people don’t know how to really see, and travel with as much understanding as a shellfish. But that’s not me, I assure you.”
“Please yourself, Monsieur Paganel. I have no doubt geographical science will be a gainer by your sojourn in the Cape Verde Islands. We must go in there anyhow for coal, so your disembarkation will not occasion the least delay.”
“Do what you like, Monsieur Paganel. I’m sure geographical science will benefit from your stay in the Cape Verde Islands. We need to stop there anyway for coal, so your getting off the ship won’t cause any delays.”
The captain gave immediate orders for the yacht to continue her route, steering to the west of the Canary group, and leaving Teneriffe on her larboard. She made rapid progress, and passed the Tropic of Cancer on the second of September at 5 A. M.
The captain immediately ordered the yacht to keep going along her route, heading west of the Canary Islands and leaving Tenerife to her left. She made quick progress and crossed the Tropic of Cancer on September 2nd at 5 A.M.
The weather now began to change, and the atmosphere became damp and heavy. It was the rainy season, “le tempo das aguas,” as the Spanish call it, a trying season to travelers, but useful to the inhabitants of the African Islands, who lack trees and consequently water. The rough weather prevented the passengers from going on deck, but did not make the conversation any less animated in the saloon.
The weather started to change, and the air became damp and heavy. It was the rainy season, “le tempo das aguas,” as the Spanish call it, a tough season for travelers, but beneficial for the people of the African Islands, who lack trees and therefore water. The bad weather kept the passengers from going on deck, but it didn’t dampen the lively conversation in the lounge.
On the 3d of September Paganel began to collect his luggage to go on shore. The DUNCAN was already steaming among the Islands. She passed Sal, a complete tomb of sand lying barren and desolate, and went on among the vast coral reefs and athwart the Isle of St. Jacques, with its long chain of basaltic mountains, till she entered the port of Villa Praya and anchored in eight fathoms of water before the town. The weather was frightful, and the surf excessively violent, though the bay was sheltered from the sea winds. The rain fell in such torrents that the town was scarcely visible through it. It rose on a plain in the form of a terrace, buttressed on volcanic rocks three hundred feet high. The appearance of the island through the thick veil of rain was mournful in the extreme.
On September 3rd, Paganel started packing his bags to go ashore. The DUNCAN was already steaming through the islands. It passed Sal, a desolate and barren stretch of sand, and continued among the vast coral reefs and past the Isle of St. Jacques, with its long chain of basalt mountains, until it reached the port of Villa Praya and anchored in eight fathoms of water right in front of the town. The weather was terrible, and the waves were extremely rough, even though the bay was sheltered from the sea winds. The rain poured down so heavily that the town was barely visible through it. It sat on a plain shaped like a terrace, backed by volcanic rocks rising three hundred feet high. The sight of the island through the thick curtain of rain was incredibly grim.
Lady Helena could not go on shore as she had purposed; indeed, even coaling was a difficult business, and the passengers had to content themselves below the poop as best they might. Naturally enough, the main topic of conversation was the weather. Everybody had something to say about it except the Major, who surveyed the universal deluge with the utmost indifference. Paganel walked up and down shaking his head.
Lady Helena couldn't go ashore as she planned; in fact, even refueling was a tricky task, and the passengers had to make do below the deck as best they could. Unsurprisingly, the main topic of conversation was the weather. Everyone had something to say about it except the Major, who viewed the heavy rain with complete indifference. Paganel paced back and forth, shaking his head.
“It is clear enough, Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, “that the elements are against you.”
“It’s pretty obvious, Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, “that the elements are working against you.”
“I’ll be even with them for all that,” replied the Frenchman.
“I'll get back at them for all that,” replied the Frenchman.
“You could not face rain like that, Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena.
“You couldn’t handle rain like that, Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena.
“Oh, quite well, madam, as far as I myself am concerned. It is for my luggage and instruments that I am afraid. Everything will be ruined.”
“Oh, I’m doing quite well, ma’am, as far as I’m concerned. It’s my luggage and instruments that worry me. Everything will be ruined.”
“The disembarking is the worst part of the business. Once at Villa Praya you might manage to find pretty good quarters. They wouldn’t be over clean, and you might find the monkeys and pigs not always the most agreeable companions. But travelers are not too particular, and, moreover, in seven or eight months you would get a ship, I dare say, to take you back to Europe.”
“The disembarkation is the worst part of the process. Once you reach Villa Praya, you might be able to find decent accommodation. It won’t be very clean, and you might find that the monkeys and pigs aren't always the most pleasant company. But travelers aren’t too picky, and besides, in seven or eight months, you’ll likely be able to catch a ship to take you back to Europe.”
“Seven or eight months!” exclaimed Paganel.
“Seven or eight months!” Paganel exclaimed.
“At least. The Cape Verde Islands are not much frequented by ships during the rainy season. But you can employ your time usefully. This archipelago is still but little known.”
“At least. The Cape Verde Islands aren't visited by many ships during the rainy season. But you can make good use of your time. This archipelago is still pretty unknown.”
“You can go up the large rivers,” suggested Lady Helena.
“You can travel up the big rivers,” suggested Lady Helena.
“There are none, madam.”
"There aren't any, ma'am."
“Well, then, the small ones.”
“Well, then, the little ones.”
“There are none, madam.”
“There aren't any, ma'am.”
“The running brooks, then.”
"The flowing streams, then."
“There are no brooks, either.”
“There are no streams, either.”
“You can console yourself with the forests if that’s the case,” put in the Major.
“You can find comfort in the forests if that’s the case,” added the Major.
“You can’t make forests without trees, and there are no trees.”
“You can’t have forests without trees, and there aren’t any trees.”
“A charming country!” said the Major.
“A lovely countryside!” said the Major.
“Comfort yourself, my dear Paganel, you’ll have the mountains at any rate,” said Glenarvan.
“Cheer up, my dear Paganel, you’ll at least have the mountains,” said Glenarvan.
“Oh, they are neither lofty nor interesting, my Lord, and, beside, they have been described already.”
“Oh, they're neither impressive nor engaging, my Lord, and besides, they've already been described.”
“Already!” said Lord Glenarvan.
“Already!” said Lord Glenarvan.
“Yes, that is always my luck. At the Canary Islands, I saw myself anticipated by Humboldt, and here by M. Charles Sainte-Claire Deville, a geologist.”
“Yes, that’s always my luck. In the Canary Islands, I found myself outdone by Humboldt, and here by M. Charles Sainte-Claire Deville, a geologist.”
“Impossible!”
“No way!”
“It is too true,” replied Paganel, in a doleful voice. “Monsieur Deville was on board the government corvette, La Decidee, when she touched at the Cape Verde Islands, and he explored the most interesting of the group, and went to the top of the volcano in Isle Fogo. What is left for me to do after him?”
“It's unfortunately true,” replied Paganel, in a sad voice. “Monsieur Deville was on the government corvette, La Decidee, when it stopped at the Cape Verde Islands, and he explored the most fascinating part of the group, even reaching the top of the volcano on Isle Fogo. What do I have left to accomplish after him?”
“It is really a great pity,” said Helena. “What will become of you, Monsieur Paganel?”
“It’s really a shame,” said Helena. “What will happen to you, Monsieur Paganel?”
Paganel remained silent.
Paganel stayed quiet.
“You would certainly have done much better to have landed at Madeira, even though there had been no wine,” said Glenarvan.
“You definitely would have been better off landing at Madeira, even if there hadn't been any wine,” said Glenarvan.
Still the learned secretary was silent.
Still, the educated secretary remained quiet.
“I should wait,” said the Major, just as if he had said, “I should not wait.”
“I should wait,” said the Major, just as if he had said, “I shouldn’t wait.”
Paganel spoke again at length, and said:
Paganel spoke again for a while and said:
“My dear Glenarvan, where do you mean to touch next?”
“My dear Glenarvan, where do you plan to go next?”
“At Concepcion.”
"At Concepcion."
“Plague it! That is a long way out of the road to India.”
“Darn it! That’s a long detour to get to India.”
“Not it! From the moment you pass Cape Horn, you are getting nearer to it.”
“Not it! From the moment you round Cape Horn, you’re getting closer to it.”
“I doubt it much.”
"I really doubt it."
“Beside,” resumed Lord Glenarvan, with perfect gravity, “when people are going to the Indies it doesn’t matter much whether it is to the East or West.”
“Besides,” continued Lord Glenarvan seriously, “when people are heading to the Indies, it doesn’t really matter if it’s to the East or West.”
“What! it does not matter much?”
“What! It doesn’t matter that much?”
“Without taking into account the fact that the inhabitants of the Pampas in Patagonia are as much Indians as the natives of the Punjaub.”
“Without considering the fact that the people of the Pampas in Patagonia are just as much Indigenous as the natives of the Punjab.”
“Well done, my Lord. That’s a reason that would never have entered my head!”
"Great job, my Lord. That's something I would have never thought of!"
“And then, my dear Paganel, you can gain the gold medal anyway. There is as much to be done, and sought, and investigated, and discovered in the Cordilleras as in the mountains of Thibet.”
“And then, my dear Paganel, you can still earn the gold medal. There’s just as much to do, search for, investigate, and discover in the Cordilleras as there is in the mountains of Tibet.”
“But the course of the Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou—what about that?”
“But what about the course of the Yarou-Dzangbo-Tchou?”
“Go up the Rio Colorado instead. It is a river but little known, and its course on the map is marked out too much according to the fancy of geographers.”
“Instead, head up the Rio Colorado. It's a river that's not very well-known, and its path on the map is drawn more by the imagination of geographers than by reality.”
“I know it is, my dear Lord; they have made grave mistakes. Oh, I make no question that the Geographical Society would have sent me to Patagonia as soon as to India, if I had sent in a request to that effect. But I never thought of it.”
“I know it is, my dear Lord; they have made serious mistakes. Oh, I have no doubt that the Geographical Society would have sent me to Patagonia just as quickly as to India if I had submitted a request for it. But I never thought of it.”
“Just like you.”
“Just like you.”
“Come, Monsieur Paganel, will you go with us?” asked Lady Helena, in her most winning tone.
“Come on, Monsieur Paganel, will you join us?” asked Lady Helena, in her most charming voice.
“Madam, my mission?”
“Ma'am, what's my mission?”
“We shall pass through the Straits of Magellan, I must tell you,” said Lord Glenarvan.
“We're going to go through the Straits of Magellan, I need to tell you,” said Lord Glenarvan.
“My Lord, you are a tempter.”
“My Lord, you really know how to tempt people.”
“Let me add, that we shall visit Port Famine.”
“Let me also mention that we will visit Port Famine.”
“Port Famine!” exclaimed the Frenchman, besieged on all sides. “That famous port in French annals!”
“Port Famine!” shouted the Frenchman, surrounded on all sides. “That famous port from French history!”
“Think, too, Monsieur Paganel, that by taking part in our enterprise, you will be linking France with Scotland.”
“Also, Monsieur Paganel, by joining our mission, you’ll be connecting France with Scotland.”
“Undoubtedly.”
"For sure."
“A geographer would be of much use to our expedition, and what can be nobler than to bring science to the service of humanity?”
“A geographer would be incredibly helpful to our expedition, and what could be more noble than using science to serve humanity?”
“That’s well said, madam.”
"That’s well said, ma'am."
“Take my advice, then, and yield to chance, or rather providence. Follow our example. It was providence that sent us the document, and we set out in consequence. The same providence brought you on board the DUNCAN. Don’t leave her.”
“Take my advice and go with the flow, or really, what fate has in store for you. Follow our lead. It was fate that gave us the document, and we acted on it. That same fate brought you onto the DUNCAN. Don’t abandon her.”
“Shall I say yes, my good friends? Come, now, tell me, you want me very much to stay, don’t you?” said Paganel.
“Should I say yes, my good friends? Come on, tell me, you really want me to stay, don’t you?” said Paganel.
“And you’re dying to stay, now, aren’t you, Paganel?” returned Glenarvan.
“And you really want to stay now, don’t you, Paganel?” replied Glenarvan.
“That’s about it,” confessed the learned geographer; “but I was afraid it would be inconsiderate.”
“That's about it,” admitted the knowledgeable geographer; “but I was worried it would be thoughtless.”
CHAPTER IX THROUGH THE STRAITS OF MAGELLAN
THE joy on board was universal when Paganel’s resolution was made known.
The joy on board was shared by everyone when Paganel's decision was announced.
Little Robert flung himself on his neck in such tumultuous delight that he nearly threw the worthy secretary down, and made him say, “Rude petit bonhomme. I’ll teach him geography.”
Little Robert jumped onto his neck in such overwhelming joy that he almost knocked the poor secretary over, making him say, “Rude little kid. I’ll teach him geography.”
Robert bade fair to be an accomplished gentleman some day, for John Mangles was to make a sailor of him, and the Major was to teach him sang-froid, and Glenarvan and Lady Helena were to instil into him courage and goodness and generosity, while Mary was to inspire him with gratitude toward such instructors.
Robert was on track to become a well-rounded gentleman someday, as John Mangles was set to make him a sailor, and the Major was going to teach him poise. Glenarvan and Lady Helena would instill in him courage, kindness, and generosity, while Mary was to inspire him with gratitude toward these mentors.
The DUNCAN soon finished taking in coal, and turned her back on the dismal region. She fell in before long with the current from the coast of Brazil, and on the 7th of September entered the Southern hemisphere.
The DUNCAN quickly finished loading coal and turned away from the bleak area. She soon caught the current from the coast of Brazil, and on September 7th, she entered the Southern Hemisphere.
So far, then, the voyage had been made without difficulty. Everybody was full of hope, for in this search for Captain Grant, each day seemed to increase the probability of finding him. The captain was among the most confident on board, but his confidence mainly arose from the longing desire he had to see Miss Mary happy. He was smitten with quite a peculiar interest for this young girl, and managed to conceal his sentiments so well that everyone on board saw it except himself and Mary Grant.
So far, the journey had gone smoothly. Everyone was hopeful because every day in the search for Captain Grant seemed to increase the chances of finding him. The captain was one of the most confident people on the ship, but his confidence mainly came from his strong desire to see Miss Mary happy. He had a unique interest in this young girl and managed to hide his feelings so effectively that everyone on board noticed except for him and Mary Grant.
As for the learned geographer, he was probably the happiest man in all the southern hemisphere. He spent the whole day in studying maps, which were spread out on the saloon table, to the great annoyance of M. Olbinett, who could never get the cloth laid for meals, without disputes on the subject. But all the passengers took his part except the Major, who was perfectly indifferent about geographical questions, especially at dinner-time. Paganel also came across a regular cargo of old books in the chief officer’s chest. They were in a very damaged condition, but among them he raked out a few Spanish volumes, and determined forthwith to set to work to master the language of Cervantes, as no one on board understood it, and it would be helpful in their search along the Chilian coast. Thanks to his taste for languages, he did not despair of being able to speak the language fluently when they arrived at Concepcion. He studied it furiously, and kept constantly muttering heterogeneous syllables.
As for the knowledgeable geographer, he was probably the happiest person in the entire southern hemisphere. He spent all day studying maps spread out on the saloon table, much to the annoyance of M. Olbinett, who could never lay the tablecloth for meals without arguments about it. But all the passengers supported him, except for the Major, who was completely indifferent to geographical issues, especially during dinner. Paganel also found a real stash of old books in the chief officer’s chest. Although they were in rough shape, he pulled out a few Spanish volumes and decided right away to start learning the language of Cervantes, since no one on board understood it, and it would be useful in their search along the Chilean coast. Thanks to his love for languages, he didn’t lose hope of being able to speak fluently by the time they reached Concepcion. He studied it intensely and kept muttering a mix of syllables.
He spent his leisure hours in teaching young Robert, and instructed him in the history of the country they were so rapidly approaching.
He spent his free time teaching young Robert and shared with him the history of the country they were quickly approaching.
On the 25th of September, the yacht arrived off the Straits of Magellan, and entered them without delay. This route is generally preferred by steamers on their way to the Pacific Ocean. The exact length of the straits is 372 miles. Ships of the largest tonnage find, throughout, sufficient depth of water, even close to the shore, and there is a good bottom everywhere, and abundance of fresh water, and rivers abounding in fish, and forests in game, and plenty of safe and accessible harbors; in fact a thousand things which are lacking in Strait Lemaire and Cape Horn, with its terrible rocks, incessantly visited by hurricane and tempest.
On September 25th, the yacht reached the Straits of Magellan and entered right away. This route is usually favored by steamships heading to the Pacific Ocean. The straits are 372 miles long. Even the largest ships can find enough water depth throughout, even near the shore, and there’s a good seabed everywhere, lots of fresh water, rivers full of fish, forests with game, and plenty of safe, accessible harbors. In fact, there are a thousand resources that are missing in the Strait of Le Maire and Cape Horn, with its dangerous rocks and constant hurricanes and storms.
For the first three or four hours—that is to say, for about sixty to eighty miles, as far as Cape Gregory—the coast on either side was low and sandy. Jacques Paganel would not lose a single point of view, nor a single detail of the straits. It would scarcely take thirty-six hours to go through them, and the moving panorama on both sides, seen in all the clearness and glory of the light of a southern sun, was well worth the trouble of looking at and admiring. On the Terra del Fuego side, a few wretched-looking creatures were wandering about on the rocks, but on the other side not a solitary inhabitant was visible.
For the first three or four hours—that is, for about sixty to eighty miles, up to Cape Gregory—the coast on either side was low and sandy. Jacques Paganel didn’t miss a single viewpoint or detail of the straits. It would take no more than thirty-six hours to pass through them, and the stunning scenery on both sides, illuminated by the bright southern sun, was definitely worth the effort of watching and appreciating. On the Tierra del Fuego side, a few scruffy-looking people were wandering around on the rocks, but on the other side, not a single inhabitant was in sight.
Paganel was so vexed at not being able to catch a glimpse of any Patagonians, that his companions were quite amused at him. He would insist that Patagonia without Patagonians was not Patagonia at all.
Paganel was so frustrated at not being able to see any Patagonians that his friends found it pretty funny. He kept insisting that Patagonia without Patagonians wasn't really Patagonia at all.
But Glenarvan replied:
But Glenarvan responded:
“Patience, my worthy geographer. We shall see the Patagonians yet.”
“Hang in there, my good geographer. We’ll see the Patagonians soon enough.”
“I am not sure of it.”
"I'm not sure about that."
“But there is such a people, anyhow,” said Lady Helena.
“But there is definitely a people like that,” said Lady Helena.
“I doubt it much, madam, since I don’t see them.”
“I really doubt it, ma'am, since I don’t see them.”
“But surely the very name Patagonia, which means ‘great feet’ in Spanish, would not have been given to imaginary beings.” “Oh, the name is nothing,” said Paganel, who was arguing simply for the sake of arguing. “And besides, to speak the truth, we are not sure if that is their name.”
"But surely the name Patagonia, which means 'great feet' in Spanish, wouldn't have been given to imaginary beings." "Oh, the name doesn't matter," said Paganel, who was arguing just for the sake of it. "And to be honest, we're not even sure if that's their name."
“What an idea!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “Did you know that, Major?”
“What an idea!” Glenarvan exclaimed. “Did you know that, Major?”
“No,” replied McNabbs, “and wouldn’t give a Scotch pound-note for the information.”
“No,” McNabbs replied, “and I wouldn’t pay a single Scottish pound for that information.”
“You shall hear it, however, Major Indifferent. Though Magellan called the natives Patagonians, the Fuegians called them Tiremenen, the Chilians Caucalhues, the colonists of Carmen Tehuelches, the Araucans Huiliches; Bougainville gives them the name of Chauha, and Falkner that of Tehuelhets. The name they give themselves is Inaken. Now, tell me then, how would you recognize them? Indeed, is it likely that a people with so many names has any actual existence?”
“You'll hear it, though, Major Indifferent. While Magellan referred to the natives as Patagonians, the Fuegians called them Tiremenen, the Chileans Caucalhues, the colonists of Carmen Tehuelches, and the Araucans Huiliches. Bougainville named them Chauha, and Falkner called them Tehuelhets. The name they use for themselves is Inaken. Now, tell me, how would you recognize them? Honestly, is it likely that a group with so many names actually exists?”
“That’s a queer argument, certainly,” said Lady Helena.
"That's a strange argument, definitely," said Lady Helena.
“Well, let us admit it,” said her husband, “but our friend Paganel must own that even if there are doubts about the name of the race there is none about their size.”
“Well, let's be honest,” her husband said, “our friend Paganel has to admit that even if there are questions about the name of the race, there's no doubt about their size.”
“Indeed, I will never own anything so outrageous as that,” replied Paganel.
“Honestly, I will never own anything so crazy as that,” replied Paganel.
“They are tall,” said Glenarvan.
“They're tall,” said Glenarvan.
“I don’t know that.”
"I don't know that."
“Are they little, then?” asked Lady Helena.
“Are they small, then?” asked Lady Helena.
“No one can affirm that they are.”
“No one can say that they are.”
“About the average, then?” said McNabbs.
“About the average, then?” McNabbs asked.
“I don’t know that either.”
“I don’t know that either.”
“That’s going a little too far,” said Glenarvan. “Travelers who have seen them tell us.”
"That's pushing it a bit too much," said Glenarvan. "Travelers who have seen them let us know."
“Travelers who have seen them,” interrupted Paganel, “don’t agree at all in their accounts. Magellan said that his head scarcely reached to their waist.”
“Travelers who have seen them,” interrupted Paganel, “don’t agree at all in their accounts. Magellan said that his head barely reached their waist.”
“Well, then, that proves.”
"Well, that proves it."
“Yes, but Drake declares that the English are taller than the tallest Patagonian?”
“Yes, but Drake says that the English are taller than the tallest Patagonian?”
“Oh, the English—that may be,” replied the Major, disdainfully, “but we are talking of the Scotch.”
“Oh, the English—that might be,” replied the Major, dismissively, “but we’re talking about the Scots.”
“Cavendish assures us that they are tall and robust,” continued Paganel. “Hawkins makes out they are giants. Lemaire and Shouten declare that they are eleven feet high.”
“Cavendish assures us that they are tall and strong,” Paganel continued. “Hawkins claims they're giants. Lemaire and Shouten say they're eleven feet tall.”
“These are all credible witnesses,” said Glenarvan.
“These are all reliable witnesses,” said Glenarvan.
“Yes, quite as much as Wood, Narborough, and Falkner, who say they are of medium stature. Again, Byron, Giraudais, Bougainville, Wallis, and Carteret, declared that the Patagonians are six feet six inches tall.”
“Yes, just like Wood, Narborough, and Falkner, who say they are of average height. Also, Byron, Giraudais, Bougainville, Wallis, and Carteret stated that the Patagonians are six feet six inches tall.”
“But what is the truth, then, among all these contradictions?” asked Lady Helena.
“But what is the truth, then, among all these contradictions?” asked Lady Helena.
“Just this, madame; the Patagonians have short legs, and a large bust; or by way of a joke we might say that these natives are six feet high when they are sitting, and only five when they are standing.”
“Just this, ma'am; the Patagonians have short legs and a large chest; or jokingly, we could say that these locals are six feet tall when sitting and only five feet when standing.”
“Bravo! my dear geographer,” said Glenarvan. “That is very well put.”
“Great job! my dear geographer,” said Glenarvan. “That’s really well said.”
“Unless the race has no existence, that would reconcile all statements,” returned Paganel. “But here is one consolation, at all events: the Straits of Magellan are very magnificent, even without Patagonians.”
“Unless the race doesn't exist, that would settle everything,” replied Paganel. “But here’s one bit of comfort, at least: the Straits of Magellan are really magnificent, even without the Patagonians.”
Just at this moment the DUNCAN was rounding the peninsula of Brunswick between splendid panoramas.
Just then, the DUNCAN was going around the Brunswick peninsula surrounded by stunning views.
Seventy miles after doubling Cape Gregory, she left on her starboard the penitentiary of Punta Arena. The church steeple and the Chilian flag gleamed for an instant among the trees, and then the strait wound on between huge granitic masses which had an imposing effect. Cloud-capped mountains appeared, their heads white with eternal snows, and their feet hid in immense forests. Toward the southwest, Mount Tarn rose 6,500 feet high. Night came on after a long lingering twilight, the light insensibly melting away into soft shades. These brilliant constellations began to bestud the sky, and the Southern Cross shone out. There were numerous bays along the shore, easy of access, but the yacht did not drop anchor in any; she continued her course fearlessly through the luminous darkness. Presently ruins came in sight, crumbling buildings, which the night invested with grandeur, the sad remains of a deserted settlement, whose name will be an eternal protest against these fertile shores and forests full of game. The DUNCAN was passing Fort Famine.
Seventy miles after rounding Cape Gregory, she saw the Punta Arena penitentiary on her right. The church steeple and the Chilean flag briefly shone through the trees, and then the strait wound between massive granite formations that looked impressive. Cloud-covered mountains emerged, their peaks capped with eternal snow and their bases shrouded in vast forests. To the southwest, Mount Tarn rose 6,500 feet high. Night fell after a long, lingering twilight, with light gradually fading into soft shadows. Bright constellations began to fill the sky, and the Southern Cross appeared. There were several accessible bays along the shore, but the yacht didn’t stop in any; she boldly continued through the glowing darkness. Soon, ruins came into view—crumbling buildings that the night made look majestic, the sad remnants of a deserted settlement, whose name will forever remind us of these fertile shores and forests teeming with wildlife. The DUNCAN was passing Fort Famine.
It was in that very spot that Sarmiento, a Spaniard, came in 1581, with four hundred emigrants, to establish a colony. He founded the city of St. Philip, but the extreme severity of winter decimated the inhabitants, and those who had struggled through the cold died subsequently of starvation. Cavendish the Corsair discovered the last survivor dying of hunger in the ruins.
It was in that exact spot that Sarmiento, a Spaniard, arrived in 1581 with four hundred immigrants to start a colony. He founded the city of St. Philip, but the harshness of winter wiped out the residents, and those who managed to survive the cold eventually died of starvation. Cavendish the Corsair found the last survivor dying of hunger amid the ruins.
After sailing along these deserted shores, the DUNCAN went through a series of narrow passes, between forests of beech and ash and birch, and at length doubled Cape Froward, still bristling with the ice of the last winter. On the other side of the strait, in Terra del Fuego, stood Mount Sarmiento, towering to a height of 6,000 feet, an enormous accumulation of rocks, separated by bands of cloud, forming a sort of aerial archipelago in the sky.
After cruising along these empty shores, the DUNCAN navigated through a series of narrow passages, flanked by forests of beech, ash, and birch trees, and eventually rounded Cape Froward, still covered in ice from last winter. On the opposite side of the strait in Terra del Fuego stood Mount Sarmiento, rising to 6,000 feet, a massive cluster of rocks divided by bands of clouds, creating a sort of sky archipelago.
It is at Cape Froward that the American continent actually terminates, for Cape Horn is nothing but a rock sunk in the sea in latitude 52 degrees. At Cape Momax the straits widened, and she was able to get round Narborough Isles and advance in a more southerly direction, till at length the rock of Cape Pilares, the extreme point of Desolation Island, came in sight, thirty-six hours after entering the straits. Before her stem lay a broad, open, sparkling ocean, which Jacques Paganel greeted with enthusiastic gestures, feeling kindred emotions with those which stirred the bosom of Ferdinand de Magellan himself, when the sails of his ship, the TRINIDAD, first bent before the breeze from the great Pacific.
It is at Cape Froward that the American continent actually ends, because Cape Horn is just a rock submerged in the sea at latitude 52 degrees. At Cape Momax, the straits widened, allowing her to navigate around the Narborough Isles and head more south until finally the rock of Cape Pilares, the farthest point of Desolation Island, came into view, thirty-six hours after entering the straits. Before her bow lay a vast, open, sparkling ocean, which Jacques Paganel welcomed with enthusiastic gestures, feeling the same emotions that must have stirred in Ferdinand de Magellan when the sails of his ship, the TRINIDAD, first caught the breeze from the great Pacific.
CHAPTER X THE COURSE DECIDED
A WEEK after they had doubled the Cape Pilares, the DUNCAN steamed into the bay of Talcahuano, a magnificent estuary, twelve miles long and nine broad. The weather was splendid. From November to March the sky is always cloudless, and a constant south wind prevails, as the coast is sheltered by the mountain range of the Andes. In obedience to Lord Glenarvan’s order, John Mangles had sailed as near the archipelago of Chiloe as possible, and examined all the creeks and windings of the coast, hoping to discover some traces of the shipwreck. A broken spar, or any fragment of the vessel, would have put them in the right track; but nothing whatever was visible, and the yacht continued her route, till she dropped anchor at the port of Talcahuano, forty-two days from the time she had sailed out of the fogs of the Clyde.
A WEEK after they had rounded the Cape Pilares, the DUNCAN steamed into the bay of Talcahuano, a stunning estuary, twelve miles long and nine miles wide. The weather was amazing. From November to March, the sky is always clear, and a steady south wind blows, as the coast is protected by the Andes mountain range. Following Lord Glenarvan’s orders, John Mangles had sailed as close to the Chiloe archipelago as possible and explored all the creeks and twists of the coast, hoping to find any signs of the shipwreck. A broken spar or any piece of the ship would have led them in the right direction, but nothing was visible, and the yacht continued its journey until it dropped anchor at the port of Talcahuano, forty-two days after leaving the fogs of the Clyde.
Glenarvan had a boat lowered immediately, and went on shore, accompanied by Paganel. The learned geographer gladly availed himself of the opportunity of making use of the language he had been studying so conscientiously, but to his great amazement, found he could not make himself understood by the people. “It is the accent I’ve not got,” he said.
Glenarvan had a boat lowered right away and went ashore, joined by Paganel. The knowledgeable geographer eagerly took the chance to practice the language he had been studying so hard, but to his surprise, he found he couldn't communicate with the locals. “It’s the accent I’m missing,” he said.
“Let us go to the Custom-house,” replied Glenarvan.
“Let’s go to the Custom-house,” replied Glenarvan.
They were informed on arriving there, by means of a few English words, aided by expressive gestures, that the British Consul lived at Concepcion, an hour’s ride distant. Glenarvan found no difficulty in procuring two fleet horses, and he and Paganel were soon within the walls of the great city, due to the enterprising genius of Valdivia, the valiant comrade of the Pizarros.
They were told upon their arrival, with a few English words and helpful gestures, that the British Consul lived in Concepcion, an hour's ride away. Glenarvan had no trouble getting two fast horses, and he and Paganel were soon inside the walls of the great city, thanks to the adventurous spirit of Valdivia, the brave companion of the Pizarros.
How it was shorn of its ancient splendor! Often pillaged by the natives, burned in 1819, it lay in desolation and ruins, its walls still blackened by the flames, scarcely numbering 8,000 inhabitants, and already eclipsed by Talcahuano. The grass was growing in the streets, beneath the lazy feet of the citizens, and all trade and business, indeed any description of activity, was impossible. The notes of the mandolin resounded from every balcony, and languishing songs floated on the breeze. Concepcion, the ancient city of brave men, had become a village of women and children. Lord Glenarvan felt no great desire to inquire into the causes of this decay, though Paganel tried to draw him into a discussion on the subject. He would not delay an instant, but went straight on to the house of Mr. Bentic, her Majesty’s Consul, who received them very courteously, and, on learning their errand, undertook to make inquiries all along the coast.
How it had lost its ancient glory! Often raided by locals, burned in 1819, it lay in ruins, its walls still charred from the fire, with barely 8,000 residents, already overshadowed by Talcahuano. Grass was growing in the streets, beneath the sluggish feet of the citizens, and all trade and business, indeed any kind of activity, was impossible. The sounds of the mandolin echoed from every balcony, and melancholic songs drifted on the breeze. Concepcion, the old city of brave souls, had turned into a village of women and children. Lord Glenarvan didn't feel much urge to investigate the reasons for this decline, although Paganel tried to engage him in a discussion about it. He didn’t want to waste any time and headed straight to the house of Mr. Bentic, Her Majesty’s Consul, who welcomed them warmly and, upon learning their purpose, agreed to make inquiries all along the coast.
But to the question whether a three-mast vessel, called the BRITANNIA, had gone ashore either on the Chilian or Araucanian coast, he gave a decided negative. No report of such an event had been made to him, or any of the other consuls. Glenarvan, however, would not allow himself to be disheartened; he went back to Talcahuano, and spared neither pains nor expense to make a thorough investigation of the whole seaboard. But it was all in vain. The most minute inquiries were fruitless, and Lord Glenarvan returned to the yacht to report his ill success. Mary Grant and her brother could not restrain their grief. Lady Helena did her best to comfort them by loving caresses, while Jacques Paganel took up the document and began studying it again. He had been poring over it for more than an hour when Glenarvan interrupted him and said:
But when asked if a three-mast ship called the BRITANNIA had run aground on the Chilian or Araucanian coast, he firmly said no. No report of such an incident had been made to him or any of the other consuls. However, Glenarvan refused to feel discouraged; he returned to Talcahuano and spared no effort or expense to thoroughly investigate the entire coastline. But it was all for nothing. Even the most detailed inquiries came up empty, and Lord Glenarvan went back to the yacht to report his lack of success. Mary Grant and her brother couldn’t hold back their sorrow. Lady Helena tried her best to comfort them with gentle embraces, while Jacques Paganel picked up the document and began studying it again. He had been engrossed in it for over an hour when Glenarvan interrupted him and said:
“Paganel! I appeal to your sagacity. Have we made an erroneous interpretation of the document? Is there anything illogical about the meaning?”
“Paganel! I’m counting on your wisdom. Did we misinterpret the document? Is there anything unreasonable about its meaning?”
Paganel was silent, absorbed in reflection.
Paganel was quiet, lost in thought.
“Have we mistaken the place where the catastrophe occurred?” continued Glenarvan. “Does not the name Patagonia seem apparent even to the least clear-sighted individual?”
“Have we got the location of the disaster wrong?” Glenarvan continued. “Doesn’t the name Patagonia stand out even to the most oblivious person?”
Paganel was still silent.
Paganel remained silent.
“Besides,” said Glenarvan, “does not the word INDIEN prove we are right?”
“Besides,” said Glenarvan, “doesn’t the word INDIEN show we’re correct?”
“Perfectly so,” replied McNabbs.
“Exactly,” replied McNabbs.
“And is it not evident, then, that at the moment of writing the words, the shipwrecked men were expecting to be made prisoners by the Indians?”
“And isn’t it clear, then, that at the moment of writing those words, the shipwrecked men were expecting to be taken prisoner by the Indians?”
“I take exception to that, my Lord,” said Paganel; “and even if your other conclusions are right, this, at least, seemed to me irrational.”
“I disagree with that, my Lord,” said Paganel; “and even if your other conclusions are correct, this one, at least, seems irrational to me.”
“What do you mean?” asked Lady Helena, while all eyes were fixed on the geographer.
“What do you mean?” asked Lady Helena, while everyone’s attention was on the geographer.
“I mean this,” replied Paganel, “that Captain Grant is now a prisoner among the Indians, and I further add that the document states it unmistakably.”
“I mean this,” replied Paganel, “that Captain Grant is now a prisoner among the Indians, and I also want to point out that the document states it clearly.”
“Explain yourself, sir,” said Mary Grant.
"Please explain yourself, sir," Mary Grant said.
“Nothing is plainer, dear Mary. Instead of reading the document seront prisonniers, read sont prisonniers, and the whole thing is clear.”
“Nothing is clearer, dear Mary. Instead of reading the document seront prisonniers, read sont prisonniers, and it all makes sense.”
“But that is impossible,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“But that's impossible,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“Impossible! and why, my noble friend?” asked Paganel, smiling.
“Impossible! And why is that, my noble friend?” asked Paganel, smiling.
“Because the bottle could only have been thrown into the sea just when the vessel went to pieces on the rocks, and consequently the latitude and longitude given refer to the actual place of the shipwreck.”
“Because the bottle must have been thrown into the sea right when the shipwreck happened on the rocks, the latitude and longitude provided point to the exact location of the wreck.”
“There is no proof of that,” replied Paganel, “and I see nothing to preclude the supposition that the poor fellows were dragged into the interior by the Indians, and sought to make known the place of their captivity by means of this bottle.”
“There’s no evidence to support that,” replied Paganel, “and I don’t see anything that rules out the possibility that the poor guys were taken into the interior by the Indians and tried to signal the location of their captivity with this bottle.”
“Except this fact, my dear Paganel, that there was no sea, and therefore they could not have flung the bottle into it.”
“Except for the fact, my dear Paganel, that there was no sea, and so they couldn’t have thrown the bottle into it.”
“Unless they flung it into rivers which ran into the sea,” returned Paganel.
“Unless they threw it into rivers that flowed into the sea,” replied Paganel.
This reply was so unexpected, and yet so admissible, that it made them all completely silent for a minute, though their beaming eyes betrayed the rekindling of hope in their hearts. Lady Helena was the first to speak.
This response was so surprising, yet so acceptable, that it left everyone completely silent for a moment, although their bright eyes revealed the renewed hope in their hearts. Lady Helena was the first to break the silence.
“What an idea!” she exclaimed.
"What a great idea!" she exclaimed.
“And what a good idea,” was Paganel’s naive rejoinder to her exclamation.
“And what a great idea,” was Paganel’s naive response to her exclamation.
“What would you advise, then?” said Glenarvan.
“What do you think we should do?” said Glenarvan.
“My advice is to follow the 37th parallel from the point where it touches the American continent to where it dips into the Atlantic, without deviating from it half a degree, and possibly in some part of its course we shall fall in with the shipwrecked party.”
“My advice is to follow the 37th parallel from where it meets the American continent to where it drops into the Atlantic, without straying from it by even half a degree, and we might encounter the shipwrecked group along the way.”
“There is a poor chance of that,” said the Major.
“There’s a low chance of that,” said the Major.
“Poor as it is,” returned Paganel, “we ought not to lose it. If I am right in my conjecture, that the bottle has been carried into the sea on the bosom of some river, we cannot fail to find the track of the prisoners. You can easily convince yourselves of this by looking at this map of the country.”
“Though it's not much,” Paganel replied, “we shouldn't let it go. If I'm correct in my guess that the bottle was taken to the sea by a river, we'll definitely be able to trace the prisoners' route. You can easily see this for yourselves by looking at this map of the area.”
He unrolled a map of Chili and the Argentine provinces as he spoke, and spread it out on the table.
He rolled out a map of Chile and the Argentine provinces as he talked, and laid it out on the table.
“Just follow me for a moment,” he said, “across the American continent. Let us make a stride across the narrow strip of Chili, and over the Cordilleras of the Andes, and get into the heart of the Pampas. Shall we find any lack of rivers and streams and currents? No, for here are the Rio Negro and Rio Colorado, and their tributaries intersected by the 37th parallel, and any of them might have carried the bottle on its waters. Then, perhaps, in the midst of a tribe in some Indian settlement on the shores of these almost unknown rivers, those whom I may call my friends await some providential intervention. Ought we to disappoint their hopes? Do you not all agree with me that it is our duty to go along the line my finger is pointing out at this moment on the map, and if after all we find I have been mistaken, still to keep straight on and follow the 37th parallel till we find those we seek, if even we go right round the world?”
“Just follow me for a moment,” he said, “across the American continent. Let’s take a step across the narrow strip of Chile, over the Andes Mountains, and get to the heart of the Pampas. Will we find a shortage of rivers and streams? No, because here are the Rio Negro and Rio Colorado, along with their tributaries crossing the 37th parallel, and any of them could have carried the bottle on their waters. Then, perhaps, in the midst of a tribe in some Native settlement along these almost unknown rivers, those I call my friends are waiting for some fortunate event. Should we let them down? Don't you all agree that it's our duty to follow the path my finger is pointing to right now on the map, and even if we discover I was wrong, we should keep going straight along the 37th parallel until we find those we're looking for, even if it means going all the way around the world?”
His generous enthusiasm so touched his auditors that, involuntarily, they rose to their feet and grasped his hands, while Robert exclaimed as he devoured the map with his eyes:
His enthusiastic generosity moved his audience so much that, without thinking, they stood up and took his hands, while Robert exclaimed as he eagerly studied the map:
“Yes, my father is there!”
“Yes, my dad is there!”
“And where he is,” replied Glenarvan, “we’ll manage to go, my boy, and find him. Nothing can be more logical than Paganel’s theory, and we must follow the course he points out without the least hesitation. Captain Grant may have fallen into the hands of a numerous tribe, or his captors may be but a handful. In the latter case we shall carry him off at once, but in the event of the former, after we have reconnoitered the situation, we must go back to the DUNCAN on the eastern coast and get to Buenos Ayres, where we can soon organize a detachment of men, with Major McNabbs at their head, strong enough to tackle all the Indians in the Argentine provinces.”
“And wherever he is,” replied Glenarvan, “we’ll figure out how to get there, my boy, and find him. Nothing is more reasonable than Paganel’s theory, and we have to follow the route he suggests without any hesitation. Captain Grant might have been taken by a large tribe, or his captors could be just a small group. If it’s the latter, we’ll rescue him right away, but if it’s the former, after we assess the situation, we need to return to the DUNCAN on the eastern coast and get to Buenos Ayres, where we can quickly organize a crew of men, led by Major McNabbs, strong enough to handle all the Indians in the Argentine provinces.”
“That’s capital, my Lord,” said John Mangles, “and I may add, that there is no danger whatever crossing the continent.”
"That's great, my Lord," said John Mangles, "and I can add that there's absolutely no risk in crossing the continent."
“Monsieur Paganel,” asked Lady Helena, “you have no fear then that if the poor fellows have fallen into the hands of the Indians their lives at least have been spared.”
“Mr. Paganel,” Lady Helena asked, “you’re not worried that if the poor guys have fallen into the hands of the Indians, at least their lives have been spared?”
“What a question? Why, madam, the Indians are not anthropophagi! Far from it. One of my own countrymen, M. Guinnard, associated with me in the Geographical Society, was three years a prisoner among the Indians in the Pampas. He had to endure sufferings and ill-treatment, but came off victorious at last. A European is a useful being in these countries. The Indians know his value, and take care of him as if he were some costly animal.”
“What a question? Why, ma'am, the Indians are not cannibals! Not at all. One of my fellow countrymen, M. Guinnard, who worked with me at the Geographical Society, was a prisoner among the Indians in the Pampas for three years. He had to go through hardships and mistreatment, but he came out on top in the end. A European is a valued asset in these regions. The Indians recognize his worth and treat him as if he were a precious animal.”
“There is not the least room then for hesitation,” said Lord Glenarvan. “Go we must, and as soon as possible. What route must we take?”
“There's no room for hesitation,” said Lord Glenarvan. “We have to go, and as soon as possible. What route should we take?”
“One that is both easy and agreeable,” replied Paganel. “Rather mountainous at first, and then sloping gently down the eastern side of the Andes into a smooth plain, turfed and graveled quite like a garden.”
“One that is both easy and pleasant,” replied Paganel. “It starts off pretty mountainous, and then gently slopes down the eastern side of the Andes into a flat area, covered in grass and gravel, just like a garden.”
“Let us see the map?” said the Major.
“Can we see the map?” said the Major.
“Here it is, my dear McNabbs. We shall go through the capital of Araucania, and cut the Cordilleras by the pass of Antuco, leaving the volcano on the south, and gliding gently down the mountain sides, past the Neuquem and the Rio Colorado on to the Pampas, till we reach the Sierra Tapalquen, from whence we shall see the frontier of the province of Buenos Ayres. These we shall pass by, and cross over the Sierra Tandil, pursuing our search to the very shores of the Atlantic, as far as Point Medano.”
“Here it is, my dear McNabbs. We will travel through the capital of Araucania and cross the Cordilleras via the Antuco pass, leaving the volcano to the south, and smoothly descending the mountain slopes, past the Neuquen and the Rio Colorado onto the Pampas, until we reach the Sierra Tapalquen, from where we will see the border of Buenos Aires province. We will pass by this and cross over the Sierra Tandil, continuing our search all the way to the Atlantic shores, as far as Point Medano.”
Paganel went through this programme of the expedition without so much as a glance at the map. He was so posted up in the travels of Frezier, Molina, Humboldt, Miers, and Orbigny, that he had the geographical nomenclature at his fingers’ ends, and could trust implicitly to his never-failing memory.
Paganel went through this plan for the expedition without even looking at the map. He was so well-versed in the travels of Frezier, Molina, Humboldt, Miers, and Orbigny that he knew the geographical names by heart and could rely completely on his flawless memory.
“You see then, friend,” he added, “that it is a straight course. In thirty days we shall have gone over it, and gained the eastern side before the DUNCAN, however little she may be delayed by the westerly winds.”
“You see then, buddy,” he added, “that it’s a straight path. In thirty days, we’ll have traveled it and reached the eastern side before the DUNCAN, no matter how much she might be held up by the west winds.”
“Then the DUNCAN is to cruise between Corrientes and Cape Saint Antonie,” said John Mangles.
“Then the DUNCAN will cruise between Corrientes and Cape Saint Antonie,” said John Mangles.
“Just so.”
"Exactly."
“And how is the expedition to be organized?” asked Glenarvan.
“And how is the expedition going to be organized?” asked Glenarvan.
“As simply as possible. All there is to be done is to reconnoiter the situation of Captain Grant and not to come to gunshot with the Indians. I think that Lord Glenarvan, our natural leader; the Major, who would not yield his place to anybody; and your humble servant, Jacques Paganel.”
“As simply as possible. All we need to do is scout the situation of Captain Grant and avoid getting into a confrontation with the Indians. I believe that Lord Glenarvan, our natural leader; the Major, who wouldn’t give up his position to anyone; and I, Jacques Paganel.”
“And me,” interrupted Robert.
"And me," Robert interjected.
“Robert, Robert!” exclaimed Mary.
“Robert, Robert!” shouted Mary.
“And why not?” returned Paganel. “Travels form the youthful mind. Yes, Robert, we four and three of the sailors.”
“And why not?” Paganel replied. “Travel shapes the young mind. Yes, Robert, the four of us and three of the sailors.”
“And does your Lordship mean to pass me by?” said John Mangles, addressing his master.
“And are you really going to ignore me?” said John Mangles, speaking to his master.
“My dear John,” replied Glenarvan, “we leave passengers on board, those dearer to us than life, and who is to watch over them but the devoted captain?”
“My dear John,” replied Glenarvan, “we're leaving passengers on board, those who mean more to us than life itself, and who will look after them if not the dedicated captain?”
“Then we can’t accompany you?” said Lady Helena, while a shade of sadness beclouded her eyes.
“Then we can’t go with you?” Lady Helena said, a hint of sadness clouding her eyes.
“My dear Helena, the journey will so soon be accomplished that it will be but a brief separation, and—”
“My dear Helena, the journey will soon be over, so it will only be a short separation, and—”
“Yes, dear, I understand, it is all right; and I do hope you may succeed.”
“Yes, dear, I understand. It's okay, and I really hope you succeed.”
“Besides, you can hardly call it a journey,” added Paganel.
“Besides, you can barely call it a journey,” added Paganel.
“What is it, then?”
"What is it?"
“It is just making a flying passage across the continent, the way a good man goes through the world, doing all the good he can. Transire beneficiendo—that is our motto.”
“It’s like making a quick trip across the continent, just like a good person navigates through life, doing as much good as they can. Transire beneficiendo—that’s our motto.”
This ended the discussion, if a conversation can be so called, where all who take part in it are of the same opinion. Preparations commenced the same day, but as secretly as possible to prevent the Indians getting scent of it.
This wrapped up the discussion, if you can call it that, when everyone involved shares the same view. Preparations started that very day, but as discreetly as possible to keep the Indians from catching wind of it.
The day of departure was fixed for the 14th of October. The sailors were all so eager to join the expedition that Glenarvan found the only way to prevent jealousy among them was to draw lots who should go. This was accordingly done, and fortune favored the chief officer, Tom Austin, Wilson, a strong, jovial young fellow, and Mulrady, so good a boxer that he might have entered the lists with Tom Sayers himself.
The departure day was set for October 14th. The sailors were all so eager to join the expedition that Glenarvan realized the only way to avoid jealousy among them was to draw lots for who would go. This was done, and luck favored the chief officer, Tom Austin, along with Wilson, a strong, cheerful young guy, and Mulrady, such a skilled boxer that he could have gone up against Tom Sayers himself.
Glenarvan displayed the greatest activity about the preparations, for he was anxious to be ready by the appointed day. John Mangles was equally busy in coaling the vessel, that she might weigh anchor at the same time. There was quite a rivalry between Glenarvan and the young captain about getting first to the Argentine coast.
Glenarvan was really active with the preparations because he wanted to be ready by the set date. John Mangles was just as busy loading coal onto the ship so they could set sail together. There was a strong rivalry between Glenarvan and the young captain over who would reach the Argentine coast first.
Both were ready on the 14th. The whole search party assembled in the saloon to bid farewell to those who remained behind. The DUNCAN was just about to get under way, and already the vibration of the screw began to agitate the limpid waters of Talcahuano, Glenarvan, Paganel, McNabbs, Robert Grant, Tom Austin, Wilson, and Mulrady, stood armed with carbines and Colt’s revolvers. Guides and mules awaited them at the landing stairs of the harbor.
Both were ready on the 14th. The entire search party gathered in the saloon to say goodbye to those staying behind. The DUNCAN was just about to set sail, and the vibrations from the propeller were already disturbing the clear waters of Talcahuano. Glenarvan, Paganel, McNabbs, Robert Grant, Tom Austin, Wilson, and Mulrady stood armed with carbines and Colt revolvers. Guides and mules were waiting for them at the harbor's landing stairs.
“It is time,” said Lord Glenarvan at last.
“It’s time,” said Lord Glenarvan finally.
“Go then, dear Edward,” said Lady Helena, restraining her emotion.
“Go on then, dear Edward,” said Lady Helena, holding back her feelings.
Lord Glenarvan clasped her closely to his breast for an instant, and then turned away, while Robert flung his arms round Mary’s neck.
Lord Glenarvan pulled her tightly to his chest for a moment, and then turned away, while Robert wrapped his arms around Mary’s neck.
“And now, friends,” said Paganel, “let’s have one good hearty shake of the hand all round, to last us till we get to the shores of the Atlantic.”
“And now, friends,” said Paganel, “let’s have a good, solid handshake all around, to hold us over until we reach the shores of the Atlantic.”
This was not much to ask, but he certainly got strong enough grips to go some way towards satisfying his desire.
This wasn’t much to ask, but he definitely got a strong enough hold to go a long way toward fulfilling his desire.
All went on deck now, and the seven explorers left the vessel. They were soon on the quay, and as the yacht turned round to pursue her course, she came so near where they stood, that Lady Helena could exchange farewells once more.
All of them went on deck now, and the seven explorers left the ship. They were soon on the dock, and as the yacht turned to continue its journey, it came so close to where they stood that Lady Helena was able to say goodbye once again.
“God help you!” she called out.
"Good luck!" she shouted.
“Heaven will help us, madam,” shouted Paganel, in reply, “for you may be sure we’ll help ourselves.”
“Heaven will help us, ma'am,” shouted Paganel in response, “because you can be sure we’ll help ourselves.”
“Go on,” sung out the captain to his engineer.
“Go ahead,” called the captain to his engineer.
At the same moment Lord Glenarvan gave the signal to start, and away went the mules along the coast, while the DUNCAN steamed out at full speed toward the broad ocean.
At the same moment, Lord Glenarvan signaled to start, and off went the mules along the coast, while the DUNCAN sped out at full speed toward the open ocean.
CHAPTER XI TRAVELING IN CHILI
THE native troops organized by Lord Glenarvan consisted of three men and a boy. The captain of the muleteers was an Englishman, who had become naturalized through twenty years’ residence in the country. He made a livelihood by letting out mules to travelers, and leading them over the difficult passes of the Cordilleras, after which he gave them in charge of a BAQUEANO, or Argentine guide, to whom the route through the Pampas was perfectly familiar. This Englishman had not so far forgotten his mother tongue among mules and Indians that he could not converse with his countrymen, and a lucky thing it was for them, as Lord Glenarvan found it far easier to give orders than to see them executed, Paganel was still unsuccessful in making himself understood.
THE local troops organized by Lord Glenarvan consisted of three men and a boy. The captain of the muleteers was an Englishman who had become a citizen after living in the country for twenty years. He made his living renting out mules to travelers and guiding them over the challenging passes of the Cordilleras, after which he handed them over to a BAQUEANO, or Argentine guide, who was very familiar with the route through the Pampas. This Englishman hadn't forgotten his native language among mules and Indians, so he could still talk with his fellow countrymen, which was fortunate for them, as Lord Glenarvan found it much easier to give orders than to see them carried out. Paganel was still struggling to make himself understood.
The CATAPEZ, as he was called in Chilian, had two natives called PEONS, and a boy about twelve years of age under him. The PEONS took care of the baggage mules, and the boy led the MADRINA, a young mare adorned with rattle and bells, which walked in front, followed by ten mules. The travelers rode seven of these, and the CATAPEZ another. The remaining two carried provisions and a few bales of goods, intended to secure the goodwill of the Caciques of the plain. The PEONS walked, according to their usual habit.
The CATAPEZ, as he was called in Chile, had two natives known as PEONS, and a boy around twelve years old with him. The PEONS took care of the baggage mules, while the boy led the MADRINA, a young mare decorated with rattles and bells, who walked at the front, followed by ten mules. The travelers rode seven of these, with the CATAPEZ on another. The remaining two carried supplies and a few bundles of goods, meant to win the favor of the Caciques of the plain. The PEONS walked, as was their usual practice.
Every arrangement had been made to insure safety and speed, for crossing the Andes is something more than an ordinary journey. It could not be accomplished without the help of the hardy mules of the far-famed Argentine breed. Those reared in the country are much superior to their progenitors. They are not particular about their food, and only drink once a day, and they can go with ease ten leagues in eight hours.
Every arrangement had been made to ensure safety and speed, as crossing the Andes is more than just a regular trip. It couldn't be done without the reliable mules of the well-known Argentine breed. The ones raised in the country are much better than their ancestors. They aren't picky about their food, drink only once a day, and can comfortably cover ten leagues in eight hours.
There are no inns along this road from one ocean to another. The only viands on which travelers can regale themselves are dried meat, rice seasoned with pimento, and such game as may be shot en route. The torrents provide them with water in the mountains, and the rivulets in the plains, which they improve by the addition of a few drops of rum, and each man carries a supply of this in a bullock’s horn, called CHIFFLE. They have to be careful, however, not to indulge too freely in alcoholic drinks, as the climate itself has a peculiarly exhilarating effect on the nervous system. As for bedding, it is all contained in the saddle used by the natives, called RECADO. This saddle is made of sheepskins, tanned on one side and woolly on the other, fastened by gorgeous embroidered straps. Wrapped in these warm coverings a traveler may sleep soundly, and brave exposure to the damp nights.
There are no inns along this road from one ocean to another. The only food travelers can enjoy is dried meat, rice seasoned with spices, and any game they might catch along the way. The fast-flowing streams provide water in the mountains, and the small rivers in the plains, which they enhance with a few drops of rum. Each traveler carries a supply of this in a bullock's horn called CHIFFLE. They have to be careful, though, not to drink too much alcohol since the climate has a uniquely stimulating effect on the nervous system. For bedding, everything is contained in the saddle used by the locals, called RECADO. This saddle is made from sheepskin, tanned on one side and woolly on the other, held together by beautifully embroidered straps. Wrapped in these warm coverings, a traveler can sleep soundly and withstand the damp nights.
Glenarvan, an experienced traveler, who knew how to adapt himself to the customs of other countries, adopted the Chilian costume for himself and his whole party. Paganel and Robert, both alike children, though of different growth, were wild with delight as they inserted their heads in the national PONCHO, an immense plaid with a hole in center, and their legs in high leather boots. The mules were richly caparisoned, with the Arab bit in their mouths, and long reins of plaited leather, which served as a whip; the headstall of the bridle was decorated with metal ornaments, and the ALFORJAS, double sacks of gay colored linen, containing the day’s provisions. Paganel, DISTRAIT as usual, was flung several times before he succeeded in bestriding his good steed, but once in the saddle, his inseparable telescope on his shoulder-belt, he held on well enough, keeping his feet fast in the stirrups, and trusting entirely to the sagacity of his beast. As for Robert, his first attempt at mounting was successful, and proved that he had the making in him of an excellent horseman.
Glenarvan, an experienced traveler who knew how to adapt to the customs of different countries, decided to dress in the Chilean style for himself and his entire group. Paganel and Robert, both children of different ages, were thrilled as they put on the national PONCHO, a huge plaid with a hole in the middle, and pulled on high leather boots. The mules were beautifully decorated, wearing Arab bits and long braided leather reins that doubled as whips; the bridle’s headstall was adorned with metal decorations, and the ALFORJAS, the double sacks made of colorful linen, held their provisions for the day. Paganel, as distracted as ever, fell off several times before he managed to get on his good horse, but once in the saddle, with his trusty telescope on his shoulder belt, he held on well enough, keeping his feet firmly in the stirrups and relying completely on his horse’s intelligence. As for Robert, he managed to mount successfully on his first try, showing that he had the potential to be an excellent rider.
The weather was splendid when they started, the sky a deep cloudless blue, and yet the atmosphere so tempered by the sea breezes as to prevent any feeling of oppressive heat. They marched rapidly along the winding shore of the bay of Talcahuano, in order to gain the extremity of the parallel, thirty miles south. No one spoke much the first day, for the smoke of the DUNCAN was still visible on the horizon, and the pain of parting too keenly felt. Paganel talked to himself in Spanish, asking and answering questions.
The weather was beautiful when they started, the sky a bright, clear blue, and the sea breezes kept it from feeling too hot. They quickly moved along the winding shore of the bay of Talcahuano to reach the end of the parallel, thirty miles to the south. Nobody said much on the first day since the smoke from the DUNCAN was still visible on the horizon, and the pain of parting was still fresh. Paganel talked to himself in Spanish, asking and answering his own questions.
The CATAPEZ, moreover, was a taciturn man naturally, and had not been rendered loquacious by his calling. He hardly spoke to his PEONS. They understood their duties perfectly. If one of the mules stopped, they urged it on with a guttural cry, and if that proved unavailing, a good-sized pebble, thrown with unerring aim, soon cured the animal’s obstinacy. If a strap got loose, or a rein fell, a PEON came forward instantly, and throwing off his poncho, flung it over his beast’s head till the accident was repaired and the march resumed.
The CATAPEZ was a quiet man by nature, and his job hadn’t made him any more talkative. He hardly spoke to his PEONS. They knew their responsibilities perfectly. If one of the mules stopped, they encouraged it with a guttural shout, and if that didn’t work, a well-aimed pebble quickly fixed the animal’s stubbornness. If a strap came loose or a rein fell, a PEON would step in right away, throwing off his poncho and covering the animal’s head until the issue was fixed and they could continue their journey.
The custom of the muleteers is to start immediately after breakfast, about eight o’clock, and not to stop till they camp for the night, about 4 P. M. Glenarvan fell in with the practice, and the first halt was just as they arrived at Arauco, situated at the very extremity of the bay. To find the extremity of the 37th degree of latitude, they would have required to proceed as far as the Bay of Carnero, twenty miles further. But the agents of Glenarvan had already scoured that part of the coast, and to repeat the exploration would have been useless. It was, therefore, decided that Arauco should be the point of departure, and they should keep on from there toward the east in a straight line.
The muleteers usually set off right after breakfast, around eight o'clock, and they don’t stop until they set up camp for the night, around 4 PM. Glenarvan went along with this routine, and their first break was just as they arrived at Arauco, located at the very tip of the bay. To reach the exact point of the 37th degree of latitude, they would have needed to go all the way to the Bay of Carnero, another twenty miles further. However, Glenarvan's agents had already searched that section of the coast, so repeating the exploration would have been pointless. Therefore, they decided that Arauco would be their starting point, and they would head east in a straight line from there.
Since the weather was so favorable, and the whole party, even Robert, were in perfect health, and altogether the journey had commenced under such favorable auspices, it was deemed advisable to push forward as quickly as possible. Accordingly, the next day they marched 35 miles or more, and encamped at nightfall on the banks of Rio Biobio. The country still presented the same fertile aspect, and abounded in flowers, but animals of any sort only came in sight occasionally, and there were no birds visible, except a solitary heron or owl, and a thrush or grebe, flying from the falcon. Human beings there were none, not a native appeared; not even one of the GUASSOS, the degenerate offspring of Indians and Spaniards, dashed across the plain like a shadow, his flying steed dripping with blood from the cruel thrusts inflicted by the gigantic spurs of his master’s naked feet. It was absolutely impossible to make inquiries when there was no one to address, and Lord Glenarvan came to the conclusion that Captain Grant must have been dragged right over the Andes into the Pampas, and that it would be useless to search for him elsewhere. The only thing to be done was to wait patiently and press forward with all the speed in their power.
Since the weather was so nice, and everyone, even Robert, was in great health, it was decided to move ahead as quickly as possible since they had started their journey under such good conditions. The next day, they traveled over 35 miles and set up camp at nightfall along the banks of the Rio Biobio. The landscape still looked fertile and was filled with flowers, but they only saw animals occasionally, and there weren’t any birds around except for a lone heron or owl, and a thrush or grebe escaping from the falcon. There were no people at all; not a single native appeared, not even one of the GUASSOS, the mixed descendants of Indians and Spaniards, racing across the plain like a shadow, with his horse covered in blood from the harsh spurs of his owner's bare feet. It was impossible to ask questions when there was no one to talk to, and Lord Glenarvan concluded that Captain Grant must have been taken all the way over the Andes into the Pampas, making it pointless to search for him elsewhere. The only option was to wait patiently and move forward as quickly as they could.
On the 17th they set out in the usual line of march, a line which it was hard work for Robert to keep, his ardor constantly compelled him to get ahead of the MADRINA, to the great despair of his mule. Nothing but a sharp recall from Glenarvan kept the boy in proper order.
On the 17th, they started their usual march, which was tough for Robert to maintain because his enthusiasm always pushed him to get ahead of the MADRINA, much to his mule's frustration. Only a quick reminder from Glenarvan kept the boy in line.
The country now became more diversified, and the rising ground indicated their approach to a mountainous district. Rivers were more numerous, and came rushing noisily down the slopes. Paganel consulted his maps, and when he found any of those streams not marked, which often happened, all the fire of a geographer burned in his veins, and he would exclaim, with a charming air of vexation:
The country became more diverse, and the rising terrain signaled their approach to a mountainous area. Rivers grew more plentiful, rushing noisily down the slopes. Paganel checked his maps, and whenever he came across streams that weren’t marked, which often happened, all the passion of a geographer surged within him, and he would exclaim, with a delightful hint of frustration:
“A river which hasn’t a name is like having no civil standing. It has no existence in the eye of geographical law.”
“A river without a name is like not having any legal identity. It doesn’t exist in the eyes of geography.”
He christened them forthwith, without the least hesitation, and marked them down on the map, qualifying them with the most high-sounding adjectives he could find in the Spanish language.
He named them right away, without any hesitation, and noted them on the map, using the most impressive adjectives he could find in Spanish.
“What a language!” he said. “How full and sonorous it is! It is like the metal church bells are made of—composed of seventy-eight parts of copper and twenty-two of tin.”
“What a language!” he said. “It's so rich and resonant! It's like the metal that church bells are made from—seventy-eight parts copper and twenty-two parts tin.”
“But, I say, do you make any progress in it?” asked Glenarvan.
“But, I ask, are you making any progress with it?” Glenarvan inquired.
“Most certainly, my dear Lord. Ah, if it wasn’t the accent, that wretched accent!”
“Of course, my dear Lord. Ah, if it weren’t for the accent, that terrible accent!”
And for want of better work, Paganel whiled away the time along the road by practising the difficulties in pronunciation, repeating all the break-jaw words he could, though still making geographical observations. Any question about the country that Glenarvan might ask the CATAPEZ was sure to be answered by the learned Frenchman before he could reply, to the great astonishment of the guide, who gazed at him in bewilderment.
And with nothing better to do, Paganel passed the time on the road by practicing difficult pronunciations, repeating all the tricky words he could think of, while still keeping up his geographical observations. Any question about the country that Glenarvan asked the CATAPEZ was sure to be answered by the knowledgeable Frenchman before the guide could respond, leaving the guide astonished and bewildered.
About two o’clock that same day they came to a cross road, and naturally enough Glenarvan inquired the name of it.
About two o’clock that same day, they arrived at a crossroads, and of course, Glenarvan asked for its name.
“It is the route from Yumbel to Los Angeles,” said Paganel.
“It’s the way from Yumbel to Los Angeles,” said Paganel.
Glenarvan looked at the CATAPEZ, who replied:
Glenarvan looked at the CATAPEZ, who replied:
“Quite right.”
"That's correct."
And then, turning toward the geographer, he added:
And then, turning to the geographer, he added:
“You have traveled in these parts before, sir?”
“You've been around here before, sir?”
“Oh, yes,” said Paganel, quite gravely.
“Oh, yes,” said Paganel, very seriously.
“On a mule?”
"On a donkey?"
“No, in an easy chair.”
“No, in a comfy chair.”
The CATAPEZ could not make him out, but shrugged his shoulders and resumed his post at the head of the party.
The CATAPEZ couldn't figure him out, but just shrugged and went back to his position at the front of the group.
At five in the evening they stopped in a gorge of no great depth, some miles above the little town of Loja, and encamped for the night at the foot of the Sierras, the first steppes of the great Cordilleras.
At five in the evening, they paused in a shallow gorge a few miles above the small town of Loja and set up camp for the night at the base of the Sierras, which were the initial foothills of the vast Cordilleras.
CHAPTER XII ELEVEN THOUSAND FEET ALOFT
NOTHING of importance had occurred hitherto in the passage through Chili; but all the obstacles and difficulties incident to a mountain journey were about to crowd on the travelers now.
NOTHING of importance had happened so far during the trip through Chile; but all the obstacles and challenges typical of a mountain journey were about to pile up on the travelers now.
One important question had first to be settled. Which pass would take them over the Andes, and yet not be out of their fixed route?
One important question needed to be resolved first. Which pass would take them over the Andes without straying from their planned route?
On questioning the CATAPEZ on the subject, he replied:
On asking the CATAPEZ about this, he answered:
“There are only two practicable passes that I know of in this part of the Cordilleras.”
“There are only two viable paths that I know of in this part of the Cordilleras.”
“The pass of Arica is one undoubtedly discovered by Valdivia Mendoze,” said Paganel.
“The pass of Arica was definitely discovered by Valdivia Mendoza,” said Paganel.
“Just so.”
“Exactly.”
“And that of Villarica is the other.”
“And that one belongs to Villarica.”
“Precisely.”
"Exactly."
“Well, my good fellow, both these passes have only one fault; they take us too far out of our route, either north or south.”
“Well, my friend, both of these routes have just one drawback; they lead us too far off our path, either to the north or the south.”
“Have you no other to propose?” asked the Major.
“Do you have anyone else to suggest?” asked the Major.
“Certainly,” replied Paganel. “There is the pass of Antuco, on the slope of the volcano, in latitude, 37 degrees 30’ , or, in other words, only half a degree out of our way.”
“Of course,” replied Paganel. “There’s the pass of Antuco, on the slope of the volcano, at a latitude of 37 degrees 30’, or in other words, just half a degree out of our way.”
“That would do, but are you acquainted with this pass of Antuco, CATAPEZ?” said Glenarvan.
"That would work, but do you know this pass of Antuco, CATAPEZ?" said Glenarvan.
“Yes, your Lordship, I have been through it, but I did not mention it, as no one goes that way but the Indian shepherds with the herds of cattle.”
“Yes, your Lordship, I’ve been through there, but I didn’t bring it up since only the Indian shepherds with their herds of cattle go that way.”
“Oh, very well; if mares and sheep and oxen can go that way, we can, so let’s start at once.”
“Oh, fine; if horses and sheep and cows can go that way, we can too, so let’s get going right now.”
The signal for departure was given immediately, and they struck into the heart of the valley of Las Lejas, between great masses of chalk crystal. From this point the pass began to be difficult, and even dangerous. The angles of the declivities widened and the ledges narrowed, and frightful precipices met their gaze. The mules went cautiously along, keeping their heads near the ground, as if scenting the track. They marched in file. Sometimes at a sudden bend of the road, the MADRINA would disappear, and the little caravan had to guide themselves by the distant tinkle of her bell. Often some capricious winding would bring the column in two parallel lines, and the CATAPEZ could speak to his PEONS across a crevasse not two fathoms wide, though two hundred deep, which made between them an inseparable gulf.
The signal to leave was given right away, and they headed into the heart of the Las Lejas valley, surrounded by huge masses of chalk crystal. From this point on, the path started to get tough and even dangerous. The slopes became steeper and the ledges narrower, revealing terrifying drop-offs. The mules cautiously picked their way along, keeping their heads low as if they were sniffing out the trail. They walked in a single file. Sometimes, at a sharp bend in the road, the MADRINA would vanish, and the little caravan had to find their way by the distant sound of her bell. Often, a sudden twist in the path would bring the group into two parallel lines, allowing the CATAPEZ to speak to his PEONS across a crevasse that was barely two yards wide but two hundred deep, creating an inseparable chasm between them.
Glenarvan followed his guide step by step. He saw that his perplexity was increasing as the way became more difficult, but did not dare to interrogate him, rightly enough, perhaps, thinking that both mules and muleteers were very much governed by instinct, and it was best to trust to them.
Glenarvan followed his guide closely. He noticed that his confusion was growing as the path became more challenging, but he didn’t dare to ask questions, probably wisely, considering that both the mules and the muleteers were largely guided by instinct, and it was better to rely on them.
For about an hour longer the CATAPEZ kept wandering about almost at haphazard, though always getting higher up the mountains. At last he was obliged to stop short. They were in a narrow valley, one of those gorges called by the Indians “quebrads,” and on reaching the end, a wall of porphyry rose perpendicularly before them, and barred further passage. The CATAPEZ, after vain attempts at finding an opening, dismounted, crossed his arms, and waited. Glenarvan went up to him and asked if he had lost his way.
For about another hour, the CATAPEZ kept wandering around almost aimlessly, but he was always climbing higher into the mountains. Finally, he had to stop. They had reached a narrow valley, one of those gorges the Indians call “quebrads,” and at the end, a wall of porphyry loomed straight up in front of them, blocking any further passage. The CATAPEZ, after fruitless attempts to find an opening, got off his mount, crossed his arms, and waited. Glenarvan approached him and asked if he had lost his way.
“No, your Lordship,” was the reply.
“No, my Lord,” was the reply.
“But you are not in the pass of Antuco.”
“But you are not in the past of Antuco.”
“We are.”
"We're."
“You are sure you are not mistaken?”
"Are you sure you're not mistaken?"
“I am not mistaken. See! there are the remains of a fire left by the Indians, and there are the marks of the mares and the sheep.”
“I’m not wrong. Look! There are the ashes from a fire made by the Indians, and there are the tracks of the mares and the sheep.”
“They must have gone on then.”
“They must have continued on then.”
“Yes, but no more will go; the last earthquake has made the route impassable.”
"Yes, but no one else will go; the last earthquake made the path impossible to travel."
“To mules,” said the Major, “but not to men.”
“To mules,” said the Major, “but not to people.”
“Ah, that’s your concern; I have done all I could. My mules and myself are at your service to try the other passes of the Cordilleras.”
“Ah, that's your worry; I've done everything I can. My mules and I are at your service to explore the other routes through the mountains.”
“And that would delay us?”
“Is that going to delay us?”
“Three days at least.”
“At least three days.”
Glenarvan listened silently. He saw the CATAPEZ was right. His mules could not go farther. When he talked of returning, however, Glenarvan appealed to his companions and said:
Glenarvan listened quietly. He realized the CATAPEZ was correct. His mules couldn't go any further. When he mentioned turning back, Glenarvan turned to his companions and said:
“Will you go on in spite of all the difficulty?”
“Will you keep going despite all the challenges?”
“We will follow your Lordship,” replied Tom Austin.
“We will follow you, my Lord,” replied Tom Austin.
“And even precede you,” added Paganel. “What is it after all? We have only to cross the top of the mountain chain, and once over, nothing can be easier of descent than the slopes we shall find there. When we get below, we shall find BAQUEANOS, Argentine shepherds, who will guide us through the Pampas, and swift horses accustomed to gallop over the plains. Let’s go forward then, I say, and without a moment’s hesitation.”
“And we can even get ahead of you,” added Paganel. “So what does it really matter? We just need to cross the top of the mountain range, and once we're over, the slopes on the other side will be easy to descend. When we reach the bottom, we'll find BAQUEANOS, Argentine shepherds, who will lead us through the Pampas, along with fast horses that are used to racing across the plains. So let’s move forward, I say, and not hesitate for a second.”
“Forward!” they all exclaimed. “You will not go with us, then?” said Glenarvan to the CATAPEZ.
“Let’s go!” they all shouted. “So you’re not coming with us, then?” Glenarvan asked the CATAPEZ.
“I am the muleteer,” was the reply.
“I’m the mule driver,” was the reply.
“As you please,” said Glenarvan.
"As you wish," said Glenarvan.
“We can do without him,” said Paganel. “On the other side we shall get back into the road to Antuco, and I’m quite sure I’ll lead you to the foot of the mountain as straight as the best guide in the Cordilleras.”
“We can manage without him,” Paganel said. “On the other side, we’ll get back on the road to Antuco, and I’m pretty sure I can lead you to the foot of the mountain just as well as the best guide in the Andes.”
Accordingly, Glenarvan settled accounts with the CATAPEZ, and bade farewell to him and his PEONS and mules. The arms and instruments, and a small stock of provisions were divided among the seven travelers, and it was unanimously agreed that the ascent should recommence at once, and, if necessary, should continue part of the night. There was a very steep winding path on the left, which the mules never would have attempted. It was toilsome work, but after two hours’ exertion, and a great deal of roundabout climbing, the little party found themselves once more in the pass of Antuco.
Accordingly, Glenarvan settled up with the CATAPEZ and said goodbye to him, his PEONS, and the mules. The weapons and tools, along with a small supply of food, were split among the seven travelers, and everyone agreed that they should start climbing again right away, even if it meant going a bit into the night. There was a very steep, winding path on the left that the mules would never have dared to take. It was tough work, but after two hours of effort and a lot of detours, the small group found themselves in the Antuco pass once again.
They were not far now from the highest peak of the Cordilleras, but there was not the slightest trace of any beaten path. The entire region had been overturned by recent shocks of earthquake, and all they could do was to keep on climbing higher and higher. Paganel was rather disconcerted at finding no way out to the other side of the chain, and laid his account with having to undergo great fatigue before the topmost peaks of the Andes could be reached, for their mean height is between eleven and twelve thousand six hundred feet. Fortunately the weather was calm and the sky clear, in addition to the season being favorable, but in Winter, from May to October, such an ascent would have been impracticable. The intense cold quickly kills travelers, and those who even manage to hold out against it fall victims to the violence of the TEMPORALES, a sort of hurricane peculiar to those regions, which yearly fills the abysses of the Cordilleras with dead bodies.
They were not far from the highest peak of the Cordilleras, but there was no sign of any worn path. The whole area had been disrupted by recent earthquakes, and all they could do was keep climbing higher and higher. Paganel felt quite unsettled at not seeing a way to the other side of the mountain range, and he prepared himself for a lot of fatigue before reaching the highest peaks of the Andes, which typically sit between eleven and twelve thousand six hundred feet high. Fortunately, the weather was calm and the sky was clear, plus the season was right for climbing; however, in winter, from May to October, such a climb would be impossible. The intense cold quickly takes down travelers, and even those who manage to endure it often fall victim to the TEMPORALES, a type of hurricane unique to those areas, which yearly fills the depths of the Cordilleras with dead bodies.
They went on toiling steadily upward all night, hoisting themselves up to almost inaccessible plateaux, and leaping over broad, deep crevasses. They had no ropes, but arms linked in arms supplied the lack, and shoulders served for ladders. The strength of Mulrady and the dexterity of Wilson were taxed heavily now. These two brave Scots multiplied themselves, so to speak. Many a time, but for their devotion and courage the small band could not have gone on. Glenarvan never lost sight of young Robert, for his age and vivacity made him imprudent. Paganel was a true Frenchman in his impetuous ardor, and hurried furiously along. The Major, on the contrary, only went as quick as was necessary, neither more nor less, climbing without the least apparent exertion. Perhaps he hardly knew, indeed, that he was climbing at all, or perhaps he fancied he was descending.
They kept pushing steadily upward all night, pulling themselves up to nearly unreachable plateaus and leaping over wide, deep chasms. They had no ropes, but linking arms made up for that, and shoulders acted as ladders. The strength of Mulrady and the skill of Wilson were really put to the test now. These two brave Scots seemed to multiply themselves, so to speak. Many times, without their dedication and bravery, the small group wouldn’t have been able to continue. Glenarvan never lost sight of young Robert, because his age and energy made him reckless. Paganel was a true Frenchman in his impulsive enthusiasm and rushed ahead furiously. The Major, on the other hand, moved only as fast as needed, no more, no less, climbing with seemingly no effort. Perhaps he hardly realized he was climbing at all, or maybe he thought he was going downhill.
The whole aspect of the region had now completely changed. Huge blocks of glittering ice, of a bluish tint on some of the declivities, stood up on all sides, reflecting the early light of morn. The ascent became very perilous. They were obliged to reconnoiter carefully before making a single step, on account of the crevasses. Wilson took the lead, and tried the ground with his feet. His companions followed exactly in his footprints, lowering their voices to a whisper, as the least sound would disturb the currents of air, and might cause the fall of the masses of snow suspended in the air seven or eight hundred feet above their heads.
The entire look of the area had completely changed. Massive blocks of sparkling ice, some tinted blue, were positioned all around, reflecting the early morning light. The climb became very dangerous. They had to scout carefully before taking even a single step because of the crevasses. Wilson took the lead and tested the ground with his feet. His companions followed exactly in his footsteps, whispering, as even the slightest sound could disturb the air currents and potentially cause the huge masses of snow hanging seven or eight hundred feet above them to fall.
They had come now to the region of shrubs and bushes, which, higher still, gave place to grasses and cacti. At 11,000 feet all trace of vegetation had disappeared. They had only stopped once, to rest and snatch a hurried meal to recruit their strength. With superhuman courage, the ascent was then resumed amid increasing dangers and difficulties. They were forced to bestride sharp peaks and leap over chasms so deep that they did not dare to look down them. In many places wooden crosses marked the scene of some great catastrophes.
They had now arrived in an area filled with shrubs and bushes, which eventually gave way to grasses and cacti as they climbed higher. At 11,000 feet, all signs of plant life had vanished. They had only taken one break to rest and quickly grab a meal to regain their strength. With incredible determination, they continued the climb, facing even greater dangers and challenges. They had to straddle sharp peaks and jump over chasms so deep that they didn’t dare to look down. In many places, wooden crosses marked the sites of past disasters.
About two o’clock they came to an immense barren plain, without a sign of vegetation. The air was dry and the sky unclouded blue. At this elevation rain is unknown, and vapors only condense into snow or hail. Here and there peaks of porphyry or basalt pierced through the white winding-sheet like the bones of a skeleton; and at intervals fragments of quartz or gneiss, loosened by the action of the air, fell down with a faint, dull sound, which in a denser atmosphere would have been almost imperceptible.
About two o’clock they arrived at a vast barren plain, completely devoid of vegetation. The air was dry and the sky was a clear blue. At this elevation, rain is unheard of, and moisture only turns into snow or hail. Here and there, peaks of porphyry or basalt jutted through the white blanket like the bones of a skeleton; occasionally, pieces of quartz or gneiss, loosened by the elements, fell with a soft, dull sound that would have been nearly undetectable in a thicker atmosphere.
However, in spite of their courage, the strength of the little band was giving way. Glenarvan regretted they had gone so far into the interior of the mountain when he saw how exhausted his men had become. Young Robert held out manfully, but he could not go much farther.
However, despite their bravery, the strength of the small group was starting to fade. Glenarvan regretted that they had ventured so deep into the mountain when he saw how worn out his men had become. Young Robert was holding up well, but he couldn’t push much further.
At three o’clock Glenarvan stopped and said:
At three o’clock, Glenarvan paused and said:
“We must rest.”
"We need to rest."
He knew if he did not himself propose it, no one else would.
He knew that if he didn’t propose it himself, no one else would.
“Rest?” rejoined Paganel; “we have no place of shelter.”
“Rest?” replied Paganel; “we have no place to take cover.”
“It is absolutely necessary, however, if it were only for Robert.”
“It is absolutely necessary, though, if only for Robert.”
“No, no,” said the courageous lad; “I can still walk; don’t stop.”
“No, no,” said the brave kid; “I can still walk; don’t stop.”
“You shall be carried, my boy; but we must get to the other side of the Cordilleras, cost what it may. There we may perhaps find some hut to cover us. All I ask is a two hours’ longer march.”
“You're going to be carried, my boy; but we need to get to the other side of the Cordilleras, no matter the cost. There, we might be able to find a hut to shelter us. All I ask is for a two-hour longer march.”
“Are you all of the same opinion?” said Glenarvan.
“Do you all agree?” said Glenarvan.
“Yes,” was the unanimous reply: and Mulrady added, “I’ll carry the boy.”
“Yes,” was the unanimous reply, and Mulrady added, “I’ll carry the kid.”
The march eastward was forthwith resumed. They had a frightful height to climb yet to gain the topmost peaks. The rarefaction of the atmosphere produced that painful oppression known by the name of PUNA. Drops of blood stood on the gums and lips, and respiration became hurried and difficult. However strong the will of these brave men might be, the time came at last when their physical powers failed, and vertigo, that terrible malady in the mountains, destroyed not only their bodily strength but their moral energy. Falls became frequent, and those who fell could not rise again, but dragged themselves along on their knees.
The march eastward quickly continued. They still had a daunting height to climb to reach the highest peaks. The thin air caused that painful feeling known as PUNA. Blood appeared on their gums and lips, and breathing became quick and labored. No matter how strong the determination of these brave men was, there eventually came a time when their physical strength gave out, and vertigo, that dreadful affliction in the mountains, sapped not only their physical power but also their mental resolve. Falls became common, and those who fell couldn’t get back up but crawled along on their knees.
But just as exhaustion was about to make short work of any further ascent, and Glenarvan’s heart began to sink as he thought of the snow lying far as the eye could reach, and of the intense cold, and saw the shadow of night fast overspreading the desolate peaks, and knew they had not a roof to shelter them, suddenly the Major stopped and said, in a calm voice, “A hut!”
But just when exhaustion was about to end any further climbing, Glenarvan felt his heart sink as he thought of the snow stretching as far as he could see, and the bitter cold, and saw the darkness of night quickly covering the lonely peaks, and realized they didn't have a roof to protect them, suddenly the Major stopped and said, in a steady voice, “A hut!”
CHAPTER XIII A SUDDEN DESCENT
ANYONE else but McNabbs might have passed the hut a hundred times, and gone all round it, and even over it without suspecting its existence. It was covered with snow, and scarcely distinguishable from the surrounding rocks; but Wilson and Mulrady succeeded in digging it out and clearing the opening after half an hour’s hard work, to the great joy of the whole party, who eagerly took possession of it.
ANYONE else but McNabbs might have walked by the hut a hundred times, gone all around it, or even over it without realizing it was there. It was covered in snow and barely noticeable among the surrounding rocks; however, Wilson and Mulrady managed to dig it out and clear the entrance after half an hour of hard work, much to the delight of the entire group, who quickly made it their own.
They found it was a CASUCHA, constructed by the Indians, made of ADOBES, a species of bricks baked in the sun. Its form was that of a cube, 12 feet on each side, and it stood on a block of basalt. A stone stair led up to the door, the only opening; and narrow as this door was, the hurricane, and snow, and hail found their way in when the TEMPORALES were unchained in the mountains.
They discovered it was a CASUCHA, built by the Indigenous people, made of ADOBES, a type of sun-baked brick. Its shape was a cube, 12 feet on each side, and it rested on a block of basalt. A stone staircase led up to the door, which was the only opening; and despite how narrow this door was, hurricanes, snow, and hail managed to get in when the TEMPORALES were unleashed in the mountains.
Ten people could easily find room in it, and though the walls might be none too water-tight in the rainy season, at this time of the year, at any rate, it was sufficient protection against the intense cold, which, according to the thermometer, was ten degrees below zero. Besides, there was a sort of fireplace in it, with a chimney of bricks, badly enough put together, certainly, but still it allowed of a fire being lighted.
Ten people could easily fit in it, and even though the walls might not be very waterproof in the rainy season, at this time of year, it provided enough protection from the biting cold, which, according to the thermometer, was ten degrees below zero. Additionally, there was a sort of fireplace in it, with a chimney made of bricks that was definitely poorly built, but it still allowed for a fire to be lit.
“This will shelter us, at any rate,” said Glenarvan, “even if it is not very comfortable. Providence has led us to it, and we can only be thankful.”
“This will protect us, at least,” said Glenarvan, “even if it’s not very comfortable. Fate has brought us here, and we can only be grateful.”
“Why, it is a perfect palace, I call it,” said Paganel; “we only want flunkeys and courtiers. We shall do capital here.”
“Why, it’s a perfect palace, I’d say,” Paganel remarked; “all we need are servants and nobles. We’ll do great here.”
“Especially when there is a good fire blazing on the hearth, for we are quite as cold as we are hungry. For my part, I would rather see a good faggot just now than a slice of venison.”
“Especially when there’s a nice fire crackling in the fireplace, because we’re just as cold as we are hungry. Personally, I’d prefer to see a good bundle of firewood right now over a slice of venison.”
“Well, Tom, we’ll try and get some combustible or other,” said Paganel.
“Well, Tom, we'll try to get some fuel or something,” said Paganel.
“Combustibles on the top of the Cordilleras!” exclaimed Mulrady, in a dubious tone.
“Flammable stuff on the top of the mountains!” exclaimed Mulrady, in a doubtful tone.
“Since there is a chimney in the CASUCHA,” said the Major, “the probability is that we shall find something to burn in it.”
“Since there’s a chimney in the CASUCHA,” said the Major, “there’s a good chance we’ll find something to burn in it.”
“Our friend McNabbs is right,” said Glenarvan. “Get everything in readiness for supper, and I’ll go out and turn woodcutter.”
“Our friend McNabbs is right,” said Glenarvan. “Get everything ready for supper, and I’ll go out and be a woodcutter.”
“Wilson and I will go with you,” said Paganel.
“Wilson and I will go with you,” Paganel said.
“Do you want me?” asked Robert, getting up.
“Do you want me?” Robert asked, standing up.
“No, my brave boy, rest yourself. You’ll be a man, when others are only children at your age,” replied Glenarvan.
“No, my brave boy, take a break. You'll be a man while others are still just kids at your age,” replied Glenarvan.
On reaching the little mound of porphyry, Glenarvan and his two companions left the CASUCHA. In spite of the perfect calmness of the atmosphere, the cold was stinging. Paganel consulted his barometer, and found that the depression of the mercury corresponded to an elevation of 11,000 feet, only 910 meters lower than Mont Blanc. But if these mountains had presented the difficulties of the giant of the Swiss Alps, not one of the travelers could have crossed the great chain of the New World.
Upon reaching the small mound of porphyry, Glenarvan and his two companions left the CASUCHA. Despite the completely calm atmosphere, the cold was biting. Paganel checked his barometer and found that the drop in mercury indicated an elevation of 11,000 feet, just 910 meters lower than Mont Blanc. But if these mountains had posed the same challenges as the giant of the Swiss Alps, none of the travelers would have been able to cross the vast range of the New World.
On reaching a little mound of porphyry, Glenarvan and Paganel stopped to gaze about them and scan the horizon on all sides. They were now on the summit of the Nevadas of the Cordilleras, and could see over an area of forty miles. The valley of the Colorado was already sunk in shadow, and night was fast drawing her mantle over the eastern slopes of the Andes. The western side was illumined by the rays of the setting sun, and peaks and glaciers flashed back his golden beams with dazzling radiance. On the south the view was magnificent. Across the wild valley of the Torbido, about two miles distant, rose the volcano of Antuco. The mountain roared like some enormous monster, and vomited red smoke, mingled with torrents of sooty flame. The surrounding peaks appeared on fire. Showers of red-hot stones, clouds of reddish vapor and rockets of lava, all combined, presented the appearance of glowing sparkling streams. The splendor of the spectacle increased every instant as night deepened, and the whole sky became lighted up with a dazzling reflection of the blazing crater, while the sun, gradually becoming shorn of his sunset glories, disappeared like a star lost in the distant darkness of the horizon.
Upon reaching a small mound of porphyry, Glenarvan and Paganel paused to look around and scan the horizon in all directions. They were now at the peak of the Nevadas of the Cordilleras, able to see over a stretch of forty miles. The Colorado valley was already shrouded in shadow, and night was quickly wrapping its cloak around the eastern slopes of the Andes. The western side was illuminated by the rays of the setting sun, with peaks and glaciers reflecting his golden light in a dazzling display. To the south, the view was breathtaking. Across the rugged valley of the Torbido, about two miles away, towered the volcano of Antuco. The mountain roared like a massive beast, spewing red smoke alongside torrents of blackened flames. The surrounding peaks seemed to be on fire, with showers of red-hot stones, clouds of reddish vapor, and bursts of lava creating the illusion of glowing, sparkling streams. The brilliance of the scene intensified with each passing moment as night fell, illuminating the entire sky with a brilliant reflection from the blazing crater, while the sun, gradually losing its sunset splendor, vanished like a star swallowed by the distant darkness of the horizon.
Paganel and Glenarvan would have remained long enough gazing at the sublime struggle between the fires of earth and heaven, if the more practical Wilson had not reminded them of the business on hand. There was no wood to be found, however, but fortunately the rocks were covered with a poor, dry species of lichen. Of this they made an ample provision, as well as of a plant called LLARETTA, the root of which burns tolerably well. This precious combustible was carried back to the CASUCHA and heaped up on the hearth. It was a difficult matter to kindle it, though, and still more to keep it alight. The air was so rarefied that there was scarcely oxygen enough in it to support combustion. At least, this was the reason assigned by the Major.
Paganel and Glenarvan would have stayed for a long time watching the amazing battle between the fires of earth and sky if the more practical Wilson hadn’t reminded them of the task at hand. However, there was no wood available, but luckily the rocks were covered with a poor, dry type of lichen. They gathered a good amount of this, along with a plant called LLARETTA, the root of which burns fairly well. This valuable fuel was taken back to the CASUCHA and piled onto the hearth. It was challenging to ignite it, and even harder to keep it burning. The air was so thin that there was barely enough oxygen to support combustion. At least, that was the explanation given by the Major.
“By way of compensation, however,” he added, “water will boil at less than 100 degrees heat. It will come to the point of ebullition before 99 degrees.”
“However, to make up for that,” he added, “water will boil at less than 100 degrees. It will reach the boiling point before it even hits 99 degrees.”
McNabbs was right, as the thermometer proved, for it was plunged into the kettle when the water boiled, and the mercury only rose to 99 degrees. Coffee was soon ready, and eagerly gulped down by everybody. The dry meat certainly seemed poor fare, and Paganel couldn’t help saying:
McNabbs was correct, as the thermometer showed, since it was placed into the kettle when the water boiled, and the mercury only climbed to 99 degrees. Coffee was quickly prepared and eagerly consumed by everyone. The dry meat definitely felt like a meager meal, and Paganel couldn't resist commenting:
“I tell you what, some grilled llama wouldn’t be bad with this, would it? They say that the llama is substitute for the ox and the sheep, and I should like to know if it is, in an alimentary respect.”
“I'll tell you, some grilled llama would be nice with this, right? They say llamas can replace oxen and sheep, and I'd really like to know if that's true when it comes to food.”
“What!” replied the Major. “You’re not content with your supper, most learned Paganel.”
“What!” replied the Major. “Aren’t you happy with your dinner, oh wise Paganel?”
“Enchanted with it, my brave Major; still I must confess I should not say no to a dish of llama.”
“I'm captivated by it, my brave Major; but I have to admit, I wouldn't turn down a plate of llama.”
“You are a Sybarite.”
"You are a hedonist."
“I plead guilty to the charge. But come, now, though you call me that, you wouldn’t sulk at a beefsteak yourself, would you?”
“I admit I'm guilty of that. But come on, even if you call me that, you wouldn’t turn down a steak yourself, right?”
“Probably not.”
"Probably not."
“And if you were asked to lie in wait for a llama, notwithstanding the cold and the darkness, you would do it without the least hesitation?”
“And if someone asked you to wait for a llama, even with the cold and the darkness, you would do it without any hesitation?”
“Of course; and if it will give you the slightest pleasure—”
“Of course; and if it will give you even a little pleasure—”
His companions had hardly time to thank him for his obliging good nature, when distant and prolonged howls broke on their ear, plainly not proceeding from one or two solitary animals, but from a whole troop, and one, moreover, that was rapidly approaching.
His friends barely had a moment to thank him for his helpful nature when they heard distant, prolonged howls. It was clear that the sounds weren't coming from just one or two lone animals, but from an entire pack that was quickly getting closer.
Providence had sent them a supper, as well as led them to a hut. This was the geographer’s conclusion; but Glenarvan damped his joy somewhat by remarking that the quadrupeds of the Cordilleras are never met with in such a high latitude.
Providence had sent them dinner, as well as guided them to a hut. This was the geographer’s conclusion; however, Glenarvan cooled his excitement a bit by noting that the animals of the Cordilleras are never found at such a high latitude.
“Then where can these animals come from?” asked Tom Austin. “Don’t you hear them getting nearer!”
“Then where can these animals be coming from?” asked Tom Austin. “Don’t you hear them getting closer?”
“An avalanche,” suggested Mulrady.
"An avalanche," Mulrady suggested.
“Impossible,” returned Paganel. “That is regular howling.”
“Impossible,” Paganel replied. “That’s just plain howling.”
“Let us go out and see,” said Glenarvan.
“Let’s go out and take a look,” said Glenarvan.
“Yes, and be ready for hunting,” replied McNabbs, arming himself with his carbine.
“Yes, and get ready for hunting,” replied McNabbs, grabbing his carbine.
They all rushed forthwith out of the CASUCHA. Night had completely set in, dark and starry. The moon, now in her last quarter, had not yet risen. The peaks on the north and east had disappeared from view, and nothing was visible save the fantastic SILHOUETTE of some towering rocks here and there. The howls, and clearly the howls of terrified animals, were redoubled. They proceeded from that part of the Cordilleras which lay in darkness. What could be going on there? Suddenly a furious avalanche came down, an avalanche of living animals mad with fear. The whole plateau seemed to tremble. There were hundreds, perhaps thousands, of these animals, and in spite of the rarefied atmosphere, their noise was deafening. Were they wild beasts from the Pampas, or herds of llamas and vicunas? Glenarvan, McNabbs, Robert, Austin, and the two sailors, had just time to throw themselves flat on the ground before they swept past like a whirlwind, only a few paces distant. Paganel, who had remained standing, to take advantage of his peculiar powers of sight, was knocked down in a twinkling. At the same moment the report of firearms was heard. The Major had fired, and it seemed to him that an animal had fallen close by, and that the whole herd, yelling louder than ever, had rushed down and disappeared among the declivities lighted up by the reflection of the volcano.
They all rushed out of the CASUCHA. Night had completely set in, dark and starry. The moon, now in its last quarter, hadn’t risen yet. The peaks to the north and east had vanished from view, leaving only the strange silhouettes of some towering rocks here and there. The howls, clearly from terrified animals, grew louder. They came from the dark part of the Cordilleras. What could be happening there? Suddenly, a furious avalanche came crashing down, an avalanche of living animals driven mad by fear. The whole plateau seemed to shake. There were hundreds, maybe thousands, of these creatures, and despite the thin air, their noise was deafening. Were they wild animals from the Pampas, or herds of llamas and vicuñas? Glenarvan, McNabbs, Robert, Austin, and the two sailors barely had time to throw themselves flat on the ground before they swept past like a whirlwind, only a few paces away. Paganel, who had remained standing to take advantage of his keen eyesight, was knocked down in an instant. At the same moment, the sound of gunfire was heard. The Major had fired, and it seemed to him that an animal had fallen nearby, and the whole herd, yelling louder than ever, had rushed down and disappeared among the slopes lit by the reflection of the volcano.
“Ah, I’ve got them,” said a voice, the voice of Paganel.
“Ah, I’ve got them,” said a voice, the voice of Paganel.
“Got what?” asked Glenarvan.
"Got what?" Glenarvan asked.
“My spectacles,” was the reply. “One might expect to lose that much in such a tumult as this.”
“My glasses,” was the reply. “You’d think it’s easy to lose something like that in all this chaos.”
“You are not wounded, I hope?”
"Are you okay?"
“No, only knocked down; but by what?”
“No, just knocked down; but by what?”
“By this,” replied the Major, holding up the animal he had killed.
“By this,” replied the Major, holding up the animal he had shot.
They all hastened eagerly into the hut, to examine McNabbs’ prize by the light of the fire.
They all hurried excitedly into the hut to check out McNabb's prize by the light of the fire.
It was a pretty creature, like a small camel without a hump. The head was small and the body flattened, the legs were long and slender, the skin fine, and the hair the color of cafe au lait.
It was a cute animal, like a small camel without a hump. Its head was small and its body was flat, with long, slender legs, smooth skin, and fur the color of cafe au lait.
Paganel had scarcely looked at it before he exclaimed, “A guanaco!”
Paganel had barely glanced at it before he shouted, “A guanaco!”
“What sort of an animal is that?” asked Glenarvan.
“What kind of animal is that?” asked Glenarvan.
“One you can eat.”
"One you can eat."
“And it is good savory meat, I assure you; a dish of Olympus! I knew we should have fresh meat for supper, and such meat! But who is going to cut up the beast?”
“And it’s really good savory meat, I promise you; a dish fit for the gods! I knew we’d have fresh meat for dinner, and what meat it is! But who’s going to butcher the animal?”
“I will,” said Wilson.
“I will,” Wilson said.
“Well, I’ll undertake to cook it,” said Paganel.
“Well, I’ll take on the cooking,” said Paganel.
“Can you cook, then, Monsieur Paganel?” asked Robert.
“Can you cook, then, Mr. Paganel?” asked Robert.
“I should think so, my boy. I’m a Frenchman, and in every Frenchman there is a cook.”
“I think so, my boy. I’m French, and every French person has a bit of a chef in them.”
Five minutes afterward Paganel began to grill large slices of venison on the embers made by the use of the LLARETTAS, and in about ten minutes a dish was ready, which he served up to his companions by the tempting name of guanaco cutlets. No one stood on ceremony, but fell to with a hearty good will.
Five minutes later, Paganel started grilling large slices of venison over the embers created by the LLARETTAS, and in about ten minutes, he had a dish ready, which he proudly called guanaco cutlets. No one waited for formalities; they dug in with great enthusiasm.
To the absolute stupefaction of the geographer, however, the first mouthful was greeted with a general grimace, and such exclamations as—“Tough!” “It is horrible.” “It is not eatable.”
To the complete shock of the geographer, though, the first bite was met with a collective grimace and exclamations like—“Tough!” “This is awful.” “I can’t eat this.”
The poor SAVANT was obliged to own that his cutlets could not be relished, even by hungry men. They began to banter him about his “Olympian dish,” and indulge in jokes at his expense; but all he cared about was to find out how it happened that the flesh of the guanaco, which was certainly good and eatable food, had turned out so badly in his hands. At last light broke in on him, and he called out:
The poor SAVANT had to admit that his cutlets were inedible, even for starving men. They started to tease him about his “Olympian dish” and made jokes at his expense; but all he really wanted to know was why the flesh of the guanaco, which was definitely good and edible, had turned out so poorly when he cooked it. Finally, he had a breakthrough and shouted out:
“I see through it now! Yes, I see through it. I have found out the secret now.”
“I see through it now! Yes, I see through it. I've figured out the secret now.”
“The meat was too long kept, was it?” asked McNabbs, quietly.
“The meat was kept too long, wasn’t it?” asked McNabbs quietly.
“No, but the meat had walked too much. How could I have forgotten that?”
“No, but the meat had walked too much. How could I have forgotten that?”
“What do you mean?” asked Tom Austin.
“What do you mean?” Tom Austin asked.
“I mean this: the guanaco is only good for eating when it is killed in a state of rest. If it has been long hunted, and gone over much ground before it is captured, it is no longer eatable. I can affirm the fact by the mere taste, that this animal has come a great distance, and consequently the whole herd has.”
“I mean this: the guanaco is only good to eat when it's killed while it's calm. If it has been chased for a long time and has traveled a lot before being caught, it's no longer edible. I can tell just by the taste that this animal has traveled far, and so has the whole herd.”
“You are certain of this?” asked Glenarvan.
“You're sure about this?” asked Glenarvan.
“Absolutely certain.”
"Totally sure."
“But what could have frightened the creatures so, and driven them from their haunts, when they ought to have been quietly sleeping?”
“But what could have scared the creatures so much, and sent them fleeing from their homes, when they should have been peacefully sleeping?”
“That’s a question, my dear Glenarvan, I could not possibly answer. Take my advice, and let us go to sleep without troubling our heads about it. I say, Major, shall we go to sleep?”
“That's a question I can't answer, my dear Glenarvan. Trust me, let's just go to sleep without worrying about it. What do you say, Major, shall we get some rest?”
“Yes, we’ll go to sleep, Paganel.”
“Yes, we’ll go to sleep, Paganel.”
Each one, thereupon, wrapped himself up in his poncho, and the fire was made up for the night.
Each person then wrapped themselves in their poncho, and the fire was set for the night.
Loud snores in every tune and key soon resounded from all sides of the hut, the deep bass contribution of Paganel completing the harmony.
Loud snores in every tune and key soon echoed from all directions of the hut, with Paganel's deep bass adding to the mix.
But Glenarvan could not sleep. Secret uneasiness kept him in a continual state of wakefulness. His thoughts reverted involuntarily to those frightened animals flying in one common direction, impelled by one common terror. They could not be pursued by wild beasts, for at such an elevation there were almost none to be met with, and of hunters still fewer. What terror then could have driven them among the precipices of the Andes? Glenarvan felt a presentiment of approaching danger.
But Glenarvan couldn't sleep. A nagging unease kept him wide awake. His thoughts kept drifting back to those terrified animals running together in one direction, driven by a shared fear. They couldn't be chased by wild beasts, since there were hardly any at such a high altitude, and even fewer hunters. So what kind of terror could have sent them racing through the cliffs of the Andes? Glenarvan sensed that danger was looming.
But gradually he fell into a half-drowsy state, and his apprehensions were lulled. Hope took the place of fear. He saw himself on the morrow on the plains of the Andes, where the search would actually commence, and perhaps success was close at hand. He thought of Captain Grant and his two sailors, and their deliverance from cruel bondage. As these visions passed rapidly through his mind, every now and then he was roused by the crackling of the fire, or sparks flying out, or some little jet of flame would suddenly flare up and illumine the faces of his slumbering companions.
But slowly he drifted into a half-asleep state, and his worries faded away. Hope replaced fear. He imagined himself the next day on the plains of the Andes, where the search would really begin, and maybe success was just around the corner. He thought about Captain Grant and his two sailors, and their rescue from cruel captivity. As these images rushed through his mind, he would occasionally be brought back to reality by the crackling fire, or sparks flying out, or a small flame suddenly flaring up and lighting up the faces of his sleeping companions.
Then his presentiments returned in greater strength than before, and he listened anxiously to the sounds outside the hut.
Then his feelings of foreboding came back stronger than before, and he listened nervously to the noises outside the hut.
At certain intervals he fancied he could hear rumbling noises in the distance, dull and threatening like the mutter-ings of thunder before a storm. There surely must be a storm raging down below at the foot of the mountains. He got up and went out to see.
At times, he thought he could hear rumbling sounds in the distance, low and menacing like the murmurs of thunder before a storm. There had to be a storm raging down below at the base of the mountains. He stood up and went outside to check it out.
The moon was rising. The atmosphere was pure and calm. Not a cloud visible either above or below. Here and there was a passing reflection from the flames of Antuco, but neither storm nor lightning, and myriads of bright stars studded the zenith. Still the rumbling noises continued. They seemed to meet together and cross the chain of the Andes. Glenarvan returned to the CASUCHA more uneasy than ever, questioning within himself as to the connection between these sounds and the flight of the guanacos. He looked at his watch and found the time was about two in the morning. As he had no certainty, however, of any immediate danger, he did not wake his companions, who were sleeping soundly after their fatigue, and after a little dozed off himself, and slumbered heavily for some hours.
The moon was rising. The sky was clear and calm. There wasn’t a cloud in sight, either above or below. Occasionally, there was a flicker from the flames of Antuco, but there was no storm or lightning, and countless bright stars filled the night sky. Still, the rumbling sounds continued. They seemed to converge and travel across the Andes. Glenarvan went back to the CASUCHA feeling more uneasy than ever, wondering about the connection between these noises and the movement of the guanacos. He glanced at his watch and noted it was around two in the morning. Since he wasn’t sure of any immediate danger, he didn’t wake his companions, who were sleeping soundly after their exhaustion, and after a little while, he dozed off himself, sleeping heavily for several hours.
All of a sudden a violent crash made him start to his feet. A deafening noise fell on his ear like the roar of artillery. He felt the ground giving way beneath him, and the CASUCHA rocked to and fro, and opened.
All of a sudden, a loud crash made him jump to his feet. A booming noise hit his ears like the sound of cannon fire. He felt the ground shifting underneath him, and the CASUCHA swayed back and forth and opened up.
He shouted to his companions, but they were already awake, and tumbling pell-mell over each other. They were being rapidly dragged down a steep declivity. Day dawned and revealed a terrible scene. The form of the mountains changed in an instant. Cones were cut off. Tottering peaks disappeared as if some trap had opened at their base. Owing to a peculiar phenomenon of the Cordilleras, an enormous mass, many miles in extent, had been displaced entirely, and was speeding down toward the plain.
He yelled to his friends, but they were already up and tumbling over one another. They were quickly being dragged down a steep slope. Morning arrived and unveiled a shocking scene. The shape of the mountains changed in an instant. Peaks were sliced off. Wobbly summits vanished as if some trap had sprung at their base. Due to a unique phenomenon of the Cordilleras, a massive section, spanning several miles, had completely shifted and was rushing down toward the plain.
“An earthquake!” exclaimed Paganel. He was not mistaken. It was one of those cataclysms frequent in Chili, and in this very region where Copiapo had been twice destroyed, and Santiago four times laid in ruins in fourteen years. This region of the globe is so underlaid with volcanic fires and the volcanoes of recent origin are such insufficient safety valves for the subterranean vapors, that shocks are of frequent occurrence, and are called by the people TREMBLORES.
“An earthquake!” Paganel shouted. He wasn't wrong. It was one of those disasters that happen often in Chile, especially in this area where Copiapó had been destroyed twice, and Santiago had been left in ruins four times in just fourteen years. This part of the world is so filled with volcanic activity, and the recently formed volcanoes don't provide enough relief for the underground gases, that tremors happen frequently and are referred to by the locals as TREMBLORES.
The plateau to which the seven men were clinging, holding on by tufts of lichen, and giddy and terrified in the extreme, was rushing down the declivity with the swiftness of an express, at the rate of fifty miles an hour. Not a cry was possible, nor an attempt to get off or stop. They could not even have heard themselves speak. The internal rumblings, the crash of the avalanches, the fall of masses of granite and basalt, and the whirlwind of pulverized snow, made all communication impossible. Sometimes they went perfectly smoothly along without jolts or jerks, and sometimes on the contrary, the plateau would reel and roll like a ship in a storm, coasting past abysses in which fragments of the mountain were falling, tearing up trees by the roots, and leveling, as if with the keen edge of an immense scythe, every projection of the declivity.
The plateau that the seven men were gripping onto, clinging to tufts of lichen, feeling both dizzy and terrified, was racing down the slope like an express train, at about fifty miles an hour. They couldn’t cry out or make any attempt to escape or stop. They wouldn’t even have been able to hear themselves speak. The deep rumblings, the crashes of avalanches, the crashing of huge chunks of granite and basalt, and the whirlwind of pulverized snow made communication impossible. Sometimes they moved along smoothly without any jolts or bumps, while at other times, the plateau would sway and roll like a ship in a storm, zooming past abysses where chunks of the mountain were tumbling down, uprooting trees, and cutting down every protrusion of the slope as if with the sharp edge of a massive scythe.
How long this indescribable descent would last, no one could calculate, nor what it would end in ultimately. None of the party knew whether the rest were still alive, whether one or another were not already lying in the depths of some abyss. Almost breathless with the swift motion, frozen with the cold air, which pierced them through, and blinded with the whirling snow, they gasped for breath, and became exhausted and nearly inanimate, only retaining their hold of the rocks by a powerful instinct of self-preservation. Suddenly a tremendous shock pitched them right off, and sent them rolling to the very foot of the mountain. The plateau had stopped.
No one could say how long this indescribable descent would last or what it would ultimately lead to. None of the group knew if the others were still alive or if one of them was already lying deep in some abyss. Breathless from the rapid movement, frozen by the frigid air that pierced them, and blinded by swirling snow, they gasped for air and grew exhausted, nearly losing consciousness, only able to cling to the rocks by a strong instinct for survival. Suddenly, a massive shock threw them off and sent them tumbling to the very base of the mountain. The plateau had come to a stop.
For some minutes no one stirred. At last one of the party picked himself up, and stood on his feet, stunned by the shock, but still firm on his legs. This was the Major. He shook off the blinding snow and looked around him. His companions lay in a close circle like the shots from a gun that has just been discharged, piled one on top of another.
For a few minutes, no one moved. Finally, one of the group got up and stood on his feet, dazed by the impact, but still steady. It was the Major. He shook off the blinding snow and looked around. His companions were sprawled in a tight circle like the bullets from a gun that had just been fired, stacked one on top of another.
The Major counted them. All were there except one—that one was Robert Grant.
The Major counted them. Everyone was there except for one person—that was Robert Grant.
CHAPTER XIV PROVIDENTIALLY RESCUED
THE eastern side of the Cordilleras of the Andes consists of a succession of lengthened declivities, which slope down almost insensibly to the plain. The soil is carpeted with rich herbage, and adorned with magnificent trees, among which, in great numbers, were apple-trees, planted at the time of the conquest, and golden with fruit. There were literally, perfect forests of these. This district was, in fact, just a corner of fertile Normandy.
The eastern side of the Andes ranges is made up of a series of long slopes that gradually lead down to the plain. The ground is covered with lush grass and beautiful trees, among which there are many apple trees, planted during the conquest and loaded with fruit. There were literally perfect forests of them. This area was essentially just a piece of fertile Normandy.
The sudden transition from a desert to an oasis, from snowy peaks to verdant plains, from Winter to Summer, can not fail to strike the traveler’s eye.
The abrupt shift from a desert to an oasis, from snowy mountains to lush plains, from Winter to Summer, cannot help but catch the traveler's attention.
The ground, moreover, had recovered its immobility. The trembling had ceased, though there was little doubt the forces below the surface were carrying on their devastating work further on, for shocks of earthquake are always occurring in some part or other of the Andes. This time the shock had been one of extreme violence. The outline of the mountains was wholly altered, and the Pampas guides would have sought vainly for the accustomed landmarks.
The ground had settled down again. The shaking had stopped, but there was no doubt that the forces beneath the surface were still doing their destructive work elsewhere, since earthquakes are always happening somewhere in the Andes. This time, the tremor had been particularly strong. The shape of the mountains had completely changed, and the Pampas guides would have searched in vain for the familiar landmarks.
A magnificent day had dawned. The sun was just rising from his ocean bed, and his bright rays streamed already over the Argentine plains, and ran across to the Atlantic. It was about eight o’clock.
A beautiful day had begun. The sun was just rising from the ocean, and its bright rays were already streaming over the Argentine plains, reaching out to the Atlantic. It was around eight o’clock.
Lord Glenarvan and his companions were gradually restored to animation by the Major’s efforts. They had been completely stunned, but had sustained no injury whatever. The descent of the Cordilleras was accomplished; and as Dame Nature had conveyed them at her own expense, they could only have praised her method of locomotion if one of their number, and that one the feeblest and youngest, the child of the party, had not been missing at the roll call.
Lord Glenarvan and his friends slowly came back to their senses thanks to the Major's efforts. They were totally shocked but had not been hurt at all. They had made it down the Cordilleras, and since Mother Nature had taken them there for free, they would have praised her way of traveling if one of their group, the weakest and youngest, the child of the group, hadn't been missing when they counted heads.
The brave boy was beloved by everybody. Paganel was particularly attached to him, and so was the Major, with all his apparent coldness. As for Glenarvan, he was in absolute despair when he heard of his disappearance, and pictured to himself the child lying in some deep abyss, wildly crying for succor.
The brave boy was loved by everyone. Paganel was especially fond of him, and so was the Major, despite his seemingly cold demeanor. As for Glenarvan, he was in total despair when he learned about his disappearance, imagining the child trapped in some deep chasm, desperately crying for help.
“We must go and look for him, and look till we find him,” he exclaimed, almost unable to keep back his tears. “We cannot leave him to his fate. Every valley and precipice and abyss must be searched through and through. I will have a rope fastened round my waist, and go down myself. I insist upon it; you understand; I insist upon it. Heaven grant Robert may be still alive! If we lose the boy, how could we ever dare to meet the father? What right have we to save the captain at the cost of his son’s life?”
“We need to go find him and keep looking until we do,” he said, barely holding back tears. “We can’t just leave him to whatever happens. Every valley, cliff, and chasm has to be searched thoroughly. I’ll tie a rope around my waist and go down myself. I’m insisting on this; do you understand? I’m insisting on it. Please, let Robert still be alive! If we lose the boy, how could we ever face his father? What right do we have to save the captain at the expense of his son’s life?”
Glenarvan’s companions heard him in silence. He sought to read hope in their eyes, but they did not venture to meet his gaze.
Glenarvan’s companions listened to him quietly. He tried to see hope in their eyes, but they didn’t dare meet his gaze.
At last he said,
Finally, he said,
“Well, you hear what I say, but you make no response. Do you mean to tell me that you have no hope—not the slightest?”
“Well, you hear what I'm saying, but you don't respond. Are you seriously telling me that you have no hope—not even a little?”
Again there was silence, till McNabbs asked:
Again there was silence, until McNabbs asked:
“Which of you can recollect when Robert disappeared?”
“Which of you can remember when Robert went missing?”
No one could say.
No one could tell.
“Well, then,” resumed the Major, “you know this at any rate. Who was the child beside during our descent of the Cordilleras?”
“Well, then,” the Major continued, “at least you know this. Who was the child with us during our descent of the Cordilleras?”
“Beside me,” replied Wilson.
“Next to me,” replied Wilson.
“Very well. Up to what moment did you see him beside you? Try if you can remember.”
“Okay. Until what moment did you see him next to you? See if you can remember.”
“All that I can recollect is that Robert Grant was still by my side, holding fast by a tuft of lichen, less than two minutes before the shock which finished our descent.”
“All I can remember is that Robert Grant was still next to me, holding tightly to a clump of lichen, less than two minutes before the jolt that ended our descent.”
“Less than two minutes? Mind what you are saying; I dare say a minute seemed a very long time to you. Are you sure you are not making a mistake?”
“Less than two minutes? Watch what you’re saying; I bet a minute felt like a really long time to you. Are you sure you’re not mistaken?”
“I don’t think I am. No; it was just about two minutes, as I tell you.”
“I really don’t think so. No; it was only about two minutes, like I said.”
“Very well, then; and was Robert on your right or left?”
“Alright, so was Robert on your right or left?”
“On my left. I remember that his poncho brushed past my face.”
“On my left. I remember his poncho brushing against my face.”
“And with regard to us, how were you placed?”
“And what about us, how were you doing?”
“On the left also.”
“Also on the left.”
“Then Robert must have disappeared on this side,” said the Major, turning toward the mountain and pointing toward the right: “and I should judge,” he added, “considering the time that has elapsed, that the spot where he fell is about two miles up. Between that height and the ground is where we must search, dividing the different zones among us, and it is there we shall find him.”
“Then Robert must have disappeared this way,” the Major said, turning toward the mountain and pointing to the right. “And I’d guess,” he continued, “given how much time has passed, that the place where he fell is about two miles up. We need to search in the area between that height and the ground, splitting the different sections among us, and that’s where we’ll find him.”
Not another word was spoken. The six men commenced their explorations, keeping constantly to the line they had made in their descent, examining closely every fissure, and going into the very depths of the abysses, choked up though they partly were with fragments of the plateau; and more than one came out again with garments torn to rags, and feet and hands bleeding. For many long hours these brave fellows continued their search without dreaming of taking rest. But all in vain. The child had not only met his death on the mountain, but found a grave which some enormous rock had sealed forever.
Not another word was said. The six men started their exploration, sticking closely to the path they had made on their way down, scrutinizing every crack and venturing deep into the chasms, even though many were blocked with debris from the plateau. More than one of them emerged with clothes ripped to shreds and cuts on their hands and feet. For many long hours, these brave men kept searching without even thinking of resting. But it was all for nothing. The child not only met his end on the mountain but also found a grave sealed forever by a massive rock.
About one o’clock, Glenarvan and his companions met again in the valley. Glenarvan was completely crushed with grief. He scarcely spoke. The only words that escaped his lips amid his sighs were,
About one o’clock, Glenarvan and his friends met again in the valley. Glenarvan was completely overwhelmed with grief. He barely spoke. The only words that slipped from his lips between his sighs were,
“I shall not go away! I shall not go away!”
“I’m not leaving! I’m not leaving!”
No one of the party but could enter into his feeling, and respect it.
Everyone in the group could understand his feelings and respect them.
“Let us wait,” said Paganel to the Major and Tom Austin. “We will take a little rest, and recruit our strength. We need it anyway, either to prolong our search or continue our route.”
“Let’s wait,” Paganel said to the Major and Tom Austin. “We should take a little break and regain our strength. We’ll need it, whether to extend our search or continue on our journey.”
“Yes; and, as Edward wishes it, we will rest. He has still hope, but what is it he hopes?”
“Yes; and since Edward wants it, we will take a break. He still has hope, but what exactly is he hoping for?”
“Who knows!” said Tom Austin.
“Who knows?” Tom Austin said.
“Poor Robert!” replied Paganel, brushing away a tear.
“Poor Robert!” Paganel said, wiping away a tear.
The valley was thickly wooded, and the Major had no difficulty in finding a suitable place of encampment. He chose a clump of tall carob trees, under which they arranged their few belongings—few indeed, for all they had were sundry wraps and fire-arms, and a little dried meat and rice. Not far off there was a RIO, which supplied them with water, though it was still somewhat muddy after the disturbance of the avalanche. Mulrady soon had a fire lighted on the grass, and a warm refreshing beverage to offer his master. But Glenarvan refused to touch it, and lay stretched on his poncho in a state of absolute prostration.
The valley was densely forested, and the Major easily found a good spot to set up camp. He picked a cluster of tall carob trees, under which they arranged their few belongings—very few, since all they had were some wraps, weapons, and a little dried meat and rice. Not far away, there was a stream that provided them with water, although it was still a bit muddy from the recent avalanche. Mulrady quickly got a fire going on the grass and offered his master a warm, refreshing drink. But Glenarvan refused to drink it and lay stretched out on his poncho, totally exhausted.
So the day passed, and night came on, calm and peaceful as the preceding had been. While his companions were lying motionless, though wide awake, Glenarvan betook himself once more to the slopes of the Cordilleras, listening intently in hope that some cry for help would fall upon his ear. He ventured far up in spite of his being alone, straining his ear with painful eagerness to catch the faintest sound, and calling aloud in an agony of despair.
So the day went by, and night arrived, as calm and peaceful as the day before. While his friends lay still, even though they were wide awake, Glenarvan made his way back to the slopes of the Cordilleras, listening closely in hopes that he would hear a cry for help. He climbed higher despite being alone, straining to catch even the faintest sound and calling out in agony.
But he heard nothing save the beatings of his own heart, though he wandered all night on the mountain. Sometimes the Major followed him, and sometimes Paganel, ready to lend a helping hand among the slippery peaks and dangerous precipices among which he was dragged by his rash and useless imprudence. All his efforts were in vain, however, and to his repeated cries of “Robert, Robert!” echo was the only response.
But he heard nothing except the pounding of his own heart as he wandered all night on the mountain. Sometimes the Major followed him, and sometimes Paganel, ready to lend a hand among the slippery peaks and dangerous cliffs that he was dragged through due to his reckless and pointless foolishness. All his efforts were in vain, though, and to his repeated cries of “Robert, Robert!” the only response was an echo.
Day dawned, and it now became a matter of necessity to go and bring back the poor Lord from the distant plateau, even against his will. His despair was terrible. Who could dare to speak of quitting this fatal valley? Yet provisions were done, and Argentine guides and horses were not far off to lead them to the Pampas. To go back would be more difficult than to go forward. Besides, the Atlantic Ocean was the appointed meeting place with the DUNCAN. These were strong reasons against any long delay; indeed it was best for all parties to continue the route as soon as possible.
Day broke, and it became essential to go and bring back the poor Lord from the far-off plateau, even if he didn't want to. His despair was overwhelming. Who would dare suggest leaving this cursed valley? But provisions were running low, and Argentine guides and horses were not far away to lead them to the Pampas. Going back would be harder than moving forward. Plus, the Atlantic Ocean was the planned meeting spot with the DUNCAN. These were compelling reasons to avoid any prolonged delay; in fact, it was best for everyone involved to continue on their journey as soon as they could.
McNabbs undertook the task of rousing Lord Glenarvan from his grief. For a long time his cousin seemed not to hear him. At last he shook his head, and said, almost in-audibly:
McNabbs took on the task of waking Lord Glenarvan from his sadness. For a long time, his cousin appeared not to hear him. Finally, he shook his head and said, almost inaudibly:
“Did you say we must start?”
“Did you say we need to get started?”
“Yes, we must start.”
“Yep, let’s get started.”
“Wait one hour longer.”
“Wait one more hour.”
“Yes, we’ll wait another,” replied the Major.
“Yeah, we’ll wait another,” replied the Major.
The hour slipped away, and again Glenarvan begged for longer grace. To hear his imploring tones, one might have thought him a criminal begging a respite. So the day passed on till it was almost noon. McNabbs hesitated now no longer, but, acting on the advice of the rest, told his cousin that start they must, for all their lives depended on prompt action.
The hour went by quickly, and once more Glenarvan pleaded for more time. If you listened to his desperate voice, you might have thought he was a guilty person asking for a delay. So the day continued until it was nearly noon. McNabbs no longer hesitated; following everyone else's advice, he told his cousin that they had to leave, as their lives depended on acting quickly.
“Yes, yes!” replied Glenarvan. “Let us start, let us start!”
“Yes, yes!” Glenarvan replied. “Let’s go, let’s go!”
But he spoke without looking at McNabbs. His gaze was fixed intently on a certain dark speck in the heavens. Suddenly he exclaimed, extending his arm, and keeping it motionless, as if petrified:
But he spoke without looking at McNabbs. His gaze was focused intently on a certain dark spot in the sky. Suddenly, he exclaimed, extending his arm and holding it still, as if frozen.
“There! there! Look! look!”
“Hey! Look! Look!”
All eyes turned immediately in the direction indicated so imperiously. The dark speck was increasing visibly. It was evidently some bird hovering above them.
All eyes immediately turned toward the direction pointed out so commandingly. The dark dot was clearly getting larger. It was obviously some bird flying above them.
“A condor,” said Paganel.
"A condor," Paganel said.
“Yes, a condor,” replied Glenarvan. “Who knows? He is coming down—he is gradually getting lower! Let us wait.”
“Yes, a condor,” replied Glenarvan. “Who knows? It's coming down—it’s getting lower! Let’s wait.”
Paganel was not mistaken, it was assuredly a condor. This magnificent bird is the king of the Southern Andes, and was formerly worshiped by the Incas. It attains an extraordinary development in those regions. Its strength is prodigious. It has frequently driven oxen over the edge of precipices down into the depths of abysses. It seizes sheep, and kids, and young calves, browsing on the plains, and carries them off to inaccessible heights. It hovers in the air far beyond the utmost limits of human sight, and its powers of vision are so great that it can discern the smallest objects on the earth beneath.
Paganel was right; it definitely was a condor. This impressive bird is the king of the Southern Andes and was once worshipped by the Incas. It grows exceptionally large in those areas. Its strength is incredible. It has often pushed oxen off cliffs into the depths of chasms. It catches sheep, goats, and young calves grazing on the plains and carries them off to high, unreachable spots. It soars in the sky far beyond what the human eye can see, and its eyesight is so sharp that it can spot the tiniest details on the ground below.
What had this condor discovered then? Could it be the corpse of Robert Grant? “Who knows?” repeated Glenarvan, keeping his eye immovably fixed on the bird. The enormous creature was fast approaching, sometimes hovering for awhile with outspread wings, and sometimes falling with the swiftness of inert bodies in space. Presently he began to wheel round in wide circles. They could see him distinctly. He measured more than fifteen feet, and his powerful wings bore him along with scarcely the slightest effort, for it is the prerogative of large birds to fly with calm majesty, while insects have to beat their wings a thousand times a second.
What had this condor found then? Could it be the body of Robert Grant? “Who knows?” Glenarvan replied, his gaze fixed firmly on the bird. The enormous creature was getting closer, sometimes gliding with its wings spread wide, and other times diving down with the speed of lifeless objects in the air. Soon, it began to circle in wide loops. They could see it clearly. It measured over fifteen feet, and its strong wings carried it effortlessly, as large birds can fly with a serene grace, while insects have to flap their wings a thousand times a second.
The Major and Wilson had seized their carbines, but Glenarvan stopped them by a gesture. The condor was encircling in his flight a sort of inaccessible plateau about a quarter of a mile up the side of the mountain. He wheeled round and round with dazzling rapidity, opening and shutting his formidable claws, and shaking his cartilaginous carbuncle, or comb.
The Major and Wilson grabbed their carbines, but Glenarvan held them back with a gesture. The condor was circling a kind of unreachable plateau about a quarter of a mile up the mountainside. It spun around rapidly, opening and closing its powerful claws and shaking its cartilaginous comb.
“It is there, there!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“It’s right here!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
A sudden thought flashed across his mind, and with a terrible cry, he called out, “Fire! fire! Oh, suppose Robert were still alive! That bird.”
A sudden thought popped into his head, and with a terrible scream, he shouted, “Fire! Fire! Oh, what if Robert were still alive! That bird.”
But it was too late. The condor had dropped out of sight behind the crags. Only a second passed, a second that seemed an age, and the enormous bird reappeared, carrying a heavy load and flying at a slow rate.
But it was too late. The condor had vanished behind the cliffs. Only a second passed, a second that felt like an eternity, and the huge bird reemerged, carrying a heavy load and flying slowly.
A cry of horror rose on all sides. It was a human body the condor had in his claws, dangling in the air, and apparently lifeless—it was Robert Grant. The bird had seized him by his clothes, and had him hanging already at least one hundred and fifty feet in the air. He had caught sight of the travelers, and was flapping his wings violently, endeavoring to escape with his heavy prey.
A scream of terror erupted all around. The condor had a human body in its claws, dangling in the air and seemingly lifeless—it was Robert Grant. The bird had grabbed him by his clothes, lifting him at least one hundred and fifty feet off the ground. He had spotted the travelers and was flapping his wings wildly, trying to get away with his heavy catch.
“Oh! would that Robert were dashed to pieces against the rocks, rather than be a—”
“Oh! I wish Robert would be smashed against the rocks, rather than be a—”
He did not finish his sentence, but seizing Wilson’s carbine, took aim at the condor. His arm was too trembling, however, to keep the weapon steady.
He didn’t finish his sentence, but grabbing Wilson’s carbine, he aimed at the condor. His arm was shaking too much, though, to keep the weapon steady.
“Let me do it,” said the Major. And with a calm eye, and sure hands and motionless body, he aimed at the bird, now three hundred feet above him in the air.
“Let me do it,” said the Major. With a steady gaze, confident hands, and a still body, he aimed at the bird, now three hundred feet above him in the sky.
But before he had pulled the trigger the report of a gun resounded from the bottom of the valley. A white smoke rose from between two masses of basalt, and the condor, shot in the head, gradually turned over and began to fall, supported by his great wings spread out like a parachute. He had not let go his prey, but gently sank down with it on the ground, about ten paces from the stream.
But before he pulled the trigger, the sound of a gunshot echoed from the bottom of the valley. A white cloud of smoke rose between two chunks of basalt, and the condor, shot in the head, slowly turned over and started to fall, its huge wings spread out like a parachute. It hadn’t released its prey but gently descended with it to the ground, landing about ten steps from the stream.
“We’ve got him, we’ve got him,” shouted Glenarvan; and without waiting to see where the shot so providentially came from, he rushed toward the condor, followed by his companions.
“We’ve got him, we’ve got him,” shouted Glenarvan; and without waiting to see where the shot had surprisingly come from, he rushed toward the condor, followed by his companions.
When they reached the spot the bird was dead, and the body of Robert was quite concealed beneath his mighty wings. Glenarvan flung himself on the corpse, and dragging it from the condor’s grasp, placed it flat on the grass, and knelt down and put his ear to the heart.
When they arrived at the location, the bird was dead, and Robert's body was completely hidden beneath its enormous wings. Glenarvan threw himself onto the corpse, pulled it from the condor's hold, laid it flat on the grass, and knelt down to listen to its heart.
But a wilder cry of joy never broke from human lips, than Glenarvan uttered the next moment, as he started to his feet and exclaimed:
But a wilder cry of joy never broke from human lips than Glenarvan let out the next moment as he jumped to his feet and exclaimed:
“He is alive! He is still alive!”
"He's alive! He's still here!"
The boy’s clothes were stripped off in an instant, and his face bathed with cold water. He moved slightly, opened his eyes, looked round and murmured, “Oh, my Lord! Is it you!” he said; “my father!”
The boy's clothes were removed in an instant, and his face splashed with cold water. He stirred a bit, opened his eyes, looked around and murmured, “Oh my Lord! Is it you?” he said; “my dad!”
Glenarvan could not reply. He was speechless with emotion, and kneeling down by the side of the child so miraculously saved, burst into tears.
Glenarvan couldn't respond. He was overwhelmed with emotion, and kneeling beside the child who had been saved so miraculously, he broke down in tears.
CHAPTER XV THALCAVE
ROBERT had no sooner escaped one terrible danger than he ran the risk of another scarcely less formidable. He was almost torn to pieces by his friends, for the brave fellows were so overjoyed at the sight of him, that in spite of his weak state, none of them would be satisfied without giving him a hug. However, it seemed as if good rough hugging did not hurt sick people; at any rate it did not hurt Robert, but quite the contrary.
ROBERT had barely escaped one terrible danger when he found himself facing another just as scary. His friends nearly overwhelmed him, so overjoyed to see him that, despite his weakness, none of them could resist giving him a hug. However, it turned out that good, hearty hugs didn’t harm sick people; at least, they didn’t hurt Robert—in fact, it was quite the opposite.
But the first joy of deliverance over, the next thought was who was the deliverer? Of course it was the Major who suggested looking for him, and he was not far off, for about fifty paces from the RIO a man of very tall stature was seen standing motionless on the lowest crags at the foot of the mountain. A long gun was lying at his feet.
But once the initial joy of being rescued wore off, the next thought was, who was the rescuer? Naturally, it was the Major who proposed searching for him, and he wasn't far away, as about fifty paces from the RIO, a very tall man was spotted standing still on the lowest rocks at the base of the mountain. A long gun rested at his feet.
He had broad shoulders, and long hair bound together with leather thongs. He was over six feet in height. His bronzed face was red between the eyes and mouth, black by the lower eyelids, and white on the forehead. He wore the costume of the Patagonians on the frontiers, consisting of a splendid cloak, ornamented with scarlet arabesques, made of the skins of the guanaco, sewed together with ostrich tendons, and with the silky wool turned up on the edge. Under this mantle was a garment of fox-skin, fastened round the waist, and coming down to a point in front. A little bag hung from his belt, containing colors for painting his face. His boots were pieces of ox hide, fastened round the ankles by straps, across.
He had broad shoulders and long hair tied up with leather thongs. He was over six feet tall. His bronzed face was red between the eyes and mouth, black under the lower eyelids, and white on the forehead. He wore the traditional outfit of the Patagonians on the frontiers, which included a stunning cloak decorated with scarlet designs, made from guanaco skins sewn together with ostrich tendons, with the soft wool flipped up at the edge. Under this cloak, he wore a fox-skin garment, secured around the waist and tapering to a point in front. A small bag dangled from his belt, containing paints for decorating his face. His boots were made from pieces of ox hide, strapped around the ankles.
This Patagonian had a splendid face, indicating real intelligence, notwithstanding the medley of colors by which it was disfigured. His waiting attitude was full of dignity; indeed, to see him standing grave and motionless on his pedestal of rocks, one might have taken him for a statue of sang-froid.
This Patagonian had a striking face that suggested genuine intelligence, despite the mix of colors that distorted it. His poised stance exuded dignity; in fact, seeing him standing serious and still on his rocky pedestal, one might have mistaken him for a statue of sang-froid.
As soon as the Major perceived him, he pointed him out to Glenarvan, who ran toward him immediately. The Patagonian came two steps forward to meet him, and Glenarvan caught hold of his hand and pressed it in his own. It was impossible to mistake the meaning of the action, for the noble face of the Scotch lord so beamed with gratitude that no words were needed. The stranger bowed slightly in return, and said a few words that neither Glenarvan nor the Major could understand.
As soon as the Major saw him, he pointed him out to Glenarvan, who quickly ran over. The Patagonian stepped forward to meet him, and Glenarvan took his hand and squeezed it. There was no mistaking the meaning behind the gesture; the grateful expression on the Scottish lord's face said it all. The stranger gave a slight bow in response and said a few words that neither Glenarvan nor the Major could understand.
The Patagonian surveyed them attentively for a few minutes, and spoke again in another language. But this second idiom was no more intelligible than the first. Certain words, however, caught Glenarvan’s ear as sounding like Spanish, a few sentences of which he could speak.
The Patagonian watched them closely for a few minutes and then spoke again in a different language. But this second language was just as unintelligible as the first. However, some words caught Glenarvan’s attention, sounding like Spanish, which he could speak a little of.
“ESPANOL?” he asked.
“Spanish?” he asked.
The Patagonian nodded in reply, a movement of the head which has an affirmative significance among all nations.
The Patagonian nodded in response, a gesture that carries an affirmative meaning in every culture.
“That’s good!” said the Major. “Our friend Paganel will be the very man for him. It is lucky for us that he took it into his head to learn Spanish.”
“That's great!” said the Major. “Our friend Paganel will be the perfect fit for him. It’s fortunate for us that he decided to learn Spanish.”
Paganel was called forthwith. He came at once, and saluted the stranger with all the grace of a Frenchman. But his compliments were lost on the Patagonian, for he did not understand a single syllable.
Paganel was called immediately. He arrived right away and greeted the stranger with all the charm of a Frenchman. However, his flattery didn't mean anything to the Patagonian, as he didn't understand a single word.
However, on being told how things stood, he began in Spanish, and opening his mouth as wide as he could, the better to articulate, said:
However, when he was informed about the situation, he started speaking in Spanish, and opening his mouth as wide as he could to articulate better, he said:
“Vos sois um homen de bem.” (You are a brave man.)
You're a good person.
The native listened, but made no reply.
The native listened but didn’t respond.
“He doesn’t understand,” said the geographer.
"He doesn't get it," said the geographer.
“Perhaps you haven’t the right accent,” suggested the Major.
“Maybe you don’t have the right accent,” suggested the Major.
“That’s just it! Confound the accent!”
“That’s just it! Damn the accent!”
Once more Paganel repeated his compliment, but with no better success.
Once again, Paganel repeated his compliment, but it didn’t go any better.
“I’ll change the phrase,” he said; and in slow, deliberate tones he went on, “Sam duvida um Patagao” (A Patagonian, undoubtedly).
“I’ll change the phrase,” he said; and in slow, deliberate tones he went on, “Sam duvida um Patagao” (A Patagonian, undoubtedly).
No response still.
Still no response.
“DIZEIME!” said Paganel (Answer me).
“DIZEIME!” said Paganel (Reply to me).
But no answer came.
But no response came.
“Vos compriendeis?” (Do you understand?) shouted Paganel, at the very top of his voice, as if he would burst his throat.
“Do you understand?” shouted Paganel at the top of his lungs, as if he would break his throat.
Evidently the Indian did not understand, for he replied in Spanish,
Evidently, the Indian didn't understand, so he responded in Spanish,
“No comprendo” (I do not understand).
“I don’t get it.”
It was Paganel’s turn now to be amazed. He pushed his spectacles right down over his nose, as if greatly irritated, and said,
It was Paganel’s turn now to be amazed. He pushed his glasses down over his nose, as if really annoyed, and said,
“I’ll be hanged if I can make out one word of his infernal patois. It is Araucanian, that’s certain!”
"I'll be damned if I can understand a single word of his annoying dialect. It's definitely Araucanian!"
“Not a bit of it!” said Glenarvan. “It was Spanish he spoke.”
“Not at all!” said Glenarvan. “He was speaking Spanish.”
And addressing the Patagonian, he repeated the word, “ESPANOL?” (Spanish?).
And looking at the Patagonian, he asked again, “ESPANOL?” (Spanish?).
“Si, si” (yes, yes) replied the Indian.
“Yeah, yeah” replied the Indian.
Paganel’s surprise became absolute stupefaction. The Major and his cousin exchanged sly glances, and McNabbs said, mischievously, with a look of fun on his face, “Ah, ah, my worthy friend; is this another of your misadventures? You seem to have quite a monopoly of them.”
Paganel's surprise turned into complete shock. The Major and his cousin exchanged knowing glances, and McNabbs said playfully, with a smirk on his face, “Oh, oh, my good friend; is this another one of your mishaps? You really seem to have a lot of them.”
“What!” said Paganel, pricking up his ear.
“What!” said Paganel, perking up his ears.
“Yes, it’s clear enough the man speaks Spanish.”
“Yes, it’s obvious that the man speaks Spanish.”
“He!”
"Hey!"
“Yes, he certainly speaks Spanish. Perhaps it is some other language you have been studying all this time instead of—”
“Yes, he definitely speaks Spanish. Maybe it’s another language you’ve been studying this whole time instead of—”
But Paganel would not allow him to proceed. He shrugged his shoulders, and said stiffly,
But Paganel wouldn’t let him go on. He shrugged his shoulders and said rigidly,
“You go a little too far, Major.”
"You've gone a bit overboard, Major."
“Well, how is it that you don’t understand him then?”
“Well, how is it that you don’t get him then?”
“Why, of course, because the man speaks badly,” replied the learned geographer, getting impatient.
“Of course, because the guy speaks poorly,” replied the knowledgeable geographer, getting impatient.
“He speaks badly; that is to say, because you can’t understand him,” returned the Major coolly.
“He speaks poorly; in other words, you can’t understand him,” replied the Major calmly.
“Come, come, McNabbs,” put in Glenarvan, “your supposition is quite inadmissable. However DISTRAIT our friend Paganel is, it is hardly likely he would study one language for another.”
“Come on, McNabbs,” Glenarvan said, “your assumption doesn’t hold up. No matter how distracted our friend Paganel is, it’s unlikely he would learn one language instead of another.”
“Well, Edward—or rather you, my good Paganel—explain it then.”
“Well, Edward—or actually you, my good Paganel—go ahead and explain it then.”
“I explain nothing. I give proof. Here is the book I use daily, to practice myself in the difficulties of the Spanish language. Examine it for yourself, Major,” he said, handing him a volume in a very ragged condition, which he had brought up, after a long rummage, from the depths of one of his numerous pockets. “Now you can see whether I am imposing on you,” he continued, indignantly.
“I don’t explain anything. I provide proof. Here’s the book I use every day to practice the challenges of the Spanish language. Check it out for yourself, Major,” he said, handing him a very worn-out volume that he had pulled out from one of his many pockets after searching for a long time. “Now you can see if I’m trying to fool you,” he continued, angrily.
“And what’s the name of this book?” asked the Major, as he took it from his hand.
“And what’s the name of this book?” the Major asked as he took it from his hand.
“The LUSIADES, an admirable epic, which—”
“The LUSIADES, an impressive epic, which—”
“The LUSIADES!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“The LUSIADES!” Glenarvan exclaimed.
“Yes, my friend, the LUSIADES of the great Camoens, neither more nor less.”
“Yes, my friend, the LUSIADS of the great Camoens, neither more nor less.”
“Camoens!” repeated Glenarvan; “but Paganel, my unfortunate fellow, Camoens was a Portuguese! It is Portuguese you have been learning for the last six weeks!”
“Camoens!” repeated Glenarvan; “but Paganel, my poor friend, Camoens was Portuguese! It's Portuguese you've been studying for the last six weeks!”
“Camoens! LUISADES! Portuguese!” Paganel could not say more. He looked vexed, while his companions, who had all gathered round, broke out in a furious burst of laughter.
“Camoens! LUISADES! Portuguese!” Paganel couldn’t say more. He looked frustrated, while his friends, who had all gathered around, erupted into a wild burst of laughter.
The Indian never moved a muscle of his face. He quietly awaited the explanation of this incomprehensible mirth.
The Indian didn't show any expression on his face. He silently waited for the explanation of this confusing laughter.
“Fool, idiot, that I am!” at last uttered Paganel. “Is it really a fact? You are not joking with me? It is what I have actually been doing? Why, it is a second confusion of tongues, like Babel. Ah me! alack-a-day! my friends, what is to become of me? To start for India and arrive at Chili! To learn Spanish and talk Portuguese! Why, if I go on like this, some day I shall be throwing myself out of the window instead of my cigar!”
“Fool, idiot, that I am!” Paganel finally said. “Is this really true? You're not joking with me? Is this really what I've been doing? It’s like a second confusion of languages, just like Babel. Oh no! My friends, what am I going to do? To set off for India and end up in Chile! To learn Spanish and speak Portuguese! At this rate, I’ll end up throwing myself out of the window instead of my cigar!”
To hear Paganel bemoan his misadventures and see his comical discomfiture, would have upset anyone’s gravity. Besides, he set the example himself, and said:
To hear Paganel complain about his bad luck and see his funny awkwardness would have shaken anyone’s serious demeanor. Besides, he led by example and said:
“Laugh away, my friends, laugh as loud as you like; you can’t laugh at me half as much as I laugh at myself!”
“Laugh all you want, my friends, laugh as loud as you like; you can’t laugh at me half as much as I laugh at myself!”
“But, I say,” said the Major, after a minute, “this doesn’t alter the fact that we have no interpreter.”
"But, I gotta say," the Major said after a moment, "this doesn’t change the fact that we don’t have an interpreter."
“Oh, don’t distress yourself about that,” replied Paganel, “Portuguese and Spanish are so much alike that I made a mistake; but this very resemblance will be a great help toward rectifying it. In a very short time I shall be able to thank the Patagonian in the language he speaks so well.”
“Oh, don’t worry about that,” replied Paganel, “Portuguese and Spanish are so similar that I mixed them up; but this similarity will really help me fix it. In no time, I’ll be able to thank the Patagonian in the language he speaks so well.”
Paganel was right. He soon managed to exchange a few words with the stranger, and found out even that his name was Thalcave, a word that signified in Araucanian, “The Thunderer.” This surname had, no doubt, come from his skill in handling fire-arms.
Paganel was right. He soon managed to exchange a few words with the stranger and discovered that his name was Thalcave, a term in Araucanian meaning “The Thunderer.” This nickname surely came from his talent with firearms.
But what rejoiced Glenarvan most was to learn that he was a guide by occupation, and, moreover, a guide across the Pampas. To his mind, the meeting with him was so providential, that he could not doubt now of the success of their enterprise. The deliverance of Captain Grant seemed an accomplished fact.
But what made Glenarvan happiest was finding out that he was a guide by profession, and even better, a guide across the Pampas. To him, meeting this man felt so lucky that he couldn't doubt the success of their mission anymore. It seemed certain that they would save Captain Grant.
When the party went back to Robert, the boy held out his arms to the Patagonian, who silently laid his hand on his head, and proceeded to examine him with the greatest care, gently feeling each of his aching limbs. Then he went down to the RIO, and gathered a few handfuls of wild celery, which grew on the banks, with which he rubbed the child’s body all over. He handled him with the most exquisite delicacy, and his treatment so revived the lad’s strength, that it was soon evident that a few hours’ rest would set him all right.
When the group returned to Robert, the boy opened his arms to the Patagonian, who quietly placed his hand on the boy's head and carefully examined him, gently feeling each of his sore limbs. Then he went down to the river and picked some wild celery from the banks, using it to rub the child's body all over. He was incredibly gentle, and his care boosted the boy's strength so much that it quickly became clear that a few hours of rest would make him feel better.
It was accordingly decided that they should encamp for the rest of the day and the ensuing night. Two grave questions, moreover, had to be settled: where to get food, and means of transport. Provisions and mules were both lacking. Happily, they had Thalcave, however, a practised guide, and one of the most intelligent of his class. He undertook to find all that was needed, and offered to take him to a TOLDERIA of Indians, not further than four miles off at most, where he could get supplies of all he wanted. This proposition was partly made by gestures, and partly by a few Spanish words which Paganel managed to make out. His offer was accepted, and Glenarvan and his learned friend started off with him at once.
They decided to camp for the rest of the day and the night ahead. Two serious issues needed to be addressed: where to find food and how to transport it. They were short on both supplies and mules. Fortunately, they had Thalcave, an experienced guide and one of the smartest among them. He offered to gather everything they needed and proposed taking them to a TOLDERIA of Indians, no more than four miles away, where they could get all the supplies they required. He communicated this partly through gestures and partly with a few Spanish words that Paganel was able to understand. They accepted his offer, and Glenarvan and his knowledgeable friend set off with him immediately.
They walked at a good pace for an hour and a half, and had to make great strides to keep up with the giant Thalcave. The road lay through a beautiful fertile region, abounding in rich pasturages; where a hundred thousand cattle might have fed comfortably. Large ponds, connected by an inextricable labyrinth of RIOS, amply watered these plains and produced their greenness. Swans with black heads were disporting in the water, disputing possession with the numerous intruders which gamboled over the LLANOS. The feathered tribes were of most brilliant plumage, and of marvelous variety and deafening noise. The isacus, a graceful sort of dove with gray feathers streaked with white, and the yellow cardinals, were flitting about in the trees like moving flowers; while overhead pigeons, sparrows, chingolos, bulgueros, and mongitas, were flying swiftly along, rending the air with their piercing cries.
They walked at a brisk pace for an hour and a half, having to take big strides to keep up with the giant Thalcave. The path led through a beautiful, fertile area, filled with lush pastures where a hundred thousand cattle could graze comfortably. Large ponds, connected by a complicated maze of rivers, provided plenty of water for these plains and contributed to their greenery. Swans with black heads were enjoying the water, vying for space with the many intruders that frolicked across the plains. The birdlife was incredibly colorful, diverse, and noisy. The isacus, a graceful type of dove with gray feathers streaked with white, and the yellow cardinals flitted about in the trees like moving flowers, while overhead, pigeons, sparrows, chingolos, bulgueros, and mongitas flew quickly by, filling the air with their sharp calls.
Paganel’s admiration increased with every step, and he had nearly exhausted his vocabulary of adjectives by his loud exclamations, to the astonishment of the Patagonian, to whom the birds, and the swans, and the prairies were every day things. The learned geographer was so lost in delight, that he seemed hardly to have started before they came in sight of the Indian camp, or TOLDERIA, situated in the heart of a valley.
Paganel’s admiration grew with every step, and he had almost run out of words to describe it with his loud exclamations, surprising the Patagonian, for whom the birds, swans, and prairies were nothing extraordinary. The knowledgeable geographer was so caught up in his excitement that it felt like they had barely begun before they spotted the Indian camp, or TOLDERIA, nestled in the heart of a valley.
About thirty nomadic Indians were living there in rude cabins made of branches, pasturing immense herds of milch cows, sheep, oxen, and horses. They went from one prairie to another, always finding a well-spread table for their four-footed guests.
About thirty nomadic Native Americans were living there in simple cabins made of branches, taking care of large herds of milk cows, sheep, oxen, and horses. They moved from one prairie to another, always finding a good spread for their four-legged friends.
These nomads were a hybrid type of Araucans, Pehu-enches, and Aucas. They were Ando-Peruvians, of an olive tint, of medium stature and massive form, with a low forehead, almost circular face, thin lips, high cheekbones, effeminate features, and cold expression. As a whole, they are about the least interesting of the Indians. However, it was their herds Glenarvan wanted, not themselves. As long as he could get beef and horses, he cared for nothing else.
These nomads were a mix of Araucans, Pehu-enches, and Aucas. They were Ando-Peruvians, with an olive complexion, average height, and strong builds, featuring a low forehead, nearly round face, thin lips, prominent cheekbones, delicate features, and a distant expression. Overall, they are among the least interesting of the Indigenous peoples. However, it was their livestock that Glenarvan was after, not them. As long as he could get beef and horses, he didn't care about anything else.
Thalcave did the bargaining. It did not take long. In exchange for seven ready saddled horses of the Argentine breed, 100 pounds of CHARQUI, or dried meat, several measures of rice, and leather bottles for water, the Indians agreed to take twenty ounces of gold as they could not get wine or rum, which they would have preferred, though they were perfectly acquainted with the value of gold. Glenarvan wished to purchase an eighth horse for the Patagonian, but he gave him to understand that it would be useless.
Thalcave handled the negotiation. It didn't take long. In exchange for seven fully saddled Argentine horses, 100 pounds of jerky, some bags of rice, and leather water bottles, the Indians agreed to accept twenty ounces of gold since they couldn't get wine or rum, which they would have preferred, even though they knew the value of gold. Glenarvan wanted to buy an eighth horse for the Patagonian, but he let him know it would be pointless.
They got back to the camp in less than half an hour, and were hailed with acclamations by the whole party or rather the provisions and horses were. They were all hungry, and ate heartily of the welcome viands. Robert took a little food with the rest. He was fast recovering strength. The close of the day was spent in complete repose and pleasant talk about the dear absent ones.
They returned to the camp in under thirty minutes, and the whole group—well, more like the supplies and horses—cheered for them. Everyone was hungry and enjoyed the tasty food. Robert had a bit to eat as well. He was quickly regaining his strength. The end of the day was filled with relaxation and enjoyable conversations about their beloved friends who were away.
Paganel never quitted the Indian’s side. It was not that he was so glad to see a real Patagonian, by whom he looked a perfect pigmy—a Patagonian who might have almost rivaled the Emperor Maximii, and that Congo negro seen by the learned Van der Brock, both eight feet high; but he caught up Spanish phrases from the Indian and studied the language without a book this time, gesticulating at a great rate all the grand sonorous words that fell on his ear.
Paganel never left the Indian’s side. It wasn’t that he was so excited to see a real Patagonian, who made him look like a total little guy—a Patagonian who could have nearly matched the Emperor Maximii and that Congolese man described by the scholar Van der Brock, both eight feet tall; but he picked up Spanish phrases from the Indian and learned the language without a book this time, waving his arms enthusiastically at all the grand, impressive words he heard.
“If I don’t catch the accent,” he said to the Major, “it won’t be my fault; but who would have said to me that it was a Patagonian who would teach me Spanish one day?”
“If I don’t get the accent right,” he said to the Major, “it won’t be my fault; but who would have thought that a Patagonian would be the one to teach me Spanish one day?”
CHAPTER XVI THE NEWS OF THE LOST CAPTAIN
NEXT day, the 22d of October, at eight o’clock in the morning, Thalcave gave the signal for departure. Between the 22d and 42d degrees the Argentine soil slopes eastward, and all the travelers had to do was to follow the slope right down to the sea.
NEXT day, the 22nd of October, at eight o’clock in the morning, Thalcave gave the signal to leave. Between the 22nd and 42nd degrees, the Argentine land slants eastward, and all the travelers had to do was follow the slope straight down to the sea.
Glenarvan had supposed Thalcave’s refusal of a horse was that he preferred walking, as some guides do, but he was mistaken, for just as they were ready, the Patagonian gave a peculiar whistle, and immediately a magnificent steed of the pure Argentine breed came bounding out of a grove close by, at his master’s call. Both in form and color the animal was of perfect beauty. The Major, who was a thorough judge of all the good points of a horse, was loud in admiration of this sample of the Pampas breed, and considered that, in many respects, he greatly resembled an English hunter. This splendid creature was called “Thaouka,” a word in Patagonia which means bird, and he well deserved the name.
Glenarvan thought Thalcave turned down a horse because he preferred to walk like some guides do, but he was wrong. Just as they were getting ready, Thalcave gave a distinctive whistle, and right away, a stunning steed of pure Argentine breed came rushing out of a nearby grove at his master’s call. The horse was flawless in both shape and color. The Major, who knew all the key traits of a good horse, praised this example of the Pampas breed and felt that in many ways, it closely resembled an English hunter. This magnificent animal was named “Thaouka,” which means bird in Patagonia, and it truly lived up to the name.
Thalcave was a consummate horseman, and to see him on his prancing steed was a sight worth looking at. The saddle was adapted to the two hunting weapons in common use on the Argentine plains—the BOLAS and the LAZO. The BOLAS consists of three balls fastened together by a strap of leather, attached to the front of the RECADO. The Indians fling them often at the distance of a hundred feet from the animal or enemy of which they are in pursuit, and with such precision that they catch round their legs and throw them down in an instant. It is a formidable weapon in their hands, and one they handle with surprising skill. The LAZO is always retained in the hand. It is simply a rope, thirty feet long, made of tightly twisted leather, with a slip knot at the end, which passes through an iron ring. This noose was thrown by the right hand, while the left keeps fast hold of the rope, the other end of which is fastened to the saddle. A long carbine, in the shoulder belt completed the accouterments of the Patagonian.
Thalcave was an expert horseman, and watching him on his lively horse was definitely a sight to behold. The saddle was designed for the two main hunting tools used on the Argentine plains—the BOLAS and the LAZO. The BOLAS consists of three balls connected by a leather strap, attached to the front of the RECADO. The Indians often throw them from as far as a hundred feet away at the animal or enemy they’re pursuing, and they do so with such accuracy that they wrap around their legs and take them down instantly. It’s a powerful weapon in their hands, and they use it with astonishing skill. The LAZO is held in the hand at all times. It’s just a thirty-foot long rope made of tightly twisted leather, with a slip knot at one end that goes through an iron ring. The noose is thrown with the right hand while the left holds onto the other end of the rope, which is attached to the saddle. A long carbine in the shoulder belt completed the gear of the Patagonian.
He took his place at the head of the party, quite unconscious of the admiration he was exciting, and they set off, going alternately at a gallop and walking pace, for the “trot” seemed altogether unknown to them. Robert proved to be a bold rider, and completely reassured Glenarvan as to his ability to keep his seat.
He took his spot at the front of the group, completely unaware of the admiration he was generating, and they began their journey, switching between a gallop and a slow walk, since the “trot” seemed completely unfamiliar to them. Robert turned out to be a daring rider, fully reassuring Glenarvan about his ability to stay in the saddle.
The Pampas commenced at the very foot of the Cordilleras. They may be divided into three parts. The first extends from the chain of the Andes, and stretches over an extent of 250 miles covered with stunted trees and bushes; the second 450 miles is clothed with magnificent herbage, and stops about 180 miles from Buenos Ayres; from this point to the sea, the foot of the traveler treads over immense prairies of lucerne and thistles, which constitute the third division of the Pampas.
The Pampas start right at the base of the Andes Mountains. They can be split into three sections. The first section goes from the Andes chain and covers an area of 250 miles filled with small trees and bushes. The second section, which is 450 miles long, is covered in beautiful grass and ends about 180 miles from Buenos Aires. From that point to the coast, travelers walk over vast fields of alfalfa and thistles, which make up the third section of the Pampas.
On issuing from the gorges of the Cordilleras, Glenarvan and his band came first to plains of sand, called MEDANOS, lying in ridges like waves of the sea, and so extremely fine that the least breath of wind agitated the light particles, and sent them flying in clouds, which rose and fell like water-spouts. It was a spectacle which caused both pleasure and pain, for nothing could be more curious than to see the said water-spouts wandering over the plain, coming in contact and mingling with each other, and falling and rising in wild confusion; but, on the other hand, nothing could be more disagreeable than the dust which was thrown off by these innumerable MEDANOS, which was so impalpable that close one’s eyes as they might, it found its way through the lids.
As Glenarvan and his group emerged from the gorges of the Cordilleras, they first encountered the sandy plains known as MEDANOS, which stretched out in ridges like ocean waves. The sand was so fine that even the slightest breeze stirred up the light particles, sending them swirling into clouds that rose and fell like water spouts. It was a sight that brought both enjoyment and discomfort; nothing was more fascinating than watching these so-called water spouts drifting across the plain, colliding and blending with one another, rising and falling in chaotic confusion. However, nothing was more unpleasant than the dust kicked up by these countless MEDANOS, which was so fine that no matter how tightly one closed their eyes, it managed to get through the eyelids.
This phenomenon lasted the greater part of the day. The travelers made good progress, however, and about four o’clock the Cordilleras lay full forty miles behind them, the dark outlines being already almost lost in the evening mists. They were all somewhat fatigued with the journey, and glad enough to halt for the night on the banks of the Neuquem, called Ramid, or Comoe by certain geographers, a troubled, turbulent rapid flowing between high red banks.
This event lasted most of the day. The travelers made good headway, though, and by around four o’clock, the Cordilleras were already nearly forty miles behind them, their dark shapes almost fading into the evening fog. They were all a bit tired from the journey and were relieved to stop for the night on the banks of the Neuquem, known as Ramid or Comoe by some geographers, a rough, fast-moving rapid flowing between tall red banks.
No incident of any importance occurred that night or the following day. They rode well and fast, finding the ground firm, and the temperature bearable. Toward noon, however, the sun’s rays were extremely scorching, and when evening came, a bar of clouds streaked the southwest horizon—a sure sign of a change in the weather. The Patagonian pointed it out to the geographer, who replied:
No significant events took place that night or the next day. They rode smoothly and quickly, finding the ground solid and the weather manageable. However, around noon, the sun became intensely hot, and by evening, a band of clouds lined the southwestern horizon—a clear indication of changing weather. The Patagonian pointed this out to the geographer, who responded:
“Yes, I know;” and turning to his companions, added, “see, a change of weather is coming! We are going to have a taste of PAMPERO.”
“Yes, I know;” and turning to his friends, added, “look, a change in the weather is coming! We're going to experience some PAMPERO.”
And he went on to explain that this PAMPERO is very common in the Argentine plains. It is an extremely dry wind which blows from the southwest. Thalcave was not mistaken, for the PAMPERO blew violently all night, and was sufficiently trying to poor fellows only sheltered by their ponchos. The horses lay down on the ground, and the men stretched themselves beside them in a close group. Glenarvan was afraid they would be delayed by the continuance of the hurricane, but Paganel was able to reassure him on that score, after consulting his barometer.
And he went on to explain that this PAMPERO is very common in the Argentine plains. It’s an extremely dry wind that blows from the southwest. Thalcave was right; the PAMPERO blew fiercely all night, making it tough for the poor guys who were only sheltered by their ponchos. The horses lay down on the ground, and the men huddled closely beside them. Glenarvan worried they’d be delayed by the storm, but Paganel was able to reassure him about that after checking his barometer.
“The PAMPERO generally brings a tempest which lasts three days, and may be always foretold by the depression of the mercury,” he said. “But when the barometer rises, on the contrary, which is the case now, all we need expect is a few violent blasts. So you can make your mind easy, my good friend; by sunrise the sky will be quite clear again.”
“The PAMPERO usually brings a storm that lasts three days, and it can always be predicted by a drop in the mercury,” he said. “But when the barometer rises, like now, all we should expect is a few strong gusts. So you can relax, my friend; by sunrise, the sky will be completely clear again.”
“You talk like a book, Paganel,” replied Glenarvan.
“You talk like a book, Paganel,” Glenarvan replied.
“And I am one; and what’s more, you are welcome to turn over my leaves whenever you like.”
“And I’m one; and what’s more, you’re welcome to flip through my pages whenever you want.”
The book was right. At one o’clock the wind suddenly lulled, and the weary men fell asleep and woke at daybreak, refreshed and invigorated.
The book was correct. At one o'clock, the wind suddenly calmed down, and the exhausted men fell asleep, waking up at dawn, refreshed and reinvigorated.
It was the 20th of October, and the tenth day since they had left Talcahuano. They were still ninety miles from the point where the Rio Colorado crosses the thirty-seventh parallel, that is to say, about two days’ journey. Glenarvan kept a sharp lookout for the appearance of any Indians, intending to question them, through Thalcave, about Captain Grant, as Paganel could not speak to him well enough for this. But the track they were following was one little frequented by the natives, for the ordinary routes across the Pampas lie further north. If by chance some nomadic horseman came in sight far away, he was off again like a dart, not caring to enter into conversation with strangers. To a solitary individual, a little troop of eight men, all mounted and well armed, wore a suspicious aspect, so that any intercourse either with honest men or even banditti, was almost impossible.
It was October 20th, and ten days had passed since they left Talcahuano. They were still ninety miles from the spot where the Rio Colorado crosses the thirty-seventh parallel, which meant about two days’ journey. Glenarvan kept a close watch for any signs of Indians, planning to ask them, through Thalcave, about Captain Grant, since Paganel couldn’t communicate with him well enough for that. However, the trail they were on wasn’t frequently used by the natives, as the usual routes across the Pampas are further north. If a nomadic horseman happened to appear in the distance, he would quickly take off, not wanting to engage with strangers. To a lone traveler, a small group of eight men, all mounted and well armed, looked suspicious, making any interaction, whether with honest folks or even bandits, nearly impossible.
Glenarvan was regretting this exceedingly, when he unexpectedly met with a singular justification of his rendering of the eventful document.
Glenarvan was really regretting this when he unexpectedly came across a unique reason for his interpretation of the important document.
In pursuing the course the travelers had laid down for themselves, they had several times crossed the routes over the plains in common use, but had struck into none of them. Hitherto Thalcave had made no remark about this. He understood quite well, however, that they were not bound for any particular town, or village, or settlement. Every morning they set out in a straight line toward the rising sun, and went on without the least deviation. Moreover, it must have struck Thalcave that instead of being the guide he was guided; yet, with true Indian reserve, he maintained absolute silence. But on reaching a particular point, he checked his horse suddenly, and said to Paganel:
As the travelers followed the path they had chosen, they crossed popular routes across the plains several times but didn’t take any of them. Until now, Thalcave hadn’t mentioned this. He understood perfectly well that they weren’t heading for any specific town, village, or settlement. Every morning, they set off in a straight line toward the rising sun and continued without any deviation. It must have occurred to Thalcave that instead of being the leader, he was being led; yet, with typical Indian restraint, he stayed completely silent. However, when they reached a certain point, he suddenly stopped his horse and said to Paganel:
“The Carmen route.”
“The Carmen route.”
“Yes, my good Patagonian,” replied Paganel in his best Spanish; “the route from Carmen to Mendoza.”
“Yes, my good Patagonian,” replied Paganel in his best Spanish; “the route from Carmen to Mendoza.”
“We are not going to take it?”
“We're not going to take it?”
“No,” replied Paganel.
“No,” Paganel answered.
“Where are we going then?”
“Where are we headed now?”
“Always to the east.”
"Always towards the east."
“That’s going nowhere.”
“That's not going anywhere.”
“Who knows?”
"Who knows?"
Thalcave was silent, and gazed at the geographer with an air of profound surprise. He had no suspicion that Paganel was joking, for an Indian is always grave.
Thalcave was quiet and looked at the geographer with a look of deep surprise. He had no clue that Paganel was joking, because an Indian is always serious.
“You are not going to Carmen, then?” he added, after a moment’s pause.
“You're not going to Carmen, then?” he asked after a brief pause.
“No.”
“No.”
“Nor to Mendoza?”
“Not to Mendoza?”
“No, nor to Mendoza.”
“No, not to Mendoza either.”
Just then Glenarvan came up to ask the reason of the stoppage, and what he and Thalcave were discussing.
Just then, Glenarvan approached to ask why they had stopped and what he and Thalcave were discussing.
“He wanted to know whether we were going to Carmen or Mendoza, and was very much surprised at my negative reply to both questions.”
“He wanted to know if we were heading to Carmen or Mendoza, and was really surprised by my no to both questions.”
“Well, certainly, it must seem strange to him.”
“Well, it definitely must seem weird to him.”
“I think so. He says we are going nowhere.”
“I think so. He says we aren't getting anywhere.”
“Well, Paganel, I wonder if it is possible to make him understand the object of our expedition, and what our motive is for always going east.”
“Well, Paganel, I wonder if we can make him understand the purpose of our expedition and why we always head east.”
“That would be a difficult matter, for an Indian knows nothing about degrees, and the finding of the document would appear to him a mere fantastic story.”
"That would be a tough situation, because an Indian doesn't know anything about degrees, and finding the document would seem like just an unbelievable tale to him."
“Is it the story he would not understand, or the storyteller?” said McNabbs, quietly.
“Is it the story he wouldn't understand, or the storyteller?” McNabbs said quietly.
“Ah, McNabbs, I see you have small faith in my Spanish yet.”
“Ah, McNabbs, I see you still don’t have much faith in my Spanish.”
“Well, try it, my good friend.”
“Well, give it a shot, my friend.”
“So I will.”
"So I will."
And turning round to the Patagonian he began his narrative, breaking down frequently for the want of a word, and the difficulty of making certain details intelligible to a half-civilized Indian. It was quite a sight to see the learned geographer. He gesticulated and articulated, and so worked himself up over it, that the big drops of sweat fell in a cascade down his forehead on to his chest. When his tongue failed, his arms were called to aid. Paganel got down on the ground and traced a geographical map on the sand, showing where the lines of latitude and longitude cross and where the two oceans were, along which the Carmen route led. Thalcave looked on composedly, without giving any indication of comprehending or not comprehending.
And turning to the Patagonian, he started his story, often pausing because he couldn't find the right words and struggled to explain certain details to a semi-civilized Indian. It was quite a sight to see the knowledgeable geographer. He gestured and spoke so passionately that big drops of sweat streamed down his forehead and onto his chest. When he couldn't find the right words, he used his arms to help. Paganel knelt on the ground and drew a geographical map in the sand, showing where the lines of latitude and longitude intersected and where the two oceans were, along which the Carmen route traveled. Thalcave watched calmly, showing no signs of understanding or confusion.
The lesson had lasted half an hour, when the geographer left off, wiped his streaming face, and waited for the Patagonian to speak.
The lesson had lasted for half an hour when the geographer stopped, wiped his sweating face, and waited for the Patagonian to say something.
“Does he understand?” said Glenarvan.
“Does he get it?” said Glenarvan.
“That remains to be seen; but if he doesn’t, I give it up,” replied Paganel.
"That’s yet to be determined; but if he doesn’t, I’m done for," replied Paganel.
Thalcave neither stirred nor spoke. His eyes remained fixed on the lines drawn on the sand, now becoming fast effaced by the wind.
Thalcave didn't move or say a word. His eyes stayed locked on the lines drawn in the sand, which were quickly being erased by the wind.
“Well?” said Paganel to him at length.
"Well?" Paganel finally asked.
The Patagonian seemed not to hear. Paganel fancied he could detect an ironical smile already on the lips of the Major, and determined to carry the day, was about to recommence his geographical illustrations, when the Indian stopped him by a gesture, and said:
The Patagonian didn’t seem to listen. Paganel thought he could see an ironic smile forming on the Major's lips and, wanting to win the day, was about to start his geographical explanations again when the Indian waved him off and said:
“You are in search of a prisoner?”
“Are you looking for a prisoner?”
“Yes,” replied Paganel.
“Yeah,” replied Paganel.
“And just on this line between the setting and rising sun?” added Thalcave, speaking in Indian fashion of the route from west to east.
“And just on this line between the setting and rising sun?” added Thalcave, speaking in a Native way about the route from west to east.
“Yes, yes, that’s it.”
“Yeah, yeah, that’s it.”
“And it’s your God,” continued the guide, “that has sent you the secret of this prisoner on the waves.”
“And it’s your God,” the guide went on, “who has sent you the secret of this prisoner on the waves.”
“God himself.”
"God himself."
“His will be accomplished then,” replied the native almost solemnly. “We will march east, and if it needs be, to the sun.”
“His will be done then,” the native responded almost solemnly. “We will march east, and if necessary, toward the sun.”
Paganel, triumphing in his pupil, immediately translated his replies to his companions, and exclaimed:
Paganel, thrilled with his student, quickly translated his answers for his friends and shouted:
“What an intelligent race! All my explanations would have been lost on nineteen in every twenty of the peasants in my own country.”
“What an intelligent race! All my explanations would have gone over the heads of nineteen out of twenty of the peasants in my own country.”
Glenarvan requested him to ask the Patagonian if he had heard of any foreigners who had fallen into the hands of the Indians of the Pampas.
Glenarvan asked him to find out from the Patagonian if he had heard of any foreigners who had been captured by the Indians of the Pampas.
Paganel did so, and waited an answer.
Paganel did that and waited for a response.
“Perhaps I have.”
“Maybe I have.”
The reply was no sooner translated than the Patagonian found himself surrounded by the seven men questioning him with eager glances. Paganel was so excited, he could hardly find words, and he gazed at the grave Indian as if he could read the reply on his lips.
The response was barely translated when the Patagonian found himself surrounded by seven men who were eagerly questioning him. Paganel was so excited that he could hardly find the words, and he stared at the serious Indian as if he could read the answer on his lips.
Each word spoken by Thalcave was instantly translated, so that the whole party seemed to hear him speak in their mother tongue.
Each word spoken by Thalcave was immediately translated, so it felt like everyone in the group was hearing him speak in their native language.
“And what about the prisoner?” asked Paganel.
“And what about the prisoner?” Paganel asked.
“He was a foreigner.”
“He was an outsider.”
“You have seen him?”
"Have you seen him?"
“No; but I have heard the Indian speak of him. He is brave; he has the heart of a bull.”
“No; but I’ve heard the Indian talk about him. He’s brave; he has the heart of a bull.”
“The heart of a bull!” said Paganel. “Ah, this magnificent Patagonian language. You understand him, my friends, he means a courageous man.”
“The heart of a bull!” Paganel exclaimed. “Ah, this amazing Patagonian language. You see, my friends, he’s referring to a brave man.”
“My father!” exclaimed Robert Grant, and, turning to Paganel, he asked what the Spanish was for, “Is it my father.”
“My dad!” exclaimed Robert Grant, and, turning to Paganel, he asked what the Spanish phrase was for, “Is it my father?”
“Es mio padre,” replied the geographer.
“It’s my father,” replied the geographer.
Immediately taking Thalcave’s hands in his own, the boy said, in a soft tone:
Immediately taking Thalcave’s hands in his own, the boy said, in a soft tone:
“Es mio padre.”
“It’s my dad.”
“Suo padre,” replied the Patagonian, his face lighting up.
“Your father,” replied the Patagonian, his face lighting up.
He took the child in his arms, lifted him up on his horse, and gazed at him with peculiar sympathy. His intelligent face was full of quiet feeling.
He picked up the child, placed him on his horse, and looked at him with unusual warmth. His thoughtful face was filled with subtle emotion.
But Paganel had not completed his interrogations. “This prisoner, who was he? What was he doing? When had Thalcave heard of him?” All these questions poured upon him at once.
But Paganel hadn’t finished his questions. “Who was this prisoner? What was he doing? When did Thalcave hear about him?” All these questions came at him all at once.
He had not long to wait for an answer, and learned that the European was a slave in one of the tribes that roamed the country between the Colorado and the Rio Negro.
He didn’t have to wait long for a response and found out that the European was a slave in one of the tribes that moved around the area between the Colorado and the Rio Negro.
“But where was the last place he was in?”
“But where was the last place he was?”
“With the Cacique Calfoucoura.”
“With Cacique Calfoucoura.”
“In the line we have been following?”
“In the line we've been following?”
“Yes.”
“Yep.”
“And who is this Cacique?”
"And who is this chief?"
“The chief of the Poyuches Indians, a man with two tongues and two hearts.”
“The leader of the Poyuches Indians, a man with two tongues and two hearts.”
“That’s to say false in speech and false in action,” said Paganel, after he had translated this beautiful figure of the Patagonian language.
“That means untrue in speech and untrue in action,” said Paganel, after he had translated this beautiful expression from the Patagonian language.
“And can we deliver our friend?” he added.
"And can we get our friend to safety?" he added.
“You may if he is still in the hands of the Indians.”
“You can if he’s still with the Indians.”
“And when did you last hear of him?”
“And when was the last time you heard from him?”
“A long while ago; the sun has brought two summers since then to the Pampas.”
“A long time ago, the sun has brought two summers since then to the Pampas.”
The joy of Glenarvan can not be described. This reply agreed perfectly with the date of the document. But one question still remained for him to put to Thalcave.
The joy of Glenarvan can't be described. This response matched the date of the document perfectly. But there was still one question he needed to ask Thalcave.
“You spoke of a prisoner,” he said; “but were there not three?”
“You mentioned a prisoner,” he said, “but wasn’t there actually three?”
“I don’t know,” said Thalcave.
“I don't know,” Thalcave said.
“And you know nothing of his present situation?”
“And you know nothing about his current situation?”
“Nothing.”
"Nothing."
This ended the conversation. It was quite possible that the three men had become separated long ago; but still this much was certain, that the Indians had spoken of a European that was in their power; and the date of the captivity, and even the descriptive phrase about the captive, evidently pointed to Harry Grant.
This ended the conversation. It was entirely possible that the three men had separated a long time ago; but one thing was clear: the Indians had mentioned a European who was in their control, and the timing of the captivity, along with the description of the captive, clearly indicated Harry Grant.
CHAPTER XVII A SERIOUS NECESSITY
THE Argentine Pampas extend from the thirty-fourth to the fortieth degree of southern latitude. The word PAMPA, of Araucanian origin, signifies grass plain, and justly applies to the whole region. The mimosas growing on the western part, and the substantial herbage on the eastern, give those plains a peculiar appearance. The soil is composed of sand and red or yellow clay, and this is covered by a layer of earth, in which the vegetation takes root. The geologist would find rich treasures in the tertiary strata here, for it is full of antediluvian remains—enormous bones, which the Indians attribute to some gigantic race that lived in a past age.
The Argentine Pampas stretch from the thirty-fourth to the fortieth degree of southern latitude. The word PAMPA, which comes from the Araucanian language, means grass plain, and it accurately describes the entire region. The mimosas on the western side and the lush grass on the eastern side give these plains a unique look. The soil is made up of sand and red or yellow clay, topped with a layer of earth where plants grow. Geologists would discover valuable treasures in the tertiary layers here, as they are filled with ancient remains—massive bones that the indigenous people believe belonged to a giant race that existed long ago.
The horses went on at a good pace through the thick PAJA-BRAVA, the grass of the Pampas, par excellence, so high and thick that the Indians find shelter in it from storms. At certain distances, but increasingly seldom, there were wet, marshy spots, almost entirely under water, where the willows grew, and a plant called the Gygnerium argenteum. Here the horses drank their fill greedily, as if bent on quenching their thirst for past, present and future. Thalcave went first to beat the bushes and frighten away the cholinas, a most dangerous species of viper, the bite of which kills an ox in less than an hour.
The horses moved quickly through the thick PAJA-BRAVA, the grass of the Pampas, par excellence, so tall and dense that the Indians take shelter in it during storms. At certain intervals, though they became less frequent, there were wet, muddy spots, mostly underwater, where willows and a plant called Gygnerium argenteum grew. Here, the horses eagerly drank their fill, as if trying to quench their thirst for the past, present, and future. Thalcave went ahead to clear the bushes and scare off the cholinas, a highly dangerous type of viper, whose bite can kill an ox in less than an hour.
For two days they plodded steadily across this arid and deserted plain. The dry heat became severe. There were not only no RIOS, but even the ponds dug out by the Indians were dried up. As the drought seemed to increase with every mile, Paganel asked Thalcave when he expected to come to water.
For two days, they trudged along this dry and empty plain. The heat was unbearable. There were no rivers at all, and even the ponds that the Indians had dug were dry. As the drought seemed to get worse with each mile, Paganel asked Thalcave when they would find water.
“At Lake Salinas,” replied the Indian.
“At Lake Salinas,” replied the Native American.
“And when shall we get there?”
“And when will we get there?”
“To-morrow evening.”
"Tomorrow evening."
When the Argentines travel in the Pampas they generally dig wells, and find water a few feet below the surface. But the travelers could not fall back on this resource, not having the necessary implements. They were therefore obliged to husband the small provision of water they had still left, and deal it out in rations, so that if no one had enough to satisfy his thirst no one felt it too painful.
When Argentines travel in the Pampas, they usually dig wells and find water just a few feet underground. However, the travelers couldn't rely on this option since they didn’t have the right tools. As a result, they had to conserve the little water they still had left and ration it out, so that while no one had enough to quench their thirst completely, it wasn’t too unbearable for anyone.
They halted at evening after a course of thirty miles and eagerly looked forward to a good night’s rest to compensate for the fatigue of day. But their slumbers were invaded by a swarm of mosquitoes, which allowed them no peace. Their presence indicated a change of wind which shifted to the north. A south or southwest wind generally puts to flight these little pests.
They stopped in the evening after traveling thirty miles and eagerly looked forward to a good night’s sleep to make up for the day's exhaustion. But their rest was interrupted by a swarm of mosquitoes that wouldn't let them be. Their presence signaled a change in the wind, which shifted to the north. A south or southwest wind usually keeps these little nuisances away.
Even these petty ills of life could not ruffle the Major’s equanimity; but Paganel, on the contrary, was perfectly exasperated by such trifling annoyances. He abused the poor mosquitoes desperately, and deplored the lack of some acid lotion which would have eased the pain of their stings. The Major did his best to console him by reminding him of the fact that they had only to do with one species of insect, among the 300,000 naturalists reckon. He would listen to nothing, and got up in a very bad temper.
Even these minor annoyances of life couldn't shake the Major’s calm; however, Paganel, on the other hand, was completely frustrated by such small irritations. He desperately cursed the poor mosquitoes and complained about not having some kind of soothing lotion to relieve the pain of their bites. The Major tried to comfort him by pointing out that they were only dealing with one type of insect among the 300,000 that naturalists have identified. Paganel wouldn’t hear any of it and got up in a really bad mood.
He was quite willing to start at daybreak, however, for they had to get to Lake Salinas before sundown. The horses were tired out and dying for water, and though their riders had stinted themselves for their sakes, still their ration was very insufficient. The drought was constantly increasing, and the heat none the less for the wind being north, this wind being the simoom of the Pampas.
He was more than willing to set out at daybreak because they needed to reach Lake Salinas before sunset. The horses were exhausted and desperately needed water, and even though their riders had limited their own supplies for their sake, it still wasn't enough. The drought was getting worse, and the heat didn't let up, made worse by the north wind, which was the hot, dry wind from the Pampas.
There was a brief interruption this day to the monotony of the journey. Mulrady, who was in front of the others, rode hastily back to report the approach of a troop of Indians. The news was received with very different feelings by Glenarvan and Thalcave. The Scotchman was glad of the chance of gleaning some information about his shipwrecked countryman, while the Patagonian hardly cared to encounter the nomadic Indians of the prairie, knowing their bandit propensities. He rather sought to avoid them, and gave orders to his party to have their arms in readiness for any trouble.
There was a brief break in the monotony of the journey that day. Mulrady, who was ahead of the others, rode back quickly to report the approach of a group of Indians. Glenarvan and Thalcave reacted very differently to the news. The Scot was happy for the chance to gather some information about his shipwrecked countryman, while the Patagonian was not interested in encountering the nomadic Indians of the prairie, aware of their tendency towards banditry. He preferred to steer clear of them and instructed his group to prepare their weapons in case of trouble.
Presently the nomads came in sight, and the Patagonian was reassured at finding they were only ten in number. They came within a hundred yards of them, and stopped. This was near enough to observe them distinctly. They were fine specimens of the native races, which had been almost entirely swept away in 1833 by General Rosas, tall in stature, with arched forehead and olive complexion. They were dressed in guanaco skins, and carried lances twenty feet long, knives, slings, bolas, and lassos, and, by their dexterity in the management of their horses, showed themselves to be accomplished riders.
Currently, the nomads appeared in view, and the Patagonian felt relieved to see that there were only ten of them. They approached within a hundred yards and then stopped. This was close enough to see them clearly. They were impressive examples of the native races that had almost completely vanished in 1833 due to General Rosas, tall with arched foreheads and olive skin. They wore guanaco skins and carried lances that were twenty feet long, along with knives, slings, bolas, and lassos. Their skill in handling their horses demonstrated that they were experienced riders.
They appeared to have stopped for the purpose of holding a council with each other, for they shouted and gesticulated at a great rate. Glenarvan determined to go up to them; but he had no sooner moved forward than the whole band wheeled round, and disappeared with incredible speed. It would have been useless for the travelers to attempt to overtake them with such wornout horses.
They seemed to have paused to have a discussion with each other, as they were shouting and gesturing a lot. Glenarvan decided to approach them; but as soon as he moved forward, the entire group turned around and vanished at an astonishing speed. It would have been pointless for the travelers to try to catch up with them on such exhausted horses.
“The cowards!” exclaimed Paganel.
"The cowards!" Paganel exclaimed.
“They scampered off too quick for honest folks,” said McNabbs.
“They rushed off too fast for honest people,” said McNabbs.
“Who are these Indians, Thalcave?” asked Paganel.
“Who are these Indians, Thalcave?” Paganel asked.
“Gauchos.”
"Gauchos."
“The Gauchos!” cried Paganel; and, turning to his companions, he added, “we need not have been so much on our guard; there was nothing to fear.”
“The Gauchos!” shouted Paganel; and, turning to his companions, he added, “we didn’t need to be so cautious; there was nothing to worry about.”
“How is that?” asked McNabbs.
“How’s that?” asked McNabbs.
“Because the Gauchos are inoffensive peasants.”
“Because the Gauchos are harmless farmers.”
“You believe that, Paganel?”
"Do you really believe that, Paganel?"
“Certainly I do. They took us for robbers, and fled in terror.”
“Of course I do. They thought we were thieves and ran away in fear.”
“I rather think they did not dare to attack us,” replied Glenarvan, much vexed at not being able to enter into some sort of communication with those Indians, whatever they were.
“I think they were too scared to attack us,” replied Glenarvan, clearly frustrated at not being able to communicate with those Indians, whoever they were.
“That’s my opinion too,” said the Major, “for if I am not mistaken, instead of being harmless, the Gauchos are formidable out-and-out bandits.”
"That's how I feel as well," said the Major, "because if I'm not wrong, the Gauchos are not harmless at all; they're straight-up bandits."
“The idea!” exclaimed Paganel.
"Got it!" exclaimed Paganel.
And forthwith commenced a lively discussion of this ethnological thesis—so lively that the Major became excited, and, quite contrary to his usual suavity, said bluntly:
And immediately, a lively discussion started about this ethnological theory—so lively that the Major got fired up and, completely unlike his usual smooth demeanor, said outright:
“I believe you are wrong, Paganel.”
"I think you're wrong, Paganel."
“Wrong?” replied Paganel.
"Wrong?" Paganel replied.
“Yes. Thalcave took them for robbers, and he knows what he is talking about.”
“Yes. Thalcave thought they were robbers, and he knows what he's talking about.”
“Well, Thalcave was mistaken this time,” retorted Paganel, somewhat sharply. “The Gauchos are agriculturists and shepherds, and nothing else, as I have stated in a pamphlet on the natives of the Pampas, written by me, which has attracted some notice.”
“Well, Thalcave got it wrong this time,” Paganel replied, a bit curtly. “The Gauchos are farmers and shepherds, and nothing more, as I've mentioned in a pamphlet about the natives of the Pampas that I wrote, which has gained some attention.”
[illustration omitted] [page intentionally blank]
[illustration omitted] [page intentionally blank]
“Well, well, you have committed an error, that’s all, Monsieur Paganel.”
“Well, well, you made a mistake, that’s all, Mr. Paganel.”
“What, Monsieur McNabbs! you tell me I have committed an error?”
“What, Monsieur McNabbs! Are you telling me I made a mistake?”
“An inadvertence, if you like, which you can put among the ERRATA in the next edition.”
“Just a mistake, if you want, that you can include in the ERRATA in the next edition.”
Paganel, highly incensed at his geographical knowledge being brought in question, and even jested about, allowed his ill-humor to get the better of him, and said:
Paganel, very annoyed that his geographical knowledge was being questioned and even joked about, let his bad mood take over and said:
“Know, sir, that my books have no need of such ERRATA.”
"Just so you know, my books don’t need any ERRATA."
“Indeed! Well, on this occasion they have, at any rate,” retorted McNabbs, quite as obstinate as his opponent.
“Absolutely! Well, on this occasion they have, at least,” replied McNabbs, just as stubborn as his opponent.
“Sir, I think you are very annoying to-day.”
“Sir, I find you quite annoying today.”
“And I think you are very crabbed.”
“And I think you are very grumpy.”
Glenarvan thought it was high time to interfere, for the discussion was getting too hot, so he said:
Glenarvan thought it was time to step in since the discussion was getting too heated, so he said:
“Come, now, there is no doubt one of you is very teasing and the other is very crabbed, and I must say I am surprised at both of you.”
“Come on, there’s no doubt one of you is really teasing and the other is pretty grumpy, and I have to say I’m surprised by both of you.”
The Patagonian, without understanding the cause, could see that the two friends were quarreling. He began to smile, and said quietly:
The Patagonian, not knowing the reason, noticed that the two friends were fighting. He started to smile and said softly:
“It’s the north wind.”
"It's the north wind."
“The north wind,” exclaimed Paganel; “what’s the north wind to do with it?”
“The north wind,” exclaimed Paganel; “what does the north wind have to do with it?”
“Ah, it is just that,” said Glenarvan. “It’s the north wind that has put you in a bad temper. I have heard that, in South America, the wind greatly irritates the nervous system.”
“Ah, that’s it,” said Glenarvan. “It’s the north wind that's put you in a bad mood. I’ve heard that, in South America, the wind really messes with your nerves.”
“By St. Patrick, Edward you are right,” said the Major, laughing heartily.
“By St. Patrick, Edward, you’re right,” the Major said, laughing loudly.
But Paganel, in a towering rage, would not give up the contest, and turned upon Glenarvan, whose intervention in this jesting manner he resented.
But Paganel, filled with intense anger, refused to back down from the contest and snapped at Glenarvan, who he resented for interrupting in such a joking way.
“And so, my Lord, my nervous system is irritated?” he said.
“And so, my Lord, my nerves are all frayed?” he said.
“Yes, Paganel, it is the north wind—a wind which causes many a crime in the Pampas, as the TRAMONTANE does in the Campagna of Rome.”
“Yes, Paganel, it’s the north wind—a wind that leads to many crimes in the Pampas, just like the TRAMONTANE does in the Campagna of Rome.”
“Crimes!” returned the geographer. “Do I look like a man that would commit crimes?”
“Crimes!” the geographer replied. “Do I look like someone who would commit crimes?”
“That’s not exactly what I said.”
“That’s not exactly what I meant.”
“Tell me at once that I want to assassinate you?”
“Are you telling me right now that I want to kill you?”
“Well, I am really afraid,” replied Glenarvan, bursting into an uncontrollable fit of laughter, in which all others joined.
"Well, I'm really scared," replied Glenarvan, breaking into an uncontrollable fit of laughter, which everyone else joined in on.
Paganel said no more, but went off in front alone, and came back in a few minutes quite himself, as if he had completely forgotten his grievance.
Paganel didn’t say anything else, but walked ahead by himself. He returned a few minutes later, completely over it, as if he had totally forgotten his complaint.
At eight o’clock in the evening, Thalcave, who was considerably in advance of the rest, descried in the distance the much-desired lake, and in less than a quarter of an hour they reached its banks; but a grievous disappointment awaited them—the lake was dried up.
At eight o’clock in the evening, Thalcave, who was quite a bit ahead of the others, spotted the long-awaited lake in the distance, and in less than fifteen minutes, they arrived at its shores; but a heartbreaking disappointment awaited them—the lake was completely dried up.
CHAPTER XVIII IN SEARCH OF WATER
LAKE SALINAS ends the string of lagoons connected with the Sierras Ventana and Guamini. Numerous expeditions were formerly made there from Buenos Ayres, to collect the salt deposited on its banks, as the waters contain great quantities of chloride of sodium.
LAKE SALINAS marks the end of the series of lagoons linked to the Sierras Ventana and Guamini. Many trips used to be organized from Buenos Aires to gather the salt collected along its shores, as the waters hold large amounts of sodium chloride.
But when Thalcave spoke of the lake as supplying drinkable water he was thinking of the RIOS of fresh water which run into it. Those streams, however, were all dried up also; the burning sun had drunk up every thing liquid, and the consternation of the travelers may be imagined at the discovery.
But when Thalcave mentioned the lake providing drinkable water, he was thinking of the streams of fresh water that flow into it. However, those streams were all dried up too; the scorching sun had evaporated every liquid, and the travelers' shock at this discovery can only be imagined.
Some action must be taken immediately, however; for what little water still remained was almost bad, and could not quench thirst. Hunger and fatigue were forgotten in the face of this imperious necessity. A sort of leather tent, called a ROUKAH, which had been left by the natives, afforded the party a temporary resting-place, and the weary horses stretched themselves along the muddy banks, and tried to browse on the marine plants and dry reeds they found there—nauseous to the taste as they must have been.
Some action needs to be taken right away, though, because the little water that was left was almost bad and couldn’t quench thirst. Hunger and exhaustion were overlooked in light of this urgent need. A kind of leather tent called a ROUKAH, which had been left by the locals, provided the group with a temporary resting spot, and the tired horses lay down along the muddy banks, trying to graze on the marine plants and dry reeds they found there—though they must have tasted terrible.
As soon as the whole party were ensconced in the ROUKAH, Paganel asked Thalcave what he thought was best to be done. A rapid conversation followed, a few words of which were intelligible to Glenarvan. Thalcave spoke calmly, but the lively Frenchman gesticulated enough for both. After a little, Thalcave sat silent and folded his arms.
As soon as the whole group was settled in the ROUKAH, Paganel asked Thalcave what he thought was the best course of action. A quick conversation followed, and Glenarvan could understand a few words. Thalcave spoke calmly, but the animated Frenchman used enough gestures for both of them. After a while, Thalcave fell silent and crossed his arms.
“What does he say?” asked Glenarvan. “I fancied he was advising us to separate.”
“What does he say?” asked Glenarvan. “I thought he was suggesting we split up.”
“Yes, into two parties. Those of us whose horses are so done out with fatigue and thirst that they can scarcely drag one leg after the other, are to continue the route as they best can, while the others, whose steeds are fresher, are to push on in advance toward the river Guamini, which throws itself into Lake San Lucas about thirty-one miles off. If there should be water enough in the river, they are to wait on the banks till their companions reach them; but should it be dried up, they will hasten back and spare them a useless journey.”
“Yes, into two groups. Those of us whose horses are so worn out from fatigue and thirst that they can barely move will continue on as best as we can, while the others, whose horses are in better shape, will go ahead towards the Guamini River, which flows into Lake San Lucas about thirty-one miles away. If there’s enough water in the river, they will wait on the banks until their companions arrive; but if it's dried up, they will hurry back to save them an unnecessary trip.”
“And what will we do then?” asked Austin.
“And what are we going to do then?” asked Austin.
“Then we shall have to make up our minds to go seventy-two miles south, as far as the commencement of the Sierra Ventana, where rivers abound.”
“Then we’ll have to decide to go seventy-two miles south, all the way to the start of the Sierra Ventana, where there are plenty of rivers.”
“It is wise counsel, and we will act upon it without loss of time. My horse is in tolerable good trim, and I volunteer to accompany Thalcave.”
“It’s good advice, and we’ll follow it right away. My horse is in pretty good shape, and I’m willing to ride with Thalcave.”
“Oh, my Lord, take me,” said Robert, as if it were a question of some pleasure party.
“Oh, my God, take me,” said Robert, as if it were just a question of some fun gathering.
“But would you be able for it, my boy?”
“But would you be able to handle it, my boy?”
“Oh, I have a fine beast, which just wants to have a gallop. Please, my Lord, to take me.”
“Oh, I have a great horse that just wants to run. Please, my Lord, take me with you.”
“Come, then, my boy,” said Glenarvan, delighted not to leave Robert behind. “If we three don’t manage to find out fresh water somewhere,” he added, “we must be very stupid.”
“Come on, my boy,” said Glenarvan, thrilled not to leave Robert behind. “If the three of us can’t figure out where to find fresh water,” he added, “we must be pretty dumb.”
“Well, well, and what about me?” said Paganel.
"Well, well, and what about me?" Paganel asked.
“Oh, my dear Paganel, you must stay with the reserve corps,” replied the Major. “You are too well acquainted with the 37th parallel and the river Guamini and the whole Pampas for us to let you go. Neither Mulrady, nor Wilson, nor myself would be able to rejoin Thalcave at the given rendezvous, but we will put ourselves under the banner of the brave Jacques Paganel with perfect confidence.”
“Oh, my dear Paganel, you have to stay with the reserve corps,” replied the Major. “You know the 37th parallel, the Guamini River, and the entire Pampas too well for us to let you go. Neither Mulrady, Wilson, nor I would be able to meet up with Thalcave at the designated spot, but we will follow the brave Jacques Paganel with complete confidence.”
“I resign myself,” said the geographer, much flattered at having supreme command.
“I accept my fate,” said the geographer, feeling quite pleased to have ultimate authority.
“But mind, Paganel, no distractions,” added the Major. “Don’t you take us to the wrong place—to the borders of the Pacific, for instance.”
“But listen, Paganel, no distractions,” the Major added. “Don’t lead us to the wrong place—like the shores of the Pacific, for example.”
“Oh, you insufferable Major; it would serve you right,” replied Paganel, laughing. “But how will you manage to understand what Thalcave says, Glenarvan?” he continued.
“Oh, you unbearable Major; it would totally serve you right,” Paganel replied, laughing. “But how are you going to understand what Thalcave says, Glenarvan?” he continued.
“I suppose,” replied Glenarvan, “the Patagonian and I won’t have much to talk about; besides, I know a few Spanish words, and, at a pinch, I should not fear either making him understand me, or my understanding him.”
“I guess,” replied Glenarvan, “the Patagonian and I won’t have much to talk about; besides, I know a few Spanish words, and if necessary, I wouldn’t be afraid of either making him understand me or understanding him.”
“Go, then, my worthy friend,” said Paganel.
“Go on, then, my good friend,” said Paganel.
“We’ll have supper first,” rejoined Glenarvan, “and then sleep, if we can, till it is starting time.”
“We’ll have dinner first,” replied Glenarvan, “and then try to sleep until it’s time to go.”
The supper was not very reviving without drink of any kind, and they tried to make up for the lack of it by a good sleep. But Paganel dreamed of water all night, of torrents and cascades, and rivers and ponds, and streams and brooks—in fact, he had a complete nightmare.
The dinner wasn’t very refreshing without any drinks, so they tried to compensate for that by getting a good night’s sleep. But Paganel dreamed about water all night—about waterfalls, cascades, rivers, ponds, streams, and brooks; it was basically a total nightmare.
Next morning, at six o’clock, the horses of Thalcave, Glenarvan and Robert were got ready. Their last ration of water was given them, and drunk with more avidity than satisfaction, for it was filthy, disgusting stuff. The three travelers then jumped into their saddles, and set off, shouting “Au revoir!” to their companions.
The next morning, at six o’clock, the horses of Thalcave, Glenarvan, and Robert were all prepared. They received their last supply of water, which they drank eagerly but with little satisfaction, as it was dirty and unpleasant. The three travelers then climbed onto their saddles and set off, shouting “Au revoir!” to their friends.
“Don’t come back whatever you do,” called Paganel after them.
“Don’t come back no matter what,” Paganel called after them.
The Desertio de las Salinas, which they had to traverse, is a dry plain, covered with stunted trees not above ten feet high, and small mimosas, which the Indians call curra-mammel; and JUMES, a bushy shrub, rich in soda. Here and there large spaces were covered with salt, which sparkled in the sunlight with astonishing brilliancy. These might easily have been taken for sheets of ice, had not the intense heat forbidden the illusion; and the contrast these dazzling white sheets presented to the dry, burned-up ground gave the desert a most peculiar character. Eighty miles south, on the contrary, the Sierra Ventana, toward which the travelers might possibly have to betake themselves should the Guamini disappoint their hopes, the landscape was totally different. There the fertility is splendid; the pasturage is incomparable. Unfortunately, to reach them would necessitate a march of one hundred and thirty miles south; and this was why Thalcave thought it best to go first to Guamini, as it was not only much nearer, but also on the direct line of route.
The Desertio de las Salinas, which they had to cross, is a dry stretch of land, dotted with scraggly trees no taller than ten feet and small mimosas, which the locals call curra-mammel; there's also JUMES, a bushy plant rich in soda. Here and there, large patches were covered in salt, sparkling in the sunlight with an incredible brightness. They could easily be mistaken for ice sheets if it weren't for the intense heat that shattered that illusion; the striking contrast between these bright white patches and the parched, burned ground gave the desert a unique character. Eighty miles south, however, the Sierra Ventana offered a completely different landscape. There, the soil is incredibly fertile, and the pastures are exceptional. Unfortunately, getting there would require a trek of one hundred and thirty miles south, which is why Thalcave believed it was best to head to Guamini first since it was not only much closer but also directly on their route.
The three horses went forward might and main, as if instinctively knowing whither they were bound. Thaouka especially displayed a courage that neither fatigue nor hunger could damp. He bounded like a bird over the dried-up CANADAS and the bushes of CURRA-MAMMEL, his loud, joyous neighing seeming to bode success to the search. The horses of Glenarvan and Robert, though not so light-footed, felt the spur of his example, and followed him bravely. Thalcave inspirited his companions as much as Thaouka did his four-footed brethren. He sat motionless in the saddle, but often turned his head to look at Robert, and ever and anon gave him a shout of encouragement and approval, as he saw how well he rode. Certainly the boy deserved praise, for he was fast becoming an excellent cavalier.
The three horses pressed on with full determination, as if they instinctively knew where they were headed. Thaouka, in particular, showed a bravery that neither tiredness nor hunger could diminish. He leaped like a bird over the dry CANADAS and the bushes of CURRA-MAMMEL, his loud, joyful neighing seeming to promise success in their search. The horses ridden by Glenarvan and Robert, though not as nimble, were motivated by his example and followed him with courage. Thalcave encouraged his friends just as much as Thaouka did for his horse companions. He sat still in the saddle but often turned his head to check on Robert, frequently shouting words of encouragement and approval when he saw how well the boy was riding. The boy certainly deserved praise, as he was quickly becoming an excellent rider.
“Bravo! Robert,” said Glenarvan. “Thalcave is evidently congratulating you, my boy, and paying you compliments.”
“Great job, Robert,” said Glenarvan. “Thalcave is clearly congratulating you, my boy, and giving you compliments.”
“What for, my Lord?”
"What for, my lord?"
“For your good horsemanship.”
“For your great riding skills.”
“I can hold firm on, that’s all,” replied Robert blushing with pleasure at such an encomium.
“I can stand my ground on that, that’s all,” replied Robert, blushing with pleasure at such a compliment.
“That is the principal thing, Robert; but you are too modest. I tell you that some day you will turn out an accomplished horseman.”
"That’s the main thing, Robert; but you’re too humble. I assure you that one day you’ll become a skilled horseman."
“What would papa say to that?” said Robert, laughing. “He wants me to be a sailor.”
“What would Dad say to that?” Robert said, laughing. “He wants me to be a sailor.”
“The one won’t hinder the other. If all cavaliers wouldn’t make good sailors, there is no reason why all sailors should not make good horsemen. To keep one’s footing on the yards must teach a man to hold on firm; and as to managing the reins, and making a horse go through all sorts of movements, that’s easily acquired. Indeed, it comes naturally.”
“The one won’t interfere with the other. Just because not all knights would make great sailors, that doesn’t mean all sailors can’t be good horse riders. Staying balanced on the ropes teaches a person to hold on tight; and handling the reins and getting a horse to do all kinds of movements is something that can be learned easily. In fact, it’s pretty instinctive.”
“Poor father,” said Robert; “how he will thank you for saving his life.”
“Poor dad,” said Robert; “he's going to be so grateful to you for saving his life.”
“You love him very much, Robert?”
“You really love him a lot, Robert?”
“Yes, my Lord, dearly. He was so good to me and my sister. We were his only thought: and whenever he came home from his voyages, we were sure of some SOUVENIR from all the places he had been to; and, better still, of loving words and caresses. Ah! if you knew him you would love him, too. Mary is most like him. He has a soft voice, like hers. That’s strange for a sailor, isn’t it?”
“Yes, my Lord, dearly. He was so good to me and my sister. We were always on his mind, and whenever he returned from his trips, we could count on getting a little souvenir from all the places he visited; and even better, we received loving words and affection. Oh! If you knew him, you would love him too. Mary resembles him the most. He has a soft voice, just like hers. Isn’t that unusual for a sailor?”
“Yes, Robert, very strange.”
“Yes, Robert, that's very odd.”
“I see him still,” the boy went on, as if speaking to himself. “Good, brave papa. He put me to sleep on his knee, crooning an old Scotch ballad about the lochs of our country. The time sometimes comes back to me, but very confused like. So it does to Mary, too. Ah, my Lord, how we loved him. Well, I do think one needs to be little to love one’s father like that.”
“I can still see him,” the boy continued, almost to himself. “Good, brave dad. He used to put me to sleep on his knee, singing an old Scottish ballad about the lakes in our country. Sometimes that time comes back to me, but it’s really fuzzy. Mary remembers it, too. Oh, how we loved him. I really think you have to be young to love your dad like that.”
“Yes, and to be grown up, my child, to venerate him,” replied Glenarvan, deeply touched by the boy’s genuine affection.
"Yes, and to grow up, my child, to honor him," replied Glenarvan, deeply moved by the boy's genuine affection.
During this conversation the horses had been slackening speed, and were only walking now.
During this conversation, the horses had been slowing down and were now just walking.
“You will find him?” said Robert again, after a few minutes’ silence.
"You'll find him?" Robert said again after a few minutes of silence.
“Yes, we’ll find him,” was Glenarvan’s reply, “Thalcave has set us on the track, and I have great confidence in him.”
“Yes, we’ll find him,” Glenarvan replied, “Thalcave has pointed us in the right direction, and I have a lot of faith in him.”
“Thalcave is a brave Indian, isn’t he?” said the boy.
“Thalcave is a brave Native American, right?” said the boy.
“That indeed he is.”
"That he definitely is."
“Do you know something, my Lord?”
“Do you know something, my lord?”
“What is it, and then I will tell you?”
“What is it, and then I'll tell you?”
“That all the people you have with you are brave. Lady Helena, whom I love so, and the Major, with his calm manner, and Captain Mangles, and Monsieur Paganel, and all the sailors on the DUNCAN. How courageous and devoted they are.”
“It's clear that everyone you've got with you is brave. Lady Helena, who I love so much, and the Major, with his calm demeanor, and Captain Mangles, and Monsieur Paganel, along with all the sailors on the DUNCAN. They’re all so courageous and dedicated.”
“Yes, my boy, I know that,” replied Glenarvan.
“Yes, my boy, I know that,” replied Glenarvan.
“And do you know that you are the best of all.”
“And do you know that you are the best of everyone?”
“No, most certainly I don’t know that.”
“No, I definitely don’t know that.”
“Well, it is time you did, my Lord,” said the boy, seizing his lordship’s hand, and covering it with kisses.
“Well, it’s about time you did, my Lord,” said the boy, grabbing his lordship’s hand and showering it with kisses.
Glenarvan shook his head, but said no more, as a gesture from Thalcave made them spur on their horses and hurry forward.
Glenarvan shook his head but said nothing more, as a signal from Thalcave urged them to kick their horses into action and move ahead quickly.
But it was soon evident that, with the exception of Thaouka, the wearied animals could not go quicker than a walking pace. At noon they were obliged to let them rest for an hour. They could not go on at all, and refused to eat the ALFAFARES, a poor, burnt-up sort of lucerne that grew there.
But it quickly became clear that, except for Thaouka, the exhausted animals couldn't move faster than a walk. At noon, they had to let them rest for an hour. They couldn't continue at all and refused to eat the ALFAFARES, a sad, scorched type of lucerne that grew there.
Glenarvan began to be uneasy. Tokens of sterility were not the least on the decrease, and the want of water might involve serious calamities. Thalcave said nothing, thinking probably, that it would be time enough to despair if the Guamini should be dried up—if, indeed, the heart of an Indian can ever despair.
Glenarvan started to feel anxious. Signs of barrenness were increasingly visible, and the lack of water could lead to serious disasters. Thalcave didn’t say anything, probably believing it would be too soon to give up hope if the Guamini dried up—if, in fact, an Indian's heart can ever truly give up hope.
Spur and whip had both to be employed to induce the poor animals to resume the route, and then they only crept along, for their strength was gone.
Spurs and whips had to be used to get the poor animals to continue on the path, and even then they only moved slowly, as they had no strength left.
Thaouka, indeed, could have galloped swiftly enough, and reached the RIO in a few hours, but Thalcave would not leave his companions behind, alone in the midst of a desert.
Thaouka could have quickly galloped and reached the RIO in just a few hours, but Thalcave wouldn’t leave his companions alone in the middle of a desert.
It was hard work, however, to get the animal to consent to walk quietly. He kicked, and reared, and neighed violently, and was subdued at last more by his master’s voice than hand. Thalcave positively talked to the beast, and Thaouka understood perfectly, though unable to reply, for, after a great deal of arguing, the noble creature yielded, though he still champed the bit.
It was tough to get the animal to agree to walk calmly. He kicked, reared up, and neighed loudly, and in the end, he was calmed more by his owner's voice than by force. Thalcave actually spoke to the horse, and Thaouka understood everything perfectly, even though he couldn’t respond. After a lot of back-and-forth, the proud creature finally gave in, although he still chewed on the bit.
Thalcave did not understand Thaouka, it turned out, though Thaouka understood him. The intelligent animal felt humidity in the atmosphere and drank it in with frenzy, moving and making a noise with his tongue, as if taking deep draughts of some cool refreshing liquid. The Patagonian could not mistake him now—water was not far off.
Thalcave didn’t understand Thaouka, but Thaouka understood him. The clever animal sensed the humidity in the air and eagerly absorbed it, moving and making noise with his tongue as if he were gulping down some cool, refreshing drink. The Patagonian could no longer be mistaken—water was close by.
The two other horses seemed to catch their comrade’s meaning, and, inspired by his example, made a last effort, and galloped forward after the Indian.
The other two horses seemed to understand what their companion meant and, motivated by his example, made one final push and raced after the Indian.
About three o’clock a white line appeared in a dip of the road, and seemed to tremble in the sunlight.
About three o’clock, a white line appeared in a dip in the road and seemed to shimmer in the sunlight.
“Water!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
"Water!" shouted Glenarvan.
“Yes, yes! it is water!” shouted Robert.
“Yes, yes! It’s water!” shouted Robert.
They were right; and the horses knew it too, for there was no need now to urge them on; they tore over the ground as if mad, and in a few minutes had reached the river, and plunged in up to their chests.
They were right; and the horses knew it too, because there was no need to push them anymore; they raced over the ground like they were crazy, and in just a few minutes had reached the river, leaping in up to their chests.
Their masters had to go on too, whether they would or not but they were so rejoiced at being able to quench their thirst, that this compulsory bath was no grievance.
Their masters had to keep going, whether they wanted to or not, but they were so happy to be able to satisfy their thirst that this forced bath didn't bother them at all.
“Oh, how delicious this is!” exclaimed Robert, taking a deep draught.
“Oh, this is so delicious!” exclaimed Robert, taking a big gulp.
“Drink moderately, my boy,” said Glenarvan; but he did not set the example.
“Drink in moderation, my boy,” said Glenarvan; but he didn’t practice what he preached.
Thalcave drank very quietly, without hurrying himself, taking small gulps, but “as long as a lazo,” as the Patagonians say. He seemed as if he were never going to leave off, and really there was some danger of his swallowing up the whole river.
Thalcave drank very quietly, without rushing, taking small gulps, but “as long as a lazo,” as the Patagonians say. He looked like he was never going to stop, and there was a real chance he might drink the entire river.
At last Glenarvan said:
Finally, Glenarvan said:
“Well, our friends won’t be disappointed this time; they will be sure of finding clear, cool water when they get here—that is to say, if Thalcave leaves any for them.”
“Well, our friends won’t be let down this time; they’ll definitely find clear, cool water when they arrive—assuming Thalcave doesn’t use it all.”
“But couldn’t we go to meet them? It would spare them several hours’ suffering and anxiety.”
“But can’t we go meet them? It would save them several hours of suffering and worry.”
“You’re right my boy; but how could we carry them this water? The leather bottles were left with Wilson. No; it is better for us to wait for them as we agreed. They can’t be here till about the middle of the night, so the best thing we can do is to get a good bed and a good supper ready for them.”
“You're right, my boy; but how can we carry this water? The leather bottles were left with Wilson. No, it's better for us to wait for them as we agreed. They won't be here until around the middle of the night, so the best thing we can do is prepare a nice bed and a good dinner for them.”
Thalcave had not waited for Glenarvan’s proposition to prepare an encampment. He had been fortunate enough to discover on the banks of the rio a ramada, a sort of enclosure, which had served as a fold for flocks, and was shut in on three sides. A more suitable place could not be found for their night’s lodging, provided they had no fear of sleeping in the open air beneath the star-lit heavens; and none of Thalcave’s companions had much solicitude on that score. Accordingly they took possession at once, and stretched themselves at full length on the ground in the bright sunshine, to dry their dripping garments.
Thalcave didn't wait for Glenarvan's suggestion to set up a camp. He was lucky enough to find a ramada on the banks of the rio, a kind of enclosure that had been used as a fold for livestock and was enclosed on three sides. It was an ideal spot for their overnight stay, as long as they weren't worried about sleeping outside under the starlit sky; none of Thalcave's companions seemed too concerned about that. So, they took over the space immediately and lay down flat on the ground in the warm sunshine to dry their soaked clothes.
“Well, now we’ve secured a lodging, we must think of supper,” said Glenarvan. “Our friends must not have reason to complain of the couriers they sent to precede them; and if I am not much mistaken, they will be very satisfied. It strikes me that an hour’s shooting won’t be lost time. Are you ready, Robert?”
“Well, now that we’ve got a place to stay, we need to think about dinner,” said Glenarvan. “Our friends shouldn’t have any reason to complain about the messengers they sent ahead; and if I’m not mistaken, they’ll be pretty happy. I think an hour of shooting wouldn’t be a waste of time. Are you ready, Robert?”
“Yes, my Lord,” replied the boy, standing up, gun in hand.
“Yes, my Lord,” the boy replied, standing up with the gun in his hand.
Why Glenarvan proposed this was, that the banks of the Guamini seemed to be the general rendezvous of all the game in the surrounding plains. A sort of partridge peculiar to the Pampas, called TINAMOUS; black wood-hens; a species of plover, called TERU-TERU; yellow rays, and waterfowl with magnificent green plumage, rose in coveys. No quadrupeds, however, were visible, but Thalcave pointed to the long grass and thick brushwood, and gave his friends to understand they were lying there in concealment.
Why Glenarvan suggested this was that the banks of the Guamini appeared to be the main meeting point for all the game in the nearby plains. There was a type of partridge unique to the Pampas called TINAMOUS; black wood-hens; a kind of plover known as TERU-TERU; yellow rays, and waterfowl with stunning green feathers, all gathered in flocks. However, no mammals were in sight, but Thalcave indicated the tall grass and dense brush and hinted to his friends that they were hidden there.
Disdaining the feathered tribes when more substantial game was at hand, the hunters’ first shots were fired into the underwood. Instantly there rose by the hundred roebucks and guanacos, like those that had swept over them that terrible night on the Cordilleras, but the timid creatures were so frightened that they were all out of gunshot in a twinkling. The hunters were obliged to content themselves with humbler game, though in an alimentary point of view nothing better could be wished. A dozen of red partridges and rays were speedily brought down, and Glenarvan also managed very cleverly to kill a TAY-TETRE, or peccary, a pachydermatous animal, the flesh of which is excellent eating.
Ignoring the birds when bigger game was available, the hunters fired their first shots into the underbrush. Instantly, hundreds of roebucks and guanacos jumped up, just like those that had swept past them during that terrible night in the Cordilleras, but the skittish animals were so scared that they were out of shooting range in no time. The hunters had to settle for smaller game, although from a food perspective, nothing could be better. They quickly brought down a dozen red partridges and rays, and Glenarvan also cleverly managed to kill a TAY-TETRE, or peccary, a thick-skinned animal whose meat is delicious.
In less than half an hour the hunters had all the game they required. Robert had killed a curious animal belonging to the order EDENTATA, an armadillo, a sort of tatou, covered with a hard bony shell, in movable pieces, and measuring a foot and a half long. It was very fat and would make an excellent dish, the Patagonian said. Robert was very proud of his success.
In under half an hour, the hunters gathered all the game they needed. Robert had shot a strange animal from the order EDENTATA, an armadillo, a type of tatou, covered with a hard bony shell in movable sections, and measuring about a foot and a half long. It was quite fat and would make a fantastic meal, the Patagonian remarked. Robert felt very proud of his achievement.
Thalcave did his part by capturing a NANDOU, a species of ostrich, remarkable for its extreme swiftness.
Thalcave played his role by catching a NANDOU, a type of ostrich known for its incredible speed.
There could be no entrapping such an animal, and the Indian did not attempt it. He urged Thaouka to a gallop, and made a direct attack, knowing that if the first aim missed the NANDOU would soon tire out horse and rider by involving them in an inextricable labyrinth of windings. The moment, therefore, that Thalcave got to a right distance, he flung his BOLAS with such a powerful hand, and so skillfully, that he caught the bird round the legs and paralyzed his efforts at once. In a few seconds it lay flat on the ground.
There was no way to trap such a creature, and the Indian didn't try. He spurred Thaouka into a gallop and made a direct attack, knowing that if he missed his first shot, the NANDOU would quickly wear out both horse and rider by leading them into a confusing maze of twists and turns. So, the moment Thalcave was at the right distance, he threw his BOLAS with such strength and skill that he caught the bird around its legs, immediately stopping its struggle. In just a few seconds, it was lying flat on the ground.
The Indian had not made his capture for the mere pleasure and glory of such a novel chase. The flesh of the NANDOU is highly esteemed, and Thalcave felt bound to contribute his share of the common repast.
The Indian didn't capture the animal just for the thrill or glory of the chase. The meat of the NANDOU is highly valued, and Thalcave felt it was his duty to contribute to the shared meal.
They returned to the RAMADA, bringing back the string of partridges, the ostrich, the peccary, and the armadillo. The ostrich and the peccary were prepared for cooking by divesting them of their tough skins, and cutting them up into thin slices. As to the armadillo, he carries his cooking apparatus with him, and all that had to be done was to place him in his own shell over the glowing embers.
They went back to the RAMADA, bringing with them a bunch of partridges, an ostrich, a peccary, and an armadillo. They prepared the ostrich and peccary for cooking by removing their tough skins and slicing them into thin pieces. As for the armadillo, he carries his own cooking gear, so all they needed to do was put him in his shell over the hot coals.
The substantial dishes were reserved for the night-comers, and the three hunters contented themselves with devouring the partridges, and washed down their meal with clear, fresh water, which was pronounced superior to all the porter in the world, even to the famous Highland USQUEBAUGH, or whisky.
The hearty dishes were saved for those arriving at night, while the three hunters were satisfied with devouring the partridges, washing down their meal with clear, fresh water, which they declared was better than any porter in the world, including the renowned Highland USQUEBAUGH or whisky.
The horses had not been overlooked. A large quantity of dry fodder was discovered lying heaped up in the RAMADA, and this supplied them amply with both food and bedding.
The horses hadn't been ignored. A big pile of dry hay was found stacked up in the RAMADA, which provided them with plenty of both food and bedding.
When all was ready the three companions wrapped themselves in the ponchos, and stretched themselves on an eiderdown of ALFAFARES, the usual bed of hunters on the Pampas.
When everything was set, the three friends wrapped themselves in the ponchos and lay down on a cozy pile of ALFAFARES, the typical bedding for hunters on the Pampas.
CHAPTER XIX THE RED WOLVES
NIGHT came, but the orb of night was invisible to the inhabitants of the earth, for she was just in her first quarter. The dim light of the stars was all that illumined the plain. The waters of the Guamini ran silently, like a sheet of oil over a surface of marble. Birds, quadrupeds, and reptiles were resting motionless after the fatigues of the day, and the silence of the desert brooded over the far-spreading Pampas.
NIGHT arrived, but the moon was hidden from the people on earth, as it was only in its first quarter. The faint light from the stars was the only source of illumination on the plain. The waters of the Guamini flowed quietly, like a layer of oil over marble. Birds, four-legged animals, and reptiles were all resting still after the day's exhaustion, and a deep silence settled over the vast Pampas.
Glenarvan, Robert, and Thalcave, had followed the common example, and lay in profound slumber on their soft couch of lucerne. The worn-out horses had stretched themselves full length on the ground, except Thaouka, who slept standing, true to his high blood, proud in repose as in action, and ready to start at his master’s call. Absolute silence reigned within the inclosure, over which the dying embers of the fire shed a fitful light.
Glenarvan, Robert, and Thalcave had followed the usual practice and were fast asleep on their comfortable bed of lucerne. The tired horses had sprawled out on the ground, except for Thaouka, who slept standing, true to his noble lineage, proud in rest as in action, and ready to respond to his master’s call. Complete silence prevailed in the enclosure, with the dying embers of the fire casting a flickering light.
However, the Indian’s sleep did not last long; for about ten o’clock he woke, sat up, and turned his ear toward the plain, listening intently, with half-closed eyes. An uneasy look began to depict itself on his usually impassive face. Had he caught scent of some party of Indian marauders, or of jaguars, water tigers, and other terrible animals that haunt the neighborhood of rivers? Apparently it was the latter, for he threw a rapid glance on the combustible materials heaped up in the inclosure, and the expression of anxiety on his countenance seemed to deepen. This was not surprising, as the whole pile of ALFAFARES would soon burn out and could only ward off the attacks of wild beasts for a brief interval.
However, the Indian's sleep didn't last long; around ten o'clock he woke up, sat up, and turned his ear toward the plain, listening intently with half-closed eyes. An uneasy look began to show on his usually expressionless face. Had he picked up the scent of a group of Indian raiders, or of jaguars, water tigers, and other dangerous animals that roam near rivers? It seemed to be the latter, as he quickly glanced at the combustible materials piled up in the enclosure, and the anxious expression on his face appeared to deepen. This wasn’t surprising, since the whole pile of ALFAFARES would soon burn out and could only fend off the attacks of wild beasts for a short time.
There was nothing to be done in the circumstances but wait; and wait he did, in a half-recumbent posture, his head leaning on his hands, and his elbows on his knees, like a man roused suddenly from his night’s sleep.
There was nothing to do in the situation but wait; and wait he did, in a half-reclined position, his head resting on his hands, and his elbows on his knees, like someone suddenly awakened from a night's sleep.
A whole hour passed, and anyone except Thalcave would have lain down again on his couch, reassured by the silence round him. But where a stranger would have suspected nothing, the sharpened senses of the Indian detected the approach of danger.
A full hour went by, and anyone but Thalcave would have gone back to lying on his couch, comforted by the quiet around him. But while a stranger might have noticed nothing, the heightened senses of the Indian picked up on the looming threat.
As he was thus watching and listening, Thaouka gave a low neigh, and stretched his nostrils toward the entrance of the RAMADA.
As he was watching and listening, Thaouka let out a soft neigh and stretched his nostrils toward the entrance of the RAMADA.
This startled the Patagonian, and made him rise to his feet at once.
This startled the Patagonian, making him get to his feet right away.
“Thaouka scents an enemy,” he said to himself, going toward the opening, to make careful survey of the plains.
“Thaouka smells an enemy,” he thought to himself, moving toward the opening to carefully survey the plains.
Silence still prevailed, but not tranquillity; for Thalcave caught a glimpse of shadows moving noiselessly over the tufts of CURRA-MAMMEL. Here and there luminous spots appeared, dying out and rekindling constantly, in all directions, like fantastic lights dancing over the surface of an immense lagoon. An inexperienced eye might have mistaken them for fireflies, which shine at night in many parts of the Pampas; but Thalcave was not deceived; he knew the enemies he had to deal with, and lost no time in loading his carbine and taking up his post in front of the fence.
Silence filled the air, but it wasn’t peaceful; Thalcave noticed shadows gliding silently over the patches of CURRA-MAMMEL. Here and there, bright spots flickered, constantly fading and reappearing in every direction, like whimsical lights dancing over a vast lagoon. Someone without experience might have mistaken them for fireflies, which light up the night in many parts of the Pampas; but Thalcave wasn’t fooled; he recognized the threats he faced, and quickly loaded his carbine, positioning himself in front of the fence.
He did not wait long, for a strange cry—a confused sound of barking and howling—broke over the Pampas, followed next instant by the report of the carbine, which made the uproar a hundred times worse.
He didn't wait long, as a strange cry—a mix of barking and howling—echoed across the Pampas, quickly followed by the shot from the carbine, which made the noise a hundred times worse.
Glenarvan and Robert woke in alarm, and started to their feet instantly.
Glenarvan and Robert woke up suddenly and jumped to their feet right away.
“What is it?” exclaimed Robert.
“What’s that?” exclaimed Robert.
“Is it the Indians?” asked Glenarvan.
“Is it the Indians?” Glenarvan asked.
“No,” replied Thalcave, “the AGUARAS.”
“No,” replied Thalcave, “the AGUARAS.”
“AGUARAS?” said Robert, looking inquiringly at Glenarvan.
“AGUARAS?” Robert asked, looking curiously at Glenarvan.
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, “the red wolves of the Pampas.”
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, “the red wolves of the Pampas.”
They seized their weapons at once, and stationed themselves beside the Patagonian, who pointed toward the plain from whence the yelling resounded.
They grabbed their weapons immediately and positioned themselves next to the Patagonian, who pointed toward the open field where the shouting was coming from.
Robert drew back involuntarily.
Robert flinched.
“You are not afraid of wolves, my boy?” said Glenarvan.
“You're not scared of wolves, are you, kid?” said Glenarvan.
“No, my Lord,” said the lad in a firm tone, “and moreover, beside you I am afraid of nothing.”
“No, my Lord,” the boy said firmly, “and besides you, I’m afraid of nothing.”
“So much the better. These AGUARAS are not very formidable either; and if it were not for their number I should not give them a thought.”
“That's even better. These AGUARAS aren't very tough either; and if it weren't for their numbers, I wouldn't worry about them at all.”
“Never mind; we are all well armed; let them come.”
“Never mind; we’re all well armed; let them come.”
“We’ll certainly give them a warm reception,” rejoined Glenarvan.
“We’ll definitely give them a warm welcome,” Glenarvan replied.
His Lordship only spoke thus to reassure the child, for a secret terror filled him at the sight of this legion of bloodthirsty animals let loose on them at midnight.
His Lordship only said this to comfort the child, as a hidden fear gripped him at the sight of this army of bloodthirsty animals unleashed on them at midnight.
There might possibly be some hundreds, and what could three men do, even armed to the teeth, against such a multitude?
There might be a few hundred, and what could three men do, even fully armed, against such a crowd?
As soon as Thalcave said the word AGUARA, Glenarvan knew that he meant the red wolf, for this is the name given to it by the Pampas Indians. This voracious animal, called by naturalists the Canis jubatus, is in shape like a large dog, and has the head of a fox. Its fur is a reddish-cinnamon color, and there is a black mane all down the back. It is a strong, nimble animal, generally inhabiting marshy places, and pursuing aquatic animals by swimming, prowling about by night and sleeping during the day. Its attacks are particularly dreaded at the ESTANCIAS, or sheep stations, as it often commits considerable ravages, carrying off the finest of the flock. Singly, the AGUARA is not much to be feared; but they generally go in immense packs, and one had better have to deal with a jaguar or cougar than with them.
As soon as Thalcave said the word AGUARA, Glenarvan understood that he was referring to the red wolf, the name given to it by the Pampas Indians. This fierce animal, known scientifically as Canis jubatus, looks like a large dog but has the head of a fox. Its fur is a reddish-cinnamon color, and it has a black mane running down its back. It's a strong, agile creature that typically lives in marshy areas, chasing aquatic prey by swimming, hunting at night, and sleeping during the day. Its attacks are especially feared at the ESTANCIAS, or sheep farms, as it often causes significant damage, taking away the best of the flock. Alone, the AGUARA isn’t very intimidating; however, they usually travel in huge packs, and it’s better to face a jaguar or cougar than deal with them.
Both from the noise of the howling and the multitude of shadows leaping about, Glenarvan had a pretty good idea of the number of the wolves, and he knew they had scented a good meal of human flesh or horse flesh, and none of them would go back to their dens without a share. It was certainly a very alarming situation to be in.
Both from the howling noise and the many shadows jumping around, Glenarvan had a good sense of how many wolves there were, and he realized they had caught the scent of a tasty meal—either human or horse. None of them would retreat to their dens without getting a piece. It was definitely a very scary situation to be in.
The assailants were gradually drawing closer. The horses displayed signs of the liveliest terror, with the exception of Thaouka, who stamped his foot, and tried to break loose and get out. His master could only calm him by keeping up a low, continuous whistle.
The attackers were getting closer. The horses were showing signs of intense fear, except for Thaouka, who was stamping his foot and trying to break free and escape. His owner could only soothe him by maintaining a quiet, steady whistle.
Glenarvan and Robert had posted themselves so as to defend the opening of the RAMADA. They were just going to fire into the nearest ranks of the wolves when Thalcave lowered their weapons.
Glenarvan and Robert had positioned themselves to defend the entrance of the RAMADA. They were about to shoot at the closest group of wolves when Thalcave signaled them to lower their weapons.
“What does Thalcave mean?” asked Robert.
“What does Thalcave mean?” Robert asked.
“He forbids our firing.”
“He won’t let us fire.”
“And why?”
"And why is that?"
“Perhaps he thinks it is not the right time.”
“Maybe he thinks it’s not the right time.”
But this was not the Indian’s reason, and so Glenarvan saw when he lifted the powder-flask, showed him it was nearly empty.
But that wasn't the Indian's reason, as Glenarvan realized when he lifted the powder flask and showed him it was almost empty.
“What’s wrong?” asked Robert.
"What's wrong?" Robert asked.
“We must husband our ammunition,” was the reply. “To-day’s shooting has cost us dear, and we are short of powder and shot. We can’t fire more than twenty times.”
“We need to save our ammo,” was the reply. “Today’s shooting has cost us a lot, and we’re low on powder and shot. We can’t fire more than twenty times.”
The boy made no reply, and Glenarvan asked him if he was frightened.
The boy didn't say anything, and Glenarvan asked him if he was scared.
“No, my Lord,” he said.
“No, my Lord,” he replied.
“That’s right,” returned Glenarvan.
“That's right,” replied Glenarvan.
A fresh report resounded that instant. Thalcave had made short work of one assailant more audacious than the rest, and the infuriated pack had retreated to within a hundred steps of the inclosure.
A new report echoed at that moment. Thalcave had quickly dealt with one attacker who was bolder than the others, and the furious group had pulled back to within a hundred steps of the enclosure.
On a sign from the Indian Glenarvan took his place, while Thalcave went back into the inclosure and gathered up all the dried grass and ALFAFARES, and, indeed, all the combustibles he could rake together, and made a pile of them at the entrance. Into this he flung one of the still-glowing embers, and soon the bright flames shot up into the dark night. Glenarvan could now get a good glimpse of his antagonists, and saw that it was impossible to exaggerate their numbers or their fury. The barrier of fire just raised by Thalcave had redoubled their anger, though it had cut off their approach. Several of them, however, urged on by the hindmost ranks, pushed forward into the very flames, and burned their paws for their pains.
On a signal from the Indian, Glenarvan took his position, while Thalcave went back into the enclosure and collected all the dried grass and alfalfa, and indeed, everything else that could catch fire. He made a pile of it at the entrance. Into this, he tossed one of the glowing embers, and soon bright flames shot up into the dark night. Glenarvan could now get a clear view of his opponents and realized that their numbers and fury were impossible to exaggerate. The barrier of fire just created by Thalcave had only intensified their anger, even though it blocked their approach. Several of them, however, spurred on by those behind, pushed forward right into the flames, burning their paws in the process.
From time to time another shot had to be fired, notwithstanding the fire, to keep off the howling pack, and in the course of an hour fifteen dead animals lay stretched on the prairie.
From time to time, another shot had to be fired, despite the fire, to fend off the howling pack, and over the course of an hour, fifteen dead animals lay sprawled on the prairie.
The situation of the besieged was, relatively speaking, less dangerous now. As long as the powder lasted and the barrier of fire burned on, there was no fear of being overmastered. But what was to be done afterward, when both means of defense failed at once?
The situation for those under siege was, in a way, less risky now. As long as the gunpowder held out and the wall of flames continued to blaze, there was no worry about being overwhelmed. But what would happen next, when both forms of defense failed at the same time?
Glenarvan’s heart swelled as he looked at Robert. He forgot himself in thinking of this poor child, as he saw him showing a courage so far above his years. Robert was pale, but he kept his gun steady, and stood with firm foot ready to meet the attacks of the infuriated wolves.
Glenarvan's heart filled with pride as he looked at Robert. He lost himself in thoughts about this poor kid, seeing him display a bravery far beyond his years. Robert was pale, but he held his gun steady and stood firm, ready to face the oncoming attacks of the furious wolves.
However, after Glenarvan had calmly surveyed the actual state of affairs, he determined to bring things to a crisis.
However, after Glenarvan calmly assessed the current situation, he decided to bring things to a head.
“In an hour’s time,” he said, “we shall neither have powder nor fire. It will never do to wait till then before we settle what to do.”
“In an hour,” he said, “we won’t have any gunpowder or fire. We can’t wait until then to figure out what to do.”
Accordingly, he went up to Thalcave, and tried to talk to him by the help of the few Spanish words his memory could muster, though their conversation was often interrupted by one or the other having to fire a shot.
Accordingly, he approached Thalcave and tried to communicate using the few Spanish words he could remember, even though their conversation was often interrupted by one of them needing to take a shot.
It was no easy task for the two men to understand each other, but, most fortunately, Glenarvan knew a great deal of the peculiarities of the red wolf; otherwise he could never have interpreted the Indian’s words and gestures.
It wasn't easy for the two men to understand each other, but luckily, Glenarvan was familiar with many of the quirks of the red wolf; otherwise, he would never have been able to make sense of the Indian’s words and gestures.
As it was, fully a quarter of an hour elapsed before he could get any answer from Thalcave to tell Robert in reply to his inquiry.
As it was, it took a full fifteen minutes before he could get any answer from Thalcave to update Robert on his question.
“What does he say?”
“What does he mean?”
“He says that at any price we must hold out till daybreak. The AGUARA only prowls about at night, and goes back to his lair with the first streak of dawn. It is a cowardly beast, that loves the darkness and dreads the light—an owl on four feet.”
“He says that no matter what, we have to hold out until daybreak. The AGUARA only prowls around at night and returns to its den with the first light of dawn. It’s a cowardly creature that loves the dark and fears the light—like an owl on four legs.”
“Very well, let us defend ourselves, then, till morning.”
“Alright, let’s defend ourselves until morning.”
“Yes, my boy, and with knife-thrusts, when gun and shots fail.”
“Yes, my boy, and with knife thrusts, when guns and bullets fail.”
Already Thalcave had set the example, for whenever a wolf came too near the burning pile, the long arm of the Patagonian dashed through the flames and came out again reddened with blood.
Already Thalcave had set the example, for whenever a wolf came too close to the burning pile, the long arm of the Patagonian shot through the flames and came out again stained with blood.
But very soon this means of defense would be at an end. About two o’clock, Thalcave flung his last armful of combustibles into the fire, and barely enough powder remained to load a gun five times.
But very soon this way of defending themselves would be over. Around two o'clock, Thalcave threw his last load of firewood into the flames, and there was barely enough gunpowder left to load a gun five times.
Glenarvan threw a sorrowful glance round him. He thought of the lad standing there, and of his companions and those left behind, whom he loved so dearly.
Glenarvan cast a sad look around him. He thought of the boy standing there, and of his friends and loved ones back home, whom he cared for deeply.
Robert was silent. Perhaps the danger seemed less imminent to his imagination. But Glenarvan thought for him, and pictured to himself the horrible fate that seemed to await him inevitably. Quite overcome by his emotion, he took the child in his arms, and straining him convulsively to his heart, pressed his lips on his forehead, while tears he could not restrain streamed down his cheeks.
Robert was quiet. Maybe the danger felt less urgent to him. But Glenarvan was thinking for both of them, imagining the terrible fate that seemed to be waiting for them. Overwhelmed by his emotions, he picked up the child and held him tightly to his chest, pressing his lips against the child’s forehead as tears he couldn't hold back streamed down his face.
Robert looked up into his face with a smile, and said, “I am not frightened.”
Robert looked up at him with a smile and said, “I’m not scared.”
“No, my child, no! and you are right. In two hours daybreak will come, and we shall be saved. Bravo, Thalcave! my brave Patagonian! Bravo!” he added as the Indian that moment leveled two enormous beasts who endeavored to leap across the barrier of flames.
“No, my child, no! You’re right. In two hours, dawn will arrive, and we’ll be safe. Well done, Thalcave! My brave Patagonian! Great job!” he added as the Indian at that moment took down two massive beasts that tried to jump over the wall of fire.
But the fire was fast dying out, and the DENOUEMENT of the terrible drama was approaching. The flames got lower and lower. Once more the shadows of night fell on the prairie, and the glaring eyes of the wolves glowed like phosphorescent balls in the darkness. A few minutes longer, and the whole pack would be in the inclosure.
But the fire was quickly dying down, and the conclusion of the terrible drama was nearing. The flames grew smaller and smaller. Once again, the shadows of night descended on the prairie, and the glowing eyes of the wolves shone like glowing orbs in the darkness. In a few more minutes, the entire pack would be inside the enclosure.
Thalcave loaded his carbine for the last time, killed one more enormous monster, and then folded his arms. His head sank on his chest, and he appeared buried in deep thought. Was he planning some daring, impossible, mad attempt to repulse the infuriated horde? Glenarvan did not venture to ask.
Thalcave loaded his carbine one last time, took down another massive monster, and then crossed his arms. His head dropped onto his chest, and he looked lost in deep thought. Was he plotting a bold, crazy plan to fend off the furious horde? Glenarvan didn’t dare to ask.
At this very moment the wolves began to change their tactics. The deafening howls suddenly ceased: they seemed to be going away. Gloomy silence spread over the prairie, and made Robert exclaim:
At that moment, the wolves started changing their approach. The loud howls abruptly stopped; it seemed like they were retreating. A heavy silence fell over the prairie, causing Robert to exclaim:
“They’re gone!”
"They're gone!"
But Thalcave, guessing his meaning, shook his head. He knew they would never relinquish their sure prey till daybreak made them hasten back to their dens.
But Thalcave, understanding what he meant, shook his head. He knew they would never give up their easy target until daybreak forced them to return to their dens.
Still, their plan of attack had evidently been altered. They no longer attempted to force the entrance, but their new maneuvers only heightened the danger.
Still, their strategy had clearly changed. They were no longer trying to break through the entrance, but their new tactics only increased the risk.
They had gone round the RAMADA, as by common consent, and were trying to get in on the opposite side.
They had walked around the RAMADA, as everyone agreed, and were attempting to enter from the other side.
The next minute they heard their claws attacking the moldering wood, and already formidable paws and hungry, savage jaws had found their way through the palings. The terrified horses broke loose from their halters and ran about the inclosure, mad with fear.
The next minute, they heard their claws scratching at the decaying wood, and already powerful paws and hungry, fierce jaws had made their way through the fences. The terrified horses broke free from their halters and ran around the enclosure, frantic with fear.
Glenarvan put his arms round the young lad, and resolved to defend him as long as his life held out. Possibly he might have made a useless attempt at flight when his eye fell on Thalcave.
Glenarvan wrapped his arms around the young boy and decided to protect him for as long as he lived. He might have even tried to run away when he spotted Thalcave.
The Indian had been stalking about the RAMADA like a stag, when he suddenly stopped short, and going up to his horse, who was trembling with impatience, began to saddle him with the most scrupulous care, without forgetting a single strap or buckle. He seemed no longer to disturb himself in the least about the wolves outside, though their yells had redoubled in intensity. A dark suspicion crossed Glenarvan’s mind as he watched him.
The Indian had been pacing around the RAMADA like a deer when he suddenly halted, walked over to his horse, which was shaking with impatience, and began to put the saddle on with meticulous care, making sure not to miss a single strap or buckle. He seemed completely unfazed by the wolves outside, even though their howls had grown louder. A dark thought crossed Glenarvan's mind as he observed him.
“He is going to desert us,” he exclaimed at last, as he saw him seize the reins, as if preparing to mount.
“He's going to leave us,” he shouted finally, as he saw him grab the reins, as if getting ready to ride.
“He! never!” replied Robert. Instead of deserting them, the truth was that the Indian was going to try and save his friends by sacrificing himself.
“Not a chance!” replied Robert. Instead of abandoning them, the reality was that the Indian was going to attempt to save his friends by sacrificing himself.
Thaouka was ready, and stood champing his bit. He reared up, and his splendid eyes flashed fire; he understood his master.
Thaouka was ready and was eagerly chomping at the bit. He reared up, and his magnificent eyes sparkled with intensity; he understood his master.
But just as the Patagonian caught hold of the horse’s mane, Glenarvan seized his arm with a convulsive grip, and said, pointing to the open prairie.
But just as the Patagonian grabbed the horse’s mane, Glenarvan tightly grasped his arm and said, pointing to the open prairie.
“You are going away?”
"Are you leaving?"
“Yes,” replied the Indian, understanding his gesture. Then he said a few words in Spanish, which meant: “Thaouka; good horse; quick; will draw all the wolves away after him.”
“Yes,” replied the Indian, understanding his gesture. Then he said a few words in Spanish, which meant: “Thaouka; good horse; quick; will draw all the wolves away after him.”
“Oh, Thalcave,” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Oh, Thalcave,” Glenarvan exclaimed.
“Quick, quick!” replied the Indian, while Glenarvan said, in a broken, agitated voice to Robert:
“Quick, quick!” replied the Indian, while Glenarvan said, in a shaky, upset voice to Robert:
“Robert, my child, do you hear him? He wants to sacrifice himself for us. He wants to rush away over the Pampas, and turn off the wolves from us by attracting them to himself.”
“Robert, my child, do you hear him? He wants to sacrifice himself for us. He wants to run off across the Pampas and draw the wolves away from us by leading them to himself.”
“Friend Thalcave,” returned Robert, throwing himself at the feet of the Patagonian, “friend Thalcave, don’t leave us!”
“Friend Thalcave,” Robert said, dropping to his knees in front of the Patagonian, “please don’t leave us!”
“No,” said Glenarvan, “he shall not leave us.”
“No,” said Glenarvan, “he's not leaving us.”
And turning toward the Indian, he said, pointing to the frightened horses, “Let us go together.”
And turning to the Indian, he said, pointing at the scared horses, “Let’s go together.”
“No,” replied Thalcave, catching his meaning. “Bad beasts; frightened; Thaouka, good horse.”
“No,” replied Thalcave, understanding what he meant. “Bad animals; scared; Thaouka, good horse.”
“Be it so then!” returned Glenarvan. “Thalcave will not leave you, Robert. He teaches me what I must do. It is for me to go, and for him to stay by you.”
“Alright then!” Glenarvan replied. “Thalcave isn’t going to leave you, Robert. He’s showing me what I need to do. I will go, and he will stay with you.”
Then seizing Thaouka’s bridle, he said, “I am going, Thalcave, not you.”
Then grabbing Thaouka’s bridle, he said, “I’m going, Thalcave, not you.”
“No,” replied the Patagonian quietly.
“No,” replied the Patagonian softly.
“I am,” exclaimed Glenarvan, snatching the bridle out of his hands. “I, myself! Save this boy, Thalcave! I commit him to you.”
“I am,” shouted Glenarvan, grabbing the bridle out of his hands. “I, myself! Save this boy, Thalcave! I trust him to you.”
Glenarvan was so excited that he mixed up English words with his Spanish. But what mattered the language at such a terrible moment. A gesture was enough. The two men understood each other.
Glenarvan was so excited that he mixed English words with his Spanish. But what did it matter what language they used at such a terrible moment? A gesture was enough. The two men understood each other.
However, Thalcave would not give in, and though every instant’s delay but increased the danger, the discussion continued.
However, Thalcave wouldn’t back down, and even though every moment of delay just increased the danger, the discussion went on.
Neither Glenarvan nor Thalcave appeared inclined to yield. The Indian had dragged his companion towards the entrance of the RAMADA, and showed him the prairie, making him understand that now was the time when it was clear from the wolves; but that not a moment was to be lost, for should this maneuver not succeed, it would only render the situation of those left behind more desperate, and that he knew his horse well enough to be able to trust his wonderful lightness and swiftness to save them all. But Glenarvan was blind and obstinate, and determined to sacrifice himself at all hazards, when suddenly he felt himself violently pushed back. Thaouka pranced up, and reared himself bolt upright on his hind legs, and made a bound over the barrier of fire, while a clear, young voice called out:
Neither Glenarvan nor Thalcave seemed willing to give in. The Indian had pulled his companion towards the entrance of the RAMADA, gesturing towards the prairie to make him understand that now was the moment when it was clear of wolves. But there was no time to waste, because if this plan failed, it would only make the situation for those left behind worse. He knew his horse well enough to trust its impressive speed and agility to get them all to safety. However, Glenarvan was stubborn and determined to sacrifice himself regardless of the risks, when suddenly he felt himself pushed back with force. Thaouka reared up on his hind legs and leaped over the wall of fire, while a clear, youthful voice called out:
“God save you, my lord.”
“God save you, my lord.”
But before either Thalcave or Glenarvan could get more than a glimpse of the boy, holding on fast by Thaouka’s mane, he was out of sight.
But before Thalcave or Glenarvan could see more than a quick glimpse of the boy, who was clinging tightly to Thaouka’s mane, he disappeared out of sight.
“Robert! oh you unfortunate boy,” cried Glenarvan.
“Robert! Oh, you unlucky boy,” cried Glenarvan.
But even Thalcave did not catch the words, for his voice was drowned in the frightful uproar made by the wolves, who had dashed off at a tremendous speed on the track of the horse.
But even Thalcave couldn’t hear the words because his voice was drowned out by the terrifying noise made by the wolves, who had taken off at a rapid speed following the horse's trail.
Thalcave and Glenarvan rushed out of the RAMADA. Already the plain had recovered its tranquillity, and all that could be seen of the red wolves was a moving line far away in the distant darkness.
Thalcave and Glenarvan hurried out of the RAMADA. The plain had already returned to its calm, and all that could be seen of the red wolves was a shifting line far off in the dark distance.
Glenarvan sank prostrate on the ground, and clasped his hands despairingly. He looked at Thalcave, who smiled with his accustomed calmness, and said:
Glenarvan collapsed onto the ground and held his hands together in despair. He glanced at Thalcave, who smiled with his usual calm demeanor and said:
“Thaouka, good horse. Brave boy. He will save himself!”
“Thaouka, good horse. Brave boy. He’ll save himself!”
“And suppose he falls?” said Glenarvan.
“And what if he falls?” Glenarvan said.
“He’ll not fall.”
“He won’t fall.”
But notwithstanding Thalcave’s assurances, poor Glenarvan spent the rest of the night in torturing anxiety. He seemed quite insensible now to the danger they had escaped through the departure of the wolves, and would have hastened immediately after Robert if the Indian had not kept him back by making him understand the impossibility of their horses overtaking Thaouka; and also that boy and horse had outdistanced the wolves long since, and that it would be useless going to look for them till daylight.
But despite Thalcave’s reassurances, poor Glenarvan spent the rest of the night in agonizing worry. He seemed completely unaware of the danger they had escaped with the wolves leaving, and he would have rushed after Robert if the Indian hadn’t stopped him by making him realize that their horses couldn’t catch up to Thaouka. He also explained that the boy and the horse had already outrun the wolves a long time ago, and that it would be pointless to look for them until morning.
At four o’clock morning began to dawn. A pale glimmer appeared in the horizon, and pearly drops of dew lay thick on the plain and on the tall grass, already stirred by the breath of day.
At four o'clock, morning started to break. A faint light showed on the horizon, and dewdrops sparkled abundantly on the ground and on the tall grass, already rustled by the breeze of the new day.
The time for starting had arrived.
The time to start had come.
“Now!” cried Thalcave, “come.”
“Now!” shouted Thalcave, “let's go.”
Glenarvan made no reply, but took Robert’s horse and sprung into the saddle. Next minute both men were galloping at full speed toward the west, in the line in which their companions ought to be advancing. They dashed along at a prodigious rate for a full hour, dreading every minute to come across the mangled corpse of Robert. Glenarvan had torn the flanks of his horse with his spurs in his mad haste, when at last gun-shots were heard in the distance at regular intervals, as if fired as a signal.
Glenarvan didn't respond but took Robert's horse and jumped into the saddle. In the next moment, both men were racing at full speed toward the west, in the direction their companions should be heading. They sped along at an incredible pace for a whole hour, fearing every minute they might come across Robert's mangled body. Glenarvan had spurred his horse wildly in his frantic rush when, at last, gunshots echoed in the distance at regular intervals, almost as if they were fired as a signal.
“There they are!” exclaimed Glenarvan; and both he and the Indian urged on their steeds to a still quicker pace, till in a few minutes more they came up to the little detachment conducted by Paganel. A cry broke from Glenarvan’s lips, for Robert was there, alive and well, still mounted on the superb Thaouka, who neighed loudly with delight at the sight of his master.
“There they are!” exclaimed Glenarvan, and both he and the Indian urged their horses to go even faster. In just a few minutes, they caught up with the small group led by Paganel. A cry escaped Glenarvan’s lips when he saw Robert there, alive and well, still riding the magnificent Thaouka, who whinnied joyfully at the sight of his master.
“Oh, my child, my child!” cried Glenarvan, with indescribable tenderness in his tone.
“Oh, my child, my child!” cried Glenarvan, with indescribable tenderness in his voice.
Both he and Robert leaped to the ground, and flung themselves into each other’s arms. Then the Indian hugged the brave boy in his arms.
Both he and Robert jumped to the ground and threw themselves into each other's arms. Then the Indian embraced the brave boy tightly.
“He is alive, he is alive,” repeated Glenarvan again and again.
“He’s alive, he’s alive,” Glenarvan kept saying over and over.
“Yes,” replied Robert; “and thanks to Thaouka.”
“Yes,” Robert replied, “and thanks to Thaouka.”
This great recognition of his favorite’s services was wholly unexpected by the Indian, who was talking to him that minute, caressing and speaking to him, as if human blood flowed in the veins of the proud creature. Then turning to Paganel, he pointed to Robert, and said, “A brave!” and employing the Indian metaphor, he added, “his spurs did not tremble!”
This huge acknowledgment of his favorite's contributions completely surprised the Indian, who was chatting with him at that moment, stroking and speaking to him as if he were a person. Then, turning to Paganel, he pointed at Robert and said, “A brave!” and used the Indian metaphor to add, “his spurs did not tremble!”
But Glenarvan put his arms round the boy and said, “Why wouldn’t you let me or Thalcave run the risk of this last chance of deliverance, my son?”
But Glenarvan put his arms around the boy and said, “Why wouldn’t you let me or Thalcave take the risk for this last chance at rescue, my son?”
“My lord,” replied the boy in tones of gratitude, “wasn’t it my place to do it? Thalcave has saved my life already, and you—you are going to save my father.”
“My lord,” replied the boy with gratitude, “wasn’t it my responsibility to do it? Thalcave has already saved my life, and you—you are going to save my father.”
CHAPTER XX STRANGE SIGNS
AFTER the first joy of the meeting was over, Paganel and his party, except perhaps the Major, were only conscious of one feeling—they were dying of thirst. Most fortunately for them, the Guamini ran not far off, and about seven in the morning the little troop reached the inclosure on its banks. The precincts were strewed with the dead wolves, and judging from their numbers, it was evident how violent the attack must have been, and how desperate the resistance.
AFTER the initial excitement of the meeting faded, Paganel and his group, except maybe the Major, only felt one thing—they were incredibly thirsty. Luckily for them, the Guamini River was not far away, and around seven in the morning, the small group arrived at the area along its banks. The place was scattered with dead wolves, and judging by their numbers, it was clear how fierce the attack must have been and how determined the resistance was.
As soon as the travelers had drunk their fill, they began to demolish the breakfast prepared in the RAMADA, and did ample justice to the extraordinary viands. The NANDOU fillets were pronounced first-rate, and the armadillo was delicious.
As soon as the travelers had their fill, they started to dig into the breakfast prepared in the RAMADA, enjoying the amazing dishes. The NANDOU fillets were rated as top-notch, and the armadillo was delicious.
“To eat moderately,” said Paganel, “would be positive ingratitude to Providence. We must eat immoderately.”
"To eat moderately," Paganel said, "would be outright ingratitude to Providence. We have to eat excessively."
And so they did, but were none the worse for it. The water of the Guamini greatly aided digestion apparently.
And so they did, but they didn't suffer for it. The water from the Guamini seemed to really help with digestion.
Glenarvan, however, was not going to imitate Hannibal at Capua, and at ten o’clock next morning gave the signal for starting. The leathern bottles were filled with water, and the day’s march commenced. The horses were so well rested that they were quite fresh again, and kept up a canter almost constantly. The country was not so parched up now, and consequently less sterile, but still a desert. No incident occurred of any importance during the 2d and 3d of November, and in the evening they reached the boundary of the Pampas, and camped for the night on the frontiers of the province of Buenos Ayres. Two-thirds of their journey was now accomplished. It was twenty-two days since they left the Bay of Talcahuano, and they had gone 450 miles.
Glenarvan, however, wasn't going to follow Hannibal's example in Capua, and at ten o’clock the next morning, he signaled for everyone to start. The leather bottles were filled with water, and their march for the day began. The horses were well-rested and lively again, cantering almost constantly. The landscape wasn't as dry anymore, making it less barren, but it was still a desert. There weren't any significant incidents on the 2nd and 3rd of November, and in the evening, they reached the edge of the Pampas, camping for the night on the border of Buenos Aires province. They had now completed two-thirds of their journey. It had been twenty-two days since they left the Bay of Talcahuano, and they had traveled 450 miles.
Next morning they crossed the conventional line which separates the Argentine plains from the region of the Pampas. It was here that Thalcave hoped to meet the Caciques, in whose hands, he had no doubt, Harry Grant and his men were prisoners.
Next morning they crossed the usual boundary that separates the Argentine plains from the Pampas region. This is where Thalcave hoped to meet the Caciques, who he was sure were holding Harry Grant and his men captive.
From the time of leaving the Guamini, there was marked change in the temperature, to the great relief of the travelers. It was much cooler, thanks to the violent and cold winds from Patagonia, which constantly agitate the atmospheric waves. Horses and men were glad enough of this, after what they had suffered from the heat and drought, and they felt animated with fresh ardor and confidence. But contrary to what Thalcave had said, the whole district appeared uninhabited, or rather abandoned.
From the moment they left the Guamini, the temperature changed noticeably, much to the travelers' relief. It was much cooler, thanks to the strong, cold winds coming from Patagonia that stirred up the air. The horses and men were grateful for this after enduring the heat and drought, and they felt rejuvenated with new energy and confidence. But contrary to what Thalcave had mentioned, the entire area seemed deserted or, more accurately, abandoned.
Their route often led past or went right through small lagoons, sometimes of fresh water, sometimes of brackish. On the banks and bushes about these, king-wrens were hopping about and larks singing joyously in concert with the tangaras, the rivals in color of the brilliant humming birds. On the thorny bushes the nests of the ANNUBIS swung to and fro in the breeze like an Indian hammock; and on the shore magnificent flamingos stalked in regular order like soldiers marching, and spread out their flaming red wings. Their nests were seen in groups of thousands, forming a complete town, about a foot high, and resembling a truncated cone in shape. The flamingos did not disturb themselves in the least at the approach of the travelers, but this did not suit Paganel.
Their route often took them past or right through small lagoons, sometimes with fresh water and sometimes brackish. On the banks and bushes around these, king wrens were hopping around and larks were singing joyfully along with the tangaras, their colorful rivals to the brilliant hummingbirds. On the thorny bushes, the nests of the ANNUBIS swayed in the breeze like Indian hammocks; and on the shore, magnificent flamingos walked in formation like soldiers marching, spreading their bright red wings. Their nests were seen in groups of thousands, forming a complete town, about a foot high, and shaped like truncated cones. The flamingos were completely unbothered by the travelers' approach, but this irritated Paganel.
“I have been very desirous a long time,” he said to the Major, “to see a flamingo flying.”
“I've really wanted for a long time,” he said to the Major, “to see a flamingo in flight.”
“All right,” replied McNabbs.
“Okay,” replied McNabbs.
“Now while I have the opportunity, I should like to make the most of it,” continued Paganel.
“Now that I have the chance, I want to make the most of it,” continued Paganel.
“Very well; do it, Paganel.”
“Alright; go ahead, Paganel.”
“Come with me, then, Major, and you too Robert. I want witnesses.”
“Come with me, then, Major, and you too, Robert. I want witnesses.”
And all three went off towards the flamingos, leaving the others to go on in advance.
And the three of them headed off towards the flamingos, allowing the others to move ahead.
As soon as they were near enough, Paganel fired, only loading his gun, however, with powder, for he would not shed even the blood of a bird uselessly. The shot made the whole assemblage fly away en masse, while Paganel watched them attentively through his spectacles.
As soon as they got close enough, Paganel fired, but he only loaded his gun with powder since he didn't want to wastefully spill even a bird's blood. The shot caused the entire group to take off all at once, while Paganel observed them closely through his glasses.
“Well, did you see them fly?” he asked the Major.
“Well, did you see them fly?” he asked the Major.
“Certainly I did,” was the reply. “I could not help seeing them, unless I had been blind.”
“Of course I did,” was the response. “I couldn't help but see them unless I had been blind.”
“Well and did you think they resembled feathered arrows when they were flying?”
“Well, did you think they looked like feathered arrows when they were flying?”
“Not in the least.”
“Not at all.”
“Not a bit,” added Robert.
“Not at all,” added Robert.
“I was sure of it,” said the geographer, with a satisfied air; “and yet the very proudest of modest men, my illustrious countryman, Chateaubriand, made the inaccurate comparison. Oh, Robert, comparison is the most dangerous figure in rhetoric that I know. Mind you avoid it all your life, and only employ it in a last extremity.”
“I was sure of it,” said the geographer, with a satisfied look; “and yet the most modest of proud men, my renowned countryman, Chateaubriand, made the inaccurate comparison. Oh, Robert, comparison is the most dangerous tool in rhetoric that I know. Make sure to avoid it throughout your life, and only use it as a last resort.”
“Are you satisfied with your experiment?” asked McNabbs.
“Are you happy with your experiment?” asked McNabbs.
“Delighted.”
“Thrilled.”
“And so am I. But we had better push on now, for your illustrious Chateaubriand has put us more than a mile behind.”
“And so am I. But we should keep moving now, because your famous Chateaubriand has set us back more than a mile.”
On rejoining their companions, they found Glenarvan busily engaged in conversation with the Indian, though apparently unable to make him understand. Thalcave’s gaze was fixed intently on the horizon, and his face wore a puzzled expression.
On rejoining their friends, they found Glenarvan deeply involved in conversation with the Indian, though he seemed unable to make himself understood. Thalcave's eyes were focused intently on the horizon, and he looked confused.
The moment Paganel came in sight, Glenarvan called out:
The moment Paganel came into view, Glenarvan shouted:
“Come along, friend Paganel. Thalcave and I can’t understand each other at all.”
“Come on, friend Paganel. Thalcave and I can't communicate at all.”
After a few minute’s talk with the Patagonian, the interpreter turned to Glenarvan and said:
After a brief conversation with the Patagonian, the interpreter turned to Glenarvan and said:
“Thalcave is quite astonished at the fact, and certainly it is very strange that there are no Indians, nor even traces of any to be seen in these plains, for they are generally thick with companies of them, either driving along cattle stolen from the ESTANCIAS, or going to the Andes to sell their zorillo cloths and plaited leather whips.”
“Thalcave is really surprised by this, and it’s definitely odd that there are no Indigenous people, or even any signs of them, in these plains, since they usually roam here in groups, either herding cattle stolen from the ranches or heading to the Andes to sell their zorillo cloths and woven leather whips.”
“And what does Thalcave think is the reason?”
“And what does Thalcave think is the reason?”
“He does not know; he is amazed and that’s all.”
“He doesn’t know; he’s just amazed, and that’s it.”
“But what description of Indians did he reckon on meeting in this part of the Pampas?”
“But what kind of description of Indians did he expect to find in this part of the Pampas?”
“Just the very ones who had the foreign prisoners in their hands, the natives under the rule of the Caciques Calfoucoura, Catriel, or Yanchetruz.”
“Just the very people who had the foreign prisoners in their possession, the natives governed by the Caciques Calfoucoura, Catriel, or Yanchetruz.”
“Who are these Caciques?”
"Who are these leaders?"
“Chiefs that were all powerful thirty years ago, before they were driven beyond the sierras. Since then they have been reduced to subjection as much as Indians can be, and they scour the plains of the Pampas and the province of Buenos Ayres. I quite share Thalcave’s surprise at not discovering any traces of them in regions which they usually infest as SALTEADORES, or bandits.”
“Chiefs who were all-powerful thirty years ago, before they were pushed beyond the mountains. Since then, they have been brought under control as much as Indians can be, and they roam the plains of the Pampas and the province of Buenos Aires. I completely understand Thalcave’s surprise at not finding any signs of them in the areas where they usually operate as SALTEADORES, or bandits.”
“And what must we do then?”
"And what do we need to do then?"
“I’ll go and ask him,” replied Paganel.
“I'll go ask him,” Paganel said.
After a brief colloquy he returned and said:
After a short conversation, he came back and said:
“This is his advice, and very sensible it is, I think. He says we had better continue our route to the east as far as Fort Independence, and if we don’t get news of Captain Grant there we shall hear, at any rate, what has become of the Indians of the Argentine plains.”
“This is his advice, and I think it's very sensible. He says we should keep heading east all the way to Fort Independence, and if we don’t get any news about Captain Grant there, at least we'll find out what happened to the Indians of the Argentine plains.”
“Is Fort Independence far away?” asked Glenarvan.
“Is Fort Independence far from here?” asked Glenarvan.
“No, it is in the Sierra Tandil, a distance of about sixty miles.”
“No, it’s in the Sierra Tandil, about sixty miles away.”
“And when shall we arrive?”
“When will we get there?”
“The day after to-morrow, in the evening.”
“The day after tomorrow, in the evening.”
Glenarvan was considerably disconcerted by this circumstance. Not to find an Indian where in general there were only too many, was so unusual that there must be some grave cause for it; but worse still if Harry Grant were a prisoner in the hands of any of those tribes, had he been dragged away with them to the north or south? Glenarvan felt that, cost what it might, they must not lose his track, and therefore decided to follow the advice of Thalcave, and go to the village of Tandil. They would find some one there to speak to, at all events.
Glenarvan was quite unsettled by this situation. Not finding an Indian where there were usually too many was so strange that there had to be a serious reason for it; even worse, if Harry Grant was a prisoner among those tribes, had he been taken away with them to the north or south? Glenarvan realized that, no matter the cost, they couldn’t lose his trail, so he decided to heed Thalcave's advice and head to the village of Tandil. At the very least, they would find someone there to talk to.
About four o’clock in the evening a hill, which seemed a mountain in so flat a country, was sighted in the distance. This was Sierra Tapalquem, at the foot of which the travelers camped that night.
About four o’clock in the evening, a hill that looked like a mountain in such a flat area was spotted in the distance. This was Sierra Tapalquem, where the travelers set up camp for the night.
The passage in the morning over this sierra, was accomplished without the slightest difficulty; after having crossed the Cordillera of the Andes, it was easy work to ascend the gentle heights of such a sierra as this. The horses scarcely slackened their speed. At noon they passed the deserted fort of Tapalquem, the first of the chain of forts which defend the southern frontiers from Indian marauders. But to the increasing surprise of Thalcave, they did not come across even the shadow of an Indian. About the middle of the day, however, three flying horsemen, well mounted and well armed came in sight, gazed at them for an instant, and then sped away with inconceivable rapidity. Glenarvan was furious.
The morning journey across this sierra went smoothly; after crossing the Andes, it was easy to climb the gentle slopes of this sierra. The horses hardly slowed down. At noon, they passed the abandoned fort of Tapalquem, the first in a series of forts that protect the southern borders from Indian raiders. But to Thalcave's growing surprise, they didn’t encounter a single Indian. Around midday, however, three fast horse riders, well-mounted and well-armed, appeared, looked at them for a moment, and then disappeared at unbelievable speed. Glenarvan was furious.
“Gauchos,” said the Patagonian, designating them by the name which had caused such a fiery discussion between the Major and Paganel.
“Gauchos,” said the Patagonian, using the term that had sparked such a heated debate between the Major and Paganel.
“Ah! the Gauchos,” replied McNabbs. “Well, Paganel, the north wind is not blowing to-day. What do you think of those fellows yonder?”
“Ah! the Gauchos,” replied McNabbs. “Well, Paganel, the north wind isn’t blowing today. What do you think of those guys over there?”
“I think they look like regular bandits.”
“I think they look like regular thieves.”
“And how far is it from looking to being, my good geographer?”
“And how far is it from looking to being, my good geographer?”
“Only just a step, my dear Major.”
“Just a small step, my dear Major.”
Paganel’s admission was received with a general laugh, which did not in the least disconcert him. He went on talking about the Indians however, and made this curious observation:
Paganel’s confession was met with a collective laugh, which didn't faze him at all. He continued discussing the Indians and made this interesting point:
“I have read somewhere,” he said, “that about the Arabs there is a peculiar expression of ferocity in the mouth, while the eyes have a kindly look. Now, in these American savages it is quite the reverse, for the eye has a particularly villainous aspect.”
"I read somewhere," he said, "that Arabs have a strange fierceness in their mouths, while their eyes have a warm, friendly look. Now, with these American savages, it's the opposite—their eyes have a really sinister look."
No physiognomist by profession could have better characterized the Indian race.
No professional physiognomist could have better described the Indian race.
But desolate as the country appeared, Thalcave was on his guard against surprises, and gave orders to his party to form themselves in a close platoon. It was a useless precaution, however; for that same evening, they camped for the night in an immense TOLDERIA, which they not only found perfectly empty, but which the Patagonian declared, after he had examined it all round, must have been uninhabited for a long time.
But as deserted as the area looked, Thalcave stayed alert for any surprises and instructed his group to form a tight formation. However, it turned out to be a pointless measure because that evening, they set up camp in a vast TOLDERIA, which was not only completely empty but the Patagonian also declared, after checking it thoroughly, that it must have been uninhabited for a long time.
Next day, the first ESTANCIAS of the Sierra Tandil came in sight. The ESTANCIAS are large cattle stations for breeding cattle; but Thalcave resolved not to stop at any of them, but to go straight on to Fort Independence. They passed several farms fortified by battlements and surrounded by a deep moat, the principal building being encircled by a terrace, from which the inhabitants could fire down on the marauders in the plain. Glenarvan might, perhaps, have got some information at these houses, but it was the surest plan to go straight on to the village of Tandil. Accordingly they went on without stopping, fording the RIO of Los Huasos and also the Chapaleofu, a few miles further on. Soon they were treading the grassy slopes of the first ridges of the Sierra Tandil, and an hour afterward the village appeared in the depths of a narrow gorge, and above it towered the lofty battlements of Fort Independence.
The next day, the first cattle stations of the Sierra Tandil came into view. These cattle stations are large farms for raising cattle, but Thalcave decided not to stop at any of them and to head straight to Fort Independence instead. They passed several farms protected by battlements and surrounded by a deep moat, with the main building wrapped in a terrace that allowed the residents to shoot down at intruders on the plain. Glenarvan might have been able to gather some information at these places, but it made more sense to continue directly to the village of Tandil. So, they kept going without stopping, fording the Río de Los Huasos and then the Chapaleofu a few miles later. Soon, they were walking on the grassy slopes of the first ridges of the Sierra Tandil, and an hour later, the village emerged in the depths of a narrow gorge, with the tall battlements of Fort Independence towering above it.
CHAPTER XXI A FALSE TRAIL
THE Sierra Tandil rises a thousand feet above the level of the sea. It is a primordial chain—that is to say, anterior to all organic and metamorphic creation. It is formed of a semi-circular ridge of gneiss hills, covered with fine short grass. The district of Tandil, to which it has given its name, includes all the south of the Province of Buenos Ayres, and terminates in a river which conveys north all the RIOS that take their rise on its slopes.
THE Sierra Tandil rises a thousand feet above sea level. It is an ancient mountain range—that is, it predates all organic and metamorphic formations. It's made up of a semi-circular ridge of gneiss hills, covered with fine short grass. The Tandil region, which it has named, encompasses the entirety of the southern part of Buenos Aires Province and ends at a river that carries north all the streams originating from its slopes.
After making a short ascent up the sierra, they reached the postern gate, so carelessly guarded by an Argentine sentinel, that they passed through without difficulty, a circumstance which betokened extreme negligence or extreme security.
After a brief climb up the sierra, they arrived at the postern gate, which was so poorly guarded by an Argentine sentinel that they were able to pass through easily, a situation that suggested either complete recklessness or total confidence.
A few minutes afterward the Commandant appeared in person. He was a vigorous man about fifty years of age, of military aspect, with grayish hair, and an imperious eye, as far as one could see through the clouds of tobacco smoke which escaped from his short pipe. His walk reminded Paganel instantly of the old subalterns in his own country.
A few minutes later, the Commandant showed up in person. He was a strong man around fifty years old, looking very military with grayish hair and a commanding gaze, at least as much as one could see through the clouds of tobacco smoke coming from his short pipe. His stride instantly reminded Paganel of the old subalterns back in his own country.
Thalcave was spokesman, and addressing the officer, presented Lord Glenarvan and his companions. While he was speaking, the Commandant kept staring fixedly at Paganel in rather an embarrassing manner. The geographer could not understand what he meant by it, and was just about to interrogate him, when the Commandant came forward, and seizing both his hands in the most free-and-easy fashion, said in a joyous voice, in the mother tongue of the geographer:
Thalcave was the spokesperson and, addressing the officer, introduced Lord Glenarvan and his companions. While he was talking, the Commandant kept staring intently at Paganel in a rather uncomfortable way. The geographer couldn’t figure out what he was getting at and was just about to ask him when the Commandant stepped up, grabbed both his hands casually, and said cheerfully, in the geographer’s native language:
“A Frenchman!”
“A French guy!”
“Yes, a Frenchman,” replied Paganel.
“Yes, a French guy,” replied Paganel.
“Ah! delightful! Welcome, welcome. I am a Frenchman too,” he added, shaking Paganel’s hand with such vigor as to be almost alarming.
“Ah! delightful! Welcome, welcome. I’m French too,” he added, shaking Paganel’s hand with such enthusiasm that it was almost startling.
“Is he a friend of yours, Paganel?” asked the Major.
"Is he your friend, Paganel?" the Major asked.
“Yes,” said Paganel, somewhat proudly. “One has friends in every division of the globe.”
“Yes,” said Paganel, somewhat proudly. “You have friends in every part of the world.”
After he had succeeded in disengaging his hand, though not without difficulty, from the living vise in which it was held, a lively conversation ensued. Glenarvan would fain have put in a word about the business on hand, but the Commandant related his entire history, and was not in a mood to stop till he had done. It was evident that the worthy man must have left his native country many years back, for his mother tongue had grown unfamiliar, and if he had not forgotten the words he certainly did not remember how to put them together. He spoke more like a negro belonging to a French colony.
After he finally managed to free his hand, though not without some struggle, from the tight grip that held it, an energetic conversation started. Glenarvan wanted to say something about the current situation, but the Commandant shared his whole story and wasn’t inclined to stop until he finished. It was clear that the poor man must have left his home country many years ago, as his native language had become unfamiliar to him. If he hadn’t forgotten the words, he definitely didn’t remember how to put them together. He spoke more like someone from a French colony.
The fact was that the Governor of Fort Independence was a French sergeant, an old comrade of Parachapee. He had never left the fort since it had been built in 1828; and, strange to say, he commanded it with the consent of the Argentine Government. He was a man about fifty years of age, a Basque by birth, and his name was Manuel Ipharaguerre, so that he was almost a Spaniard. A year after his arrival in the country he was naturalized, took service in the Argentine army, and married an Indian girl, who was then nursing twin babies six months old—two boys, be it understood, for the good wife of the Commandant would have never thought of presenting her husband with girls. Manuel could not conceive of any state but a military one, and he hoped in due time, with the help of God, to offer the republic a whole company of young soldiers.
The truth was that the Governor of Fort Independence was a French sergeant, an old buddy of Parachapee. He had never left the fort since it was built in 1828; and, oddly enough, he was in charge with the approval of the Argentine Government. He was around fifty years old, a Basque by birth, and his name was Manuel Ipharaguerre, so he was almost Spanish. A year after arriving in the country, he became a citizen, joined the Argentine army, and married an Indigenous woman who was then caring for six-month-old twins—two boys, just to clarify, because the Commandant's wife would never have thought of giving her husband daughters. Manuel couldn’t imagine any life other than a military one, and he hoped, with God's help, to eventually offer the republic a whole company of young soldiers.
“You saw them. Charming! good soldiers are Jose, Juan, and Miquele! Pepe, seven year old; Pepe can handle a gun.”
“You saw them. Charming! Good soldiers are Jose, Juan, and Miquele! Pepe, the seven-year-old; Pepe can handle a gun.”
Pepe, hearing himself complimented, brought his two little feet together, and presented arms with perfect grace.
Pepe, hearing compliments directed at him, brought his little feet together and saluted with perfect grace.
“He’ll get on!” added the sergeant. “He’ll be colonel-major or brigadier-general some day.”
“He'll make it!” added the sergeant. “He'll be a colonel or a brigadier general someday.”
Sergeant Manuel seemed so enchanted that it would have been useless to express a contrary opinion, either to the profession of arms or the probable future of his children. He was happy, and as Goethe says, “Nothing that makes us happy is an illusion.”
Sergeant Manuel seemed so captivated that it would have been pointless to share a different opinion, whether about military life or the potential future of his kids. He was happy, and as Goethe says, “Nothing that makes us happy is an illusion.”
All this talk took up a quarter of an hour, to the great astonishment of Thalcave. The Indian could not understand how so many words could come out of one throat. No one interrupted the Sergeant, but all things come to an end, and at last he was silent, but not till he had made his guests enter his dwelling, and be presented to Madame Ipharaguerre. Then, and not till then, did he ask his guests what had procured him the honor of their visit. Now or never was the moment to explain, and Paganel, seizing the chance at once, began an account of their journey across the Pampas, and ended by inquiring the reason of the Indians having deserted the country.
All this talking took about fifteen minutes, to the great surprise of Thalcave. The Indian couldn’t believe how many words could come from one person. No one interrupted the Sergeant, but everything has to come to an end, and eventually he fell silent, but not before making his guests enter his home and meet Madame Ipharaguerre. Only then did he ask his guests what brought them to visit him. It was the perfect moment to explain, and Paganel quickly took the opportunity to start telling them about their journey across the Pampas, concluding by asking why the Indians had left the area.
“Ah! there was no one!” replied the Sergeant, shrugging his shoulders—“really no one, and us, too, our arms crossed! Nothing to do!”
“Ah! there was no one!” replied the Sergeant, shrugging his shoulders—“really no one, and us, too, our arms crossed! Nothing to do!”
“But why?”
"Why though?"
“War.”
“Conflict.”
“War?”
"War?"
“Yes, civil war between the Paraguayans and Buenos Ayriens,” replied the Sergeant.
“Yes, there's a civil war between the Paraguayans and the people of Buenos Aires,” replied the Sergeant.
“Well?”
"What's up?"
“Well, Indians all in the north, in the rear of General Flores. Indian pillagers find pillage there.”
“Well, the Native Americans are up north, behind General Flores. Native American raiders are finding things to steal there.”
“But where are the Caciques?”
“But where are the leaders?”
“Caciques are with them.”
"Caciques are with them."
“What! Catriel?”
“What! Catriel?”
“There is no Catriel.”
“Catriel doesn’t exist.”
“And Calfoucoura?”
“And Calfoucoura?”
“There is no Calfoucoura.”
“There is no Calfoucoura.”
“And is there no Yanchetruz?”
“And is there no Yanchetruz?”
“No; no Yanchetruz.”
"No; no Yanchetruz."
The reply was interpreted by Thalcave, who shook his head and gave an approving look. The Patagonian was either unaware of, or had forgotten that civil war was decimating the two parts of the republic—a war which ultimately required the intervention of Brazil. The Indians have everything to gain by these intestine strifes, and can not lose such fine opportunities of plunder. There was no doubt the Sergeant was right in assigning war then as the cause of the forsaken appearance of the plains.
The reply was interpreted by Thalcave, who shook his head and gave an approving look. The Patagonian either didn’t realize or had forgotten that civil war was tearing the two parts of the republic apart—a war that eventually needed Brazil’s intervention. The Indians had everything to gain from these internal conflicts and couldn’t afford to miss such great chances for looting. There was no doubt the Sergeant was correct in attributing the desolate look of the plains to the war.
But this circumstance upset all Glenarvan’s projects, for if Harry Grant was a prisoner in the hands of the Caciques, he must have been dragged north with them. How and where should they ever find him if that were the case? Should they attempt a perilous and almost useless journey to the northern border of the Pampas? It was a serious question which would need to be well talked over.
But this situation threw a wrench in all of Glenarvan's plans because if Harry Grant was a prisoner of the Caciques, he must have been taken north with them. How and where would they ever find him if that were true? Should they try a risky and almost pointless journey to the northern edge of the Pampas? It was a serious question that needed a good discussion.
However, there was one inquiry more to make to the Sergeant; and it was the Major who thought of it, for all the others looked at each other in silence.
However, there was one more question to ask the Sergeant; and it was the Major who thought of it, as the others exchanged silent glances.
“Had the Sergeant heard whether any Europeans were prisoners in the hands of the Caciques?”
“Did the Sergeant find out if any Europeans were being held captive by the Caciques?”
Manuel looked thoughtful for a few minutes, like a man trying to ransack his memory. At last he said:
Manuel looked deep in thought for a few minutes, like someone trying to dig through his memories. Finally, he said:
“Yes.”
"Yeah."
“Ah!” said Glenarvan, catching at the fresh hope.
“Ah!” said Glenarvan, holding on to the new hope.
They all eagerly crowded round the Sergeant, exclaiming,
They all eagerly gathered around the Sergeant, shouting,
“Tell us, tell us.”
"Tell us, tell us."
“It was some years ago,” replied Manuel. “Yes; all I heard was that some Europeans were prisoners, but I never saw them.”
“It was a few years ago,” replied Manuel. “Yeah; all I heard was that some Europeans were prisoners, but I never saw them.”
“You are making a mistake,” said Glenarvan. “It can’t be some years ago; the date of the shipwreck is explicitly given. The BRITANNIA was wrecked in June, 1862. It is scarcely two years ago.”
“You're making a mistake,” Glenarvan said. “It can't be years ago; the date of the shipwreck is clearly stated. The BRITANNIA went down in June 1862. That's barely two years ago.”
“Oh, more than that, my Lord.”
“Oh, more than that, my Lord.”
“Impossible!” said Paganel.
"Impossible!" said Paganel.
“Oh, but it must be. It was when Pepe was born. There were two prisoners.”
“Oh, but it has to be. It was back when Pepe was born. There were two prisoners.”
“No, three!” said Glenarvan.
“No, three!” said Glenarvan.
“Two!” replied the Sergeant, in a positive tone.
"Two!" the Sergeant replied confidently.
“Two?” echoed Glenarvan, much surprised. “Two Englishmen?”
“Two?” echoed Glenarvan, clearly surprised. “Two Englishmen?”
“No, no. Who is talking of Englishmen? No; a Frenchman and an Italian.”
“No, no. Who’s talking about Englishmen? No; a Frenchman and an Italian.”
“An Italian who was massacred by the Poyuches?” exclaimed Paganel.
“An Italian who got killed by the Poyuches?” exclaimed Paganel.
“Yes; and I heard afterward that the Frenchman was saved.”
“Yes, and I heard later that the Frenchman was rescued.”
“Saved!” exclaimed young Robert, his very life hanging on the lips of the Sergeant.
“Saved!” exclaimed young Robert, his life depending on what the Sergeant said.
“Yes; delivered out of the hands of the Indians.”
“Yes; saved from the hands of the Native Americans.”
Paganel struck his forehead with an air of desperation, and said at last,
Paganel slapped his forehead in frustration and finally said,
“Ah! I understand. It is all clear now; everything is explained.”
“Ah! I get it. It’s all clear now; everything makes sense.”
“But what is it?” asked Glenarvan, with as much impatience.
“But what is it?” Glenarvan asked, just as impatiently.
“My friends,” replied Paganel, taking both Robert’s hands in his own, “we must resign ourselves to a sad disaster. We have been on a wrong track. The prisoner mentioned is not the captain at all, but one of my own countrymen; and his companion, who was assassinated by the Poyuches, was Marco Vazello. The Frenchman was dragged along by the cruel Indians several times as far as the shores of the Colorado, but managed at length to make his escape, and return to Colorado. Instead of following the track of Harry Grant, we have fallen on that of young Guinnard.”
“My friends,” Paganel said, taking Robert's hands in his own, “we have to accept a sad reality. We've been on the wrong path. The prisoner mentioned isn’t the captain at all, but one of my fellow countrymen; and his companion, who was killed by the Poyuches, was Marco Vazello. The Frenchman was dragged by the ruthless Indians several times all the way to the shores of the Colorado, but eventually managed to escape and return to Colorado. Instead of following Harry Grant’s trail, we ended up on young Guinnard’s.”
This announcement was heard with profound silence. The mistake was palpable. The details given by the Sergeant, the nationality of the prisoner, the murder of his companions, his escape from the hands of the Indians, all evidenced the fact. Glenarvan looked at Thalcave with a crestfallen face, and the Indian, turning to the Sergeant, asked whether he had never heard of three English captives.
This announcement was met with complete silence. The mistake was obvious. The details provided by the Sergeant, the nationality of the prisoner, the murder of his companions, his escape from the Indians, all proved the point. Glenarvan looked at Thalcave with a disappointed face, and Thalcave, turning to the Sergeant, asked if he had ever heard of three English captives.
“Never,” replied Manuel. “They would have known of them at Tandil, I am sure. No, it cannot be.”
“Never,” replied Manuel. “They would have known about them in Tandil, I’m sure. No, it can't be.”
After this, there was nothing further to do at Fort Independence but to shake hands with the Commandant, and thank him and take leave.
After this, there was nothing left to do at Fort Independence except to shake hands with the Commandant, thank him, and say goodbye.
Glenarvan was in despair at this complete overthrow of his hopes, and Robert walked silently beside him, with his eyes full of tears. Glenarvan could not find a word of comfort to say to him. Paganel gesticulated and talked away to himself. The Major never opened his mouth, nor Thalcave, whose amour propre, as an Indian, seemed quite wounded by having allowed himself to go on a wrong scent. No one, however, would have thought of reproaching him for an error so pardonable.
Glenarvan was devastated by the total collapse of his hopes, and Robert walked silently beside him, tears in his eyes. Glenarvan couldn’t find anything comforting to say. Paganel waved his arms around and muttered to himself. The Major stayed quiet, and so did Thalcave, whose pride as an Indian seemed hurt by having followed a false lead. Still, no one would have blamed him for such a forgivable mistake.
They went back to the FONDA, and had supper; but it was a gloomy party that surrounded the table. It was not that any one of them regretted the fatigue they had so heedlessly endured or the dangers they had run, but they felt their hope of success was gone, for there was no chance of coming across Captain Grant between the Sierra Tandil and the sea, as Sergeant Manuel must have heard if any prisoners had fallen into the hands of the Indians on the coast of the Atlantic. Any event of this nature would have attracted the notice of the Indian traders who traffic between Tandil and Carmen, at the mouth of the Rio Negro. The best thing to do now was to get to the DUNCAN as quick as possible at the appointed rendezvous.
They went back to the inn and had dinner, but it was a somber group around the table. None of them regretted the exhaustion they had endured or the dangers they had faced, but they felt their hope for success was lost. There was no chance of finding Captain Grant between the Sierra Tandil and the sea, as Sergeant Manuel would have learned if any prisoners had been captured by the Indians on the Atlantic coast. Any such event would have caught the attention of the Indian traders who operated between Tandil and Carmen, at the mouth of the Rio Negro. The best move now was to reach the DUNCAN as quickly as possible at the agreed meeting point.
Paganel asked Glenarvan, however, to let him have the document again, on the faith of which they had set out on so bootless a search. He read it over and over, as if trying to extract some new meaning out of it.
Paganel asked Glenarvan to give him the document again, the one that had led them to embark on such a pointless search. He read it repeatedly, as if trying to find some new meaning in it.
“Yet nothing can be clearer,” said Glenarvan; “it gives the date of the shipwreck, and the manner, and the place of the captivity in the most categorical manner.”
“Yet nothing can be clearer,” said Glenarvan; “it states the date of the shipwreck, along with the method and the location of the captivity in the most explicit way.”
“That it does not—no, it does not!” exclaimed Paganel, striking the table with his fist. “Since Harry Grant is not in the Pampas, he is not in America; but where he is the document must say, and it shall say, my friends, or my name is not Jacques Paganel any longer.”
“Absolutely not—it does not!” Paganel shouted, banging his fist on the table. “Since Harry Grant isn't in the Pampas, he isn't in America; but the document has to state where he is, and it will state it, my friends, or I’m no longer Jacques Paganel.”
CHAPTER XXII THE FLOOD
A DISTANCE of 150 miles separates Fort Independence from the shores of the Atlantic. Unless unexpected and certainly improbable delays should occur, in four days Glenarvan would rejoin the DUNCAN. But to return on board without Captain Grant, and after having so completely failed in his search, was what he could not bring himself to do. Consequently, when next day came, he gave no orders for departure; the Major took it upon himself to have the horses saddled, and make all preparations. Thanks to his activity, next morning at eight o’clock the little troop was descending the grassy slopes of the Sierra.
A distance of 150 miles separates Fort Independence from the coast of the Atlantic. Unless unexpected and highly unlikely delays happen, Glenarvan would reunite with the DUNCAN in four days. However, he couldn't bring himself to go back on board without Captain Grant, especially after failing so completely in his search. So, when the next day arrived, he did not give any orders for departure; the Major took it upon himself to saddle the horses and make all the preparations. Thanks to his efforts, the next morning at eight o’clock, the small group was descending the grassy slopes of the Sierra.
Glenarvan, with Robert at his side, galloped along without saying a word. His bold, determined nature made it impossible to take failure quietly. His heart throbbed as if it would burst, and his head was burning. Paganel, excited by the difficulty, was turning over and over the words of the document, and trying to discover some new meaning. Thalcave was perfectly silent, and left Thaouka to lead the way. The Major, always confident, remained firm at his post, like a man on whom discouragement takes no hold. Tom Austin and his two sailors shared the dejection of their master. A timid rabbit happened to run across their path, and the superstitious men looked at each other in dismay.
Glenarvan, with Robert beside him, rode on without saying a word. His bold, determined nature made it impossible for him to accept failure quietly. His heart raced as if it would burst, and his head felt like it was on fire. Paganel, thrilled by the challenge, kept going over the words of the document, trying to uncover some new meaning. Thalcave stayed completely silent, letting Thaouka take the lead. The Major, always confident, held his ground like a man who doesn’t let discouragement affect him. Tom Austin and his two sailors felt their master's gloom. A scared rabbit suddenly darted across their path, and the superstitious men exchanged worried glances.
“A bad omen,” said Wilson.
“A bad sign,” said Wilson.
“Yes, in the Highlands,” repeated Mulrady.
“Yes, in the Highlands,” Mulrady repeated.
“What’s bad in the Highlands is not better here,” returned Wilson sententiously.
“What’s bad in the Highlands isn’t any better here,” Wilson replied wisely.
Toward noon they had crossed the Sierra, and descended into the undulating plains which extend to the sea. Limpid RIOS intersected these plains, and lost themselves among the tall grasses. The ground had once more become a dead level, the last mountains of the Pampas were passed, and a long carpet of verdure unrolled itself over the monotonous prairie beneath the horses’ tread.
By noon, they had crossed the Sierra and come down into the rolling plains that stretch towards the sea. Clear rivers cut through these plains and disappeared among the tall grasses. The ground was once again completely flat; the last mountains of the Pampas were behind them, and a long stretch of greenery spread out over the dull prairie under the horses' hooves.
Hitherto the weather had been fine, but to-day the sky presented anything but a reassuring appearance. The heavy vapors, generated by the high temperature of the preceding days, hung in thick clouds, which ere long would empty themselves in torrents of rain. Moreover, the vicinity of the Atlantic, and the prevailing west wind, made the climate of this district particularly damp. This was evident by the fertility and abundance of the pasture and its dark color. However, the clouds remained unbroken for the present, and in the evening, after a brisk gallop of forty miles, the horses stopped on the brink of deep CANADAS, immense natural trenches filled with water. No shelter was near, and ponchos had to serve both for tents and coverlets as each man lay down and fell asleep beneath the threatening sky.
Until now, the weather had been nice, but today the sky looked anything but reassuring. Thick clouds filled with heavy humidity from the recent warm days were about to unleash a downpour. Additionally, being near the Atlantic and with the prevailing west wind made the climate in this area especially damp. This was clear from the lush green pastures and their dark color. However, for the moment, the clouds remained intact, and in the evening, after a fast ride of forty miles, the horses halted at the edge of deep CANADAS, huge natural trenches filled with water. There was no shelter nearby, so ponchos had to double as tents and blankets as each person lay down and drifted off to sleep under the ominous sky.
Next day the presence of water became still more sensibly felt; it seemed to exude from every pore of the ground. Soon large ponds, some just beginning to form, and some already deep, lay across the route to the east. As long as they had only to deal with lagoons, circumscribed pieces of water unencumbered with aquatic plants, the horses could get through well enough, but when they encountered moving sloughs called PENTANOS, it was harder work. Tall grass blocked them up, and they were involved in the peril before they were aware.
The next day, the presence of water was even more noticeable; it seemed to seep from every part of the ground. Soon, large ponds—some just starting to form and others already quite deep—appeared along the route to the east. As long as they only had to navigate through lagoons, enclosed patches of water free from aquatic plants, the horses managed fine, but when they came across shifting marshes called PENTANOS, it became much tougher. Tall grass obstructed their path, and they found themselves in danger before they even realized it.
These bogs had already proved fatal to more than one living thing, for Robert, who had got a good bit ahead of the party, came rushing back at full gallop, calling out:
These bogs had already shown themselves to be deadly to more than one living thing, because Robert, who had gotten quite a bit ahead of the group, came rushing back at full speed, shouting:
“Monsieur Paganel, Monsieur Paganel, a forest of horns.”
“Monsieur Paganel, Monsieur Paganel, a whole forest of horns.”
“What!” exclaimed the geographer; “you have found a forest of horns?”
“What!” exclaimed the geographer. “You’ve found a forest of horns?”
“Yes, yes, or at any rate a coppice.”
“Yes, yes, or at least a thicket.”
“A coppice!” replied Paganel, shrugging his shoulders. “My boy, you are dreaming.”
“A coppice!” replied Paganel, shrugging his shoulders. “My dude, you’re just dreaming.”
“I am not dreaming, and you will see for yourself. Well, this is a strange country. They sow horns, and they sprout up like wheat. I wish I could get some of the seed.”
“I’m not dreaming, and you’ll see for yourself. Well, this is a weird country. They plant horns, and they grow like wheat. I wish I could get some of the seeds.”
“The boy is really speaking seriously,” said the Major.
“The boy is really serious,” said the Major.
“Yes, Mr. Major, and you will soon see I am right.”
“Yes, Mr. Major, and you’ll soon see I’m right.”
The boy had not been mistaken, for presently they found themselves in front of an immense field of horns, regularly planted and stretching far out of sight. It was a complete copse, low and close packed, but a strange sort.
The boy wasn't wrong, as they soon found themselves in front of a vast field of horns, evenly spaced and stretching far out of sight. It was a dense thicket, low and tightly packed, but a peculiar kind.
“Well,” said Robert.
“Well,” Robert said.
“This is peculiar certainly,” said Paganel, and he turned round to question Thalcave on the subject.
“This is definitely strange,” said Paganel, and he turned around to ask Thalcave about it.
“The horns come out of the ground,” replied the Indian, “but the oxen are down below.”
“The horns come up from the ground,” replied the Indian, “but the oxen are down below.”
“What!” exclaimed Paganel; “do you mean to say that a whole herd was caught in that mud and buried alive?”
“What!” Paganel exclaimed. “Are you saying that an entire herd got stuck in that mud and was buried alive?”
“Yes,” said the Patagonian.
“Yes,” said the Patagonian.
And so it was. An immense herd had been suffocated side by side in this enormous bog, and this was not the first occurrence of the kind which had taken place in the Argentine plains.
And so it happened. A huge herd had been suffocated next to each other in this vast swamp, and this wasn't the first time something like this had happened in the Argentine plains.
An hour afterward and the field of horns lay two miles behind.
An hour later, the field of horns was two miles behind.
Thalcave was somewhat anxiously observing a state of things which appeared to him unusual. He frequently stopped and raised himself on his stirrups and looked around. His great height gave him a commanding view of the whole horizon; but after a keen rapid survey, he quickly resumed his seat and went on. About a mile further he stopped again, and leaving the straight route, made a circuit of some miles north and south, and then returned and fell back in his place at the head of the troop, without saying a syllable as to what he hoped or feared. This strange behavior, several times repeated, made Glenarvan very uneasy, and quite puzzled Paganel. At last, at Glenarvan’s request, he asked the Indian about it.
Thalcave was watching the situation with noticeable anxiety, finding it unusual. He often stopped, rose on his stirrups, and scanned the surroundings. His height allowed him to see the entire horizon, but after a quick look, he would settle back into his seat and continue on. About a mile later, he stopped again, deviated from the straight path, made a loop several miles north and south, and then returned to his position at the front of the group without mentioning what he might be hoping for or fearing. This strange behavior, repeated several times, made Glenarvan very uneasy and left Paganel quite confused. Finally, at Glenarvan's prompting, he asked the Indian about it.
Thalcave replied that he was astonished to see the plains so saturated with water. Never, to his knowledge, since he had followed the calling of guide, had he found the ground in this soaking condition. Even in the rainy season, the Argentine plains had always been passable.
Thalcave replied that he was amazed to see the plains so soaked with water. Never, to his knowledge, since he had worked as a guide, had he encountered the ground in such a wet state. Even during the rainy season, the Argentine plains had always been navigable.
“But what is the cause of this increasing humidity?” said Paganel.
“But what’s causing this increasing humidity?” said Paganel.
“I do not know, and what if I did?”
“I don’t know, and what if I did?”
“Could it be owing to the RIOS of the Sierra being swollen to overflowing by the heavy rains?”
“Could it be because the rivers of the Sierra are overflowing from the heavy rains?”
“Sometimes they are.”
"Sometimes they are."
“And is it the case now?”
“And is that the case now?”
“Perhaps.”
"Maybe."
Paganel was obliged to be content with this unsatisfactory reply, and went back to Glenarvan to report the result of his conversation.
Paganel had to settle for this disappointing answer and went back to Glenarvan to share what he had discussed.
“And what does Thalcave advise us to do?” said Glenarvan.
“And what does Thalcave recommend we do?” said Glenarvan.
Paganel went back to the guide and asked him.
Paganel went back to the guide and asked him.
“Go on fast,” was the reply.
"Keep going quickly," was the response.
This was easier said than done. The horses soon tired of treading over ground that gave way at every step. It sank each moment more and more, till it seemed half under water.
This was easier said than done. The horses quickly got tired of walking over ground that gave way with every step. It sank deeper and deeper, until it felt like it was half underwater.
They quickened their pace, but could not go fast enough to escape the water, which rolled in great sheets at their feet. Before two hours the cataracts of the sky opened and deluged the plain in true tropical torrents of rain. Never was there a finer occasion for displaying philosophic equanimity. There was no shelter, and nothing for it but to bear it stolidly. The ponchos were streaming like the overflowing gutter-spouts on the roof of a house, and the unfortunate horsemen had to submit to a double bath, for their horses dashed up the water to their waists at every step.
They picked up their pace, but couldn’t move fast enough to escape the water, which poured in heavy sheets at their feet. Within two hours, the sky opened up and drenched the plain with true tropical downpours. It was the perfect moment to show some calm resilience. There was no shelter, and all they could do was endure it stoically. The ponchos were soaked like overflowing gutters on a roof, and the unfortunate riders had to deal with a double drenching, as their horses splashed through the water up to their waists with every step.
In this drenching, shivering state, and worn out with fatigue, they came toward evening to a miserable RANCHO, which could only have been called a shelter by people not very fastidious, and certainly only travelers in extremity would even have entered it; but Glenarvan and his companions had no choice, and were glad enough to burrow in this wretched hovel, though it would have been despised by even a poor Indian of the Pampas. A miserable fire of grass was kindled, which gave out more smoke than heat, and was very difficult to keep alight, as the torrents of rain which dashed against the ruined cabin outside found their way within and fell down in large drops from the roof. Twenty times over the fire would have been extinguished if Mulrady and Wilson had not kept off the water.
In their drenched, shivering state, and exhausted from fatigue, they arrived in the evening at a rundown RANCHO, which could only be considered a shelter by those who weren’t overly picky, and certainly only desperate travelers would have dared to enter it; but Glenarvan and his friends had no other option and were just glad to hunker down in this miserable place, even though it would have been looked down upon by even a poor Indian from the Pampas. They started a weak fire using grass, which produced more smoke than warmth and was hard to keep burning, as torrents of rain poured against the dilapidated cabin outside and dripped in large drops from the roof. The fire would’ve gone out twenty times if Mulrady and Wilson hadn’t kept the water away.
The supper was a dull meal, and neither appetizing nor reviving. Only the Major seemed to eat with any relish. The impassive McNabbs was superior to all circumstances. Paganel, Frenchman as he was, tried to joke, but the attempt was a failure.
The dinner was bland and neither tasty nor refreshing. Only the Major seemed to enjoy it. The indifferent McNabbs remained above it all. Paganel, being French, tried to make a joke, but it fell flat.
“My jests are damp,” he said, “they miss fire.”
“My jokes are flat,” he said, “they fall flat.”
The only consolation in such circumstances was to sleep, and accordingly each one lay down and endeavored to find in slumber a temporary forgetfulness of his discomforts and his fatigues. The night was stormy, and the planks of the rancho cracked before the blast as if every instant they would give way. The poor horses outside, exposed to all the inclemency of the weather, were making piteous moans, and their masters were suffering quite as much inside the ruined RANCHO. However, sleep overpowered them at length. Robert was the first to close his eyes and lean his head against Glenarvan’s shoulder, and soon all the rest were soundly sleeping too under the guardian eye of Heaven.
The only comfort in such a situation was sleep, so they all lay down and tried to find a temporary escape from their discomfort and exhaustion in slumber. The night was stormy, and the boards of the rancho creaked under the force of the wind, threatening to fall apart at any moment. The poor horses outside, exposed to the harsh weather, were whimpering sadly, while their owners were suffering just as much inside the dilapidated RANCHO. Eventually, sleep overtook them. Robert was the first to close his eyes and rest his head on Glenarvan’s shoulder, and soon the rest of them were sound asleep too, watched over by the protective gaze of Heaven.
The night passed safely, and no one stirred till Thaouka woke them by tapping vigorously against the RANCHO with his hoof. He knew it was time to start, and at a push could give the signal as well as his master. They owed the faithful creature too much to disobey him, and set off immediately.
The night went by without incident, and no one moved until Thaouka woke them by tapping hard against the RANCHO with his hoof. He knew it was time to begin, and he could give the signal just as well as his master. They owed a lot to the loyal animal, so they didn’t hesitate and started off right away.
The rain had abated, but floods of water still covered the ground. Paganel, on consulting his map, came to the conclusion that the RIOS Grande and Vivarota, into which the water from the plains generally runs, must have been united in one large bed several miles in extent.
The rain had stopped, but pools of water still covered the ground. Paganel, checking his map, concluded that the RIOS Grande and Vivarota, where the water from the plains usually flows, must have merged into one large riverbed several miles long.
Extreme haste was imperative, for all their lives depended on it. Should the inundation increase, where could they find refuge? Not a single elevated point was visible on the whole circle of the horizon, and on such level plains water would sweep along with fearful rapidity.
Extreme urgency was crucial, as their lives depended on it. If the flood worsened, where could they take shelter? Not a single high point was visible in any direction, and on such flat land, water would rush by with terrifying speed.
The horses were spurred on to the utmost, and Thaouka led the way, bounding over the water as if it had been his natural element. Certainly he might justly have been called a sea-horse—better than many of the amphibious animals who bear that name.
The horses were pushed to their limits, and Thaouka took the lead, leaping over the water as if it were his natural habitat. He could definitely be considered a sea-horse—better than many of the amphibious creatures that share that name.
All of a sudden, about ten in the morning, Thaouka betrayed symptoms of violent agitation. He kept turning round toward the south, neighing continually, and snorting with wide open nostrils. He reared violently, and Thalcave had some difficulty in keeping his seat. The foam from his mouth was tinged with blood from the action of the bit, pulled tightly by his master’s strong hand, and yet the fiery animal would not be still. Had he been free, his master knew he would have fled away to the north as fast as his legs would have carried him.
Out of nowhere, around ten in the morning, Thaouka started showing signs of intense agitation. He kept turning toward the south, neighing constantly, and snorting with his nostrils flared. He reared up violently, and Thalcave struggled to stay in the saddle. The foam from his mouth was tinged with blood from the bit, pulled tightly by his master's strong hand, yet the fiery horse wouldn’t calm down. Thalcave knew that if he were free, Thaouka would have bolted to the north as fast as he could run.
“What is the matter with Thaouka?” asked Paganel. “Is he bitten by the leeches? They are very voracious in the Argentine streams.”
“What’s wrong with Thaouka?” asked Paganel. “Did he get bitten by the leeches? They’re really aggressive in the Argentine streams.”
“No,” replied the Indian.
“No,” replied the Native American.
“Is he frightened at something, then?”
"Is he scared of something, then?"
“Yes, he scents danger.”
“Yeah, he senses danger.”
“What danger?”
"What threat?"
“I don’t know.”
"I have no idea."
But, though no danger was apparent to the eye, the ear could catch the sound of a murmuring noise beyond the limits of the horizon, like the coming in of the tide. Soon a confused sound was heard of bellowing and neighing and bleating, and about a mile to the south immense flocks appeared, rushing and tumbling over each other in the greatest disorder, as they hurried pell-mell along with inconceivable rapidity. They raised such a whirlwind of water in their course that it was impossible to distinguish them clearly. A hundred whales of the largest size could hardly have dashed up the ocean waves more violently.
But even though there seemed to be no visible danger, you could hear a murmur beyond the horizon, like the sound of the tide coming in. Soon, a chaotic symphony of bellowing, neighing, and bleating emerged, and about a mile to the south, huge flocks appeared, rushing and tumbling over each other in complete disarray as they sped along at an unimaginable pace. They kicked up such a whirlwind of water in their wake that it was impossible to see them clearly. A hundred of the largest whales couldn't have surged through the ocean waves more violently.
“Anda, anda!” (quick, quick), shouted Thalcave, in a voice like thunder.
“Come on, come on!” shouted Thalcave, his voice booming like thunder.
“What is it, then?” asked Paganel.
“What is it, then?” Paganel asked.
“The rising,” replied Thalcave.
"The rising," Thalcave replied.
“He means an inundation,” exclaimed Paganel, flying with the others after Thalcave, who had spurred on his horse toward the north.
“He means a flood,” exclaimed Paganel, rushing after Thalcave, who had urged his horse northward.
It was high time, for about five miles south an immense towering wave was seen advancing over the plain, and changing the whole country into an ocean. The tall grass disappeared before it as if cut down by a scythe, and clumps of mimosas were torn up and drifted about like floating islands.
It was finally time, because about five miles to the south, a massive wave was seen rolling across the plain, turning the entire area into an ocean. The tall grass vanished in its path as if it had been mowed down, and groups of mimosas were uprooted and floated around like little islands.
The wave was speeding on with the rapidity of a racehorse, and the travelers fled before it like a cloud before a storm-wind. They looked in vain for some harbor of refuge, and the terrified horses galloped so wildly along that the riders could hardly keep their saddles.
The wave was rushing forward as quickly as a racehorse, and the travelers ran from it like a cloud driven by a storm. They searched in vain for a safe place to escape, and the frightened horses ran so wildly that the riders could barely stay in their saddles.
“Anda, anda!” shouted Thalcave, and again they spurred on the poor animals till the blood ran from their lacerated sides. They stumbled every now and then over great cracks in the ground, or got entangled in the hidden grass below the water. They fell, and were pulled up only to fall again and again, and be pulled up again and again. The level of the waters was sensibly rising, and less than two miles off the gigantic wave reared its crested head.
Come on, come on! shouted Thalcave, and once more they urged the poor animals onward until blood streamed from their injured sides. They stumbled occasionally over large cracks in the ground or got caught in the hidden grass beneath the water. They fell and were dragged up only to fall again and again, being pulled up repeatedly. The water level was visibly rising, and less than two miles away, a massive wave towered with its crest.
For a quarter of an hour this supreme struggle with the most terrible of elements lasted. The fugitives could not tell how far they had gone, but, judging by the speed, the distance must have been considerable. The poor horses, however, were breast-high in water now, and could only advance with extreme difficulty. Glenarvan and Paganel, and, indeed, the whole party, gave themselves up for lost, as the horses were fast getting out of their depth, and six feet of water would be enough to drown them.
For fifteen minutes, this intense battle with the most fearsome elements continued. The escapees had no idea how far they had traveled, but judging by their speed, it must have been quite a distance. The poor horses were now submerged up to their chests in water and could only move forward with great difficulty. Glenarvan, Paganel, and indeed the entire group felt they were doomed, as the horses were quickly getting into deeper water, and six feet of water would be enough to drown them.
It would be impossible to tell the anguish of mind these eight men endured; they felt their own impotence in the presence of these cataclysms of nature so far beyond all human power. Their salvation did not lie in their own hands.
It’s hard to describe the mental anguish these eight men went through; they felt powerless in the face of these natural disasters that were far beyond anything humans could control. Their salvation wasn’t in their hands.
Five minutes afterward, and the horses were swimming; the current alone carried them along with tremendous force, and with a swiftness equal to their fastest gallop; they must have gone fully twenty miles an hour.
Five minutes later, the horses were swimming; the current alone swept them along with incredible force, and at a speed matching their fastest gallop; they must have been going at least twenty miles an hour.
All hope of delivery seemed impossible, when the Major suddenly called out:
All hope of rescue seemed impossible when the Major suddenly shouted:
“A tree!”
“A tree!”
“A tree?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
"A tree?" Glenarvan exclaimed.
“Yes, there, there!” replied Thalcave, pointing with his finger to a species of gigantic walnut-tree, which raised its solitary head above the waters.
“Yes, there, there!” replied Thalcave, pointing with his finger to a species of huge walnut tree, which stood alone above the waters.
His companions needed no urging forward now; this tree, so opportunely discovered, they must reach at all hazards. The horses very likely might not be able to get to it, but, at all events, the men would, the current bearing them right down to it.
His companions didn't need any encouragement now; this tree, found just in time, was their goal no matter the risk. The horses might not make it to it, but at least the men would, as the current was carrying them straight to it.
Just at that moment Tom Austin’s horse gave a smothered neigh and disappeared. His master, freeing his feet from the stirrups, began to swim vigorously.
Just then, Tom Austin’s horse let out a muffled neigh and vanished. His rider, pulling his feet out of the stirrups, started to swim fiercely.
“Hang on to my saddle,” called Glenarvan.
“Hold on to my saddle,” called Glenarvan.
“Thanks, your honor, but I have good stout arms.”
“Thanks, your honor, but I have strong arms.”
“Robert, how is your horse going?” asked his Lordship, turning to young Grant.
“Robert, how's your horse doing?” asked his Lordship, turning to young Grant.
“Famously, my Lord, he swims like a fish.”
"Everyone knows, my Lord, he swims like a fish."
“Lookout!” shouted the Major, in a stentorian voice.
“Watch out!” shouted the Major, in a loud voice.
The warning was scarcely spoken before the enormous billow, a monstrous wave forty feet high, broke over the fugitives with a fearful noise. Men and animals all disappeared in a whirl of foam; a liquid mass, weighing several millions of tons, engulfed them in its seething waters.
The warning was hardly given before the huge wave, a massive forty-foot wall of water, crashed down on the escapees with a terrifying roar. People and animals vanished in a swirl of foam; a tidal force, weighing millions of tons, swallowed them up in its turbulent waters.
When it had rolled on, the men reappeared on the surface, and counted each other rapidly; but all the horses, except Thaouka, who still bore his master, had gone down forever.
When it rolled on, the men emerged on the surface and quickly counted each other; however, all the horses, except for Thaouka, who still carried his master, were lost forever.
“Courage, courage,” repeated Glenarvan, supporting Paganel with one arm, and swimming with the other.
“Courage, courage,” Glenarvan repeated, helping Paganel with one arm and swimming with the other.
“I can manage, I can manage,” said the worthy savant. “I am even not sorry—”
“I can handle it, I can handle it,” said the esteemed scholar. “I’m not even sorry—”
But no one ever knew what he was not sorry about, for the poor man was obliged to swallow down the rest of his sentence with half a pint of muddy water. The Major advanced quietly, making regular strokes, worthy of a master swimmer. The sailors took to the water like porpoises, while Robert clung to Thaouka’s mane, and was carried along with him. The noble animal swam superbly, instinctively making for the tree in a straight line.
But no one ever knew what he felt no remorse for, because the poor man had to gulp down the rest of his sentence along with half a pint of muddy water. The Major moved forward silently, making smooth strokes like a master swimmer. The sailors dove into the water like porpoises, while Robert held onto Thaouka’s mane and was pulled along with him. The noble creature swam brilliantly, instinctively heading straight for the tree.
The tree was only twenty fathoms off, and in a few minutes was safely reached by the whole party; but for this refuge they must all have perished in the flood.
The tree was only twenty fathoms away, and within a few minutes, the entire group reached it safely; without this shelter, they all would have drowned in the flood.
The water had risen to the top of the trunk, just to where the parent branches fork out. It was consequently, quite easy to clamber up to it. Thalcave climbed up first, and got off his horse to hoist up Robert and help the others. His powerful arms had soon placed all the exhausted swimmers in a place of security.
The water had risen to the top of the trunk, right where the main branches split out. It was therefore pretty easy to climb up to it. Thalcave went up first, got off his horse to lift Robert up, and help the others. His strong arms quickly got all the tired swimmers to safety.
But, meantime, Thaouka was being rapidly carried away by the current. He turned his intelligent face toward his master, and, shaking his long mane, neighed as if to summon him to his rescue.
But, in the meantime, Thaouka was being quickly swept away by the current. He turned his clever face toward his master and, shaking his long mane, neighed as if to call him for help.
“Are you going to forsake him, Thalcave?” asked Paganel.
“Are you going to abandon him, Thalcave?” asked Paganel.
“I!” replied the Indian, and forthwith he plunged down into the tumultuous waters, and came up again ten fathoms off. A few instants afterward his arms were round Thaouka’s neck, and master and steed were drifting together toward the misty horizon of the north.
“I!” replied the Indian, and immediately he dove into the churning waters, surfacing ten fathoms away. A moment later, his arms were wrapped around Thaouka’s neck, and both master and steed were floating together toward the hazy northern horizon.
CHAPTER XXIII A SINGULAR ABODE
THE tree on which Glenarvan and his companions had just found refuge, resembled a walnut-tree, having the same glossy foliage and rounded form. In reality, however, it was the OMBU, which grows solitarily on the Argentine plains. The enormous and twisted trunk of this tree is planted firmly in the soil, not only by its great roots, but still more by its vigorous shoots, which fasten it down in the most tenacious manner. This was how it stood proof against the shock of the mighty billow.
THE tree that Glenarvan and his friends had just taken shelter under looked like a walnut tree, with its shiny leaves and rounded shape. However, it was actually the OMBU, which grows alone on the Argentine plains. The massive and twisted trunk of this tree is anchored deeply in the ground, not just by its large roots, but even more so by its strong shoots that hold it down in the most secure way. This is how it withstood the force of the powerful wave.
This OMBU measured in height a hundred feet, and covered with its shadow a circumference of one hundred and twenty yards. All this scaffolding rested on three great boughs which sprang from the trunk. Two of these rose almost perpendicularly, and supported the immense parasol of foliage, the branches of which were so crossed and intertwined and entangled, as if by the hand of a basket-maker, that they formed an impenetrable shade. The third arm, on the contrary, stretched right out in a horizontal position above the roaring waters, into which the lower leaves dipped. There was no want of room in the interior of this gigantic tree, for there were great gaps in the foliage, perfect glades, with air in abundance, and freshness everywhere. To see the innumerable branches rising to the clouds, and the creepers running from bough to bough, and attaching them together while the sunlight glinted here and there among the leaves, one might have called it a complete forest instead of a solitary tree sheltering them all.
This OMBU tree stood a hundred feet tall and cast a shadow over a circumference of one hundred and twenty yards. Its structure rested on three massive branches that grew from the trunk. Two of these branches rose almost straight up, supporting a huge canopy of leaves that were so woven and tangled together, like a basket made by hand, that they created an impenetrable shade. The third branch, on the other hand, stretched out horizontally above the roaring waters, with its lower leaves dipping into the river. Inside this gigantic tree, there was plenty of space, with large gaps in the foliage creating perfect clearings filled with fresh air. Looking up at the countless branches reaching for the clouds and the vines connecting them as sunlight flickered through the leaves, one might have mistaken it for a complete forest instead of just a single tree providing shelter.
On the arrival of the fugitives a myriad of the feathered tribes fled away into the topmost branches, protesting by their outcries against this flagrant usurpation of their domicile. These birds, who themselves had taken refuge in the solitary OMBU, were in hundreds, comprising blackbirds, starlings, isacas, HILGUEROS, and especially the pica-flor, humming-birds of most resplendent colors. When they flew away it seemed as though a gust of wind had blown all the flowers off the tree.
When the fugitives arrived, a multitude of birds took off into the highest branches, crying out in protest against this blatant takeover of their home. These birds, who had found sanctuary in the lone OMBU tree, numbered in the hundreds and included blackbirds, starlings, isacas, HILGUEROS, and especially the dazzling pica-flor, hummingbirds in the brightest colors. As they soared away, it looked like a strong wind had swept all the flowers off the tree.
Such was the asylum offered to the little band of Glenarvan. Young Grant and the agile Wilson were scarcely perched on the tree before they had climbed to the upper branches and put their heads through the leafy dome to get a view of the vast horizon. The ocean made by the inundation surrounded them on all sides, and, far as the eye could reach, seemed to have no limits. Not a single tree was visible on the liquid plain; the OMBU stood alone amid the rolling waters, and trembled before them. In the distance, drifting from south to north, carried along by the impetuous torrent, they saw trees torn up by the roots, twisted branches, roofs torn off, destroyed RANCHOS, planks of sheds stolen by the deluge from ESTANCIAS, carcasses of drowned animals, blood-stained skins, and on a shaky tree a complete family of jaguars, howling and clutching hold of their frail raft. Still farther away, a black spot almost invisible, already caught Wilson’s eye. It was Thalcave and his faithful Thaouka.
Such was the refuge offered to the small group from Glenarvan. Young Grant and the nimble Wilson barely settled on the tree before they climbed up to the upper branches and poked their heads through the leafy canopy to take in the vast horizon. The floodwaters surrounded them on all sides, stretching as far as the eye could see with no end in sight. Not a single tree was visible on the watery landscape; the OMBU stood alone amid the rolling waters, shivering in its presence. In the distance, carried by the rushing current from south to north, they saw uprooted trees, twisted branches, roofs ripped off, destroyed RANCHOS, planks of sheds swept away by the deluge from ESTANCIAS, the carcasses of drowned animals, blood-stained hides, and on a shaky tree, a whole family of jaguars, howling and clinging to their fragile raft. Even farther away, a faint dark spot that was almost invisible caught Wilson’s eye. It was Thalcave and his loyal Thaouka.
“Thalcave, Thalcave!” shouted Robert, stretching out his hands toward the courageous Patagonian.
“Thalcave, Thalcave!” shouted Robert, reaching out his hands toward the brave Patagonian.
“He will save himself, Mr. Robert,” replied Wilson; “we must go down to his Lordship.”
“He'll save himself, Mr. Robert,” Wilson replied; “we need to go down to his Lordship.”
Next minute they had descended the three stages of boughs, and landed safely on the top of the trunk, where they found Glenarvan, Paganel, the Major, Austin, and Mulrady, sitting either astride or in some position they found more comfortable. Wilson gave an account of their investigations aloft, and all shared his opinion with respect to Thalcave. The only question was whether it was Thalcave who would save Thaouka, or Thaouka save Thalcave.
Next minute, they had come down the three levels of branches and landed safely on the top of the trunk, where they found Glenarvan, Paganel, the Major, Austin, and Mulrady, either sitting astride or in whatever position they found more comfortable. Wilson shared what they discovered up high, and everyone agreed with his thoughts about Thalcave. The only question was whether it would be Thalcave saving Thaouka, or Thaouka saving Thalcave.
Their own situation meantime was much more alarming than his. No doubt the tree would be able to resist the current, but the waters might rise higher and higher, till the topmost branches were covered, for the depression of the soil made this part of the plain a deep reservoir. Glenarvan’s first care, consequently, was to make notches by which to ascertain the progress of the inundation. For the present it was stationary, having apparently reached its height. This was reassuring.
Their own situation was actually a lot more alarming than his. No doubt the tree could hold its ground against the current, but the water could rise higher and higher until the highest branches were submerged, since the low ground made this area of the plain like a deep reservoir. Glenarvan's first concern was to make notches to track how far the flood was rising. For now, it seemed to be stable, having apparently hit its peak. This was a relief.
“And now what are we going to do?” said Glenarvan.
“And now what are we going to do?” Glenarvan said.
“Make our nest, of course!” replied Paganel
“Of course, let’s make our nest!” replied Paganel.
“Make our nest!” exclaimed Robert.
“Build our nest!” exclaimed Robert.
“Certainly, my boy, and live the life of birds, since we can’t that of fishes.”
“Of course, my boy, let's live like birds since we can't live like fish.”
“All very well, but who will fill our bills for us?” said Glenarvan.
"That's all fine, but who’s going to take care of our bills?" said Glenarvan.
“I will,” said the Major.
"I'm in," said the Major.
All eyes turned toward him immediately, and there he sat in a natural arm-chair, formed of two elastic boughs, holding out his ALFORJAS damp, but still intact.
All eyes shifted to him at once, and there he was sitting in a natural armchair made of two flexible branches, holding out his ALFORJAS, damp but still in one piece.
“Oh, McNabbs, that’s just like you,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “you think of everything even under circumstances which would drive all out of your head.”
“Oh, McNabbs, that’s so typical of you,” Glenarvan exclaimed, “you think of everything even in situations that would make anyone else lose their mind.”
“Since it was settled we were not going to be drowned, I had no intention of starving of hunger.”
“Now that we knew we weren't going to drown, I had no plans to starve.”
“I should have thought of it, too,” said Paganel, “but I am so DISTRAIT.”
“I should have thought of that, too,” said Paganel, “but I'm feeling so distracted.”
“And what is in the ALFORJAS?” asked Tom Austin.
“And what’s in the ALFORJAS?” asked Tom Austin.
“Food enough to last seven men for two days,” replied McNabbs.
“Enough food to last seven men for two days,” replied McNabbs.
“And I hope the inundation will have gone down in twenty-four hours,” said Glenarvan.
“And I hope the flood will have receded in twenty-four hours,” said Glenarvan.
“Or that we shall have found some way of regaining terra firma,” added Paganel.
“Or that we will have found a way to regain terra firma,” added Paganel.
“Our first business, then, now is to breakfast,” said Glenarvan.
“Our first order of business is to have breakfast,” said Glenarvan.
“I suppose you mean after we have made ourselves dry,” observed the Major.
“I guess you mean after we've dried off,” said the Major.
“And where’s the fire?” asked Wilson.
“And where’s the fire?” Wilson asked.
“We must make it,” returned Paganel.
“We have to make it,” replied Paganel.
“Where?”
"Where at?"
“On the top of the trunk, of course.”
“On the top of the trunk, of course.”
“And what with?”
"And with what?"
“With the dead wood we cut off the tree.”
“With the dead wood, we cut off the tree.”
“But how will you kindle it?” asked Glenarvan. “Our tinder is just like wet sponge.”
“But how are you going to start it?” asked Glenarvan. “Our tinder is like a wet sponge.”
“We can dispense with it,” replied Paganel. “We only want a little dry moss and a ray of sunshine, and the lens of my telescope, and you’ll see what a fire I’ll get to dry myself by. Who will go and cut wood in the forest?”
“We can skip that,” replied Paganel. “We just need a bit of dry moss and some sunlight, along with the lens from my telescope, and you’ll see how big of a fire I can make to warm myself up. Who wants to go chop some wood in the forest?”
“I will,” said Robert.
"I will," Robert said.
And off he scampered like a young cat into the depths of the foliage, followed by his friend Wilson. Paganel set to work to find dry moss, and had soon gathered sufficient. This he laid on a bed of damp leaves, just where the large branches began to fork out, forming a natural hearth, where there was little fear of conflagration.
And off he ran like a young cat into the thick greenery, followed by his friend Wilson. Paganel got to work searching for dry moss and quickly gathered enough. He placed it on a bed of damp leaves, right where the big branches started to split, creating a natural hearth where there was little risk of catching fire.
Robert and Wilson speedily reappeared, each with an armful of dry wood, which they threw on the moss. By the help of the lens it was easily kindled, for the sun was blazing overhead. In order to ensure a proper draught, Paganel stood over the hearth with his long legs straddled out in the Arab manner. Then stooping down and raising himself with a rapid motion, he made a violent current of air with his poncho, which made the wood take fire, and soon a bright flame roared in the improvised brasier. After drying themselves, each in his own fashion, and hanging their ponchos on the tree, where they were swung to and fro in the breeze, they breakfasted, carefully however rationing out the provisions, for the morrow had to be thought of; the immense basin might not empty so soon as Glenarvan expected, and, anyway, the supply was very limited. The OMBU produced no fruit, though fortunately, it would likely abound in fresh eggs, thanks to the numerous nests stowed away among the leaves, not to speak of their feathered proprietors. These resources were by no means to be despised.
Robert and Wilson quickly returned, each carrying an armful of dry wood, which they tossed onto the moss. Using a lens, they easily ignited it, as the sun blazed overhead. To ensure a good draft, Paganel stood over the fire with his long legs spread out in an Arab style. Then, bending down and rising quickly, he created a strong gust of air with his poncho, which helped the wood catch fire, and soon a bright flame roared in the makeshift brazier. After drying off in their own ways and hanging their ponchos on a tree, where they swayed in the breeze, they had breakfast, carefully rationing out the supplies, since they had to think about the next day; the vast basin might not empty as quickly as Glenarvan expected, and anyway, the supply was very limited. The OMBU bore no fruit, but fortunately, it would likely be rich in fresh eggs due to the numerous nests tucked away among the leaves, not to mention their feathered inhabitants. These resources were certainly valuable.
The next business was to install themselves as comfortably as they could, in prospect of a long stay.
The next task was to settle in as comfortably as possible, anticipating a lengthy stay.
“As the kitchen and dining-room are on the ground floor,” said Paganel, “we must sleep on the first floor. The house is large, and as the rent is not dear, we must not cramp ourselves for room. I can see up yonder natural cradles, in which once safely tucked up we shall sleep as if we were in the best beds in the world. We have nothing to fear. Besides, we will watch, and we are numerous enough to repulse a fleet of Indians and other wild animals.”
“As the kitchen and dining room are on the ground floor,” said Paganel, “we need to sleep on the first floor. The house is big, and since the rent isn’t high, we shouldn’t restrict ourselves for space. I can see those natural cradles up there, where once we’re settled in, we’ll sleep as if we were in the best beds in the world. We have nothing to worry about. Plus, we will keep watch, and we have enough people to fend off a fleet of Indians and other wild animals.”
“We only want fire-arms.”
“We only want firearms.”
“I have my revolvers,” said Glenarvan.
“I’ve got my revolvers,” said Glenarvan.
“And I have mine,” replied Robert.
“And I have mine,” Robert replied.
“But what’s the good of them?” said Tom Austin, “unless Monsieur Paganel can find out some way of making powder.”
“But what’s the point of them?” said Tom Austin, “unless Monsieur Paganel can figure out a way to make gunpowder.”
“We don’t need it,” replied McNabbs, exhibiting a powder flask in a perfect state of preservation.
“We don’t need it,” McNabbs replied, showing off a perfectly preserved powder flask.
“Where did you get it from, Major,” asked Paganel.
“Where did you get it, Major?” asked Paganel.
“From Thalcave. He thought it might be useful to us, and gave it to me before he plunged into the water to save Thaouka.”
“From Thalcave. He thought it might be helpful to us, and handed it to me before he jumped into the water to save Thaouka.”
“Generous, brave Indian!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
"Generous, brave Indian!" shouted Glenarvan.
“Yes,” replied Tom Austin, “if all the Patagonians are cut after the same pattern, I must compliment Patagonia.”
“Yes,” replied Tom Austin, “if all the Patagonians are made the same way, I have to compliment Patagonia.”
“I protest against leaving out the horse,” said Paganel. “He is part and parcel of the Patagonian, and I’m much mistaken if we don’t see them again, the one on the other’s back.”
“I protest against leaving out the horse,” said Paganel. “He is part and parcel of the Patagonian, and I’d be surprised if we don’t see them again, the one on the other’s back.”
“What distance are we from the Atlantic?” asked the Major.
“What distance are we from the Atlantic?” the Major asked.
“About forty miles at the outside,” replied Paganel; “and now, friends, since this is Liberty Hall, I beg to take leave of you. I am going to choose an observatory for myself up there, and by the help of my telescope, let you know how things are going on in the world.”
“About forty miles at most,” replied Paganel; “and now, friends, since this is Liberty Hall, I’d like to take my leave. I’m going to pick an observatory for myself up there, and with my telescope, I’ll keep you updated on what’s happening in the world.”
Forthwith the geographer set off, hoisting himself up very cleverly from bough to bough, till he disappeared beyond the thick foliage. His companions began to arrange the night quarters, and prepare their beds. But this was neither a long nor difficult task, and very soon they resumed their seats round the fire to have a talk.
Immediately, the geographer set off, skillfully climbing from branch to branch until he vanished behind the dense leaves. His companions started to set up their sleeping area and get their beds ready. This was neither a lengthy nor challenging job, and soon they returned to their spots around the fire to chat.
As usual their theme was Captain Grant. In three days, should the water subside, they would be on board the DUNCAN once more. But Harry Grant and his two sailors, those poor shipwrecked fellows, would not be with them. Indeed, it even seemed after this ill success and this useless journey across America, that all chance of finding them was gone forever. Where could they commence a fresh quest? What grief Lady Helena and Mary Grant would feel on hearing there was no further hope.
As usual, their topic was Captain Grant. In three days, if the water went down, they would be back on the DUNCAN again. But Harry Grant and his two sailors, those unfortunate shipwrecked guys, wouldn’t be with them. In fact, it felt like after this failed attempt and pointless trip across America, any chance of finding them was lost forever. Where could they start a new search? How devastated Lady Helena and Mary Grant would be to learn there was no more hope.
“Poor sister!” said Robert. “It is all up with us.”
“Poor sister!” Robert said. “We're done for.”
For the first time Glenarvan could not find any comfort to give him. What could he say to the lad?
For the first time, Glenarvan couldn't find any comfort to offer him. What could he say to the kid?
Had they not searched exactly where the document stated?
Had they not looked exactly where the document said?
“And yet,” he said, “this thirty-seventh degree of latitude is not a mere figure, and that it applies to the shipwreck or captivity of Harry Grant, is no mere guess or supposition. We read it with our own eyes.”
“And yet,” he said, “this thirty-seventh degree of latitude is not just a number, and the fact that it relates to the shipwreck or captivity of Harry Grant is not just a guess or assumption. We read it with our own eyes.”
“All very true, your Honor,” replied Tom Austin, “and yet our search has been unsuccessful.”
“All very true, Your Honor,” replied Tom Austin, “but our search hasn’t been successful.”
“It is both a provoking and hopeless business,” replied Glenarvan.
“It’s both an annoying and pointless situation,” replied Glenarvan.
“Provoking enough, certainly,” said the Major, “but not hopeless. It is precisely because we have an uncontestable figure, provided for us, that we should follow it up to the end.”
“Provoking enough, for sure,” said the Major, “but not hopeless. It’s exactly because we have an undeniable figure, given to us, that we should pursue it to the end.”
“What do you mean?” asked Glenarvan. “What more can we do?”
“What do you mean?” Glenarvan asked. “What else can we do?”
“A very logical and simple thing, my dear Edward. When we go on board the DUNCAN, turn her beak head to the east, and go right along the thirty-seventh parallel till we come back to our starting point if necessary.”
“A very straightforward and simple thing, my dear Edward. When we board the DUNCAN, point her nose east and follow the thirty-seventh parallel until we return to our starting point, if needed.”
“Do you suppose that I have not thought of that, Mr. McNabbs?” replied Glenarvan. “Yes, a hundred times. But what chance is there of success? To leave the American continent, wouldn’t it be to go away from the very spot indicated by Harry Grant, from this very Patagonia so distinctly named in the document.”
“Do you really think I haven't considered that, Mr. McNabbs?” replied Glenarvan. “Yes, a hundred times. But what are the chances of success? Leaving the American continent means going away from the exact location pointed out by Harry Grant, from this very Patagonia that’s clearly mentioned in the document.”
“And would you recommence your search in the Pampas, when you have the certainty that the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA neither occurred on the coasts of the Pacific nor the Atlantic?”
“And would you start your search again in the Pampas, knowing for sure that the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA didn’t happen on the coasts of the Pacific or the Atlantic?”
Glenarvan was silent.
Glenarvan was quiet.
“And however small the chance of finding Harry Grant by following up the given parallel, ought we not to try?”
“And no matter how slim the chance of finding Harry Grant by pursuing the given lead, shouldn’t we at least try?”
“I don’t say no,” replied Glenarvan.
“I won’t say no,” replied Glenarvan.
“And are you not of my opinion, good friends,” added the Major, addressing the sailors.
“And don’t you agree with me, good friends?” the Major said, speaking to the sailors.
“Entirely,” said Tom Austin, while Mulrady and Wilson gave an assenting nod.
“Absolutely,” said Tom Austin, while Mulrady and Wilson nodded in agreement.
“Listen to me, friends,” said Glenarvan after a few minutes’ reflection; “and remember, Robert, this is a grave discussion. I will do my utmost to find Captain Grant; I am pledged to it, and will devote my whole life to the task if needs be. All Scotland would unite with me to save so devoted a son as he has been to her. I too quite think with you that we must follow the thirty-seventh parallel round the globe if necessary, however slight our chance of finding him. But that is not the question we have to settle. There is one much more important than that is—should we from this time, and all together, give up our search on the American continent?”
“Listen to me, friends,” said Glenarvan after a few minutes of thinking; “and remember, Robert, this is a serious discussion. I will do everything I can to find Captain Grant; I’m committed to it and will dedicate my whole life to this task if I have to. All of Scotland would join me to save such a devoted son as he has been to her. I agree with you that we should follow the thirty-seventh parallel around the globe if necessary, no matter how slim our chance of finding him is. But that’s not the question we need to decide. There’s one much more important to consider—should we, from now on, all together, give up our search on the American continent?”
No one made any reply. Each one seemed afraid to pronounce the word.
No one said anything. Everyone looked hesitant to say the word.
“Well?” resumed Glenarvan, addressing himself especially to the Major.
“Well?” Glenarvan continued, speaking directly to the Major.
“My dear Edward,” replied McNabbs, “it would be incurring too great a responsibility for me to reply hic et nunc. It is a question which requires reflection. I must know first, through which countries the thirty-seventh parallel of southern latitude passes?”
“My dear Edward,” replied McNabbs, “it would be taking on too much responsibility for me to answer here and now. It's a question that needs some thought. I need to know first which countries the thirty-seventh parallel of southern latitude goes through?”
“That’s Paganel’s business; he will tell you that,” said Glenarvan.
"That's Paganel's thing; he'll tell you all about it," said Glenarvan.
“Let’s ask him, then,” replied the Major.
“Let’s ask him, then,” replied the Major.
But the learned geographer was nowhere to be seen. He was hidden among the thick leafage of the OMBU, and they must call out if they wanted him.
But the knowledgeable geographer was nowhere to be found. He was concealed among the dense foliage of the OMBU, and they had to shout if they wanted to reach him.
“Paganel, Paganel!” shouted Glenarvan.
“Paganel, Paganel!” yelled Glenarvan.
“Here,” replied a voice that seemed to come from the clouds.
“Here,” replied a voice that sounded like it was coming from the clouds.
“Where are you?”
"Where are you at?"
“In my tower.”
"In my apartment."
“What are you doing there?”
“What are you doing?”
“Examining the wide horizon.”
"Looking at the wide horizon."
“Could you come down for a minute?”
“Can you come down for a minute?”
“Do you want me?”
"Do you want me?"
“Yes.”
"Yeah."
“What for?”
"Why?"
“To know what countries the thirty-seventh parallel passes through.”
“To find out which countries the thirty-seventh parallel goes through.”
“That’s easily said. I need not disturb myself to come down for that.”
“That’s easy to say. I don’t need to bother myself to come down for that.”
“Very well, tell us now.”
“Alright, tell us now.”
“Listen, then. After leaving America the thirty-seventh parallel crosses the Atlantic Ocean.”
“Listen up. After leaving America, the thirty-seventh parallel crosses the Atlantic Ocean.”
“And then?”
"And what happens next?"
“It encounters Isle Tristan d’Acunha.”
“It encounters Tristan da Cunha.”
“Yes.”
"Yes."
“It goes on two degrees below the Cape of Good Hope.”
“It goes on two degrees south of the Cape of Good Hope.”
“And afterwards?”
"And what happens next?"
“Runs across the Indian Ocean, and just touches Isle St. Pierre, in the Amsterdam group.”
“Runs across the Indian Ocean and just reaches Isle St. Pierre in the Amsterdam group.”
“Go on.”
"Go ahead."
“It cuts Australia by the province of Victoria.”
“It separates Australia from the province of Victoria.”
“And then.”
"And then."
“After leaving Australia in—”
"After leaving Australia in—"
This last sentence was not completed. Was the geographer hesitating, or didn’t he know what to say?
This last sentence wasn’t finished. Was the geographer unsure, or did he not know what to say?
No; but a terrible cry resounded from the top of the tree. Glenarvan and his friends turned pale and looked at each other. What fresh catastrophe had happened now? Had the unfortunate Paganel slipped his footing?
No; but a terrible scream echoed from the top of the tree. Glenarvan and his friends turned pale and glanced at each other. What new disaster had occurred now? Had the unfortunate Paganel lost his grip?
Already Wilson and Mulrady had rushed to his rescue when his long body appeared tumbling down from branch to branch.
Already, Wilson and Mulrady had rushed to his rescue when his tall frame came tumbling down from branch to branch.
But was he living or dead, for his hands made no attempt to seize anything to stop himself. A few minutes more, and he would have fallen into the roaring waters had not the Major’s strong arm barred his passage.
But was he alive or dead, since his hands made no effort to grab anything to stop himself? A few minutes more, and he would have fallen into the raging waters if the Major's strong arm hadn't held him back.
“Much obliged, McNabbs,” said Paganel.
“Thanks a lot, McNabbs,” said Paganel.
“How’s this? What is the matter with you? What came over you? Another of your absent fits.”
“How’s this? What’s wrong with you? What got into you? Another one of your spaced-out moments.”
“Yes, yes,” replied Paganel, in a voice almost inarticulate with emotion. “Yes, but this was something extraordinary.”
“Yes, yes,” Paganel replied, his voice barely coherent with emotion. “Yes, but this was something amazing.”
“What was it?”
"What was that?"
“I said we had made a mistake. We are making it still, and have been all along.”
“I said we made a mistake. We're still making it, and we always have.”
“Explain yourself.”
"Explain yourself."
“Glenarvan, Major, Robert, my friends,” exclaimed Paganel, “all you that hear me, we are looking for Captain Grant where he is not to be found.”
“Glenarvan, Major, Robert, my friends,” Paganel exclaimed, “all of you who can hear me, we are searching for Captain Grant in places he doesn’t exist.”
“What do you say?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“What do you think?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Not only where he is not now, but where he has never been.”
“Not only where he isn’t now, but where he’s never been.”
CHAPTER XXIV PAGANEL’S DISCLOSURE
PROFOUND astonishment greeted these unexpected words of the learned geographer. What could he mean? Had he lost his sense? He spoke with such conviction, however, that all eyes turned toward Glenarvan, for Paganel’s affirmation was a direct answer to his question, but Glenarvan shook his head, and said nothing, though evidently he was not inclined to favor his friend’s views.
PROFOUND astonishment greeted these unexpected words of the learned geographer. What could he mean? Had he lost his mind? He spoke with such conviction, though, that everyone turned to Glenarvan, because Paganel’s statement directly responded to his question. But Glenarvan shook his head and said nothing, clearly not inclined to support his friend's views.
“Yes,” began Paganel again, as soon as he had recovered himself a little; “yes, we have gone a wrong track, and read on the document what was never there.”
“Yes,” Paganel began again, once he had collected himself a bit. “Yes, we’ve taken a wrong turn, and we misread what was on the document.”
“Explain yourself, Paganel,” said the Major, “and more calmly if you can.”
"Clarify things for us, Paganel," said the Major, "and try to be calmer if you can."
“The thing is very simple, Major. Like you, I was in error; like you, I had rushed at a false interpretation, until about an instant ago, on the top of the tree, when I was answering your questions, just as I pronounced the word ‘Australia,’ a sudden flash came across my mind, and the document became clear as day.”
“The thing is pretty straightforward, Major. Like you, I was mistaken; like you, I jumped to the wrong conclusion, until just a moment ago, at the top of the tree, when I was answering your questions. Just as I said the word ‘Australia,’ a sudden realization hit me, and the document became completely clear.”
“What!” exclaimed Glenarvan, “you mean to say that Harry Grant—”
“What!” Glenarvan exclaimed, “are you saying that Harry Grant—”
“I mean to say,” replied Paganel, “that the word AUSTRAL that occurs in the document is not a complete word, as we have supposed up till now, but just the root of the word AUSTRALIE.”
“I mean to say,” replied Paganel, “that the word AUSTRAL mentioned in the document isn’t a complete word, as we’ve thought until now, but just the root of the word AUSTRALIE.”
“Well, that would be strange,” said the Major.
“Well, that would be unusual,” said the Major.
“Strange!” repeated Glenarvan, shrugging his shoulders; “it is simply impossible.”
“Strange!” Glenarvan said again, shrugging his shoulders. “That’s just impossible.”
“Impossible?” returned Paganel. “That is a word we don’t allow in France.”
“Impossible?” replied Paganel. “That’s a word we don’t accept in France.”
“What!” continued Glenarvan, in a tone of the most profound incredulity, “you dare to contend, with the document in your hand, that the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA happened on the shores of Australia.”
“What!” continued Glenarvan, in a tone of deep disbelief, “you actually claim, with that document in your hand, that the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA occurred on the shores of Australia.”
“I am sure of it,” replied Paganel.
“I’m sure of it,” replied Paganel.
“My conscience,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “I must say I am surprised at such a declaration from the Secretary of a Geographical Society!”
“My conscience,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “I have to say I’m surprised by such a statement from the Secretary of a Geographical Society!”
“And why so?” said Paganel, touched in his weak point.
“And why is that?” said Paganel, feeling sensitive about his vulnerable spot.
“Because, if you allow the word AUSTRALIE! you must also allow the word INDIENS, and Indians are never seen there.”
“Because if you accept the word AUSTRALIE! you also have to accept the word INDIENS, and Indians are never found there.”
Paganel was not the least surprised at this rejoinder. Doubtless he expected it, for he began to smile, and said:
Paganel was not at all surprised by this response. He probably saw it coming because he started to smile and said:
“My dear Glenarvan, don’t triumph over me too fast. I am going to floor you completely, and never was an Englishman more thoroughly defeated than you will be. It will be the revenge for Cressy and Agincourt.”
“My dear Glenarvan, don’t celebrate your victory too soon. I’m about to take you down completely, and never has an Englishman been as thoroughly defeated as you will be. This will be payback for Cressy and Agincourt.”
“I wish nothing better. Take your revenge, Paganel.”
“I want nothing more. Get your revenge, Paganel.”
“Listen, then. In the text of the document, there is neither mention of the Indians nor of Patagonia! The incomplete word INDI does not mean INDIENS, but of course, INDIGENES, aborigines! Now, do you admit that there are aborigines in Australia?”
“Listen up. In the text of the document, there's no mention of the Indians or Patagonia! The incomplete word INDI doesn’t mean INDIENS, but of course, it means INDIGENES, aborigines! Now, do you agree that there are aborigines in Australia?”
“Bravo, Paganel!” said the Major.
“Awesome, Paganel!” said the Major.
“Well, do you agree to my interpretation, my dear Lord?” asked the geographer again.
“Well, do you agree with my interpretation, my dear Lord?” the geographer asked again.
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, “if you will prove to me that the fragment of a word GONIE, does not refer to the country of the Patagonians.”
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, “if you can show me that the fragment of the word GONIE does not refer to the country of the Patagonians.”
“Certainly it does not. It has nothing to do with Patagonia,” said Paganel. “Read it any way you please except that.”
“Of course it doesn’t. It has nothing to do with Patagonia,” said Paganel. “Interpret it however you want, just not like that.”
“How?”
“How?”
“Cosmogonie, theogonie, agonie.”
“Cosmogony, theogony, agony.”
“AGONIE,” said the Major.
“AGONY,” said the Major.
“I don’t care which,” returned Paganel. “The word is quite unimportant; I will not even try to find out its meaning. The main point is that AUSTRAL means AUSTRALIE, and we must have gone blindly on a wrong track not to have discovered the explanation at the very beginning, it was so evident. If I had found the document myself, and my judgment had not been misled by your interpretation, I should never have read it differently.”
“I don’t care which,” Paganel replied. “The word doesn’t really matter; I won’t even try to figure out its meaning. The main point is that AUSTRAL means AUSTRALIE, and we must have been completely off track not to have figured that out at the very start, it was so obvious. If I had found the document myself, and my judgment hadn’t been swayed by your interpretation, I would have never read it any differently.”
A burst of hurrahs, and congratulations, and compliments followed Paganel’s words. Austin and the sailors, and the Major and Robert, most all overjoyed at this fresh hope, applauded him heartily; while even Glenarvan, whose eyes were gradually getting open, was almost prepared to give in.
A burst of cheers, congratulations, and compliments followed Paganel's words. Austin, the sailors, the Major, and Robert, all overjoyed by this new hope, applauded him enthusiastically; even Glenarvan, whose eyes were slowly opening to the situation, was nearly ready to agree.
“I only want to know one thing more, my dear Paganel,” he said, “and then I must bow to your perspicacity.”
“I just want to know one more thing, my dear Paganel,” he said, “and then I must give in to your insight.”
“What is it?”
"What's that?"
“How will you group the words together according to your new interpretation? How will the document read?”
“How will you organize the words based on your new understanding? How will the document come across?”
“Easily enough answered. Here is the document,” replied Paganel, taking out the precious paper he had been studying so conscientiously for the last few days.
“Easy enough to answer. Here’s the document,” Paganel replied, pulling out the valuable paper he had been carefully studying for the past few days.
For a few minutes there was complete silence, while the worthy SAVANT took time to collect his thoughts before complying with his lordship’s request. Then putting his finger on the words, and emphasizing some of them, he began as follows:
For a few minutes, there was complete silence as the respectable SCHOLAR took a moment to gather his thoughts before meeting his lordship’s request. Then, placing his finger on the words and stressing some of them, he started as follows:
“‘Le 7 juin 1862 le trois-mats Britannia de Glasgow a sombre apres,’—put, if you please, ‘deux jours, trois jours,’ or ‘une longue agonie,’ it doesn’t signify, it is quite a matter of indifference,—‘sur les cotes de l’Australie. Se dirigeant a terre, deux matelots et le Capitaine Grant vont essayer d’aborder,’ or ‘ont aborde le continent ou ils seront,’ or, ‘sont prisonniers de cruels indigenes. Ils ont jete ce documents,’ etc. Is that clear?”
“‘On June 7 1862 the three-masted ship Britannia from Glasgow sank after,’—you can say, ‘two days, three days,’ or ‘a long struggle,’ it doesn’t matter, it’s really irrelevant,—‘off the coast of Australia. Heading to shore, two sailors and Captain Grant are trying to land,’ or ‘have reached the continent where they will be,’ or, ‘are prisoners of cruel natives. They threw this document,’ etc. Is that clear?”
“Clear enough,” replied Glenarvan, “if the word continent can be applied to Australia, which is only an island.”
“Clear enough,” replied Glenarvan, “if the term continent can be used for Australia, which is just an island.”
“Make yourself easy about that, my dear Glenarvan; the best geographers have agreed to call the island the Australian Continent.”
"Don't worry about that, my dear Glenarvan; the best geographers have decided to call the island the Australian Continent."
“Then all I have now to say is, my friends,” said Glenarvan, “away to Australia, and may Heaven help us!”
“Then all I have to say now is, my friends,” said Glenarvan, “let’s head to Australia, and may Heaven help us!”
“To Australia!” echoed his companions, with one voice.
“To Australia!” echoed his companions in unison.
“I tell you what, Paganel,” added Glenarvan, “your being on board the DUNCAN is a perfect providence.”
“I’ll tell you what, Paganel,” Glenarvan added, “having you on board the DUNCAN is just perfect luck.”
“All right. Look on me as a messenger of providence, and let us drop the subject.”
“All right. Think of me as a messenger of fate, and let’s move on from this topic.”
So the conversation ended—a conversation which great results were to follow; it completely changed the moral condition of the travelers; it gave the clew of the labyrinth in which they had thought themselves hopelessly entangled, and, amid their ruined projects, inspired them with fresh hope. They could now quit the American Continent without the least hesitation, and already their thoughts had flown to the Australias. In going on board the DUNCAN again they would not bring despair with them, and Lady Helena and Mary Grant would not have to mourn the irrevocable loss of Captain Grant. This thought so filled them with joy that they forgot all the dangers of their actual situation, and only regretted that they could not start immediately.
So the conversation wrapped up—a talk that would lead to great results; it completely changed the travelers' morale. It provided the key to the maze they thought they were hopelessly stuck in, and despite their shattered plans, it filled them with new hope. They could now leave the American continent without any hesitation, and their thoughts had already turned to Australia. When they boarded the DUNCAN again, they would not bring despair with them, and Lady Helena and Mary Grant wouldn't have to grieve the permanent loss of Captain Grant. This thought brought them so much joy that they forgot all the dangers of their current situation and only wished they could set off right away.
It was about four o’clock in the afternoon, and they determined to have supper at six. Paganel wished to get up a splendid spread in honor of the occasion, but as the materials were very scanty, he proposed to Robert to go and hunt in the neighboring forest. Robert clapped his hands at the idea, so they took Thalcave’s powder flask, cleaned the revolvers and loaded them with small shot, and set off.
It was around four in the afternoon, and they decided to have dinner at six. Paganel wanted to prepare a fantastic meal for the occasion, but since they had very limited supplies, he suggested to Robert that they go hunting in the nearby forest. Robert was excited about the idea, so they grabbed Thalcave’s powder flask, cleaned the revolvers, loaded them with small shot, and headed out.
“Don’t go too far,” said the Major, gravely, to the two hunters.
“Don’t go too far,” said the Major seriously to the two hunters.
After their departure, Glenarvan and McNabbs went down to examine the state of the water by looking at the notches they had made on the tree, and Wilson and Mulrady replenished the fire.
After they left, Glenarvan and McNabbs went down to check the water level by looking at the marks they had made on the tree, while Wilson and Mulrady added more fuel to the fire.
No sign of decrease appeared on the surface of the immense lake, yet the flood seemed to have reached its maximum height; but the violence with which it rushed from the south to north proved that the equilibrium of the Argentine rivers was not restored. Before getting lower the liquid mass must remain stationary, as in the case with the ocean before the ebb tide commences.
No sign of a drop was visible on the surface of the huge lake, but the flood seemed to have hit its highest point; however, the force with which it flowed from south to north indicated that the balance of the Argentine rivers wasn't restored. Before it could go down, the massive body of water needed to stay still, just like the ocean does before the tide goes out.
While Glenarvan and his cousin were making these observations, the report of firearms resounded frequently above their heads, and the jubilant outcries of the two sportsmen—for Paganel was every whit as much a child as Robert. They were having a fine time of it among the thick leaves, judging by the peals of laughter which rang out in the boy’s clear treble voice and Paganel’s deep bass. The chase was evidently successful, and wonders in culinary art might be expected. Wilson had a good idea to begin with, which he had skilfully carried out; for when Glenarvan came back to the brasier, he found that the brave fellow had actually managed to catch, with only a pin and a piece of string, several dozen small fish, as delicate as smelts, called MOJARRAS, which were all jumping about in a fold of his poncho, ready to be converted into an exquisite dish.
While Glenarvan and his cousin were observing, the sound of gunfire echoed frequently above them, along with the joyful shouts of the two sportsmen—Paganel was just as much a kid as Robert. They were having a great time among the thick leaves, judging by the bursts of laughter coming from the boy’s clear high-pitched voice and Paganel’s deep voice. The hunt was clearly a success, and some culinary surprises were likely on the way. Wilson had a clever idea to start with, which he executed skillfully; when Glenarvan returned to the fire, he found that the brave guy had actually managed to catch several dozen small fish, as delicate as smelts, called MOJARRAS, with just a pin and a piece of string. They were all flopping around in a fold of his poncho, ready to be turned into a delicious dish.
At the same moment the hunters reappeared. Paganel was carefully carrying some black swallows’ eggs, and a string of sparrows, which he meant to serve up later under the name of field larks. Robert had been clever enough to bring down several brace of HILGUEROS, small green and yellow birds, which are excellent eating, and greatly in demand in the Montevideo market. Paganel, who knew fifty ways of dressing eggs, was obliged for this once to be content with simply hardening them on the hot embers. But notwithstanding this, the viands at the meal were both dainty and varied. The dried beef, hard eggs, grilled MOJARRAS, sparrows, and roast HILGUEROS, made one of those gala feasts the memory of which is imperishable.
At the same time, the hunters came back. Paganel was carefully carrying some black swallow eggs and a bunch of sparrows, which he planned to serve later as field larks. Robert had smartly managed to catch several pairs of HILGUEROS, small green and yellow birds that taste great and are very popular in the Montevideo market. Paganel, who knew fifty ways to prepare eggs, had to settle for just hardening them on the hot embers this time. Nevertheless, the meal featured both delicious and diverse dishes. The dried beef, hard-boiled eggs, grilled MOJARRAS, sparrows, and roasted HILGUEROS created one of those memorable feasts that are unforgettable.
The conversation was very animated. Many compliments were paid Paganel on his twofold talents as hunter and cook, which the SAVANT accepted with the modesty which characterizes true merit. Then he turned the conversation on the peculiarities of the OMBU, under whose canopy they had found shelter, and whose depths he declared were immense.
The conversation was lively. Paganel received many compliments for his dual skills as a hunter and cook, which he accepted with the humility that defines true talent. He then shifted the discussion to the unique features of the OMBU, under whose shade they had taken refuge, and he claimed its depths were vast.
“Robert and I,” he added, jestingly, “thought ourselves hunting in the open forest. I was afraid, for the minute, we should lose ourselves, for I could not find the road. The sun was sinking below the horizon; I sought vainly for footmarks; I began to feel the sharp pangs of hunger, and the gloomy depths of the forest resounded already with the roar of wild beasts. No, not that; there are no wild beasts here, I am sorry to say.”
“Robert and I,” he said jokingly, “thought we were hunting in the open forest. For a moment, I was worried we might get lost because I couldn’t find the way back. The sun was setting below the horizon; I searched in vain for footprints; I started to feel the sting of hunger, and the dark depths of the forest echoed with the sounds of wild animals. No, wait; there aren’t any wild animals here, I regret to say.”
“What!” exclaimed Glenarvan, “you are sorry there are no wild beasts?”
“What!” Glenarvan exclaimed, “You wish there were wild beasts?”
“Certainly I am.”
“Of course I am.”
“And yet we should have every reason to dread their ferocity.”
“And yet we have every reason to fear their fierceness.”
“Their ferocity is non-existent, scientifically speaking,” replied the learned geographer.
“Their ferocity doesn't exist, scientifically speaking,” replied the knowledgeable geographer.
“Now come, Paganel,” said the Major, “you’ll never make me admit the utility of wild beasts. What good are they?”
“Come on, Paganel,” said the Major, “you’re not going to convince me that wild animals are useful. What good are they?”
“Why, Major,” exclaimed Paganel, “for purposes of classification into orders, and families, and species, and sub-species.”
“Why, Major,” Paganel exclaimed, “for classifying into orders, families, species, and sub-species.”
“A mighty advantage, certainly!” replied McNabbs, “I could dispense with all that. If I had been one of Noah’s companions at the time of the deluge, I should most assuredly have hindered the imprudent patriarch from putting in pairs of lions, and tigers, and panthers, and bears, and such animals, for they are as malevolent as they are useless.”
“A huge advantage, for sure!” replied McNabbs, “I could do without all that. If I’d been one of Noah’s companions during the flood, I definitely would have stopped the reckless patriarch from bringing in pairs of lions, tigers, panthers, bears, and other animals like that, because they’re just as harmful as they are useless.”
“You would have done that?” asked Paganel.
“You would have done that?” Paganel asked.
“Yes, I would.”
“Yeah, I would.”
“Well, you would have done wrong in a zoological point of view,” returned Paganel.
"Well, you would have been wrong from a zoological perspective," replied Paganel.
“But not in a humanitarian one,” rejoined the Major.
“But not in a humanitarian way,” responded the Major.
“It is shocking!” replied Paganel. “Why, for my part, on the contrary, I should have taken special care to preserve megatheriums and pterodactyles, and all the antediluvian species of which we are unfortunately deprived by his neglect.”
“It’s shocking!” replied Paganel. “As for me, on the contrary, I would have been especially careful to protect megatheriums and pterodactyles, and all the prehistoric species that we are unfortunately missing because of his negligence.”
“And I say,” returned McNabbs, “that Noah did a very good thing when he abandoned them to their fate—that is, if they lived in his day.”
“And I say,” replied McNabbs, “that Noah did a really good thing when he left them to their fate—that is, if they were around in his time.”
“And I say he did a very bad thing,” retorted Paganel, “and he has justly merited the malediction of SAVANTS to the end of time!”
“And I say he did a terrible thing,” replied Paganel, “and he rightly deserves the curse of SAVANTS for all eternity!”
The rest of the party could not help laughing at hearing the two friends disputing over old Noah. Contrary to all his principles, the Major, who all his life had never disputed with anyone, was always sparring with Paganel. The geographer seemed to have a peculiarly exciting effect on him.
The rest of the group couldn't help but laugh when they heard the two friends arguing about old Noah. Against all his principles, the Major, who had never argued with anyone in his life, was constantly going back and forth with Paganel. The geographer seemed to have a uniquely stimulating effect on him.
Glenarvan, as usual, always the peacemaker, interfered in the debate, and said:
Glenarvan, true to form as the peacemaker, stepped in during the debate and said:
“Whether the loss of ferocious animals is to be regretted or not, in a scientific point of view, there is no help for it now; we must be content to do without them. Paganel can hardly expect to meet with wild beasts in this aerial forest.”
“Whether we should regret the loss of fierce animals or not, from a scientific perspective, it’s too late for that; we have to accept that they’re gone. Paganel can hardly expect to encounter wild beasts in this sky-high forest.”
“Why not?” asked the geographer.
“Why not?” asked the geographer.
“Wild beasts on a tree!” exclaimed Tom Austin.
“Wild animals in a tree!” exclaimed Tom Austin.
“Yes, undoubtedly. The American tiger, the jaguar, takes refuge in the trees, when the chase gets too hot for him. It is quite possible that one of these animals, surprised by the inundation, might have climbed up into this OMBU, and be hiding now among its thick foliage.”
“Yes, definitely. The American tiger, the jaguar, takes shelter in the trees when the pursuit gets too intense. It’s quite possible that one of these animals, caught off guard by the flooding, could have climbed up into this OMBU and is hiding now among its dense leaves.”
“You haven’t met any of them, at any rate, I suppose?” said the Major.
“You haven’t met any of them, have you?” said the Major.
“No,” replied Paganel, “though we hunted all through the wood. It is vexing, for it would have been a splendid chase. A jaguar is a bloodthirsty, ferocious creature. He can twist the neck of a horse with a single stroke of his paw. When he has once tasted human flesh he scents it greedily. He likes to eat an Indian best, and next to him a negro, then a mulatto, and last of all a white man.”
“No,” replied Paganel, “even though we looked all over the woods. It's frustrating because it would have been an amazing hunt. A jaguar is a vicious, savage animal. It can break a horse's neck with just one swipe of its paw. Once it has tasted human flesh, it craves it. It prefers to eat an Indian first, then a Black person, followed by a mixed-race person, and finally a white person.”
“I am delighted to hear we come number four,” said McNabbs.
“I’m thrilled to hear we ranked number four,” said McNabbs.
“That only proves you are insipid,” retorted Paganel, with an air of disdain.
"That just shows you're bland," Paganel replied, sounding dismissive.
“I am delighted to be insipid,” was the Major’s reply.
“I’m happy to be dull,” the Major replied.
“Well, it is humiliating enough,” said the intractable Paganel. “The white man proclaimed himself chief of the human race; but Mr. Jaguar is of a different opinion it seems.”
"Well, it's pretty humiliating," said the stubborn Paganel. "The white man declared himself the leader of humanity; but Mr. Jaguar seems to think differently."
“Be that as it may, my brave Paganel, seeing there are neither Indians, nor negroes, nor mulattoes among us, I am quite rejoiced at the absence of your beloved jaguars. Our situation is not so particularly agreeable.”
“Whatever the case, my brave Paganel, since there are no Indians, no Black people, nor mixed-race individuals among us, I’m really glad there are no jaguars around. Our situation isn’t exactly perfect.”
“What! not agreeable!” exclaimed Paganel, jumping at the word as likely to give a new turn to the conversation. “You are complaining of your lot, Glenarvan.”
“What! Not agreeable!” Paganel exclaimed, seizing on the word as if it might change the direction of the conversation. “You’re unhappy with your situation, Glenarvan.”
“I should think so, indeed,” replied Glenarvan. “Do you find these uncomfortable hard branches very luxurious?”
“I think so, too,” replied Glenarvan. “Do you really find these uncomfortable hard branches so luxurious?”
“I have never been more comfortable, even in my study. We live like the birds, we sing and fly about. I begin to believe men were intended to live on trees.”
“I’ve never felt more at ease, even in my office. We live like birds, singing and flying around. I’m starting to think that men were meant to live in trees.”
“But they want wings,” suggested the Major.
“But they want wings,” suggested the Major.
“They’ll make them some day.”
“They’ll make them someday.”
“And till then,” put in Glenarvan, “with your leave, I prefer the gravel of a park, or the floor of a house, or the deck of a ship, to this aerial dwelling.”
“And until then,” added Glenarvan, “if you don’t mind, I prefer the gravel of a park, the floor of a house, or the deck of a ship to this sky-high living space.”
“We must take things as they come, Glenarvan,” returned Paganel. “If good, so much the better; if bad, never mind. Ah, I see you are wishing you had all the comforts of Malcolm Castle.”
“We have to deal with whatever comes our way, Glenarvan,” Paganel replied. “If it’s good, great; if it’s bad, so be it. Ah, I can tell you’re wishing for all the comforts of Malcolm Castle.”
“No, but—”
“No, but—”
“I am quite certain Robert is perfectly happy,” interrupted Paganel, eager to insure one partisan at least.
“I’m pretty sure Robert is completely happy,” interrupted Paganel, eager to ensure he had at least one supporter.
“Yes, that I am!” exclaimed Robert, in a joyous tone.
“Yes, I am!” Robert exclaimed happily.
“At his age it is quite natural,” replied Glenarvan.
“At his age, that's totally normal,” replied Glenarvan.
“And at mine, too,” returned the geographer. “The fewer one’s comforts, the fewer one’s needs; and the fewer one’s needs, the greater one’s happiness.”
“And at mine, too,” replied the geographer. “The fewer comforts you have, the fewer needs you have; and with fewer needs, you find greater happiness.”
“Now, now,” said the Major, “here is Paganel running a tilt against riches and gilt ceilings.”
“Now, now,” said the Major, “here’s Paganel going up against wealth and fancy ceilings.”
“No, McNabbs,” replied the SAVANT, “I’m not; but if you like, I’ll tell you a little Arabian story that comes into my mind, very APROPOS this minute.”
“No, McNabbs,” replied the SAVANT, “I’m not; but if you want, I’ll share a little Arabian story that’s coming to mind, very relevant right now.”
“Oh, do, do,” said Robert.
“Oh, go ahead,” said Robert.
“And what is your story to prove, Paganel?” inquired the Major.
“And what’s your story to prove, Paganel?” asked the Major.
“Much what all stories prove, my brave comrade.”
“Most of what all stories show, my brave friend.”
“Not much then,” rejoined McNabbs. “But go on, Scheherazade, and tell us the story.”
“Not much then,” McNabbs replied. “But go on, Scheherazade, and tell us the story.”
“There was once,” said Paganel, “a son of the great Haroun-al-Raschid, who was unhappy, and went to consult an old Dervish. The old sage told him that happiness was a difficult thing to find in this world. ‘However,’ he added, ‘I know an infallible means of procuring your happiness.’ ‘What is it?’ asked the young Prince. ‘It is to put the shirt of a happy man on your shoulders.’ Whereupon the Prince embraced the old man, and set out at once to search for his talisman. He visited all the capital cities in the world. He tried on the shirts of kings, and emperors, and princes and nobles; but all in vain: he could not find a man among them that was happy. Then he put on the shirts of artists, and warriors, and merchants; but these were no better. By this time he had traveled a long way, without finding what he sought. At last he began to despair of success, and began sorrowfully to retrace his steps back to his father’s palace, when one day he heard an honest peasant singing so merrily as he drove the plow, that he thought, ‘Surely this man is happy, if there is such a thing as happiness on earth.’ Forthwith he accosted him, and said, ‘Are you happy?’ ‘Yes,’ was the reply. ‘There is nothing you desire?’ ‘Nothing.’ ‘You would not change your lot for that of a king?’ ‘Never!’ ‘Well, then, sell me your shirt.’ ‘My shirt! I haven’t one!’”
“There once was,” said Paganel, “a son of the great Haroun-al-Raschid, who was unhappy and went to consult an old Dervish. The wise man told him that happiness was hard to find in this world. ‘However,’ he added, ‘I know an infallible way to bring you happiness.’ ‘What is it?’ asked the young Prince. ‘It is to wear the shirt of a happy man.’ The Prince immediately embraced the old man and set off to search for his talisman. He visited all the capital cities in the world. He tried on the shirts of kings, emperors, princes, and nobles, but it was all in vain: he couldn’t find a single happy man among them. Then he tried on the shirts of artists, warriors, and merchants, but those were no better. By this time, he had traveled far without finding what he was looking for. Finally, he began to lose hope and sadly started to make his way back to his father’s palace when one day he heard an honest peasant singing happily as he plowed the field, and thought, ‘Surely this man is happy, if there’s such a thing as happiness on earth.’ He approached the peasant and asked, ‘Are you happy?’ ‘Yes,’ was the response. ‘Is there anything you desire?’ ‘Nothing.’ ‘You wouldn’t trade your life for that of a king?’ ‘Never!’ ‘Well, then, sell me your shirt.’ ‘My shirt! I don’t have one!’”
CHAPTER XXV BETWEEN FIRE AND WATER
BEFORE turning into “their nest,” as Paganel had called it, he, and Robert, and Glenarvan climbed up into the observatory to have one more inspection of the liquid plain. It was about nine o’clock; the sun had just sunk behind the glowing mists of the western horizon.
BEFORE turning into “their nest,” as Paganel had called it, he, Robert, and Glenarvan climbed up into the observatory to take one last look at the liquid plain. It was around nine o’clock; the sun had just set behind the glowing mists of the western horizon.
The eastern horizon was gradually assuming a most stormy aspect. A thick dark bar of cloud was rising higher and higher, and by degrees extinguishing the stars. Before long half the sky was overspread. Evidently motive power lay in the cloud itself, for there was not a breath of wind. Absolute calm reigned in the atmosphere; not a leaf stirred on the tree, not a ripple disturbed the surface of the water. There seemed to be scarcely any air even, as though some vast pneumatic machine had rarefied it. The entire atmosphere was charged to the utmost with electricity, the presence of which sent a thrill through the whole nervous system of all animated beings.
The eastern horizon was slowly taking on a very stormy look. A thick, dark band of clouds was rising higher and higher, gradually blocking out the stars. Before long, half the sky was covered. It was clear that the clouds themselves were generating power, as there wasn’t a breath of wind. The atmosphere was completely calm; not a leaf moved on the tree, and not a ripple touched the water's surface. It felt like there was hardly any air at all, as if some huge vacuum had thinned it. The entire atmosphere was filled with electricity, the presence of which sent a thrill through the nervous systems of all living creatures.
“We are going to have a storm,” said Paganel.
“We're going to have a storm,” said Paganel.
“You’re not afraid of thunder, are you, Robert?” asked Glenarvan.
“Are you afraid of thunder, Robert?” Glenarvan asked.
“No, my Lord!” exclaimed Robert. “Well, my boy, so much the better, for a storm is not far off.”
“No, my Lord!” Robert exclaimed. “Well, my boy, that’s even better, because a storm is on the way.”
“And a violent one, too,” added Paganel, “if I may judge by the look of things.”
“And it’s a violent one, too,” added Paganel, “if I can judge by how things look.”
“It is not the storm I care about,” said Glenarvan, “so much as the torrents of rain that will accompany it. We shall be soaked to the skin. Whatever you may say, Paganel, a nest won’t do for a man, and you will learn that soon, to your cost.”
“It’s not the storm that worries me,” Glenarvan said, “but the heavy rain that’s going to come with it. We’re going to be drenched. No matter what you say, Paganel, a nest isn’t suitable for a man, and you’ll find that out soon enough, at your own expense.”
“With the help of philosophy, it will,” replied Paganel.
“With the help of philosophy, it will,” replied Paganel.
“Philosophy! that won’t keep you from getting drenched.”
“Philosophy! That won’t stop you from getting soaked.”
“No, but it will warm you.”
“No, but it will make you feel warm.”
“Well,” said Glenarvan, “we had better go down to our friends, and advise them to wrap themselves up in their philosophy and their ponchos as tightly as possible, and above all, to lay in a stock of patience, for we shall need it before very long.”
“Well,” said Glenarvan, “we should head down to our friends and suggest they bundle up in their philosophy and ponchos as snugly as they can. Most importantly, they need to stock up on patience, because we’re definitely going to need it soon.”
Glenarvan gave a last glance at the angry sky. The clouds now covered it entirely; only a dim streak of light shone faintly in the west. A dark shadow lay on the water, and it could hardly be distinguished from the thick vapors above it. There was no sensation of light or sound. All was darkness and silence around.
Glenarvan took one last look at the stormy sky. The clouds had completely filled it; only a faint light was visible in the west. A dark shadow rested on the water, barely distinguishable from the thick mist above. There was no feeling of light or sound. Everything was engulfed in darkness and silence.
“Let us go down,” said Glenarvan; “the thunder will soon burst over us.”
“Let’s go down,” said Glenarvan; “the thunder will soon hit us.”
On returning to the bottom of the tree, they found themselves, to their great surprise, in a sort of dim twilight, produced by myriads of luminous specks which appeared buzzing confusedly over the surface of the water.
Upon returning to the base of the tree, they were unexpectedly in a kind of dim twilight, created by countless glowing specks that were buzzing chaotically above the water's surface.
“It is phosphorescence, I suppose,” said Glenarvan.
“It’s phosphorescence, I guess,” said Glenarvan.
“No, but phosphorescent insects, positive glow-worms, living diamonds, which the ladies of Buenos Ayres convert into magnificent ornaments.”
“No, but glowing insects, like glow-worms, which the women of Buenos Aires turn into stunning jewelry.”
“What!” exclaimed Robert, “those sparks flying about are insects!”
“What!” Robert exclaimed, “those sparks flying around are insects!”
“Yes, my boy.”
“Yes, my son.”
Robert caught one in his hand, and found Paganel was right. It was a kind of large drone, an inch long, and the Indians call it “tuco-tuco.” This curious specimen of the COLEOPTERA sheds its radiance from two spots in the front of its breast-plate, and the light is sufficient to read by. Holding his watch close to the insect, Paganel saw distinctly that the time was 10 P. M.
Robert caught one in his hand and realized Paganel was right. It was a large drone, about an inch long, which the locals call “tuco-tuco.” This interesting beetle shines from two spots on its chest plate, and the light is bright enough to read by. Holding his watch close to the insect, Paganel clearly saw that the time was 10 PM.
On rejoining the Major and his three sailors, Glenarvan warned them of the approaching storm, and advised them to secure themselves in their beds of branches as firmly as possible, for there was no doubt that after the first clap of thunder the wind would become unchained, and the OMBU would be violently shaken. Though they could not defend themselves from the waters above, they might at least keep out of the rushing current beneath.
Upon rejoining the Major and his three sailors, Glenarvan warned them about the approaching storm and suggested they secure themselves in their beds of branches as tightly as possible, because it was clear that after the first clap of thunder, the wind would break loose, and the OMBU would be shaken violently. Although they couldn’t protect themselves from the water above, they could at least avoid the raging current beneath.
They wished one another “good-night,” though hardly daring to hope for it, and then each one rolled himself in his poncho and lay down to sleep.
They said “good night” to each other, not really daring to hope for it, and then each of them wrapped themselves in their poncho and lay down to sleep.
But the approach of the great phenomena of nature excites vague uneasiness in the heart of every sentient being, even in the most strong-minded. The whole party in the OMBU felt agitated and oppressed, and not one of them could close his eyes. The first peal of thunder found them wide awake. It occurred about 11 P. M., and sounded like a distant rolling. Glenarvan ventured to creep out of the sheltering foliage, and made his way to the extremity of the horizontal branch to take a look round.
But the approach of the great forces of nature stirs up a vague unease in the heart of every living being, even in the strongest among them. The entire group in the OMBU felt restless and weighed down, and not one of them could fall asleep. The first rumble of thunder found them wide awake. It happened around 11 P.M. and sounded like distant rolling. Glenarvan dared to slip out of the protective foliage and made his way to the end of the horizontal branch to take a look around.
The deep blackness of the night was already scarified with sharp bright lines, which were reflected back by the water with unerring exactness. The clouds had rent in many parts, but noiselessly, like some soft cotton material. After attentively observing both the zenith and horizon, Glenarvan went back to the center of the trunk.
The deep blackness of the night was already marked by sharp bright lines, which were perfectly reflected by the water. The clouds had torn in several places, but quietly, like some soft cotton material. After carefully watching both the sky above and the horizon, Glenarvan returned to the center of the trunk.
“Well, Glenarvan, what’s your report?” asked Paganel.
“Well, Glenarvan, what’s your update?” asked Paganel.
“I say it is beginning in good earnest, and if it goes on so we shall have a terrible storm.”
“I think it’s really starting now, and if it keeps up like this, we’re going to have a serious storm.”
“So much the better,” replied the enthusiastic Paganel; “I should like a grand exhibition, since we can’t run away.”
“So much the better,” replied the excited Paganel; “I would love a grand exhibition, since we can’t escape.”
“That’s another of your theories,” said the Major.
"That's just another one of your theories," said the Major.
“And one of my best, McNabbs. I am of Glenarvan’s opinion, that the storm will be superb. Just a minute ago, when I was trying to sleep, several facts occurred to my memory, that make me hope it will, for we are in the region of great electrical tempests. For instance, I have read somewhere, that in 1793, in this very province of Buenos Ayres, lightning struck thirty-seven times during one single storm. My colleague, M. Martin de Moussy, counted fifty-five minutes of uninterrupted rolling.”
“And one of my best, McNabbs. I agree with Glenarvan that the storm will be incredible. Just a minute ago, while I was trying to sleep, I remembered several things that make me optimistic about it, because we’re in an area known for major electrical storms. For example, I read somewhere that in 1793, in this very province of Buenos Ayres, lightning struck thirty-seven times during a single storm. My colleague, M. Martin de Moussy, counted fifty-five minutes of nonstop rolling thunder.”
“Watch in hand?” asked the Major.
“Do you have a watch?” asked the Major.
“Watch in hand. Only one thing makes me uneasy,” added Paganel, “if it is any use to be uneasy, and that is, that the culminating point of this plain, is just this very OMBU where we are. A lightning conductor would be very serviceable to us at present. For it is this tree especially, among all that grow in the Pampas, that the thunder has a particular affection for. Besides, I need not tell you, friend, that learned men tell us never to take refuge under trees during a storm.”
“Looking at my watch. There's only one thing that makes me uneasy,” added Paganel, “if it’s even worth feeling uneasy, and that’s the fact that the highest point of this plain is right here at this OMBU where we are. A lightning rod would really come in handy right now. This tree, in particular, is a favorite of thunder among all the ones that grow in the Pampas. Plus, I shouldn’t have to remind you, my friend, that experts warn us never to seek shelter under trees during a storm.”
“Most seasonable advice, certainly, in our circumstances,” said the Major.
“Definitely the most timely advice for our situation,” said the Major.
“I must confess, Paganel,” replied Glenarvan, “that you might have chosen a better time for this reassuring information.”
“I have to admit, Paganel,” Glenarvan replied, “that you could have picked a better time to share this reassuring info.”
“Bah!” replied Paganel, “all times are good for getting information. Ha! now it’s beginning.”
“Bah!” replied Paganel, “any time is a good time for gathering information. Ha! Now it’s starting.”
Louder peals of thunder interrupted this inopportune conversation, the violence increasing with the noise till the whole atmosphere seemed to vibrate with rapid oscillations.
Louder claps of thunder disrupted this awkward conversation, the intensity growing with the sound until the entire atmosphere felt like it was shaking with quick vibrations.
The incessant flashes of lightning took various forms. Some darted down perpendicularly from the sky five or six times in the same place in succession. Others would have excited the interest of a SAVANT to the highest degree, for though Arago, in his curious statistics, only cites two examples of forked lightning, it was visible here hundreds of times. Some of the flashes branched out in a thousand different directions, making coralliform zigzags, and threw out wonderful jets of arborescent light.
The constant flashes of lightning took on different shapes. Some shot straight down from the sky five or six times in the same spot one after another. Others would have fascinated a SCIENTIST greatly, because although Arago only mentions two examples of forked lightning in his interesting statistics, it was seen here hundreds of times. Some of the flashes split into a thousand different directions, creating coral-like zigzags, and emitted stunning jets of tree-like light.
Soon the whole sky from east to north seemed supported by a phosphoric band of intense brilliancy. This kept increasing by degrees till it overspread the entire horizon, kindling the clouds which were faithfully mirrored in the waters as if they were masses of combustible material, beneath, and presented the appearance of an immense globe of fire, the center of which was the OMBU.
Soon the entire sky from east to north appeared to be held up by a bright band of glowing light. This gradually grew stronger until it covered the whole horizon, igniting the clouds that were perfectly reflected in the water below, making them look like piles of flammable material, and creating the impression of a massive globe of fire, with the OMBU at its center.
Glenarvan and his companions gazed silently at this terrifying spectacle. They could not make their voices heard, but the sheets of white light which enwrapped them every now and then, revealed the face of one and another, sometimes the calm features of the Major, sometimes the eager, curious glance of Paganel, or the energetic face of Glenarvan, and at others, the scared eyes of the terrified Robert, and the careless looks of the sailors, investing them with a weird, spectral aspect.
Glenarvan and his friends stared silently at this frightening scene. They couldn’t speak, but the flashes of white light that surrounded them now and then revealed the faces of a few — sometimes the calm expression of the Major, sometimes the eager, curious gaze of Paganel, or the determined face of Glenarvan, and at other times, the frightened eyes of the terrified Robert, along with the indifferent looks of the sailors, giving them an eerie, ghostly appearance.
However, as yet, no rain had fallen, and the wind had not risen in the least. But this state of things was of short duration; before long the cataracts of the sky burst forth, and came down in vertical streams. As the large drops fell splashing into the lake, fiery sparks seemed to fly out from the illuminated surface.
However, so far, no rain had fallen, and the wind hadn't picked up at all. But this situation didn't last long; soon the skies opened up, and rain poured down in straight streams. As the big drops splashed into the lake, it looked like fiery sparks were flying up from the glowing surface.
Was the rain the FINALE of the storm? If so, Glenarvan and his companions would escape scot free, except for a few vigorous douche baths. No. At the very height of this struggle of the electric forces of the atmosphere, a large ball of fire appeared suddenly at the extremity of the horizontal parent branch, as thick as a man’s wrist, and surrounded with black smoke. This ball, after turning round and round for a few seconds, burst like a bombshell, and with so much noise that the explosion was distinctly audible above the general FRACAS. A sulphurous smoke filled the air, and complete silence reigned till the voice of Tom Austin was heard shouting:
Was the rain the END of the storm? If so, Glenarvan and his friends would come out unscathed, apart from a few thorough dousing. No. At the peak of this clash of electrical forces in the atmosphere, a large fireball suddenly appeared at the end of the horizontal main branch, as thick as a man's wrist, and surrounded by black smoke. This ball, after spinning around for a few seconds, exploded like a bomb, making so much noise that the blast was clearly heard above the general COMMOTION. A strong sulfurous smoke filled the air, and complete silence followed until Tom Austin's voice rang out, shouting:
“The tree is on fire.”
“The tree is burning.”
Tom was right. In a moment, as if some fireworks were being ignited, the flame ran along the west side of the OMBU; the dead wood and nests of dried grass, and the whole sap, which was of a spongy texture, supplied food for its devouring activity.
Tom was spot on. In an instant, like fireworks going off, the flames spread along the west side of the OMBU; the dead wood, dried grass nests, and the whole spongy sap provided fuel for its consuming rage.
The wind had risen now and fanned the flame. It was time to flee, and Glenarvan and his party hurried away to the eastern side of their refuge, which was meantime untouched by the fire. They were all silent, troubled, and terrified, as they watched branch after branch shrivel, and crack, and writhe in the flame like living serpents, and then drop into the swollen torrent, still red and gleaming, as it was borne swiftly along on the rapid current. The flames sometimes rose to a prodigious height, and seemed almost lost in the atmosphere, and sometimes, beaten down by the hurricane, closely enveloped the OMBU like a robe of Nessus. Terror seized the entire group. They were almost suffocated with smoke, and scorched with the unbearable heat, for the conflagration had already reached the lower branches on their side of the OMBU. To extinguish it or check its progress was impossible; and they saw themselves irrevocably condemned to a torturing death, like the victims of Hindoo divinities.
The wind had picked up and fanned the flames. It was time to escape, and Glenarvan and his group rushed to the eastern side of their shelter, which was still safe from the fire. They were all quiet, anxious, and scared as they watched branch after branch shrivel, crack, and twist in the flames like living serpents, then fall into the swollen torrent, still red and glimmering, as it was quickly swept away by the fast current. The flames sometimes shot up to an enormous height, almost disappearing into the sky, and other times, pushed down by the strong winds, completely surrounded the OMBU like a Nessus robe. Fear gripped the whole group. They were nearly suffocated by the smoke and burned by the unbearable heat, as the fire had already reached the lower branches on their side of the OMBU. It was impossible to put it out or slow it down, and they felt hopelessly doomed to a slow, agonizing death, like the victims of Hindu deities.
At last, their situation was absolutely intolerable. Of the two deaths staring them in the face, they had better choose the less cruel.
At last, their situation was completely unbearable. Of the two deaths looming before them, they might as well choose the less painful one.
“To the water!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
"To the water!" shouted Glenarvan.
Wilson, who was nearest the flames, had already plunged into the lake, but next minute he screamed out in the most violent terror:
Wilson, who was closest to the flames, had already jumped into the lake, but the next moment he screamed out in intense fear:
“Help! Help!”
“Help! Help!”
Austin rushed toward him, and with the assistance of the Major, dragged him up again on the tree.
Austin hurried over to him, and with the Major's help, pulled him back up onto the tree.
“What’s the matter?” they asked.
"What's wrong?" they asked.
“Alligators! alligators!” replied Wilson.
"Alligators! Alligators!" Wilson replied.
The whole foot of the tree appeared to be surrounded by these formidable animals of the Saurian order. By the glare of the flames, they were immediately recognized by Paganel, as the ferocious species peculiar to America, called CAIMANS in the Spanish territories. About ten of them were there, lashing the water with their powerful tails, and attacking the OMBU with the long teeth of their lower jaw.
The entire base of the tree seemed to be surrounded by these formidable creatures from the Saurian order. In the light of the flames, Paganel instantly recognized them as the fierce species native to America, known as CAIMANS in the Spanish-speaking regions. There were about ten of them, thrashing the water with their strong tails and biting at the OMBU with the long teeth of their lower jaw.
At this sight the unfortunate men gave themselves up to be lost. A frightful death was in store for them, since they must either be devoured by the fire or by the caimans. Even the Major said, in a calm voice:
At this sight, the unfortunate men resigned themselves to their fate. A terrifying death awaited them, as they would either be consumed by the flames or by the caimans. Even the Major said, in a calm voice:
“This is the beginning of the end, now.”
“This is the start of the end, now.”
There are circumstances in which men are powerless, when the unchained elements can only be combated by other elements. Glenarvan gazed with haggard looks at the fire and water leagued against him, hardly knowing what deliverance to implore from Heaven.
There are times when men are helpless, when the unleashed forces of nature can only be fought with other natural forces. Glenarvan stared with weary eyes at the fire and water working against him, barely aware of what kind of rescue to ask for from Heaven.
The violence of the storm had abated, but it had developed in the atmosphere a considerable quantity of vapors, to which electricity was about to communicate immense force. An enormous water-spout was gradually forming in the south—a cone of thick mists, but with the point at the bottom, and base at the top, linking together the turbulent water and the angry clouds. This meteor soon began to move forward, turning over and over on itself with dizzy rapidity, and sweeping up into its center a column of water from the lake, while its gyratory motions made all the surrounding currents of air rush toward it.
The storm's violence had eased, but it had filled the air with a significant amount of moisture, which electricity was about to unleash with tremendous power. An enormous waterspout was slowly forming in the south—a cone of thick mist, with the point at the bottom and the base at the top, connecting the turbulent water and the angry clouds. This phenomenon soon began to move forward, spinning rapidly and pulling a column of water from the lake into its center, while its rotating motion caused all the surrounding air currents to rush toward it.
A few seconds more, and the gigantic water-spout threw itself on the OMBU, and caught it up in its whirl. The tree shook to its roots. Glenarvan could fancy the caimans’ teeth were tearing it up from the soil; for as he and his companions held on, each clinging firmly to the other, they felt the towering OMBU give way, and the next minute it fell right over with a terrible hissing noise, as the flaming branches touched the foaming water.
A few more seconds, and the massive water spout crashed down on the OMBU, swirling it around. The tree trembled to its roots. Glenarvan imagined the caimans’ teeth ripping it from the ground; as he and his friends clung tightly to each other, they felt the towering OMBU start to collapse, and in the next moment, it toppled over with a deafening hissing sound as the burning branches hit the churning water.
It was the work of an instant. Already the water-spout had passed, to carry on its destructive work elsewhere. It seemed to empty the lake in its passage, by continually drawing up the water into itself.
It happened in a flash. The water spout had already moved on, taking its destructive force elsewhere. It was as if it drained the lake as it traveled, constantly pulling the water up into itself.
The OMBU now began to drift rapidly along, impelled by wind and current. All the caimans had taken their departure, except one that was crawling over the upturned roots, and coming toward the poor refugees with wide open jaws. But Mulrady, seizing hold of a branch that was half-burned off, struck the monster such a tremendous blow, that it fell back into the torrent and disappeared, lashing the water with its formidable tail.
The OMBU started to drift quickly, pushed by the wind and the current. All the caimans had left, except for one that was crawling over the exposed roots and heading towards the frightened refugees with its jaws wide open. But Mulrady grabbed a half-burned branch and delivered such a powerful blow to the creature that it fell back into the rushing water and vanished, thrashing the surface with its strong tail.
Glenarvan and his companions being thus delivered from the voracious SAURIANS, stationed themselves on the branches windward of the conflagration, while the OMBU sailed along like a blazing fire-ship through the dark night, the flames spreading themselves round like sails before the breath of the hurricane.
Glenarvan and his friends, having escaped from the hungry SAURIANS, took their positions on the branches upwind from the fire, while the OMBU moved through the dark night like a blazing fire ship, the flames spreading around like sails caught in the hurricane's wind.
CHAPTER XXVI THE RETURN ON BOARD
FOR two hours the OMBU navigated the immense lake without reaching terra firma. The flames which were devouring it had gradually died out. The chief danger of their frightful passage was thus removed, and the Major went the length of saying, that he should not be surprised if they were saved after all.
FOR two hours the OMBU traveled across the vast lake without reaching dry land. The flames that had been consuming it had slowly burned down. The main threat of their terrifying journey was thus eliminated, and the Major even went so far as to say that he wouldn’t be surprised if they ended up being saved after all.
The direction of the current remained unchanged, always running from southwest to northeast. Profound darkness had again set in, only illumined here and there by a parting flash of lightning. The storm was nearly over. The rain had given place to light mists, which a breath of wind dispersed, and the heavy masses of cloud had separated, and now streaked the sky in long bands.
The current kept flowing the same way, always from southwest to northeast. A deep darkness had fallen again, lit up here and there by flashes of lightning. The storm was almost done. The rain had turned into light mists, which a gentle breeze scattered, and the thick clouds had broken apart, now stretching across the sky in long bands.
The OMBU was borne onward so rapidly by the impetuous torrent, that anyone might have supposed some powerful locomotive engine was hidden in its trunk. It seemed likely enough they might continue drifting in this way for days. About three o’clock in the morning, however, the Major noticed that the roots were beginning to graze the ground occasionally, and by sounding the depth of the water with a long branch, Tom Austin found that they were getting on rising ground. Twenty minutes afterward, the OMBU stopped short with a violent jolt.
The OMBU was carried along so quickly by the rushing current that anyone might have thought a powerful engine was hidden in its trunk. It seemed possible they could keep drifting like this for days. However, around three o’clock in the morning, the Major noticed that the roots were starting to touch the ground occasionally, and by checking the water depth with a long branch, Tom Austin discovered they were moving onto rising ground. Twenty minutes later, the OMBU came to an abrupt stop with a heavy jolt.
“Land! land!” shouted Paganel, in a ringing tone.
“Land! Land!” shouted Paganel, excited.
The extremity of the calcined bough had struck some hillock, and never were sailors more glad; the rock to them was the port.
The end of the burned branch had hit some small hill, and never were sailors happier; to them, the rock was the harbor.
Already Robert and Wilson had leaped on to the solid plateau with a loud, joyful hurrah! when a well-known whistle was heard. The gallop of a horse resounded over the plain, and the tall form of Thalcave emerged from the darkness.
Already Robert and Wilson had jumped onto the solid plateau with a loud, joyful cheer when a familiar whistle was heard. The sound of a galloping horse echoed across the plain, and the tall figure of Thalcave appeared from the darkness.
“Thalcave! Thalcave!” they all cried with one voice.
“Thalcave! Thalcave!” they all shouted in unison.
“Amigos!” replied the Patagonian, who had been waiting for the travelers here in the same place where the current had landed himself.
“Friends!” replied the Patagonian, who had been waiting for the travelers here in the same spot where the current had brought him.
As he spoke he lifted up Robert in his arms, and hugged him to his breast, never imagining that Paganel was hanging on to him. A general and hearty hand-shaking followed, and everyone rejoiced at seeing their faithful guide again. Then the Patagonian led the way into the HANGAR of a deserted ESTANCIA, where there was a good, blazing fire to warm them, and a substantial meal of fine, juicy slices of venison soon broiling, of which they did not leave a crumb. When their minds had calmed down a little, and they were able to reflect on the dangers they had come through from flood, and fire, and alligators, they could scarcely believe they had escaped.
As he spoke, he picked up Robert in his arms and hugged him close, not realizing that Paganel was holding on to him. A warm and enthusiastic round of handshakes followed, and everyone was thrilled to see their faithful guide again. Then the Patagonian led the way into the HANGAR of an abandoned ESTANCIA, where a nice, roaring fire warmed them, and a hearty meal of delicious, juicy venison was soon grilling, and they left not a crumb. Once their minds settled down a bit and they could think about the dangers they had faced from floods, fire, and alligators, they could hardly believe they had made it through.
Thalcave, in a few words, gave Paganel an account of himself since they parted, entirely ascribing his deliverance to his intrepid horse. Then Paganel tried to make him understand their new interpretation of the document, and the consequent hopes they were indulging. Whether the Indian actually understood his ingenious hypothesis was a question; but he saw that they were glad and confident, and that was enough for him.
Thalcave briefly told Paganel about what had happened to him since they last met, completely crediting his brave horse for his escape. Then Paganel tried to explain their new take on the document and the hopes they were feeling as a result. It was unclear if the Indian fully grasped his clever theory, but he noticed that they were happy and optimistic, which was enough for him.
As can easily be imagined, after their compulsory rest on the OMBU, the travelers were up betimes and ready to start. At eight o’clock they set off. No means of transport being procurable so far south, they were compelled to walk. However, it was not more than forty miles now that they had to go, and Thaouka would not refuse to give a lift occasionally to a tired pedestrian, or even to a couple at a pinch. In thirty-six hours they might reach the shores of the Atlantic.
As you can easily picture, after their mandatory rest on the OMBU, the travelers woke up early and were ready to go. At eight o’clock, they set off. With no transportation available this far south, they had to walk. However, they only had about forty miles to cover, and Thaouka was willing to give a ride now and then to a tired walker, or even to a couple in need. In thirty-six hours, they could reach the shores of the Atlantic.
The low-lying tract of marshy ground, still under water, soon lay behind them, as Thalcave led them upward to the higher plains. Here the Argentine territory resumed its monotonous aspect. A few clumps of trees, planted by European hands, might chance to be visible among the pasturage, but quite as rarely as in Tandil and Tapalquem Sierras. The native trees are only found on the edge of long prairies and about Cape Corrientes.
The low-lying marshy area, still flooded, quickly disappeared behind them as Thalcave guided them up to the higher plains. Here, the Argentine landscape returned to its dull appearance. A few groups of trees, planted by Europeans, could occasionally be seen dotting the pastures, but not as frequently as in Tandil and the Tapalquem Sierras. Native trees are only found at the edges of vast prairies and around Cape Corrientes.
Next day, though still fifteen miles distant, the proximity of the ocean was sensibly felt. The VIRAZON, a peculiar wind, which blows regularly half of the day and night, bent down the heads of the tall grasses. Thinly planted woods rose to view, and small tree-like mimosas, bushes of acacia, and tufts of CURRA-MANTEL. Here and there, shining like pieces of broken glass, were salinous lagoons, which increased the difficulty of the journey as the travelers had to wind round them to get past. They pushed on as quickly as possible, hoping to reach Lake Salado, on the shores of the ocean, the same day; and at 8 P. M., when they found themselves in front of the sand hills two hundred feet high, which skirt the coast, they were all tolerably tired. But when the long murmur of the distant ocean fell on their ears, the exhausted men forgot their fatigue, and ran up the sandhills with surprising agility. But it was getting quite dark already, and their eager gaze could discover no traces of the DUNCAN on the gloomy expanse of water that met their sight.
The next day, even though they were still fifteen miles away, the closeness of the ocean was clearly felt. The VIRAZON, a unique wind that blows consistently for half the day and night, bent the tall grasses down. Sparse woods came into view, along with small tree-like mimosas, acacia bushes, and clumps of CURRA-MANTEL. Here and there, shining like shards of broken glass, were saline lagoons, which made the journey more challenging as the travelers had to navigate around them to get by. They pushed forward as quickly as they could, hoping to reach Lake Salado on the ocean’s shores by the end of the day; by 8 PM, when they found themselves in front of the sand hills rising two hundred feet high along the coast, they were all pretty worn out. But when the long sound of the distant ocean reached their ears, the tired men forgot their exhaustion and dashed up the sandhills with surprising energy. However, it was already getting quite dark, and their eager eyes couldn't spot any sign of the DUNCAN on the gloomy stretch of water before them.
“But she is there, for all that,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “waiting for us, and running alongside.”
“But she’s there, despite everything,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “waiting for us and keeping pace.”
“We shall see her to-morrow,” replied McNabbs.
“We'll see her tomorrow,” replied McNabbs.
Tom Austin hailed the invisible yacht, but there was no response. The wind was very high and the sea rough. The clouds were scudding along from the west, and the spray of the waves dashed up even to the sand-hills. It was little wonder, then, if the man on the look-out could neither hear nor make himself heard, supposing the DUNCAN were there. There was no shelter on the coast for her, neither bay nor cove, nor port; not so much as a creek. The shore was composed of sand-banks which ran out into the sea, and were more dangerous to approach than rocky shoals. The sand-banks irritate the waves, and make the sea so particularly rough, that in heavy weather vessels that run aground there are invariably dashed to pieces.
Tom Austin called out to the invisible yacht, but there was no reply. The wind was really strong and the sea was choppy. The clouds rushed in from the west, and the spray from the waves splashed up even to the sand dunes. It’s no surprise, then, that the lookout couldn’t hear anything or be heard back, assuming the DUNCAN was out there. There was no shelter along the coast for her, no bay or cove or port; not even a creek. The shore was made up of sandbanks that extended into the sea and were more dangerous to approach than rocky shallows. The sandbanks stir up the waves, making the sea so particularly rough that in bad weather, ships that run aground there are inevitably smashed to pieces.
Though, then, the DUNCAN would keep far away from such a coast, John Mangles is a prudent captain to get near. Tom Austin, however, was of the opinion that she would be able to keep five miles out.
Though, then, the DUNCAN would stay far away from such a coast, John Mangles is a cautious captain to get close. Tom Austin, however, thought she would be able to stay five miles out.
The Major advised his impatient relative to restrain himself to circumstances. Since there was no means of dissipating the darkness, what was the use of straining his eyes by vainly endeavoring to pierce through it.
The Major advised his impatient relative to calm down and accept the situation. Since there was no way to clear the darkness, what was the point of straining his eyes in a futile attempt to see through it?
He set to work immediately to prepare the night’s encampment beneath the shelter of the sand-hills; the last provisions supplied the last meal, and afterward, each, following the Major’s example, scooped out a hole in the sand, which made a comfortable enough bed, and then covered himself with the soft material up to his chin, and fell into a heavy sleep.
He got to work right away to set up the campsite for the night under the protection of the sand dunes; the last supplies provided the final meal, and afterwards, each person, following the Major’s lead, dug a hole in the sand to create a comfy bed, then covered themselves with the soft material up to their chins and fell into a deep sleep.
But Glenarvan kept watch. There was still a stiff breeze of wind, and the ocean had not recovered its equilibrium after the recent storm. The waves, at all times tumultuous, now broke over the sand-banks with a noise like thunder. Glenarvan could not rest, knowing the DUNCAN was so near him. As to supposing she had not arrived at the appointed rendezvous, that was out of the question. Glenarvan had left the Bay of Talcahuano on the 14th of October, and arrived on the shores of the Atlantic on the 12th of November. He had taken thirty days to cross Chili, the Cordilleras, the Pampas, and the Argentine plains, giving the DUNCAN ample time to double Cape Horn, and arrive on the opposite side. For such a fast runner there were no impediments. Certainly the storm had been very violent, and its fury must have been terrible on such a vast battlefield as the Atlantic, but the yacht was a good ship, and the captain was a good sailor. He was bound to be there, and he would be there.
But Glenarvan kept watch. There was still a strong breeze, and the ocean hadn’t settled after the recent storm. The waves, always rough, now crashed over the sandbanks with a noise like thunder. Glenarvan couldn’t relax, knowing the DUNCAN was so close. The idea that she hadn’t arrived at the meeting point was out of the question. Glenarvan had left the Bay of Talcahuano on October 14 and reached the Atlantic shores on November 12. He took thirty days to cross Chile, the Andes, the Pampas, and the Argentine plains, giving the DUNCAN plenty of time to round Cape Horn and arrive on the other side. There were no obstacles for such a fast ship. Sure, the storm had been very fierce, and its wrath must have been tremendous over such a vast expanse as the Atlantic, but the yacht was a solid ship, and the captain was an excellent sailor. He had to be there, and he would be there.
These reflections, however, did not calm Glenarvan. When the heart and the reason are struggling, it is generally the heart that wins the mastery. The laird of Malcolm Castle felt the presence of loved ones about him in the darkness as he wandered up and down the lonely strand. He gazed, and listened, and even fancied he caught occasional glimpses of a faint light.
These thoughts, however, did not ease Glenarvan's mind. When emotions clash with logic, it's usually feelings that take control. The lord of Malcolm Castle sensed the presence of his loved ones around him in the darkness as he paced back and forth along the empty shore. He looked, listened, and even thought he saw flickers of a soft light from time to time.
“I am not mistaken,” he said to himself; “I saw a ship’s light, one of the lights on the DUNCAN! Oh! why can’t I see in the dark?”
“I’m not mistaken,” he said to himself; “I saw a ship’s light, one of the lights on the DUNCAN! Oh! why can’t I see in the dark?”
All at once the thought rushed across him that Paganel said he was a nyctalope, and could see at night. He must go and wake him.
All of a sudden, the thought hit him that Paganel claimed he was a nyctalope and could see in the dark. He had to go wake him up.
The learned geographer was sleeping as sound as a mole. A strong arm pulled him up out of the sand and made him call out:
The educated geographer was sleeping deeply like a mole. A strong arm pulled him up from the sand and made him shout:
“Who goes there?”
“Who’s there?”
“It is I, Paganel.”
“It’s me, Paganel.”
“Who?”
“Who’s that?”
“Glenarvan. Come, I need your eyes.”
“Glenarvan. Come on, I need you to look.”
“My eyes,” replied Paganel, rubbing them vigorously.
“My eyes,” Paganel replied, rubbing them hard.
“Yes, I need your eyes to make out the DUNCAN in this darkness, so come.”
“Yes, I need your eyes to see DUNCAN in this darkness, so come.”
“Confound the nyctalopia!” said Paganel, inwardly, though delighted to be of any service to his friend.
“Damn the night blindness!” said Paganel to himself, although he was happy to help his friend in any way.
He got up and shook his stiffened limbs, and stretching and yawning as most people do when roused from sleep, followed Glenarvan to the beach.
He got up and shook his stiff limbs, stretching and yawning like most people do when waking up, and followed Glenarvan to the beach.
Glenarvan begged him to examine the distant horizon across the sea, which he did most conscientiously for some minutes.
Glenarvan urged him to take a look at the far-off horizon over the sea, which he did very carefully for several minutes.
“Well, do you see nothing?” asked Glenarvan.
“Well, do you see anything?” asked Glenarvan.
“Not a thing. Even a cat couldn’t see two steps before her.”
“Not a thing. Even a cat couldn’t see two steps ahead of her.”
“Look for a red light or a green one—her larboard or starboard light.”
“Look for a red light or a green one—her left or right light.”
“I see neither a red nor a green light, all is pitch dark,” replied Paganel, his eyes involuntarily beginning to close.
“I see neither a red nor a green light, it’s completely dark,” replied Paganel, his eyes starting to close involuntarily.
For half an hour he followed his impatient friend, mechanically letting his head frequently drop on his chest, and raising it again with a start. At last he neither answered nor spoke, and he reeled about like a drunken man. Glenarvan looked at him, and found he was sound asleep!
For half an hour, he trailed behind his impatient friend, automatically letting his head drop onto his chest and jolting it back up again. Finally, he stopped responding or speaking altogether, swaying like someone who was drunk. Glenarvan glanced at him and realized he was fast asleep!
Without attempting to wake him, he took his arm, led him back to his hole, and buried him again comfortably.
Without trying to wake him, he took his arm, led him back to his spot, and buried him again comfortably.
At dawn next morning, all the slumberers started to their feet and rushed to the shore, shouting “Hurrah, hurrah!” as Lord Glenarvan’s loud cry, “The DUNCAN, the DUNCAN!” broke upon his ear.
At dawn the next morning, everyone who had been sleeping jumped to their feet and ran to the shore, cheering “Hurrah, hurrah!” as Lord Glenarvan's loud shout of, “The DUNCAN, the DUNCAN!” reached their ears.
There she was, five miles out, her courses carefully reefed, and her steam half up. Her smoke was lost in the morning mist. The sea was so violent that a vessel of her tonnage could not have ventured safely nearer the sand-banks.
There she was, five miles out, her sails carefully reduced, and her steam half up. Her smoke disappeared into the morning mist. The sea was so rough that a ship of her size couldn’t have safely gotten closer to the sandbanks.
Glenarvan, by the aid of Paganel’s telescope, closely observed the movements of the yacht. It was evident that John Mangles had not perceived his passengers, for he continued his course as before.
Glenarvan, with Paganel’s telescope, carefully watched the yacht's movements. It was clear that John Mangles hadn’t noticed his passengers, as he kept on sailing as usual.
But at this very moment Thalcave fired his carbine in the direction of the yacht. They listened and looked, but no signal of recognition was returned. A second and a third time the Indian fired, awakening the echoes among the sand-hills.
But at that moment, Thalcave shot his carbine towards the yacht. They watched and listened, but there was no sign of acknowledgment. He fired a second and third time, causing the echoes to ring out among the sand dunes.
At last a white smoke was seen issuing from the side of the yacht.
At last, white smoke was seen coming from the side of the yacht.
“They see us!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “That’s the cannon of the DUNCAN.”
“They see us!” Glenarvan shouted. “That’s the cannon from the DUNCAN.”
A few seconds, and the heavy boom of the cannon came across the water and died away on the shore. The sails were instantly altered, and the steam got up, so as to get as near the coast as possible.
A few seconds later, the loud boom of the cannon echoed across the water and faded away on the shore. The sails were quickly adjusted, and the steam was raised to get as close to the coast as possible.
Presently, through the glass, they saw a boat lowered.
Presently, they saw a boat being lowered through the glass.
“Lady Helena will not be able to come,” said Tom Austin. “It is too rough.”
“Lady Helena won’t be able to make it,” said Tom Austin. “It’s too rough.”
“Nor John Mangles,” added McNabbs; “he cannot leave the ship.”
“Nor can John Mangles,” added McNabbs; “he can't leave the ship.”
“My sister, my sister!” cried Robert, stretching out his arms toward the yacht, which was now rolling violently.
“My sister, my sister!” shouted Robert, reaching out his arms toward the yacht, which was now rocking violently.
“Oh, how I wish I could get on board!” said Glenarvan.
“Oh, how I wish I could get on board!” said Glenarvan.
“Patience, Edward! you will be there in a couple of hours,” replied the Major.
“Hang in there, Edward! You'll be there in a couple of hours,” replied the Major.
Two hours! But it was impossible for a boat—a six-oared one—to come and go in a shorter space of time.
Two hours! But it was impossible for a boat—a six-oared one—to come and go in a shorter amount of time.
Glenarvan went back to Thalcave, who stood beside Thaouka, with his arms crossed, looking quietly at the troubled waves.
Glenarvan returned to Thalcave, who was standing next to Thaouka, arms crossed, silently watching the choppy waves.
Glenarvan took his hand, and pointing to the yacht, said: “Come!”
Glenarvan took his hand and pointed to the yacht, saying, “Come!”
The Indian gently shook his head.
The Indian gently shook his head.
“Come, friend,” repeated Glenarvan.
"Come on, friend," repeated Glenarvan.
“No,” said Thalcave, gently. “Here is Thaouka, and there—the Pampas,” he added, embracing with a passionate gesture the wide-stretching prairies.
“No,” said Thalcave, gently. “Here is Thaouka, and there—the Pampas,” he added, sweeping his arm dramatically over the vast prairies.
Glenarvan understood his refusal. He knew that the Indian would never forsake the prairie, where the bones of his fathers were whitening, and he knew the religious attachment of these sons of the desert for their native land. He did not urge Thalcave longer, therefore, but simply pressed his hand. Nor could he find it in his heart to insist, when the Indian, smiling as usual, would not accept the price of his services, pushing back the money, and saying:
Glenarvan understood his refusal. He knew that the Indian would never abandon the prairie, where the bones of his ancestors lay, and he recognized the strong bond these desert dwellers have with their homeland. So, he didn't push Thalcave any further; instead, he just clasped his hand. He couldn't bring himself to insist when the Indian, smiling as always, refused the payment for his services, pushing the money away and saying:
“For the sake of friendship.”
"For the sake of friendship."
Glenarvan could not reply; but he wished at least, to leave the brave fellow some souvenir of his European friends. What was there to give, however? Arms, horses, everything had been destroyed in the unfortunate inundation, and his friends were no richer than himself.
Glenarvan couldn't respond; but he wanted to at least leave the brave guy some reminder of his European friends. But what could he give? Weapons, horses, everything had been lost in the unfortunate flood, and his friends were no better off than he was.
He was quite at a loss how to show his recognition of the disinterestedness of this noble guide, when a happy thought struck him. He had an exquisite portrait of Lady Helena in his pocket, a CHEF-D’OEUVRE of Lawrence. This he drew out, and offered to Thalcave, simply saying:
He was unsure how to express his appreciation for the selflessness of this generous guide when a sudden idea came to him. He had a beautiful portrait of Lady Helena in his pocket, a masterpiece by Lawrence. He pulled it out and offered it to Thalcave, just saying:
“My wife.”
"My partner."
The Indian gazed at it with a softened eye, and said:
The Indian looked at it with a gentle gaze and said:
“Good and beautiful.”
"Nice and pretty."
Then Robert, and Paganel, and the Major, and the rest, exchanged touching farewells with the faithful Patagonian. Thalcave embraced them each, and pressed them to his broad chest. Paganel made him accept a map of South America and the two oceans, which he had often seen the Indian looking at with interest. It was the most precious thing the geographer possessed. As for Robert, he had only caresses to bestow, and these he lavished on his friend, not forgetting to give a share to Thaouka.
Then Robert, Paganel, the Major, and the others said heartfelt goodbyes to their loyal Patagonian friend. Thalcave hugged each of them tightly, holding them against his broad chest. Paganel insisted that he take a map of South America and the two oceans, which he had often noticed the Indian examining with interest. It was the most valuable item the geographer owned. As for Robert, he had only affectionate gestures to give, which he generously showered on his friend, making sure to include Thaouka as well.
The boat from the DUNCAN was now fast approaching, and in another minute had glided into a narrow channel between the sand-banks, and run ashore.
The boat from the DUNCAN was now quickly approaching, and in another minute, it had glided into a narrow channel between the sandbanks and ran ashore.
“My wife?” were Glenarvan’s first words.
“My wife?” were Glenarvan’s first words.
“My sister?” said Robert.
“My sister?” asked Robert.
“Lady Helena and Miss Grant are waiting for you on board,” replied the coxswain; “but lose no time your honor, we have not a minute, for the tide is beginning to ebb already.”
“Lady Helena and Miss Grant are waiting for you on board,” said the coxswain; “but don’t waste any time, sir, we don’t have a moment to spare, because the tide is starting to go out already.”
The last kindly adieux were spoken, and Thalcave accompanied his friends to the boat, which had been pushed back into the water. Just as Robert was going to step in, the Indian took him in his arms, and gazed tenderly into his face. Then he said:
The last warm goodbyes were said, and Thalcave walked with his friends to the boat, which had been pushed back into the water. Just as Robert was about to step in, the Indian embraced him and looked affectionately into his face. Then he said:
“Now go. You are a man.”
"Go now. You're a man."
“Good-by, good-by, friend!” said Glenarvan, once more.
“Goodbye, goodbye, friend!” said Glenarvan again.
“Shall we never see each other again?” Paganel called out.
“Are we never going to see each other again?” Paganel called out.
“Quien sabe?” (Who knows?) replied Thalcave, lifting his arms toward heaven.
“Who knows?” replied Thalcave, lifting his arms toward the sky.
These were the Indian’s last words, dying away on the breeze, as the boat receded gradually from the shore. For a long time, his dark, motionless SILHOUETTE stood out against the sky, through the white, dashing spray of the waves. Then by degrees his tall form began to diminish in size, till at last his friends of a day lost sight of him altogether.
These were the Indian’s final words, fading into the breeze as the boat slowly drifted away from the shore. For a long time, his dark, still figure was visible against the sky, through the white, crashing spray of the waves. Then gradually, his tall shape started to shrink until, eventually, his companions from the day could no longer see him at all.
An hour afterward Robert was the first to leap on board the DUNCAN. He flung his arms round Mary’s neck, amid the loud, joyous hurrahs of the crew on the yacht.
An hour later, Robert was the first to jump on board the DUNCAN. He wrapped his arms around Mary’s neck, amidst the loud, cheerful cheers of the crew on the yacht.
Thus the journey across South America was accomplished, the given line of march being scrupulously adhered to throughout.
Thus, the journey across South America was completed, sticking closely to the planned route the entire time.
Neither mountains nor rivers had made the travelers change their course; and though they had not had to encounter any ill-will from men, their generous intrepidity had been often enough roughly put to the proof by the fury of the unchained elements.
Neither mountains nor rivers had caused the travelers to change their path; and even though they had not faced any hostility from people, their courageous bravery had often been tested harshly by the wrath of the wild elements.
END OF BOOK ONE
END OF BOOK ONE
IN SEARCH OF THE CASTAWAYS
OR THE CHILDREN OF CAPTAIN GRANT
AUSTRALIA
[page intentionally blank]
CHAPTER I A NEW DESTINATION
FOR the first few moments the joy of reunion completely filled the hearts. Lord Glenarvan had taken care that the ill-success of their expedition should not throw a gloom over the pleasure of meeting, his very first words being:
FOR the first few moments, the joy of being together completely filled their hearts. Lord Glenarvan made sure that the failure of their expedition didn’t overshadow the happiness of the reunion, and his very first words were:
“Cheer up, friends, cheer up! Captain Grant is not with us, but we have a certainty of finding him!”
“Cheer up, friends, cheer up! Captain Grant isn't with us, but we’re sure we'll find him!”
Only such an assurance as this would have restored hope to those on board the DUNCAN. Lady Helena and Mary Grant had been sorely tried by the suspense, as they stood on the poop waiting for the arrival of the boat, and trying to count the number of its passengers. Alternate hope and fear agitated the bosom of poor Mary. Sometimes she fancied she could see her father, Harry Grant, and sometimes she gave way to despair. Her heart throbbed violently; she could not speak, and indeed could scarcely stand. Lady Helena put her arm round her waist to support her, but the captain, John Mangles, who stood close beside them spoke no encouraging word, for his practiced eye saw plainly that the captain was not there.
Only an assurance like this would have restored hope to those on board the DUNCAN. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were deeply tested by the uncertainty as they stood on the deck waiting for the boat to arrive and trying to count its passengers. Mary was caught in a whirlwind of hope and fear. Sometimes she thought she could see her father, Harry Grant, and at other times, she sank into despair. Her heart raced uncontrollably; she couldn’t speak and could barely stand. Lady Helena wrapped her arm around her waist for support, but the captain, John Mangles, who was standing right beside them, didn’t offer any encouraging words, as his experienced eye clearly saw that the captain was not there.
“He is there! He is coming! Oh, father!” exclaimed the young girl. But as the boat came nearer, her illusion was dispelled; all hope forsook her, and she would have sunk in despair, but for the reassuring voice of Glenarvan.
“He's here! He's coming! Oh, dad!” the young girl exclaimed. But as the boat got closer, her illusion faded; all hope left her, and she would have sunk into despair if it weren't for the reassuring voice of Glenarvan.
After their mutual embraces were over, Lady Helena, and Mary Grant, and John Mangles, were informed of the principal incidents of the expedition, and especially of the new interpretation of the document, due to the sagacity of Jacques Paganel. His Lordship also spoke in the most eulogistic terms of Robert, of whom Mary might well be proud. His courage and devotion, and the dangers he had run, were all shown up in strong relief by his patron, till the modest boy did not know which way to look, and was obliged to hide his burning cheeks in his sister’s arms.
After their warm embraces were done, Lady Helena, Mary Grant, and John Mangles were updated on the key events of the expedition, particularly the fresh interpretation of the document thanks to the insight of Jacques Paganel. His Lordship also praised Robert highly, a young man Mary could definitely be proud of. His bravery, dedication, and the risks he had taken were highlighted by his patron, leaving the shy boy unsure of where to look and forcing him to hide his flushed cheeks in his sister’s arms.
“No need to blush, Robert,” said John Mangles. “Your conduct has been worthy of your name.” And he leaned over the boy and pressed his lips on his cheek, still wet with Mary’s tears.
“No need to blush, Robert,” said John Mangles. “Your behavior has been worthy of your name.” And he leaned over the boy and kissed him on the cheek, still damp with Mary’s tears.
The Major and Paganel, it need hardly be said, came in for their due share of welcome, and Lady Helena only regretted she could not shake hands with the brave and generous Thalcave. McNabbs soon slipped away to his cabin, and began to shave himself as coolly and composedly as possible; while Paganel flew here and there, like a bee sipping the sweets of compliments and smiles. He wanted to embrace everyone on board the yacht, and beginning with Lady Helena and Mary Grant, wound up with M. Olbinett, the steward, who could only acknowledge so polite an attention by announcing that breakfast was ready.
The Major and Paganel, of course, received their fair share of attention, and Lady Helena only wished she could shake hands with the brave and generous Thalcave. McNabbs quickly slipped away to his cabin, where he started shaving himself as calmly and composedly as he could; meanwhile, Paganel buzzed around like a bee, soaking up compliments and smiles. He wanted to hug everyone on board the yacht, starting with Lady Helena and Mary Grant, and ending with M. Olbinett, the steward, who could only respond to such a kind gesture by announcing that breakfast was ready.
“Breakfast!” exclaimed Paganel.
“Breakfast!” Paganel exclaimed.
“Yes, Monsieur Paganel.”
"Yes, Mr. Paganel."
“A real breakfast, on a real table, with a cloth and napkins?”
“A proper breakfast, on a real table, with a tablecloth and napkins?”
“Certainly, Monsieur Paganel.”
“Of course, Monsieur Paganel.”
“And we shall neither have CHARQUI, nor hard eggs, nor fillets of ostrich?”
“And we won’t have jerky, hard-boiled eggs, or ostrich fillets?”
“Oh, Monsieur,” said Olbinett in an aggrieved tone.
“Oh, Sir,” said Olbinett in a resentful tone.
“I don’t want to hurt your feelings, my friend,” said the geographer smiling. “But for a month that has been our usual bill of fare, and when we dined we stretched ourselves full length on the ground, unless we sat astride on the trees. Consequently, the meal you have just announced seemed to me like a dream, or fiction, or chimera.”
“I don’t want to hurt your feelings, my friend,” said the geographer, smiling. “But for a month, that's been our usual routine, and when we ate, we lay flat on the ground unless we perched on the trees. So, the meal you just mentioned felt to me like a dream, or a fantasy, or an illusion.”
“Well, Monsieur Paganel, come along and let us prove its reality,” said Lady Helena, who could not help laughing.
“Well, Monsieur Paganel, come on and let’s prove it’s real,” said Lady Helena, who couldn’t help but laugh.
“Take my arm,” replied the gallant geographer.
"Take my arm," replied the brave geographer.
“Has his Lordship any orders to give me about the DUNCAN?” asked John Mangles.
“Does his Lordship have any instructions for me regarding the DUNCAN?” asked John Mangles.
“After breakfast, John,” replied Glenarvan, “we’ll discuss the program of our new expedition en famille.”
“After breakfast, John,” replied Glenarvan, “we’ll talk about the plan for our new expedition as a family.”
M. Olbinett’s breakfast seemed quite a FETE to the hungry guests. It was pronounced excellent, and even superior to the festivities of the Pampas. Paganel was helped twice to each dish, through “absence of mind,” he said.
M. Olbinett’s breakfast felt like quite a celebration to the hungry guests. It was declared excellent, even better than the festivities of the Pampas. Paganel was served twice from each dish, due to what he called “absent-mindedness.”
This unlucky word reminded Lady Helena of the amiable Frenchman’s propensity, and made her ask if he had ever fallen into his old habits while they were away. The Major and Glenarvan exchanged smiling glances, and Paganel burst out laughing, and protested on his honor that he would never be caught tripping again once more during the whole voyage. After this prelude, he gave an amusing recital of his disastrous mistake in learning Spanish, and his profound study of Camoens. “After all,” he added, “it’s an ill wind that blows nobody good, and I don’t regret the mistake.”
This unfortunate word reminded Lady Helena of the friendly Frenchman’s tendency and made her ask if he had ever slipped back into his old habits while they were away. The Major and Glenarvan exchanged amused glances, and Paganel burst out laughing, insisting on his honor that he would never be caught making the same mistake again for the rest of the voyage. After this setup, he shared a funny story about his disastrous attempt to learn Spanish and his deep study of Camoens. “After all,” he added, “it’s a bad situation that doesn’t benefit anyone, and I don’t regret the mistake.”
“Why not, my worthy friend?” asked the Major.
“Why not, my good friend?” asked the Major.
“Because I not only know Spanish, but Portuguese. I can speak two languages instead of one.”
“Because I know both Spanish and Portuguese, I can speak two languages instead of just one.”
“Upon my word, I never thought of that,” said McNabbs. “My compliments, Paganel—my sincere compliments.”
"Honestly, I never thought of that," said McNabbs. "Well done, Paganel—my sincere compliments."
But Paganel was too busily engaged with his knife and fork to lose a single mouthful, though he did his best to eat and talk at the same time. He was so much taken up with his plate, however, that one little fact quite escaped his observation, though Glenarvan noticed it at once. This was, that John Mangles had grown particularly attentive to Mary Grant. A significant glance from Lady Helena told him, moreover, how affairs stood, and inspired him with affectionate sympathy for the young lovers; but nothing of this was apparent in his manner to John, for his next question was what sort of a voyage he had made.
But Paganel was too busy with his knife and fork to waste a single bite, although he tried his best to eat and chat at the same time. He was so focused on his plate that one small detail completely missed his notice, even though Glenarvan caught it right away. This detail was that John Mangles had become particularly attentive to Mary Grant. A meaningful glance from Lady Helena also indicated how things stood, filling him with warm sympathy for the young couple; however, nothing of this showed in his demeanor toward John, as his next question was about the kind of voyage he had taken.
“We could not have had a better; but I must apprise your Lordship that I did not go through the Straits of Magellan again.”
“We couldn’t have had a better time; but I must let you know, my Lord, that I did not go through the Straits of Magellan again.”
“What! you doubled Cape Horn, and I was not there!” exclaimed Paganel.
“What! You went around Cape Horn, and I wasn't there?” exclaimed Paganel.
“Hang yourself!” said the Major.
“Kill yourself!” said the Major.
“Selfish fellow! you advise me to do that because you want my rope,” retorted the geographer.
“Selfish guy! You’re telling me to do that because you want my rope,” retorted the geographer.
“Well, you see, my dear Paganel, unless you have the gift of ubiquity you can’t be in two places at once. While you were scouring the pampas you could not be doubling Cape Horn.”
“Well, you see, my dear Paganel, unless you can be in two places at once, you can’t be everywhere at the same time. While you were searching the pampas, you couldn’t also be rounding Cape Horn.”
“That doesn’t prevent my regretting it,” replied Paganel.
"That doesn’t stop me from regretting it," replied Paganel.
Here the subject dropped, and John continued his account of his voyage. On arriving at Cape Pilares he had found the winds dead against him, and therefore made for the south, coasting along the Desolation Isle, and after going as far as the sixty-seventh degree southern latitude, had doubled Cape Horn, passed by Terra del Fuego and the Straits of Lemaire, keeping close to the Patagonian shore. At Cape Corrientes they encountered the terrible storm which had handled the travelers across the pampas so roughly, but the yacht had borne it bravely, and for the last three days had stood right out to sea, till the welcome signal-gun of the expedition was heard announcing the arrival of the anxiously-looked-for party. “It was only justice,” the captain added, “that he should mention the intrepid bearing of Lady Helena and Mary Grant throughout the whole hurricane. They had not shown the least fear, unless for their friends, who might possibly be exposed to the fury of the tempest.”
Here the topic changed, and John went on with his story about his journey. When he got to Cape Pilares, he faced strong headwinds, so he decided to head south, sailing along Desolation Isle. After reaching the sixty-seventh degree of southern latitude, he rounded Cape Horn, passed by Tierra del Fuego and the Straits of Lemaire, staying close to the Patagonian coast. At Cape Corrientes, they hit the terrible storm that had roughly treated the travelers across the pampas, but the yacht managed it well. For the last three days, they had been out at sea until they finally heard the welcome signal-gun from the expedition, announcing the arrival of the eagerly awaited group. “It was only right,” the captain added, “to mention the fearless demeanor of Lady Helena and Mary Grant throughout the entire hurricane. They didn't show any fear at all, except for their friends, who might be at risk from the storm's fury.”
After John Mangles had finished his narrative, Glenarvan turned to Mary and said; “My dear Miss Mary, the captain has been doing homage to your noble qualities, and I am glad to think you are not unhappy on board his ship.”
After John Mangles finished his story, Glenarvan turned to Mary and said, “My dear Miss Mary, the captain has been praising your wonderful qualities, and I’m happy to know you’re not unhappy aboard his ship.”
“How could I be?” replied Mary naively, looking at Lady Helena, and at the young captain too, likely enough.
“How could I be?” Mary replied, looking at Lady Helena and probably at the young captain as well.
“Oh, my sister is very fond of you, Mr. John, and so am I,” exclaimed Robert.
“Oh, my sister really likes you, Mr. John, and so do I,” shouted Robert.
“And so am I of you, my dear boy,” returned the captain, a little abashed by Robert’s innocent avowal, which had kindled a faint blush on Mary’s cheek. Then he managed to turn the conversation to safer topics by saying: “And now that your Lordship has heard all about the doings of the DUNCAN, perhaps you will give us some details of your own journey, and tell us more about the exploits of our young hero.”
“And so am I of you, my dear boy,” the captain replied, slightly embarrassed by Robert’s innocent confession, which had brought a faint flush to Mary’s cheek. He then shifted the conversation to safer subjects by saying, “Now that your Lordship has heard all about the happenings of the DUNCAN, perhaps you could share some details about your own journey and tell us more about the adventures of our young hero.”
Nothing could be more agreeable than such a recital to Lady Helena and Mary Grant; and accordingly Lord Glenarvan hastened to satisfy their curiosity—going over incident by incident, the entire march from one ocean to another, the pass of the Andes, the earthquake, the disappearance of Robert, his capture by the condor, Thalcave’s providential shot, the episode of the red wolves, the devotion of the young lad, Sergeant Manuel, the inundations, the caimans, the waterspout, the night on the Atlantic shore—all these details, amusing or terrible, excited by turns laughter and horror in the listeners. Often and often Robert came in for caresses from his sister and Lady Helena. Never was a boy so much embraced, or by such enthusiastic friends.
Nothing could be more enjoyable than this story for Lady Helena and Mary Grant. So, Lord Glenarvan quickly obliged their curiosity—going through each event one by one, recounting the entire journey from one ocean to another, the Andes crossing, the earthquake, Robert's disappearance, his capture by the condor, Thalcave’s lucky shot, the red wolves incident, the loyalty of the young guy, Sergeant Manuel, the floods, the caimans, the waterspout, the night on the Atlantic shore—all these details, whether amusing or terrifying, stirred up laughter and fear in the listeners. Time and again, Robert received hugs from his sister and Lady Helena. Never had a boy been so loved or embraced by such enthusiastic friends.
“And now, friends,” added Lord Glenarvan, when he had finished his narrative, “we must think of the present. The past is gone, but the future is ours. Let us come back to Captain Harry Grant.”
“And now, friends,” added Lord Glenarvan, when he finished his story, “we need to focus on the present. The past is behind us, but the future is ours. Let’s return to Captain Harry Grant.”
As soon as breakfast was over they all went into Lord Glenarvan’s private cabin and seated themselves round a table covered with charts and plans, to talk over the matter fully.
As soon as breakfast ended, they all went into Lord Glenarvan’s private cabin and sat around a table filled with charts and plans to discuss the matter in detail.
“My dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan, “I told you, when we came on board a little while ago, that though we had not brought back Captain Grant, our hope of finding him was stronger than ever. The result of our journey across America is this: We have reached the conviction, or rather absolute certainty, that the shipwreck never occurred on the shores of the Atlantic nor Pacific. The natural inference is that, as far as regards Patagonia, our interpretation of the document was erroneous. Most fortunately, our friend Paganel, in a happy moment of inspiration, discovered the mistake. He has proved clearly that we have been on the wrong track, and so explained the document that all doubt whatever is removed from our minds. However, as the document is in French, I will ask Paganel to go over it for your benefit.”
“My dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan, “I told you when we boarded a little while ago that, even though we haven't found Captain Grant, we have more hope than ever of locating him. Our journey across America has led us to this conclusion: We are absolutely certain that the shipwreck did not happen on the shores of the Atlantic or the Pacific. The obvious implication is that our understanding of the document regarding Patagonia was incorrect. Fortunately, our friend Paganel, in a moment of inspiration, discovered the mistake. He has clearly shown that we've been on the wrong path and explained the document so well that all doubt has been removed from our minds. However, since the document is in French, I’ll ask Paganel to go over it for you.”
The learned geographer, thus called upon, executed his task in the most convincing manner, descanting on the syllables GONIE and INDI, and extracting AUSTRALIA out of AUSTRAL. He pointed out that Captain Grant, on leaving the coast of Peru to return to Europe, might have been carried away with his disabled ship by the southern currents of the Pacific right to the shores of Australia, and his hypotheses were so ingenious and his deductions so subtle that even the matter-of-fact John Mangles, a difficult judge, and most unlikely to be led away by any flights of imagination, was completely satisfied.
The knowledgeable geographer, called upon for his expertise, performed his task convincingly, discussing the syllables GONIE and INDI, and deriving AUSTRALIA from AUSTRAL. He explained that Captain Grant, after leaving the coast of Peru on his way back to Europe, could have been swept away by the southern currents of the Pacific all the way to the shores of Australia. His theories were so clever and his conclusions so insightful that even the pragmatic John Mangles, a tough critic who was unlikely to be swayed by fanciful ideas, was completely convinced.
At the conclusion of Paganel’s dissertation, Glenarvan announced that the DUNCAN would sail immediately for Australia.
At the end of Paganel’s presentation, Glenarvan declared that the DUNCAN would set sail for Australia right away.
But before the decisive orders were given, McNabbs asked for a few minutes’ hearing.
But before the final orders were given, McNabbs asked for a few minutes to speak.
“Say away, McNabbs,” replied Glenarvan.
“Go away, McNabbs,” replied Glenarvan.
“I have no intention of weakening the arguments of my friend Paganel, and still less of refuting them. I consider them wise and weighty, and deserving our attention, and think them justly entitled to form the basis of our future researches. But still I should like them to be submitted to a final examination, in order to make their worth incontestable and uncontested.”
“I don’t want to undermine my friend Paganel’s arguments, and I certainly don’t want to refute them. I believe they are thoughtful and significant, and they deserve our consideration. I think they should rightly serve as the foundation for our future research. However, I would like them to undergo a final review to ensure their value is undeniable and accepted.”
“Go on, Major,” said Paganel; “I am ready to answer all your questions.”
“Go ahead, Major,” said Paganel; “I’m ready to answer all your questions.”
“They are simple enough, as you will see. Five months ago, when we left the Clyde, we had studied these same documents, and their interpretation then appeared quite plain. No other coast but the western coast of Patagonia could possibly, we thought, have been the scene of the shipwreck. We had not even the shadow of a doubt on the subject.”
“They're straightforward, as you'll notice. Five months ago, when we departed from the Clyde, we had gone over these same documents, and their meaning was clear back then. We believed that no other coast but the western coast of Patagonia could have been the site of the shipwreck. We didn’t even have the slightest doubt about it.”
“That’s true,” replied Glenarvan.
"That's true," replied Glenarvan.
“A little later,” continued the Major, “when a providential fit of absence of mind came over Paganel, and brought him on board the yacht, the documents were submitted to him and he approved our plan of search most unreservedly.”
“A little later,” continued the Major, “when a lucky moment of distraction hit Paganel and led him on board the yacht, the documents were shown to him and he enthusiastically approved our search plan.”
“I do not deny it,” said Paganel.
“I won't deny it,” said Paganel.
“And yet we were mistaken,” resumed the Major.
“And yet we were wrong,” the Major continued.
“Yes, we were mistaken,” returned Paganel; “but it is only human to make a mistake, while to persist in it, a man must be a fool.”
“Yes, we were wrong,” Paganel replied; “but it’s human to make a mistake, while continuing to do so just makes someone a fool.”
“Stop, Paganel, don’t excite yourself; I don’t mean to say that we should prolong our search in America.”
“Hold on, Paganel, don’t get worked up; I’m not saying we should keep searching in America.”
“What is it, then, that you want?” asked Glenarvan.
“What is it that you want?” Glenarvan asked.
“A confession, nothing more. A confession that Australia now as evidently appears to be the theater of the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA as America did before.”
“A confession, nothing more. A confession that Australia now clearly seems to be the stage of the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA just like America did before.”
“We confess it willingly,” replied Paganel.
“We admit it gladly,” replied Paganel.
“Very well, then, since that is the case, my advice is not to let your imagination rely on successive and contradictory evidence. Who knows whether after Australia some other country may not appear with equal certainty to be the place, and we may have to recommence our search?”
“Alright, then, since that's the case, my advice is not to let your imagination depend on conflicting evidence. Who knows if, after Australia, another country might emerge just as likely to be the right place, and we could end up starting our search all over again?”
Glenarvan and Paganel looked at each other silently, struck by the justice of these remarks.
Glenarvan and Paganel exchanged a silent glance, both taken aback by the truth of these comments.
“I should like you, therefore,” continued the Major, “before we actually start for Australia, to make one more examination of the documents. Here they are, and here are the charts. Let us take up each point in succession through which the 37th parallel passes, and see if we come across any other country which would agree with the precise indications of the document.”
“I'd like you, then,” the Major continued, “before we actually head to Australia, to review the documents one more time. Here they are, and here are the charts. Let's go through each point along the 37th parallel and see if we find any other country that matches the exact details in the document.”
“Nothing can be more easily and quickly done,” replied Paganel; “for countries are not very numerous in this latitude, happily.”
“Nothing could be easier or quicker,” replied Paganel; “since there aren’t many countries in this latitude, thankfully.”
“Well, look,” said the Major, displaying an English planisphere on the plan of Mercator’s Chart, and presenting the appearance of a terrestrial globe.
"Well, look," said the Major, showing an English map based on Mercator's projection, which resembled a globe of the Earth.
He placed it before Lady Helena, and then they all stood round, so as to be able to follow the argument of Paganel.
He set it in front of Lady Helena, and then they all gathered around to follow Paganel's argument.
“As I have said already,” resumed the learned geographer, “after having crossed South America, the 37th degree of latitude cuts the islands of Tristan d’Acunha. Now I maintain that none of the words of the document could relate to these islands.”
“As I mentioned before,” the knowledgeable geographer continued, “after crossing South America, the 37th degree of latitude passes through the islands of Tristan d’Acunha. I firmly believe that none of the words in the document could refer to these islands.”
The documents were examined with the most minute care, and the conclusion unanimously reached was that these islands were entirely out of the question.
The documents were examined with great attention to detail, and the conclusion everyone agreed on was that these islands were completely out of the question.
“Let us go on then,” resumed Paganel. “After leaving the Atlantic, we pass two degrees below the Cape of Good Hope, and into the Indian Ocean. Only one group of islands is found on this route, the Amsterdam Isles. Now, then, we must examine these as we did the Tristan d’Acunha group.”
“Let’s move on then,” Paganel said again. “After we leave the Atlantic, we go two degrees below the Cape of Good Hope and into the Indian Ocean. There’s only one group of islands along this route, the Amsterdam Isles. Now, we need to look at these just like we did with the Tristan d’Acunha group.”
After a close survey, the Amsterdam Isles were rejected in their turn. Not a single word, or part of a word, French, English or German, could apply to this group in the Indian Ocean.
After a thorough review, the Amsterdam Isles were ultimately dismissed. Not even a single word, or part of a word, from French, English, or German, could be associated with this group in the Indian Ocean.
“Now we come to Australia,” continued Paganel.
“Now we’re heading to Australia,” continued Paganel.
“The 37th parallel touches this continent at Cape Bernouilli, and leaves it at Twofold Bay. You will agree with me that, without straining the text, the English word STRA and the French one AUSTRAL may relate to Australia. The thing is too plain to need proof.”
“The 37th parallel crosses this continent at Cape Bernouilli and exits at Twofold Bay. You’ll agree with me that, without overthinking it, the English word STRA and the French word AUSTRAL can be connected to Australia. It’s too obvious to require proof.”
The conclusion of Paganel met with unanimous approval; every probability was in his favor.
The conclusion of Paganel was met with unanimous approval; every possibility was on his side.
“And where is the next point?” asked McNabbs.
“And where’s the next point?” asked McNabbs.
“That is easily answered. After leaving Twofold Bay, we cross an arm of the sea which extends to New Zealand. Here I must call your attention to the fact that the French word CONTIN means a continent, irrefragably. Captain Grant could not, then, have found refuge in New Zealand, which is only an island. However that may be though, examine and compare, and go over and over each word, and see if, by any possibility, they can be made to fit this new country.”
“That is an easy question to answer. After leaving Twofold Bay, we cross a stretch of sea that leads to New Zealand. Here, I need to point out that the French word CONTIN means a continent, without a doubt. Captain Grant couldn’t have found refuge in New Zealand, since it’s just an island. Still, take a look, compare, and scrutinize every word again and again to see if, by any chance, they can be applied to this new country.”
“In no way whatever,” replied John Mangles, after a minute investigation of the documents and the planisphere.
“In no way whatsoever,” replied John Mangles, after a minute examination of the documents and the map.
“No,” chimed in all the rest, and even the Major himself, “it cannot apply to New Zealand.”
“No,” everyone else chimed in, including the Major, “that can’t apply to New Zealand.”
“Now,” went on Paganel, “in all this immense space between this large island and the American coast, there is only one solitary barren little island crossed by the 37th parallel.”
“Now,” continued Paganel, “in all this vast area between this big island and the American coast, there’s only one lonely, desolate little island crossed by the 37th parallel.”
“And what is its name,” asked the Major.
“And what do you call it?” asked the Major.
“Here it is, marked in the map. It is Maria Theresa—a name of which there is not a single trace in either of the three documents.”
“Here it is, marked on the map. It’s Maria Theresa—a name that doesn’t appear at all in any of the three documents.”
“Not the slightest,” said Glenarvan.
"Not at all," said Glenarvan.
“I leave you, then, my friends, to decide whether all these probabilities, not to say certainties, are not in favor of the Australian continent.”
“I'll leave it to you, my friends, to decide whether all these possibilities, not to mention certainties, are in favor of the Australian continent.”
“Evidently,” replied the captain and all the others.
“Clearly,” replied the captain and everyone else.
“Well, then, John,” said Glenarvan, “the next question is, have you provisions and coal enough?”
“Well, then, John,” Glenarvan said, “the next question is, do you have enough food and coal?”
“Yes, your honor, I took in an ample store at Talcahuano, and, besides, we can easily replenish our stock of coal at Cape Town.”
“Yes, your honor, I loaded up on plenty of supplies in Talcahuano, and, in addition, we can easily restock our coal in Cape Town.”
“Well, then, give orders.”
"Alright, then, give orders."
“Let me make one more observation,” interrupted McNabbs.
“Let me make one more point,” interrupted McNabbs.
“Go on then.”
"Go ahead."
“Whatever likelihood of success Australia may offer us, wouldn’t it be advisable to stop a day or two at the Tristan d’Acunha Isles and the Amsterdam? They lie in our route, and would not take us the least out of the way. Then we should be able to ascertain if the BRITANNIA had left any traces of her shipwreck there?”
“Regardless of how successful Australia might be for us, wouldn’t it make sense to stop for a day or two at the Tristan d’Acunha Isles and Amsterdam? They’re on our route and wouldn’t take us off course at all. This way, we could find out if the BRITANNIA left any signs of her shipwreck there?”
“Incredulous Major!” exclaimed Paganel, “he still sticks to his idea.”
“Incredulous Major!” Paganel exclaimed, “he still holds on to his idea.”
“I stick to this any way, that I don’t want to have to retrace our steps, supposing that Australia should disappoint our sanguine hopes.”
“I believe this strongly: I don’t want to go back on our decisions, in case Australia lets down our optimistic expectations.”
“It seems to me a good precaution,” replied Glenarvan.
“It seems like a smart precaution to me,” replied Glenarvan.
“And I’m not the one to dissuade you from it,” returned Paganel; “quite the contrary.”
“And I’m not going to talk you out of it,” Paganel replied; “on the contrary.”
“Steer straight for Tristan d’Acunha.”
"Head straight for Tristan d’Acunha."
“Immediately, your Honor,” replied the captain, going on deck, while Robert and Mary Grant overwhelmed Lord Glenarvan with their grateful thanks.
“Right away, your Honor,” replied the captain, heading up to the deck, as Robert and Mary Grant showered Lord Glenarvan with their heartfelt thanks.
Shortly after, the DUNCAN had left the American coast, and was running eastward, her sharp keel rapidly cutting her way through the waves of the Atlantic Ocean.
Shortly after, the DUNCAN had left the American coast and was heading east, her sharp keel quickly slicing through the waves of the Atlantic Ocean.
CHAPTER II TRISTAN D’ACUNHA AND THE ISLE OF AMSTERDAM
IF the yacht had followed the line of the equator, the 196 degrees which separate Australia from America, or, more correctly, Cape Bernouilli from Cape Corrientes, would have been equal to 11,760 geographical miles; but along the 37th parallel these same degrees, owing to the form of the earth, only represent 9,480 miles. From the American coast to Tristan d’Acunha is reckoned 2,100 miles—a distance which John Mangles hoped to clear in ten days, if east winds did not retard the motion of the yacht. But he was not long uneasy on that score, for toward evening the breeze sensibly lulled and then changed altogether, giving the DUNCAN a fair field on a calm sea for displaying her incomparable qualities as a sailor.
IF the yacht had sailed along the equator, the 196 degrees that separate Australia from America, or more precisely, Cape Bernouilli from Cape Corrientes, would equal 11,760 geographic miles; however, along the 37th parallel, these same degrees, due to the shape of the earth, only represent 9,480 miles. The distance from the American coast to Tristan d’Acunha is estimated at 2,100 miles—a distance that John Mangles hoped to cover in ten days, provided east winds didn’t slow the yacht down. But he wasn’t worried about that for long, as by evening the breeze noticeably eased and then completely shifted, giving the DUNCAN a clear path on a calm sea to showcase her exceptional sailing abilities.
The passengers had fallen back into their ordinary ship life, and it hardly seemed as if they really could have been absent a whole month. Instead of the Pacific, the Atlantic stretched itself out before them, and there was scarcely a shade of difference in the waves of the two oceans. The elements, after having handled them so roughly, seemed now disposed to favor them to the utmost. The sea was tranquil, and the wind kept in the right quarter, so that the yacht could spread all her canvas, and lend its aid, if needed to the indefatigable steam stored up in the boiler.
The passengers had slipped back into their usual routine on the ship, and it hardly felt like they had been away for an entire month. Instead of the Pacific, the Atlantic lay before them, and there was barely any noticeable difference in the waves of the two oceans. After treating them so harshly, the elements now seemed ready to support them fully. The sea was calm, and the wind was blowing just right, allowing the yacht to unfurl all its sails and help out, if necessary, with the hard-working steam stored in the boiler.
Under such conditions, the voyage was safely and rapidly accomplished. Their confidence increased as they found themselves nearer the Australian coast. They began to talk of Captain Grant as if the yacht were going to take him on board at a given port. His cabin was got ready, and berths for the men. This cabin was next to the famous number six, which Paganel had taken possession of instead of the one he had booked on the SCOTIA. It had been till now occupied by M. Olbinett, who vacated it for the expected guest. Mary took great delight in arranging it with her own hands, and adorning it for the reception of the loved inmate.
Under these circumstances, the journey was completed quickly and safely. Their confidence grew as they got closer to the Australian coast. They began to discuss Captain Grant as if the yacht were about to pick him up at a specific port. His cabin was prepared, along with sleeping arrangements for the crew. This cabin was adjacent to the famous number six, which Paganel had taken over instead of the one he had originally booked on the SCOTIA. Until now, it had been occupied by M. Olbinett, who moved out for the anticipated guest. Mary took great pleasure in arranging it herself, decorating it for the arrival of the beloved occupant.
The learned geographer kept himself closely shut up. He was working away from morning till night at a work entitled “Sublime Impressions of a Geographer in the Argentine Pampas,” and they could hear him repeating elegant periods aloud before committing them to the white pages of his day-book; and more than once, unfaithful to Clio, the muse of history, he invoked in his transports the divine Calliope, the muse of epic poetry.
The knowledgeable geographer kept himself locked away. He was working from morning till night on a piece called “Sublime Impressions of a Geographer in the Argentine Pampas,” and they could hear him reciting elegant phrases out loud before writing them down in his notebook. More than once, being unfaithful to Clio, the muse of history, he called upon the divine Calliope, the muse of epic poetry, in his fits of inspiration.
Paganel made no secret of it either. The chaste daughters of Apollo willingly left the slopes of Helicon and Parnassus at his call. Lady Helena paid him sincere compliments on his mythological visitants, and so did the Major, though he could not forbear adding:
Paganel was open about it too. The pure daughters of Apollo eagerly left the hills of Helicon and Parnassus when he summoned them. Lady Helena genuinely praised him for his mythological guests, and the Major did as well, although he couldn't help adding:
“But mind no fits of absence of mind, my dear Paganel; and if you take a fancy to learn Australian, don’t go and study it in a Chinese grammar.”
“But be careful not to zone out, my dear Paganel; and if you want to learn Australian, don’t study it using a Chinese grammar.”
Things went on perfectly smoothly on board. Lady Helena and Lord Glenarvan found leisure to watch John Mangles’ growing attachment to Mary Grant. There was nothing to be said against it, and, indeed, since John remained silent, it was best to take no notice of it.
Things went perfectly smoothly on board. Lady Helena and Lord Glenarvan took the time to observe John Mangles’ increasing affection for Mary Grant. There was nothing wrong with it, and since John stayed quiet about it, it was better to just ignore it.
“What will Captain Grant think?” Lord Glenarvan asked his wife one day.
“What will Captain Grant think?” Lord Glenarvan asked his wife one day.
“He’ll think John is worthy of Mary, my dear Edward, and he’ll think right.”
“He’ll think John is good enough for Mary, my dear Edward, and he’ll be right.”
Meanwhile, the yacht was making rapid progress. Five days after losing sight of Cape Corrientes, on the 16th of November, they fell in with fine westerly breezes, and the DUNCAN might almost have dispensed with her screw altogether, for she flew over the water like a bird, spreading all her sails to catch the breeze, as if she were running a race with the Royal Thames Club yachts.
Meanwhile, the yacht was moving quickly. Five days after losing sight of Cape Corrientes, on November 16th, they encountered nice westerly winds, and the DUNCAN could have almost done without its engine, as it sped over the water like a bird, unfurling all its sails to catch the breeze, almost as if it were racing against the Royal Thames Club yachts.
Next day, the ocean appeared covered with immense seaweeds, looking like a great pond choked up with the DEBRIS of trees and plants torn off the neighboring continents. Commander Murray had specially pointed them out to the attention of navigators. The DUNCAN appeared to glide over a long prairie, which Paganel justly compared to the Pampas, and her speed slackened a little.
The next day, the ocean looked like it was covered with massive seaweed, resembling a huge pond filled with debris from trees and plants ripped away from nearby continents. Commander Murray had specifically highlighted this for the navigators. The DUNCAN seemed to glide over a vast prairie, which Paganel accurately likened to the Pampas, causing her speed to slow down a bit.
Twenty-four hours after, at break of day, the man on the look-out was heard calling out, “Land ahead!”
Twenty-four hours later, at dawn, the lookout was heard shouting, “Land ahead!”
“In what direction?” asked Tom Austin, who was on watch.
“In what direction?” asked Tom Austin, who was on watch.
“Leeward!” was the reply.
"Leeward!" was the response.
This exciting cry brought everyone speedily on deck. Soon a telescope made its appearance, followed by Jacques Paganel. The learned geographer pointed the instrument in the direction indicated, but could see nothing that resembled land.
This thrilling shout quickly got everyone on deck. Before long, a telescope showed up, along with Jacques Paganel. The knowledgeable geographer aimed the instrument where indicated, but couldn't spot anything that looked like land.
“Look in the clouds,” said John Mangles.
“Look at the clouds,” said John Mangles.
“Ah, now I do see a sort of peak, but very indistinctly.”
“Ah, now I can see some kind of peak, but it's very unclear.”
“It is Tristan d’Acunha,” replied John Mangles.
“It’s Tristan da Cunha,” replied John Mangles.
“Then, if my memory serves me right, we must be eighty miles from it, for the peak of Tristan, seven thousand feet high, is visible at that distance.”
“Then, if I remember correctly, we must be eighty miles from it, because the peak of Tristan, which is seven thousand feet high, can be seen at that distance.”
“That’s it, precisely.”
“Exactly that.”
Some hours later, the sharp, lofty crags of the group of islands stood out clearly on the horizon. The conical peak of Tristan looked black against the bright sky, which seemed all ablaze with the splendor of the rising sun. Soon the principal island stood out from the rocky mass, at the summit of a triangle inclining toward the northeast.
Some hours later, the tall, jagged cliffs of the group of islands were clearly visible on the horizon. The cone-shaped peak of Tristan looked dark against the vibrant sky, which was lit up by the brilliance of the rising sun. Soon, the main island emerged from the rocky formation, forming the top of a triangle that slanted towards the northeast.
Tristan d’Acunha is situated in 37 degrees 8’ of southern latitude, and 10 degrees 44’ of longitude west of the meridian at Greenwich. Inaccessible Island is eighteen miles to the southwest and Nightingale Island is ten miles to the southeast, and this completes the little solitary group of islets in the Atlantic Ocean. Toward noon, the two principal landmarks, by which the group is recognized were sighted, and at 3 P. M. the DUNCAN entered Falmouth Bay in Tristan d’Acunha.
Tristan da Cunha is located at 37 degrees 8’ south latitude and 10 degrees 44’ west longitude, west of the Greenwich meridian. Inaccessible Island is eighteen miles to the southwest, and Nightingale Island is ten miles to the southeast, which completes this small, isolated group of islands in the Atlantic Ocean. Around noon, the two main landmarks that identify the group were spotted, and at 3 PM, the DUNCAN entered Falmouth Bay in Tristan da Cunha.
Several whaling vessels were lying quietly at anchor there, for the coast abounds in seals and other marine animals.
Several whaling ships were anchored there, as the coastline is full of seals and other sea animals.
John Mangle’s first care was to find good anchorage, and then all the passengers, both ladies and gentlemen, got into the long boat and were rowed ashore. They stepped out on a beach covered with fine black sand, the impalpable DEBRIS of the calcined rocks of the island.
John Mangle’s first priority was to find a good place to anchor, and then all the passengers, both ladies and gentlemen, got into the longboat and were rowed ashore. They stepped out onto a beach covered with fine black sand, the fine REMNANTS of the burned rocks of the island.
Tristan d’Acunha is the capital of the group, and consists of a little village, lying in the heart of the bay, and watered by a noisy, rapid stream. It contained about fifty houses, tolerably clean, and disposed with geometrical regularity. Behind this miniature town there lay 1,500 hectares of meadow land, bounded by an embankment of lava. Above this embankment, the conical peak rose 7,000 feet high.
Tristan d’Acunha is the capital of the group and consists of a small village situated at the center of the bay, with a fast-flowing, noisy stream running through it. It has around fifty fairly clean houses arranged in a geometric pattern. Behind this tiny town lies 1,500 hectares of meadowland, bordered by a lava embankment. Above this embankment, a conical peak rises to 7,000 feet.
Lord Glenarvan was received by a governor supplied from the English colony at the Cape. He inquired at once respecting Harry Grant and the BRITANNIA, and found the names entirely unknown. The Tristan d’Acunha Isles are out of the route of ships, and consequently little frequented. Since the wreck of the Blendon Hall in 1821, on the rocks of Inaccessible Island, two vessels have stranded on the chief island—the PRIMANGUET in 1845, and the three-mast American, PHILADELPHIA, in 1857. These three events comprise the whole catalogue of maritime disasters in the annals of the Acunhas.
Lord Glenarvan was met by a governor sent from the English colony at the Cape. He immediately asked about Harry Grant and the BRITANNIA, but found that the names were completely unknown. The Tristan da Cunha Islands are off the shipping route, so they aren't visited much. Since the wreck of the Blendon Hall in 1821 on the rocks of Inaccessible Island, two ships have run aground on the main island—the PRIMANGUET in 1845 and the three-masted American ship, PHILADELPHIA, in 1857. These three incidents make up the entire list of maritime disasters in the history of the Acunhas.
Lord Glenarvan did not expect to glean any information, and only asked by the way of duty. He even sent the boats to make the circuit of the island, the entire extent of which was not more than seventeen miles at most.
Lord Glenarvan didn’t expect to get any information and only asked out of obligation. He even sent the boats to circle the island, which was no more than seventeen miles long at most.
In the interim the passengers walked about the village. The population does not exceed 150 inhabitants, and consists of English and Americans, married to negroes and Cape Hottentots, who might bear away the palm for ugliness. The children of these heterogeneous households are very disagreeable compounds of Saxon stiffness and African blackness.
In the meantime, the passengers strolled around the village. The population doesn’t exceed 150 residents and consists of English and Americans, married to Black people and Cape Hottentots, who might win the award for ugliness. The children from these mixed families are quite unpleasant blends of Saxon rigidity and African features.
It was nearly nightfall before the party returned to the yacht, chattering and admiring the natural riches displayed on all sides, for even close to the streets of the capital, fields of wheat and maize were waving, and crops of vegetables, imported forty years before; and in the environs of the village, herds of cattle and sheep were feeding.
It was almost dark when the group got back to the yacht, chatting and admiring the natural beauty all around them. Even near the busy streets of the capital, fields of wheat and corn were swaying, and vegetable crops, brought in forty years earlier, were flourishing. In the outskirts of the village, herds of cattle and sheep were grazing.
The boats returned to the DUNCAN about the same time as Lord Glenarvan. They had made the circuit of the entire island in a few hours, but without coming across the least trace of the BRITANNIA. The only result of this voyage of circumnavigation was to strike out the name of Isle Tristan from the program of search.
The boats arrived back at the DUNCAN around the same time as Lord Glenarvan. They had traveled around the whole island in a few hours but didn't find any sign of the BRITANNIA. The only outcome of this journey was to remove Isle Tristan from the search plan.
CHAPTER III CAPE TOWN AND M. VIOT
As John Mangles intended to put in at the Cape of Good Hope for coals, he was obliged to deviate a little from the 37th parallel, and go two degrees north. In less than six days he cleared the thirteen hundred miles which separate the point of Africa from Tristan d’Acunha, and on the 24th of November, at 3 P. M. the Table Mountain was sighted. At eight o’clock they entered the bay, and cast anchor in the port of Cape Town. They sailed away next morning at daybreak.
As John Mangles planned to stop at the Cape of Good Hope for coal, he had to slightly adjust his course from the 37th parallel and head two degrees north. In less than six days, he covered the thirteen hundred miles that separate the tip of Africa from Tristan d’Acunha, and on November 24th, at 3 PM, they spotted Table Mountain. By 8 o’clock, they had entered the bay and dropped anchor in the port of Cape Town. They set sail again the next morning at daybreak.
Between the Cape and Amsterdam Island there is a distance of 2,900 miles, but with a good sea and favoring breeze, this was only a ten day’s voyage. The elements were now no longer at war with the travelers, as on their journey across the Pampas—air and water seemed in league to help them forward.
Between Cape and Amsterdam Island, there’s a distance of 2,900 miles, but with decent seas and a favorable breeze, this was just a ten-day voyage. The elements were no longer at odds with the travelers, as they had been on their journey across the Pampas—air and water seemed to be working together to help them along.
“Ah! the sea! the sea!” exclaimed Paganel, “it is the field par excellence for the exercise of human energies, and the ship is the true vehicle of civilization. Think, my friends, if the globe had been only an immense continent, the thousandth part of it would still be unknown to us, even in this nineteenth century. See how it is in the interior of great countries. In the steppes of Siberia, in the plains of Central Asia, in the deserts of Africa, in the prairies of America, in the immense wilds of Australia, in the icy solitudes of the Poles, man scarcely dares to venture; the most daring shrinks back, the most courageous succumbs. They cannot penetrate them; the means of transport are insufficient, and the heat and disease, and savage disposition of the natives, are impassable obstacles. Twenty miles of desert separate men more than five hundred miles of ocean.”
“Ah! the sea! the sea!” Paganel exclaimed. “It’s the ultimate playground for human energy, and the ship is the real vehicle of civilization. Just think, my friends, if the globe were just one massive continent, a tiny fraction of it would still be unknown to us, even in this nineteenth century. Look at what's happening in the interiors of vast countries. In the Siberian steppes, the plains of Central Asia, the deserts of Africa, the prairies of America, the huge wilds of Australia, and the icy solitude of the Poles, people barely dare to explore; even the bravest turn back, and the most courageous fall short. They can't get through; the transportation options aren't enough, and the heat, disease, and aggressive nature of the locals are impossible barriers. Twenty miles of desert keep people further apart than five hundred miles of ocean.”
Paganel spoke with such warmth that even the Major had nothing to say against this panegyric of the ocean. Indeed, if the finding of Harry Grant had involved following a parallel across continents instead of oceans, the enterprise could not have been attempted; but the sea was there ready to carry the travelers from one country to another, and on the 6th of December, at the first streak of day, they saw a fresh mountain apparently emerging from the bosom of the waves.
Paganel spoke so passionately that even the Major couldn't argue against his praise for the ocean. In fact, if finding Harry Grant had meant traveling across land instead of water, they wouldn’t have been able to undertake the journey; but the sea was there, ready to take them from one country to another. On December 6th, at the first light of day, they saw a new mountain seemingly rising from the depths of the waves.
This was Amsterdam Island, situated in 37 degrees 47 minutes latitude and 77 degrees 24 minutes longitude, the high cone of which in clear weather is visible fifty miles off. At eight o’clock, its form, indistinct though it still was, seemed almost a reproduction of Teneriffe.
This was Amsterdam Island, located at 37 degrees 47 minutes latitude and 77 degrees 24 minutes longitude. Its tall peak is visible from fifty miles away on a clear day. At eight o’clock, the island, although still somewhat unclear, looked almost like a smaller version of Teneriffe.
“And consequently it must resemble Tristan d’Acunha,” observed Glenarvan.
“And so it has to resemble Tristan d’Acunha,” Glenarvan noted.
“A very wise conclusion,” said Paganel, “according to the geometrographic axiom that two islands resembling a third must have a common likeness. I will only add that, like Tristan d’Acunha, Amsterdam Island is equally rich in seals and Robinsons.”
“A very wise conclusion,” said Paganel, “according to the geometrographic principle that if two islands resemble a third, they must share some common characteristics. I would just add that, like Tristan da Cunha, Amsterdam Island is just as abundant in seals and people living like Robinson Crusoe.”
“There are Robinsons everywhere, then?” said Lady Helena.
“There are Robinsons everywhere, then?” Lady Helena said.
“Indeed, Madam,” replied Paganel, “I know few islands without some tale of the kind appertaining to them, and the romance of your immortal countryman, Daniel Defoe, has been often enough realized before his day.”
“Absolutely, ma'am,” replied Paganel, “I know very few islands that don't have some story connected to them, and the adventure of your legendary compatriot, Daniel Defoe, has often been brought to life even before his time.”
“Monsieur Paganel,” said Mary, “may I ask you a question?”
“Monsieur Paganel,” Mary said, “can I ask you a question?”
“Two if you like, my dear young lady, and I promise to answer them.”
"Two if you'd like, my dear young lady, and I promise to answer them."
“Well, then, I want to know if you would be very much frightened at the idea of being cast away alone on a desert island.”
“Well, then, I want to know if the thought of being stranded alone on a deserted island would really scare you.”
“I?” exclaimed Paganel.
"I?" Paganel exclaimed.
“Come now, my good fellow,” said the Major, “don’t go and tell us that it is your most cherished desire.”
“Come on, my good man,” said the Major, “don’t tell us that it’s your biggest wish.”
“I don’t pretend it is that, but still, after all, such an adventure would not be very unpleasant to me. I should begin a new life; I should hunt and fish; I should choose a grotto for my domicile in Winter and a tree in Summer. I should make storehouses for my harvests: in one word, I should colonize my island.”
“I don't pretend that it is, but still, after all, such an adventure wouldn’t be very unpleasant to me. I would start a new life; I would hunt and fish; I would pick a cave to live in during Winter and a tree in Summer. I would build storage for my harvests: in short, I would colonize my island.”
“All by yourself?”
“Are you all alone?”
“All by myself if I was obliged. Besides, are we ever obliged? Cannot one find friends among the animals, and choose some tame kid or eloquent parrot or amiable monkey? And if a lucky chance should send one a companion like the faithful Friday, what more is needed? Two friends on a rock, there is happiness. Suppose now, the Major and I—”
“All by myself if I had to. Besides, are we ever really obligated? Can't we find friends among animals and pick a friendly goat, a talkative parrot, or a nice monkey? And if by some lucky chance, one finds a companion like the loyal Friday, what more do you need? Two friends on a rock, that’s happiness. Now suppose the Major and I—”
“Thank you,” replied the Major, interrupting him; “I have no inclination in that line, and should make a very poor Robinson Crusoe.”
“Thanks,” the Major replied, interrupting him. “I have no interest in that, and I’d be a terrible Robinson Crusoe.”
“My dear Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena, “you are letting your imagination run away with you, as usual. But the dream is very different from the reality. You are thinking of an imaginary Robinson’s life, thrown on a picked island and treated like a spoiled child by nature. You only see the sunny side.”
“My dear Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena, “you’re letting your imagination get the best of you, as usual. But the dream is very different from reality. You’re thinking of an imaginary life like Robinson Crusoe’s, stranded on a perfect island and spoiled by nature. You’re only seeing the bright side.”
“What, madam! You don’t believe a man could be happy on a desert island?”
“What, ma'am! You don’t think a guy could be happy on a deserted island?”
“I do not. Man is made for society and not for solitude, and solitude can only engender despair. It is a question of time. At the outset it is quite possible that material wants and the very necessities of existence may engross the poor shipwrecked fellow, just snatched from the waves; but afterward, when he feels himself alone, far from his fellow men, without any hope of seeing country and friends again, what must he think, what must he suffer? His little island is all his world. The whole human race is shut up in himself, and when death comes, which utter loneliness will make terrible, he will be like the last man on the last day of the world. Believe me, Monsieur Paganel, such a man is not to be envied.”
“I don't. Man is meant for society, not for solitude, and being alone can only lead to despair. It’s just a matter of time. At first, it’s quite possible that the immediate needs for survival may occupy the poor shipwrecked person, just pulled from the waves; but later, when he realizes he’s alone, far from others, with no hope of seeing his homeland or friends again, what must he think, what must he endure? His little island becomes his entire world. Humanity is contained within him, and when death arrives, which that extreme loneliness will make terrifying, he’ll be like the last person on the final day of the world. Believe me, Monsieur Paganel, such a person isn't to be envied.”
Paganel gave in, though regretfully, to the arguments of Lady Helena, and still kept up a discussion on the advantages and disadvantages of Isolation, till the very moment the DUNCAN dropped anchor about a mile off Amsterdam Island.
Paganel reluctantly agreed to Lady Helena's arguments and continued discussing the pros and cons of isolation right up to the moment the DUNCAN dropped anchor about a mile from Amsterdam Island.
This lonely group in the Indian Ocean consists of two distinct islands, thirty-three miles apart, and situated exactly on the meridian of the Indian peninsula. To the north is Amsterdam Island, and to the south St. Paul; but they have been often confounded by geographers and navigators.
This isolated group in the Indian Ocean consists of two separate islands, thirty-three miles apart, and located directly on the meridian of the Indian peninsula. To the north is Amsterdam Island, and to the south is St. Paul; however, they have often been confused by geographers and navigators.
At the time of the DUNCAN’S visit to the island, the population consisted of three people, a Frenchman and two mulattoes, all three employed by the merchant proprietor. Paganel was delighted to shake hands with a countryman in the person of good old Monsieur Viot. He was far advanced in years, but did the honors of the place with much politeness. It was a happy day for him when these kindly strangers touched at his island, for St. Peter’s was only frequented by seal-fishers, and now and then a whaler, the crews of which are usually rough, coarse men.
At the time of DUNCAN'S visit to the island, the population included three people: a Frenchman and two mixed-race individuals, all employed by the merchant who owned the place. Paganel was thrilled to shake hands with a fellow countryman, the elderly Monsieur Viot. Although he was quite old, he welcomed visitors to the island with great politeness. It was a joyful day for him when these friendly strangers arrived, since St. Peter's was mostly visited by seal hunters and occasionally whalers, whose crews tended to be tough, rugged men.
M. Viot presented his subjects, the two mulattoes. They composed the whole living population of the island, except a few wild boars in the interior and myriads of penguins. The little house where the three solitary men lived was in the heart of a natural bay on the southeast, formed by the crumbling away of a portion of the mountain.
M. Viot introduced his subjects, the two mulattoes. They made up the entire living population of the island, apart from a few wild boars in the interior and countless penguins. The small house where the three isolated men lived was located in the center of a natural bay on the southeast, created by the erosion of a section of the mountain.
Twice over in the early part of the century, Amsterdam Island became the country of deserted sailors, providentially saved from misery and death; but since these events no vessel had been lost on its coast. Had any shipwreck occurred, some fragments must have been thrown on the sandy shore, and any poor sufferers from it would have found their way to M. Viot’s fishing-huts. The old man had been long on the island, and had never been called upon to exercise such hospitality. Of the BRITANNIA and Captain Grant he knew nothing, but he was certain that the disaster had not happened on Amsterdam Island, nor on the islet called St. Paul, for whalers and fishing-vessels went there constantly, and must have heard of it.
Twice in the early part of the century, Amsterdam Island became a refuge for stranded sailors, miraculously saved from misery and death; however, since those incidents, no ship had been lost along its coast. If any shipwreck had occurred, some debris would have washed up on the sandy shore, and any unfortunate survivors would have made their way to M. Viot’s fishing huts. The old man had been on the island for a long time and had never had to offer such hospitality. He knew nothing of the BRITANNIA or Captain Grant, but he was sure that the disaster didn’t happen on Amsterdam Island or on the islet called St. Paul, because whalers and fishing boats visited there regularly and would have reported it.
Glenarvan was neither surprised nor vexed at the reply; indeed, his object in asking was rather to establish the fact that Captain Grant had not been there than that he had. This done, they were ready to proceed on their voyage next day.
Glenarvan was neither surprised nor annoyed by the reply; in fact, his goal in asking was more to confirm that Captain Grant hadn’t been there rather than that he had. With that settled, they were ready to continue their voyage the next day.
They rambled about the island till evening, as its appearance was very inviting. Its FAUNA and FLORA, however, were poor in the extreme. The only specimens of quadrupeds, birds, fish and cetacea were a few wild boars, stormy petrels, albatrosses, perch and seals. Here and there thermal springs and chalybeate waters escaped from the black lava, and thin dark vapors rose above the volcanic soil. Some of these springs were very hot. John Mangles held his thermometer in one of them, and found the temperature was 176 degrees Fahrenheit. Fish caught in the sea a few yards off, cooked in five minutes in these all but boiling waters, a fact which made Paganel resolve not to attempt to bathe in them.
They wandered around the island until evening, as it looked very appealing. However, its wildlife and plants were extremely lacking. The only animals they found were a few wild boars, stormy petrels, albatrosses, perch, and seals. Here and there, thermal springs and iron-rich water bubbled up from the black lava, and thin dark vapors rose above the volcanic soil. Some of these springs were very hot. John Mangles checked the temperature of one of them with his thermometer and found it was 176 degrees Fahrenheit. Fish caught in the sea just a few yards away cooked in five minutes in these nearly boiling waters, which led Paganel to decide against trying to bathe in them.
Toward evening, after a long promenade, Glenarvan and his party bade adieu to the good old M. Viot, and returned to the yacht, wishing him all the happiness possible on his desert island, and receiving in return the old man’s blessing on their expedition.
Toward evening, after a long walk, Glenarvan and his group said goodbye to the good old M. Viot and headed back to the yacht, wishing him all the happiness in the world on his desert island, and in return, receiving the old man’s blessing on their journey.
CHAPTER IV A WAGER AND HOW DECIDED
ON the 7th of December, at three A. M., the DUNCAN lay puffing out her smoke in the little harbor ready to start, and a few minutes afterward the anchor was lifted, and the screw set in motion. By eight o’clock, when the passengers came on deck, the Amsterdam Island had almost disappeared from view behind the mists of the horizon. This was the last halting-place on the route, and nothing now was between them and the Australian coast but three thousand miles’ distance. Should the west wind continue but a dozen days longer, and the sea remain favorable, the yacht would have reached the end of her voyage.
On December 7th, at 3 AM, the DUNCAN was puffing out smoke in the small harbor, ready to depart. A few minutes later, the anchor was lifted, and the screw began to turn. By 8 o'clock, when the passengers came on deck, Amsterdam Island had nearly vanished from sight behind the misty horizon. This was the last stop on their journey, and now there was nothing but three thousand miles of ocean between them and the Australian coast. If the west wind held for just twelve more days and the sea stayed calm, the yacht would reach the end of her voyage.
Mary Grant and her brother could not gaze without emotion at the waves through which the DUNCAN was speeding her course, when they thought that these very same waves must have dashed against the prow of the BRITANNIA but a few days before her shipwreck. Here, perhaps, Captain Grant, with a disabled ship and diminished crew, had struggled against the tremendous hurricanes of the Indian Ocean, and felt himself driven toward the coast with irresistible force. The Captain pointed out to Mary the different currents on the ship’s chart, and explained to her their constant direction. Among others there was one running straight to the Australian continent, and its action is equally felt in the Atlantic and Pacific. It was doubtless against this that the BRITANNIA, dismasted and rudderless, had been unable to contend, and consequently been dashed against the coast, and broken in pieces.
Mary Grant and her brother couldn't help but feel emotional as they looked at the waves through which the DUNCAN was speeding along, especially knowing that these same waves must have crashed against the side of the BRITANNIA just a few days before it sank. Here, perhaps, Captain Grant, with a damaged ship and a smaller crew, had fought against the fierce storms of the Indian Ocean and felt himself being pushed toward the coast with overwhelming force. The Captain showed Mary the different currents on the ship’s chart and explained their consistent direction. Among them was one flowing straight toward the Australian continent, and its influence is felt in both the Atlantic and Pacific. It was likely against this current that the BRITANNIA, without sails and a rudder, had been unable to fight back, leading to it being smashed against the coast and breaking apart.
A difficulty about this, however, presented itself. The last intelligence of Captain Grant was from Callao on the 30th of May, 1862, as appeared in the Mercantile and Shipping Gazette. “How then was it possible that on the 7th of June, only eight days after leaving the shores of Peru, that the BRITANNIA could have found herself in the Indian Ocean?” But to this, Paganel, who was consulted on the subject, found a very plausible solution.
A problem arose regarding this. The last news about Captain Grant was from Callao on May 30, 1862, as reported in the Mercantile and Shipping Gazette. “How could it be possible that on June 7, just eight days after leaving the shores of Peru, the BRITANNIA was already in the Indian Ocean?” However, Paganel, who was asked about it, came up with a very reasonable explanation.
It was one evening, about six days after their leaving Amsterdam Island, when they were all chatting together on the poop, that the above-named difficulty was stated by Glenarvan. Paganel made no reply, but went and fetched the document. After perusing it, he still remained silent, simply shrugging his shoulders, as if ashamed of troubling himself about such a trifle.
It was one evening, about six days after they left Amsterdam Island, when they were all chatting together on the deck, that Glenarvan brought up the difficulty mentioned above. Paganel didn't respond but went to get the document. After reading it, he stayed quiet, just shrugging his shoulders, as if he was embarrassed to be concerned about such a small issue.
“Come, my good friend,” said Glenarvan, “at least give us an answer.”
“Come on, my good friend,” said Glenarvan, “at least give us an answer.”
“No,” replied Paganel, “I’ll merely ask a question for Captain John to answer.”
“No,” replied Paganel, “I’ll just ask a question for Captain John to answer.”
“And what is it, Monsieur Paganel?” said John Mangles.
“And what is it, Mr. Paganel?” John Mangles asked.
“Could a quick ship make the distance in a month over that part of the Pacific Ocean which lies between America and Australia?”
“Could a fast ship cover the distance in a month across that part of the Pacific Ocean between America and Australia?”
“Yes, by making two hundred miles in twenty-four hours.”
“Yes, by traveling two hundred miles in twenty-four hours.”
“Would that be an extraordinary rate of speed?”
“Would that be an incredible speed?”
“Not at all; sailing clippers often go faster.”
“Not at all; sailing clippers can often go faster.”
“Well, then, instead of ‘7 June’ on this document, suppose that one figure has been destroyed by the sea-water, and read ‘17 June’ or ‘27 June,’ and all is explained.”
"Well, instead of '7 June' on this document, let's say that one number got damaged by the seawater, and it actually reads '17 June' or '27 June,' and that explains everything."
“That’s to say,” replied Lady Helena, “that between the 31st of May and the 27th of June—”
"To put it another way," Lady Helena replied, "between May 31st and June 27th—"
“Captain Grant could have crossed the Pacific and found himself in the Indian Ocean.”
“Captain Grant could have crossed the Pacific and ended up in the Indian Ocean.”
Paganel’s theory met with universal acceptance.
Paganel’s theory was widely accepted.
“That’s one more point cleared up,” said Glenarvan. “Thanks to our friend, all that remains to be done now is to get to Australia, and look out for traces of the wreck on the western coast.”
"That clears up one more point," said Glenarvan. "Thanks to our friend, all that's left to do now is get to Australia and search for traces of the wreck on the western coast."
“Or the eastern?” said John Mangles.
“Or the eastern?” John Mangles asked.
“Indeed, John, you may be right, for there is nothing in the document to indicate which shore was the scene of the catastrophe, and both points of the continent crossed by the 37th parallel, must, therefore, be explored.”
"You're right, John. There's nothing in the document that shows which shore the disaster happened on, so we have to check both locations along the 37th parallel."
“Then, my Lord, it is doubtful, after all,” said Mary.
“Then, my Lord, it’s uncertain, after all,” said Mary.
“Oh no, Miss Mary,” John Mangles hastened to reply, seeing the young girl’s apprehension. “His Lordship will please to consider that if Captain Grant had gained the shore on the east of Australia, he would almost immediately have found refuge and assistance. The whole of that coast is English, we might say, peopled with colonists. The crew of the BRITANNIA could not have gone ten miles without meeting a fellow-countryman.”
“Oh no, Miss Mary,” John Mangles quickly replied, noticing the young girl’s concern. “His Lordship should keep in mind that if Captain Grant had landed on the eastern coast of Australia, he would have soon found safety and help. Almost the entire coast is English, with settlers living there. The crew of the BRITANNIA couldn’t have traveled ten miles without coming across someone from their own country.”
“I am quite of your opinion, Captain John,” said Paganel. “On the eastern coast Harry Grant would not only have found an English colony easily, but he would certainly have met with some means of transport back to Europe.”
“I totally agree with you, Captain John,” said Paganel. “On the eastern coast, Harry Grant would not only have easily found an English colony, but he would definitely have encountered some way to get back to Europe.”
“And he would not have found the same resources on the side we are making for?” asked Lady Helena.
“And he wouldn’t have found the same resources on the side we’re working on?” asked Lady Helena.
“No, madam,” replied Paganel; “it is a desert coast, with no communication between it and Melbourne or Adelaide. If the BRITANNIA was wrecked on those rocky shores, she was as much cut off from all chance of help as if she had been lost on the inhospitable shores of Africa.”
“No, ma'am,” Paganel replied. “It's a deserted coast, with no way to communicate with Melbourne or Adelaide. If the BRITANNIA was wrecked on those rocky shores, she was just as cut off from any chance of help as if she had been lost on the harsh shores of Africa.”
“But what has become of my father there, then, all these two years?” asked Mary Grant.
“But what has happened to my father over there, then, all these two years?” asked Mary Grant.
“My dear Mary,” replied Paganel, “you have not the least doubt, have you, that Captain Grant reached the Australian continent after his shipwreck?”
“My dear Mary,” replied Paganel, “you don’t doubt at all, do you, that Captain Grant made it to the Australian continent after his shipwreck?”
“No, Monsieur Paganel.”
"No, Mr. Paganel."
“Well, granting that, what became of him? The suppositions we might make are not numerous. They are confined to three. Either Harry Grant and his companions have found their way to the English colonies, or they have fallen into the hands of the natives, or they are lost in the immense wilds of Australia.”
“Well, if that's the case, what happened to him? The possibilities we can consider aren't many. They're limited to three. Either Harry Grant and his friends have made it to the English colonies, or they've been captured by the locals, or they're lost in the vast wilderness of Australia.”
“Go on, Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, as the learned Frenchman made a pause.
“Go ahead, Paganel,” said Lord Glenarvan, as the knowledgeable Frenchman took a break.
“The first hypothesis I reject, then, to begin with, for Harry Grant could not have reached the English colonies, or long ago he would have been back with his children in the good town of Dundee.”
“The first hypothesis I reject, then, to begin with, is that Harry Grant could not have reached the English colonies, or else he would have returned long ago to his children in the nice town of Dundee.”
“Poor father,” murmured Mary, “away from us for two whole years.”
“Poor dad,” murmured Mary, “away from us for two whole years.”
“Hush, Mary,” said Robert, “Monsieur Paganel will tell us.”
“Hush, Mary,” Robert said, “Monsieur Paganel will tell us.”
“Alas! my boy, I cannot. All that I affirm is, that Captain Grant is in the hands of the natives.”
“Unfortunately, my boy, I can’t. All I can say is that Captain Grant is in the hands of the locals.”
“But these natives,” said Lady Helena, hastily, “are they—”
“But these locals,” said Lady Helena quickly, “are they—”
“Reassure yourself, madam,” said Paganel, divining her thoughts. “The aborigines of Australia are low enough in the scale of human intelligence, and most degraded and uncivilized, but they are mild and gentle in disposition, and not sanguinary like their New Zealand neighbors. Though they may be prisoners, their lives have never been threatened, you may be sure. All travelers are unanimous in declaring that the Australian natives abhor shedding blood, and many a time they have found in them faithful allies in repelling the attacks of evil-disposed convicts far more cruelly inclined.”
“Don't worry, ma'am,” Paganel said, sensing her thoughts. “The native people of Australia rank low on the scale of human intelligence, and they are quite primitive and uncivilized, but they are gentle and mild-mannered, unlike their more violent neighbors in New Zealand. Even though they may be captives, their lives have never been in danger, I assure you. All travelers agree that the Australian natives hate spilling blood, and many times, they have been reliable allies in fighting off attacks from convicts who are much more cruel.”
“You hear what Monsieur Paganel tells us, Mary,” said Lady Helena turning to the young girl. “If your father is in the hands of the natives, which seems probable from the document, we shall find him.”
“You hear what Monsieur Paganel is saying, Mary,” Lady Helena said, turning to the young girl. “If your father is with the natives, which seems likely based on the document, we will find him.”
“And what if he is lost in that immense country?” asked Mary.
“And what if he’s lost in that huge country?” asked Mary.
“Well, we’ll find him still,” exclaimed Paganel, in a confident tone. “Won’t we, friends?”
"Well, we'll definitely find him," Paganel said with confidence. "Right, friends?"
“Most certainly,” replied Glenarvan; and anxious to give a less gloomy turn to the conversation, he added—
“Definitely,” replied Glenarvan; and wanting to lighten the mood of the conversation, he added—
“But I won’t admit the supposition of his being lost, not for an instant.”
“But I won’t accept the idea that he’s lost, not for a second.”
“Neither will I,” said Paganel.
"Me neither," said Paganel.
“Is Australia a big place?” inquired Robert.
“Is Australia a large place?” Robert asked.
“Australia, my boy, is about as large as four-fifths of Europe. It has somewhere about 775,000 HECTARES.”
“Australia, my boy, is roughly the size of four-fifths of Europe. It has around 775,000 HECTARES.”
“So much as that?” said the Major.
“So much as that?” said the Major.
“Yes, McNabbs, almost to a yard’s breadth. Don’t you think now it has a right to be called a continent?”
“Yes, McNabbs, almost to a yard’s width. Don’t you think it deserves to be called a continent now?”
“I do, certainly.”
“Absolutely.”
“I may add,” continued the SAVANT, “that there are but few accounts of travelers being lost in this immense country. Indeed, I believe Leichardt is the only one of whose fate we are ignorant, and some time before my departure I learned from the Geographical Society that Mcintyre had strong hopes of having discovered traces of him.”
“I should mention,” continued the EXPERT, “that there aren’t many reports of travelers going missing in this vast country. In fact, I think Leichhardt is the only one whose fate we don’t know, and not long before I left, I found out from the Geographical Society that McIntyre was optimistic about having found signs of him.”
“The whole of Australia, then, is not yet explored?” asked Lady Helena.
“Is the whole of Australia still not explored?” Lady Helena asked.
“No, madam, but very little of it. This continent is not much better known than the interior of Africa, and yet it is from no lack of enterprising travelers. From 1606 to 1862, more than fifty have been engaged in exploring along the coast and in the interior.”
“No, ma'am, but very little of it. This continent isn't much better known than the interior of Africa, and it's not for a lack of adventurous travelers. From 1606 to 1862, over fifty have been involved in exploring along the coast and in the interior.”
“Oh, fifty!” exclaimed McNabbs incredulously.
“Oh, fifty!” exclaimed McNabbs in disbelief.
“No, no,” objected the Major; “that is going too far.”
“No, no,” the Major protested; “that's going too far.”
“And I might go farther, McNabbs,” replied the geographer, impatient of contradiction.
“And I might go further, McNabbs,” replied the geographer, annoyed by the disagreement.
“Yes, McNabbs, quite that number.”
“Yes, McNabbs, exactly that number.”
“Farther still, Paganel.”
“Further still, Paganel.”
“If you doubt me, I can give you the names.”
“If you don't believe me, I can give you the names.”
“Oh, oh,” said the Major, coolly. “That’s just like you SAVANTS. You stick at nothing.”
“Oh, oh,” said the Major, coolly. “That’s just like you smart people. You never give up.”
“Major, will you bet your Purdy-Moore rifle against my telescope?”
“Major, will you wager your Purdy-Moore rifle against my telescope?”
“Why not, Paganel, if it would give you any pleasure.”
"Why not, Paganel, if it would make you happy?"
“Done, Major!” exclaimed Paganel. “You may say good-by to your rifle, for it will never shoot another chamois or fox unless I lend it to you, which I shall always be happy to do, by the by.”
“Done, Major!” Paganel exclaimed. “You can say goodbye to your rifle, because it will never shoot another chamois or fox unless I lend it to you, which I’ll always be happy to do, by the way.”
“And whenever you require the use of your telescope, Paganel, I shall be equally obliging,” replied the Major, gravely.
“And whenever you need to use your telescope, Paganel, I’ll be just as helpful,” replied the Major seriously.
“Let us begin, then; and ladies and gentlemen, you shall be our jury. Robert, you must keep count.”
“Let’s get started, then; and ladies and gentlemen, you will be our jury. Robert, you need to keep track.”
This was agreed upon, and Paganel forthwith commenced.
This was agreed upon, and Paganel immediately began.
“Mnemosyne! Goddess of Memory, chaste mother of the Muses!” he exclaimed, “inspire thy faithful servant and fervent worshiper! Two hundred and fifty-eight years ago, my friends, Australia was unknown. Strong suspicions were entertained of the existence of a great southern continent. In the library of your British Museum, Glenarvan, there are two charts, the date of which is 1550, which mention a country south of Asia, called by the Portuguese Great Java. But these charts are not sufficiently authentic. In the seventeenth century, in 1606, Quiros, a Spanish navigator, discovered a country which he named Australia de Espiritu Santo. Some authors imagine that this was the New Hebrides group, and not Australia. I am not going to discuss the question, however. Count Quiros, Robert, and let us pass on to another.”
“Mnemosyne! Goddess of Memory, pure mother of the Muses!” he shouted, “inspire your loyal servant and devoted follower! Two hundred and fifty-eight years ago, my friends, Australia was a mystery. There were strong suspicions about the existence of a vast southern continent. In the library of your British Museum, Glenarvan, there are two maps dated 1550 that mention a land south of Asia, referred to by the Portuguese as Great Java. But these maps are not reliable enough. In the seventeenth century, in 1606, Quiros, a Spanish explorer, discovered a land he called Australia de Espiritu Santo. Some writers believe this referred to the New Hebrides group, not Australia. However, I’m not here to debate that. Count Quiros, Robert, and let’s move on to something else.”
“ONE,” said Robert.
“ONE,” Robert said.
“In that same year, Louis Vas de Torres, the second in command of the fleet of Quiros, pushed further south. But it is to Theodore Hertoge, a Dutchman, that the honor of the great discovery belongs. He touched the western coast of Australia in 25 degrees latitude, and called it Eendracht, after his vessel. From this time navigators increased. In 1618, Zeachen discovered the northern parts of the coast, and called them Arnheim and Diemen. In 1618, Jan Edels went along the western coast, and christened it by his own name. In 1622, Leuwin went down as far as the cape which became his namesake.” And so Paganel continued with name after name until his hearers cried for mercy.
“In that same year, Louis Vas de Torres, the second in command of Quiros's fleet, pushed further south. But the credit for the major discovery goes to Theodore Hertoge, a Dutchman. He reached the western coast of Australia at 25 degrees latitude and named it Eendracht, after his ship. From that point on, more navigators began to explore. In 1618, Zeachen discovered the northern parts of the coast and named them Arnheim and Diemen. Also in 1618, Jan Edels followed the western coast and named it after himself. In 1622, Leuwin traveled as far as the cape that would bear his name.” And so Paganel continued listing name after name until his listeners begged for mercy.
“Stop, Paganel,” said Glenarvan, laughing heartily, “don’t quite crush poor McNabbs. Be generous; he owns he is vanquished.”
“Stop, Paganel,” Glenarvan said with a hearty laugh, “don’t completely crush poor McNabbs. Be kind; he admits he’s defeated.”
“And what about the rifle?” asked the geographer, triumphantly.
“And what about the rifle?” asked the geographer, triumphantly.
“It is yours, Paganel,” replied the Major, “and I am very sorry for it; but your memory might gain an armory by such feats.”
“It’s yours, Paganel,” the Major replied, “and I really regret that; but your memory could benefit from such achievements.”
“It is certainly impossible to be better acquainted with Australia; not the least name, not even the most trifling fact—”
“It’s definitely impossible to know Australia better; not a single name, not even the slightest fact—”
“As to the most trifling fact, I don’t know about that,” said the Major, shaking his head.
“As for the tiniest detail, I’m not so sure about that,” said the Major, shaking his head.
“What do you mean, McNabbs?” exclaimed Paganel.
“What do you mean, McNabbs?” Paganel exclaimed.
“Simply that perhaps all the incidents connected with the discovery of Australia may not be known to you.”
“Maybe you don't know all the events related to the discovery of Australia.”
“Just fancy,” retorted Paganel, throwing back his head proudly.
“Just imagine,” replied Paganel, tossing his head back with pride.
“Come now. If I name one fact you don’t know, will you give me back my rifle?” said McNabbs.
“Come on. If I state one fact you don’t know, will you give me back my rifle?” said McNabbs.
“On the spot, Major.”
"Right now, Major."
“Very well, it’s a bargain, then.”
“Alright, it’s a deal, then.”
“Yes, a bargain; that’s settled.”
"Yes, it's a deal; settled."
“All right. Well now, Paganel, do you know how it is that Australia does not belong to France?”
“All right. So, Paganel, do you know why Australia doesn't belong to France?”
“But it seems to me—”
“But it looks to me—”
“Or, at any rate, do you know what’s the reason the English give?” asked the Major.
“Or, at least, do you know why the English say that?” asked the Major.
“No,” replied Paganel, with an air of vexation.
“No,” Paganel replied, annoyed.
“Just because Captain Baudin, who was by no means a timid man, was so afraid in 1802, of the croaking of the Australian frogs, that he raised his anchor with all possible speed, and quitted the coast, never to return.”
“Just because Captain Baudin, who was definitely not a coward, was so scared in 1802 by the croaking of the Australian frogs that he hurried to raise his anchor and left the coast, never to come back.”
“What!” exclaimed Paganel. “Do they actually give that version of it in England? But it is just a bad joke.”
“What!” Paganel exclaimed. “Do they really say that in England? It’s just a terrible joke.”
“Bad enough, certainly, but still it is history in the United Kingdom.”
"Sure, it’s not great, but it is still part of history in the United Kingdom."
“It’s an insult!” exclaimed the patriotic geographer; “and they relate that gravely?”
“It’s an insult!” shouted the proud geographer; “and they take that seriously?”
“I must own it is the case,” replied Glenarvan, amidst a general outburst of laughter. “Do you mean to say you have never heard of it before?”
“I have to admit it’s true,” Glenarvan replied, amid a burst of laughter from everyone. “Are you really saying you’ve never heard of it before?”
“Never! But I protest against it. Besides, the English call us ‘frog-eaters.’ Now, in general, people are not afraid of what they eat.”
“Never! But I object to it. Besides, the English refer to us as ‘frog-eaters.’ Generally speaking, people aren’t afraid of what they eat.”
“It is said, though, for all that,” replied McNabbs. So the Major kept his famous rifle after all.
“It’s said, though, for all that,” replied McNabbs. So the Major kept his famous rifle after all.
CHAPTER V THE STORM ON THE INDIAN OCEAN
Two days after this conversation, John Mangles announced that the DUNCAN was in longitude 113 degrees 37 minutes, and the passengers found on consulting the chart that consequently Cape Bernouilli could not be more than five degrees off. They must be sailing then in that part of the Indian Ocean which washed the Australian continent, and in four days might hope to see Cape Bernouilli appear on the horizon.
Two days after this conversation, John Mangles announced that the DUNCAN was at longitude 113 degrees 37 minutes, and the passengers discovered while checking the chart that Cape Bernouilli was therefore no more than five degrees away. They must be sailing in that part of the Indian Ocean that borders the Australian continent, and in four days, they might expect to see Cape Bernouilli on the horizon.
Hitherto the yacht had been favored by a strong westerly breeze, but now there were evident signs that a calm was impending, and on the 13th of December the wind fell entirely; as the sailors say, there was not enough to fill a cap.
Up until now, the yacht had enjoyed a strong west wind, but now there were clear signs that a calm was coming, and on December 13th, the wind completely died down; as the sailors say, there wasn't enough to fill a cap.
There was no saying how long this state of the atmosphere might last. But for the powerful propeller the yacht would have been obliged to lie motionless as a log. The young captain was very much annoyed, however, at the prospect of emptying his coal-bunkers, for he had covered his ship with canvas, intending to take advantage of the slightest breeze.
There was no telling how long this weather would stick around. But for the strong propeller, the yacht would have been forced to sit still like a log. The young captain was really frustrated at the thought of running out of coal, since he had covered his ship with canvas, planning to make the most of any slight breeze.
“After all, though,” said Glenarvan, with whom he was talking over the subject, “it is better to have no wind than a contrary one.”
“After all,” said Glenarvan, who was discussing the topic with him, “it’s better to have no wind than to have one blowing against you.”
“Your Lordship is right,” replied John Mangles; “but the fact is these sudden calms bring change of weather, and this is why I dread them. We are close on the trade winds, and if we get them ever so little in our teeth, it will delay us greatly.”
"You're right, Your Lordship," replied John Mangles, "but the truth is these sudden calms bring unpredictable weather, and that's why I fear them. We're near the trade winds, and if we get even a slight headwind, it will set us back significantly."
“Well, John, what if it does? It will only make our voyage a little longer.”
“Well, John, what if it does? It will just make our trip a bit longer.”
“Yes, if it does not bring a storm with it.”
“Yes, as long as it doesn’t bring a storm with it.”
“Do you mean to say you think we are going to have bad weather?” replied Glenarvan, examining the sky, which from horizon to zenith seemed absolutely cloudless.
“Are you suggesting that you think we're going to have bad weather?” replied Glenarvan, looking at the sky, which appeared completely clear from horizon to zenith.
“I do,” returned the captain. “I may say so to your Lordship, but I should not like to alarm Lady Glenarvan or Miss Grant.”
"I do," replied the captain. "I can say that to you, my Lord, but I wouldn't want to worry Lady Glenarvan or Miss Grant."
“You are acting wisely; but what makes you uneasy?”
“You're being smart; but what’s bothering you?”
“Sure indications of a storm. Don’t trust, my Lord, to the appearance of the sky. Nothing is more deceitful. For the last two days the barometer has been falling in a most ominous manner, and is now at 27 degrees. This is a warning I dare not neglect, for there is nothing I dread more than storms in the Southern Seas; I have had a taste of them already. The vapors which become condensed in the immense glaciers at the South Pole produce a current of air of extreme violence. This causes a struggle between the polar and equatorial winds, which results in cyclones, tornadoes, and all those multiplied varieties of tempest against which a ship is no match.”
"Definitely signs of a storm. Don’t be fooled, my Lord, by the way the sky looks. It’s more deceptive than you think. For the past two days, the barometer has been dropping in a very alarming way, and it’s now at 27 degrees. This is a warning I can’t ignore because nothing terrifies me more than storms in the Southern Seas; I’ve experienced them before. The moisture that condenses in the huge glaciers at the South Pole creates a very violent air current. This leads to a battle between the polar and equatorial winds, resulting in cyclones, tornadoes, and all those various kinds of storms that a ship cannot withstand."
“Well, John,” said Glenarvan, “the DUNCAN is a good ship, and her captain is a brave sailor. Let the storm come, we’ll meet it!”
“Well, John,” said Glenarvan, “the DUNCAN is a solid ship, and her captain is a courageous sailor. Let the storm come; we’ll face it!”
John Mangles remained on deck the whole night, for though as yet the sky was still unclouded, he had such faith in his weather-glass, that he took every precaution that prudence could suggest. About 11 P. M. the sky began to darken in the south, and the crew were called up, and all the sails hauled in, except the foresail, brigantine, top-sail, and jib-boom. At midnight the wind freshened, and before long the cracking of the masts, and the rattling of the cordage, and groaning of the timbers, awakened the passengers, who speedily made their appearance on deck—at least Paganel, Glenarvan, the Major and Robert.
John Mangles stayed on deck all night. Even though the sky was still clear, he trusted his barometer enough to take every precaution he could think of. Around 11 PM, the sky started to darken in the south, so the crew was called up and all the sails were pulled in, except for the foresail, brig, topsail, and jib-boom. By midnight, the wind picked up, and before long, the cracking of the masts, the rattling of the rigging, and the groaning of the wood woke up the passengers, who quickly came up on deck—at least Paganel, Glenarvan, the Major, and Robert.
“Is it the hurricane?” asked Glenarvan quietly.
“Is it the hurricane?” Glenarvan asked quietly.
“Not yet,” replied the captain; “but it is close at hand.”
“Not yet,” the captain replied, “but it’s nearby.”
And he went on giving his orders to the men, and doing his best to make ready for the storm, standing, like an officer commanding a breach, with his face to the wind, and his gaze fixed on the troubled sky. The glass had fallen to 26 degrees, and the hand pointed to tempest.
And he kept giving orders to the crew, doing everything he could to prepare for the storm, standing like an officer directing a charge, facing the wind with his eyes on the darkening sky. The barometer had dropped to 26 degrees, and the needle indicated a tempest.
It was one o’clock in the morning when Lady Helena and Miss Grant ventured upstairs on deck. But they no sooner made their appearance than the captain hurried toward them, and begged them to go below again immediately. The waves were already beginning to dash over the side of the ship, and the sea might any moment sweep right over her from stem to stern. The noise of the warring elements was so great that his words were scarcely audible, but Lady Helena took advantage of a sudden lull to ask if there was any danger.
It was one o’clock in the morning when Lady Helena and Miss Grant went upstairs to the deck. But as soon as they showed up, the captain rushed toward them and urgently asked them to go back below immediately. The waves were already starting to slam against the side of the ship, and the sea could wash over it from front to back at any moment. The noise of the raging storm was so loud that his words were barely heard, but Lady Helena seized a brief moment of quiet to ask if there was any danger.
“None whatever,” replied John Mangles; “but you cannot remain on deck, madam, no more can Miss Mary.”
“Not at all,” replied John Mangles; “but you can’t stay on deck, ma’am, and neither can Miss Mary.”
The ladies could not disobey an order that seemed almost an entreaty, and they returned to their cabin. At the same moment the wind redoubled its fury, making the masts bend beneath the weight of the sails, and completely lifting up the yacht.
The women couldn’t ignore an order that felt more like a plea, so they went back to their cabin. Just then, the wind got even stronger, bending the masts under the weight of the sails and completely lifting the yacht up.
“Haul up the foresail!” shouted the captain. “Lower the topsail and jib-boom!”
“Raise the foresail!” shouted the captain. “Lower the topsail and jib-boom!”
Glenarvan and his companions stood silently gazing at the struggle between their good ship and the waves, lost in wondering and half-terrified admiration at the spectacle.
Glenarvan and his friends stood quietly watching the battle between their ship and the waves, filled with a mix of awe and fear at the scene before them.
Just then, a dull hissing was heard above the noise of the elements. The steam was escaping violently, not by the funnel, but from the safety-valves of the boiler; the alarm whistle sounded unnaturally loud, and the yacht made a frightful pitch, overturning Wilson, who was at the wheel, by an unexpected blow from the tiller. The DUNCAN no longer obeyed the helm.
Just then, a low hissing was heard over the noise of the storm. Steam was escaping violently, not through the funnel, but from the safety valves of the boiler; the alarm whistle sounded unnaturally loud, and the yacht tilted dangerously, throwing Wilson, who was at the wheel, off balance with a sudden hit from the tiller. The DUNCAN no longer responded to the helm.
“What is the matter?” cried the captain, rushing on the bridge.
“What’s going on?” shouted the captain, rushing onto the bridge.
“The ship is heeling over on her side,” replied Wilson.
“The ship is leaning over on its side,” replied Wilson.
“The engine! the engine!” shouted the engineer.
“The engine! The engine!” shouted the engineer.
Away rushed John to the engine-room. A cloud of steam filled the room. The pistons were motionless in their cylinders, and they were apparently powerless, and the engine-driver, fearing for his boilers, was letting off the steam.
John rushed to the engine room. A cloud of steam filled the space. The pistons were still in their cylinders, seemingly powerless, and the engineer, worried about the boilers, was releasing steam.
“What’s wrong?” asked the captain.
“What's wrong?” asked the captain.
“The propeller is bent or entangled,” was the reply. “It’s not acting at all.”
“The propeller is bent or tangled,” was the response. “It’s not working at all.”
“Can’t you extricate it?”
"Can't you get it out?"
“It is impossible.”
"That's impossible."
An accident like this could not be remedied, and John’s only resource was to fall back on his sails, and seek to make an auxiliary of his most powerful enemy, the wind. He went up again on deck, and after explaining in a few words to Lord Glenarvan how things stood, begged him to retire to his cabin, with the rest of the passengers. But Glenarvan wished to remain above.
An accident like this couldn’t be fixed, and John’s only option was to rely on his sails and try to use his biggest enemy, the wind, to his advantage. He went back up on deck and quickly explained to Lord Glenarvan what was happening, asking him to go to his cabin with the other passengers. But Glenarvan wanted to stay above.
“No, your Lordship,” said the captain in a firm tone, “I must be alone with my men. Go into the saloon. The vessel will have a hard fight with the waves, and they would sweep you over without mercy.”
“No, my Lord,” said the captain firmly, “I need to be alone with my crew. Please go into the saloon. The ship is going to face rough waves, and they would throw you overboard without hesitation.”
“But we might be a help.”
"But we can help."
“Go in, my Lord, go in. I must indeed insist on it. There are times when I must be master on board, and retire you must.”
“Go in, my Lord, go in. I really must insist on it. There are times when I have to take charge here, and you need to step back.”
Their situation must indeed be desperate for John Mangles to speak in such authoritative language. Glenarvan was wise enough to understand this, and felt he must set an example in obedience. He therefore quitted the deck immediately with his three companions, and rejoined the ladies, who were anxiously watching the DENOUEMENT of this war with the elements.
Their situation must really be desperate for John Mangles to speak so confidently. Glenarvan was smart enough to see this and felt he needed to set an example by following orders. So, he quickly left the deck with his three companions and went back to the ladies, who were anxiously watching the outcome of this battle with the elements.
“He’s an energetic fellow, this brave John of mine!” said Lord Glenarvan, as he entered the saloon.
“He's quite the lively guy, this brave John of mine!” said Lord Glenarvan, as he walked into the saloon.
“That he is,” replied Paganel. “He reminds me of your great Shakespeare’s boatswain in the ‘Tempest,’ who says to the king on board: ‘Hence! What care these roarers for the name of king? To cabin! Silence! Trouble us not.’”
"That's true," Paganel responded. "He reminds me of your great Shakespeare’s boatswain in the 'Tempest,' who tells the king on the ship: 'Get below! What do these stormy winds care about the title of king? To the cabin! Quiet! Don’t bother us.'"
However, John Mangles did not lose a second in extricating his ship from the peril in which she was placed by the condition of her screw propeller. He resolved to rely on the mainsail for keeping in the right route as far as possible, and to brace the yards obliquely, so as not to present a direct front to the storm. The yacht turned about like a swift horse that feels the spur, and presented a broadside to the billows. The only question was, how long would she hold out with so little sail, and what sail could resist such violence for any length of time. The great advantage of keeping up the mainsail was that it presented to the waves only the most solid portions of the yacht, and kept her in the right course. Still it involved some peril, for the vessel might get engulfed between the waves, and not be able to raise herself. But Mangles felt there was no alternative, and all he could do was to keep the crew ready to alter the sail at any moment, and stay in the shrouds himself watching the tempest.
However, John Mangles didn’t waste any time getting his ship out of the danger caused by her screw propeller. He decided to rely on the mainsail to keep the right course as much as possible and to angle the sails so they wouldn’t face the storm directly. The yacht turned around like a fast horse that feels a spur and presented its side to the waves. The only question was how long she could manage with so little sail and what sail could withstand such force for any length of time. The major benefit of keeping the mainsail up was that it faced the waves with the strongest parts of the yacht and helped maintain the right direction. Still, it carried some risk, as the vessel could get caught between waves and struggle to rise. But Mangles knew there was no other option, and all he could do was keep the crew ready to adjust the sail at a moment's notice while he stayed in the rigging, watching the storm.
The remainder of the night was spent in this manner, and it was hoped that morning would bring a calm. But this was a delusive hope. At 8 A. M. the wind had increased to a hurricane.
The rest of the night went on like this, and there was a hope that morning would bring some peace. But that hope was misleading. By 8 A.M., the wind had picked up to hurricane strength.
John said nothing, but he trembled for his ship, and those on board. The DUNCAN made a frightful plunge forward, and for an instant the men thought she would never rise again. Already they had seized their hatchets to cut away the shrouds from the mainmast, but the next minute the sails were torn away by the tempest, and had flown off like gigantic albatrosses.
John didn’t say anything, but he was anxious for his ship and everyone on board. The DUNCAN made a terrifying lurch forward, and for a moment, the crew thought she would never come back up. They were already readying their hatchets to cut the rigging from the mainmast, but the next moment, the sails were ripped away by the storm, flying off like massive albatrosses.
The yacht had risen once more, but she found herself at the mercy of the waves entirely now, with nothing to steady or direct her, and was so fearfully pitched and tossed about that every moment the captain expected the masts would break short off. John had no resource but to put up a forestaysail, and run before the gale. But this was no easy task. Twenty times over he had all his work to begin again, and it was 3 P. M. before his attempt succeeded. A mere shred of canvas though it was, it was enough to drive the DUNCAN forward with inconceivable rapidity to the northeast, of course in the same direction as the hurricane. Swiftness was their only chance of safety. Sometimes she would get in advance of the waves which carried her along, and cutting through them with her sharp prow, bury herself in their depths. At others, she would keep pace with them, and make such enormous leaps that there was imminent danger of her being pitched over on her side, and then again, every now and then the storm-driven sea would out-distance the yacht, and the angry billows would sweep over the deck from stem to stern with tremendous violence.
The yacht had risen again, but she was completely at the mercy of the waves now, with nothing to stabilize or steer her, and was tossed around so violently that the captain feared the masts would snap off at any moment. John had no choice but to set up a staysail and ride out the storm. But this was no easy task. He had to start over twenty times, and it was 3 P.M. before he finally succeeded. Though it was just a thin piece of canvas, it was enough to push the DUNCAN forward at an incredible speed to the northeast, which was, of course, the same direction as the hurricane. Speed was their only chance of survival. Sometimes she would surge ahead of the waves that carried her along, cutting through them with her sharp bow and plunging into their depths. Other times, she would keep up with them and leap so high that there was a real risk of her tipping over on her side, and then, every now and then, the stormy sea would outrun the yacht, and the furious waves would crash over the deck from bow to stern with overwhelming force.
In this alarming situation and amid dreadful alternations of hope and despair, the 12th of December passed away, and the ensuing night, John Mangles never left his post, not even to take food. Though his impassive face betrayed no symptoms of fear, he was tortured with anxiety, and his steady gaze was fixed on the north, as if trying to pierce through the thick mists that enshrouded it.
In this troubling situation, filled with constant swings between hope and despair, December 12th came and went, and that night, John Mangles never left his post, not even to eat. Even though his expression showed no signs of fear, he was anxious and his steady gaze was focused on the north, as if he were trying to see through the thick fog that surrounded it.
There was, indeed, great cause for fear. The DUNCAN was out of her course, and rushing toward the Australian coast with a speed which nothing could lessen. To John Mangles it seemed as if a thunderbolt were driving them along. Every instant he expected the yacht would dash against some rock, for he reckoned the coast could not be more than twelve miles off, and better far be in mid ocean exposed to all its fury than too near land.
There was definitely a lot to be afraid of. The DUNCAN was off course, heading straight for the Australian coast at a speed that nothing could slow down. To John Mangles, it felt like they were being propelled forward by a thunderbolt. Every second, he expected the yacht to crash into a rock, since he figured the coast couldn’t be more than twelve miles away, and he would much rather be out in the open ocean facing its wrath than close to shore.
John Mangles went to find Glenarvan, and had a private talk with him about their situation, telling him frankly the true state of affairs, stating the case with all the coolness of a sailor prepared for anything and everything and he wound up by saying he might, perhaps, be obliged to cast the yacht on shore.
John Mangles went to find Glenarvan and had a private conversation with him about their situation, honestly explaining the reality of their circumstances. He presented the situation with the calmness of a sailor ready for anything and finished by saying he might, possibly, have to run the yacht aground.
“To save the lives of those on board, my Lord,” he added.
"To save the lives of those on board, my Lord," he added.
“Do it then, John,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“Go ahead, John,” replied Lord Glenarvan.
“And Lady Helena, Miss Grant?”
“And Lady Helena, Ms. Grant?”
“I will tell them at the last moment when all hope of keeping out at sea is over. You will let me know?”
“I'll tell them at the last moment when there's no hope of staying out at sea anymore. You'll let me know?”
“I will, my Lord.”
"I will, my Lord."
Glenarvan rejoined his companions, who felt they were in imminent danger, though no word was spoken on the subject. Both ladies displayed great courage, fully equal to any of the party. Paganel descanted in the most inopportune manner about the direction of atmospheric currents, making interesting comparisons, between tornadoes, cyclones, and rectilinear tempests. The Major calmly awaited the end with the fatalism of a Mussulman.
Glenarvan rejoined his companions, who sensed they were in serious danger, even though no one said anything about it. Both ladies showed remarkable bravery, matching the strength of the whole group. Paganel rambled on at the worst time about the direction of air currents, making interesting comparisons between tornadoes, cyclones, and straight-line storms. The Major calmly waited for the outcome with the fatalism of a Muslim.
About eleven o’clock, the hurricane appeared to decrease slightly. The damp mist began to clear away, and a sudden gleam of light revealed a low-lying shore about six miles distant. They were driving right down on it. Enormous breakers fifty feet high were dashing over it, and the fact of their height showed John there must be solid ground before they could make such a rebound.
About eleven o’clock, the hurricane seemed to let up a bit. The damp mist started to clear, and a sudden flash of light exposed a low-lying shore about six miles away. They were heading straight for it. Massive waves fifty feet high were crashing onto it, and the height of those waves made John realize there had to be solid ground for them to rebound like that.
“Those are sand-banks,” he said to Austin.
“Those are sandbanks,” he said to Austin.
“I think they are,” replied the mate.
“I think they are,” replied the crew member.
“We are in God’s hands,” said John. “If we cannot find any opening for the yacht, and if she doesn’t find the way in herself, we are lost.”
“We are in God’s hands,” John said. “If we can’t find a way for the yacht, and if she doesn’t navigate in on her own, we’re doomed.”
“The tide is high at present, it is just possible we may ride over those sand-banks.”
“The tide is high right now; there’s a chance we might be able to go over those sandbanks.”
“But just see those breakers. What ship could stand them. Let us invoke divine aid, Austin!”
“But just look at those waves. What ship could survive those? Let's call for divine help, Austin!”
Meanwhile the DUNCAN was speeding on at a frightful rate. Soon she was within two miles of the sand-banks, which were still veiled from time to time in thick mist. But John fancied he could see beyond the breakers a quiet basin, where the DUNCAN would be in comparative safety. But how could she reach it?
Meanwhile, the DUNCAN was racing along at a terrifying speed. Soon she was within two miles of the sandbanks, which were still occasionally hidden in thick mist. But John thought he could see a calm spot beyond the waves, where the DUNCAN would be relatively safe. But how could she get there?
All the passengers were summoned on deck, for now that the hour of shipwreck was at hand, the captain did not wish anyone to be shut up in his cabin.
All the passengers were called up on deck, because now that the time of the shipwreck was approaching, the captain didn’t want anyone to be locked in their cabin.
“John!” said Glenarvan in a low voice to the captain, “I will try to save my wife or perish with her. I put Miss Grant in your charge.”
“John!” Glenarvan said softly to the captain, “I will try to save my wife or die trying. I’m leaving Miss Grant in your care.”
“Yes, my Lord,” replied John Mangles, raising Glenarvan’s hand to his moistened eyes.
“Yes, my Lord,” replied John Mangles, lifting Glenarvan’s hand to his wet eyes.
The yacht was only a few cables’ lengths from the sandbanks. The tide was high, and no doubt there was abundance of water to float the ship over the dangerous bar; but these terrific breakers alternately lifting her up and then leaving her almost dry, would infallibly make her graze the sand-banks.
The yacht was only a short distance from the sandbanks. The tide was high, so there was plenty of water to float the ship over the risky bar; however, those powerful waves lifting her up and then leaving her almost stranded would definitely cause her to hit the sandbanks.
Was there no means of calming this angry sea? A last expedient struck the captain. “The oil, my lads!” he exclaimed. “Bring the oil here!”
Was there no way to calm this furious sea? A final idea struck the captain. “The oil, guys!” he shouted. “Bring the oil here!”
The crew caught at the idea immediately; this was a plan that had been successfully tried already. The fury of the waves had been allayed before this time by covering them with a sheet of oil. Its effect is immediate, but very temporary. The moment after a ship has passed over the smooth surface, the sea redoubles its violence, and woe to the bark that follows. The casks of seal-oil were forthwith hauled up, for danger seemed to have given the men double strength. A few hatchet blows soon knocked in the heads, and they were then hung over the larboard and starboard.
The crew immediately got on board with the idea; this was a plan that had worked before. The rage of the waves had been calmed previously by covering them with a layer of oil. Its effect is quick, but very short-lived. The moment after a ship passes over the smooth surface, the sea gets violent again, and it’s disaster for the ship that follows. The barrels of seal oil were quickly brought up, as danger seemed to give the men extra strength. A few hits with hatchets soon knocked in the heads, and then they were hung over the left and right sides.
“Be ready!” shouted John, looking out for a favorable moment.
“Get ready!” shouted John, watching for the right moment.
In twenty seconds the yacht reached the bar. Now was the time. “Pour out!” cried the captain, “and God prosper it!”
In twenty seconds, the yacht reached the bar. Now was the moment. “Pour it out!” shouted the captain, “and may God bless it!”
The barrels were turned upside down, and instantly a sheet of oil covered the whole surface of the water. The billows fell as if by magic, the whole foaming sea seemed leveled, and the DUNCAN flew over its tranquil bosom into a quiet basin beyond the formidable bar; but almost the same minute the ocean burst forth again with all its fury, and the towering breakers dashed over the bar with increased violence.
The barrels were flipped over, and immediately a layer of oil spread across the entire surface of the water. The waves calmed as if by magic, and the churning sea appeared evened out, allowing the DUNCAN to glide over its calm surface into a peaceful area beyond the dangerous bar; but just moments later, the ocean surged again with all its force, and the massive waves crashed over the bar with even greater intensity.
CHAPTER VI A HOSPITABLE COLONIST
THE captain’s first care was to anchor his vessel securely. He found excellent moorage in five fathoms’ depth of water, with a solid bottom of hard granite, which afforded a firm hold. There was no danger now of either being driven away or stranded at low water. After so many hours of danger, the DUNCAN found herself in a sort of creek, sheltered by a high circular point from the winds outside in the open sea.
THE captain's top priority was to anchor his ship securely. He found a great spot in five fathoms of water, with a solid granite bottom that offered a strong hold. There was no risk now of being swept away or stuck at low tide. After so many hours of danger, the DUNCAN was now in a kind of creek, protected by a high circular point from the winds out in the open sea.
Lord Glenarvan grasped John Mangles’ hand, and simply said: “Thank you, John.”
Lord Glenarvan shook John Mangles' hand and said, "Thanks, John."
This was all, but John felt it ample recompense. Glenarvan kept to himself the secret of his anxiety, and neither Lady Helena, nor Mary, nor Robert suspected the grave perils they had just escaped.
This was everything, but John felt it was more than enough reward. Glenarvan kept his worries to himself, and neither Lady Helena, nor Mary, nor Robert realized the serious dangers they had just avoided.
One important fact had to be ascertained. On what part of the coast had the tempest thrown them? How far must they go to regain the parallel. At what distance S. W. was Cape Bernouilli? This was soon determined by taking the position of the ship, and it was found that she had scarcely deviated two degrees from the route. They were in longitude 36 degrees 12 minutes, and latitude 32 degrees 67 minutes, at Cape Catastrophe, three hundred miles from Cape Bernouilli. The nearest port was Adelaide, the Capital of Southern Australia.
One crucial detail needed to be figured out. Which part of the coast had the storm thrown them onto? How far did they need to travel to get back on track? What was the distance southwest to Cape Bernouilli? This was quickly established by determining the ship's position, revealing that it had hardly strayed two degrees from its route. They were at longitude 36 degrees 12 minutes and latitude 32 degrees 67 minutes, off Cape Catastrophe, three hundred miles from Cape Bernouilli. The closest port was Adelaide, the capital of South Australia.
Could the DUNCAN be repaired there? This was the question. The extent of the injuries must first be ascertained, and in order to do this he ordered some of the men to dive down below the stern. Their report was that one of the branches of the screw was bent, and had got jammed against the stern post, which of course prevented all possibility of rotation. This was a serious damage, so serious as to require more skilful workmen than could be found in Adelaide.
Could the DUNCAN be fixed there? That was the question. They first needed to determine the extent of the damage, so he instructed some of the men to dive down below the stern. Their report was that one of the propeller blades was bent and had gotten stuck against the stern post, which, of course, stopped it from turning. This was serious damage, severe enough to need more skilled workers than were available in Adelaide.
After mature reflection, Lord Glenarvan and John Mangles came to the determination to sail round the Australian coast, stopping at Cape Bernouilli, and continuing their route south as far as Melbourne, where the DUNCAN could speedily be put right. This effected, they would proceed to cruise along the eastern coast to complete their search for the BRITANNIA.
After careful consideration, Lord Glenarvan and John Mangles decided to sail around the Australian coast, stopping at Cape Bernouilli, and then continuing south to Melbourne, where the DUNCAN could be quickly repaired. Once that was done, they would head up the eastern coast to finish their search for the BRITANNIA.
This decision was unanimously approved, and it was agreed that they should start with the first fair wind. They had not to wait long for the same night the hurricane had ceased entirely, and there was only a manageable breeze from the S. W. Preparations for sailing were instantly commenced, and at four o’clock in the morning the crew lifted the anchors, and got under way with fresh canvas outspread, and a wind blowing right for the Australian shores.
This decision was unanimously approved, and everyone agreed they should set sail at the first favorable wind. They didn’t have to wait long; that very night, the hurricane completely ended, and there was just a manageable breeze coming from the southwest. Preparations for sailing began immediately, and at four o'clock in the morning, the crew lifted the anchors and set out, with fresh sails unfurled and a wind blowing directly toward the Australian shores.
Two hours afterward Cape Catastrophe was out of sight. In the evening they doubled Cape Borda, and came alongside Kangaroo Island. This is the largest of the Australian islands, and a great hiding place for runaway convicts. Its appearance was enchanting. The stratified rocks on the shore were richly carpeted with verdure, and innumerable kangaroos were jumping over the woods and plains, just as at the time of its discovery in 1802. Next day, boats were sent ashore to examine the coast minutely, as they were now on the 36th parallel, and between that and the 38th Glenarvan wished to leave no part unexplored.
Two hours later, Cape Catastrophe was out of sight. In the evening, they rounded Cape Borda and approached Kangaroo Island. This is the largest of the Australian islands and a great hiding place for runaway convicts. Its appearance was stunning. The layered rocks along the shore were richly covered in greenery, and countless kangaroos were hopping around the woods and plains, just like when it was discovered in 1802. The next day, boats were sent ashore to closely examine the coast, as they were now on the 36th parallel, and between that and the 38th, Glenarvan wanted to leave no area unexplored.
The boats had hard, rough work of it now, but the men never complained. Glenarvan and his inseparable companion, Paganel, and young Robert generally accompanied them. But all this painstaking exploration came to nothing. Not a trace of the shipwreck could be seen anywhere. The Australian shores revealed no more than the Patagonian. However, it was not time yet to lose hope altogether, for they had not reached the exact point indicated by the document.
The boats were having a tough time, but the men never complained. Glenarvan, along with his close friend Paganel and young Robert, usually went with them. But all this hard work didn’t lead to anything. There wasn’t a single sign of the shipwreck anywhere. The Australian shores offered nothing more than the Patagonian ones. Still, it wasn’t time to give up hope entirely, since they hadn’t reached the exact location mentioned in the document.
On the 20th of December, they arrived off Cape Bernouilli, which terminates Lacepede Bay, and yet not a vestige of the BRITANNIA had been discovered. Still this was not surprising, as it was two years since the occurrence of the catastrophe, and the sea might, and indeed must, have scattered and destroyed whatever fragments of the brig had remained. Besides, the natives who scent a wreck as the vultures do a dead body, would have pounced upon it and carried off the smaller DEBRIS. There was no doubt whatever Harry Grant and his companions had been made prisoners the moment the waves threw them on the shore, and been dragged away into the interior of the continent.
On December 20th, they arrived off Cape Bernouilli, which ends Lacepede Bay, and yet there was not a trace of the BRITANNIA. This wasn’t surprising, though, since it had been two years since the disaster, and the sea could have scattered and destroyed any remaining pieces of the ship. Plus, the locals, who can sniff out a wreck like vultures do a dead body, would have swooped in and taken the smaller debris. There was no doubt that Harry Grant and his companions had been captured the moment the waves tossed them onto the shore and dragged away into the interior of the continent.
But if so, what becomes of Paganel’s ingenious hypothesis about the document? viz., that it had been thrown into a river and carried by a current into the sea. That was a plausible enough theory in Patagonia, but not in the part of Australia intersected by the 37th parallel. Besides the Patagonian rivers, the Rio Colorado and the Rio Negro, flow into the sea along deserted solitudes, uninhabited and uninhabitable; while, on the contrary, the principal rivers of Australia—the Murray, the Yarrow, the Torrens, the Darling—all connected with each other, throw themselves into the ocean by well-frequented routes, and their mouths are ports of great activity. What likelihood, consequently, would there be that a fragile bottle would ever find its way along such busy thoroughfares right out into the Indian Ocean?
But if that’s the case, what happens to Paganel’s clever theory about the document? Specifically, that it was thrown into a river and carried by the current out to sea. That seemed like a reasonable idea in Patagonia, but not in the part of Australia crossed by the 37th parallel. In Patagonia, the rivers like the Rio Colorado and the Rio Negro flow into the sea through deserted, uninhabited areas; on the other hand, the main rivers in Australia—the Murray, the Yarrow, the Torrens, and the Darling—are all interconnected and pour into the ocean along busy routes, with their mouths being bustling ports. So, what are the chances that a fragile bottle would navigate through such crowded waterways all the way to the Indian Ocean?
Paganel himself saw the impossibility of it, and confessed to the Major, who raised a discussion on the subject, that his hypothesis would be altogether illogical in Australia. It was evident that the degrees given related to the place where the BRITANNIA was actually shipwrecked and not the place of captivity, and that the bottle therefore had been thrown into the sea on the western coast of the continent.
Paganel himself recognized that it was impossible and admitted to the Major, who sparked a discussion about it, that his theory would be completely illogical in Australia. It was clear that the coordinates provided referred to the location where the BRITANNIA actually sank, not the place of captivity, so the bottle must have been tossed into the sea off the western coast of the continent.
However, as Glenarvan justly remarked, this did not alter the fact of Captain Grant’s captivity in the least degree, though there was no reason now for prosecuting the search for him along the 37th parallel, more than any other. It followed, consequently, that if no traces of the BRITANNIA were discovered at Cape Bernouilli, the only thing to be done was to return to Europe. Lord Glenarvan would have been unsuccessful, but he would have done his duty courageously and conscientiously.
However, as Glenarvan rightly pointed out, this didn't change the fact that Captain Grant was still missing at all, even though there was no longer any reason to continue searching for him along the 37th parallel over any other route. Consequently, if no signs of the BRITANNIA were found at Cape Bernouilli, the only option left was to head back to Europe. Lord Glenarvan may not have succeeded, but he would have fulfilled his responsibilities bravely and with integrity.
But the young Grants did not feel disheartened. They had long since said to themselves that the question of their father’s deliverance was about to be finally settled. Irrevocably, indeed, they might consider it, for as Paganel had judiciously demonstrated, if the wreck had occurred on the eastern side, the survivors would have found their way back to their own country long since.
But the young Grants didn’t feel discouraged. They had long ago told themselves that the matter of their father’s rescue was about to be resolved for good. They could consider it settled, because as Paganel had wisely pointed out, if the shipwreck had happened on the eastern side, the survivors would have made their way back to their own country by now.
“Hope on! Hope on, Mary!” said Lady Helena to the young girl, as they neared the shore; “God’s hand will still lead us.”
“Keep hoping, Mary!” said Lady Helena to the young girl as they got closer to the shore. “God’s hand will still guide us.”
“Yes, Miss Mary,” said Captain John. “Man’s extremity is God’s opportunity. When one way is hedged up another is sure to open.”
“Yes, Miss Mary,” said Captain John. “When things get tough for a person, that's when they often find an opportunity from God. When one path is blocked, another one is bound to open up.”
“God grant it,” replied Mary.
“God grant it,” said Mary.
Land was quite close now. The cape ran out two miles into the sea, and terminated in a gentle slope, and the boat glided easily into a sort of natural creek between coral banks in a state of formation, which in course of time would be a belt of coral reefs round the southern point of the Australian coast. Even now they were quite sufficiently formidable to destroy the keel of a ship, and the BRITANNIA might likely enough have been dashed to pieces on them.
Land was really close now. The cape extended two miles into the ocean and ended in a gentle slope, and the boat smoothly entered a natural creek between coral banks that were in the process of forming, which would eventually become a belt of coral reefs around the southern tip of the Australian coast. Even now, they were dangerous enough to wreck a ship's keel, and the BRITANNIA could easily have been shattered on them.
The passengers landed without the least difficulty on an absolutely desert shore. Cliffs composed of beds of strata made a coast line sixty to eighty feet high, which it would have been difficult to scale without ladders or cramp-irons. John Mangles happened to discover a natural breach about half a mile south. Part of the cliff had been partially beaten down, no doubt, by the sea in some equinoctial gale. Through this opening the whole party passed and reached the top of the cliff by a pretty steep path. Robert climbed like a young cat, and was the first on the summit, to the despair of Paganel, who was quite ashamed to see his long legs, forty years old, out-distanced by a young urchin of twelve. However, he was far ahead of the Major, who gave himself no concern on the subject.
The passengers landed smoothly on a completely deserted shore. The cliffs, made up of layered rock, stood sixty to eighty feet high, making it tough to climb without ladders or climbing gear. John Mangles noticed a natural gap about half a mile to the south. Part of the cliff had eroded, likely due to the sea during a strong storm. The whole group went through this opening and made their way to the top of the cliff via a steep path. Robert climbed like a young cat and was the first to reach the summit, much to Paganel’s dismay, as he felt embarrassed to be outpaced by a twelve-year-old. However, he was still well ahead of the Major, who didn't seem to mind at all.
They were all soon assembled on the lofty crags, and from this elevation could command a view of the whole plain below. It appeared entirely uncultivated, and covered with shrubs and bushes. Glenarvan thought it resembled some glens in the lowlands of Scotland, and Paganel fancied it like some barren parts of Britanny. But along the coast the country appeared to be inhabited, and significant signs of industry revealed the presence of civilized men, not savages.
They were all soon gathered on the high cliffs, and from this height they could see the entire plain below. It looked completely wild and was covered with shrubs and bushes. Glenarvan thought it looked like some valleys in the lowlands of Scotland, and Paganel imagined it resembled some barren areas of Brittany. However, along the coast, the land seemed to be inhabited, and clear signs of industry indicated the presence of civilized people, not savages.
“A mill!” exclaimed Robert.
“A mill!” Robert exclaimed.
And, sure enough, in the distance the long sails of a mill appeared, apparently about three miles off.
And sure enough, in the distance, the tall sails of a mill showed up, looking like they were about three miles away.
“It certainly is a windmill,” said Paganel, after examining the object in question through his telescope.
“It definitely is a windmill,” said Paganel, after looking at the object in question through his telescope.
“Let us go to it, then,” said Glenarvan.
"Let's get to it, then," said Glenarvan.
Away they started, and, after walking about half an hour, the country began to assume a new aspect, suddenly changing its sterility for cultivation. Instead of bushes, quick-set hedges met the eye, inclosing recent clearings. Several bullocks and about half a dozen horses were feeding in meadows, surrounded by acacias supplied from the vast plantations of Kangaroo Island. Gradually fields covered with cereals came in sight, whole acres covered with bristling ears of corn, hay-ricks in the shape of large bee-hives, blooming orchards, a fine garden worthy of Horace, in which the useful and agreeable were blended; then came sheds; commons wisely distributed, and last of all, a plain comfortable dwelling-house, crowned by a joyous-sounding mill, and fanned and shaded by its long sails as they kept constantly moving round.
They set off, and after walking for about half an hour, the landscape began to change, shifting from barren land to cultivated fields. Instead of scattered bushes, well-maintained hedges appeared, surrounding recent clearings. Several oxen and about six horses were grazing in meadows, bordered by acacias from the large plantations of Kangaroo Island. Gradually, fields filled with grains came into view, with acres of tall corn, haystacks shaped like large beehives, blooming orchards, and a lovely garden that combined beauty with usefulness. Then there were sheds, wisely placed communal areas, and finally, a simple, cozy house topped with a cheerful mill, its long sails constantly turning, providing shade and a light breeze.
Just at that moment a pleasant-faced man, about fifty years of age, came out of the house, warned, by the loud barking of four dogs, of the arrival of strangers. He was followed by five handsome strapping lads, his sons, and their mother, a fine tall woman. There was no mistaking the little group. This was a perfect type of the Irish colonist—a man who, weary of the miseries of his country, had come, with his family, to seek fortune and happiness beyond the seas.
Just then, a friendly-looking man in his fifties stepped out of the house, alerted by the loud barking of four dogs to the arrival of visitors. He was followed by five attractive, strong young men—his sons—and their mother, a tall, impressive woman. There was no doubt about it; this was a classic example of the Irish immigrant—a man who, tired of the struggles in his homeland, had come with his family in search of fortune and happiness overseas.
Before Glenarvan and his party had time to reach the house and present themselves in due form, they heard the cordial words: “Strangers! welcome to the house of Paddy O’Moore!”
Before Glenarvan and his group had a chance to reach the house and introduce themselves properly, they heard the warm words: “Strangers! Welcome to the house of Paddy O’Moore!”
“You are Irish,” said Glenarvan, “if I am not mistaken,” warmly grasping the outstretched hand of the colonist.
“You're Irish,” said Glenarvan, “if I'm not mistaken,” warmly shaking the outstretched hand of the colonist.
“I was,” replied Paddy O’Moore, “but now I am Australian. Come in, gentlemen, whoever you may be, this house is yours.”
“I was,” replied Paddy O’Moore, “but now I’m Australian. Come in, gentlemen, whoever you are, this house is yours.”
It was impossible not to accept an invitation given with such grace. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were led in by Mrs. O’Moore, while the gentlemen were assisted by his sturdy sons to disencumber themselves of their fire-arms.
It was impossible not to accept an invitation offered so graciously. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were brought in by Mrs. O’Moore, while the men were helped by his strong sons to get rid of their firearms.
An immense hall, light and airy, occupied the ground floor of the house, which was built of strong planks laid horizontally. A few wooden benches fastened against the gaily-colored walls, about ten stools, two oak chests on tin mugs, a large long table where twenty guests could sit comfortably, composed the furniture, which looked in perfect keeping with the solid house and robust inmates.
An enormous hall, bright and spacious, filled the ground floor of the house, which was constructed with sturdy planks arranged horizontally. A few wooden benches attached to the colorful walls, about ten stools, two oak chests, tin mugs, and a large long table where twenty guests could comfortably sit made up the furniture, which matched perfectly with the solid house and its strong inhabitants.
The noonday meal was spread; the soup tureen was smoking between roast beef and a leg of mutton, surrounded by large plates of olives, grapes, and oranges. The necessary was there and there was no lack of the superfluous. The host and hostess were so pleasant, and the big table, with its abundant fare, looked so inviting, that it would have been ungracious not to have seated themselves. The farm servants, on equal footing with their master, were already in their places to take their share of the meal. Paddy O’Moore pointed to the seats reserved for the strangers, and said to Glenarvan:
The lunchtime spread was laid out; the soup pot was steaming between roast beef and a leg of lamb, surrounded by big plates of olives, grapes, and oranges. Everything you needed was there, and there was plenty of extra stuff too. The host and hostess were so friendly, and the big table filled with plenty of food looked so inviting that it would have been rude not to sit down. The farm workers, on equal terms with their boss, were already in their seats ready to enjoy the meal. Paddy O’Moore pointed to the seats saved for the guests and said to Glenarvan:
“I was waiting for you.”
"I was waiting for you."
“Waiting for us!” replied Glenarvan in a tone of surprise.
“Waiting for us!” Glenarvan replied, sounding surprised.
“I am always waiting for those who come,” said the Irishman; and then, in a solemn voice, while the family and domestics reverently stood, he repeated the BENEDICITE.
“I’m always waiting for those who arrive,” said the Irishman; and then, in a serious voice, while the family and staff stood respectfully, he repeated the BENEDICITE.
Dinner followed immediately, during which an animated conversation was kept up on all sides. From Scotch to Irish is but a handsbreadth. The Tweed, several fathoms wide, digs a deeper trench between Scotland and England than the twenty leagues of Irish Channel, which separates Old Caledonia from the Emerald Isle. Paddy O’Moore related his history. It was that of all emigrants driven by misfortune from their own country. Many come to seek fortunes who only find trouble and sorrow, and then they throw the blame on chance, and forget the true cause is their own idleness and vice and want of commonsense. Whoever is sober and industrious, honest and economical, gets on.
Dinner happened right after, and everyone engaged in lively conversation. The leap from Scotland to Ireland is just a short distance. The Tweed, several meters across, creates a deeper divide between Scotland and England than the twenty leagues of the Irish Channel that separates Old Caledonia from the Emerald Isle. Paddy O’Moore shared his story. It was the story of all emigrants forced away from their homeland by hardship. Many come seeking fortunes, but only find trouble and sorrow, then blame it on luck, forgetting that the real reason is their own laziness, poor choices, and lack of common sense. Those who are sober, hard-working, honest, and frugal manage to succeed.
Such a one had been and was Paddy O’Moore. He left Dundalk, where he was starving, and came with his family to Australia, landed at Adelaide, where, refusing employment as a miner, he got engaged on a farm, and two months afterward commenced clearing ground on his own account.
Paddy O’Moore was one of those people. He left Dundalk, where he was struggling to survive, and moved to Australia with his family, landing in Adelaide. There, he turned down a job as a miner and instead took a position on a farm. Two months later, he started clearing land on his own.
The whole territory of South Australia is divided into lots, each containing eighty acres, and these are granted to colonists by the government. Any industrious man, by proper cultivation, can not only get a living out of his lot, but lay by pounds 80 a year.
The entire area of South Australia is divided into plots, each containing eighty acres, which the government grants to settlers. Any hardworking man, with proper cultivation, can not only make a living from his plot but also save £80 a year.
Paddy O’Moore knew this. He profited by his own former experience, and laid by every penny he could till he had saved enough to purchase new lots. His family prospered, and his farm also. The Irish peasant became a landed proprietor, and though his little estate had only been under cultivation for two years, he had five hundred acres cleared by his own hands, and five hundred head of cattle. He was his own master, after having been a serf in Europe, and as independent as one can be in the freest country in the world.
Paddy O’Moore understood this. He learned from his past experiences and saved every penny he could until he had enough to buy new land. His family thrived, and so did his farm. The Irish peasant became a landowner, and even though his small estate had only been cultivated for two years, he had cleared five hundred acres with his own hands and owned five hundred cattle. He was his own boss after having been a serf in Europe, enjoying as much independence as one can have in the freest country in the world.
His guests congratulated him heartily as he ended his narration; and Paddy O’Moore no doubt expected confidence for confidence, but he waited in vain. However, he was one of those discreet people who can say, “I tell you who I am, but I don’t ask who you are.” Glenarvan’s great object was to get information about the BRITANNIA, and like a man who goes right to the point, he began at once to interrogate O’Moore as to whether he had heard of the shipwreck.
His guests congratulated him warmly as he finished his story, and Paddy O’Moore was probably expecting a reciprocal gesture, but he waited in vain. Still, he was one of those tactful people who can say, “I’ll tell you who I am, but I won’t ask who you are.” Glenarvan’s main goal was to gather information about the BRITANNIA, so like someone who gets straight to the point, he immediately started questioning O’Moore about whether he’d heard about the shipwreck.
The reply of the Irishman was not favorable; he had never heard the vessel mentioned. For two years, at least, no ship had been wrecked on that coast, neither above nor below the Cape. Now, the date of the catastrophe was within two years. He could, therefore, declare positively that the survivors of the wreck had not been thrown on that part of the western shore. “Now, my Lord,” he added, “may I ask what interest you have in making the inquiry?”
The Irishman’s response wasn’t helpful; he had never heard of the ship. For at least two years, there hadn’t been any wrecks along that coast, neither north nor south of the Cape. Since the disaster occurred within the last two years, he could confidently say that the survivors of the wreck were not found on that section of the western shore. “Now, my Lord,” he added, “can I ask what interest you have in this inquiry?”
This pointed question elicited in reply the whole history of the expedition. Glenarvan related the discovery of the document, and the various attempts that had been made to follow up the precise indications given of the whereabouts of the unfortunate captives; and he concluded his account by expressing his doubt whether they should ever find the Captain after all.
This direct question prompted a full account of the expedition in response. Glenarvan explained how they found the document and the different efforts that had been made to trace the exact locations of the unfortunate captives. He ended his story by expressing his uncertainty about whether they would ever find the Captain after all.
His dispirited tone made a painful impression on the minds of his auditors. Robert and Mary could not keep back their tears, and Paganel had not a word of hope or comfort to give them. John Mangles was grieved to the heart, though he, too, was beginning to yield to the feeling of hopelessness which had crept over the rest, when suddenly the whole party were electrified by hearing a voice exclaim: “My Lord, praise and thank God! if Captain Grant is alive, he is on this Australian continent.”
His downcast tone left a heavy impact on his listeners. Robert and Mary couldn’t hold back their tears, and Paganel had no words of hope or comfort to offer them. John Mangles was deeply saddened as well, though he too was starting to succumb to the sense of hopelessness that had taken over the others, when suddenly the entire group was jolted by a voice shouting: “My Lord, praise and thank God! If Captain Grant is alive, he’s on this Australian continent.”
CHAPTER VII THE QUARTERMASTER OF THE “BRITANNIA”
THE surprise caused by these words cannot be described. Glenarvan sprang to his feet, and pushing back his seat, exclaimed: “Who spoke?”
THE surprise caused by these words is beyond description. Glenarvan jumped to his feet, pushed back his chair, and exclaimed, “Who said that?”
“I did,” said one of the servants, at the far end of the table.
“I did,” said one of the servants, at the far end of the table.
“You, Ayrton!” replied his master, not less bewildered than Glenarvan.
“You, Ayrton!” replied his master, just as confused as Glenarvan.
“Yes, it was I,” rejoined Ayrton in a firm tone, though somewhat agitated voice. “A Scotchman like yourself, my Lord, and one of the shipwrecked crew of the BRITANNIA.”
“Yes, it was me,” Ayrton replied in a steady voice, though somewhat shaken. “A Scotsman like you, my Lord, and one of the shipwrecked crew from the BRITANNIA.”
The effect of such a declaration may be imagined. Mary Grant fell back, half-fainting, in Lady Helena’s arms, overcome by joyful emotion, and Robert, and Mangles, and Paganel started up and toward the man that Paddy O’Moore had addressed as AYRTON. He was a coarse-looking fellow, about forty-five years of age, with very bright eyes, though half-hidden beneath thick, overhanging brows. In spite of extreme leanness there was an air of unusual strength about him. He seemed all bone and nerves, or, to use a Scotch expression, as if he had not wasted time in making fat. He was broad-shouldered and of middle height, and though his features were coarse, his face was so full of intelligence and energy and decision, that he gave one a favorable impression. The interest he excited was still further heightened by the marks of recent suffering imprinted on his countenance. It was evident that he had endured long and severe hardships, and that he had borne them bravely and come off victor.
The impact of such a declaration was clear. Mary Grant collapsed, nearly fainting, in Lady Helena’s arms, overwhelmed with joy. Robert, Mangles, and Paganel jumped up and moved toward the man whom Paddy O’Moore had called AYRTON. He was a rugged-looking guy, about forty-five years old, with very bright eyes, though mostly hidden beneath thick, overhanging brows. Despite being extremely lean, he had an air of unusual strength about him. He appeared to be all bone and nerves, or, to use a Scottish saying, as if he hadn’t wasted any time putting on weight. He was broad-shouldered and of average height, and even though his features were rough, his face was full of intelligence, energy, and determination, which left a positive impression. The interest he sparked was further intensified by the signs of recent suffering etched on his face. It was clear he had endured long and severe hardships, and he had faced them bravely and emerged victorious.
“You are one of the shipwrecked sailors of the BRITANNIA?” was Glenarvan’s first question.
“You’re one of the shipwrecked sailors from the BRITANNIA?” was Glenarvan’s first question.
“Yes, my Lord; Captain Grant’s quartermaster.”
“Yes, my Lord; the quartermaster of Captain Grant.”
“And saved with him after the shipwreck?”
“And who survived with him after the shipwreck?”
“No, my Lord, no. I was separated from him at that terrible moment, for I was swept off the deck as the ship struck.”
“No, my Lord, no. I was taken away from him at that horrifying moment because I was thrown off the deck when the ship hit.”
“Then you are not one of the two sailors mentioned in the document?”
“Then you’re not one of the two sailors mentioned in the document?”
“No; I was not aware of the existence of the document. The captain must have thrown it into the sea when I was no longer on board.”
“No; I didn’t know the document existed. The captain must have thrown it into the sea when I wasn’t on board anymore.”
“But the captain? What about the captain?”
“But what about the captain?”
“I believed he had perished; gone down with all his crew. I imagined myself the sole survivor.”
“I thought he was dead; that he had gone down with his entire crew. I pictured myself as the only survivor.”
“But you said just now, Captain Grant was living.”
“But you just said, Captain Grant is alive.”
“No, I said, ‘if the captain is living.’”
“No, I said, ‘if the captain is alive.’”
“And you added, ‘he is on the Australian continent.’”
“And you added, ‘he is on the Australian continent.’”
“And, indeed, he cannot be anywhere else.”
“And, really, he can’t be anywhere else.”
“Then you don’t know where he is?”
“Then you don’t know where he is?”
“No, my Lord. I say again, I supposed he was buried beneath the waves, or dashed to pieces against the rocks. It was from you I learned that he was still alive.”
“No, my Lord. I’ll say it again, I thought he was buried under the waves, or smashed against the rocks. It was from you that I learned he was still alive.”
“What then do you know?”
"What do you know now?"
“Simply this—if Captain Grant is alive, he is in Australia.”
“Basically, if Captain Grant is alive, he’s in Australia.”
“Where did the shipwreck occur?” asked Major McNabbs.
“Where did the shipwreck happen?” asked Major McNabbs.
This should have been the first question, but in the excitement caused by the unexpected incident, Glenarvan cared more to know where the captain was, than where the BRITANNIA had been lost. After the Major’s inquiry, however, Glenarvan’s examination proceeded more logically, and before long all the details of the event stood out clearly before the minds of the company.
This should have been the first question, but in the excitement from the unexpected incident, Glenarvan was more interested in knowing where the captain was than where the BRITANNIA had gone down. After the Major's inquiry, though, Glenarvan's investigation became more logical, and soon all the details of the event were clearly laid out in everyone's minds.
To the question put by the Major, Ayrton replied:
To the Major's question, Ayrton responded:
“When I was swept off the forecastle, when I was hauling in the jib-boom, the BRITANNIA was running right on the Australian coast. She was not more than two cables’ length from it and consequently she must have struck just there.”
“When I was thrown off the front deck while pulling in the jib-boom, the BRITANNIA was passing right along the Australian coast. She was no more than two cable lengths away from it, so she must have hit just there.”
“In latitude 37 degrees?” asked John Mangles.
“In latitude 37 degrees?” John Mangles asked.
“Yes, in latitude 37 degrees.”
“Yes, at latitude 37 degrees.”
“On the west coast?”
"On the West Coast?"
“No, on the east coast,” was the prompt reply.
“No, on the east coast,” was the quick reply.
“And at what date?”
"And on what date?"
“It was on the night of the 27th of June, 1862.”
“It was on the night of June 27, 1862.”
“Exactly, just exactly,” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Exactly, just exactly,” said Glenarvan.
“You see, then, my Lord,” continued Ayrton, “I might justly say, If Captain Grant is alive, he is on the Australian continent, and it is useless looking for him anywhere else.”
“You see, then, my Lord,” continued Ayrton, “I could rightly say, If Captain Grant is alive, he is on the Australian continent, and it’s pointless to search for him anywhere else.”
“And we will look for him there, and find him too, and save him,” exclaimed Paganel. “Ah, precious document,” he added, with perfect NAIVETE, “you must own you have fallen into the hands of uncommonly shrewd people.”
“And we’ll look for him there, and we’ll find him too, and save him,” exclaimed Paganel. “Ah, valuable document,” he added, with complete naivety, “you have to admit you’ve ended up in the hands of some really clever people.”
But, doubtless, nobody heard his flattering words, for Glenarvan and Lady Helena, and Mary Grant, and Robert, were too much engrossed with Ayrton to listen to anyone else. They pressed round him and grasped his hands. It seemed as if this man’s presence was the sure pledge of Harry Grant’s deliverance. If this sailor had escaped the perils of the shipwreck, why should not the captain? Ayrton was quite sanguine as to his existence; but on what part of the continent he was to be found, that he could not say. The replies the man gave to the thousand questions that assailed him on all sides were remarkably intelligent and exact. All the while he spake, Mary held one of his hands in hers. This sailor was a companion of her father’s, one of the crew of the BRITANNIA. He had lived with Harry Grant, crossed the seas with him and shared his dangers. Mary could not keep her eyes off his face, rough and homely though it was, and she wept for joy.
But surely, nobody heard his flattering words, because Glenarvan, Lady Helena, Mary Grant, and Robert were too focused on Ayrton to pay attention to anyone else. They surrounded him and held his hands tightly. It felt like this man’s presence was a sure sign that Harry Grant would be rescued. If this sailor had survived the shipwreck, why wouldn't the captain? Ayrton was quite optimistic about his survival, but he couldn't say where on the continent he could be found. The answers he gave to the countless questions coming at him from every direction were impressively clear and accurate. While he spoke, Mary held one of his hands in hers. This sailor was a friend of her father’s, part of the BRITANNIA crew. He had lived with Harry Grant, traveled the seas with him, and faced dangers together. Mary couldn't take her eyes off his face, rough and familiar though it was, and she cried tears of joy.
Up to this time no one had ever thought of doubting either the veracity or identity of the quartermaster; but the Major, and perhaps John Mangles, now began to ask themselves if this Ayrton’s word was to be absolutely believed. There was something suspicious about this unexpected meeting. Certainly the man had mentioned facts and dates which corresponded, and the minuteness of his details was most striking. Still exactness of details was no positive proof. Indeed, it has been noticed that a falsehood has sometimes gained ground by being exceedingly particular in minutiae. McNabbs, therefore, prudently refrained from committing himself by expressing any opinion.
Up until now, no one had ever thought to question the truthfulness or identity of the quartermaster; however, the Major, and possibly John Mangles, began to wonder if Ayrton’s claims could be completely trusted. There was something off about this unexpected encounter. The man did mention facts and dates that matched, and the level of detail he provided was quite impressive. Still, being precise doesn’t guarantee the truth. In fact, it has been observed that lies sometimes gain traction by being very specific about the details. McNabbs, therefore, wisely chose not to commit himself by sharing any opinion.
John Mangles, however, was soon convinced when he heard Ayrton speak to the young girl about her father. He knew Mary and Robert quite well. He had seen them in Glasgow when the ship sailed. He remembered them at the farewell breakfast given on board the BRITANNIA to the captain’s friends, at which Sheriff Mcintyre was present. Robert, then a boy of ten years old, had been given into his charge, and he ran away and tried to climb the rigging.
John Mangles, however, became convinced when he heard Ayrton talking to the young girl about her father. He knew Mary and Robert pretty well. He had seen them in Glasgow when the ship set sail. He remembered them at the farewell breakfast held on the BRITANNIA for the captain’s friends, where Sheriff Mcintyre was present. Robert, who was just ten years old at the time, had been entrusted to his care, and he had run away and tried to climb the rigging.
“Yes, that I did, it is quite right,” said Robert.
“Yes, I did, that’s correct,” said Robert.
He went on to mention several other trifling incidents, without attaching the importance to them that John Mangles did, and when he stopped Mary Grant said, in her soft voice: “Oh, go on, Mr. Ayrton, tell us more about our father.”
He went on to mention several other minor incidents, without giving them the significance that John Mangles did, and when he finished, Mary Grant said in her gentle voice, “Oh, keep going, Mr. Ayrton, tell us more about our dad.”
The quartermaster did his best to satisfy the poor girl, and Glenarvan did not interrupt him, though a score of questions far more important crowded into his mind. Lady Helena made him look at Mary’s beaming face, and the words he was about to utter remained unspoken.
The quartermaster tried hard to please the poor girl, and Glenarvan didn’t interrupt him, even though a hundred more important questions filled his mind. Lady Helena made him focus on Mary’s smiling face, and the words he was about to say stayed unsaid.
Ayrton gave an account of the BRITANNIA’S voyage across the Pacific. Mary knew most of it before, as news of the ship had come regularly up to the month of May, 1862. In the course of the year Harry Grant had touched at all the principal ports. He had been to the Hebrides, to New Guinea, New Zealand, and New Caledonia, and had succeeded in finding an important point on the western coast of Papua, where the establishment of a Scotch colony seemed to him easy, and its prosperity certain. A good port on the Molucca and Philippine route must attract ships, especially when the opening of the Suez Canal would have supplanted the Cape route. Harry Grant was one of those who appreciated the great work of M. De Lesseps, and would not allow political rivalries to interfere with international interests.
Ayrton shared the story of the BRITANNIA’S journey across the Pacific. Mary already knew most of it, since updates about the ship had been arriving regularly until May 1862. Throughout the year, Harry Grant had visited all the main ports. He traveled to the Hebrides, New Guinea, New Zealand, and New Caledonia, and successfully identified a key location on the western coast of Papua where he believed establishing a Scottish colony would be straightforward, and its success likely. A well-positioned port on the Molucca and Philippine route would attract ships, especially since the opening of the Suez Canal would replace the Cape route. Harry Grant was someone who valued the significant work of M. De Lesseps and refused to let political rivalries get in the way of international interests.
After reconnoitering Papua, the BRITANNIA went to provision herself at Callao, and left that port on the 30th of May, 1862, to return to Europe by the Indian Ocean and the Cape. Three weeks afterward, his vessel was disabled by a fearful storm in which they were caught, and obliged to cut away the masts. A leak sprang in the hold, and could not be stopped. The crew were too exhausted to work the pumps, and for eight days the BRITANNIA was tossed about in the hurricane like a shuttlecock. She had six feet of water in her hold, and was gradually sinking. The boats had been all carried away by the tempest; death stared them in the face, when, on the night of the 22d of June, as Paganel had rightly supposed, they came in sight of the eastern coast of Australia.
After scouting Papua, the BRITANNIA went to restock supplies at Callao and left that port on May 30, 1862, to head back to Europe via the Indian Ocean and the Cape. Three weeks later, their ship was damaged by a terrible storm they got caught in, forcing them to cut away the masts. A leak developed in the hold that couldn’t be stopped. The crew were too tired to operate the pumps, and for eight days the BRITANNIA was tossed around in the hurricane like a shuttlecock. There were six feet of water in the hold, and she was slowly sinking. The boats had all been swept away by the storm; death was staring them down when, on the night of June 22, as Paganel had correctly predicted, they spotted the eastern coast of Australia.
The ship soon neared the shore, and presently dashed violently against it. Ayrton was swept off by a wave, and thrown among the breakers, where he lost consciousness. When he recovered, he found himself in the hands of natives, who dragged him away into the interior of the country. Since that time he had never heard the BRITANNIA’s name mentioned, and reasonably enough came to the conclusion that she had gone down with all hands off the dangerous reefs of Twofold Bay.
The ship soon got close to the shore and then crashed violently against it. Ayrton was swept away by a wave and thrown among the surf, where he lost consciousness. When he came to, he found himself in the hands of locals, who dragged him into the interior of the country. Since then, he had never heard the name BRITANNIA mentioned, and logically concluded that she must have sunk with everyone aboard near the treacherous reefs of Twofold Bay.
This ended Ayrton’s recital, and more than once sorrowful exclamations were evoked by the story. The Major could not, in common justice, doubt its authenticity. The sailor was then asked to narrate his own personal history, which was short and simple enough. He had been carried by a tribe of natives four hundred miles north of the 37th parallel. He spent a miserable existence there—not that he was ill-treated, but the natives themselves lived miserably. He passed two long years of painful slavery among them, but always cherished in his heart the hope of one day regaining his freedom, and watching for the slightest opportunity that might turn up, though he knew that his flight would be attended with innumerable dangers.
This ended Ayrton’s story, and more than once, sad reactions were stirred by what he shared. The Major couldn’t, in all fairness, doubt its truth. The sailor was then asked to share his own personal story, which was quite brief and straightforward. He had been taken by a tribe of natives four hundred miles north of the 37th parallel. He lived a miserable life there—not because he was treated poorly, but because the natives themselves lived in hardship. He endured two long years of painful slavery among them, but he always held onto the hope of one day regaining his freedom, watching for any chance that might arise, even though he knew that escaping would come with countless dangers.
At length one night in October, 1864, he managed to escape the vigilance of the natives, and took refuge in the depths of immense forests. For a whole month he subsisted on roots, edible ferns and mimosa gums, wandering through vast solitudes, guiding himself by the sun during the day and by the stars at night. He went on, though often almost despairingly, through bogs and rivers, and across mountains, till he had traversed the whole of the uninhabited part of the continent, where only a few bold travelers have ventured; and at last, in an exhausted and all but dying condition, he reached the hospitable dwelling of Paddy O’Moore, where he said he had found a happy home in exchange for his labor.
One night in October 1864, he finally escaped the watchfulness of the locals and took refuge in the depths of vast forests. For a whole month, he lived on roots, edible ferns, and mimosa gums, wandering through expansive solitude, navigating by the sun during the day and by the stars at night. He continued on, often feeling almost hopeless, through swamps and rivers, and over mountains, until he had crossed the entire uninhabited part of the continent, where only a few daring travelers have ventured. Eventually, in a state of exhaustion and near death, he reached the welcoming home of Paddy O’Moore, where he claimed he had found a happy home in exchange for his work.
“And if Ayrton speaks well of me,” said the Irish settler, when the narrative ended, “I have nothing but good to say of him. He is an honest, intelligent fellow and a good worker; and as long as he pleases, Paddy O’Moore’s house shall be his.”
“And if Ayrton has nice things to say about me,” said the Irish settler when the story was over, “I have only good things to say about him. He’s an honest, smart guy and a hard worker; and as long as he’s happy, Paddy O’Moore’s house will be his.”
Ayrton thanked him by a gesture, and waited silently for any fresh question that might be put to him, though he thought to himself that he surely must have satisfied all legitimate curiosity. What could remain to be said that he had not said a hundred times already. Glenarvan was just about to open a discussion about their future plan of action, profiting by this rencontre with Ayrton, and by the information he had given them, when Major McNabbs, addressing the sailor said, “You were quartermaster, you say, on the BRITANNIA?”
Ayrton thanked him with a nod and waited silently for any new questions that might come up, even though he thought to himself that he had probably satisfied all reasonable curiosity. What else could be said that he hadn't already mentioned a hundred times? Glenarvan was just about to start a conversation about their future plans, taking advantage of this meeting with Ayrton and the information he had shared, when Major McNabbs turned to the sailor and said, “You were the quartermaster on the BRITANNIA, right?”
“Yes,” replied Ayrton, without the least hesitation.
“Yes,” replied Ayrton, without any hesitation.
But as if conscious that a certain feeling of mistrust, however slight, had prompted the inquiry, he added, “I have my shipping papers with me; I saved them from the wreck.”
But as if aware that a hint of distrust, however minor, had sparked the question, he added, “I have my shipping papers with me; I saved them from the wreck.”
He left the room immediately to fetch his official document, and, though hardly absent a minute, Paddy O’Moore managed to say, “My Lord, you may trust Ayrton; I vouch for his being an honest man. He has been two months now in my service, and I have never had once to find fault with him. I knew all this story of his shipwreck and his captivity. He is a true man, worthy of your entire confidence.”
He left the room right away to get his official document, and although he was gone for less than a minute, Paddy O'Moore was able to say, “My Lord, you can trust Ayrton; I guarantee he's an honest man. He’s been working for me for two months now, and I've never had to find fault with him. I know all about his shipwreck and his captivity. He’s a genuine person, deserving of your full confidence.”
Glenarvan was on the point of replying that he had never doubted his good faith, when the man came in and brought his engagement written out in due form. It was a paper signed by the shipowners and Captain Grant. Mary recognized her father’s writing at once. It was to certify that “Tom Ayrton, able-bodied seaman, was engaged as quartermaster on board the three-mast vessel, the BRITANNIA, Glasgow.”
Glenarvan was about to say that he had always trusted his good faith when the man entered with his contract written out properly. It was a document signed by the shipowners and Captain Grant. Mary immediately recognized her father's handwriting. It confirmed that “Tom Ayrton, able-bodied seaman, was hired as quartermaster on board the three-mast vessel, the BRITANNIA, Glasgow.”
There could not possibly be the least doubt now of Ayrton’s identity, for it would have been difficult to account for his possession of the document if he were not the man named in it.
There couldn't possibly be any doubt now about Ayrton's identity, because it would have been hard to explain how he had the document if he wasn't the person named in it.
“Now then,” said Glenarvan, “I wish to ask everyone’s opinion as to what is best to be done. Your advice, Ayrton, will be particularly valuable, and I shall be much obliged if you would let us have it.”
“Alright then,” said Glenarvan, “I’d like to hear everyone’s thoughts on what we should do next. Ayrton, your input will be especially important, and I’d really appreciate it if you could share your opinion.”
After a few minutes’ thought, Ayrton replied—“I thank you, my Lord, for the confidence you show towards me, and I hope to prove worthy of it. I have some knowledge of the country, and the habits of the natives, and if I can be of any service to you—”
After a few minutes of thinking, Ayrton replied, “Thank you, my Lord, for the trust you have in me. I hope to live up to it. I know some about the land and the ways of the locals, and if I can be of any help to you—”
“Most certainly you can,” interrupted Glenarvan.
“Of course you can,” interrupted Glenarvan.
“I think with you,” resumed Ayrton, “that the captain and his two sailors have escaped alive from the wreck, but since they have not found their way to the English settlement, nor been seen any where, I have no doubt that their fate has been similar to my own, and that they are prisoners in the hands of some of the native tribes.”
“I agree with you,” Ayrton continued, “that the captain and his two sailors have survived the wreck, but since they haven't made it to the English settlement or been spotted anywhere, I’m sure their situation is similar to mine, and they are captives of some local tribes.”
“That’s exactly what I have always argued,” said Paganel. “The shipwrecked men were taken prisoners, as they feared. But must we conclude without question that, like yourself, they have been dragged away north of the 37th parallel?”
“That’s exactly what I’ve always said,” Paganel replied. “The shipwrecked men were taken captive, just like they feared. But can we really conclude without a doubt that, like you, they were taken north of the 37th parallel?”
“I should suppose so, sir; for hostile tribes would hardly remain anywhere near the districts under the British rule.”
“I guess that’s true, sir; because hostile tribes would probably stay away from areas controlled by the British.”
“That will complicate our search,” said Glenarvan, somewhat disconcerted. “How can we possibly find traces of the captives in the heart of so vast a continent?”
"That's going to make our search more complicated," Glenarvan said, a bit unsettled. "How are we even supposed to find any signs of the captives in such a huge continent?"
No one replied, though Lady Helena’s questioning glances at her companions seemed to press for an answer. Paganel even was silent. His ingenuity for once was at fault. John Mangles paced the cabin with great strides, as if he fancied himself on the deck of his ship, evidently quite nonplussed.
No one answered, even though Lady Helena kept looking at her companions as if urging them to respond. Paganel also stayed quiet. For once, his cleverness had failed him. John Mangles walked back and forth in the cabin with large strides, as if he imagined he were on the deck of his ship, clearly at a loss.
“And you, Mr. Ayrton,” said Lady Helena at last, “what would you do?”
“And you, Mr. Ayrton,” Lady Helena finally said, “what would you do?”
“Madam,” replied Ayrton, readily enough, “I should re-embark in the DUNCAN, and go right to the scene of the catastrophe. There I should be guided by circumstances, and by any chance indications we might discover.”
“Ma'am,” Ayrton replied quickly, “I would board the DUNCAN again and head straight to where the disaster happened. There, I would let the situation and any clues we might find guide me.”
“Very good,” returned Glenarvan; “but we must wait till the DUNCAN is repaired.”
“Sounds great,” replied Glenarvan; “but we need to wait until the DUNCAN is fixed.”
“Ah, she has been injured then?” said Ayrton.
“Ah, so she’s been hurt then?” said Ayrton.
“Yes,” replied Mangles.
"Yes," Mangles replied.
“To any serious extent?”
"To any significant extent?"
“No; but such injuries as require more skilful workmanship than we have on board. One of the branches of the screw is twisted, and we cannot get it repaired nearer than Melbourne.”
“No; but we have injuries that need more skilled work than we have on board. One of the branches of the screw is twisted, and we can't get it repaired any closer than Melbourne.”
“Well, let the ship go to Melbourne then,” said Paganel, “and we will go without her to Twofold Bay.”
“Well, let the ship go to Melbourne then,” said Paganel, “and we’ll head to Twofold Bay without her.”
“And how?” asked Mangles.
“And how’s that?” asked Mangles.
“By crossing Australia as we crossed America, keeping along the 37th parallel.”
“By traveling across Australia just like we traveled across America, staying close to the 37th parallel.”
“But the DUNCAN?” repeated Ayrton, as if particularly anxious on that score.
“But the DUNCAN?” Ayrton repeated, sounding especially concerned about that.
“The DUNCAN can rejoin us, or we can rejoin her, as the case may be. Should we discover Captain Grant in the course of our journey, we can all return together to Melbourne. If we have to go on to the coast, on the contrary, then the DUNCAN can come to us there. Who has any objection to make? Have you, Major?”
“The DUNCAN can come back to us, or we can go back to her, depending on the situation. If we find Captain Grant during our journey, we can all head back to Melbourne together. If we need to continue to the coast, then the DUNCAN can meet us there. Does anyone have any objections? How about you, Major?”
“No, not if there is a practicable route across Australia.”
“No, not if there's a viable route across Australia.”
“So practicable, that I propose Lady Helena and Miss Grant should accompany us.”
"So practical that I suggest Lady Helena and Miss Grant should join us."
“Are you speaking seriously?” asked Glenarvan.
"Are you serious?" Glenarvan asked.
“Perfectly so, my Lord. It is a journey of 350 miles, not more. If we go twelve miles a day it will barely take us a month, just long enough to put the vessel in trim. If we had to cross the continent in a lower latitude, at its wildest part, and traverse immense deserts, where there is no water and where the heat is tropical, and go where the most adventurous travelers have never yet ventured, that would be a different matter. But the 37th parallel cuts only through the province of Victoria, quite an English country, with roads and railways, and well populated almost everywhere. It is a journey you might make, almost, in a chaise, though a wagon would be better. It is a mere trip from London to Edinburgh, nothing more.”
“Exactly, my Lord. It’s a journey of 350 miles, no more. If we travel twelve miles a day, it’ll take us just under a month, which is just enough time to get the ship ready. If we had to cross the continent at a lower latitude, through its wildest areas, and navigate huge deserts with no water and tropical heat, going to places where even the most daring travelers haven’t been, that would be a different story. But the 37th parallel only goes through Victoria, which is quite an English area, with roads and railways, and it's well populated almost everywhere. It’s a trip you could almost do in a carriage, although a wagon would be better. It’s just a journey from London to Edinburgh, nothing more.”
“What about wild beasts, though?” asked Glenarvan, anxious to go into all the difficulties of the proposal.
“What about wild animals, though?” asked Glenarvan, eager to explore all the challenges of the proposal.
“There are no wild beasts in Australia.”
“There are no wild animals in Australia.”
“And how about the savages?”
"And what about the savages?"
“There are no savages in this latitude, and if there were, they are not cruel, like the New Zealanders.”
“There are no savages in this area, and if there were, they aren't cruel like the New Zealanders.”
“And the convicts?”
“What about the convicts?”
“There are no convicts in the southern provinces, only in the eastern colonies. The province of Victoria not only refused to admit them, but passed a law to prevent any ticket-of-leave men from other provinces from entering her territories. This very year the Government threatened to withdraw its subsidy from the Peninsular Company if their vessels continued to take in coal in those western parts of Australia where convicts are admitted. What! Don’t you know that, and you an Englishman?”
“There are no prisoners in the southern provinces, only in the eastern colonies. The province of Victoria not only refused to accept them, but also enacted a law to stop any parolees from other provinces from entering its territory. This very year, the Government warned that it would cut funding to the Peninsular Company if their ships kept loading coal in those western regions of Australia where prisoners are allowed. What! Don’t you know that, and you being an Englishman?”
“In the first place, I beg leave to say I am not an Englishman,” replied Glenarvan.
“In the first place, I want to make it clear that I’m not English,” replied Glenarvan.
“What M. Paganel says is perfectly correct,” said Paddy O’Moore. “Not only the province of Victoria, but also Southern Australia, Queensland, and even Tasmania, have agreed to expel convicts from their territories. Ever since I have been on this farm, I have never heard of one in this Province.”
“What M. Paganel says is totally true,” said Paddy O’Moore. “Not just the province of Victoria, but also South Australia, Queensland, and even Tasmania, have decided to kick convicts out of their areas. Since I’ve been on this farm, I've never heard of one in this province.”
“And I can speak for myself. I have never come across one.”
“And I can speak for myself. I have never seen one.”
“You see then, friends,” went on Jacques Paganel, “there are few if any savages, no ferocious animals, no convicts, and there are not many countries of Europe for which you can say as much. Well, will you go?”
“You see then, friends,” continued Jacques Paganel, “there are hardly any savages, no wild animals, no criminals, and not many countries in Europe you can say the same about. So, will you go?”
“What do you think, Helena?” asked Glenarvan.
“What do you think, Helena?” Glenarvan asked.
“What we all think, dear Edward,” replied Lady Helena, turning toward her companions; “let us be off at once.”
“What we all think, dear Edward,” replied Lady Helena, turning toward her companions, “let’s leave right away.”
CHAPTER VIII PREPARATION FOR THE JOURNEY
GLENARVAN never lost much time between adopting an idea and carrying it out. As soon as he consented to Paganel’s proposition, he gave immediate orders to make arrangements for the journey with as little delay as possible. The time of starting was fixed for the 22d of December, the next day but one.
GLENARVAN never wasted much time between coming up with an idea and acting on it. As soon as he agreed to Paganel’s suggestion, he immediately instructed everyone to make the necessary arrangements for the journey without any delays. The departure was set for December 22nd, the day after tomorrow.
What results might not come out of this journey. The presence of Harry Grant had become an indisputable fact, and the chances of finding him had increased. Not that anyone expected to discover the captain exactly on the 37th parallel, which they intended strictly to follow, but they might come upon his track, and at all events, they were going to the actual spot where the wreck had occurred. That was the principal point.
What outcomes might arise from this journey. The presence of Harry Grant had become undeniable, and the chances of finding him had improved. Not that anyone expected to locate the captain precisely on the 37th parallel they planned to follow, but they might stumble upon his trail, and in any case, they were heading to the exact location where the wreck had happened. That was the main point.
Besides, if Ayrton consented to join them and act as their guide through the forests of the province of Victoria and right to the eastern coast, they would have a fresh chance of success. Glenarvan was sensible of this, and asked his host whether he would have any great objection to his asking Ayrton to accompany them, for he felt particularly desirous of securing the assistance of Harry Grant’s old companion.
Besides, if Ayrton agreed to join them and be their guide through the forests of Victoria all the way to the eastern coast, they would have a new chance of success. Glenarvan recognized this and asked his host if he would have any serious objections to his asking Ayrton to come with them, as he was very eager to secure the help of Harry Grant’s old companion.
Paddy O’Moore consented, though he would regret the loss of his excellent servant.
Paddy O’Moore agreed, even though he would miss his great servant.
“Well, then, Ayrton, will you come with us in our search expedition?”
“Well, Ayrton, are you coming with us on our search expedition?”
Ayrton did not reply immediately. He even showed signs of hesitation; but at last, after due reflection, said, “Yes, my Lord, I will go with you, and if I can not take you to Captain Grant, I can at least take you to the very place where his ship struck.”
Ayrton didn’t answer right away. He actually seemed a bit uncertain, but finally, after thinking it over, he said, “Yes, my Lord, I’ll go with you, and if I can’t take you to Captain Grant, I can at least show you the exact spot where his ship went down.”
“Thanks, Ayrton.”
“Thanks, Ayrton.”
“One question, my Lord.”
"One question, my Lord."
“Well?”
"What's up?"
“Where will you meet the DUNCAN again?”
“Where will you meet DUNCAN again?”
“At Melbourne, unless we traverse the whole continent from coast to coast.”
“At Melbourne, unless we travel the entire continent from coast to coast.”
“But the captain?”
“But what about the captain?”
“The captain will await my instructions in the port of Melbourne.”
“The captain will wait for my instructions in the port of Melbourne.”
“You may depend on me then, my Lord.”
"You can count on me then, my Lord."
“I will, Ayrton.”
"I will, Ayrton."
The quartermaster was warmly thanked by the passengers of the DUNCAN, and the children loaded him with caresses. Everyone rejoiced in his decision except the Irishman, who lost in him an intelligent and faithful helper. But Paddy understood the importance Glenarvan attached to the presence of the man, and submitted. The whole party then returned to the ship, after arranging a rendezvous with Ayrton, and ordering him to procure the necessary means of conveyance across the country.
The quartermaster was warmly thanked by the passengers of the DUNCAN, and the children showered him with affection. Everyone was happy with his decision except for the Irishman, who saw him as a smart and loyal ally lost to them. But Paddy realized how much Glenarvan valued having him there, so he accepted it. The whole group then went back to the ship after setting up a meeting with Ayrton and telling him to get the necessary transportation across the country.
When John Mangles supported the proposition of Paganel, he took for granted that he should accompany the expedition. He began to speak to Glenarvan at once about it, and adduced all sorts of arguments to advance his cause—his devotion to Lady Helena and his Lordship, how useful could he be in organizing the party, and how useless on board the DUNCAN; everything, in fact, but the main reason, and that he had no need to bring forward.
When John Mangles agreed with Paganel's proposal, he assumed he would join the expedition. He immediately started discussing it with Glenarvan and presented various arguments to support his case—his loyalty to Lady Helena and her Lordship, how valuable he would be in organizing the group, and how unhelpful he would be on the DUNCAN; everything, in fact, except for the main reason, which he didn’t need to mention.
“I’ll only ask you one question, John,” said Glenarvan. “Have you entire confidence in your chief officer?”
“I'll just ask you one thing, John,” Glenarvan said. “Do you fully trust your captain?”
“Absolute,” replied Mangles, “Tom Austin is a good sailor. He will take the ship to her destination, see that the repairs are skilfully executed, and bring her back on the appointed day. Tom is a slave to duty and discipline. Never would he take it upon himself to alter or retard the execution of an order. Your Lordship may rely on him as on myself.”
“Absolutely,” Mangles replied, “Tom Austin is a skilled sailor. He will get the ship to her destination, ensure the repairs are done properly, and bring her back on the scheduled day. Tom is dedicated to his duties and follows rules strictly. He would never take it upon himself to change or delay an order. Your Lordship can trust him just like you trust me.”
“Very well then, John,” replied Glenarvan. “You shall go with us, for it would be advisable,” he added, smiling, “that you should be there when we find Mary Grant’s father.”
“Alright then, John,” Glenarvan replied. “You should come with us, because it would be wise,” he added with a smile, “for you to be there when we find Mary Grant’s father.”
“Oh! your Lordship,” murmured John, turning pale. He could say no more, but grasped Lord Glenarvan’s hand.
“Oh! my Lord,” murmured John, turning pale. He could say no more, but grasped Lord Glenarvan’s hand.
Next day, John Mangles and the ship’s carpenter, accompanied by sailors carrying provisions, went back to Paddy O’Moore’s house to consult the Irishman about the best method of transport. All the family met him, ready to give their best help. Ayrton was there, and gave the benefit of his experience.
Next day, John Mangles and the ship’s carpenter, along with sailors carrying supplies, returned to Paddy O’Moore’s house to talk to the Irishman about the best way to transport things. The whole family was there, eager to lend a hand. Ayrton was present as well, offering insights from his experience.
On one point both he and Paddy agreed, that the journey should be made in a bullock-wagon by the ladies, and that the gentlemen should ride on horseback. Paddy could furnish both bullocks and vehicle. The vehicle was a cart twenty feet long, covered over by a tilt, and resting on four large wheels without spokes or felloes, or iron tires—in a word, plain wooden discs. The front and hinder part were connected by means of a rude mechanical contrivance, which did not allow of the vehicle turning quickly. There was a pole in front thirty-five feet long, to which the bullocks were to be yoked in couples. These animals were able to draw both with head and neck, as their yoke was fastened on the nape of the neck, and to this a collar was attached by an iron peg. It required great skill to drive such a long, narrow, shaky concern, and to guide such a team by a goad; but Ayrton had served his apprenticeship to it on the Irishman’s farm, and Paddy could answer for his competency. The role of conductor was therefore assigned to him.
On one thing, both he and Paddy agreed: the ladies would travel in a bullock wagon, while the gentlemen would ride on horseback. Paddy could provide both the bullocks and the wagon. The wagon was twenty feet long, covered with a canopy, and sat on four large wheels without spokes, felloes, or iron tires—in short, just plain wooden discs. The front and back were connected by a rough mechanical setup that didn't allow for quick turns. There was a 35-foot long pole in front where the bullocks were to be yoked in pairs. These animals could pull with both their heads and necks, as their yoke was fastened at the nape of their neck, with a collar attached by an iron peg. It took a lot of skill to drive such a long, narrow, shaky vehicle and to steer the team with a goad, but Ayrton had learned the ropes on the Irishman’s farm, and Paddy vouched for his ability. So, he was assigned the role of driver.
There were no springs to the wagon, and, consequently, it was not likely to be very comfortable; but, such as it was, they had to take it. But if the rough construction could not be altered, John Mangles resolved that the interior should be made as easy as possible. His first care was to divide it into two compartments by a wooden partition. The back one was intended for the provisions and luggage, and M. Olbinett’s portable kitchen. The front was set apart especially for the ladies, and, under the carpenter’s hands, was to be speedily converted into a comfortable room, covered with a thick carpet, and fitted up with a toilet table and two couches. Thick leather curtains shut in this apartment, and protected the occupants from the chilliness of the nights. In case of necessity, the gentlemen might shelter themselves here, when the violent rains came on, but a tent was to be their usual resting-place when the caravan camped for the night. John Mangles exercised all his ingenuity in furnishing the small space with everything that the two ladies could possibly require, and he succeeded so well, that neither Lady Helena nor Mary had much reason to regret leaving their cosy cabins on board the DUNCAN.
There were no springs in the wagon, so it wasn't likely to be very comfortable; but, given the situation, they had no choice but to take it. However, since the rough construction couldn't be changed, John Mangles decided to make the inside as comfortable as possible. His first step was to divide it into two sections with a wooden partition. The back section was meant for provisions, luggage, and M. Olbinett’s portable kitchen. The front section was specifically for the ladies and was to be quickly turned into a cozy room, complete with a thick carpet, a vanity, and two couches, thanks to the carpenter's work. Thick leather curtains enclosed this area, keeping the occupants warm during chilly nights. If necessary, the gentlemen could also take shelter here during heavy rains, but a tent would be their usual resting place when the caravan camped for the night. John Mangles used all his creativity to furnish the small space with everything the two ladies might need, and he succeeded so well that neither Lady Helena nor Mary had much reason to miss their cozy cabins on board the DUNCAN.
For the rest of the party, the preparations were soon made, for they needed much less. Strong horses were provided for Lord Glenarvan, Paganel, Robert Grant, McNabbs, and John Mangles; also for the two sailors, Wilson and Mulrady, who were to accompany their captain. Ayrton’s place was, of course, to be in front of the wagon, and M. Olbinett, who did not much care for equitation, was to make room for himself among the baggage. Horses and bullocks were grazing in the Irishman’s meadows, ready to fetch at a moment’s notice.
For the rest of the party, the preparations were quickly made since they needed much less. Strong horses were arranged for Lord Glenarvan, Paganel, Robert Grant, McNabbs, and John Mangles, as well as for the two sailors, Wilson and Mulrady, who would be accompanying their captain. Ayrton was, of course, set to be in front of the wagon, while M. Olbinett, who wasn't too fond of riding, found a spot for himself among the luggage. Horses and cattle were grazing in the Irishman’s fields, ready to be brought in at a moment’s notice.
After all arrangements were made, and the carpenter set to work, John Mangles escorted the Irishman and his family back to the vessel, for Paddy wished to return the visit of Lord Glenarvan. Ayrton thought proper to go too, and about four o’clock the party came over the side of the DUNCAN.
After everything was arranged and the carpenter got to work, John Mangles took the Irishman and his family back to the ship because Paddy wanted to return Lord Glenarvan's visit. Ayrton thought it was best to go along as well, and around four o’clock, the group climbed aboard the DUNCAN.
They were received with open arms. Glenarvan would not be outstripped in politeness, and invited his visitors to stop and dine. His hospitality was willingly accepted. Paddy was quite amazed at the splendor of the saloon, and was loud in admiration of the fitting up of the cabins, and the carpets and hangings, as well as of the polished maple-wood of the upper deck. Ayrton’s approbation was much less hearty, for he considered it mere costly superfluity.
They were welcomed warmly. Glenarvan was determined to show his politeness and invited his guests to stay for dinner. His offer was happily accepted. Paddy was quite impressed by the beauty of the saloon, and he enthusiastically praised the decoration of the cabins, the carpets and drapes, as well as the polished maple wood of the upper deck. Ayrton, however, was much less impressed, seeing it as just unnecessary extravagance.
But when he examined the yacht with a sailor’s eye, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA was as enthusiastic about it as Paddy. He went down into the hold, inspected the screw department and the engine-room, examining the engine thoroughly, and inquired about its power and consumption. He explored the coal-bunkers, the store-room, the powder-store, and armory, in which last he seemed to be particularly attracted by a cannon mounted on the forecastle. Glenarvan saw he had to do with a man who understood such matters, as was evident from his questions. Ayrton concluded his investigations by a survey of the masts and rigging.
But when he checked out the yacht with a sailor’s perspective, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA was just as excited about it as Paddy. He went down into the hold, inspected the engine department and the engine room, examining the engine closely, and asked about its power and fuel consumption. He looked through the coal bunkers, the storage room, the powder store, and the armory, where he seemed especially interested in a cannon mounted on the forecastle. Glenarvan realized he was dealing with someone who knew what they were talking about, as shown by his questions. Ayrton finished his investigation by looking over the masts and rigging.
“You have a fine vessel, my Lord,” he said after his curiosity was satisfied.
"You have a great ship, my Lord," he said after his curiosity was satisfied.
“A good one, and that is best,” replied Glenarvan.
“A good one, and that’s the best,” replied Glenarvan.
“And what is her tonnage?”
"And what is her weight?"
“Two hundred and ten tons.”
"210 tons."
“I don’t think I am far out,” continued Ayrton, “in judging her speed at fifteen knots. I should say she could do that easily.”
“I don’t think I’m being unreasonable,” Ayrton continued, “in assessing her speed at fifteen knots. I’d say she could manage that without a problem.”
“Say seventeen,” put in John Mangles, “and you’ve hit the mark.”
“Say seventeen,” John Mangles chimed in, “and you’ve got it right.”
“Seventeen!” exclaimed the quartermaster. “Why, not a man-of-war—not the best among them, I mean—could chase her!”
“Seventeen!” the quartermaster exclaimed. “No warship—not even the best of them—could chase her!”
“Not one,” replied Mangles. “The DUNCAN is a regular racing yacht, and would never let herself be beaten.”
“Not one,” replied Mangles. “The DUNCAN is a true racing yacht and would never allow herself to be beaten.”
“Even at sailing?” asked Ayrton.
"Even at sailing?" Ayrton asked.
“Even at sailing.”
"Even while sailing."
“Well, my Lord, and you too, captain,” returned Ayrton, “allow a sailor who knows what a ship is worth, to compliment you on yours.”
"Well, my Lord, and you too, captain," Ayrton replied, "let a sailor who knows the value of a ship compliment you on yours."
“Stay on board of her, then, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan; “it rests with yourself to call it yours.”
“Stay with her, then, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan; “it’s up to you to claim her as yours.”
“I will think of it, my Lord,” was all Ayrton’s reply.
“I'll think about it, my Lord,” was all Ayrton said.
Just then M. Olbinett came to announce dinner, and his Lordship repaired with his guests to the saloon.
Just then, M. Olbinett came to announce dinner, and his Lordship went with his guests to the living room.
“That Ayrton is an intelligent man,” said Paganel to the Major.
“That Ayrton is a smart guy,” Paganel said to the Major.
“Too intelligent!” muttered McNabbs, who, without any apparent reason, had taken a great dislike to the face and manners of the quartermaster.
“Too smart!” McNabbs grumbled, who, for no clear reason, had developed a strong dislike for the quartermaster's face and behavior.
During the dinner, Ayrton gave some interesting details about the Australian continent, which he knew perfectly. He asked how many sailors were going to accompany the expedition, and seemed astonished to hear that only two were going. He advised Glenarvan to take all his best men, and even urged him to do it, which advice, by the way, ought to have removed the Major’s suspicion.
During dinner, Ayrton shared some fascinating details about the Australian continent, which he knew inside and out. He asked how many sailors would be joining the expedition and seemed surprised to learn that only two were going. He recommended that Glenarvan take all his best men and even urged him to do so, a suggestion that, by the way, should have eased the Major’s doubts.
“But,” said Glenarvan, “our journey is not dangerous, is it?”
“But,” said Glenarvan, “our trip isn’t dangerous, right?”
“Not at all,” replied Ayrton, quickly.
“Not at all,” Ayrton replied quickly.
“Well then, we’ll have all the men we can on board. Hands will be wanted to work the ship, and to help in the repairs. Besides, it is of the utmost importance that she should meet us to the very day, at whatever place may be ultimately selected. Consequently, we must not lessen her crew.”
“Well then, we’ll have as many men as we can on board. We’ll need hands to operate the ship and assist with repairs. Plus, it’s absolutely crucial that she meets us on the exact day, at whatever location is finally chosen. So, we can’t reduce her crew.”
Ayrton said nothing more, as if convinced his Lordship was right.
Ayrton didn't say anything else, as if he believed his Lordship was right.
When evening came, Scotch and Irish separated. Ayrton and Paddy O’Moore and family returned home. Horses and wagons were to be ready the next day, and eight o’clock in the morning was fixed for starting.
When evening arrived, the Scots and the Irish parted ways. Ayrton, Paddy O’Moore, and his family headed back home. They needed to have the horses and wagons ready for the next day, with an 8:00 AM departure planned.
Lady Helena and Mary Grant soon made their preparations. They had less to do than Jacques Paganel, for he spent half the night in arranging, and wiping, and rubbing up the lenses of his telescope. Of course, next morning he slept on till the Major’s stentorian voice roused him.
Lady Helena and Mary Grant quickly got ready. They had less to do than Jacques Paganel, who spent half the night organizing, cleaning, and polishing the lenses of his telescope. Naturally, the next morning he slept in until the Major's loud voice woke him up.
The luggage was already conveyed to the farm, thanks to John Mangles, and a boat was waiting to take the passengers. They were soon seated, and the young captain gave his final orders to Tom Austin, his chief officer. He impressed upon him that he was to wait at Melbourne for Lord Glenarvan’s commands, and to obey them scrupulously, whatever they might be.
The luggage had already been taken to the farm by John Mangles, and a boat was ready to transport the passengers. They quickly settled in, and the young captain gave his last instructions to Tom Austin, his first officer. He stressed that Tom should wait in Melbourne for Lord Glenarvan’s orders and follow them carefully, no matter what they were.
The old sailor told John he might rely on him, and, in the name of the men, begged to offer his Lordship their best wishes for the success of this new expedition.
The old sailor told John he could count on him and, on behalf of the crew, asked to send his Lordship their best wishes for the success of this new expedition.
A storm of hurrahs burst forth from the yacht as the boat rowed off. In ten minutes the shore was reached, and a quarter of an hour afterward the Irishman’s farm. All was ready. Lady Helena was enchanted with her installation. The huge chariot, with its primitive wheels and massive planks, pleased her particularly. The six bullocks, yoked in pairs, had a patriarchal air about them which took her fancy. Ayrton, goad in hand, stood waiting the orders of this new master.
A cheer erupted from the yacht as the boat set off. In ten minutes, they reached the shore, and a quarter of an hour later, they arrived at the Irishman’s farm. Everything was prepared. Lady Helena was thrilled with her setup. She was especially taken with the huge cart, with its basic wheels and thick planks. The six oxen, yoked in pairs, had a dignified look that appealed to her. Ayrton, with a goad in hand, stood by, waiting for the orders from his new master.
“My word,” said Paganel, “this is a famous vehicle; it beats all the mail-coaches in the world. I don’t know a better fashion of traveling than in a mountebank’s caravan—a movable house, which goes or stops wherever you please. What can one wish better? The Samaratians understood that, and never traveled in any other way.”
“My goodness,” said Paganel, “this is an incredible vehicle; it outshines all the mail coaches in the world. I can’t think of a better way to travel than in a performer’s caravan—a mobile home that moves or stops wherever you want. What more could you ask for? The Samaritans got that and never traveled any other way.”
“Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena, “I hope I shall have the pleasure of seeing you in my SALONS.”
“Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena, “I hope to have the pleasure of seeing you in my salons.”
“Assuredly, madam, I should count it an honor. Have you fixed the day?”
“Of course, ma'am, I would consider it an honor. Have you set the date?”
“I shall be at home every day to my friends,” replied Lady Helena; “and you are—”
“I'll be at home every day for my friends,” replied Lady Helena; “and you are—”
“The most devoted among them all,” interrupted Paganel, gaily.
“The most devoted of them all,” interrupted Paganel, cheerfully.
These mutual compliments were interrupted by the arrival of the seven horses, saddled and ready. They were brought by Paddy’s sons, and Lord Glenarvan paid the sum stipulated for his various purchases, adding his cordial thanks, which the worthy Irishman valued at least as much as his golden guineas.
These friendly exchanges were cut short by the arrival of the seven horses, saddled and prepared. Paddy's sons brought them over, and Lord Glenarvan paid the agreed amount for his various purchases, adding his heartfelt thanks, which the good Irishman appreciated just as much as the golden guineas.
The signal was given to start, and Lady Helena and Mary took their places in the reserved compartment. Ayrton seated himself in front, and Olbinett scrambled in among the luggage. The rest of the party, well armed with carbines and revolvers, mounted their horses. Ayrton gave a peculiar cry, and his team set off. The wagon shook and the planks creaked, and the axles grated in the naves of the wheels; and before long the hospitable farm of the Irishman was out of sight.
The signal was given to start, and Lady Helena and Mary took their seats in the reserved compartment. Ayrton sat down in front, while Olbinett squeezed in among the luggage. The rest of the group, well armed with rifles and handguns, got on their horses. Ayrton let out a strange cry, and his team took off. The wagon jolted, the boards creaked, and the axles squeaked against the wheels; soon enough, the welcoming farm of the Irishman was out of sight.
CHAPTER IX A COUNTRY OF PARADOXES
IT was the 23d of December, 1864, a dull, damp, dreary month in the northern hemisphere; but on the Australian continent it might be called June. The hottest season of the year had already commenced, and the sun’s rays were almost tropical, when Lord Glenarvan started on his new expedition.
It was December 23, 1864, a dull, damp, dreary month in the northern hemisphere; but in Australia, it could be called June. The hottest season of the year had already begun, and the sun’s rays were almost tropical when Lord Glenarvan set off on his new expedition.
Most fortunately the 37th parallel did not cross the immense deserts, inaccessible regions, which have cost many martyrs to science already. Glenarvan could never have encountered them. He had only to do with the southern part of Australia—viz., with a narrow portion of the province of Adelaide, with the whole of Victoria, and with the top of the reversed triangle which forms New South Wales.
Most fortunately, the 37th parallel didn’t cross the vast deserts and remote areas that have already claimed many victims in the name of science. Glenarvan would never have run into them. He was only dealing with the southern part of Australia—specifically, a small section of the province of Adelaide, all of Victoria, and the top of the inverted triangle that makes up New South Wales.
It is scarcely sixty-two miles from Cape Bernouilli to the frontiers of Victoria. It was not above a two days’ march, and Ayrton reckoned on their sleeping next night at Apsley, the most westerly town of Victoria.
It’s just around sixty-two miles from Cape Bernouilli to the borders of Victoria. It would take no more than a two-day march, and Ayrton planned for them to sleep the next night in Apsley, the most western town in Victoria.
The commencement of a journey is always marked by ardor, both in the horses and the horsemen. This is well enough in the horsemen, but if the horses are to go far, their speed must be moderated and their strength husbanded. It was, therefore, fixed that the average journey every day should not be more than from twenty-five to thirty miles.
The start of a journey is always filled with excitement, both in the horses and the riders. That’s fine for the riders, but if the horses are going to travel far, their speed needs to be kept in check and their strength preserved. So, it was decided that the average daily journey should not exceed twenty-five to thirty miles.
Besides, the pace of the horses must be regulated by the slower pace of the bullocks, truly mechanical engines which lose in time what they gain in power. The wagon, with its passengers and provisions, was the very center of the caravan, the moving fortress. The horsemen might act as scouts, but must never be far away from it.
Besides, the speed of the horses has to match the slower speed of the oxen, which are like machines that sacrifice time for power. The wagon, carrying its passengers and supplies, was the heart of the caravan, the moving fortress. The horse riders could scout ahead but should never stray too far from it.
As no special marching order had been agreed upon, everybody was at liberty to follow his inclinations within certain limits. The hunters could scour the plain, amiable folks could talk to the fair occupants of the wagon, and philosophers could philosophize. Paganel, who was all three combined, had to be and was everywhere at once.
Since no specific marching order had been decided, everyone was free to pursue their interests within certain boundaries. The hunters could explore the plain, friendly people could chat with the lovely occupants of the wagon, and thinkers could ponder deep questions. Paganel, who embodied all three roles, found himself everywhere at once.
The march across Adelaide presented nothing of any particular interest. A succession of low hills rich in dust, a long stretch of what they call in Australia “bush,” several prairies covered with a small prickly bush, considered a great dainty by the ovine tribe, embraced many miles. Here and there they noticed a species of sheep peculiar to New Holland—sheep with pig’s heads, feeding between the posts of the telegraph line recently made between Adelaide and the coast.
The march through Adelaide was pretty uneventful. It was just a series of low, dusty hills, a long stretch of what Australians call "bush," and some prairies filled with small prickly bushes that sheep really seem to enjoy. Along the way, they spotted a unique kind of sheep native to New Holland—sheep with pig-like heads, grazing near the posts of the telegraph line that had just been set up between Adelaide and the coast.
Up to this time there had been a singular resemblance in the country to the monotonous plains of the Argentine Pampas. There was the same grassy flat soil, the same sharply-defined horizon against the sky. McNabbs declared they had never changed countries; but Paganel told him to wait, and he would soon see a difference. And on the faith of this assurance marvelous things were expected by the whole party.
Up to this point, the country looked a lot like the endless plains of the Argentine Pampas. There was the same grassy flat land and the same clear horizon against the sky. McNabbs insisted they hadn’t changed countries, but Paganel told him to hold on, and he would soon notice a difference. Based on this assurance, the entire party expected amazing things.
In this fashion, after a march of sixty miles in two days, the caravan reached the parish of Apsley, the first town in the Province of Victoria in the Wimerra district.
In this way, after walking sixty miles in two days, the caravan arrived in Apsley, the first town in the Province of Victoria in the Wimmera district.
The wagon was put up at the Crown Inn. Supper was soon smoking on the table. It consisted solely of mutton served up in various ways.
The wagon was parked at the Crown Inn. Dinner was quickly steaming on the table. It was just mutton prepared in different styles.
They all ate heartily, but talked more than they ate, eagerly asking Paganel questions about the wonders of the country they were just beginning to traverse. The amiable geographer needed no pressing, and told them first that this part of it was called Australia Felix.
They all ate heartily but talked more than they ate, eagerly asking Paganel questions about the wonders of the country they were just starting to explore. The friendly geographer needed no encouragement and told them that this part was called Australia Felix.
“Wrongly named!” he continued. “It had better have been called rich, for it is true of countries, as individuals, that riches do not make happiness. Thanks to her gold mines, Australia has been abandoned to wild devastating adventurers. You will come across them when we reach the gold fields.”
“Misnamed!” he went on. “It should have been called wealthy, because just like people, having money doesn’t guarantee happiness. Because of its gold mines, Australia has been left to reckless, destructive adventurers. You’ll see them when we get to the gold fields.”
“Is not the colony of Victoria of but a recent origin?” asked Lady Glenarvan.
“Isn't the colony of Victoria a relatively recent establishment?” asked Lady Glenarvan.
“Yes, madam, it only numbers thirty years of existence. It was on the 6th of June, 1835, on a Tuesday—”
“Yes, ma'am, it’s only been around for thirty years. It was on June 6, 1835, on a Tuesday—”
“At a quarter past seven in the evening,” put in the Major, who delighted in teasing the Frenchman about his precise dates.
“At a quarter past seven in the evening,” the Major chimed in, enjoying the chance to tease the Frenchman about his exact dates.
“No, at ten minutes past seven,” replied the geographer, gravely, “that Batman and Falckner first began a settlement at Port Phillip, the bay on which the large city of Melbourne now stands. For fifteen years the colony was part of New South Wales, and recognized Sydney as the capital; but in 1851, she was declared independent, and took the name of Victoria.”
“No, at ten minutes past seven,” replied the geographer seriously, “that’s when Batman and Falckner first established a settlement at Port Phillip, the bay where the large city of Melbourne now sits. For fifteen years, the colony was part of New South Wales and acknowledged Sydney as its capital; but in 1851, it became independent and was named Victoria.”
“And has greatly increased in prosperity since then, I believe,” said Glenarvan.
“And I believe it has grown a lot more prosperous since then,” said Glenarvan.
“Judge for yourself, my noble friend,” replied Paganel. “Here are the numbers given by the last statistics; and let McNabbs say as he likes, I know nothing more eloquent than statistics.”
“Judge for yourself, my noble friend,” Paganel replied. “Here are the numbers provided by the latest statistics; and no matter what McNabbs says, I find nothing more convincing than statistics.”
“Go on,” said the Major.
"Go ahead," said the Major.
“Well, then, in 1836, the colony of Port Phillip had 224 inhabitants. To-day the province of Victoria numbers 550,000. Seven millions of vines produce annually 121,000 gallons of wine. There are 103,000 horses spreading over the plains, and 675,272 horned cattle graze in her wide-stretching pastures.”
“Well, then, in 1836, the colony of Port Phillip had 224 residents. Nowadays, the province of Victoria has a population of 550,000. Seven million vines produce 121,000 gallons of wine every year. There are 103,000 horses roaming the plains, and 675,272 cattle graze in the expansive pastures.”
“Is there not also a certain number of pigs?” inquired McNabbs.
“Are there not also some pigs?” McNabbs asked.
“Yes, Major, 79,625.”
“Yes, Major, 79,625.”
“And how many sheep?”
"And how many sheep are there?"
“7,115,943, McNabbs.”
“7,115,943, McNabbs.”
“Including the one we are eating at this moment.”
“Including the one we're eating right now.”
“No, without counting that, since it is three parts devoured.”
“No, not counting that, since three parts are gone.”
“Bravo, Monsieur Paganel,” exclaimed Lady Helena, laughing heartily. “It must be owned you are posted up in geographical questions, and my cousin McNabbs need not try and find you tripping.”
“Bravo, Monsieur Paganel,” exclaimed Lady Helena, laughing hard. “I have to admit, you really know your geography, and my cousin McNabbs won’t stand a chance at catching you out.”
“It is my calling, Madam, to know this sort of thing, and to give you the benefit of my information when you please. You may therefore believe me when I tell you that wonderful things are in store for you in this strange country.”
“It’s my job, Madam, to know these things and to share my insights with you whenever you’d like. So you can trust me when I say that amazing things are ahead for you in this unusual country.”
“It does not look like it at present,” said McNabbs, on purpose to tease Paganel.
“It doesn’t look like it right now,” said McNabbs, teasing Paganel on purpose.
“Just wait, impatient Major,” was his rejoinder. “You have hardly put your foot on the frontier, when you turn round and abuse it. Well, I say and say again, and will always maintain that this is the most curious country on the earth. Its formation, and nature, and products, and climate, and even its future disappearance have amazed, and are now amazing, and will amaze, all the SAVANTS in the world. Think, my friends, of a continent, the margin of which, instead of the center, rose out of the waves originally like a gigantic ring, which encloses, perhaps, in its center, a sea partly evaporated, the waves of which are drying up daily; where humidity does not exist either in the air or in the soil; where the trees lose their bark every year, instead of their leaves; where the leaves present their sides to the sun and not their face, and consequently give no shade; where the wood is often incombustible, where good-sized stones are dissolved by the rain; where the forests are low and the grasses gigantic; where the animals are strange; where quadrupeds have beaks, like the echidna, or ornithorhynchus, and naturalists have been obliged to create a special order for them, called monotremes; where the kangaroos leap on unequal legs, and sheep have pigs’ heads; where foxes fly about from tree to tree; where the swans are black; where rats make nests; where the bower-bird opens her reception-rooms to receive visits from her feathered friends; where the birds astonish the imagination by the variety of their notes and their aptness; where one bird serves for a clock, and another makes a sound like a postilion cracking of a whip, and a third imitates a knife-grinder, and a fourth the motion of a pendulum; where one laughs when the sun rises, and another cries when the sun sets! Oh, strange, illogical country, land of paradoxes and anomalies, if ever there was one on earth—the learned botanist Grimard was right when he said, ‘There is that Australia, a sort of parody, or rather a defiance of universal laws in the face of the rest of the world.’”
“Just wait, impatient Major,” he replied. “You’ve barely set foot on the frontier, and already you’re criticizing it. Well, I say and will keep saying that this is the most fascinating country on earth. Its formation, nature, products, climate, and even its potential disappearance have amazed, are amazing, and will continue to amaze all the experts in the world. Think, my friends, of a continent that originally rose out of the waves like a gigantic ring, with a possibly evaporating sea at its center, where the waters are drying up daily; where humidity is absent in the air and soil; where trees shed their bark every year instead of their leaves; where leaves turn their sides to the sun instead of facing it, providing no shade; where the wood is often fireproof, where substantial stones dissolve in the rain; where forests are low and grasses tower; where the animals are bizarre; where some mammals have beaks, like the echidna or the platypus, forcing naturalists to create a special category for them called monotremes; where kangaroos hop on uneven legs, and sheep have pig-like heads; where foxes swing from tree to tree; where swans are black; where rats build nests; where the bowerbird sets up her home to entertain her feathered friends; where birds excite the imagination with their wide range of sounds and talents; where one bird acts as a clock, another mimics the sound of a whip’s crack, a third imitates a knife-grinder, and a fourth mimics a pendulum’s motion; where one laughs at sunrise and another cries at sunset! Oh, strange, illogical country, land of contradictions and anomalies, if ever there was one on earth—the knowledgeable botanist Grimard was right when he said, ‘There is that Australia, a sort of parody, or rather a defiance of universal laws in the face of the rest of the world.’”
Paganel’s tirade was poured forth in the most impetuous manner, and seemed as if it were never coming to an end. The eloquent secretary of the Geographical Society was no longer master of himself. He went on and on, gesticulating furiously, and brandishing his fork to the imminent danger of his neighbors. But at last his voice was drowned in a thunder of applause, and he managed to stop.
Paganel’s rant came out in a wildly passionate way, as if it would never end. The eloquent secretary of the Geographical Society had completely lost control of himself. He kept talking, gesturing wildly, and waving his fork around dangerously close to his neighbors. But eventually, his voice was lost in a roar of applause, and he finally managed to stop.
Certainly after such an enumeration of Australian peculiarities, he might have been left in peace but the Major said in the coolest tone possible: “And is that all, Paganel?”
Certainly after such a list of Australian quirks, he might have been left alone, but the Major said in the calmest tone possible: “Is that it, Paganel?”
“No, indeed not,” rejoined the Frenchman, with renewed vehemence.
“No, definitely not,” replied the Frenchman, with increased intensity.
“What!” exclaimed Lady Helena; “there are more wonders still in Australia?”
“What!” exclaimed Lady Helena. “Are there even more wonders in Australia?”
“Yes, Madam, its climate. It is even stranger than its productions.”
“Yes, Madam, its climate. It's even weirder than what it produces.”
“Is it possible?” they all said.
“Is it really possible?” they all asked.
“I am not speaking of the hygienic qualities of the climate,” continued Paganel, “rich as it is in oxygen and poor in azote. There are no damp winds, because the trade winds blow regularly on the coasts, and most diseases are unknown, from typhus to measles, and chronic affections.”
“I’m not talking about the health benefits of the climate,” Paganel continued, “which is rich in oxygen and low in nitrogen. There are no damp winds since the trade winds blow steadily along the coasts, and most diseases, from typhus to measles, and chronic conditions, are virtually absent.”
“Still, that is no small advantage,” said Glenarvan.
“Still, that's not a small advantage,” said Glenarvan.
“No doubt; but I am not referring to that, but to one quality it has which is incomparable.”
“No doubt; but I'm not talking about that, I'm referring to a quality it has that is unmatched.”
“And what is that?”
"What is that?"
“You will never believe me.”
"You won't believe me."
“Yes, we will,” exclaimed his auditors, their curiosity aroused by this preamble.
“Yes, we will,” exclaimed his listeners, their curiosity piqued by this introduction.
“Well, it is—”
“Well, it is—”
“It is what?”
"What is it?"
“It is a moral regeneration.”
“It’s a moral rebirth.”
“A moral regeneration?”
"Is there a moral revival?"
“Yes,” replied the SAVANT, in a tone of conviction. “Here metals do not get rust on them by exposure to the air, nor men. Here the pure, dry atmosphere whitens everything rapidly, both linen and souls. The virtue of the climate must have been well known in England when they determined to send their criminals here to be reformed.”
“Yes,” replied the SCIENTIST, confidently. “Here, metals don’t rust from being exposed to the air, and neither do people. The clean, dry atmosphere quickly brightens everything, from linens to souls. The benefits of this climate must have been well understood in England when they decided to send their criminals here for reform.”
“What! do you mean to say the climate has really any such influence?” said Lady Helena.
“What! Are you really saying the climate has any kind of influence?” said Lady Helena.
“Yes, Madam, both on animals and men.”
“Yes, ma'am, both on animals and people.”
“You are not joking, Monsieur Paganel?”
"Are you serious, Mr. Paganel?"
“I am not, Madam. The horses and the cattle here are of incomparable docility. You see it?”
“I’m not, ma’am. The horses and cattle here are incredibly gentle. Do you see that?”
“It is impossible!”
"It's impossible!"
“But it is a fact. And the convicts transported into this reviving, salubrious air, become regenerated in a few years. Philanthropists know this. In Australia all natures grow better.”
“But it’s true. The convicts brought to this rejuvenating, healthy environment become transformed in just a few years. People who care about others understand this. In Australia, everything thrives better.”
“But what is to become of you then, Monsieur Paganel, in this privileged country—you who are so good already?” said Lady Helena. “What will you turn out?”
“But what will happen to you then, Monsieur Paganel, in this blessed country—you who are already so kind?” said Lady Helena. “What will you become?”
“Excellent, Madam, just excellent, and that’s all.”
“Great, ma'am, just great, and that’s it.”
CHAPTER X AN ACCIDENT
THE next day, the 24th of December, they started at daybreak. The heat was already considerable, but not unbearable, and the road was smooth and good, and allowed the cavalcade to make speedy progress. In the evening they camped on the banks of the White Lake, the waters of which are brackish and undrinkable.
THE next day, December 24th, they set off at dawn. The heat was already quite significant, but not intolerable, and the road was smooth and in good condition, allowing the group to move quickly. In the evening, they camped by the shores of White Lake, where the water is brackish and not suitable for drinking.
Jacques Paganel was obliged to own that the name of this lake was a complete misnomer, for the waters were no more white than the Black Sea is black, or the Red Sea red, or the Yellow River yellow, or the Blue Mountains blue. However, he argued and disputed the point with all the amour propre of a geographer, but his reasoning made no impression.
Jacques Paganel had to admit that the name of this lake was totally misleading, since the waters were no whiter than the Black Sea is black, the Red Sea is red, the Yellow River is yellow, or the Blue Mountains are blue. Nevertheless, he argued and debated the issue with all the pride of a geographer, but his reasoning didn't sway anyone.
M. Olbinett prepared the evening meal with his accustomed punctuality, and after this was dispatched, the travelers disposed themselves for the night in the wagon and in the tent, and were soon sleeping soundly, notwithstanding the melancholy howling of the “dingoes,” the jackals of Australia.
M. Olbinett made dinner on time as usual, and after they finished eating, the travelers settled in for the night in the wagon and the tent, quickly falling asleep despite the sad howling of the dingoes, the jackals of Australia.
A magnificent plain, thickly covered with chrysanthemums, stretched out beyond the lake, and Glenarvan and his friends would gladly have explored its beauties when they awoke next morning, but they had to start. As far as the eye could reach, nothing was visible but one stretch of prairie, enameled with flower, in all the freshness and abundance of spring. The blue flowers of the slender-leaved flax, combined with the bright hues of the scarlet acanthus, a flower peculiar to the country.
A beautiful plain, densely covered with chrysanthemums, spread out beyond the lake, and Glenarvan and his friends would have loved to explore its beauty when they woke up the next morning, but they had to get going. As far as the eye could see, there was nothing but a vast stretch of prairie, decorated with flowers, in all the freshness and abundance of spring. The blue flowers of the slender-leaved flax mingled with the bright colors of the scarlet acanthus, a flower unique to the area.
A few cassowaries were bounding over the plain, but it was impossible to get near them. The Major was fortunate enough, however, to hit one very rare animal with a ball in the leg. This was the jabiru, a species which is fast disappearing, the gigantic crane of the English colonies. This winged creature was five feet high, and his wide, conical, extremely pointed beak, measured eighteen inches in length. The violet and purple tints of his head contrasted vividly with the glossy green of his neck, and the dazzling whiteness of his throat, and the bright red of his long legs. Nature seems to have exhausted in its favor all the primitive colors on her palette.
A few cassowaries were running across the plain, but it was impossible to get close to them. However, the Major was lucky enough to hit a very rare animal in the leg with a ball. This was the jabiru, a species that is quickly disappearing, the gigantic crane of the English colonies. This bird stood five feet tall, and its wide, conical, extremely pointed beak measured eighteen inches long. The violet and purple shades of its head contrasted sharply with the glossy green of its neck, the dazzling whiteness of its throat, and the bright red of its long legs. Nature seems to have used all the basic colors in her palette to create this creature.
Great admiration was bestowed on this bird, and the Major’s spoil would have borne the honors of the day, had not Robert come across an animal a few miles further on, and bravely killed it. It was a shapeless creature, half porcupine, half ant-eater, a sort of unfinished animal belonging to the first stage of creation. A long glutinous extensible tongue hung out of his jaws in search of the ants, which formed its principal food.
Great admiration was given to this bird, and the Major’s catch would have taken the honors of the day, if Robert hadn’t stumbled upon an animal a few miles ahead and bravely killed it. It was a strange creature, half porcupine and half anteater, like a work-in-progress animal from the earliest stages of evolution. A long, slimy, extendable tongue dangled from its mouth, reaching out for ants, which were its main source of food.
“It is an echidna,” said Paganel. “Have you ever seen such a creature?”
“It’s an echidna,” Paganel said. “Have you ever seen anything like it?”
“It is horrible,” replied Glenarvan.
"It's awful," replied Glenarvan.
“Horrible enough, but curious, and, what’s more, peculiar to Australia. One might search for it in vain in any other part of the world.”
“Horrible enough, but curious, and, what’s more, unique to Australia. One might look for it in vain in any other part of the world.”
Naturally enough, the geographer wished to preserve this interesting specimen of monotremata, and wanted to stow it away in the luggage; but M. Olbinett resented the idea so indignantly, that the SAVANT was obliged to abandon his project.
Naturally, the geographer wanted to keep this fascinating monotreme and planned to pack it in his luggage; however, M. Olbinett was so offended by the idea that the scientist had to give up on his plan.
About four o’clock in the afternoon, John Mangles descried an enormous column of smoke about three miles off, gradually overspreading the whole horizon. What could be the cause of this phenomenon? Paganel was inclined to think it was some description of meteor, and his lively imagination was already in search of an explanation, when Ayrton cut short all his conjectures summarily, by announcing that the cloud of dust was caused by a drove of cattle on the road.
About four o'clock in the afternoon, John Mangles spotted a huge cloud of smoke about three miles away, spreading across the entire horizon. What could be causing this? Paganel thought it might be some kind of meteor, and his active imagination was already looking for an explanation when Ayrton interrupted all his theories by stating that the dust cloud was caused by a herd of cattle on the road.
The quartermaster proved right, for as the cloud came nearer, quite a chorus of bleatings and neighings, and bel-lowings escaped from it, mingled with the loud tones of a human voice, in the shape of cries, and whistles, and vociferations.
The quartermaster was correct, because as the cloud approached, a whole chorus of bleating, neighing, and bellowing sounds came from it, mixed with the loud sounds of a human voice, in the form of shouts, whistles, and yelling.
Presently a man came out of the cloud. This was the leader-in-chief of the four-footed army. Glenarvan advanced toward him, and friendly relations were speedily established between them. The leader, or to give him his proper designation, the stock-keeper, was part owner of the drove. His name was Sam Machell, and he was on his way from the eastern provinces to Portland Bay.
Currently, a man emerged from the cloud. He was the leader of the four-footed army. Glenarvan approached him, and they quickly formed a friendly relationship. The leader, or as he should be called, the stock-keeper, was a co-owner of the herd. His name was Sam Machell, and he was traveling from the eastern provinces to Portland Bay.
The drove numbered 12,075 head in all, or l,000 bullocks, 11,000 sheep, and 75 horses. All these had been bought in the Blue Mountains in a poor, lean condition, and were going to be fatted up on the rich pasture lands of Southern Australia, and sold again at a great profit. Sam Machell expected to get pounds 2 on each bullock, and 10s. on every sheep, which would bring him in pounds 3,750. This was doing good business; but what patience and energy were required to conduct such a restive, stubborn lot to their destination, and what fatigues must have to be endured. Truly the gain was hardly earned.
The herd totaled 12,075 animals, including 1,000 cattle, 11,000 sheep, and 75 horses. All of these had been purchased in the Blue Mountains while in poor, skinny condition, and were headed to the lush pastures of Southern Australia to be fattened up and sold for a big profit. Sam Machell expected to make £2 on each bull, and 10 shillings on every sheep, which would bring him £3,750. This was solid business; but it required a lot of patience and energy to manage such a restless, stubborn group to their destination, and one could only imagine the fatigue that had to be endured. Honestly, the profit was hardly earned.
Sam Machell told his history in a few words, while the drove continued their march among the groves of mimosas. Lady Helena and Mary and the rest of the party seated themselves under the shade of a wide-spreading gum-tree, and listened to his recital.
Sam Machell shared his story in just a few words, while the group kept moving through the groves of mimosas. Lady Helena, Mary, and the rest of the party settled under the shade of a large gum tree and listened to his tale.
It was seven months since Sam Machell had started. He had gone at the rate of ten miles a day, and his interminable journey would last three months longer. His assistants in the laborious task comprised twenty dogs and thirty men, five of whom were blacks, and very serviceable in tracking up any strayed beasts. Six wagons made the rear-guard. All the men were armed with stockwhips, the handles of which are eighteen inches long, and the lash nine feet, and they move about among the ranks, bringing refractory animals back into order, while the dogs, the light cavalry of the regiment, preserved discipline in the wings.
It had been seven months since Sam Machell had started. He had been traveling at a pace of ten miles a day, and his long journey would continue for three more months. His team for this challenging task included twenty dogs and thirty men, five of whom were Black and very helpful in tracking down any lost animals. Six wagons formed the rear guard. All the men were equipped with stock whips, with handles that were eighteen inches long and lashes that were nine feet, and they moved through the ranks, bringing unruly animals back under control, while the dogs, the light cavalry of the group, maintained order on the flanks.
The travelers were struck with the admirable arrangement of the drove. The different stock were kept apart, for wild sheep and bullocks would not have got on together at all. The bullocks would never have grazed where the sheep had passed along, and consequently they had to go first, divided into two battalions. Five regiments of sheep followed, in charge of twenty men, and last of all came the horses.
The travelers were impressed by how well the herd was organized. The different animals were kept separate because wild sheep and cattle wouldn't mix at all. The cattle would never graze where the sheep had been, so they had to go first, split into two groups. Five groups of sheep followed, managed by twenty men, and finally, the horses came last.
Sam Machell drew the attention of his auditors to the fact that the real guides of the drove were neither the men nor the dogs, but the oxen themselves, beasts of superior intelligence, recognized as leaders by their congenitors. They advanced in front with perfect gravity, choosing the best route by instinct, and fully alive to their claim to respect. Indeed, they were obliged to be studied and humored in everything, for the whole drove obeyed them implicitly. If they took it into their heads to stop, it was a matter of necessity to yield to their good pleasure, for not a single animal would move a step till these leaders gave the signal to set off.
Sam Machell pointed out to his listeners that the real leaders of the herd weren’t the men or the dogs, but the oxen themselves, animals of remarkable intelligence, recognized as the leaders by their peers. They walked in front with total seriousness, instinctively choosing the best path and fully aware of their need for respect. In fact, they had to be understood and catered to in every way, because the entire herd followed their lead without question. If they decided to stop, it was essential to give in to their wishes, as not a single animal would take a step until these leaders signaled it was time to move.
Sundry details, added by the stock-keeper, completed the history of this expedition, worthy of being written, if not commended by Xenophon himself. As long as the troop marched over the plains it was well enough, there was little difficulty or fatigue. The animals fed as they went along, and slaked their thirst at the numerous creeks that watered the plains, sleeping at night and making good progress in the day, always obedient and tractable to the dogs. But when they had to go through great forests and groves of eucalyptus and mimosas, the difficulties increased. Platoons, battalions and regiments got all mixed together or scattered, and it was a work of time to collect them again. Should a “leader” unfortunately go astray, he had to be found, cost what it might, on pain of a general disbandment, and the blacks were often long days in quest of him, before their search was successful. During the heavy rains the lazy beasts refused to stir, and when violent storms chanced to occur, the creatures became almost mad with terror, and were seized with a wild, disorderly panic.
Various details added by the stock-keeper completed the story of this expedition, which deserves to be documented, if not praised by Xenophon himself. As long as the troop marched across the plains, things went smoothly with little difficulty or fatigue. The animals grazed as they moved along and drank from the many creeks that watered the plains, resting at night and making good progress during the day, always obedient and manageable with the dogs. However, when they had to navigate through dense forests and groves of eucalyptus and mimosas, the challenges grew. Groups, battalions, and regiments became mixed up or scattered, and it took time to regroup them. If a “leader” happened to get lost, he had to be found, no matter the cost, or else the entire unit risked disbandment. The locals often spent days searching for him before they were successful. During heavy rains, the sluggish animals refused to move, and during violent storms, they became nearly frantic with fear, succumbing to a wild, chaotic panic.
However, by dint of energy and ambition, the stock-keeper triumphed over these difficulties, incessantly renewed though they were. He kept steadily on; mile after mile of plains and woods, and mountains, lay behind. But in addition to all his other qualities, there was one higher than all that he specially needed when they came to rivers. This was patience—patience that could stand any trial, and not only could hold out for hours and days, but for weeks. The stock-keeper would be himself forced to wait on the banks of a stream that might have been crossed at once. There was nothing to hinder but the obstinacy of the herd. The bullocks would taste the water and turn back. The sheep fled in all directions, afraid to brave the liquid element. The stock-keeper hoped when night came he might manage them better, but they still refused to go forward. The rams were dragged in by force, but the sheep would not follow. They tried what thirst would do, by keeping them without drink for several days, but when they were brought to the river again, they simply quenched their thirst, and declined a more intimate acquaintance with the water. The next expedient employed was to carry all the lambs over, hoping the mothers would be drawn after them, moved by their cries. But the lambs might bleat as pitifully as they liked, the mothers never stirred. Sometimes this state of affairs would last a whole month, and the stock-keeper would be driven to his wits’ end by his bleating, bellowing, neighing army. Then all of a sudden, one fine day, without rhyme or reason, a detachment would take it into their heads to make a start across, and the only difficulty now was to keep the whole herd from rushing helter-skelter after them. The wildest confusion set in among the ranks, and numbers of the animals were drowned in the passage.
However, through sheer energy and ambition, the stock-keeper overcame these challenges, which never seemed to end. He pressed on; mile after mile of plains, woods, and mountains lay behind him. But besides all his other qualities, there was one crucial trait he particularly needed when it came to rivers: patience—patience that could endure any challenge, not just for hours and days, but for weeks. The stock-keeper often found himself waiting on the banks of a stream that could have been crossed quickly. The only thing holding them back was the stubbornness of the herd. The bullocks would taste the water and turn back. The sheep scattered in all directions, scared to face the water. The stock-keeper hoped that when night fell, he could manage them better, but they still refused to move forward. The rams were dragged in by force, but the sheep wouldn't follow. They tried to see what thirst would accomplish by keeping them without water for several days, but when they were brought back to the river, they just quenched their thirst and avoided a closer encounter with the water. The next strategy was to carry all the lambs across, hoping the mothers would be drawn after them by their cries. But the lambs could bleat piteously all they wanted; the mothers remained unmoved. Sometimes this situation would last an entire month, driving the stock-keeper to the brink of madness with his bleating, bellowing, neighing army. Then, out of the blue, one fine day, for no apparent reason, a few animals would suddenly decide to cross, and the only challenge left was keeping the entire herd from stampeding after them. Chaos erupted among the ranks, and many of the animals drowned in the process.
Such was the narrative of Sam Machell. During its recital, a considerable part of the troop had filed past in good order. It was time for him to return to his place at their head, that he might be able to choose the best pasturage. Taking leave of Lord Glenarvan, he sprang on a capital horse of the native breed, that one of his men held waiting for him, and after shaking hands cordially with everybody all round, took his departure. A few minutes later, nothing was visible of the stock-keeper and his troop but a cloud of dust.
That was the story of Sam Machell. While he told it, a large part of the group had moved by in an orderly fashion. It was time for him to go back to the front so he could find the best grazing. Saying goodbye to Lord Glenarvan, he jumped on a great horse of the local breed that one of his men had ready for him, and after exchanging friendly handshakes with everyone, he left. A few minutes later, all that could be seen of the stock-keeper and his group was a cloud of dust.
The wagon resumed its course in the opposite direction, and did not stop again till they halted for the night at the foot of Mount Talbot.
The wagon continued on its way in the opposite direction and didn’t stop again until they paused for the night at the base of Mount Talbot.
Paganel made the judicious observation that it was the 25th of December, the Christmas Day so dear to English hearts. But the steward had not forgotten it, and an appetizing meal was soon ready under the tent, for which he deserved and received warm compliments from the guests. Indeed, M. Olbinett had quite excelled himself on this occasion. He produced from his stores such an array of European dishes as is seldom seen in the Australian desert. Reindeer hams, slices of salt beef, smoked salmon, oat cakes, and barley meal scones; tea ad libitum, and whisky in abundance, and several bottles of port, composed this astonishing meal. The little party might have thought themselves in the grand dining-hall of Malcolm Castle, in the heart of the Highlands of Scotland.
Paganel wisely pointed out that it was December 25th, Christmas Day, which is cherished by the English. But the steward hadn’t forgotten it, and an appealing meal was soon prepared under the tent, for which he deserved and received sincere compliments from the guests. In fact, M. Olbinett truly outdid himself this time. He brought out such a selection of European dishes that is rarely seen in the Australian desert. Reindeer ham, slices of salt beef, smoked salmon, oat cakes, and barley scones; tea ad libitum, plenty of whisky, and several bottles of port made up this impressive meal. The small group could have easily believed they were in the grand dining hall of Malcolm Castle, in the heart of the Scottish Highlands.
The next day, at 11 A. M., the wagon reached the banks of the Wimerra on the 143d meridian.
The next day, at 11 A.M., the wagon arrived at the banks of the Wimmera on the 143rd meridian.
The river, half a mile in width, wound its limpid course between tall rows of gum-trees and acacias. Magnificent specimens of the MYRTACEA, among others, the metroside-ros speciosa, fifteen feet high, with long drooping branches, adorned with red flowers. Thousands of birds, the lories, and greenfinches, and gold-winged pigeons, not to speak of the noisy paroquets, flew about in the green branches. Below, on the bosom of the water, were a couple of shy and unapproachable black swans. This rara avis of the Australian rivers soon disappeared among the windings of the Wimerra, which water the charming landscape in the most capricious manner.
The river, half a mile wide, meandered its clear path between tall rows of gum trees and acacias. There were stunning examples of the MYRTACEA, including the metroside-ros speciosa, which stood fifteen feet high, with long, drooping branches decorated with red flowers. Thousands of birds, including lories, greenfinches, and gold-winged pigeons, not to mention the noisy parrots, flitted around in the lush branches. Below, on the surface of the water, were a couple of shy and elusive black swans. This rara avis of the Australian rivers soon vanished among the twists of the Wimerra, which waters the beautiful landscape in an unpredictable way.
The wagon stopped on a grassy bank, the long fringes of which dipped in the rapid current. There was neither raft nor bridge, but cross over they must. Ayrton looked about for a practicable ford. About a quarter of a mile up the water seemed shallower, and it was here they determined to try to pass over. The soundings in different parts showed a depth of three feet only, so that the wagon might safely enough venture.
The wagon came to a halt on a grassy bank, the long edges of which dipped into the fast-flowing water. There was no raft or bridge, but they had to get across. Ayrton looked for a suitable shallow spot. About a quarter of a mile upstream, the water looked shallower, and they decided to give it a go there. The measurements in different areas indicated a depth of only three feet, so the wagon could safely make the crossing.
“I suppose there is no other way of fording the river?” said Glenarvan to the quartermaster.
“I guess there’s no other way to cross the river?” Glenarvan asked the quartermaster.
“No, my Lord; but the passage does not seem dangerous. We shall manage it.”
“No, my Lord; but the route doesn’t seem risky. We’ll handle it.”
“Shall Lady Glenarvan and Miss Grant get out of the wagon?”
“Should Lady Glenarvan and Miss Grant get out of the wagon?”
“Not at all. My bullocks are surefooted, and you may rely on me for keeping them straight.”
“Not at all. My cattle are steady on their feet, and you can count on me to keep them on track.”
“Very well, Ayrton; I can trust you.”
“Alright, Ayrton; I can count on you.”
The horsemen surrounded the ponderous vehicle, and all stepped boldly into the current. Generally, when wagons have to ford rivers, they have empty casks slung all round them, to keep them floating on the water; but they had no such swimming belt with them on this occasion, and they could only depend on the sagacity of the animals and the prudence of Ayrton, who directed the team. The Major and the two sailors were some feet in advance. Glenarvan and John Mangles went at the sides of the wagon, ready to lend any assistance the fair travelers might require, and Paganel and Robert brought up the rear.
The horsemen surrounded the heavy vehicle and all confidently stepped into the water. Usually, when wagons need to cross rivers, they have empty barrels strapped around them to help them float, but they didn't have that kind of floating support this time, so they had to rely on the animals' instincts and Ayrton's careful guidance as he directed the team. The Major and the two sailors were a few feet ahead. Glenarvan and John Mangles walked alongside the wagon, ready to help the travelers if they needed it, while Paganel and Robert brought up the rear.
All went well till they reached the middle of the Wimerra, but then the hollow deepened, and the water rose to the middle of the wheels. The bullocks were in danger of losing their footing, and dragging with them the oscillating vehicle. Ayrton devoted himself to his task courageously. He jumped into the water, and hanging on by the bullocks’ horns, dragged them back into the right course.
All went smoothly until they reached the middle of the Wimerra, but then the hole deepened, and the water rose to the middle of the wheels. The bullocks were in danger of losing their footing, which would also pull the swaying vehicle down. Ayrton threw himself into the task with determination. He jumped into the water and, holding onto the bullocks’ horns, pulled them back on track.
Suddenly the wagon made a jolt that it was impossible to prevent; a crack was heard, and the vehicle began to lean over in a most precarious manner. The water now rose to the ladies’ feet; the whole concern began to float, though John Mangles and Lord Glenarvan hung on to the side. It was an anxious moment.
Suddenly, the wagon jolted unexpectedly; a cracking sound echoed, and the vehicle started to tip dangerously. The water began to flood the ladies' feet; the entire wagon started to float, even as John Mangles and Lord Glenarvan clung to the side. It was a tense moment.
Fortunately a vigorous effort drove the wagon toward the opposite shore, and the bank began to slope upward, so that the horses and bullocks were able to regain their footing, and soon the whole party found themselves on the other side, glad enough, though wet enough too.
Fortunately, a strong effort pushed the wagon toward the opposite shore, and the bank started to rise, allowing the horses and bullocks to regain their footing. Soon, the entire group found themselves on the other side, happy enough, even if they were quite wet.
The fore part of the wagon, however, was broken by the jolt, and Glenarvan’s horse had lost a shoe.
The front part of the wagon, however, was damaged by the jolt, and Glenarvan’s horse had lost a shoe.
This was an accident that needed to be promptly repaired. They looked at each other hardly knowing what to do, till Ayrton proposed he should go to Black Point Station, twenty miles further north, and bring back a blacksmith with him.
This was an accident that needed to be fixed quickly. They glanced at each other, unsure of what to do, until Ayrton suggested he should head to Black Point Station, twenty miles north, and bring back a blacksmith with him.
“Yes, go, my good fellow,” said Glenarvan. “How long will it take you to get there and back?”
“Yes, go ahead, my good man,” said Glenarvan. “How long will it take you to get there and back?”
“About fifteen hours,” replied Ayrton, “but not longer.”
“About fifteen hours,” Ayrton replied, “but not longer.”
“Start at once, then, and we will camp here, on the banks of the Wimerra, till you return.”
“Go ahead and start now, and we’ll set up camp here by the Wimerra until you come back.”
CHAPTER XI CRIME OR CALAMITY
IT was not without apprehension that the Major saw Ayrton quit the Wimerra camp to go and look for a blacksmith at the Black Point Station. But he did not breathe a word of his private misgivings, and contented himself with watching the neighborhood of the river; nothing disturbed the repose of those tranquil glades, and after a short night the sun reappeared on the horizon.
It was with some worry that the Major watched Ayrton leave the Wimerra camp to search for a blacksmith at the Black Point Station. However, he kept his concerns to himself and focused on observing the area around the river; nothing interrupted the peacefulness of those serene clearings, and after a brief night, the sun rose once again on the horizon.
As to Glenarvan, his only fear was lest Ayrton should return alone. If they fail to find a workman, the wagon could not resume the journey. This might end in a delay of many days, and Glenarvan, impatient to succeed, could brook no delay, in his eagerness to attain his object.
As for Glenarvan, his biggest worry was that Ayrton would come back on his own. If they couldn't find a worker, the wagon wouldn't be able to continue the journey. This could lead to a delay of several days, and Glenarvan, eager to succeed, couldn't stand any hold-up in his rush to reach his goal.
Ayrton luckily had lost neither his time nor his trouble. He appeared next morning at daybreak, accompanied by a man who gave himself out as the blacksmith from Black Point Station. He was a powerful fellow, and tall, but his features were of a low, brutal type, which did not prepossess anyone in his favor. But that was nothing, provided he knew his business. He scarcely spoke, and certainly he did not waste his breath in useless words.
Ayrton was fortunate not to have wasted either his time or his effort. He showed up the next morning at dawn, alongside a man claiming to be the blacksmith from Black Point Station. He was a strong and tall guy, but his features were rough and unappealing, which didn't win him any favors. But that didn't matter, as long as he knew his stuff. He barely talked, and definitely didn’t spend his breath on pointless chatter.
“Is he a good workman?” said John Mangles to the quartermaster.
“Is he a good worker?” John Mangles asked the quartermaster.
“I know no more about him than you do, captain,” said Ayrton. “But we shall see.”
“I know no more about him than you do, captain,” said Ayrton. “But we’ll find out.”
The blacksmith set to work. Evidently that was his trade, as they could plainly see from the way he set about repairing the forepart of the wagon. He worked skilfully and with uncommon energy. The Major observed that the flesh of his wrists was deeply furrowed, showing a ring of extravasated blood. It was the mark of a recent injury, which the sleeve of an old woolen shirt could not conceal. McNabbs questioned the blacksmith about those sores which looked so painful. The man continued his work without answering. Two hours more and the damage the carriage had sustained was made good. As to Glenarvan’s horse, it was soon disposed of. The blacksmith had had the forethought to bring the shoes with him. These shoes had a peculiarity which did not escape the Major; it was a trefoil clumsily cut on the back part. McNabbs pointed it out to Ayrton.
The blacksmith got to work. Clearly, that was his trade, as they could easily see from the way he went about fixing the front of the wagon. He worked skillfully and with remarkable energy. The Major noticed that the skin on his wrists was deeply scarred, showing a ring of bruised blood. It was a sign of a recent injury that the sleeve of an old wool shirt couldn’t hide. McNabbs asked the blacksmith about those sores that looked so painful. The man kept working without answering. Two more hours passed, and the damage to the carriage was repaired. As for Glenarvan’s horse, it was quickly taken care of. The blacksmith had the foresight to bring the shoes with him. These shoes had a unique feature that caught the Major's attention; there was a clumsy trefoil cut on the back. McNabbs pointed it out to Ayrton.
“It is the Black-Point brand,” said the quartermaster. “That enables them to track any horses that may stray from the station, and prevents their being mixed with other herds.”
“It’s the Black-Point brand,” the quartermaster said. “That helps them track any horses that might wander away from the station and keeps them from getting mixed up with other herds.”
The horse was soon shod. The blacksmith claimed his wage, and went off without uttering four words.
The horse was soon fitted with shoes. The blacksmith collected his pay and left without saying a word.
Half an hour later, the travelers were on the road. Beyond the grove of mimosas was a stretch of sparsely timbered country, which quite deserved its name of “open plain.” Some fragments of quartz and ferruginous rock lay among the scrub and the tall grass, where numerous flocks were feeding. Some miles farther the wheels of the wagon plowed deep into the alluvial soil, where irregular creeks murmured in their beds, half hidden among giant reeds. By-and-by they skirted vast salt lakes, rapidly evaporating. The journey was accomplished without trouble, and, indeed, without fatigue.
Half an hour later, the travelers were on their way. Beyond the grove of mimosas was a stretch of open land, which truly deserved the name “open plain.” Some pieces of quartz and rusty rock lay among the bushes and tall grass, where many flocks were grazing. A few miles further, the wagon wheels dug deep into the rich soil, where winding creeks flowed quietly, partly concealed by giant reeds. Before long, they passed large salt lakes that were quickly drying up. The journey went smoothly and, in fact, without any exhaustion.
Lady Helena invited the horsemen of the party to pay her a visit in turns, as her reception-room was but small, and in pleasant converse with this amiable woman they forgot the fatigue of their day’s ride.
Lady Helena invited the horsemen of the group to visit her one by one, since her reception room was quite small, and in engaging conversation with this lovely woman, they forgot the tiredness from their day's ride.
Lady Helena, seconded by Miss Mary, did the honors of their ambulatory house with perfect grace. John Mangles was not forgotten in these daily invitations, and his somewhat serious conversation was not unpleasing.
Lady Helena, accompanied by Miss Mary, hosted their walking house with perfect grace. John Mangles was included in these daily invitations, and his somewhat serious conversation was quite pleasant.
The party crossed, in a diagonal direction, the mail-coach road from Crowland to Horsham, which was a very dusty one, and little used by pedestrians.
The group crossed the mail-coach road from Crowland to Horsham at a diagonal angle, which was really dusty and not often used by walkers.
The spurs of some low hills were skirted at the boundary of Talbot County, and in the evening the travelers reached a point about three miles from Maryborough. The fine rain was falling, which, in any other country, would have soaked the ground; but here the air absorbed the moisture so wonderfully that the camp did not suffer in the least.
The edges of some low hills were crossed at the border of Talbot County, and in the evening, the travelers arrived at a spot about three miles from Maryborough. A light rain was falling, which in any other place would have drenched the ground; but here, the air absorbed the moisture so effectively that the camp was completely fine.
Next day, the 29th of December, the march was delayed somewhat by a succession of little hills, resembling a miniature Switzerland. It was a constant repetition of up and down hill, and many a jolt besides, all of which were scarcely pleasant. The travelers walked part of the way, and thought it no hardship.
The next day, December 29th, the march was somewhat delayed by a series of small hills that looked like a mini Switzerland. It was a constant cycle of ups and downs, with plenty of bumps along the way, none of which were particularly enjoyable. The travelers walked part of the distance and didn’t mind the effort.
At eleven o’clock they arrived at Carisbrook, rather an important municipality. Ayrton was for passing outside the town without going through it, in order, he said, to save time. Glenarvan concurred with him, but Paganel, always eager for novelties, was for visiting Carisbrook. They gave him his way, and the wagon went on slowly.
At eleven o’clock, they arrived at Carisbrook, quite an important town. Ayrton suggested passing by the town without going through it, claiming it would save time. Glenarvan agreed with him, but Paganel, always eager for new experiences, wanted to check out Carisbrook. They went along with him, and the wagon continued on slowly.
Paganel, as was his custom, took Robert with him. His visit to the town was very short, but it sufficed to give him an exact idea of Australian towns. There was a bank, a court-house, a market, a church, and a hundred or so of brick houses, all exactly alike. The whole town was laid out in squares, crossed with parallel streets in the English fashion. Nothing could be more simple, nothing less attractive. As the town grows, they lengthen the streets as we lengthen the trousers of a growing child, and thus the original symmetry is undisturbed.
Paganel, as usual, brought Robert along with him. His visit to the town was very short, but it was enough to give him a clear picture of Australian towns. There was a bank, a courthouse, a market, a church, and about a hundred identical brick houses. The entire town was organized in squares, connected by parallel streets, following the English style. It couldn’t be simpler or less appealing. As the town expands, they extend the streets just like we lengthen the pants of a growing child, keeping the original symmetry intact.
Carisbrook was full of activity, a remarkable feature in these towns of yesterday. It seems in Australia as if towns shot up like trees, owing to the heat of the sun. Men of business were hurrying along the streets; gold buyers were hastening to meet the in-coming escort; the precious metal, guarded by the local police, was coming from the mines at Bendigo and Mount Alexander. All the little world was so absorbed in its own interests, that the strangers passed unobserved amid the laborious inhabitants.
Carisbrook was bustling with activity, a striking trait in these towns of the past. In Australia, it feels like towns sprang up like trees, thanks to the sun's heat. Businessmen rushed along the streets; gold buyers hurried to meet the incoming escort; the valuable metal, protected by local police, was arriving from the mines at Bendigo and Mount Alexander. Everyone was so focused on their own concerns that the outsiders went unnoticed among the hardworking locals.
After an hour devoted to visiting Carisbrook, the two visitors rejoined their companions, and crossed a highly cultivated district. Long stretches of prairie, known as the “Low Level Plains,” next met their gaze, dotted with countless sheep, and shepherds’ huts. And then came a sandy tract, without any transition, but with the abruptness of change so characteristic of Australian scenery. Mount Simpson and Mount Terrengower marked the southern point where the boundary of the Loddon district cuts the 144th meridian.
After an hour spent visiting Carisbrook, the two visitors met up with their friends and crossed a well-farmed area. They then saw long stretches of prairie, called the “Low Level Plains,” filled with countless sheep and shepherds’ huts. Next came a sandy area, appearing suddenly, just like the sharp changes in Australian landscapes. Mount Simpson and Mount Terrengower marked the southern point where the boundary of the Loddon district meets the 144th meridian.
As yet they had not met with any of the aboriginal tribes living in the savage state. Glenarvan wondered if the Australians were wanting in Australia, as the Indians had been wanting in the Pampas of the Argentine district; but Paganel told him that, in that latitude, the natives frequented chiefly the Murray Plains, about one hundred miles to the eastward.
As of now, they hadn't encountered any of the indigenous tribes living in a primitive state. Glenarvan wondered if the Australians were lacking in Australia, just like the Indians had been missing in the Pampas of Argentina; but Paganel told him that, at this latitude, the natives primarily gathered in the Murray Plains, about one hundred miles to the east.
“We are now approaching the gold district,” said he, “in a day or two we shall cross the rich region of Mount Alexander. It was here that the swarm of diggers alighted in 1852; the natives had to fly to the interior. We are in civilized districts without seeing any sign of it; but our road will, before the day is over, cross the railway which connects the Murray with the sea. Well, I must confess, a railway in Australia does seem to me an astonishing thing!”
“We're getting close to the gold district,” he said, “in a day or two we’ll cross the wealthy area of Mount Alexander. This is where the influx of diggers arrived in 1852; the locals had to retreat to the interior. We're in developed areas without any sign of it; but our route will, before the day is over, cross the railway that connects the Murray with the sea. Well, I have to admit, a railway in Australia really does seem like an amazing thing!”
“And pray, why, Paganel?” said Glenarvan.
“And why is that, Paganel?” said Glenarvan.
“Why? because it jars on one’s ideas. Oh! I know you English are so used to colonizing distant possessions. You, who have electric telegraphs and universal exhibitions in New Zealand, you think it is all quite natural. But it dumb-founders the mind of a Frenchman like myself, and confuses all one’s notions of Australia!”
“Why? Because it clashes with our ideas. Oh! I know you Brits are so accustomed to colonizing far-off lands. You, with your telegraphs and world fairs in New Zealand, think it’s all completely normal. But it leaves someone like me, a Frenchman, stunned and confuses all my thoughts about Australia!”
“Because you look at the past, and not at the present,” said John Mangles.
“Because you’re focused on the past, not the present,” said John Mangles.
A loud whistle interrupted the discussion. The party were within a mile of the railway. Quite a number of persons were hastening toward the railway bridge. The people from the neighboring stations left their houses, and the shepherds their flocks, and crowded the approaches to the railway. Every now and then there was a shout, “The railway! the railway!”
A loud whistle interrupted the conversation. The group was less than a mile from the railway. Quite a few people were rushing toward the railway bridge. Residents from nearby stations left their homes, and the shepherds abandoned their flocks, gathering at the railway approaches. Every now and then, someone would shout, “The railway! The railway!”
Something serious must have occurred to produce such an agitation. Perhaps some terrible accident.
Something serious must have happened to cause this much distress. Maybe some bad accident.
Glenarvan, followed by the rest, urged on his horse. In a few minutes he arrived at Camden Bridge and then he became aware of the cause of such an excitement.
Glenarvan, followed by the others, urged his horse on. In just a few minutes, he reached Camden Bridge, and that’s when he realized the source of all the excitement.
A fearful accident had occurred; not a collision, but a train had gone off the line, and then there had been a fall. The affair recalled the worst disasters of American railways. The river crossed by the railway was full of broken carriages and the engine. Whether the weight of the train had been too much for the bridge, or whether the train had gone off the rails, the fact remained that five carriages out of six fell into the bed of the Loddon, dragged down by the locomotive. The sixth carriage, miraculously preserved by the breaking of the coupling chain, remained on the rails, six feet from the abyss. Below nothing was discernible but a melancholy heap of twisted and blackened axles, shattered wagons, bent rails, charred sleepers; the boiler, burst by the shock, had scattered its plates to enormous distances. From this shapeless mass of ruins flames and black smoke still rose. After the fearful fall came fire, more fearful still! Great tracks of blood, scattered limbs, charred trunks of bodies, showed here and there; none could guess how many victims lay dead and mangled under those ruins.
A terrible accident had happened; not a collision, but a train had derailed and then there was a fall. The incident brought to mind the worst disasters in American railway history. The river crossed by the railway was filled with broken carriages and the engine. Whether the weight of the train was too much for the bridge or if the train had gone off the rails, the fact remained that five out of six carriages fell into the bed of the Loddon, dragged down by the locomotive. The sixth carriage, miraculously saved by the breaking of the coupling chain, stayed on the tracks, just six feet from the edge. Below, nothing was visible but a sad pile of twisted and charred axles, shattered wagons, bent rails, and burned sleepers; the boiler, burst by the impact, had scattered its plates over a wide area. From this shapeless wreckage, flames and black smoke still rose. After the horrific fall came fire, which was even more terrifying! Large pools of blood, scattered limbs, and charred remains of bodies were visible here and there; no one could guess how many victims lay dead and mangled under those ruins.
Glenarvan, Paganel, the Major, Mangles, mixing with the crowd, heard the current talk. Everyone tried to account for the accident, while doing his utmost to save what could be saved.
Glenarvan, Paganel, the Major, and Mangles, mingling with the crowd, listened to the ongoing conversation. Everyone was trying to explain the accident while doing their best to salvage whatever they could.
“The bridge must have broken,” said one.
“The bridge must have collapsed,” said one.
“Not a bit of it. The bridge is whole enough; they must have forgotten to close it to let the train pass. That is all.”
“Not at all. The bridge is perfectly fine; they must have just forgotten to close it for the train to pass. That’s all.”
It was, in fact, a swing bridge, which opened for the convenience of the boats. Had the guard, by an unpardonable oversight, omitted to close it for the passage of the train, so that the train, coming on at full speed, was precipitated into the Loddon? This hypothesis seemed very admissible; for although one-half of the bridge lay beneath the ruins of the train, the other half, drawn up to the opposite shore, hung, still unharmed, by its chains. No one could doubt that an oversight on the part of the guard had caused the catastrophe.
It was actually a swing bridge, which opened for the convenience of the boats. Did the guard, by a huge mistake, forget to close it for the train's passage, causing the train, traveling at full speed, to plunge into the Loddon? This theory seemed very plausible; because while half of the bridge was buried under the wreckage of the train, the other half, raised to the opposite shore, still hung unharmed by its chains. No one could deny that a lapse on the guard's part had led to the disaster.
The accident had occurred in the night, to the express train which left Melbourne at 11:45 in the evening. About a quarter past three in the morning, twenty-five minutes after leaving Castlemaine, it arrived at Camden Bridge, where the terrible disaster befell. The passengers and guards of the last and only remaining carriage at once tried to obtain help. But the telegraph, whose posts were lying on the ground, could not be worked. It was three hours before the authorities from Castlemaine reached the scene of the accident, and it was six o’clock in the morning when the salvage party was organized, under the direction of Mr. Mitchell, the surveyor-general of the colony, and a detachment of police, commanded by an inspector. The squatters and their “hands” lent their aid, and directed their efforts first to extinguishing the fire which raged in the ruined heap with unconquerable violence. A few unrecognizable bodies lay on the slope of the embankment, but from that blazing mass no living thing could be saved. The fire had done its work too speedily. Of the passengers ten only survived—those in the last carriage. The railway authorities sent a locomotive to bring them back to Castlemaine.
The accident happened at night on the express train that left Melbourne at 11:45 PM. About a quarter past three in the morning, twenty-five minutes after leaving Castlemaine, it reached Camden Bridge, where the terrible disaster occurred. The passengers and crew of the last and only remaining carriage immediately tried to get help. But the telegraph, with its posts on the ground, was unusable. It took three hours for the authorities from Castlemaine to arrive at the accident site, and by six o’clock in the morning, a rescue team was organized, led by Mr. Mitchell, the surveyor-general of the colony, along with a police detachment under the command of an inspector. The local squatters and their workers helped out, focusing their efforts first on putting out the fire that burned fiercely in the wreckage. A few unidentifiable bodies were on the slope of the embankment, but nothing could be saved from that blazing mass. The fire spread too quickly. Of the passengers, only ten survived—those in the last carriage. The railway authorities sent a locomotive to take them back to Castlemaine.
Lord Glenarvan, having introduced himself to the surveyor-general, entered into conversation with him and the inspector of police. The latter was a tall, thin man, im-perturbably cool, and, whatever he may have felt, allowed no trace of it to appear on his features. He contemplated this calamity as a mathematician does a problem; he was seeking to solve it, and to find the unknown; and when Glenarvan observed, “This is a great misfortune,” he quietly replied, “Better than that, my Lord.”
Lord Glenarvan, after introducing himself to the surveyor-general, started a conversation with him and the police inspector. The inspector was a tall, thin guy who remained completely calm, showing no signs of his feelings on his face. He looked at the situation like a mathematician tackling a problem; he was trying to figure it out and find the missing piece. When Glenarvan remarked, “This is a big misfortune,” he simply responded, “Better than that, my Lord.”
“Better than that?” cried Glenarvan. “I do not understand you.”
"Better than that?" shouted Glenarvan. "I don't get you."
“It is better than a misfortune, it is a crime!” he replied, in the same quiet tone.
“It's better than a misfortune; it’s a crime!” he responded in the same calm tone.
Glenarvan looked inquiringly at Mr. Mitchell for a solution. “Yes, my Lord,” replied the surveyor-general, “our inquiries have resulted in the conclusion that the catastrophe is the result of a crime. The last luggage-van has been robbed. The surviving passengers were attacked by a gang of five or six villains. The bridge was intentionally opened, and not left open by the negligence of the guard; and connecting with this fact the guard’s disappearance, we may conclude that the wretched fellow was an accomplice of these ruffians.”
Glenarvan looked at Mr. Mitchell, hoping for an answer. “Yes, my Lord,” the surveyor-general responded, “our investigation has led us to believe that this disaster is linked to a crime. The last baggage car has been stolen from. The remaining passengers were assaulted by a group of five or six criminals. The bridge was deliberately opened, not just left open because the guard was careless; and considering the guard's disappearance, we can conclude that this poor man was in league with those villains.”
The police-officer shook his head at this inference.
The police officer shook his head at this suggestion.
“You do not agree with me?” said Mr. Mitchell.
“You don't agree with me?” Mr. Mitchell said.
“No, not as to the complicity of the guard.”
“No, not regarding the guard's involvement.”
“Well, but granting that complicity, we may attribute the crime to the natives who haunt the Murray. Without him the blacks could never have opened a swing-bridge; they know nothing of its mechanism.”
“Well, assuming that complicity, we might blame the crime on the natives who frequent the Murray. Without him, the locals could never have opened a swing bridge; they have no understanding of how it works.”
“Exactly so,” said the police-inspector.
"Exactly," said the police inspector.
“Well,” added Mr. Mitchell, “we have the evidence of a boatman whose boat passed Camden Bridge at 10:40 P. M., that the bridge was properly shut after he passed.”
“Well,” added Mr. Mitchell, “we have the testimony of a boatman whose boat went by Camden Bridge at 10:40 P.M. that the bridge was properly closed after he passed.”
“True.”
"True."
“Well, after that I cannot see any doubt as to the complicity of the guard.”
“Well, after that, I can't see any doubt about the guard's involvement.”
The police-officer shook his head gently, but continuously.
The police officer shook his head softly, but kept doing so.
“Then you don’t attribute the crime to the natives?”
“Then you don’t blame the crime on the natives?”
“Not at all.”
"Not at all."
“To whom then?”
"To whom, then?"
Just at this moment a noise was heard from about half a mile up the river. A crowd had gathered, and quickly increased. They soon reached the station, and in their midst were two men carrying a corpse. It was the body of the guard, quite cold, stabbed to the heart. The murderers had no doubt hoped, by dragging their victim to a distance, that the police would be put on a wrong scent in their first inquiries. This discovery, at any rate, justified the doubts of the police-inspector. The poor blacks had had no hand in the matter.
Just then, a noise came from about half a mile up the river. A crowd gathered and quickly grew. They soon arrived at the station, and in the middle of them were two men carrying a body. It was the guard, already cold, stabbed in the heart. The killers probably thought that by dragging their victim away, the police would be misled in their initial investigations. This finding, at least, confirmed the police inspector's suspicions. The poor Black people were not involved at all.
“Those who dealt that blow,” said he, “were already well used to this little instrument”; and so saying he produced a pair of “darbies,” a kind of handcuff made of a double ring of iron secured by a lock. “I shall soon have the pleasure of presenting them with these bracelets as a New Year’s gift.”
“Those who dealt that blow,” he said, “were already familiar with this little tool”; and with that, he took out a pair of handcuffs, a type of restraint made from two iron rings locked together. “I’ll soon have the pleasure of giving them these bracelets as a New Year’s gift.”
“Then you suspect—”
"Then you think—"
“Some folks who came out free in Her Majesty’s ships.”
“Some people who came out free on Her Majesty’s ships.”
“What! convicts?” cried Paganel, who recognized the formula employed in the Australian colonies.
“What! Convicts?” exclaimed Paganel, who recognized the term used in the Australian colonies.
“I thought,” said Glenarvan, “convicts had no right in the province of Victoria.”
“I thought,” said Glenarvan, “that convicts had no rights in the province of Victoria.”
“Bah!” said the inspector, “if they have no right, they take it! They escape sometimes, and, if I am not greatly mistaken, this lot have come straight from Perth, and, take my word for it, they will soon be there again.”
“Bah!” said the inspector, “if they don’t have the right, they just take it! They get away sometimes, and, if I’m not mistaken, this group has come straight from Perth, and believe me, they’ll be back there soon.”
Mr. Mitchell nodded acquiescence in the words of the police-inspector. At this moment the wagon arrived at the level crossing of the railway. Glenarvan wished to spare the ladies the horrible spectacle at Camden Bridge. He took courteous leave of the surveyor-general, and made a sign to the rest to follow him. “There is no reason,” said he, “for delaying our journey.”
Mr. Mitchell nodded in agreement with the police inspector's words. Just then, the wagon arrived at the railway crossing. Glenarvan wanted to protect the ladies from the terrible sight at Camden Bridge. He politely said goodbye to the surveyor-general and signaled for the others to follow him. “There’s no reason,” he said, “to delay our journey.”
When they reached the wagon, Glenarvan merely mentioned to Lady Helena that there had been a railway accident, without a hint of the crime that had played so great a part in it; neither did he make mention of the presence of a band of convicts in the neighborhood, reserving that piece of information solely for Ayrton’s ear. The little procession now crossed the railway some two hundred yards below the bridge, and then resumed their eastward course.
When they got to the wagon, Glenarvan just told Lady Helena that there had been a train accident, without mentioning the crime that was so significant in it; he also didn’t say anything about the group of convicts nearby, keeping that information just for Ayrton. The small group then crossed the railway about two hundred yards below the bridge and continued on their way east.
CHAPTER XII TOLINE OF THE LACHLAN
ABOUT two miles from the railway, the plain terminated in a range of low hills, and it was not long before the wagon entered a succession of narrow gorges and capricious windings, out of which it emerged into a most charming region, where grand trees, not closely planted, but in scattered groups, were growing with absolutely tropical luxuriance. As the party drove on they stumbled upon a little native boy lying fast asleep beneath the shade of a magnificent banksia. He was dressed in European garb, and seemed about eight years of age. There was no mistaking the characteristic features of his race; the crisped hair, the nearly black skin, the flattened nose, the thick lips, the unusual length of the arms, immediately classed him among the aborigines of the interior. But a degree of intelligence appeared in his face that showed some educational influences must have been at work on his savage, untamed nature.
ABOUT two miles from the railway, the plain ended at a series of low hills, and it didn't take long for the wagon to enter a string of narrow gorges and winding paths, eventually emerging into a beautiful area where impressive trees, not closely packed but in scattered clusters, were growing with a lush, almost tropical vitality. As the group continued on, they came across a little native boy fast asleep in the shade of a stunning banksia tree. He was dressed in Western clothes and looked about eight years old. There was no mistaking the distinctive features of his race; the coiled hair, the nearly black skin, the flat nose, the full lips, and the unusually long arms clearly identified him as one of the Aboriginal people from the interior. But there was a spark of intelligence in his face that suggested some educational influence had been at work on his wild, untamed spirit.
Lady Helena, whose interest was greatly excited by this spectacle, got out of the wagon, followed by Mary, and presently the whole company surrounded the peaceful little sleeper. “Poor child!” said Mary Grant. “Is he lost, I wonder, in this desert?”
Lady Helena, whose interest was really piqued by this scene, got out of the wagon, followed by Mary, and soon the whole group gathered around the peaceful little sleeper. “Poor child!” said Mary Grant. “I wonder if he's lost in this desert?”
“I suppose,” said Lady Helena, “he has come a long way to visit this part. No doubt some he loves are here.”
“I suppose,” said Lady Helena, “he has traveled a long way to visit this place. No doubt some people he cares about are here.”
“But he can’t be left here,” added Robert. “We must—”
“But he can’t be left here,” Robert added. “We have to—”
His compassionate sentence remained unfinished, for, just at that moment the child turned over in his sleep, and, to the extreme surprise of everybody, there was a large label on his shoulders, on which the following was written:
His kind sentence was left incomplete, because just then the child rolled over in his sleep, and to everyone's shock, there was a big label on his shoulders that read:
TOLINE. To be conducted to Echuca. Care of Jeffries Smith, Railway Porter. Prepaid.
TOLINE. To be sent to Echuca. Attention: Jeffries Smith, Railway Porter. Prepaid.
“That’s the English all over!” exclaimed Paganel. “They send off a child just as they would luggage, and book him like a parcel. I heard it was done, certainly; but I could not believe it before.”
“That’s so typical of the English!” Paganel exclaimed. “They send off a child just like they would send luggage and book him like a package. I had heard it was done, for sure; but I just couldn’t believe it until now.”
“Poor child!” said Lady Helena. “Could he have been in the train that got off the line at Camden Bridge? Perhaps his parents are killed, and he is left alone in the world!”
“Poor kid!” said Lady Helena. “Could he have been on the train that went off the tracks at Camden Bridge? Maybe his parents are dead, and he’s left all alone in the world!”
“I don’t think so, madam,” replied John Mangles. “That card rather goes to prove he was traveling alone.”
“I don’t think so, ma’am,” replied John Mangles. “That card actually suggests he was traveling alone.”
“He is waking up!” said Mary.
“He's waking up!” Mary said.
And so he was. His eyes slowly opened and then closed again, pained by the glare of light. But Lady Helena took his hand, and he jumped up at once and looked about him in bewilderment at the sight of so many strangers. He seemed half frightened at first, but the presence of Lady Helena reassured him. “Do you understand English, my little man?” asked the young lady.
And that’s exactly what happened. His eyes opened slowly and then closed again, hurting from the bright light. But Lady Helena took his hand, and he immediately jumped up, looking around in confusion at all the strangers. He appeared a bit scared at first, but Lady Helena’s presence calmed him down. “Do you understand English, my little guy?” asked the young lady.
“I understand it and speak it,” replied the child in fluent enough English, but with a marked accent. His pronunciation was like a Frenchman’s.
“I understand it and speak it,” replied the child in fluent English, but with a noticeable accent. His pronunciation was similar to that of a French person.
“What is your name?” asked Lady Helena.
“What’s your name?” asked Lady Helena.
“Toline,” replied the little native.
"Toline," replied the young local.
“Toline!” exclaimed Paganel. “Ah! I think that means ‘bark of a tree’ in Australian.”
“Toline!” Paganel exclaimed. “Ah! I think that means ‘bark of a tree’ in Australian.”
Toline nodded, and looked again at the travelers.
Toline nodded and glanced back at the travelers.
“Where do you come from?” inquired Lady Helena.
“Where are you from?” asked Lady Helena.
“From Melbourne, by the railway from Sandhurst.”
“From Melbourne, via the train from Sandhurst.”
“Were you in the accident at Camden Bridge?” said Glenarvan.
“Were you in the accident at Camden Bridge?” Glenarvan asked.
“Yes, sir,” was Toline’s reply; “but the God of the Bible protected me.”
“Yes, sir,” Toline replied; “but the God of the Bible kept me safe.”
“Are you traveling alone?”
“Are you traveling solo?”
“Yes, alone; the Reverend Paxton put me in charge of Jeffries Smith; but unfortunately the poor man was killed.”
“Yes, alone; Reverend Paxton put me in charge of Jeffries Smith; but unfortunately, the poor man was killed.”
“And you did not know any one else on the train?”
“And you didn’t know anyone else on the train?”
“No one, madam; but God watches over children and never forsakes them.”
“No one, ma'am; but God looks after children and never abandons them.”
Toline said this in soft, quiet tones, which went to the heart. When he mentioned the name of God his voice was grave and his eyes beamed with all the fervor that animated his young soul.
Toline said this in soft, quiet tones that touched the heart. When he mentioned the name of God, his voice was serious and his eyes sparkled with all the passion that filled his young soul.
This religious enthusiasm at so tender an age was easily explained. The child was one of the aborigines baptized by the English missionaries, and trained by them in all the rigid principles of the Methodist Church. His calm replies, proper behavior, and even his somber garb made him look like a little reverend already.
This religious fervor at such a young age was easy to understand. The child was one of the natives baptized by the English missionaries, who trained him in all the strict principles of the Methodist Church. His composed responses, appropriate behavior, and even his dark clothing made him seem like a little minister already.
But where was he going all alone in these solitudes and why had he left Camden Bridge? Lady Helena asked him about this.
But where was he going all alone in this remote place, and why had he left Camden Bridge? Lady Helena asked him about it.
“I was returning to my tribe in the Lachlan,” he replied. “I wished to see my family again.”
“I was heading back to my tribe in the Lachlan,” he said. “I wanted to see my family again.”
“Are they Australians?” inquired John Mangles.
“Are they Australians?” John Mangles asked.
“Yes, Australians of the Lachlan,” replied Toline.
“Yes, Australians of the Lachlan,” replied Toline.
“Have you a father and mother?” said Robert Grant.
“Do you have a dad and mom?” asked Robert Grant.
“Yes, my brother,” replied Toline, holding out his hand to little Grant. Robert was so touched by the word brother that he kissed the black child, and they were friends forthwith.
“Yeah, my brother,” Toline said, reaching out his hand to little Grant. Robert was so moved by the word brother that he kissed the black child, and they were friends right away.
The whole party were so interested in these replies of the little Australian savage that they all sat round him in a listening group. But the sun had meantime sunk behind the tall trees, and as a few miles would not greatly retard their progress, and the spot they were in would be suitable for a halt, Glenarvan gave orders to prepare their camp for the night at once. Ayrton unfastened the bullocks and turned them out to feed at will. The tent was pitched, and Olbinett got the supper ready. Toline consented, after some difficulty, to share it, though he was hungry enough. He took his seat beside Robert, who chose out all the titbits for his new friend. Toline accepted them with a shy grace that was very charming.
The whole party was so interested in the little Australian's responses that they all gathered around him, eager to listen. Meanwhile, the sun had set behind the tall trees, and since a few miles wouldn’t significantly slow them down, Glenarvan decided to set up camp for the night right there. Ayrton unhooked the bullocks and let them roam freely to graze. The tent was put up, and Olbinett started preparing dinner. After some persuasion, Toline agreed to join them for the meal, even though he was plenty hungry. He took a seat next to Robert, who picked out all the best bits for his new friend. Toline accepted them with a shy grace that was quite charming.
The conversation with him, however, was still kept up, for everyone felt an interest in the child, and wanted to talk to him and hear his history. It was simple enough. He was one of the poor native children confided to the care of charitable societies by the neighboring tribes. The Australian aborigines are gentle and inoffensive, never exhibiting the fierce hatred toward their conquerors which characterizes the New Zealanders, and possibly a few of the races of Northern Australia. They often go to the large towns, such as Adelaide, Sydney and Melbourne, and walk about in very primitive costume. They go to barter their few articles of industry, hunting and fishing implements, weapons, etc., and some of the chiefs, from pecuniary motives, no doubt, willingly leave their children to profit by the advantages of a gratuitous education in English.
The conversation with him continued because everyone was interested in the child and wanted to talk to him and hear his story. It was pretty straightforward. He was one of the poor native kids taken care of by charitable societies from the nearby tribes. The Australian aborigines are gentle and harmless, never showing the intense hatred towards their conquerors that some New Zealanders and possibly a few groups from Northern Australia do. They often visit big cities like Adelaide, Sydney, and Melbourne, walking around in very basic clothing. They come to trade their few handmade goods, like hunting and fishing tools and weapons. Some of the chiefs, likely for financial reasons, happily leave their children to take advantage of free education in English.
This was how Toline’s parents had acted. They were true Australian savages living in the Lachlan, a vast region lying beyond the Murray. The child had been in Melbourne five years, and during that time had never once seen any of his own people. And yet the imperishable feeling of kindred was still so strong in his heart that he had dared to brave this journey over the wilds to visit his tribe once more, scattered though perchance it might be, and his family, even should he find it decimated.
This is how Toline’s parents had behaved. They were genuine Australian Aboriginals living in the Lachlan, a vast area beyond the Murray. The child had been in Melbourne for five years, and during that time had never seen any of his own people. Yet the unbreakable feeling of connection was still so strong in his heart that he had taken the risk to travel through the wilderness to visit his tribe once more, even if it might be scattered, and his family, even if he found it diminished.
“And after you have kissed your parents, are you coming back to Melbourne?” asked Lady Glenarvan.
“And after you’ve kissed your parents, are you coming back to Melbourne?” asked Lady Glenarvan.
“Yes, Madam,” replied Toline, looking at the lady with a loving expression.
“Yes, ma'am,” Toline replied, gazing at the woman with a loving expression.
“And what are you going to be some day?” she continued.
“And what are you going to be someday?” she asked.
“I am going to snatch my brothers from misery and ignorance. I am going to teach them, to bring them to know and love God. I am going to be a missionary.”
“I’m going to rescue my brothers from suffering and ignorance. I’m going to teach them, to help them know and love God. I’m going to be a missionary.”
Words like those, spoken with such animation from a child of only eight years, might have provoked a smile in light, scoffing auditors, but they were understood and appreciated by the grave Scotch, who admired the courage of this young disciple, already armed for the battle. Even Paganel was stirred to the depths of his heart, and felt his warmer sympathy awakened for the poor child.
Words like those, expressed with such energy by an eight-year-old, might have brought a smile to the lighthearted skeptics, but the serious Scots understood and valued the courage of this young follower, already prepared for the fight. Even Paganel was deeply moved and felt a stronger sympathy for the poor child.
To speak the truth, up to that moment he did not care much for a savage in European attire. He had not come to Australia to see Australians in coats and trousers. He preferred them simply tattooed, and this conventional dress jarred on his preconceived notions. But the child’s genuine religious fervor won him over completely. Indeed, the wind-up of the conversation converted the worthy geographer into his best friend.
To be honest, until that moment he didn't really care for a native in European clothes. He hadn't come to Australia to see Australians in coats and pants. He preferred them just tattooed, and this typical outfit clashed with his preconceived ideas. But the child's sincere religious enthusiasm completely changed his mind. In fact, the conclusion of the conversation turned the respected geographer into his closest friend.
It was in reply to a question Lady Helena had asked, that Toline said he was studying at the Normal School in Melbourne, and that the principal was the Reverend Mr. Paxton.
It was in response to a question Lady Helena had asked that Toline said he was studying at the Normal School in Melbourne, and that the principal was Reverend Mr. Paxton.
“And what do they teach you?” she went on to say.
“And what do they teach you?” she continued.
“They teach me the Bible, and mathematics, and geography.”
“They teach me the Bible, math, and geography.”
Paganel pricked up his ears at this, and said, “Indeed, geography!”
Paganel perked up at this and said, “Absolutely, geography!”
“Yes, sir,” said Toline; “and I had the first prize for geography before the Christmas holidays.”
“Yes, sir,” Toline said, “and I won first prize in geography before the Christmas holidays.”
“You had the first prize for geography, my boy?”
“You won the top prize in geography, my boy?”
“Yes, sir. Here it is,” returned Toline, pulling a book out of his pocket.
“Yes, sir. Here it is,” Toline said, pulling a book out of his pocket.
It was a bible, 32mo size, and well bound. On the first page was written the words: “Normal School, Melbourne. First Prize for Geography. Toline of the Lachlan.”
It was a Bible, 32mo size, and well-bound. On the first page was written the words: “Normal School, Melbourne. First Prize for Geography. Toline of the Lachlan.”
Paganel was beside himself. An Australian well versed in geography. This was marvelous, and he could not help kissing Toline on both cheeks, just as if he had been the Reverend Mr. Paxton himself, on the day of the distribution of prizes. Paganel need not have been so amazed at this circumstance, however, for it is frequent enough in Australian schools. The little savages are very quick in learning geography. They learn it eagerly, and on the other hand, are perfectly averse to the science of arithmetic.
Paganel was thrilled. An Australian who knew a lot about geography. This was amazing, and he couldn't help but kiss Toline on both cheeks, just as if he were the Reverend Mr. Paxton himself on prize day. Paganel didn't really need to be so surprised by this, though, since it's quite common in Australian schools. The local kids are very quick to pick up geography. They learn it enthusiastically, while they generally dislike arithmetic.
Toline could not understand this outburst of affection on the part of the Frenchman, and looked so puzzled that Lady Helena thought she had better inform him that Paganel was a celebrated geographer and a distinguished professor on occasion.
Toline couldn't grasp this sudden display of affection from the Frenchman, and she looked so confused that Lady Helena decided it would be best to let her know that Paganel was a renowned geographer and an occasionally distinguished professor.
“A professor of geography!” cried Toline. “Oh, sir, do question me!”
“A geography professor!” shouted Toline. “Oh, sir, please ask me questions!”
“Question you? Well, I’d like nothing better. Indeed, I was going to do it without your leave. I should very much like to see how they teach geography in the Normal School of Melbourne.”
“Question you? I’d love to. In fact, I was going to do it without asking you. I’d really like to see how they teach geography at the Normal School of Melbourne.”
“And suppose Toline trips you up, Paganel!” said McNabbs.
“And what if Toline trips you up, Paganel?” McNabbs said.
“What a likely idea!” exclaimed the geographer. “Trip up the Secretary of the Geographical Society of France.”
“What a great idea!” exclaimed the geographer. “Let’s trip up the Secretary of the Geographical Society of France.”
Their examination then commenced, after Paganel had settled his spectacles firmly on his nose, drawn himself up to his full height, and put on a solemn voice becoming to a professor.
Their examination then began, after Paganel had secured his glasses firmly on his nose, stood up straight, and adopted a serious tone appropriate for a professor.
“Pupil Toline, stand up.”
“Student Toline, stand up.”
As Toline was already standing, he could not get any higher, but he waited modestly for the geographer’s questions.
As Toline was already standing, he couldn't get any taller, but he patiently waited for the geographer’s questions.
“Pupil Toline, what are the five divisions of the globe?”
“Student Toline, what are the five divisions of the globe?”
“Oceanica, Asia, Africa, America, and Europe.”
“Oceanica, Asia, Africa, America, and Europe.”
“Perfectly so. Now we’ll take Oceanica first; where are we at this moment? What are the principal divisions?”
“Exactly. Let’s start with Oceanica; where are we right now? What are the main divisions?”
“Australia, belonging to the English; New Zealand, belonging to the English; Tasmania, belonging to the English. The islands of Chatham, Auckland, Macquarie, Kermadec, Makin, Maraki, are also belonging to the English.”
“Australia, owned by the English; New Zealand, owned by the English; Tasmania, owned by the English. The islands of Chatham, Auckland, Macquarie, Kermadec, Makin, Maraki, are also owned by the English.”
“Very good, and New Caledonia, the Sandwich Islands, the Mendana, the Pomotou?”
“Very good, and New Caledonia, the Sandwich Islands, the Mendana, the Pomotou?”
“They are islands under the Protectorate of Great Britain.”
“They are islands under British protection.”
“What!” cried Paganel, “under the Protectorate of Great Britain. I rather think on the contrary, that France—”
“What!” cried Paganel, “under the protection of Great Britain? I actually think, on the contrary, that France—”
“France,” said the child, with an astonished look.
“France,” said the child, looking amazed.
“Well, well,” said Paganel; “is that what they teach you in the Melbourne Normal School?”
“Well, well,” said Paganel; “is that what they teach you at the Melbourne Normal School?”
“Yes, sir. Isn’t it right?”
"Yes, sir. Isn’t that right?"
“Oh, yes, yes, perfectly right. All Oceanica belongs to the English. That’s an understood thing. Go on.”
“Oh, yes, absolutely. All of Oceanica belongs to the English. That's a given. Go on.”
Paganel’s face betrayed both surprise and annoyance, to the great delight of the Major.
Paganel's face showed both surprise and annoyance, much to the Major's delight.
“Let us go on to Asia,” said the geographer.
“Let’s move on to Asia,” said the geographer.
“Asia,” replied Toline, “is an immense country. Capital—Calcutta. Chief Towns—Bombay, Madras, Calicut, Aden, Malacca, Singapore, Pegu, Colombo. The Lacca-dive Islands, the Maldives, the Chagos, etc., belonging to the English.”
“Asia,” replied Toline, “is a huge continent. Capital—Calcutta. Major Cities—Bombay, Madras, Calicut, Aden, Malacca, Singapore, Pegu, Colombo. The Laccadive Islands, the Maldives, the Chagos, etc., are under British control.”
“Very good, pupil Toline. And now for Africa.”
“Great job, student Toline. Now, let's move on to Africa.”
“Africa comprises two chief colonies—the Cape on the south, capital Capetown; and on the west the English settlements, chief city, Sierra Leone.”
“Africa consists of two main colonies—the Cape in the south, with its capital in Cape Town; and in the west, the English settlements, with Sierra Leone as the main city.”
“Capital!” said Paganel, beginning to enter into this perfectly taught but Anglo-colored fanciful geography. “As to Algeria, Morocco, Egypt—they are all struck out of the Britannic cities.”
“Capital!” said Paganel, starting to grasp this perfectly described yet British-influenced imaginative geography. “As for Algeria, Morocco, Egypt—they’re all excluded from the British cities.”
“Let us pass on, pray, to America.”
“Let’s move on, please, to America.”
“It is divided,” said Toline, promptly, “into North and South America. The former belongs to the English in Canada, New Brunswick, New Scotland, and the United States, under the government of President Johnson.”
“It is divided,” Toline replied quickly, “into North and South America. The former is owned by the English in Canada, New Brunswick, New Scotland, and the United States, under the leadership of President Johnson.”
“President Johnson,” cried Paganel, “the successor of the great and good Lincoln, assassinated by a mad fanatic of the slave party. Capital; nothing could be better. And as to South America, with its Guiana, its archipelago of South Shetland, its Georgia, Jamaica, Trinidad, etc., that belongs to the English, too! Well, I’ll not be the one to dispute that point! But, Toline, I should like to know your opinion of Europe, or rather your professor’s.”
“President Johnson,” Paganel exclaimed, “the successor of the great and good Lincoln, who was killed by a crazy fanatic from the slave party. Capital; it couldn’t be better. And as for South America, with its Guiana, its South Shetland archipelago, its Georgia, Jamaica, Trinidad, etc., that belongs to the English as well! Well, I won’t argue that point! But, Toline, I’d like to know what you think about Europe, or rather what your professor thinks.”
“Europe?” said Toline not at all understanding Paganel’s excitement.
“Europe?” Toline said, completely not getting why Paganel was so excited.
“Yes, Europe! Who does Europe belong to?”
“Yes, Europe! Who does Europe belong to?”
“Why, to the English,” replied Toline, as if the fact was quite settled.
“Why, to the English,” Toline replied, as if that was already a done deal.
“I much doubt it,” returned Paganel. “But how’s that, Toline, for I want to know that?”
“I really doubt it,” Paganel replied. “But how’s that, Toline? I want to know.”
“England, Ireland, Scotland, Malta, Jersey and Guern-sey, the Ionian Islands, the Hebrides, the Shetlands, and the Orkneys.”
“England, Ireland, Scotland, Malta, Jersey and Guernsey, the Ionian Islands, the Hebrides, the Shetlands, and the Orkneys.”
“Yes, yes, my lad; but there are other states you forgot to mention.”
“Yes, yes, my boy; but there are other conditions you forgot to mention.”
“What are they?” replied the child, not the least disconcerted.
“What are they?” the child replied, not even a little unsettled.
“Spain, Russia, Austria, Prussia, France,” answered Paganel.
"Spain, Russia, Austria, Prussia, France," replied Paganel.
“They are provinces, not states,” said Toline.
“They are provinces, not states,” Toline said.
“Well, that beats all!” exclaimed Paganel, tearing off his spectacles.
“Well, that beats everything!” exclaimed Paganel, ripping off his glasses.
“Yes,” continued the child. “Spain—capital, Gibraltar.”
“Yes,” continued the child. “Spain—capital, Gibraltar.”
“Admirable! perfect! sublime! And France, for I am French, and I should like to know to whom I belong.”
“Awesome! Perfect! Amazing! And France, because I'm French, and I want to know where I belong.”
“France,” said Toline, quietly, “is an English province; chief city, Calais.”
“France,” Toline said softly, “is an English territory; main city, Calais.”
“Calais!” cried Paganel. “So you think Calais still belongs to the English?”
“Calais!” Paganel exclaimed. “So you really believe Calais is still in English hands?”
“Certainly.”
"Of course."
“And that it is the capital of France?”
“And that it’s the capital of France?”
“Yes, sir; and it is there that the Governor, Lord Napo-leon, lives.”
“Yes, sir; and that’s where the Governor, Lord Napoleon, lives.”
This was too much for Paganel’s risible faculties. He burst out laughing. Toline did not know what to make of him. He had done his best to answer every question put to him. But the singularity of the answers were not his blame; indeed, he never imagined anything singular about them. However, he took it all quietly, and waited for the professor to recover himself. These peals of laughter were quite incomprehensible to him.
This was too much for Paganel’s sense of humor. He burst out laughing. Toline didn't know how to react to him. He had done his best to answer every question asked. But the uniqueness of the answers wasn't his fault; in fact, he never thought there was anything unusual about them. Still, he stayed calm and waited for the professor to compose himself. Those bursts of laughter were completely baffling to him.
“You see,” said Major McNabbs, laughing, “I was right. The pupil could enlighten you after all.”
“You see,” Major McNabbs said with a laugh, “I was right. The student could teach you something after all.”
“Most assuredly, friend Major,” replied the geographer. “So that’s the way they teach geography in Melbourne! They do it well, these professors in the Normal School! Europe, Asia, Africa, America, Oceanica, the whole world belongs to the English. My conscience! with such an ingenious education it is no wonder the natives submit. Ah, well, Toline, my boy, does the moon belong to England, too?”
“Definitely, my friend Major,” replied the geographer. “Is that how they teach geography in Melbourne? Those professors at the Normal School really know what they're doing! Europe, Asia, Africa, America, Oceania—the whole world belongs to the English. Wow! With such clever education, it’s no surprise the locals go along with it. Well, Toline, my boy, does the moon belong to England as well?”
“She will, some day,” replied the young savage, gravely.
“She will, someday,” replied the young savage, seriously.
This was the climax. Paganel could not stand any more. He was obliged to go away and take his laugh out, for he was actually exploding with mirth, and he went fully a quarter of a mile from the encampment before his equilibrium was restored.
This was the peak moment. Paganel couldn’t take it any longer. He had to step away and let himself laugh, as he was practically bursting with humor, and he walked at least a quarter of a mile from the camp before he calmed down.
Meanwhile, Glenarvan looked up a geography they had brought among their books. It was “Richardson’s Compendium,” a work in great repute in England, and more in agreement with modern science than the manual in use in the Normal School in Melbourne.
Meanwhile, Glenarvan looked up a geography book they had brought along. It was “Richardson’s Compendium,” a well-regarded work in England, and more aligned with modern science than the textbook being used at the Normal School in Melbourne.
“Here, my child,” he said to Toline, “take this book and keep it. You have a few wrong ideas about geography, which it would be well for you to rectify. I will give you this as a keepsake from me.”
“Here, my child,” he said to Toline, “take this book and keep it. You have a few misconceptions about geography that it would be good for you to correct. I’m giving this to you as a memento from me.”
Toline took the book silently; but, after examining it attentively, he shook his head with an air of incredulity, and could not even make up his mind to put it in his pocket.
Toline took the book quietly; however, after looking it over closely, he shook his head in disbelief and couldn't even decide to put it in his pocket.
By this time night had closed in; it was 10 P. M. and time to think of rest, if they were to start betimes next day. Robert offered his friend Toline half his bed, and the little fellow accepted it. Lady Helena and Mary Grant withdrew to the wagon, and the others lay down in the tent, Paganel’s merry peals still mingling with the low, sweet song of the wild magpie.
By this time, night had fallen; it was 10 PM, and it was time to think about getting some rest if they wanted to start early the next day. Robert offered his friend Toline half of his bed, and the little guy accepted. Lady Helena and Mary Grant went to the wagon, while the others settled down in the tent, Paganel’s cheerful laughter still blending with the soft, sweet song of the wild magpie.
But in the morning at six o’clock, when the sunshine wakened the sleepers, they looked in vain for the little Australian. Toline had disappeared. Was he in haste to get to the Lachlan district? or was he hurt by Paganel’s laughter? No one could say.
But in the morning at six o’clock, when the sunlight woke the sleepers, they looked in vain for the little Australian. Toline had vanished. Was he in a hurry to get to the Lachlan district? Or was he hurt by Paganel’s laughter? No one could say.
But when Lady Helena opened her eyes she discovered a fresh branch of mimosa leaves lying across her, and Paganel found a book in his vest pocket, which turned out to be “Richardson’s Geography.”
But when Lady Helena opened her eyes, she found a new branch of mimosa leaves resting on her, and Paganel discovered a book in his vest pocket, which turned out to be "Richardson’s Geography."
CHAPTER XIII A WARNING
ON the 2d of January, at sunrise, the travelers forded the Colban and the Caupespe rivers. The half of their journey was now accomplished. In fifteen days more, should their journey continue to be prosperous, the little party would reach Twofold Bay.
ON the 2nd of January, at sunrise, the travelers crossed the Colban and the Caupespe rivers. They had now completed half of their journey. In another fifteen days, if everything went well, the group would arrive at Twofold Bay.
They were all in good health. All that Paganel said of the hygienic qualities of the climate was realized. There was little or no humidity, and the heat was quite bearable. Neither horses nor bullocks could complain of it any more than human beings. The order of the march had been changed in one respect since the affair of Camden Bridge. That criminal catastrophe on the railway made Ayrton take sundry precautions, which had hitherto been unnecessary. The hunters never lost sight of the wagon, and whenever they camped, one was always placed on watch. Morning and evening the firearms were primed afresh. It was certain that a gang of ruffians was prowling about the country, and though there was no cause for actual fear, it was well to be ready for whatever might happen.
They were all in good health. Everything Paganel said about the health benefits of the climate turned out to be true. There was little to no humidity, and the heat was quite manageable. Neither the horses nor the oxen complained anymore than the humans did. The order of the march had changed in one way since the incident at Camden Bridge. That terrible accident on the railway made Ayrton take several precautions that hadn't been necessary before. The hunters never lost sight of the wagon, and whenever they set up camp, one of them was always on watch. In the morning and evening, the firearms were reloaded. It was clear that a gang of criminals was lurking in the area, and while there wasn't any real cause for fear, it was wise to be prepared for anything that might happen.
It need hardly be said these precautions were adopted without the knowledge of Lady Helena and Mary Grant, as Lord Glenarvan did not wish to alarm them.
It goes without saying that these precautions were taken without the knowledge of Lady Helena and Mary Grant, as Lord Glenarvan didn't want to worry them.
They were by no means unnecessary, however, for any imprudence or carelessness might have cost the travelers dear. Others beside Glenarvan were on their guard. In lonely settlements and on stations, the inhabitants and the squatters prepared carefully against any attack or surprise. Houses are closed at nightfall; the dogs let loose inside the fences, barked at the slightest sound. Not a single shepherd on horseback gathered his numerous flocks together at close of day, without having a carbine slung from his saddle.
They were definitely not unnecessary, though, because any reckless behavior or negligence could have put the travelers in serious danger. Others besides Glenarvan were vigilant. In remote settlements and on ranches, the locals and squatters took careful precautions against any attacks or surprises. Houses were locked up at night; the dogs let loose inside the fences barked at the slightest noise. Not a single shepherd on horseback gathered his many flocks at the end of the day without having a carbine strapped to his saddle.
The outrage at Camden Bridge was the reason for all this, and many a colonist fastened himself in with bolts and bars now at dusk, who used to sleep with open doors and windows.
The anger over Camden Bridge caused all of this, and many colonists locked themselves in with bolts and bars at dusk now, who used to sleep with their doors and windows wide open.
The Government itself displayed zeal and prudence, especially in the Post-office department. On this very day, just as Glenarvan and his party were on their way from Kilmore to Heathcote, the mail dashed by at full speed; but though the horses were at a gallop, Glenarvan caught sight of the glittering weapons of the mounted police that rode by its side, as they swept past in a cloud of dust. The travelers might have fancied themselves back in those lawless times when the discovery of the first gold-fields deluged the Australian continent with the scum of Europe.
The Government itself showed enthusiasm and carefulness, especially in the Post Office department. That very day, just as Glenarvan and his group were traveling from Kilmore to Heathcote, the mail sped by at full speed; even though the horses were galloping, Glenarvan noticed the shining weapons of the mounted police riding alongside, as they passed in a cloud of dust. The travelers might have imagined they were back in those wild days when the discovery of the first gold fields flooded Australia with the dregs of Europe.
A mile beyond the road to Kilmore, the wagon, for the first time since leaving Cape Bernouilli, struck into one of those forests of gigantic trees which extend over a super-fices of several degrees. A cry of admiration escaped the travelers at the sight of the eucalyptus trees, two hundred feet high, with tough bark five inches thick. The trunks, measuring twenty feet round, and furrowed with foamy streaks of an odorous resin, rose one hundred and fifty feet above the soil. Not a branch, not a twig, not a stray shoot, not even a knot, spoilt the regularity of their outline. They could not have come out smoother from the hands of a turner. They stood like pillars all molded exactly alike, and could be counted by hundreds. At an enormous height they spread out in chaplets of branches, rounded and adorned at their extremity with alternate leaves. At the axle of these leaves solitary flowers drooped down, the calyx of which resembles an inverted urn.
A mile past the road to Kilmore, the wagon, for the first time since leaving Cape Bernouilli, entered one of those forests of gigantic trees that cover an extensive area. The travelers gasped in admiration at the sight of the eucalyptus trees, towering two hundred feet high, with tough bark that is five inches thick. Their trunks, measuring twenty feet around and marked with foamy streaks of fragrant resin, rose one hundred and fifty feet above the ground. Not a single branch, twig, stray shoot, or knot disrupted their perfect shape. They looked like they had come straight from the hands of a craftsman. They stood like identical pillars, easily counted by the hundreds. At an enormous height, they spread out into clusters of branches, rounded and adorned with alternating leaves at their tips. From the axils of these leaves hung solitary flowers, their calyx resembling an inverted urn.
Under this leafy dome, which never lost its greenness, the air circulated freely, and dried up the dampness of the ground. Horses, cattle, and wagon could easily pass between the trees, for they were standing in wide rows, and parceled out like a wood that was being felled. This was neither like the densely-packed woods choked up with brambles, nor the virgin forest barricaded with the trunks of fallen trees, and overgrown with inextricable tangles of creepers, where only iron and fire could open up a track. A grassy carpet at the foot of the trees, and a canopy of verdure above, long perspectives of bold colors, little shade, little freshness at all, a peculiar light, as if the rays came through a thin veil, dappled lights and shades sharply reflected on the ground, made up a whole, and constituted a peculiar spectacle rich in novel effects. The forests of the Oceanic continent do not in the least resemble the forests of the New World; and the Eucalyptus, the “Tara” of the aborigines, belonging to the family of MYRTACEA, the different varieties of which can hardly be enumerated, is the tree par excellence of the Australian flora.
Under this leafy canopy, which never lost its greenery, the air flowed freely, drying out the damp ground. Horses, cattle, and wagons could easily move between the trees, as they stood in wide rows, spaced out like a forest that was being logged. This was nothing like the dense woods choked with brambles or the untouched forest blocked by fallen tree trunks and tangled vines, where only iron and fire could clear a path. A grassy carpet covered the ground at the base of the trees, and a green canopy stretched above, with long perspectives of bold colors, providing little shade and freshness overall, creating a unique light as if the rays were coming through a thin veil. Dappled lights and shadows sharply reflected on the ground formed a complete and striking spectacle rich in new effects. The forests of the Oceanic continent don’t resemble the forests of the New World at all; and the Eucalyptus, the “Tara” of the indigenous people, part of the MYRTACEA family, with its various types that can hardly be counted, is the tree *par excellence* of Australian flora.
The reason of the shade not being deep, nor the darkness profound, under these domes of verdure, was that these trees presented a curious anomaly in the disposition of the leaves. Instead of presenting their broad surface to the sunlight, only the side is turned. Only the profile of the leaves is seen in this singular foliage. Consequently the sun’s rays slant down them to the earth, as if through the open slants of a Venetian blind.
The reason the shade isn’t very deep and the darkness isn’t intense under these green canopies is that the trees have an interesting quirk in how their leaves are arranged. Instead of showing their wide surfaces to the sunlight, only the edge faces the light. You can only see the outline of the leaves in this unusual vegetation. As a result, the sun’s rays angle down to the ground, just like light filtering through the slats of a Venetian blind.
Glenarvan expressed his surprise at this circumstance, and wondered what could be the cause of it. Paganel, who was never at a loss for an answer, immediately replied:
Glenarvan was surprised by this situation and wondered what could be causing it. Paganel, who always had a quick answer, immediately responded:
“What astonishes me is not the caprice of nature. She knows what she is about, but botanists don’t always know what they are saying. Nature made no mistake in giving this peculiar foliage to the tree, but men have erred in calling them EUCALYPTUS.”
“What surprises me isn’t the unpredictability of nature. She knows what she's doing, but botanists don’t always understand what they're talking about. Nature didn’t make a mistake by giving this unique foliage to the tree; rather, people have made a mistake in calling them EUCALYPTUS.”
“What does the word mean?” asked Mary Grant.
“What does that word mean?” Mary Grant asked.
“It comes from a Greek word, meaning I cover well. They took care to commit the mistake in Greek, that it might not be so self-evident, for anyone can see that the ecualyptus covers badly.”
“It comes from a Greek word, meaning I cover well. They made sure to make the mistake in Greek so it wouldn’t be too obvious, because anyone can see that the eucalyptus covers poorly.”
“I agree with you there,” said Glenarvan; “but now tell us, Paganel, how it is that the leaves grow in this fashion?”
"I see what you mean," Glenarvan said. "But now tell us, Paganel, why do the leaves grow like this?"
“From a purely physical cause, friends,” said Paganel, “and one that you will easily understand. In this country where the air is dry and rain seldom falls, and the ground is parched, the trees have no need of wind or sun. Moisture lacking, sap is lacking also. Hence these narrow leaves, which seek to defend themselves against the light, and prevent too great evaporation. This is why they present the profile and not the face to the sun’s rays. There is nothing more intelligent than a leaf.”
“From a purely physical standpoint, friends,” Paganel said, “and it’s something you’ll easily grasp. In this country, where the air is dry and it hardly ever rains, and the ground is dry, the trees don’t need wind or sunlight. Without moisture, there’s no sap. That’s why these narrow leaves try to protect themselves from the light and reduce excessive evaporation. This is why they show their edges to the sun's rays instead of facing it directly. There’s nothing smarter than a leaf.”
“And nothing more selfish,” added the Major. “These only thought of themselves, and not at all of travelers.”
"And nothing could be more selfish," the Major added. "They only thought about themselves and not at all about the travelers."
Everyone inclined to the opinion of McNabbs except Paganel, who congratulated himself on walking under shadeless trees, though all the time he was wiping the perspiration from his forehead. However, this disposition of foliage was certainly to be regretted, for the journey through the forest was often long and painful, as the traveler had no protection whatever against the sun’s fierce rays.
Everyone agreed with McNabb's opinion except for Paganel, who felt pleased to be walking under trees without leaves, even though he was constantly wiping the sweat from his forehead. Still, this lack of shade was definitely unfortunate, as the trek through the forest was often long and difficult because the traveler had no shelter from the sun's harsh rays.
The whole of this day the wagon continued to roll along through interminable rows of eucalyptus, without meeting either quadruped or native. A few cockatoos lived in the tops of the trees, but at such a height they could scarcely be distinguished, and their noisy chatter was changed into an imperceptible murmur. Occasionally a swarm of par-roquets flew along a distant path, and lighted it up for an instant with gay colors; but otherwise, solemn silence reigned in this vast green temple, and the tramp of the horses, a few words exchanged with each other by the riders, the grinding noise of the wheels, and from time to time a cry from Ayrton to stir up his lazy team, were the only sounds which disturbed this immense solitude.
All day long, the wagon kept rolling through endless rows of eucalyptus trees, without encountering any animals or locals. A few cockatoos were perched high up in the treetops, barely visible, and their noisy chatter faded into a soft murmur. Occasionally, a flock of parrots would fly along a distant path, brightening the scene for a moment with their vibrant colors; but otherwise, a deep silence filled this vast green space. The only sounds breaking the immense quiet were the hoofbeats of the horses, a few words exchanged among the riders, the grinding of the wheels, and now and then, a shout from Ayrton to encourage his sluggish team.
When night came they camped at the foot of some eucalyptus, which bore marks of a comparatively recent fire. They looked like tall factory chimneys, for the flame had completely hollowed them out their whole length. With the thick bark still covering them, they looked none the worse. However, this bad habit of squatters or natives will end in the destruction of these magnificent trees, and they will disappear like the cedars of Lebanon, those world monuments burnt by unlucky camp fires.
When night fell, they set up camp at the base of some eucalyptus trees that showed signs of a relatively recent fire. They resembled tall factory chimneys, as the fire had completely hollowed them out along their entire length. With the thick bark still intact, they seemed to be doing okay. However, this poor practice by squatters or locals will ultimately lead to the destruction of these magnificent trees, and they will vanish like the cedars of Lebanon, those iconic trees destroyed by unfortunate campfires.
Olbinett, acting on Paganel’s advice, lighted his fire to prepare supper in one of these tubular trunks. He found it drew capitally, and the smoke was lost in the dark foliage above. The requisite precautions were taken for the night, and Ayrton, Mulrady, Wilson and John Mangles undertook in turn to keep watch until sunrise.
Olbinett, following Paganel’s suggestion, started a fire to cook dinner in one of the tubular trunks. He discovered it worked really well, and the smoke disappeared into the dark leaves above. They took the necessary precautions for the night, and Ayrton, Mulrady, Wilson, and John Mangles each took turns keeping watch until sunrise.
On the 3d of January, all day long, they came to nothing but the same symmetrical avenues of trees; it seemed as if they never were going to end. However, toward evening the ranks of trees began to thin, and on a little plain a few miles off an assemblage of regular houses.
On January 3rd, all day long, they encountered nothing but the same orderly rows of trees; it felt like they would never end. However, as evening approached, the lines of trees started to thin out, and a few miles away on a small flat area, there was a group of organized houses.
“Seymour!” cried Paganel; “that is the last town we come to in the province of Victoria.”
“Seymour!” Paganel shouted. “That’s the last town we reach in the province of Victoria.”
“Is it an important one?” asked Lady Helena.
“Is it an important one?” Lady Helena asked.
“It is a mere village, madam, but on the way to become a municipality.”
“It’s just a small village, ma’am, but it’s on its way to becoming a town.”
“Shall we find a respectable hotel there?” asked Glenarvan.
“Should we look for a decent hotel there?” asked Glenarvan.
“I hope so,” replied Paganel.
“I hope so,” Paganel replied.
“Very well; let us get on to the town, for our fair travelers, with all their courage, will not be sorry, I fancy, to have a good night’s rest.”
“Alright; let’s head to the town, because I think our brave travelers will appreciate a good night’s rest.”
“My dear Edward, Mary and I will accept it gladly, but only on the condition that it will cause no delay, or take us the least out of the road.”
“My dear Edward, Mary and I will gladly accept it, but only if it won't cause any delays or get in our way.”
“It will do neither,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “Besides, our bullocks are fatigued, and we will start to-morrow at daybreak.”
“It won’t do either,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “Besides, our oxen are tired, and we’ll set off tomorrow at dawn.”
It was now nine o’clock; the moon was just beginning to rise, but her rays were only slanting yet, and lost in the mist. It was gradually getting dark when the little party entered the wide streets of Seymour, under Paganel’s guidance, who seemed always to know what he had never seen; but his instinct led him right, and he walked straight to Campbell’s North British Hotel.
It was now nine o’clock; the moon was just starting to rise, but its light was still slanting and lost in the mist. It was gradually getting dark when the small group entered the wide streets of Seymour, following Paganel, who seemed to know where to go despite having never been there before; his intuition led him correctly, and he walked straight to Campbell’s North British Hotel.
The Major without even leaving the hotel, was soon aware that fear absorbed the inhabitants of the little town. Ten minutes’ conversation with Dickson, the loquacious landlord, made him completely acquainted with the actual state of affairs; but he never breathed a word to any one.
The Major, without even stepping out of the hotel, quickly realized that fear consumed the people of the small town. A ten-minute chat with Dickson, the talkative landlord, gave him a clear understanding of the situation; however, he never mentioned a word to anyone.
When supper was over, though, and Lady Glenarvan, and Mary, and Robert had retired, the Major detained his companions a little, and said, “They have found out the perpetrators of the crime on the Sandhurst railroad.”
When dinner was done, however, and Lady Glenarvan, Mary, and Robert had left, the Major held back his friends for a moment and said, “They’ve discovered who committed the crime on the Sandhurst railroad.”
“And are they arrested?” asked Ayrton, eagerly.
“And have they been arrested?” asked Ayrton, eagerly.
“No,” replied McNabbs, without apparently noticing the EMPRESSMENT of the quartermaster—an EMPRESSMENT which, moreover, was reasonable enough under the circumstances.
“No,” replied McNabbs, seemingly unaware of the urgency of the quartermaster—an urgency that was, in fact, quite justified given the situation.
“So much the worse,” replied Ayrton.
“So much the worse,” Ayrton replied.
“Well,” said Glenarvan, “who are the authors of the crime?”
"Well," said Glenarvan, "who committed the crime?"
“Read,” replied the Major, offering Glenarvan a copy of the Australian and New Zealand Gazette, “and you will see that the inspector of the police was not mistaken.”
“Read,” replied the Major, handing Glenarvan a copy of the Australian and New Zealand Gazette, “and you’ll see that the police inspector was right.”
Glenarvan read aloud the following message:
Glenarvan read the following message out loud:
SYDNEY, Jan. 2, 1866.
SYDNEY, Jan. 2, 1866.
It will be remembered that on the night of the 29th or 30th of last December there was an accident at Camden Bridge, five miles beyond the station at Castlemaine, on the railway from Melbourne to Sandhurst. The night express, 11.45, dashing along at full speed, was precipitated into the Loddon River.
It will be remembered that on the night of December 29th or 30th last year, there was an accident at Camden Bridge, five miles beyond the Castlemaine station on the railway from Melbourne to Sandhurst. The night express, at 11:45, was rushing along at full speed when it crashed into the Loddon River.
Camden Bridge had been left open. The numerous robberies committed after the accident, the body of the guard picked up about half a mile from Camden Bridge, proved that this catastrophe was the result of a crime.
Camden Bridge had been left open. The many robberies that happened after the accident, along with the body of the guard found about half a mile from Camden Bridge, showed that this catastrophe was caused by a crime.
Indeed, the coroner’s inquest decided that the crime must be attributed to the band of convicts which escaped six months ago from the Penitentiary at Perth, Western Australia, just as they were about to be transferred to Norfolk Island.
Indeed, the coroner’s inquest determined that the crime should be blamed on the group of convicts who escaped six months ago from the Penitentiary in Perth, Western Australia, just as they were about to be moved to Norfolk Island.
The gang numbers twenty-nine men; they are under the command of a certain Ben Joyce, a criminal of the most dangerous class, who arrived in Australia a few months ago, by what ship is not known, and who has hitherto succeeded in evading the hands of justice.
The gang consists of twenty-nine men; they are led by a guy named Ben Joyce, a dangerous criminal who arrived in Australia a few months ago. It's not known which ship he came on, and so far he's managed to avoid getting caught by the law.
The inhabitants of towns, colonists and squatters at stations, are hereby cautioned to be on their guard, and to communicate to the Surveyor-General any information that may aid his search. J. P. MITCHELL, S. G.
The people living in towns, along with colonists and squatters on stations, are warned to stay alert and report any information to the Surveyor-General that could help with his search. J. P. MITCHELL, S. G.
When Glenarvan had finished reading this article, McNabbs turned to the geographer and said, “You see, Paganel, there can be convicts in Australia.”
When Glenarvan finished reading the article, McNabbs turned to the geographer and said, “You see, Paganel, there can be convicts in Australia.”
“Escaped convicts, that is evident,” replied Paganel, “but not regularly transported criminals. Those fellows have no business here.”
“Escaped convicts, that's clear,” replied Paganel, “but not properly transported criminals. Those guys shouldn't be here.”
“Well, they are here, at any rate,” said Glenarvan; “but I don’t suppose the fact need materially alter our arrangements. What do you think, John?”
“Well, they are here, at least,” said Glenarvan; “but I don’t think that changes anything in our plans. What do you think, John?”
John Mangles did not reply immediately; he hesitated between the sorrow it would cause the two children to give up the search, and the fear of compromising the expedition.
John Mangles didn’t respond right away; he paused, torn between the sadness it would bring the two kids to stop searching and the worry of jeopardizing the mission.
“If Lady Glenarvan, and Miss Grant were not with us,” he said, “I should not give myself much concern about these wretches.”
“If Lady Glenarvan and Miss Grant weren’t with us,” he said, “I wouldn’t worry much about these scoundrels.”
Glenarvan understood him and added, “Of course I need not say that it is not a question of giving up our task; but would it perhaps be prudent, for the sake of our companions, to rejoin the DUNCAN at Melbourne, and proceed with our search for traces of Harry Grant on the eastern side. What do you think of it, McNabbs?”
Glenarvan got what he meant and replied, “I don’t need to say that we’re not giving up on our mission; but would it be wise, for the sake of our friends, to meet back up with the DUNCAN in Melbourne and continue our search for Harry Grant's whereabouts on the eastern side? What’s your opinion on this, McNabbs?”
“Before I give my opinion,” replied the Major, “I should like to hear Ayrton’s.”
“Before I share my thoughts,” replied the Major, “I’d like to hear Ayrton’s.”
At this direct appeal, the quartermaster looked at Glenarvan, and said, “I think we are two hundred miles from Melbourne, and that the danger, if it exists, is as great on the route to the south as on the route to the east. Both are little frequented, and both will serve us. Besides, I do not think that thirty scoundrels can frighten eight well-armed, determined men. My advice, then, is to go forward.”
At this point in the conversation, the quartermaster turned to Glenarvan and said, “I believe we’re about two hundred miles from Melbourne, and the danger, if there is any, is just as serious traveling south as it is heading east. Both routes are rarely used, and either one could work for us. Plus, I don’t think thirty troublemakers can intimidate eight well-armed and determined men. So, my advice is to keep moving forward.”
“And good advice too, Ayrton,” replied Paganel. “By going on we may come across the traces of Captain Grant. In returning south, on the contrary, we turn our backs to them. I think with you, then, and I don’t care a snap for these escaped fellows. A brave man wouldn’t care a bit for them!”
“And good advice too, Ayrton,” Paganel replied. “If we keep going, we might find the clues left by Captain Grant. If we head back south, on the other hand, we’re turning away from them. I agree with you, and I’m not worried about those escaped guys at all. A brave person wouldn’t be bothered by them!”
Upon this they agreed with the one voice to follow their original programme.
They all agreed in unison to stick to their original plan.
“Just one thing, my Lord,” said Ayrton, when they were about to separate.
“Just one thing, my Lord,” Ayrton said as they were about to part ways.
“Say on, Ayrton.”
"Go ahead, Ayrton."
“Wouldn’t it be advisable to send orders to the DUNCAN to be at the coast?”
“Wouldn't it be a good idea to send orders to the DUNCAN to be at the coast?”
“What good would that be,” replied John Mangles. “When we reach Twofold Bay it will be time enough for that. If any unexpected event should oblige us to go to Melbourne, we might be sorry not to find the DUNCAN there. Besides, her injuries can not be repaired yet. For these reasons, then, I think it would be better to wait.”
“What good would that be?” John Mangles replied. “When we get to Twofold Bay, it’ll be time for that. If something unexpected happens that forces us to go to Melbourne, we might regret not finding the DUNCAN there. Plus, her damage can’t be fixed yet. For these reasons, I think it’s better to wait.”
“All right,” said Ayrton, and forbore to press the matter further.
“All right,” said Ayrton, and decided not to push the issue any further.
CHAPTER XIV WEALTH IN THE WILDERNESS
ON January 6, at 7 A. M., after a tranquil night passed in longitude 146 degrees 15”, the travelers continued their journey across the vast district. They directed their course steadily toward the rising sun, and made a straight line across the plain. Twice over they came upon the traces of squatters going toward the north, and their different footprints became confused, and Glenarvan’s horse no longer left on the dust the Blackpoint mark, recognizable by its double shamrock.
ON January 6, at 7 A.M., after a peaceful night spent at longitude 146 degrees 15”, the travelers resumed their journey across the wide area. They headed straight toward the rising sun and moved in a direct line across the plain. They encountered signs of squatters heading north twice, and their various footprints blended together, so Glenarvan’s horse no longer left the recognizable Blackpoint mark in the dust, which was identified by its double shamrock.
The plain was furrowed in some places by fantastic winding creeks surrounded by box, and whose waters were rather temporary than permanent. They originated in the slopes of the Buffalo Ranges, a chain of mountains of moderate height, the undulating line of which was visible on the horizon. It was resolved to camp there the same night. Ayrton goaded on his team, and after a journey of thirty-five miles, the bullocks arrived, somewhat fatigued. The tent was pitched beneath the great trees, and as night had drawn on supper was served as quickly as possible, for all the party cared more for sleeping than eating, after such a day’s march.
The plain had some twisted creeks cutting through it, surrounded by box trees, and the water was more temporary than permanent. These creeks started from the slopes of the Buffalo Ranges, a medium-height mountain range that was visible on the horizon. It was decided to camp there that night. Ayrton urged his team on, and after traveling thirty-five miles, the bulls arrived, a bit worn out. The tent was set up under the large trees, and since night had fallen, supper was served quickly because everyone was more interested in sleeping than eating after such a long day of travel.
Paganel who had the first watch did not lie down, but shouldered his rifle and walked up and down before the camp, to keep himself from going to sleep. In spite of the absence of the moon, the night was almost luminous with the light of the southern constellations. The SAVANT amused himself with reading the great book of the firmament, a book which is always open, and full of interest to those who can read it. The profound silence of sleeping nature was only interrupted by the clanking of the hobbles on the horses’ feet.
Paganel, who had the first watch, didn’t lie down but grabbed his rifle and walked back and forth in front of the camp to keep from falling asleep. Despite the absence of the moon, the night was nearly bright from the light of the southern stars. The SAVANT kept himself entertained by reading the vast book of the sky, a book that is always open and full of interest for those who can understand it. The deep silence of the sleeping nature was only broken by the clinking of the hobbles on the horses’ feet.
Paganel was engrossed in his astronomical meditations, and thinking more about the celestial than the terrestrial world, when a distant sound aroused him from his reverie. He listened attentively, and to his great amaze, fancied he heard the sounds of a piano. He could not be mistaken, for he distinctly heard chords struck.
Paganel was deep in thought about the stars, focusing more on the sky than on the ground, when a distant sound pulled him out of his daydream. He listened closely, and to his surprise, he thought he heard the sound of a piano. He couldn’t be wrong, because he clearly heard chords being played.
“A piano in the wilds!” said Paganel to himself. “I can never believe it is that.”
“A piano in the wilderness!” Paganel said to himself. “I can hardly believe it is real.”
It certainly was very surprising, but Paganel found it easier to believe it was some Australian bird imitating the sounds of a Pleyel or Erard, as others do the sounds of a clock or mill. But at this very moment, the notes of a clear ringing voice rose on the air. The PIANIST was accompanied by singing. Still Paganel was unwilling to be convinced. However, next minute he was forced to admit the fact, for there fell on his ear the sublime strains of Mozart’s “Il mio tesoro tanto” from Don Juan.
It was definitely surprising, but Paganel found it easier to believe that it was some Australian bird mimicking the sounds of a Pleyel or Erard, like others mimic the sounds of a clock or a mill. But just then, the notes of a clear, ringing voice filled the air. The PIANIST was accompanied by singing. Still, Paganel was reluctant to be convinced. However, the next moment he had to admit the truth, as he heard the sublime strains of Mozart’s “Il mio tesoro tanto” from Don Juan.
“Well, now,” said the geographer to himself, “let the Australian birds be as queer as they may, and even granting the paroquets are the most musical in the world, they can’t sing Mozart!”
“Well, now,” said the geographer to himself, “let the Australian birds be as strange as they want, and even if the parrots are the most talented singers in the world, they can’t sing Mozart!”
He listened to the sublime inspiration of the great master to the end. The effect of this soft melody on the still clear night was indescribable. Paganel remained as if spellbound for a time; the voice ceased and all was silence. When Wilson came to relieve the watch, he found the geographer plunged into a deep reverie. Paganel made no remark, however, to the sailor, but reserved his information for Glenarvan in the morning, and went into the tent to bed.
He listened to the wonderful inspiration of the great master until the end. The impact of this gentle melody on the calm, clear night was beyond words. Paganel stayed there, as if enchanted, for a while; the music stopped, and everything fell silent. When Wilson arrived to take over the watch, he found the geographer lost in thought. Paganel didn’t say anything to the sailor but decided to share his thoughts with Glenarvan in the morning, and then he went into the tent to sleep.
Next day, they were all aroused from sleep by the sudden loud barking of dogs, Glenarvan got up forthwith. Two magnificent pointers, admirable specimens of English hunting dogs, were bounding in front of the little wood, into which they had retreated at the approach of the travelers, redoubling their clamor.
The next day, they were all woken up by the sudden loud barking of dogs. Glenarvan got up immediately. Two beautiful pointers, excellent examples of English hunting dogs, were running in front of the small woods, where they had retreated at the sight of the travelers, barking even louder.
“There is some station in this desert, then,” said Glenarvan, “and hunters too, for these are regular setters.”
“There’s a station in this desert, then,” said Glenarvan, “and hunters too, because these are proper setters.”
Paganel was just about to recount his nocturnal experiences, when two young men appeared, mounted on horses of the most perfect breed, true “hunters.”
Paganel was just about to share his nighttime adventures when two young men showed up, riding horses of the finest breed, real "hunters."
The two gentlemen dressed in elegant hunting costume, stopped at the sight of the little group camping in gipsy fashion. They looked as if they wondered what could bring an armed party there, but when they saw the ladies get out of the wagon, they dismounted instantly, and went toward them hat in hand. Lord Glenarvan came to meet them, and, as a stranger, announced his name and rank.
The two men, both dressed in stylish hunting outfits, paused when they saw the small group camping in a makeshift way. They seemed puzzled about what could have brought an armed group to that spot, but when they noticed the women getting out of the wagon, they quickly got off their horses and approached them, hats in hand. Lord Glenarvan went to greet them and, as a newcomer, introduced himself by name and title.
The gentlemen bowed, and the elder of them said, “My Lord, will not these ladies and yourself and friends honor us by resting a little beneath our roof?”
The gentlemen bowed, and the eldest among them said, “My Lord, will these ladies, you, and your friends do us the honor of resting a while under our roof?”
“Mr.—,” began Glenarvan.
“Mr.—,” Glenarvan started.
“Michael and Sandy Patterson are our names, proprietors of Hottam Station. Our house is scarcely a quarter of a mile distant.”
“Michael and Sandy Patterson are our names, owners of Hottam Station. Our house is just a quarter of a mile away.”
“Gentlemen,” replied Glenarvan, “I should not like to abuse such kindly-offered hospitality.”
“Gentlemen,” Glenarvan replied, “I wouldn’t want to take advantage of such generous hospitality.”
“My Lord,” returned Michael Patterson, “by accepting it you will confer a favor on poor exiles, who will be only too happy to do the honors of the wilds.”
“My Lord,” replied Michael Patterson, “if you accept it, you’ll be doing a favor for the poor exiles, who will be more than happy to show you around the wilderness.”
Glenarvan bowed in token of acquiescence.
Glenarvan nodded in agreement.
“Sir,” said Paganel, addressing Michael Patterson, “if it is not an impudent question, may I ask whether it was you that sung an air from the divine Mozart last night?”
“Sir,” Paganel said to Michael Patterson, “if it’s not too forward of me to ask, were you the one who sang a piece by the great Mozart last night?”
“It was, sir,” replied the stranger, “and my cousin Sandy accompanied me.”
“It was, sir,” replied the stranger, “and my cousin Sandy came with me.”
“Well, sir,” replied Paganel, holding out his hand to the young man, “receive the sincere compliments of a Frenchman, who is a passionate admirer of this music.”
"Well, sir," replied Paganel, extending his hand to the young man, "accept the heartfelt compliments of a Frenchman who is a passionate fan of this music."
Michael grasped his hand cordially, and then pointing out the road to take, set off, accompanied by the ladies and Lord Glenarvan and his friends, for the station. The horses and the camp were left to the care of Ayrton and the sailors.
Michael shook his hand warmly, and then, directing everyone on which road to take, he set off with the ladies, Lord Glenarvan, and his friends toward the station. The horses and the camp were entrusted to Ayrton and the sailors.
Hottam Station was truly a magnificent establishment, kept as scrupulously in order as an English park. Immense meadows, enclosed in gray fences, stretched away out of sight. In these, thousands of bullocks and millions of sheep were grazing, tended by numerous shepherds, and still more numerous dogs. The crack of the stock-whip mingled continually with the barking of the “collies” and the bellowing and bleating of the cattle and sheep.
Hottam Station was an amazing place, kept as meticulously in order as an English park. Huge meadows, surrounded by gray fences, extended as far as the eye could see. In these fields, thousands of cattle and millions of sheep were grazing, watched over by many shepherds and even more dogs. The sound of the stock-whip cracking blended continuously with the barking of the collies, along with the bellowing of the cattle and the bleating of the sheep.
Toward the east there was a boundary of myalls and gum-trees, beyond which rose Mount Hottam, its imposing peak towering 7,500 feet high. Long avenues of green trees were visible on all sides. Here and there was a thick clump of “grass trees,” tall bushes ten feet high, like the dwarf palm, quite lost in their crown of long narrow leaves. The air was balmy and odorous with the perfume of scented laurels, whose white blossoms, now in full bloom, distilled on the breeze the finest aromatic perfume.
To the east, there was a line of myalls and gum trees, beyond which stood Mount Hottam, its impressive peak rising 7,500 feet high. Long rows of green trees could be seen all around. Occasionally, there was a dense cluster of "grass trees," tall bushes reaching ten feet high, resembling the dwarf palm, completely lost in their crown of long, narrow leaves. The air was warm and fragrant with the scent of flowering laurels, whose white blossoms, now fully bloomed, released the sweetest aromatic fragrance into the breeze.
To these charming groups of native trees were added transplantations from European climates. The peach, pear, and apple trees were there, the fig, the orange, and even the oak, to the rapturous delight of the travelers, who greeted them with loud hurrahs! But astonished as the travelers were to find themselves walking beneath the shadow of the trees of their own native land, they were still more so at the sight of the birds that flew about in the branches—the “satin bird,” with its silky plumage, and the “king-honeysuckers,” with their plumage of gold and black velvet.
To these lovely groups of native trees were added transplants from European climates. The peach, pear, and apple trees were there, along with figs, oranges, and even oaks, much to the thrilled delight of the travelers, who cheered loudly! But as amazed as the travelers were to find themselves walking under the shade of trees from their homeland, they were even more surprised by the sight of the birds flitting about in the branches—the “satin bird,” with its silky feathers, and the “king-honeysuckers,” adorned in golden and black velvet plumage.
For the first time, too, they saw here the “Lyre” bird, the tail of which resembles in form the graceful instrument of Orpheus. It flew about among the tree ferns, and when its tail struck the branches, they were almost surprised not to hear the harmonious strains that inspired Amphion to rebuild the walls of Thebes. Paganel had a great desire to play on it.
For the first time, they also saw the “Lyre” bird, whose tail looks like the elegant instrument of Orpheus. It flitted among the tree ferns, and when its tail brushed against the branches, they were almost surprised not to hear the beautiful sounds that motivated Amphion to rebuild the walls of Thebes. Paganel really wanted to play it.
However, Lord Glenarvan was not satisfied with admiring the fairy-like wonders of this oasis, improvised in the Australian desert. He was listening to the history of the young gentlemen. In England, in the midst of civilized countries, the new comer acquaints his host whence he comes and whither he is going; but here, by a refinement of delicacy, Michael and Sandy Patterson thought it a duty to make themselves known to the strangers who were about to receive their hospitality.
However, Lord Glenarvan wasn't just content to admire the magical sights of this oasis, created in the Australian desert. He was listening to the story of the young men. In England, amidst civilized nations, a newcomer informs his host where he’s coming from and where he’s headed; but here, with a touch of courtesy, Michael and Sandy Patterson felt it was important to introduce themselves to the strangers who were about to welcome them.
Michael and Sandy Patterson were the sons of London bankers. When they were twenty years of age, the head of their family said, “Here are some thousands, young men. Go to a distant colony; and start some useful settlement there. Learn to know life by labor. If you succeed, so much the better. If you fail, it won’t matter much. We shall not regret the money which makes you men.”
Michael and Sandy Patterson were the sons of London bankers. When they turned twenty, the head of their family said, “Here’s some money for you, young men. Go to a far-off colony and start a useful settlement there. Learn what life is like through hard work. If you succeed, great. If you fail, it won’t be a big deal. We won’t regret the money that helps you grow into men.”
The two young men obeyed. They chose the colony of Victoria in Australia, as the field for sowing the paternal bank-notes, and had no reason to repent the selection. At the end of three years the establishment was flourishing. In Victoria, New South Wales, and Southern Australia, there are more than three thousand stations, some belonging to squatters who rear cattle, and others to settlers who farm the ground. Till the arrival of the two Pattersons, the largest establishment of this sort was that of Mr. Jamieson, which covered an area of seventy-five miles, with a frontage of about eight miles along the Peron, one of the affluents of the Darling.
The two young men complied. They chose the colony of Victoria in Australia as their place to invest their father's money, and they had no reason to regret that choice. After three years, their business was thriving. In Victoria, New South Wales, and Southern Australia, there are over three thousand stations, some owned by squatters raising cattle, and others by settlers farming the land. Before the arrival of the two Pattersons, the largest operation of this kind was owned by Mr. Jamieson, which spanned seventy-five miles, with about eight miles of frontage along the Peron, one of the tributaries of the Darling.
Now Hottam Station bore the palm for business and extent. The young men were both squatters and settlers. They managed their immense property with rare ability and uncommon energy.
Now Hottam Station was the leader in business and size. The young men were both squatters and settlers. They handled their vast property with exceptional skill and remarkable energy.
The station was far removed from the chief towns in the midst of the unfrequented districts of the Murray. It occupied a long wide space of five leagues in extent, lying between the Buffalo Ranges and Mount Hottam. At the two angles north of this vast quadrilateral, Mount Aberdeen rose on the left, and the peaks of High Barven on the right. Winding, beautiful streams were not wanting, thanks to the creeks and affluents of the Oven’s River, which throws itself at the north into the bed of the Murray. Consequently they were equally successful in cattle breeding and farming. Ten thousand acres of ground, admirably cultivated, produced harvests of native productions and exotics, and several millions of animals fattened in the fertile pastures. The products of Hottam Station fetched the very highest price in the markets of Castlemaine and Melbourne.
The station was far from the main towns, situated in the remote areas of the Murray. It covered a long, wide stretch of five leagues in size, positioned between the Buffalo Ranges and Mount Hottam. At the two northern corners of this vast rectangle, Mount Aberdeen rose on the left, and the peaks of High Barven stood on the right. There were beautiful winding streams, thanks to the creeks and tributaries of the Oven’s River, which flows north into the Murray. As a result, they were equally successful in raising cattle and farming. Ten thousand acres of land, excellently cultivated, produced harvests of native and exotic crops, while millions of animals thrived in the lush pastures. The products from Hottam Station fetched the highest prices in the markets of Castlemaine and Melbourne.
Michael and Sandy Patterson had just concluded these details of their busy life, when their dwelling came in sight, at the extremity of the avenue of the oaks.
Michael and Sandy Patterson had just wrapped up the details of their busy lives when their home came into view at the end of the oak-lined avenue.
It was a charming house, built of wood and brick, hidden in groves of emerophilis. Nothing at all, however, belonging to a station was visible—neither sheds, nor stables, nor cart-houses. All these out-buildings, a perfect village, comprising more than twenty huts and houses, were about a quarter of a mile off in the heart of a little valley. Electric communication was established between this village and the master’s house, which, far removed from all noise, seemed buried in a forest of exotic trees.
It was a lovely house, made of wood and brick, tucked away in groves of emerophilis. However, nothing related to the estate was visible—no sheds, stables, or cart-houses. All these out-buildings, forming a small village with more than twenty huts and houses, were about a quarter of a mile away in the center of a little valley. There was electric communication set up between this village and the main house, which, far from all noise, felt like it was hidden in a forest of exotic trees.
At Sandy Patterson’s bidding, a sumptuous breakfast was served in less than a quarter of an hour. The wines and viands were of the finest quality; but what pleased the guests most of all in the midst of these refinements of opulence, was the joy of the young squatters in offering them this splendid hospitality.
At Sandy Patterson's request, a lavish breakfast was ready in under fifteen minutes. The food and drinks were top-notch; but what delighted the guests the most, amidst all this luxury, was the happiness of the young squatters in providing such wonderful hospitality.
It was not long before they were told the history of the expedition, and had their liveliest interest awakened for its success. They spoke hopefully to the young Grants, and Michael said: “Harry Grant has evidently fallen into the hands of natives, since he has not turned up at any of the settlements on the coast. He knows his position exactly, as the document proves, and the reason he did not reach some English colony is that he must have been taken prisoner by the savages the moment he landed!”
It wasn't long before they heard about the expedition's history, and their interest in its success was sparked. They spoke hopefully to the young Grants, and Michael said, "Harry Grant has clearly ended up with the natives since he hasn't shown up at any of the coastal settlements. He knows exactly where he is, as the document shows, and the reason he didn't make it to any English colony is that he must have been captured by the savages the moment he landed!"
“That is precisely what befell his quartermaster, Ayrton,” said John Mangles.
"That's exactly what happened to his quartermaster, Ayrton," John Mangles said.
“But you, gentlemen, then, have never heard the catastrophe of the BRITANNIA, mentioned?” inquired Lady Helena.
“But you, gentlemen, have you ever heard about the disaster of the BRITANNIA?” Lady Helena asked.
“Never, Madam,” replied Michael.
“Never, ma'am,” replied Michael.
“And what treatment, in your opinion, has Captain Grant met with among the natives?”
“And what do you think the natives have done to Captain Grant?”
“The Australians are not cruel, Madam,” replied the young squatter, “and Miss Grant may be easy on that score. There have been many instances of the gentleness of their nature, and some Europeans have lived a long time among them without having the least cause to complain of their brutality.”
“The Australians aren’t cruel, ma'am,” the young squatter replied. “And Miss Grant can rest easy on that front. There have been many examples of their gentle nature, and some Europeans have lived among them for a long time without any reason to complain about their brutality.”
“King, among others, the sole survivor of the Burke expedition,” put in Paganel.
“King, among others, the only survivor of the Burke expedition,” added Paganel.
“And not only that bold explorer,” returned Sandy, “but also an English soldier named Buckley, who deserted at Port Philip in 1803, and who was welcomed by the natives, and lived thirty-three years among them.”
“And not just that daring explorer,” replied Sandy, “but also an English soldier named Buckley, who deserted at Port Philip in 1803, was welcomed by the locals, and lived among them for thirty-three years.”
“And more recently,” added Michael, “one of the last numbers of the AUSTRALASIA informs us that a certain Morrilli has just been restored to his countrymen after sixteen years of slavery. His story is exactly similar to the captain’s, for it was at the very time of his shipwreck in the PRUVIENNE, in 1846, that he was made prisoner by the natives, and dragged away into the interior of the continent. I therefore think you have reason to hope still.”
“And more recently,” added Michael, “one of the latest issues of the AUSTRALASIA tells us that a man named Morrilli has just been reunited with his countrymen after sixteen years of slavery. His story is exactly like the captain’s, because it was during the shipwreck of the PRUVIENNE in 1846 that he was captured by the locals and taken deep into the continent. So, I think you still have reason to hope.”
The young squatter’s words caused great joy to his auditors. They completely corroborated the opinions of Paganel and Ayrton.
The young squatter’s words brought immense joy to his listeners. They completely confirmed the views of Paganel and Ayrton.
The conversation turned on the convicts after the ladies had left the table. The squatters had heard of the catastrophe at Camden Bridge, but felt no uneasiness about the escaped gang. It was not a station, with more than a hundred men on it, that they would dare to attack. Besides, they would never go into the deserts of the Murray, where they could find no booty, nor near the colonies of New South Wales, where the roads were too well watched. Ayrton had said this too.
The conversation shifted to the convicts after the women left the table. The squatters had heard about the disaster at Camden Bridge but weren't worried about the escaped gang. They wouldn't dare attack a station with more than a hundred men on it. Plus, they would never venture into the deserts of the Murray, where there was no loot to be found, or near the colonies of New South Wales, where the roads were too heavily patrol. Ayrton had mentioned this as well.
Glenarvan could not refuse the request of his amiable hosts, to spend the whole day at the station. It was twelve hours’ delay, but also twelve hours’ rest, and both horses and bullocks would be the better for the comfortable quarters they would find there. This was accordingly agreed upon, and the young squatters sketched out a programme of the day’s amusements, which was adopted eagerly.
Glenarvan couldn’t turn down the kind invitation from his friendly hosts to spend the entire day at the station. It meant a twelve-hour delay, but also twelve hours of rest, and both the horses and cattle would benefit from the cozy accommodations they would find there. This was quickly agreed upon, and the young squatters laid out a plan for the day’s activities, which everyone enthusiastically accepted.
At noon, seven vigorous hunters were before the door. An elegant brake was intended for the ladies, in which the coachman could exhibit his skill in driving four-in-hand. The cavalcade set off preceded by huntsmen, and armed with first-rate rifles, followed by a pack of pointers barking joyously as they bounded through the bushes. For four hours the hunting party wandered through the paths and avenues of the park, which was as large as a small German state. The Reuiss-Schleitz, or Saxe-Coburg Gotha, would have gone inside it comfortably. Few people were to be met in it certainly, but sheep in abundance. As for game, there was a complete preserve awaiting the hunters. The noisy reports of guns were soon heard on all sides. Little Robert did wonders in company with Major McNabbs. The daring boy, in spite of his sister’s injunctions, was always in front, and the first to fire. But John Mangles promised to watch over him, and Mary felt less uneasy.
At noon, seven energetic hunters stood at the door. An elegant carriage was arranged for the ladies, where the coachman could show off his skills in driving a team of four. The procession set off with huntsmen leading the way, armed with top-quality rifles, followed by a pack of pointers barking happily as they bounded through the bushes. For four hours, the hunting party explored the paths and avenues of the park, which was as big as a small German state. The Reuiss-Schleitz or Saxe-Coburg Gotha would have easily fit inside. There weren’t many people around, but there were plenty of sheep. As for game, there was a complete reserve waiting for the hunters. The loud reports of guns soon echoed from all sides. Little Robert did amazing things alongside Major McNabbs. The daring boy, despite his sister's warnings, was always in the front and the first to shoot. But John Mangles promised to keep an eye on him, and Mary felt a bit more at ease.
During this BATTUE they killed certain animals peculiar to the country, the very names of which were unknown to Paganel; among others the “wombat” and the “bandicoot.” The wombat is an herbivorous animal, which burrows in the ground like a badger. It is as large as a sheep, and the flesh is excellent.
During this hunt, they killed some animals native to the area, the names of which were completely unfamiliar to Paganel; including the “wombat” and the “bandicoot.” The wombat is a plant-eating animal that digs underground like a badger. It's about the size of a sheep, and its meat is really good.
The bandicoot is a species of marsupial animal which could outwit the European fox, and give him lessons in pillaging poultry yards. It was a repulsive-looking animal, a foot and a half long, but, as Paganel chanced to kill it, of course he thought it charming.
The bandicoot is a type of marsupial that could outsmart the European fox and teach him a thing or two about raiding chicken coops. It was an ugly animal, about a foot and a half long, but since Paganel happened to kill it, he found it charming, of course.
“An adorable creature,” he called it.
“An adorable creature,” he called it.
But the most interesting event of the day, by far, was the kangaroo hunt. About four o’clock, the dogs roused a troop of these curious marsupials. The little ones retreated precipitately into the maternal pouch, and all the troop decamped in file. Nothing could be more astonishing than the enormous bounds of the kangaroo. The hind legs of the animal are twice as long as the front ones, and unbend like a spring. At the head of the flying troop was a male five feet high, a magnificent specimen of the macropus giganteus, an “old man,” as the bushmen say.
But the most exciting event of the day, by far, was the kangaroo hunt. Around four o’clock, the dogs started a chase with a group of these curious marsupials. The little ones quickly hid in their mother’s pouch, and the entire group took off in a line. Nothing could be more amazing than the huge leaps of the kangaroo. The animal's hind legs are twice as long as the front ones and spring back like a coil. Leading the energetic group was a male standing five feet tall, a magnificent example of the macropus giganteus, an “old man,” as the bushmen call it.
For four or five miles the chase was vigorously pursued. The kangaroos showed no signs of weariness, and the dogs, who had reason enough to fear their strong paws and sharp nails, did not care to approach them. But at last, worn out with the race, the troop stopped, and the “old man” leaned against the trunk of a tree, ready to defend himself. One of the pointers, carried away by excitement, went up to him. Next minute the unfortunate beast leaped into the air, and fell down again completely ripped up.
For four or five miles, the chase went on relentlessly. The kangaroos showed no signs of tiring, and the dogs, well aware of their powerful paws and sharp nails, stayed back. But eventually, exhausted from the run, the group came to a halt, and the “old man” leaned against the trunk of a tree, prepared to defend himself. One of the pointers, caught up in the excitement, approached him. The next moment, the poor dog leaped into the air and fell back down completely torn apart.
The whole pack, indeed, would have had little chance with these powerful marsupia. They had to dispatch the fellow with rifles. Nothing but balls could bring down the gigantic animal.
The whole group really wouldn’t have stood a chance against these powerful marsupials. They had to take out the guy with rifles. Only bullets could bring down the giant animal.
Just at this moment, Robert was well nigh the victim of his own imprudence. To make sure of his aim, he had approached too near the kangaroo, and the animal leaped upon him immediately. Robert gave a loud cry and fell. Mary Grant saw it all from the brake, and in an agony of terror, speechless and almost unable even to see, stretched out her arms toward her little brother. No one dared to fire, for fear of wounding the child.
Just at that moment, Robert was almost the victim of his own carelessness. To get a better shot, he had gotten too close to the kangaroo, and the animal jumped at him right away. Robert let out a loud scream and fell. Mary Grant saw everything from the bushes, and in a panic of fear, speechless and almost unable to see, reached out her arms toward her little brother. No one dared to shoot, afraid of hitting the child.
But John Mangles opened his hunting knife, and at the risk of being ripped up himself, sprang at the animal, and plunged it into his heart. The beast dropped forward, and Robert rose unhurt. Next minute he was in his sister’s arms.
But John Mangles opened his hunting knife and, risking his own safety, lunged at the animal, driving the knife into its heart. The beast collapsed, and Robert stood up unharmed. The next moment, he was in his sister’s arms.
“Thank you, Mr. John, thank you!” she said, holding out her hand to the young captain.
“Thanks, Mr. John, thank you!” she said, reaching out her hand to the young captain.
“I had pledged myself for his safety,” was all John said, taking her trembling fingers into his own.
“I promised to keep him safe,” was all John said, taking her trembling fingers in his own.
This occurrence ended the sport. The band of marsupia had disappeared after the death of their leader. The hunting party returned home, bringing their game with them. It was then six o’clock. A magnificent dinner was ready. Among other things, there was one dish that was a great success. It was kangaroo-tail soup, prepared in the native manner.
This event marked the end of the sport. The group of marsupials had vanished after their leader's death. The hunting party came back home, bringing their catches with them. It was six o’clock. A wonderful dinner was ready. Among other dishes, there was one that was a huge hit: kangaroo-tail soup, made the traditional way.
Next morning very early, they took leave of the young squatters, with hearty thanks and a positive promise from them of a visit to Malcolm Castle when they should return to Europe.
The next morning, bright and early, they said goodbye to the young squatters, expressing their sincere thanks and getting a solid promise from them to visit Malcolm Castle when they returned to Europe.
Then the wagon began to move away, round the foot of Mount Hottam, and soon the hospitable dwelling disappeared from the sight of the travelers like some brief vision which had come and gone.
Then the wagon started to move away, around the base of Mount Hottam, and soon the welcoming home faded from the travelers' view like a fleeting glimpse that had come and gone.
For five miles further, the horses were still treading the station lands. It was not till nine o’clock that they had passed the last fence, and entered the almost unknown districts of the province of Victoria.
For another five miles, the horses continued to walk across the station lands. It wasn’t until nine o’clock that they crossed the last fence and entered the mostly unfamiliar areas of Victoria.
CHAPTER XV SUSPICIOUS OCCURRENCES
AN immense barrier lay across the route to the southeast. It was the Australian Alps, a vast fortification, the fantastic curtain of which extended 1,500 miles, and pierced the clouds at the height of 4,000 feet.
An enormous barrier stretched across the route to the southeast. It was the Australian Alps, a massive fortification, the incredible curtain of which extended 1,500 miles and reached the clouds at a height of 4,000 feet.
The cloudy sky only allowed the heat to reach the ground through a close veil of mist. The temperature was just bearable, but the road was toilsome from its uneven character. The extumescences on the plain became more and more marked. Several mounds planted with green young gum trees appeared here and there. Further on these protuberances rising sharply, formed the first steps of the great Alps. From this time their course was a continual ascent, as was soon evident in the strain it made on the bullocks to drag along the cumbrous wagon. Their yoke creaked, they breathed heavily, and the muscles of their houghs were stretched as if they would burst. The planks of the vehicle groaned at the unexpected jolts, which Ayrton with all his skill could not prevent. The ladies bore their share of discomfort bravely.
The cloudy sky only let the heat reach the ground through a thin layer of mist. The temperature was just manageable, but the road was tough because it was uneven. The bumps on the plain became more pronounced. Several mounds with young green gum trees popped up here and there. Further ahead, these mounds rose sharply, forming the first steps of the great Alps. From then on, the path was a constant uphill climb, which was soon clear by how hard it was for the bullocks to pull the heavy wagon. Their yoke creaked, they breathed heavily, and their leg muscles were stretched as if they might tear. The planks of the wagon groaned with every unexpected jolt that Ayrton, despite all his skill, couldn’t prevent. The ladies handled their share of discomfort with courage.
John Mangles and his two sailors acted as scouts, and went about a hundred steps in advance. They found out practical paths, or passes, indeed they might be called, for these projections of the ground were like so many rocks, between which the wagon had to steer carefully. It required absolute navigation to find a safe way over the billowy region.
John Mangles and his two sailors acted as scouts and moved about a hundred steps ahead. They identified practical paths, or passes, since these land projections were like numerous rocks that the wagon had to navigate around carefully. It took precise navigation to find a safe route through the undulating terrain.
It was a difficult and often perilous task. Many a time Wilson’s hatchet was obliged to open a passage through thick tangles of shrubs. The damp argillaceous soil gave way under their feet. The route was indefinitely prolonged owing to the insurmountable obstacles, huge blocks of granite, deep ravines, suspected lagoons, which obliged them to make a thousand detours. When night came they found they had only gone over half a degree. They camped at the foot of the Alps, on the banks of the creek of Cobongra, on the edge of a little plain, covered with little shrubs four feet high, with bright red leaves which gladdened the eye.
It was a challenging and often dangerous task. Time and again, Wilson had to use his hatchet to clear a path through thick shrubs. The damp, clay-like soil sank under their feet. The journey stretched on endlessly due to the enormous obstacles—big blocks of granite, deep ravines, and questionable lagoons—that forced them to make countless detours. When night fell, they realized they had only covered half a degree. They set up camp at the base of the Alps, by the Cobongra creek, on the edge of a small plain filled with four-foot-tall shrubs adorned with bright red leaves that were pleasing to the eye.
“We shall have hard work to get over,” said Glenarvan, looking at the chain of mountains, the outlines of which were fast fading away in the deepening darkness. “The very name Alps gives plenty of room for reflection.”
“We're going to have a tough time ahead,” said Glenarvan, gazing at the chain of mountains, their outlines quickly disappearing into the growing darkness. “Just the name Alps gives us a lot to think about.”
“It is not quite so big as it sounds, my dear Glenarvan. Don’t suppose you have a whole Switzerland to traverse. In Australia there are the Grampians, the Pyrenees, the Alps, the Blue Mountains, as in Europe and America, but in miniature. This simply implies either that the imagination of geographers is not infinite, or that their vocabulary of proper names is very poor.”
“It’s not as big as it sounds, my dear Glenarvan. Don’t think you have an entire Switzerland to cover. In Australia, we have the Grampians, the Pyrenees, the Alps, and the Blue Mountains, just like in Europe and America, but on a smaller scale. This just suggests either that geographers’ imaginations aren’t limitless or that their collection of place names is rather lacking.”
“Then these Australian Alps,” said Lord Glenarvan, “are—”
“Then these Australian Alps,” said Lord Glenarvan, “are—”
“Mere pocket mountains,” put in Paganel; “we shall get over them without knowing it.”
“Mere pocket mountains,” Paganel said; “we’ll get over them without even realizing it.”
“Speak for yourself,” said the Major. “It would certainly take a very absent man who could cross over a chain of mountains and not know it.”
“Speak for yourself,” said the Major. “It would definitely take a very oblivious person to cross a range of mountains and not realize it.”
“Absent! But I am not an absent man now. I appeal to the ladies. Since ever I set foot on the Australian continent, have I been once at fault? Can you reproach me with a single blunder?”
“Absent! But I’m not absent now. I appeal to the ladies. Since I first arrived on the Australian continent, have I made a single mistake? Can you point out even one error I’ve made?”
“Not one. Monsieur Paganel,” said Mary Grant. “You are now the most perfect of men.”
“Not one. Monsieur Paganel,” Mary Grant said. “You are now the best of men.”
“Too perfect,” added Lady Helena, laughing; “your blunders suited you admirably.”
“Too perfect,” Lady Helena added with a laugh, “your mistakes fit you perfectly.”
“Didn’t they, Madam? If I have no faults now, I shall soon get like everybody else. I hope then I shall make some outrageous mistake before long, which will give you a good laugh. You see, unless I make mistakes, it seems to me I fail in my vocation.”
“Didn’t they, Madam? If I don’t have any flaws now, I’ll soon be just like everyone else. I hope I’ll make some ridiculous mistake soon that will give you a good laugh. You see, unless I mess up, it feels to me like I'm failing in my purpose.”
Next day, the 9th of January, notwithstanding the assurances of the confident geographer, it was not without great difficulty that the little troop made its way through the Alpine pass. They were obliged to go at a venture, and enter the depths of narrow gorges without any certainty of an outlet. Ayrton would doubtless have found himself very much embarrassed if a little inn, a miserable public house, had not suddenly presented itself.
The next day, January 9th, despite the confident geographer's reassurances, the small group had a tough time navigating the Alpine pass. They had to take risks and plunge into narrow gorges without any guarantee of a way out. Ayrton would have definitely been in a tough spot if a small inn, a rundown pub, hadn’t unexpectedly appeared.
“My goodness!” cried Paganel, “the landlord of this inn won’t make his fortune in a place like this. What is the use of it here?”
“My goodness!” exclaimed Paganel, “the owner of this inn isn’t going to get rich in a place like this. What’s the point of it here?”
“To give us the information we want about the route,” replied Glenarvan. “Let us go in.”
“To give us the information we need about the route,” replied Glenarvan. “Let’s go in.”
Glenarvan, followed by Ayrton, entered the inn forthwith. The landlord of the “Bush Inn,” as it was called, was a coarse man with an ill-tempered face, who must have considered himself his principal customer for the gin, brandy and whisky he had to sell. He seldom saw any one but the squatters and rovers. He answered all the questions put to him in a surly tone. But his replies sufficed to make the route clear to Ayrton, and that was all that was wanted. Glenarvan rewarded him with a handful of silver for his trouble, and was about to leave the tavern, when a placard against the wall arrested his attention.
Glenarvan, followed by Ayrton, walked into the inn immediately. The landlord of the “Bush Inn,” as it was called, was a rough man with an unfriendly face, who probably thought of himself as the main customer for the gin, brandy, and whisky he served. He rarely interacted with anyone except squatters and drifters. He responded to all questions in a grumpy tone. But his answers were enough to clarify the route for Ayrton, which was all that mattered. Glenarvan tipped him with a handful of silver for his help and was about to leave the tavern when a sign on the wall caught his attention.
It was a police notice, and announcing the escape of the convicts from Perth, and offering a reward for the capture of Ben Joyce of pounds 100 sterling.
It was a police notice announcing the escape of convicts from Perth and offering a reward of £100 for the capture of Ben Joyce.
“He’s a fellow that’s worth hanging, and no mistake,” said Glenarvan to the quartermaster.
"He's a guy who's definitely worth hanging out with, no doubt about it," said Glenarvan to the quartermaster.
“And worth capturing still more. But what a sum to offer! He is not worth it!”
“And it’s still worth capturing even more. But what a price to pay! He isn’t worth it!”
“I don’t feel very sure of the innkeeper though, in spite of the notice,” said Glenarvan.
“I’m not too sure about the innkeeper, even with the notice,” said Glenarvan.
“No more do I,” replied Ayrton.
“No more do I,” Ayrton replied.
They went back to the wagon, toward the point where the route to Lucknow stopped. A narrow path wound away from this which led across the chain in a slanting direction. They had commenced the ascent.
They returned to the wagon, heading toward the spot where the road to Lucknow ended. A narrow path branched off from this and led up across the ridge at an angle. They had started the climb.
It was hard work. More than once both the ladies and gentlemen had to get down and walk. They were obliged to help to push round the wheels of the heavy vehicle, and to support it frequently in dangerous declivities, to unharness the bullocks when the team could not go well round sharp turnings, prop up the wagon when it threatened to roll back, and more than once Ayrton had to reinforce his bullocks by harnessing the horses, although they were tired out already with dragging themselves along.
It was hard work. More than once, both the women and men had to get out and walk. They had to help push the heavy vehicle's wheels and support it often on steep slopes, unhitch the oxen when the team couldn't navigate sharp turns, brace the wagon when it seemed like it would roll back, and more than once, Ayrton had to strengthen his oxen by harnessing the horses, even though they were already worn out from pulling themselves along.
Whether it was this prolonged fatigue, or from some other cause altogether, was not known, but one of the horses sank suddenly, without the slightest symptom of illness. It was Mulrady’s horse that fell, and on attempting to pull it up, the animal was found to be dead. Ayrton examined it immediately, but was quite at a loss to account for the disaster.
Whether it was this ongoing fatigue or something else entirely wasn't clear, but one of the horses suddenly collapsed without any signs of sickness. It was Mulrady’s horse that fell, and when they tried to lift it, they discovered the animal was dead. Ayrton checked it right away but had no idea what caused the tragedy.
“The beast must have broken some blood vessels,” said Glenarvan.
“The beast must have broken some blood vessels,” Glenarvan said.
“Evidently,” replied Ayrton.
"Obviously," replied Ayrton.
“Take my horse, Mulrady,” added Glenarvan. “I will join Lady Helena in the wagon.”
“Take my horse, Mulrady,” Glenarvan said. “I’ll ride with Lady Helena in the wagon.”
Mulrady obeyed, and the little party continued their fatiguing ascent, leaving the carcass of the dead animal to the ravens.
Mulrady complied, and the small group continued their tiring climb, leaving the body of the dead animal for the ravens.
The Australian Alps are of no great thickness, and the base is not more than eight miles wide. Consequently if the pass chosen by Ayrton came out on the eastern side, they might hope to get over the high barrier within forty-eight hours more. The difficulty of the route would then be surmounted, and they would only have to get to the sea.
The Australian Alps aren’t very thick, and their base is only about eight miles wide. So, if the pass that Ayrton picked leads to the eastern side, they could expect to cross the high barrier in another forty-eight hours. After that, the toughest part of the journey would be behind them, and they would just need to make it to the sea.
During the 18th the travelers reached the top-most point of the pass, about 2,000 feet high. They found themselves on an open plateau, with nothing to intercept the view. Toward the north the quiet waters of Lake Omco, all alive with aquatic birds, and beyond this lay the vast plains of the Murray. To the south were the wide spreading plains of Gippsland, with its abundant gold-fields and tall forests. There nature was still mistress of the products and water, and great trees where the woodman’s ax was as yet unknown, and the squatters, then five in number, could not struggle against her. It seemed as if this chain of the Alps separated two different countries, one of which had retained its primitive wildness. The sun went down, and a few solitary rays piercing the rosy clouds, lighted up the Murray district, leaving Gippsland in deep shadow, as if night had suddenly fallen on the whole region. The contrast was presented very vividly to the spectators placed between these two countries so divided, and some emotion filled the minds of the travelers, as they contemplated the almost unknown district they were about to traverse right to the frontiers of Victoria.
During the 18th, the travelers reached the highest point of the pass, around 2,000 feet up. They found themselves on an open plateau with an unobstructed view. To the north were the calm waters of Lake Omco, filled with aquatic birds, and beyond that lay the vast plains of the Murray. To the south were the expansive plains of Gippsland, home to abundant goldfields and tall forests. There, nature was still in charge of the resources and water, and great trees stood where the woodcutter’s axe had yet to touch, with only five squatters struggling against her. It felt as if this chain of the Alps split two distinct countries, one of which had maintained its primitive wilderness. As the sun set, a few stray rays broke through the rosy clouds, illuminating the Murray district while leaving Gippsland shrouded in deep shadow, as if night had suddenly descended over the entire area. The contrast was striking to the observers caught between these two separated lands, filling the travelers with emotion as they reflected on the almost uncharted territory they were about to cross towards the border of Victoria.
They camped on the plateau that night, and next day the descent commenced. It was tolerably rapid. A hailstorm of extreme violence assailed the travelers, and obliged them to seek a shelter among the rocks. It was not hail-stones, but regular lumps of ice, as large as one’s hand, which fell from the stormy clouds. A waterspout could not have come down with more violence, and sundry big bruises warned Paganel and Robert to retreat. The wagon was riddled in several places, and few coverings would have held out against those sharp icicles, some of which had fastened themselves into the trunks of the trees. It was impossible to go on till this tremendous shower was over, unless the travelers wished to be stoned. It lasted about an hour, and then the march commenced anew over slanting rocks still slippery after the hail.
They set up camp on the plateau that night, and the next day, they started their descent. It was pretty quick. A severe hailstorm hit the travelers, forcing them to find shelter among the rocks. It wasn’t just hailstones; it was actual chunks of ice, as big as a person’s hand, falling from the stormy clouds. It was as intense as a waterspout, and some big bruises warned Paganel and Robert to move back. The wagon was damaged in several places, and few coverings would have stood up to those sharp icicles, some of which had lodged into the tree trunks. It was impossible to continue until this fierce shower passed, unless the travelers wanted to be hurt. It lasted about an hour, and then the journey resumed over slanted rocks still slick from the hail.
Toward evening the wagon, very much shaken and disjointed in several parts, but still standing firm on its wooden disks, came down the last slopes of the Alps, among great isolated pines. The passage ended in the plains of Gippsland. The chain of the Alps was safely passed, and the usual arrangements were made for the nightly encampment.
Toward evening, the wagon, jostled and rattled in several places but still stable on its wooden wheels, descended the final slopes of the Alps, surrounded by tall, solitary pines. The journey through the Alps was successfully completed, and the usual setup for the nightly campsite began.
On the 21st, at daybreak, the journey was resumed with an ardor which never relaxed. Everyone was eager to reach the goal—that is to say the Pacific Ocean—at that part where the wreck of the BRITANNIA had occurred. Nothing could be done in the lonely wilds of Gippsland, and Ayrton urged Lord Glenarvan to send orders at once for the DUNCAN to repair to the coast, in order to have at hand all means of research. He thought it would certainly be advisable to take advantage of the Lucknow route to Melbourne. If they waited it would be difficult to find any way of direct communication with the capital.
On the 21st, at dawn, the journey resumed with a determination that never wavered. Everyone was excited to reach their destination—that is, the Pacific Ocean—at the spot where the wreck of the BRITANNIA had happened. There was nothing to be done in the desolate wilderness of Gippsland, and Ayrton urged Lord Glenarvan to immediately order the DUNCAN to head to the coast, so they would have all the means for their search. He thought it was definitely a good idea to take the Lucknow route to Melbourne. If they delayed, it would be hard to find a way to communicate with the capital directly.
This advice seemed good, and Paganel recommended that they should act upon it. He also thought that the presence of the yacht would be very useful, and he added, that if the Lucknow road was once passed, it would be impossible to communicate with Melbourne.
This advice sounded smart, and Paganel suggested they should follow it. He also believed having the yacht nearby would be really helpful, and he mentioned that once they got past the Lucknow road, it would be impossible to get in touch with Melbourne.
Glenarvan was undecided what to do, and perhaps he would have yielded to Ayrton’s arguments, if the Major had not combated this decision vigorously. He maintained that the presence of Ayrton was necessary to the expedition, that he would know the country about the coast, and that if any chance should put them on the track of Harry Grant, the quartermaster would be better able to follow it up than any one else, and, finally, that he alone could point out the exact spot where the shipwreck occurred.
Glenarvan wasn't sure what to do, and he might have given in to Ayrton's arguments if the Major hadn't strongly opposed that decision. He insisted that Ayrton's presence was crucial for the expedition, that he was familiar with the coastal area, and that if they happened to find any leads about Harry Grant, the quartermaster would be the best person to pursue them. Lastly, he claimed that only Ayrton could identify the exact location where the shipwreck took place.
McNabbs voted therefore for the continuation of the voyage, without making the least change in their programme. John Mangles was of the same opinion. The young captain said even that orders would reach the DUNCAN more easily from Twofold Bay, than if a message was sent two hundred miles over a wild country.
McNabbs voted for the voyage to continue, sticking to their original plan. John Mangles agreed. The young captain even mentioned that it would be easier to send orders to the DUNCAN from Twofold Bay than to send a message two hundred miles over rough terrain.
His counsel prevailed. It was decided that they should wait till they came to Twofold Bay. The Major watched Ayrton narrowly, and noticed his disappointed look. But he said nothing, keeping his observations, as usual, to himself.
His advice won out. They decided to wait until they arrived at Twofold Bay. The Major kept a close eye on Ayrton and noticed his disappointed expression. But he said nothing, keeping his thoughts to himself as usual.
The plains which lay at the foot of the Australian Alps were level, but slightly inclined toward the east. Great clumps of mimosas and eucalyptus, and various odorous gum-trees, broke the uniform monotony here and there. The gastrolobium grandiflorum covered the ground, with its bushes covered with gay flowers. Several unimportant creeks, mere streams full of little rushes, and half covered up with orchids, often interrupted the route. They had to ford these. Flocks of bustards and emus fled at the approach of the travelers. Below the shrubs, kangaroos were leaping and springing like dancing jacks. But the hunters of the party were not thinking much of the sport, and the horses little needed any additional fatigue.
The plains at the base of the Australian Alps were flat but slightly sloped to the east. Large clusters of mimosas and eucalyptus trees, along with various fragrant gum trees, interrupted the otherwise uniform landscape. The gastrolobium grandiflorum spread across the ground, its bushes bursting with colorful flowers. Several minor creeks, which were just streams filled with small rushes and partially covered with orchids, frequently disrupted the path. They had to cross these. Flocks of bustards and emus scattered as the travelers approached. Beneath the bushes, kangaroos hopped around like playful toys. However, the hunters in the group weren’t focused on the excitement, and the horses didn’t really need any more strain.
Moreover, a sultry heat oppressed the plain. The atmosphere was completely saturated with electricity, and its influence was felt by men and beasts. They just dragged themselves along, and cared for nothing else. The silence was only interrupted by the cries of Ayrton urging on his burdened team.
Moreover, a sweltering heat weighed down the plain. The air was completely charged with electricity, and both people and animals felt its effects. They merely dragged themselves along, indifferent to everything else. The silence was only broken by Ayrton's shouts encouraging his overloaded team.
From noon to two o’clock they went through a curious forest of ferns, which would have excited the admiration of less weary travelers. These plants in full flower measured thirty feet in height. Horses and riders passed easily beneath their drooping leaves, and sometimes the spurs would clash against the woody stems. Beneath these immovable parasols there was a refreshing coolness which every one appreciated. Jacques Paganel, always demonstrative, gave such deep sighs of satisfaction that the paroquets and cockatoos flew out in alarm, making a deafening chorus of noisy chatter.
From noon to two o'clock, they walked through a strange forest of ferns that would have amazed less tired travelers. These plants in full bloom reached thirty feet tall. Horses and riders moved easily beneath their drooping leaves, and occasionally the spurs would clink against the woody stems. Underneath these solid canopies, there was a refreshing coolness that everyone enjoyed. Jacques Paganel, always expressive, let out deep sighs of satisfaction that startled the parrots and cockatoos, causing them to fly away in a loud, chaotic flurry.
The geographer was going on with his sighs and jubilations with the utmost coolness, when his companions suddenly saw him reel forward, and he and his horse fell down in a lump. Was it giddiness, or worse still, suffocation, caused by the high temperature? They ran to him, exclaiming: “Paganel! Paganel! what is the matter?”
The geographer was continuing his sighs and cheers with complete calm when his friends suddenly saw him pitch forward, and he and his horse collapsed in a heap. Was it dizziness, or worse, suffocation from the heat? They rushed to him, shouting, “Paganel! Paganel! What’s wrong?”
“Just this. I have no horse, now!” he replied, disengaging his feet from the stirrups.
“Just this. I don’t have a horse anymore!” he said, pulling his feet out of the stirrups.
“What! your horse?”
“What! Your horse?”
“Dead like Mulrady’s, as if a thunderbolt had struck him.”
“Dead like Mulrady’s, as if lightning had hit him.”
Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Wilson examined the animal; and found Paganel was right. His horse had been suddenly struck dead.
Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Wilson looked at the animal and confirmed that Paganel was correct. His horse had been suddenly killed.
“That is strange,” said John.
"That's weird," said John.
“Very strange, truly,” muttered the Major.
“Very strange, indeed,” muttered the Major.
Glenarvan was greatly disturbed by this fresh accident. He could not get a fresh horse in the desert, and if an epidemic was going to seize their steeds, they would be seriously embarrassed how to proceed.
Glenarvan was very upset by this new incident. He couldn't get another horse in the desert, and if an outbreak was going to hit their animals, they would be in big trouble figuring out what to do next.
Before the close of the day, it seemed as if the word epidemic was really going to be justified. A third horse, Wilson’s, fell dead, and what was, perhaps equally disastrous, one of the bullocks also. The means of traction and transport were now reduced to three bullocks and four horses.
Before the end of the day, it looked like the word epidemic was really going to prove true. A third horse, Wilson’s, dropped dead, and what was possibly just as bad, one of the bullocks did too. The means of hauling and transporting were now down to three bullocks and four horses.
The situation became grave. The unmounted horsemen might walk, of course, as many squatters had done already; but if they abandoned the wagon, what would the ladies do? Could they go over the one hundred and twenty miles which lay between them and Twofold Bay? John Mangles and Lord Glenarvan examined the surviving horses with great uneasiness, but there was not the slightest symptom of illness or feebleness in them. The animals were in perfect health, and bravely bearing the fatigues of the voyage. This somewhat reassured Glenarvan, and made him hope the malady would strike no more victims. Ayrton agreed with him, but was unable to find the least solution of the mystery.
The situation became serious. The unmounted horsemen could walk, of course, just like many squatters had already done; but if they left the wagon, what would the ladies do? Could they make it the one hundred and twenty miles to Twofold Bay? John Mangles and Lord Glenarvan inspected the surviving horses with great concern, but there was no sign of illness or weakness in them. The animals were in perfect health and were handling the challenges of the journey well. This somewhat reassured Glenarvan and made him hopeful that the illness wouldn’t claim any more victims. Ayrton agreed with him, but couldn’t find any explanation for the mystery.
They went on again, the wagon serving, from time to time, as a house of rest for the pedestrians. In the evening, after a march of only ten miles, the signal to halt was given, and the tent pitched. The night passed without inconvenience beneath a vast mass of bushy ferns, under which enormous bats, properly called flying foxes, were flapping about.
They continued on, using the wagon occasionally as a resting spot for the walkers. In the evening, after traveling just ten miles, they stopped and set up the tent. The night went by comfortably beneath a thick layer of bushy ferns, where large bats, known as flying foxes, were fluttering around.
The next day’s journey was good; there were no new calamities. The health of the expedition remained satisfactory; horses and cattle did their task cheerily. Lady Helena’s drawing-room was very lively, thanks to the number of visitors. M. Olbinett busied himself in passing round refreshments which were very acceptable in such hot weather. Half a barrel of Scotch ale was sent in bodily. Barclay and Co. was declared to be the greatest man in Great Britain, even above Wellington, who could never have manufactured such good beer. This was a Scotch estimate. Jacques Paganel drank largely, and discoursed still more de omni re scibili.
The next day’s journey went well; there were no new disasters. The health of the expedition was still good; the horses and cattle performed their duties happily. Lady Helena’s drawing room was very lively, thanks to the number of visitors. M. Olbinett kept busy serving refreshments that were greatly appreciated in the hot weather. Half a barrel of Scotch ale was brought in entirely. Barclay and Co. was declared the greatest man in Great Britain, even better than Wellington, who could never have made such good beer. This was a Scottish opinion. Jacques Paganel drank a lot and talked even more de omni re scibili.
A day so well commenced seemed as if it could not but end well; they had gone fifteen good miles, and managed to get over a pretty hilly district where the soil was reddish. There was every reason to hope they might camp that same night on the banks of the Snowy River, an important river which throws itself into the Pacific, south of Victoria.
A day that started so well seemed like it couldn't possibly end badly; they had traveled fifteen solid miles and made it over a pretty hilly area with reddish soil. There was every reason to hope they could camp that same night by the Snowy River, an important river that flows into the Pacific south of Victoria.
Already the wheels of the wagon were making deep ruts on the wide plains, covered with blackish alluvium, as it passed on between tufts of luxuriant grass and fresh fields of gastrolobium. As evening came on, a white mist on the horizon marked the course of the Snowy River. Several additional miles were got over, and a forest of tall trees came in sight at a bend of the road, behind a gentle eminence. Ayrton turned his team a little toward the great trunks, lost in shadow, and he had got to the skirts of the wood, about half-a-mile from the river, when the wagon suddenly sank up to the middle of the wheels.
The wagon's wheels were already creating deep ruts on the vast plains, covered with dark alluvium, as it moved between clusters of lush grass and vibrant fields of gastrolobium. As evening approached, a white mist on the horizon marked the path of the Snowy River. They covered several more miles, and a forest of tall trees came into view around a bend in the road, just beyond a gentle rise. Ayrton steered his team slightly toward the massive trunks, now shrouded in shadow, and he made it to the edge of the forest, about half a mile from the river, when the wagon suddenly sank up to the middle of the wheels.
“Stop!” he called out to the horsemen following him.
“Stop!” he shouted to the horsemen behind him.
“What is wrong?” inquired Glenarvan.
"What’s wrong?" asked Glenarvan.
“We have stuck in the mud,” replied Ayrton.
“We’re stuck in the mud,” replied Ayrton.
He tried to stimulate the bullocks to a fresh effort by voice and goad, but the animals were buried half-way up their legs, and could not stir.
He tried to motivate the oxen to give it another shot with his voice and a prod, but the animals were stuck halfway up their legs and couldn't move.
“Let us camp here,” suggested John Mangles.
“Let’s set up camp here,” suggested John Mangles.
“It would certainly be the best place,” said Ayrton. “We shall see by daylight to-morrow how to get ourselves out.”
“It would definitely be the best place,” said Ayrton. “We’ll figure out how to get ourselves out by daylight tomorrow.”
Glenarvan acted on their advice, and came to a halt. Night came on rapidly after a brief twilight, but the heat did not withdraw with the light. Stifling vapors filled the air, and occasionally bright flashes of lightning, the reflections of a distant storm, lighted up the sky with a fiery glare. Arrangements were made for the night immediately. They did the best they could with the sunk wagon, and the tent was pitched beneath the shelter of the great trees; and if the rain did not come, they had not much to complain about.
Glenarvan followed their advice and stopped. Night fell quickly after a short twilight, but the heat didn’t fade with the light. Stifling vapors filled the air, and occasionally, bright flashes of lightning from a distant storm lit up the sky with a fiery glow. They immediately made arrangements for the night. They did their best with the sunk wagon, and they set up the tent under the shelter of the large trees; if the rain didn’t come, they had little to complain about.
Ayrton succeeded, though with some difficulty, in extricating the three bullocks. These courageous beasts were engulfed up to their flanks. The quartermaster turned them out with the four horses, and allowed no one but himself to see after their pasturage. He always executed his task wisely, and this evening Glenarvan noticed he redoubled his care, for which he took occasion to thank him, the preservation of the team being of supreme importance.
Ayrton managed, though with some struggle, to free the three bullocks. These brave animals were stuck up to their flanks. The quartermaster released them along with the four horses and made sure that only he looked after their grazing. He always performed his duty well, and that evening Glenarvan noticed he was especially careful, which he took the opportunity to thank him for, as keeping the team safe was crucial.
Meantime, the travelers were dispatching a hasty supper. Fatigue and heat destroy appetite, and sleep was needed more than food. Lady Helena and Miss Grant speedily bade the company good-night, and retired. Their companions soon stretched themselves under the tent or outside under the trees, which is no great hardship in this salubrious climate.
Meanwhile, the travelers were quickly finishing up dinner. Exhaustion and heat took away their appetite, and they needed sleep more than food. Lady Helena and Miss Grant quickly said goodnight to everyone and went to rest. Their companions soon lay down under the tent or outside under the trees, which isn't too uncomfortable in this pleasant climate.
Gradually they all fell into a heavy sleep. The darkness deepened owing to a thick current of clouds which overspread the sky. There was not a breath of wind. The silence of night was only interrupted by the cries of the “morepork” in the minor key, like the mournful cuckoos of Europe.
Gradually, they all drifted into a deep sleep. The darkness thickened as a heavy blanket of clouds covered the sky. There wasn't a whisper of wind. The night's silence was only broken by the calls of the “morepork” in a minor key, resembling the mournful cuckoos of Europe.
Towards eleven o’clock, after a wretched, heavy, unrefreshing sleep, the Major woke. His half-closed eyes were struck with a faint light running among the great trees. It looked like a white sheet, and glittered like a lake, and McNabbs thought at first it was the commencement of a fire.
Towards eleven o'clock, after a terrible, heavy, unrefreshing sleep, the Major woke up. His half-closed eyes caught a glimmer of light moving through the tall trees. It looked like a white sheet and sparkled like a lake, and McNabbs initially thought it was the start of a fire.
He started up, and went toward the wood; but what was his surprise to perceive a purely natural phenomenon! Before him lay an immense bed of mushrooms, which emitted a phosphorescent light. The luminous spores of the cryptograms shone in the darkness with intensity.
He got up and went toward the woods; but he was amazed to discover a completely natural wonder! Before him was a huge patch of mushrooms that glowed with a phosphorescent light. The glowing spores of the fungi shone brightly in the dark.
The Major, who had no selfishness about him, was going to waken Paganel, that he might see this phenomenon with his own eyes, when something occurred which arrested him. This phosphorescent light illumined the distance half a mile, and McNabbs fancied he saw a shadow pass across the edge of it. Were his eyes deceiving him? Was it some hallucination?
The Major, who was completely selfless, was going to wake Paganel so he could witness this phenomenon himself when something caught his attention. This phosphorescent light lit up the distance for half a mile, and McNabbs thought he saw a shadow move across the edge of it. Were his eyes tricking him? Was it just a hallucination?
McNabbs lay down on the ground, and, after a close scrutiny, he could distinctly see several men stooping down and lifting themselves up alternately, as if they were looking on the ground for recent marks.
McNabbs lay down on the ground, and after a close look, he could clearly see several men bending down and standing up repeatedly, as if they were searching the ground for recent marks.
The Major resolved to find out what these fellows were about, and without the least hesitation or so much as arousing his companions, crept along, lying flat on the ground, like a savage on the prairies, completely hidden among the long grass.
The Major decided to figure out what these guys were up to, and without any hesitation or even waking up his friends, he crawled along, lying flat on the ground, like a wild animal in the fields, completely concealed among the tall grass.
CHAPTER XVI A STARTLING DISCOVERY
IT was a frightful night. At two A. M. the rain began to fall in torrents from the stormy clouds, and continued till daybreak. The tent became an insufficient shelter. Glenarvan and his companions took refuge in the wagon; they did not sleep, but talked of one thing and another. The Major alone, whose brief absence had not been noticed, contented himself with being a silent listener. There was reason to fear that if the storm lasted longer the Snowy River would overflow its banks, which would be a very unlucky thing for the wagon, stuck fast as it was already in the soft ground. Mulrady, Ayrton and Mangles went several times to ascertain the height of the water, and came back dripping from head to foot.
It was a terrible night. At 2 A.M., the rain started pouring down heavily from the stormy clouds and continued until dawn. The tent was no longer a good shelter. Glenarvan and his friends took cover in the wagon; they didn’t sleep but talked about various topics. The Major, whose short absence had gone unnoticed, stayed silent and just listened. There was concern that if the storm continued much longer, the Snowy River would overflow its banks, which would be very bad for the wagon, already stuck in the soft ground. Mulrady, Ayrton, and Mangles went several times to check the water level and returned completely soaked.
At last day appeared; the rain ceased, but sunlight could not break through the thick clouds. Large patches of yellowish water—muddy, dirty ponds indeed they were—covered the ground. A hot steam rose from the soaking earth, and saturated the atmosphere with unhealthy humidity.
At last, morning arrived; the rain stopped, but sunlight couldn't break through the thick clouds. Large patches of yellowish water—muddy, dirty ponds, they truly were—covered the ground. A hot steam rose from the soaked earth, filling the air with unhealthy humidity.
Glenarvan’s first concern was the wagon; this was the main thing in his eyes. They examined the ponderous vehicle, and found it sunk in the mud in a deep hollow in the stiff clay. The forepart had disappeared completely, and the hind part up to the axle. It would be a hard job to get the heavy conveyance out, and would need the united strength of men, bullocks, and horses.
Glenarvan’s biggest worry was the wagon; that was his top priority. They looked over the heavy vehicle and saw it stuck in the mud in a deep dip in the hard clay. The front end was completely gone, and the back was submerged up to the axle. It would be tough to pull the heavy carriage out and would require the combined strength of people, cattle, and horses.
“At any rate, we must make haste,” said John Mangles. “If the clay dries, it will make our task still more difficult.”
“At any rate, we need to hurry,” said John Mangles. “If the clay dries, it will make our job even harder.”
“Let us be quick, then,” replied Ayrton.
“Let’s hurry up, then,” replied Ayrton.
Glenarvan, his two sailors, John Mangles, and Ayrton went off at once into the wood, where the animals had passed the night. It was a gloomy-looking forest of tall gum-trees; nothing but dead trees, with wide spaces between, which had been barked for ages, or rather skinned like the cork-oak at harvest time. A miserable network of bare branches was seen above two hundred feet high in the air. Not a bird built its nest in these aerial skeletons; not a leaf trembled on the dry branches, which rattled together like bones. To what cataclysm is this phenomenon to be attributed, so frequent in Australia, entire forests struck dead by some epidemic; no one knows; neither the oldest natives, nor their ancestors who have lain long buried in the groves of the dead, have ever seen them green.
Glenarvan, along with his two sailors, John Mangles, and Ayrton, immediately headed into the woods where the animals had spent the night. It was a dark, dreary forest filled with tall eucalyptus trees; only dead trees remained, with wide gaps in between, all stripped of bark for ages, almost skinned like cork oak during harvest season. A sad tangle of bare branches stretched over two hundred feet into the air. Not a single bird built its nest in these skeletal trees, and no leaves stirred on the dry branches, which rattled together like bones. What catastrophe led to this phenomenon, so common in Australia, where entire forests are wiped out by some kind of epidemic? No one knows; not even the oldest natives or their ancestors, who have long since been laid to rest in the groves of the dead, have ever seen them green.
Glenarvan as he went along kept his eye fixed on the gray sky, on which the smallest branch of the gum-trees was sharply defined. Ayrton was astonished not to discover the horses and bullocks where he had left them the preceding night. They could not have wandered far with the hobbles on their legs.
Glenarvan walked along, keeping his gaze on the gray sky, where the smallest branches of the gum trees stood out clearly. Ayrton was surprised not to find the horses and cattle where he had left them the night before. They shouldn’t have gone far with the hobbles on their legs.
They looked over the wood, but saw no signs of them, and Ayrton returned to the banks of the river, where magnificent mimosas were growing. He gave a cry well known to his team, but there was no reply. The quartermaster seemed uneasy, and his companions looked at him with disappointed faces. An hour had passed in vain endeavors, and Glenarvan was about to go back to the wagon, when a neigh struck on his ear, and immediately after a bellow.
They searched the woods but found no signs of them, so Ayrton headed back to the riverbank, where beautiful mimosas were growing. He called out in a way his team recognized, but there was no answer. The quartermaster looked anxious, and his teammates exchanged disappointed glances. An hour had gone by with no success, and Glenarvan was about to return to the wagon when he heard a neigh followed by a loud bellow.
“They are there!” cried John Mangles, slipping between the tall branches of gastrolobium, which grew high enough to hide a whole flock. Glenarvan, Mulrady, and Ayrton darted after him, and speedily shared his stupefaction at the spectacle which met their gaze.
“They're here!” shouted John Mangles, slipping between the tall branches of gastrolobium, which grew so high that it could conceal an entire flock. Glenarvan, Mulrady, and Ayrton rushed after him and quickly shared his shock at the sight before them.
Two bullocks and three horses lay stretched on the ground, struck down like the rest. Their bodies were already cold, and a flock of half-starved looking ravens croaking among the mimosas were watching the unexpected prey. Glenarvan and his party gazed at each other and Wilson could not keep back the oath that rose to his lips.
Two oxen and three horses lay sprawled on the ground, taken down like everything else. Their bodies were already cold, and a group of half-starved-looking ravens cawing among the mimosas watched the unexpected catch. Glenarvan and his group looked at each other, and Wilson couldn't hold back the curse that came to his lips.
“What do you mean, Wilson?” said Glenarvan, with difficulty controlling himself. “Ayrton, bring away the bullock and the horse we have left; they will have to serve us now.”
“What do you mean, Wilson?” Glenarvan said, struggling to keep his composure. “Ayrton, get the bullock and the horse we have left; we’ll need them now.”
“If the wagon were not sunk in the mud,” said John Mangles, “these two animals, by making short journeys, would be able to take us to the coast; so we must get the vehicle out, cost what it may.”
“If the wagon weren't stuck in the mud,” said John Mangles, “these two animals could take us to the coast by making short trips; so we need to get the vehicle out, no matter the cost.”
“We will try, John,” replied Glenarvan. “Let us go back now, or they will be uneasy at our long absence.”
“We'll give it a shot, John,” replied Glenarvan. “Let's head back now, or they'll start worrying about us being gone so long.”
Ayrton removed the hobbles from the bullock and Mulrady from the horse, and they began to return to the encampment, following the winding margin of the river. In half an hour they rejoined Paganel, and McNabbs, and the ladies, and told them of this fresh disaster.
Ayrton took off the hobbles from the bull and Mulrady from the horse, and they started heading back to the camp, going along the twisting edge of the river. In about half an hour, they caught up with Paganel, McNabbs, and the ladies, and informed them about this new disaster.
“Upon my honor, Ayrton,” the Major could not help saying, “it is a pity that you hadn’t had the shoeing of all our beasts when we forded the Wimerra.”
“Honestly, Ayrton,” the Major couldn’t help saying, “it’s a shame you weren’t the one to take care of all our animals when we crossed the Wimerra.”
“Why, sir?” asked Ayrton.
“Why, sir?” Ayrton asked.
“Because out of all our horses only the one your blacksmith had in his hands has escaped the common fate.”
“Because among all our horses, only the one your blacksmith had in his hands has avoided the usual fate.”
“That’s true,” said John Mangles. “It’s strange it happens so.”
"That's true," John Mangles said. "It's strange that it happens this way."
“A mere chance, and nothing more,” replied the quartermaster, looking firmly at the Major.
“A simple coincidence, and nothing else,” replied the quartermaster, looking directly at the Major.
Major McNabbs bit his lips as if to keep back something he was about to say. Glenarvan and the rest waited for him to speak out his thoughts, but the Major was silent, and went up to the wagon, which Ayrton was examining.
Major McNabb bit his lips as if to hold back something he was about to say. Glenarvan and the others waited for him to share his thoughts, but the Major stayed silent and walked over to the wagon that Ayrton was examining.
“What was he going to say. Mangles?” asked Glenarvan.
“What was he going to say? Mangles?” asked Glenarvan.
“I don’t know,” replied the young captain; “but the Major is not at all a man to speak without reason.”
“I don’t know,” replied the young captain; “but the Major definitely isn’t someone who speaks without reason.”
“No, John,” said Lady Helena. “McNabbs must have suspicions about Ayrton.”
“No, John,” Lady Helena said. “McNabbs must be suspicious of Ayrton.”
“Suspicions!” exclaimed Paganel, shrugging his shoulders.
“Suspicion!” Paganel exclaimed, shrugging his shoulders.
“And what can they be?” asked Glenarvan. “Does he suppose him capable of having killed our horses and bullocks? And for what purpose? Is not Ayrton’s interest identical with our own?”
“And what could they be?” asked Glenarvan. “Does he think he's capable of having killed our horses and cattle? And for what reason? Isn't Ayrton's interest the same as ours?”
“You are right, dear Edward,” said Lady Helena! “and what is more, the quartermaster has given us incontestable proofs of his devotion ever since the commencement of the journey.”
“You're right, dear Edward,” said Lady Helena! “And what's more, the quartermaster has provided us with undeniable evidence of his dedication ever since the journey began.”
“Certainly he has,” replied Mangles; “but still, what could the Major mean? I wish he would speak his mind plainly out.”
“Of course he has,” replied Mangles; “but still, what could the Major mean? I wish he would just say what he really thinks.”
“Does he suppose him acting in concert with the convicts?” asked Paganel, imprudently.
“Does he think he’s working together with the convicts?” asked Paganel, recklessly.
“What convicts?” said Miss Grant.
“What criminals?” said Miss Grant.
“Monsieur Paganel is making a mistake,” replied John Mangles, instantly. “He knows very well there are no convicts in the province of Victoria.”
“Mr. Paganel is wrong,” John Mangles replied immediately. “He knows there are no prisoners in the province of Victoria.”
“Ah, that is true,” returned Paganel, trying to get out of his unlucky speech. “Whatever had I got in my head? Convicts! who ever heard of convicts being in Australia? Besides, they would scarcely have disembarked before they would turn into good, honest men. The climate, you know, Miss Mary, the regenerative climate—”
“Ah, that’s true,” replied Paganel, attempting to retract his unfortunate comments. “What was I thinking? Convicts! Who ever heard of convicts being in Australia? Besides, they would hardly have landed before becoming good, honest people. The climate, you know, Miss Mary, the rejuvenating climate—”
Here the poor SAVANT stuck fast, unable to get further, like the wagon in the mud. Lady Helena looked at him in surprise, which quite deprived him of his remaining sang-froid; but seeing his embarrassment, she took Mary away to the side of the tent, where M. Olbinett was laying out an elaborate breakfast.
Here the poor scholar was stuck, unable to move forward, like a wagon in the mud. Lady Helena looked at him in surprise, which completely threw him off his game; but seeing his embarrassment, she took Mary away to the side of the tent, where Mr. Olbinett was setting up a fancy breakfast.
“I deserve to be transported myself,” said Paganel, woefully.
“I deserve to be taken along,” said Paganel, sadly.
“I think so,” said Glenarvan.
“I think so,” Glenarvan said.
And after this grave reply, which completely overwhelmed the worthy geographer, Glenarvan and John Mangles went toward the wagon.
And after this serious response, which completely shocked the good geographer, Glenarvan and John Mangles headed towards the wagon.
They found Ayrton and the two sailors doing their best to get it out of the deep ruts, and the bullock and horse, yoked together, were straining every muscle. Wilson and Mulrady were pushing the wheels, and the quartermaster urging on the team with voice and goad; but the heavy vehicle did not stir, the clay, already dry, held it as firmly as if sealed by some hydraulic cement.
They found Ayrton and the two sailors trying hard to get it out of the deep ruts, and the bullock and horse, yoked together, were straining every muscle. Wilson and Mulrady were pushing the wheels, while the quartermaster motivated the team with his voice and goad; but the heavy vehicle wouldn’t budge, the dry clay held it as firmly as if it were sealed with hydraulic cement.
John Mangles had the clay watered to loosen it, but it was of no use. After renewed vigorous efforts, men and animals stopped. Unless the vehicle was taken to pieces, it would be impossible to extricate it from the mud; but they had no tools for the purpose, and could not attempt such a task.
John Mangles had the clay soaked to make it easier to work with, but it didn’t help. After more intense efforts, both the men and animals paused. Unless they disassembled the vehicle, they wouldn't be able to pull it out of the mud; but they didn’t have the tools for that and couldn’t attempt such a job.
However, Ayrton, who was for conquering this obstacle at all costs, was about to commence afresh, when Glenarvan stopped him by saying: “Enough, Ayrton, enough. We must husband the strength of our remaining horse and bullock. If we are obliged to continue our journey on foot, the one animal can carry the ladies and the other the provisions. They may thus still be of great service to us.”
However, Ayrton, determined to overcome this obstacle no matter what, was about to start again when Glenarvan interrupted him, saying, “That’s enough, Ayrton. We need to conserve the strength of our remaining horse and bullock. If we have to continue our journey on foot, one animal can carry the ladies and the other can carry the supplies. They could still be very useful to us.”
“Very well, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster, un-yoking the exhausted beasts.
“Alright, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster, unhooking the tired animals.
“Now, friends,” added Glenarvan, “let us return to the encampment and deliberately examine our situation, and determine on our course of action.”
“Now, friends,” Glenarvan said, “let’s head back to the camp and carefully assess our situation, and decide on our next steps.”
After a tolerably good breakfast to make up for their bad night, the discussion was opened, and every one of the party was asked to give his opinion. The first point was to ascertain their exact position, and this was referred to Paganel, who informed them, with his customary rigorous accuracy, that the expedition had been stopped on the 37th parallel, in longitude 147 degrees 53 minutes, on the banks of the Snowy River.
After a pretty decent breakfast to make up for their rough night, the discussion started, and everyone in the group was asked to share their thoughts. The first order of business was to figure out their exact location, and this task was given to Paganel, who told them, with his usual precise accuracy, that the expedition had been halted at the 37th parallel, in longitude 147 degrees 53 minutes, along the banks of the Snowy River.
“What is the exact longitude of Twofold Bay?” asked Glenarvan.
“What’s the exact longitude of Twofold Bay?” asked Glenarvan.
“One hundred and fifty degrees,” replied Paganel; “two degrees seven minutes distant from this, and that is equal to seventy-five miles.”
“One hundred and fifty degrees,” replied Paganel; “two degrees seven minutes away from here, which is equal to seventy-five miles.”
“And Melbourne is?”
“Wait, what about Melbourne?”
“Two hundred miles off at least.”
"At least two hundred miles away."
“Very good. Our position being then settled, what is best to do?”
“Great. Now that we've settled our position, what should we do next?”
The response was unanimous to get to the coast without delay. Lady Helena and Mary Grant undertook to go five miles a day. The courageous ladies did not shrink, if necessary, from walking the whole distance between the Snowy River and Twofold Bay.
The decision was unanimous to head to the coast without hesitation. Lady Helena and Mary Grant committed to traveling five miles a day. The brave ladies were prepared, if needed, to walk the entire distance between the Snowy River and Twofold Bay.
“You are a brave traveling companion, dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan. “But are we sure of finding at the bay all we want when we get there?”
“You're a brave travel buddy, dear Helena,” said Lord Glenarvan. “But are we sure we'll find everything we need when we get to the bay?”
“Without the least doubt,” replied Paganel. “Eden is a municipality which already numbers many years in existence; its port must have frequent communication with Melbourne. I suppose even at Delegete, on the Victoria frontier, thirty-five miles from here, we might revictual our expedition, and find fresh means of transport.”
“Without a doubt,” replied Paganel. “Eden is a town that has been around for many years; its port must have regular connections with Melbourne. I believe that even in Delegete, on the Victoria border, thirty-five miles from here, we could restock our expedition and find new transport options.”
“And the DUNCAN?” asked Ayrton. “Don’t you think it advisable to send for her to come to the bay?”
“And the DUNCAN?” Ayrton asked. “Don’t you think it’s a good idea to call her to come to the bay?”
“What do you think, John?” said Glenarvan.
“What do you think, John?” Glenarvan asked.
“I don’t think your lordship should be in any hurry about it,” replied the young captain, after brief reflection. “There will be time enough to give orders to Tom Austin, and summon him to the coast.”
"I don’t think you need to rush into it, my lord," replied the young captain after a moment of thought. "There will be plenty of time to give orders to Tom Austin and call him to the coast."
“That’s quite certain,” added Paganel.
"That's for sure," added Paganel.
“You see,” said John, “in four or five days we shall reach Eden.”
"You see," John said, "in four or five days, we'll reach Eden."
“Four or five days!” repeated Ayrton, shaking his head; “say fifteen or twenty, Captain, if you don’t want to repent your mistake when it is too late.”
“Four or five days!” Ayrton repeated, shaking his head. “Be realistic, Captain; it’ll be more like fifteen or twenty if you don’t want to regret your mistake when it’s too late.”
“Fifteen or twenty days to go seventy-five miles?” cried Glenarvan.
“Fifteen or twenty days to travel seventy-five miles?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“At the least, my Lord. You are going to traverse the most difficult portion of Victoria, a desert, where everything is wanting, the squatters say; plains covered with scrub, where is no beaten track and no stations. You will have to walk hatchet or torch in hand, and, believe me, that’s not quick work.”
“At the very least, my Lord. You’re about to cross the toughest part of Victoria, a desert, where the squatters claim nothing is available; plains filled with brush, where there’s no established path and no stations. You’ll need to walk with an axe or a torch in hand, and trust me, that’s not a fast job.”
Ayrton had spoken in a firm tone, and Paganel, at whom all the others looked inquiringly, nodded his head in token of his agreement in opinion with the quartermaster.
Ayrton spoke firmly, and Paganel, whom everyone looked at for guidance, nodded to show he agreed with the quartermaster.
But John Mangles said, “Well, admitting these difficulties, in fifteen days at most your Lordship can send orders to the DUNCAN.”
But John Mangles said, “Well, considering these challenges, in fifteen days at most your Lordship can send orders to the DUNCAN.”
“I have to add,” said Ayrton, “that the principal difficulties are not the obstacles in the road, but the Snowy River has to be crossed, and most probably we must wait till the water goes down.”
“I have to add,” said Ayrton, “that the main challenges aren’t the obstacles in the road, but we need to cross the Snowy River, and most likely we’ll have to wait until the water level drops.”
“Wait!” cried John. “Is there no ford?”
“Wait!” shouted John. “Is there no crossing?”
“I think not,” replied Ayrton. “This morning I was looking for some practical crossing, but could not find any. It is unusual to meet with such a tumultuous river at this time of the year, and it is a fatality against which I am powerless.”
“I don’t think so,” Ayrton replied. “This morning I was trying to find a way to cross, but I couldn’t find anything. It’s unusual to encounter such a raging river at this time of year, and there’s nothing I can do about it.”
“Is this Snowy River wide?” asked Lady Helena.
“Is this Snowy River wide?” asked Lady Helena.
“Wide and deep, Madam,” replied Ayrton; “a mile wide, with an impetuous current. A good swimmer could not go over without danger.”
“Wide and deep, ma'am,” replied Ayrton; “a mile wide, with a strong current. A good swimmer couldn't cross it without risking danger.”
“Let us build a boat then,” said Robert, who never stuck at anything. “We have only to cut down a tree and hollow it out, and get in and be off.”
“Let’s build a boat then,” said Robert, who never backed down from anything. “We just need to chop down a tree, carve it out, hop in, and set sail.”
“He’s going ahead, this boy of Captain Grant’s!” said Paganel.
“He’s moving forward, this kid of Captain Grant’s!” said Paganel.
“And he’s right,” returned John Mangles. “We shall be forced to come to that, and I think it is useless to waste our time in idle discussion.”
“And he’s right,” replied John Mangles. “We’ll have to do that, and I think it’s pointless to waste our time on meaningless discussion.”
“What do you think of it, Ayrton?” asked Glenarvan seriously.
“What do you think about it, Ayrton?” Glenarvan asked earnestly.
“I think, my Lord, that a month hence, unless some help arrives, we shall find ourselves still on the banks of the Snowy.”
“I think, my Lord, that in a month, unless some help arrives, we will still find ourselves on the banks of the Snowy.”
“Well, then, have you any better plan to propose?” said John Mangles, somewhat impatiently.
"Well, do you have a better plan to suggest?" John Mangles said, a bit impatiently.
“Yes, that the DUNCAN should leave Melbourne, and go to the east coast.”
“Yes, the DUNCAN should leave Melbourne and head to the east coast.”
“Oh, always the same story! And how could her presence at the bay facilitate our means of getting there?”
“Oh, it’s always the same story! And how could her being at the bay help us get there?”
Ayrton waited an instant before answering, and then said, rather evasively: “I have no wish to obtrude my opinions. What I do is for our common good, and I am ready to start the moment his honor gives the signal.” And he crossed his arms and was silent.
Ayrton paused for a moment before answering, then replied, somewhat evasively: “I don’t want to impose my opinions. What I do is for our shared benefit, and I’m ready to go as soon as he gives the signal.” He crossed his arms and fell silent.
“That is no reply, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan. “Tell us your plan, and we will discuss it. What is it you propose?”
"That's not an answer, Ayrton," Glenarvan said. "Share your plan with us, and we can talk about it. What do you suggest?"
Ayrton replied in a calm tone of assurance: “I propose that we should not venture beyond the Snowy in our present condition. It is here we must wait till help comes, and this help can only come from the DUNCAN. Let us camp here, where we have provisions, and let one of us take your orders to Tom Austin to go on to Twofold Bay.”
Ayrton replied in a calm, reassuring tone, “I suggest we shouldn’t go beyond the Snowy in our current situation. We should stay here and wait for help, which can only come from the DUNCAN. Let's set up camp here, where we have supplies, and one of us can take your instructions to Tom Austin to head to Twofold Bay.”
This unexpected proposition was greeted with astonishment, and by John Mangles with openly-expressed opposition.
This unexpected suggestion was met with shock, and John Mangles openly opposed it.
“Meantime,” continued Ayrton, “either the river will get lower, and allow us to ford it, or we shall have time to make a canoe. This is the plan I submit for your Lordship’s approval.”
“Meanwhile,” Ayrton continued, “either the river will recede, allowing us to cross it, or we’ll have time to build a canoe. This is the plan I propose for your Lordship’s consideration.”
“Well, Ayrton,” replied Glenarvan, “your plan is worthy of serious consideration. The worst thing about it is the delay it would cause; but it would save us great fatigue, and perhaps danger. What do you think of it, friends?”
“Well, Ayrton,” Glenarvan replied, “your plan is definitely worth thinking about. The only downside is the delay it would cause; however, it would save us a lot of effort and maybe even keep us safe. What do you all think?”
“Speak your mind, McNabbs,” said Lady Helena. “Since the beginning of the discussion you have been only a listener, and very sparing of your words.”
“Speak your mind, McNabbs,” Lady Helena said. “From the start of this discussion, you've just been listening and not saying much at all.”
“Since you ask my advice,” said the Major, “I will give it you frankly. I think Ayrton has spoken wisely and well, and I side with him.”
“Since you’re asking for my advice,” said the Major, “I’ll give it to you straight. I think Ayrton has spoken wisely and well, and I support him.”
Such a reply was hardly looked for, as hitherto the Major had been strongly opposed to Ayrton’s project. Ayrton himself was surprised, and gave a hasty glance at the Major. However, Paganel, Lady Helena, and the sailors were all of the same way of thinking; and since McNabbs had come over to his opinion, Glenarvan decided that the quartermaster’s plan should be adopted in principle.
Such a response was unexpected, as the Major had previously been strongly against Ayrton’s plan. Ayrton himself was taken aback and quickly looked at the Major. However, Paganel, Lady Helena, and the sailors all shared the same viewpoint; and since McNabbs had also come around to his side, Glenarvan decided that the quartermaster’s plan should be accepted in principle.
“And now, John,” he added, “don’t you think yourself it would be prudent to encamp here, on the banks of the river Snowy, till we can get some means of conveyance.”
“And now, John,” he added, “don’t you think it would be wise to set up camp here, along the banks of the Snowy River, until we can find some way to get transportation?”
“Yes,” replied John Mangles, “if our messenger can get across the Snowy when we cannot.”
“Yes,” replied John Mangles, “if our messenger can cross the Snowy when we can’t.”
All eyes were turned on the quartermaster, who said, with the air of a man who knew what he was about: “The messenger will not cross the river.”
All eyes were on the quartermaster, who spoke confidently: “The messenger will not cross the river.”
“Indeed!” said John Mangles.
“Definitely!” said John Mangles.
“He will simply go back to the Lucknow Road which leads straight to Melbourne.”
“He’ll just head back to the Lucknow Road that goes directly to Melbourne.”
“Go two hundred and fifty miles on foot!” cried the young Captain.
“Walk two hundred and fifty miles!” exclaimed the young Captain.
“On horseback,” replied Ayrton. “There is one horse sound enough at present. It will only be an affair of four days. Allow the DUNCAN two days more to get to the bay and twenty hours to get back to the camp, and in a week the messenger can be back with the entire crew of the vessel.”
“On horseback,” Ayrton replied. “There’s one horse that's in good shape right now. It’ll only take about four days. Give the DUNCAN two extra days to reach the bay and twenty hours to return to the camp, and in a week, the messenger can come back with the whole crew from the ship.”
The Major nodded approvingly as Ayrton spoke, to the profound astonishment of John Mangles; but as every one was in favor of the plan all there was to do was to carry it out as quickly as possible.
The Major nodded in approval as Ayrton spoke, leaving John Mangles deeply astonished; but since everyone supported the plan, all that was left to do was to execute it as quickly as possible.
“Now, then, friends,” said Glenarvan, “we must settle who is to be our messenger. It will be a fatiguing, perilous mission. I would not conceal the fact from you. Who is disposed, then, to sacrifice himself for his companions and carry our instructions to Melbourne?”
“Alright, everyone,” said Glenarvan, “we need to decide who will be our messenger. This will be a tiring and dangerous mission. I won’t hide that from you. So, who’s willing to sacrifice themselves for the team and take our instructions to Melbourne?”
Wilson and Mulrady, and also Paganel, John Mangles and Robert instantly offered their services. John particularly insisted that he should be intrusted with the business; but Ayrton, who had been silent till that moment, now said: “With your Honor’s permission I will go myself. I am accustomed to all the country round. Many a time I have been across worse parts. I can go through where another would stick. I ask then, for the good of all, that I may be sent to Melbourne. A word from you will accredit me with your chief officer, and in six days I guarantee the DUNCAN shall be in Twofold Bay.”
Wilson, Mulrady, and Paganel, along with John Mangles and Robert, quickly offered their help. John especially insisted that he should take on the task, but Ayrton, who had been quiet until then, spoke up: “If it’s alright with you, I’d like to go myself. I know the area well. I've crossed rougher places many times. I can get through where others would get stuck. So, for the good of everyone, I ask to be sent to Melbourne. With just a word from you, I’ll have the support of your chief officer, and I guarantee that the DUNCAN will be in Twofold Bay in six days.”
“That’s well spoken,” replied Glenarvan. “You are a clever, daring fellow, and you will succeed.”
"Well said," replied Glenarvan. "You're a smart, bold guy, and you're going to succeed."
It was quite evident the quartermaster was the fittest man for the mission. All the rest withdrew from the competition. John Mangles made this one last objection, that the presence of Ayrton was necessary to discover traces of the BRITANNIA or Harry Grant. But the Major justly observed that the expedition would remain on the banks of the Snowy till the return of Ayrton, that they had no idea of resuming their search without him, and that consequently his absence would not in the least prejudice the Captain’s interests.
It was clear that the quartermaster was the best person for the mission. Everyone else backed out of the competition. John Mangles raised one final concern, saying that Ayrton was needed to find any clues about the BRITANNIA or Harry Grant. But the Major pointed out that the expedition would stay by the Snowy River until Ayrton returned, that they had no intention of continuing their search without him, and that his absence wouldn’t hurt the Captain’s interests at all.
“Well, go, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan. “Be as quick as you can, and come back by Eden to our camp.”
“Well, go ahead, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan. “Be as fast as you can and return to our camp via Eden.”
A gleam of satisfaction shot across the quartermaster’s face. He turned away his head, but not before John Mangles caught the look and instinctively felt his old distrust of Ayrton revive.
A spark of satisfaction crossed the quartermaster’s face. He turned his head away, but not before John Mangles noticed the expression and instinctively felt his old distrust of Ayrton resurface.
The quartermaster made immediate preparations for departure, assisted by the two sailors, one of whom saw to the horse and the other to the provisions. Glenarvan, meantime, wrote his letter for Tom Austin. He ordered his chief officer to repair without delay to Twofold Bay. He introduced the quartermaster to him as a man worthy of all confidence. On arriving at the coast, Tom was to dispatch a detachment of sailors from the yacht under his orders.
The quartermaster quickly got ready for departure, with help from two sailors—one took care of the horse while the other managed the supplies. Meanwhile, Glenarvan was writing his letter for Tom Austin. He instructed his chief officer to head straight to Twofold Bay. He introduced the quartermaster to him as someone completely trustworthy. When he reached the coast, Tom was to send a group of sailors from the yacht under his direction.
Glenarvan was just at this part of his letter, when McNabbs, who was following him with his eyes, asked him in a singular tone, how he wrote Ayrton’s name.
Glenarvan was just at this part of his letter when McNabbs, who was watching him, asked in an unusual tone how he spelled Ayrton’s name.
“Why, as it is pronounced, of course,” replied Glenarvan.
“Why, as it's said, of course,” replied Glenarvan.
“It is a mistake,” replied the Major quietly. “He pronounces it AYRTON, but he writes it Ben Joyce!”
“It’s a mistake,” the Major replied quietly. “He says it AYRTON, but he writes it Ben Joyce!”
CHAPTER XVII THE PLOT UNVEILED
THE revelation of Tom Ayrton’s name was like a clap of thunder. Ayrton had started up quickly and grasped his revolver. A report was heard, and Glenarvan fell wounded by a ball. Gunshots resounded at the same time outside.
THE revelation of Tom Ayrton’s name was like a loud clap of thunder. Ayrton quickly jumped up and grabbed his revolver. A shot was fired, and Glenarvan collapsed, hit by a bullet. Gunshots echoed outside at the same time.
John Mangles and the sailors, after their first surprise, would have seized Ben Joyce; but the bold convict had already disappeared and rejoined his gang scattered among the gum-trees.
John Mangles and the sailors, after their initial shock, would have captured Ben Joyce; but the daring convict had already vanished and reconnected with his gang scattered among the gum trees.
The tent was no shelter against the balls. It was necessary to beat a retreat. Glenarvan was slightly wounded, but could stand up.
The tent offered no protection from the bullets. It was time to fall back. Glenarvan was slightly hurt, but he could still stand.
“To the wagon—to the wagon!” cried John Mangles, dragging Lady Helena and Mary Grant along, who were soon in safety behind the thick curtains.
“To the wagon—to the wagon!” shouted John Mangles, pulling Lady Helena and Mary Grant along, who quickly found safety behind the heavy curtains.
John and the Major, and Paganel and the sailors seized their carbines in readiness to repulse the convicts. Glenarvan and Robert went in beside the ladies, while Olbinett rushed to the common defense.
John, the Major, Paganel, and the sailors grabbed their carbines, prepared to fend off the convicts. Glenarvan and Robert joined the ladies, while Olbinett hurried to the shared defense.
These events occurred with the rapidity of lightning. John Mangles watched the skirts of the wood attentively. The reports had ceased suddenly on the arrival of Ben Joyce; profound silence had succeeded the noisy fusillade. A few wreaths of white smoke were still curling over the tops of the gum trees. The tall tufts of gastrolobium were motionless. All signs of attack had disappeared.
These events happened as fast as lightning. John Mangles kept a close eye on the edge of the woods. The gunfire had abruptly stopped when Ben Joyce arrived; a deep silence replaced the chaotic shooting. A few wisps of white smoke were still rising above the gum trees. The tall clusters of gastrolobium stood still. All signs of the attack had vanished.
The Major and John Mangles examined the wood closely as far as the great trees; the place was abandoned. Numerous footmarks were there and several half-burned caps were lying smoking on the ground. The Major, like a prudent man, extinguished these carefully, for a spark would be enough to kindle a tremendous conflagration in this forest of dry trees.
The Major and John Mangles closely inspected the woods up to the towering trees; the area was deserted. There were many footprints and several half-burned caps smoldering on the ground. The Major, being cautious, carefully put out the caps because a single spark could ignite a massive fire in this dry forest.
“The convicts have disappeared!” said John Mangles.
“The convicts are gone!” said John Mangles.
“Yes,” replied the Major; “and the disappearance of them makes me uneasy. I prefer seeing them face to face. Better to meet a tiger on the plain than a serpent in the grass. Let us beat the bushes all round the wagon.”
“Yes,” replied the Major; “and their disappearance makes me uneasy. I’d rather see them face to face. It’s better to encounter a tiger on the plain than a snake in the grass. Let’s search the bushes all around the wagon.”
The Major and John hunted all round the country, but there was not a convict to be seen from the edge of the wood right down to the river. Ben Joyce and his gang seemed to have flown away like a flock of marauding birds. It was too sudden a disappearance to let the travelers feel perfectly safe; consequently they resolved to keep a sharp lookout. The wagon, a regular fortress buried in mud, was made the center of the camp, and two men mounted guard round it, who were relieved hour by hour.
The Major and John searched all over the area, but there wasn't a single convict in sight from the edge of the woods down to the river. Ben Joyce and his gang seemed to have vanished like a flock of scavenging birds. Their sudden disappearance made the travelers uneasy, so they decided to stay alert. The wagon, which looked like a fortress stuck in the mud, was the center of the camp, and two men took turns keeping watch over it, changing every hour.
The first care of Lady Helena and Mary was to dress Glenarvan’s wound. Lady Helena rushed toward him in terror, as he fell down struck by Ben Joyce’s ball. Controlling her agony, the courageous woman helped her husband into the wagon. Then his shoulder was bared, and the Major found, on examination, that the ball had only gone into the flesh, and there was no internal lesion. Neither bone nor muscle appeared to be injured. The wound bled profusely, but Glenarvan could use his fingers and forearm; and consequently there was no occasion for any uneasiness about the issue. As soon as his shoulder was dressed, he would not allow any more fuss to be made about himself, but at once entered on the business in hand.
The first priority for Lady Helena and Mary was to tend to Glenarvan’s wound. Lady Helena rushed toward him in panic when he collapsed after being hit by Ben Joyce’s ball. Holding back her own distress, the brave woman helped her husband into the wagon. Once his shoulder was exposed, the Major examined it and found that the ball had only penetrated the flesh, with no internal damage. Neither bones nor muscles seemed to be harmed. The wound bled a lot, but Glenarvan was still able to move his fingers and forearm, so there was no reason to be overly worried about his condition. As soon as his shoulder was treated, he refused to let anyone fuss over him and immediately focused on the task at hand.
All the party, except Mulrady and Wilson, who were on guard, were brought into the wagon, and the Major was asked to explain how this DENOUEMENT had come about.
Everyone at the party, except Mulrady and Wilson, who were on watch, was brought into the wagon, and the Major was asked to explain how this conclusion had come about.
Before commencing his recital, he told Lady Helena about the escape of the convicts at Perth, and their appearance in Victoria; as also their complicity in the railway catastrophe. He handed her the Australian and New Zealand Gazette they had bought in Seymour, and added that a reward had been offered by the police for the apprehension of Ben Joyce, a redoubtable bandit, who had become a noted character during the last eighteen months, for doing deeds of villainy and crime.
Before he started his recital, he informed Lady Helena about the escape of the convicts in Perth and their appearance in Victoria, as well as their involvement in the railway disaster. He gave her the Australian and New Zealand Gazette they had purchased in Seymour and mentioned that the police had offered a reward for the capture of Ben Joyce, a notorious bandit who had gained infamy over the past eighteen months for committing various crimes and acts of villainy.
But how had McNabbs found out that Ayrton and Ben Joyce were one and the same individual? This was the mystery to be unraveled, and the Major soon explained it.
But how did McNabbs discover that Ayrton and Ben Joyce were the same person? This was the mystery to solve, and the Major quickly clarified it.
Ever since their first meeting, McNabbs had felt an instinctive distrust of the quartermaster. Two or three insignificant facts, a hasty glance exchanged between him and the blacksmith at the Wimerra River, his unwillingness to cross towns and villages, his persistence about getting the DUNCAN summoned to the coast, the strange death of the animals entrusted to his care, and, lastly, a want of frankness in all his behavior—all these details combined had awakened the Major’s suspicions.
Ever since their first meeting, McNabbs had felt a gut distrust of the quartermaster. A couple of insignificant details, a quick look shared between him and the blacksmith at the Wimerra River, his reluctance to go through towns and villages, his insistence on having the DUNCAN called to the coast, the odd deaths of the animals he was supposed to take care of, and finally, his lack of honesty in everything he did—these factors together had raised the Major’s suspicions.
However, he could not have brought any direct accusation against him till the events of the preceding evening had occurred. He then told of his experience.
However, he couldn't have made any direct accusations against him until the events of the previous evening took place. He then shared his experience.
McNabbs, slipping between the tall shrubs, got within reach of the suspicious shadows he had noticed about half a mile away from the encampment. The phosphorescent furze emitted a faint light, by which he could discern three men examining marks on the ground, and one of the three was the blacksmith of Black Point.
McNabbs, moving carefully through the tall bushes, got close to the suspicious shadows he had spotted about half a mile from the camp. The glowing furze gave off a soft light, allowing him to see three men looking at marks on the ground, and one of them was the blacksmith from Black Point.
“‘It is them!’ said one of the men. ‘Yes,’ replied another, ‘there is the trefoil on the mark of the horseshoe. It has been like that since the Wimerra.’ ‘All the horses are dead.’ ‘The poison is not far off.’ ‘There is enough to kill a regiment of cavalry.’ ‘A useful plant this gastrolobium.’
“‘It’s them!’ said one of the men. ‘Yeah,’ replied another, ‘there’s the trefoil on the horseshoe mark. It’s been like that since the Wimerra.’ ‘All the horses are dead.’ ‘The poison isn’t far away.’ ‘There’s enough to take out a whole cavalry regiment.’ ‘This gastrolobium is quite the useful plant.’
“I heard them say this to each other, and then they were quite silent; but I did not know enough yet, so I followed them. Soon the conversation began again. ‘He is a clever fellow, this Ben Joyce,’ said the blacksmith. ‘A capital quartermaster, with his invention of shipwreck.’ ‘If his project succeeds, it will be a stroke of fortune.’ ‘He is a very devil, is this Ayrton.’ ‘Call him Ben Joyce, for he has well earned his name.’ And then the scoundrels left the forest.
“I heard them say this to each other, and then they were silent; but I didn’t know enough yet, so I followed them. Soon, the conversation started up again. ‘He’s a clever guy, this Ben Joyce,’ said the blacksmith. ‘A great quartermaster, with his shipwreck invention.’ ‘If his plan works out, it’ll be a huge success.’ ‘He’s a real devil, this Ayrton.’ ‘Call him Ben Joyce, because he’s earned that name.’ And then the scoundrels left the forest.”
“I had all the information I wanted now, and came back to the camp quite convinced, begging Paganel’s pardon, that Australia does not reform criminals.”
“I had all the information I needed now, and returned to the camp pretty convinced, after apologizing to Paganel, that Australia doesn’t rehabilitate criminals.”
This was all the Major’s story, and his companions sat silently thinking over it.
This was the Major's entire story, and his companions sat quietly, reflecting on it.
“Then Ayrton has dragged us here,” said Glenarvan, pale with anger, “on purpose to rob and assassinate us.”
“Then Ayrton has brought us here,” said Glenarvan, pale with anger, “to rob and kill us on purpose.”
“For nothing else,” replied the Major; “and ever since we left the Wimerra, his gang has been on our track and spying on us, waiting for a favorable opportunity.”
“For no other reason,” replied the Major; “and ever since we left the Wimerra, his gang has been following us and watching us, waiting for a good opportunity.”
“Yes.”
"Yeah."
“Then the wretch was never one of the sailors on the BRITANNIA; he had stolen the name of Ayrton and the shipping papers.”
“Then the miserable person was never one of the sailors on the BRITANNIA; he had stolen the name Ayrton and the shipping documents.”
They were all looking at McNabbs for an answer, for he must have put the question to himself already.
They were all looking at McNabbs for an answer, since he must have already asked himself the question.
“There is no great certainty about the matter,” he replied, in his usual calm voice; “but in my opinion the man’s name is really Ayrton. Ben Joyce is his nom de guerre. It is an incontestible fact that he knew Harry Grant, and also that he was quartermaster on the BRITANNIA. These facts were proved by the minute details given us by Ayrton, and are corroborated by the conversation between the convicts, which I repeated to you. We need not lose ourselves in vain conjectures, but consider it as certain that Ben Joyce is Ayrton, and that Ayrton is Ben Joyce; that is to say, one of the crew of the BRITANNIA has turned leader of the convict gang.”
“There’s no great certainty about this,” he replied in his usual calm voice. “But I believe the man’s real name is Ayrton. Ben Joyce is just his alias. It’s an undeniable fact that he knew Harry Grant, and he was also the quartermaster on the BRITANNIA. These details were confirmed by the specifics Ayrton provided, and the conversations among the convicts that I shared with you support this. We shouldn’t get lost in useless speculation; let’s accept it as certain that Ben Joyce is Ayrton, and Ayrton is Ben Joyce. In other words, one of the crew of the BRITANNIA has become the leader of the convict gang.”
The explanations of McNabbs were accepted without discussion.
The explanations from McNabbs were accepted without debate.
“Now, then,” said Glenarvan, “will you tell us how and why Harry Grant’s quartermaster comes to be in Australia?”
“Okay, then,” said Glenarvan, “can you explain how and why Harry Grant’s quartermaster ended up in Australia?”
“How, I don’t know,” replied McNabbs; “and the police declare they are as ignorant on the subject as myself. Why, it is impossible to say; that is a mystery which the future may explain.”
“How, I don’t know,” replied McNabbs; “and the police say they are just as confused as I am. Why, it’s impossible to say; that’s a mystery the future might clear up.”
“The police are not even aware of Ayrton’s identity with Ben Joyce,” said John Mangles.
“The police don’t even know that Ayrton is Ben Joyce,” said John Mangles.
“You are right, John,” replied the Major, “and this circumstance would throw light on their search.”
“You're right, John,” replied the Major, “and this situation would shed some light on their search.”
“Then, I suppose,” said Lady Helena, “the wicked wretch had got work on Paddy O’Moore’s farm with a criminal intent?”
“Then, I guess,” said Lady Helena, “the horrible person had gotten a job on Paddy O’Moore’s farm with a bad motive?”
“There is not the least doubt of it. He was planning some evil design against the Irishman, when a better chance presented itself. Chance led us into his presence. He heard Paganel’s story and all about the shipwreck, and the audacious fellow determined to act his part immediately. The expedition was decided on. At the Wimerra he found means of communicating with one of his gang, the blacksmith of Black Point, and left traces of our journey which might be easily recognized. The gang followed us. A poisonous plant enabled them gradually to kill our bullocks and horses. At the right moment he sunk us in the marshes of the Snowy, and gave us into the hands of his gang.”
"There’s no doubt about it. He was plotting something terrible against the Irishman when a better opportunity came along. Fate brought us to him. He listened to Paganel’s story and everything about the shipwreck, and that bold guy decided to take action right away. The expedition was set. At the Wimerra, he found a way to communicate with one of his crew, the blacksmith from Black Point, and left signs of our journey that would be easy to spot. The gang followed us. A toxic plant allowed them to slowly poison our oxen and horses. At the perfect moment, he trapped us in the marshes of the Snowy and handed us over to his gang."
Such was the history of Ben Joyce. The Major had shown him up in his character—a bold and formidable criminal. His manifestly evil designs called for the utmost vigilance on the part of Glenarvan. Happily the unmasked bandit was less to be feared than the traitor.
Such was the story of Ben Joyce. The Major had revealed his true character—a daring and dangerous criminal. His obviously malicious plans required Glenarvan to be extremely vigilant. Fortunately, the exposed bandit was less of a threat than the traitor.
But one serious consequence must come out of this revelation; no one had thought of it yet except Mary Grant. John Mangles was the first to notice her pale, despairing face; he understood what was passing in her mind at a glance.
But one serious consequence must come from this revelation; no one had thought of it yet except Mary Grant. John Mangles was the first to notice her pale, despairing face; he understood what was going on in her mind at a glance.
“Miss Mary! Miss Mary!” he cried; “you are crying!”
“Miss Mary! Miss Mary!” he shouted; “you’re crying!”
“Crying, my child!” said Lady Helena.
“Crying, my child!” said Lady Helena.
“My father, madam, my father!” replied the poor girl.
“My dad, ma’am, my dad!” replied the poor girl.
She could say no more, but the truth flashed on every mind. They all knew the cause of her grief, and why tears fell from her eyes and her father’s name came to her lips.
She could say no more, but the truth was clear to everyone. They all understood the reason for her sadness, and why tears streamed down her face and her father's name slipped from her lips.
The discovery of Ayrton’s treachery had destroyed all hope; the convict had invented a shipwreck to entrap Glenarvan. In the conversation overheard by McNabbs, the convicts had plainly said that the BRITANNIA had never been wrecked on the rocks in Twofold Bay. Harry Grant had never set foot on the Australian continent!
The discovery of Ayrton’s betrayal had shattered all hope; the convict had made up a shipwreck to trap Glenarvan. In the conversation overheard by McNabbs, the convicts clearly stated that the BRITANNIA had never been wrecked on the rocks in Twofold Bay. Harry Grant had never even set foot on the Australian continent!
A second time they had been sent on the wrong track by an erroneous interpretation of the document. Gloomy silence fell on the whole party at the sight of the children’s sorrow, and no one could find a cheering word to say. Robert was crying in his sister’s arms. Paganel muttered in a tone of vexation: “That unlucky document! It may boast of having half-crazed a dozen peoples’ wits!” The worthy geographer was in such a rage with himself, that he struck his forehead as if he would smash it in.
They had once again been misled by a wrong interpretation of the document. A heavy silence settled over the entire group at the sight of the children's sadness, and no one could come up with any encouraging words. Robert was crying in his sister's embrace. Paganel mumbled in frustration, “That cursed document! It’s driven a dozen people insane!” The frustrated geographer was so angry with himself that he hit his forehead as if he wanted to smash it.
Glenarvan went out to Mulrady and Wilson, who were keeping watch. Profound silence reigned over the plain between the wood and the river. Ben Joyce and his band must be at considerable distance, for the atmosphere was in such a state of complete torpor that the slightest sound would have been heard. It was evident, from the flocks of birds on the lower branches of the trees, and the kangaroos feeding quietly on the young shoots, and a couple of emus whose confiding heads passed between the great clumps of bushes, that those peaceful solitudes were untroubled by the presence of human beings.
Glenarvan went out to Mulrady and Wilson, who were on watch. A deep silence filled the plain between the woods and the river. Ben Joyce and his gang must be a good distance away, because the atmosphere was so still that even the faintest noise would have been heard. It was clear, from the flocks of birds on the lower branches of the trees, the kangaroos grazing on the young shoots, and a couple of emus moving confidently between the large bushes, that this tranquil place was undisturbed by any human presence.
“You have neither seen nor heard anything for the last hour?” said Glenarvan to the two sailors.
“You haven't seen or heard anything for the last hour?” Glenarvan asked the two sailors.
“Nothing whatever, your honor,” replied Wilson. “The convicts must be miles away from here.”
“Nothing at all, your honor,” replied Wilson. “The convicts must be miles away from here.”
“They were not in numbers enough to attack us, I suppose,” added Mulrady. “Ben Joyce will have gone to recruit his party, with some bandits like himself, among the bush-rangers who may be lurking about the foot of the Alps.”
“They probably didn't have enough people to attack us,” Mulrady added. “Ben Joyce must have gone to gather his crew, along with a few bandits like him, from the bushrangers who might be hiding at the base of the Alps.”
“That is probably the case, Mulrady,” replied Glenarvan. “The rascals are cowards; they know we are armed, and well armed too. Perhaps they are waiting for nightfall to commence the attack. We must redouble our watchfulness. Oh, if we could only get out of this bog, and down the coast; but this swollen river bars our passage. I would pay its weight in gold for a raft which would carry us over to the other side.”
“That’s probably true, Mulrady,” Glenarvan replied. “Those scoundrels are cowards; they know we’re armed, and heavily armed at that. Maybe they’re waiting for nightfall to launch their attack. We need to be even more vigilant. Oh, if only we could get out of this swamp and make our way down the coast; but this swollen river is blocking our way. I’d pay a fortune for a raft that could take us to the other side.”
“Why does not your honor give orders for a raft to be constructed? We have plenty of wood.”
“Why don’t you just order a raft to be built? We have plenty of wood.”
“No, Wilson,” replied Glenarvan; “this Snowy is not a river, it is an impassable torrent.”
“No, Wilson,” Glenarvan replied; “this Snowy isn’t a river, it’s an impassable torrent.”
John Mangles, the Major, and Paganel just then came out of the wagon on purpose to examine the state of the river. They found it still so swollen by the heavy rain that the water was a foot above the level. It formed an impetuous current, like the American rapids. To venture over that foaming current and that rushing flood, broken into a thousand eddies and hollows and gulfs, was impossible.
John Mangles, the Major, and Paganel just came out of the wagon to check the state of the river. They found it still so swollen from the heavy rain that the water was a foot above normal levels. It created a powerful current, similar to the American rapids. Trying to cross that churning water and rushing flood, filled with a thousand whirlpools and depressions, was impossible.
John Mangles declared the passage impracticable. “But we must not stay here,” he added, “without attempting anything. What we were going to do before Ayrton’s treachery is still more necessary now.”
John Mangles said the passage was not feasible. “But we can't just stay here,” he added, “without trying something. What we were planning to do before Ayrton’s betrayal is even more essential now.”
“What do you mean, John?” asked Glenarvan.
“What do you mean, John?” Glenarvan asked.
“I mean that our need is urgent, and that since we cannot go to Twofold Bay, we must go to Melbourne. We have still one horse. Give it to me, my Lord, and I will go to Melbourne.”
“I mean that we need to act quickly, and since we can’t go to Twofold Bay, we have to go to Melbourne. We still have one horse. Give it to me, my Lord, and I will go to Melbourne.”
“But that will be a dangerous venture, John,” said Glenarvan. “Not to speak of the perils of a journey of two hundred miles over an unknown country, the road and the by-ways will be guarded by the accomplices of Ben Joyce.”
“But that will be a risky undertaking, John,” said Glenarvan. “Not to mention the dangers of traveling two hundred miles through uncharted territory, the paths and backroads will be watched by Ben Joyce's accomplices.”
“I know it, my Lord, but I know also that things can’t stay long as they are; Ayrton only asked a week’s absence to fetch the crew of the DUNCAN, and I will be back to the Snowy River in six days. Well, my Lord, what are your commands?”
“I get it, my Lord, but I also know thatthings can't stay the same for long; Ayrton only asked for a week off to get the crew of the DUNCAN, and I'll be back to the Snowy River in six days. So, my Lord, what are your instructions?”
“Before Glenarvan decides,” said Paganel, “I must make an observation. That some one must go to Melbourne is evident, but that John Mangles should be the one to expose himself to the risk, cannot be. He is the captain of the DUNCAN, and must be careful of his life. I will go instead.”
“Before Glenarvan makes a decision,” Paganel said, “I need to point something out. It’s clear that someone needs to go to Melbourne, but it can’t be John Mangles who puts himself at risk. He’s the captain of the DUNCAN, and he has to look after his life. I’ll go instead.”
“That is all very well, Paganel,” said the Major; “but why should you be the one to go?”
“That’s all fine and dandy, Paganel,” the Major said, “but why should you be the one to go?”
“Are we not here?” said Mulrady and Wilson.
“Are we not here?” said Mulrady and Wilson.
“And do you think,” replied McNabbs, “that a journey of two hundred miles on horseback frightens me.”
“And do you really think,” McNabbs replied, “that a two-hundred-mile journey on horseback scares me?”
“Friends,” said Glenarvan, “one of us must go, so let it be decided by drawing lots. Write all our names, Paganel.”
“Friends,” said Glenarvan, “one of us has to go, so let’s decide by drawing lots. Write down all our names, Paganel.”
“Not yours, my Lord,” said John Mangles.
"Not yours, my Lord," John Mangles said.
“And why not?”
"And why not?"
“What! separate you from Lady Helena, and before your wound is healed, too!”
“What! Separate you from Lady Helena before your wound is healed, too!”
“Glenarvan,” said Paganel, “you cannot leave the expedition.”
“Glenarvan,” Paganel said, “you can't leave the expedition.”
“No,” added the Major. “Your place is here, Edward, you ought not to go.”
“No,” the Major said. “You belong here, Edward; you shouldn't leave.”
“Danger is involved in it,” said Glenarvan, “and I will take my share along with the rest. Write the names, Paganel, and put mine among them, and I hope the lot may fall on me.”
“There's danger in this,” said Glenarvan, “and I'm willing to take my part just like everyone else. Write down the names, Paganel, and include mine in the list. I hope the chance falls to me.”
His will was obeyed. The names were written, and the lots drawn. Fate fixed on Mulrady. The brave sailor shouted hurrah! and said: “My Lord, I am ready to start.” Glenarvan pressed his hand, and then went back to the wagon, leaving John Mangles and the Major on watch.
His wish was followed. The names were recorded, and the lots were drawn. Fate chose Mulrady. The brave sailor yelled, “Hooray!” and said, “My Lord, I’m ready to go.” Glenarvan shook his hand, then returned to the wagon, leaving John Mangles and the Major on guard.
Lady Helena was informed of the determination to send a message to Melbourne, and that they had drawn lots who should go, and Mulrady had been chosen. Lady Helena said a few kind words to the brave sailor, which went straight to his heart. Fate could hardly have chosen a better man, for he was not only brave and intelligent, but robust and superior to all fatigue.
Lady Helena was told about the decision to send a message to Melbourne and that they had drawn lots to see who would go, and Mulrady had been chosen. Lady Helena said a few kind words to the brave sailor that touched him deeply. Fate couldn't have picked a better man, as he was not only brave and smart, but also strong and resilient against all exhaustion.
Mulrady’s departure was fixed for eight o’clock, immediately after the short twilight. Wilson undertook to get the horse ready. He had a project in his head of changing the horse’s left shoe, for one off the horses that had died in the night. This would prevent the convicts from tracking Mulrady, or following him, as they were not mounted.
Mulrady was set to leave at eight o’clock, right after the brief twilight. Wilson took it upon himself to get the horse ready. He planned to replace the horse’s left shoe with one from a horse that had died during the night. This would stop the convicts from tracking Mulrady or following him, since they weren’t on horseback.
While Wilson was arranging this, Glenarvan got his letter ready for Tom Austin, but his wounded arm troubled him, and he asked Paganel to write it for him. The SAVANT was so absorbed in one fixed idea that he seemed hardly to know what he was about. In all this succession of vexations, it must be said the document was always uppermost in Paganel’s mind. He was always worrying himself about each word, trying to discover some new meaning, and losing the wrong interpretation of it, and going over and over himself in perplexities.
While Wilson was working on this, Glenarvan got his letter ready for Tom Austin, but his injured arm was bothering him, so he asked Paganel to write it for him. The SAVANT was so caught up in one idea that he hardly seemed aware of what he was doing. Throughout all these frustrations, it must be noted that the letter was constantly on Paganel’s mind. He kept stressing over each word, trying to find some new meaning, missing the correct interpretation, and getting stuck in his confusion.
He did not hear Glenarvan when he first spoke, but on the request being made a second time, he said: “Ah, very well. I’m ready.”
He didn't hear Glenarvan the first time he spoke, but when the request was made again, he said, "Ah, okay. I'm ready."
While he spoke he was mechanically getting paper from his note-book. He tore a blank page off, and sat down pencil in hand to write.
While he talked, he automatically grabbed paper from his notebook. He tore off a blank page, sat down with a pencil in hand, and started to write.
Glenarvan began to dictate as follows: “Order to Tom Austin, Chief Officer, to get to sea without delay, and bring the DUNCAN to—”
Glenarvan started to dictate: “Order to Tom Austin, Chief Officer, to head out to sea as soon as possible, and bring the DUNCAN to—”
Paganel was just finishing the last word, when his eye chanced to fall on the Australian and New Zealand Gazette lying on the ground. The paper was so folded that only the last two syllables of the title were visible. Paganel’s pencil stopped, and he seemed to become oblivious of Glenarvan and the letter entirely, till his friends called out: “Come, Paganel!”
Paganel was just finishing the last word when he happened to notice the Australian and New Zealand Gazette lying on the ground. The paper was folded in such a way that only the last two syllables of the title were visible. Paganel’s pencil paused, and he seemed to tune out Glenarvan and the letter completely until his friends called out, “Come on, Paganel!”
“Ah!” said the geographer, with a loud exclamation.
“Wow!” said the geographer, with a loud exclamation.
“What is the matter?” asked the Major.
“What’s going on?” asked the Major.
“Nothing, nothing,” replied Paganel. Then he muttered to himself, “Aland! aland! aland!”
“Nothing, nothing,” replied Paganel. Then he muttered to himself, “Aland! aland! aland!”
He had got up and seized the newspaper. He shook it in his efforts to keep back the words that involuntarily rose to his lips.
He got up and grabbed the newspaper. He shook it, trying to hold back the words that rose to his lips without him thinking.
Lady Helena, Mary, Robert, and Glenarvan gazed at him in astonishment, at a loss to understand this unaccountable agitation. Paganel looked as if a sudden fit of insanity had come over him. But his excitement did not last. He became by degrees calmer. The gleam of joy that shone in his eyes died away. He sat down again, and said quietly:
Lady Helena, Mary, Robert, and Glenarvan stared at him in shock, struggling to make sense of his strange agitation. Paganel seemed like he had been overtaken by a sudden bout of insanity. But his excitement quickly faded. Gradually, he grew calmer. The spark of joy that had lit up his eyes dimmed. He sat down again and said quietly:
“When you please, my Lord, I am ready.” Glenarvan resumed his dictation at once, and the letter was soon completed. It read as follows: “Order to Tom Austin to go to sea without delay; and take the DUNCAN to Melbourne by the 37th degree of latitude to the eastern coast of Australia.”
“When you're ready, my Lord, I'm all set.” Glenarvan started dictating again, and the letter was soon finished. It said: “Instruction to Tom Austin to head out to sea immediately; and take the DUNCAN to Melbourne along the 37th degree of latitude to the eastern coast of Australia.”
“Of Australia?” said Paganel. “Ah yes! of Australia.”
“Of Australia?” Paganel said. “Oh yes! of Australia.”
Then he finished the letter, and gave it to Glenarvan to sign, who went through the necessary formality as well as he could, and closed and sealed the letter. Paganel, whose hand still trembled with emotion, directed it thus: “Tom Austin, Chief Officer on board the Yacht DUNCAN, Melbourne.”
Then he finished the letter and handed it to Glenarvan to sign. Glenarvan completed the formalities as best as he could, then closed and sealed the letter. Paganel, still shaken with emotion, addressed it: “Tom Austin, Chief Officer on board the Yacht DUNCAN, Melbourne.”
Then he got up and went out of the wagon, gesticulating and repeating the incomprehensible words:
Then he got up and stepped out of the wagon, waving his hands and repeating the confusing words:
“Aland aland! aland!”
“Aland aland! aland!”
CHAPTER XVIII FOUR DAYS OF ANGUISH
THE rest of the day passed on without any further incident. All the preparations for Mulrady’s journey were completed, and the brave sailor rejoiced in being able to give his Lordship this proof of devotion.
The rest of the day went by without any more incidents. All the preparations for Mulrady’s journey were finished, and the courageous sailor was glad to be able to show his Lordship this proof of his loyalty.
Paganel had recovered his usual sang-froid and manners. His look, indeed, betrayed his preoccupation, but he seemed resolved to keep it secret. No doubt he had strong reasons for this course of action, for the Major heard him repeating, like a man struggling with himself: “No, no, they would not believe it; and, besides, what good would it be? It is too late!”
Paganel had regained his usual composure and poise. His expression, however, revealed his worry, but he appeared determined to keep it to himself. He clearly had good reasons for this decision, as the Major heard him muttering to himself: “No, no, they wouldn’t believe it; and anyway, what good would it do? It’s too late!”
Having taken this resolution, he busied himself with giving Mulrady the necessary directions for getting to Melbourne, and showed him his way on the map. All the TRACKS, that is to say, paths through the prairie, came out on the road to Lucknow. This road, after running right down to the coast took a sudden bend in the direction of Melbourne. This was the route that must be followed steadily, for it would not do to attempt a short cut across an almost unknown country. Nothing, consequently, could be more simple. Mulrady could not lose his way.
Having made this decision, he focused on giving Mulrady the necessary directions to get to Melbourne and pointed out his route on the map. All the TRAILS, meaning paths through the prairie, connected to the road to Lucknow. This road, after heading straight down to the coast, took a sharp turn towards Melbourne. This was the route that needed to be followed strictly, as trying a shortcut through mostly uncharted territory would be unwise. So, it couldn’t be simpler. Mulrady wouldn’t get lost.
As to dangers, there were none after he had gone a few miles beyond the encampment, out of the reach of Ben Joyce and his gang. Once past their hiding place, Mulrady was certain of soon being able to outdistance the convicts, and execute his important mission successfully.
As for dangers, there were none once he had traveled a few miles beyond the campsite, away from Ben Joyce and his gang. Once he was past their hiding spot, Mulrady was confident he would soon be able to outrun the convicts and complete his important mission successfully.
At six o’clock they all dined together. The rain was falling in torrents. The tent was not protection enough, and the whole party had to take refuge in the wagon. This was a sure refuge. The clay kept it firmly imbedded in the soil, like a fortress resting on sure foundations. The arsenal was composed of seven carbines and seven revolvers, and could stand a pretty long siege, for they had plenty of ammunition and provisions. But before six days were over, the DUNCAN would anchor in Twofold Bay, and twenty-four hours after her crew would reach the other shore of the Snowy River; and should the passage still remain impracticable, the convicts at any rate would be forced to retire before the increased strength. But all depended on Mulrady’s success in his perilous enterprise.
At six o’clock, they all had dinner together. It was pouring rain. The tent wasn’t strong enough, so everyone had to seek shelter in the wagon. This was a solid refuge. The clay kept it securely embedded in the ground, like a fortress with a strong foundation. Their arsenal consisted of seven carbines and seven revolvers, which could withstand quite a long siege since they had plenty of ammo and supplies. But within six days, the DUNCAN would dock in Twofold Bay, and twenty-four hours later, her crew would reach the other side of the Snowy River. If the passage was still too difficult, the convicts would certainly have to retreat in the face of greater strength. But everything depended on Mulrady’s success in his risky mission.
At eight o’clock it got very dark; now was the time to start. The horse prepared for Mulrady was brought out. His feet, by way of extra precaution, were wrapped round with cloths, so that they could not make the least noise on the ground. The animal seemed tired, and yet the safety of all depended on his strength and surefootedness. The Major advised Mulrady to let him go gently as soon as he got past the convicts. Better delay half-a-day than not arrive safely.
At eight o'clock, it got really dark; now was the time to head out. The horse that was prepared for Mulrady was brought out. His hooves were wrapped in cloths for extra precaution, so they wouldn't make a sound on the ground. The animal looked tired, but everyone's safety relied on his strength and surefootedness. The Major advised Mulrady to take it easy with him as soon as they passed the convicts. Better to hold off for half a day than risk not arriving safely.
John Mangles gave his sailor a revolver, which he had loaded with the utmost care. This is a formidable weapon in the hand of a man who does not tremble, for six shots fired in a few seconds would easily clear a road infested with criminals. Mulrady seated himself in the saddle ready to start.
John Mangles gave his sailor a revolver, which he had loaded with great care. This is a powerful weapon in the hands of someone who doesn’t flinch, as six shots fired in just a few seconds could easily clear a path full of criminals. Mulrady sat in the saddle, ready to go.
“Here is the letter you are to give to Tom Austin,” said Glenarvan. “Don’t let him lose an hour. He is to sail for Twofold Bay at once; and if he does not find us there, if we have not managed to cross the Snowy, let him come on to us without delay. Now go, my brave sailor, and God be with you.”
“Here’s the letter you need to give to Tom Austin,” Glenarvan said. “Don’t let him waste any time. He needs to set sail for Twofold Bay right away; and if he doesn’t find us there, if we haven’t managed to cross the Snowy, he should come to us without hesitation. Now go, my brave sailor, and may God be with you.”
He shook hands with him, and bade him good-by; and so did Lady Helena and Mary Grant. A more timorous man than the sailor would have shrunk back a little from setting out on such a dark, raining night on an errand so full of danger, across vast unknown wilds. But his farewells were calmly spoken, and he speedily disappeared down a path which skirted the wood.
He shook hands with him and said goodbye, as did Lady Helena and Mary Grant. A more fearful man than the sailor might have hesitated a bit at embarking on such a dark, rainy night on a mission so fraught with danger, across vast unknown wilderness. But he said his farewells calmly and quickly vanished down a path that ran alongside the woods.
At the same moment the gusts of wind redoubled their violence. The high branches of the eucalyptus clattered together noisily, and bough after bough fell on the wet ground. More than one great tree, with no living sap, but still standing hitherto, fell with a crash during this storm. The wind howled amid the cracking wood, and mingled its moans with the ominous roaring of the rain. The heavy clouds, driving along toward the east, hung on the ground like rays of vapor, and deep, cheerless gloom intensified the horrors of the night.
At the same time, the wind picked up its intensity. The tall branches of the eucalyptus trees clashed together loudly, and one by one, branches fell to the soaked ground. More than one massive tree, drained of life yet still standing until now, came crashing down during this storm. The wind howled amidst the cracking wood, blending its wails with the threatening roar of the rain. The thick clouds, rushing toward the east, seemed to hover just above the ground like wisps of vapor, and a deep, dreary darkness amplified the terrors of the night.
The travelers went back into the wagon immediately Mulrady had gone. Lady Helena, Mary Grant, Glenarvan and Paganel occupied the first compartment, which had been hermetically closed. The second was occupied by Olbinett, Wilson and Robert. The Major and John Mangles were on duty outside. This precaution was necessary, for an attack on the part of the convicts would be easy enough, and therefore probable enough.
The travelers jumped back into the wagon as soon as Mulrady left. Lady Helena, Mary Grant, Glenarvan, and Paganel settled into the first compartment, which was sealed up tight. The second compartment was taken over by Olbinett, Wilson, and Robert. The Major and John Mangles were on guard outside. This measure was essential, as an attack from the convicts could happen easily and was likely enough.
The two faithful guardians kept close watch, bearing philosophically the rain and wind that beat on their faces. They tried to pierce through the darkness so favorable to ambushes, for nothing could be heard but the noise of the tempest, the sough of the wind, the rattling branches, falling trees, and roaring of the unchained waters.
The two loyal guardians kept a close watch, enduring the rain and wind that lashed at their faces. They tried to see through the darkness, which was perfect for ambushes, as only the sounds of the storm could be heard: the howling wind, the rattling branches, falling trees, and the roar of the unleashed waters.
At times the wind would cease for a few moments, as if to take breath. Nothing was audible but the moan of the Snowy River, as it flowed between the motionless reeds and the dark curtain of gum trees. The silence seemed deeper in these momentary lulls, and the Major and John Mangles listened attentively.
At times the wind would stop for a few moments, as if to catch its breath. Nothing could be heard except the moan of the Snowy River as it flowed between the still reeds and the dark wall of gum trees. The silence felt even deeper during these brief pauses, and the Major and John Mangles listened closely.
During one of these calms a sharp whistle reached them. John Mangles went hurriedly up to the Major. “You heard that?” he asked.
During one of these quiet moments, a sharp whistle reached them. John Mangles quickly approached the Major. “Did you hear that?” he asked.
“Yes,” said McNabbs. “Is it man or beast?”
“Yes,” said McNabbs. “Is it a person or an animal?”
“A man,” replied John Mangles.
"A guy," replied John Mangles.
And then both listened. The mysterious whistle was repeated, and answered by a kind of report, but almost indistinguishable, for the storm was raging with renewed violence. McNabbs and John Mangles could not hear themselves speak. They went for comfort under the shelter of the wagon.
And then both listened. The mysterious whistle was repeated and answered by a kind of noise, but it was almost impossible to make out, as the storm was raging with renewed intensity. McNabbs and John Mangles couldn't hear themselves talk. They sought refuge under the shelter of the wagon.
At this moment the leather curtains were raised and Glenarvan rejoined his two companions. He too had heard this ill-boding whistle, and the report which echoed under the tilt. “Which way was it?” asked he.
At that moment, the leather curtains were lifted, and Glenarvan returned to his two companions. He had also heard that ominous whistle and the sound that resonated under the tent. “Which way was it?” he asked.
“There,” said John, pointing to the dark track in the direction taken by Mulrady.
“Over there,” said John, pointing to the dark path where Mulrady had gone.
“How far?”
"How far away?"
“The wind brought it; I should think, three or four miles, at least.”
“The wind carried it, I guess, about three or four miles, at least.”
“Come,” said Glenarvan, putting his gun on his shoulder.
“Come on,” said Glenarvan, slinging his gun over his shoulder.
“No,” said the Major. “It is a decoy to get us away from the wagon.”
“No,” said the Major. “It's a trap to lure us away from the wagon.”
“But if Mulrady has even now fallen beneath the blows of these rascals?” exclaimed Glenarvan, seizing McNabbs by the hand.
“But what if Mulrady has already fallen victim to these thugs?” exclaimed Glenarvan, grabbing McNabbs by the hand.
“We shall know by to-morrow,” said the Major, coolly, determined to prevent Glenarvan from taking a step which was equally rash and futile.
“We’ll know by tomorrow,” said the Major, coolly, determined to stop Glenarvan from doing something that was both reckless and pointless.
“You cannot leave the camp, my Lord,” said John. “I will go alone.”
“You can't leave the camp, my Lord,” John said. “I'll go by myself.”
“You will do nothing of the kind!” cried McNabbs, energetically. “Do you want to have us killed one by one to diminish our force, and put us at the mercy of these wretches? If Mulrady has fallen a victim to them, it is a misfortune that must not be repeated. Mulrady was sent, chosen by chance. If the lot had fallen to me, I should have gone as he did; but I should neither have asked nor expected assistance.”
"You won't do anything like that!" shouted McNabbs, passionately. "Do you want us to get killed off one by one to weaken our numbers and leave us at the mercy of these scoundrels? If Mulrady became a victim, that's a tragedy that can’t happen again. Mulrady was sent, picked at random. If it had been my turn, I would have gone just like he did; but I wouldn't have asked for or expected any help."
In restraining Glenarvan and John Mangles, the Major was right in every aspect of the case. To attempt to follow the sailor, to run in the darkness of night among the convicts in their leafy ambush was madness, and more than that—it was useless. Glenarvan’s party was not so numerous that it could afford to sacrifice another member of it.
In stopping Glenarvan and John Mangles, the Major was correct in every way. Trying to chase after the sailor, to navigate through the dark of night among the convicts hiding in the trees was crazy, and even more than that—it was pointless. Glenarvan’s group wasn’t large enough to lose another member.
Still Glenarvan seemed as if he could not yield; his hand was always on his carbine. He wandered about the wagon, and bent a listening ear to the faintest sound. The thought that one of his men was perhaps mortally wounded, abandoned to his fate, calling in vain on those for whose sake he had gone forth, was a torture to him. McNabbs was not sure that he should be able to restrain him, or if Glenarvan, carried away by his feelings, would not run into the arms of Ben Joyce.
Still, Glenarvan seemed like he couldn’t give in; he always had his hand on his carbine. He paced around the wagon, straining to hear the faintest sound. The idea that one of his men might be seriously injured, left to fend for himself, calling out helplessly for the people he had gone out to help, tormented him. McNabbs wasn’t sure he could hold him back, or if Glenarvan, overwhelmed by his emotions, would rush right into Ben Joyce's grasp.
“Edward,” said he, “be calm. Listen to me as a friend. Think of Lady Helena, of Mary Grant, of all who are left. And, besides, where would you go? Where would you find Mulrady? He must have been attacked two miles off. In what direction? Which track would you follow?”
“Edward,” he said, “stay calm. Listen to me as a friend. Think about Lady Helena, Mary Grant, and everyone else who’s left. And besides, where would you go? Where would you find Mulrady? He must have been attacked two miles away. In what direction? Which path would you take?”
At that very moment, as if to answer the Major, a cry of distress was heard.
At that moment, almost like a reply to the Major, a scream of distress was heard.
“Listen!” said Glenarvan.
"Listen!" said Glenarvan.
This cry came from the same quarter as the report, but less than a quarter of a mile off.
This shout came from the same direction as the report, but less than a quarter of a mile away.
Glenarvan, repulsing McNabbs, was already on the track, when at three hundred paces from the wagon they heard the exclamation: “Help! help!”
Glenarvan, pushing back against McNabbs, was already on the path when, three hundred paces from the wagon, they heard someone shout, “Help! Help!”
The voice was plaintive and despairing. John Mangles and the Major sprang toward the spot. A few seconds after they perceived among the scrub a human form dragging itself along the ground and uttering mournful groans. It was Mulrady, wounded, apparently dying; and when his companions raised him they felt their hands bathed in blood.
The voice was filled with sorrow and desperation. John Mangles and the Major rushed to the location. A few seconds later, they saw a human figure struggling on the ground and making sad groans among the bushes. It was Mulrady, injured and seemingly on the verge of death; when his friends lifted him, they found their hands covered in blood.
The rain came down with redoubled violence, and the wind raged among the branches of the dead trees. In the pelting storm, Glenarvan, the Major and John Mangles transported the body of Mulrady.
The rain fell harder than ever, and the wind howled through the branches of the dead trees. In the intense storm, Glenarvan, the Major, and John Mangles carried Mulrady's body.
On their arrival everyone got up. Paganel, Robert, Wilson and Olbinett left the wagon, and Lady Helena gave up her compartment to poor Mulrady. The Major removed the poor fellow’s flannel shirt, which was dripping with blood and rain. He soon found the wound; it was a stab in the right side.
On their arrival, everyone stood up. Paganel, Robert, Wilson, and Olbinett got out of the wagon, and Lady Helena offered her compartment to poor Mulrady. The Major took off the poor guy’s flannel shirt, which was soaked with blood and rain. He quickly found the wound; it was a stab on the right side.
McNabbs dressed it with great skill. He could not tell whether the weapon had touched any vital part. An intermittent jet of scarlet blood flowed from it; the patient’s paleness and weakness showed that he was seriously injured. The Major washed the wound first with fresh water and then closed the orifice; after this he put on a thick pad of lint, and then folds of scraped linen held firmly in place with a bandage. He succeeded in stopping the hemorrhage. Mulrady was laid on his side, with his head and chest well raised, and Lady Helena succeeded in making him swallow a few drops of water.
McNabbs dressed the wound with great skill. He couldn’t tell if the weapon had hit any vital organs. An intermittent stream of bright red blood flowed from it; the patient's pale face and weakness indicated that he was seriously hurt. The Major first rinsed the wound with clean water and then closed up the opening; afterward, he placed a thick pad of lint and then layers of scraped linen secured tightly with a bandage. He managed to stop the bleeding. Mulrady was positioned on his side, with his head and chest elevated, and Lady Helena managed to get him to swallow a few drops of water.
After about a quarter of an hour, the wounded man, who till then had lain motionless, made a slight movement. His eyes unclosed, his lips muttered incoherent words, and the Major, bending toward him, heard him repeating: “My Lord—the letter—Ben Joyce.”
After about fifteen minutes, the injured man, who had been lying still until then, made a slight movement. His eyes opened, his lips whispered unclear words, and the Major, leaning in closer, heard him say: “My Lord—the letter—Ben Joyce.”
The Major repeated these words, and looked at his companions. What did Mulrady mean? Ben Joyce had been the attacking party, of course; but why? Surely for the express purpose of intercepting him, and preventing his arrival at the DUNCAN. This letter—
The Major repeated these words and glanced at his companions. What did Mulrady mean? Ben Joyce had clearly been the one attacking; but why? Surely it was specifically to stop him from reaching the DUNCAN. This letter—
Glenarvan searched Mulrady’s pockets. The letter addressed to Tom Austin was gone!
Glenarvan searched Mulrady’s pockets. The letter addressed to Tom Austin was missing!
The night wore away amid anxiety and distress; every moment, they feared, would be poor Mulrady’s last. He suffered from acute fever. The Sisters of Charity, Lady Helena and Mary Grant, never left him. Never was patient so well tended, nor by such sympathetic hands.
The night dragged on with worry and pain; every moment, they were afraid it would be poor Mulrady’s last. He was suffering from a severe fever. The Sisters of Charity, Lady Helena and Mary Grant, stayed by his side the whole time. No patient was ever cared for so well, or by such compassionate hands.
Day came, and the rain had ceased. Great clouds filled the sky still; the ground was strewn with broken branches; the marly soil, soaked by the torrents of rain, had yielded still more; the approaches to the wagon became difficult, but it could not sink any deeper.
Day broke, and the rain had stopped. Large clouds still filled the sky; the ground was littered with broken branches; the clayey soil, soaked from the heavy downpour, had given way even more; the paths to the wagon became challenging, but it couldn’t sink any deeper.
John Mangles, Paganel, and Glenarvan went, as soon as it was light enough, to reconnoiter in the neighborhood of the encampment. They revisited the track, which was still stained with blood. They saw no vestige of Ben Joyce, nor of his band. They penetrated as far as the scene of the attack. Here two corpses lay on the ground, struck down by Mulrady’s bullets. One was the blacksmith of Blackpoint. His face, already changed by death, was a dreadful spectacle. Glenarvan searched no further. Prudence forbade him to wander from the camp. He returned to the wagon, deeply absorbed by the critical position of affairs.
John Mangles, Paganel, and Glenarvan went out as soon as it was light enough to scout the area around the camp. They went back to the path, which was still marked by blood. They found no sign of Ben Joyce or his gang. They ventured as far as the site of the attack. There, they saw two bodies on the ground, killed by Mulrady’s bullets. One of them was the blacksmith from Blackpoint. His face, already altered by death, was a horrifying sight. Glenarvan didn’t search any further. Common sense told him not to stray far from the camp. He returned to the wagon, deeply preoccupied with the serious situation at hand.
“We must not think of sending another messenger to Melbourne,” said he.
“We shouldn’t think about sending another messenger to Melbourne,” he said.
“But we must,” said John Mangles; “and I must try to pass where my sailor could not succeed.”
“But we have to,” said John Mangles; “and I have to attempt to go where my sailor couldn’t succeed.”
“No, John! it is out of the question. You have not even a horse for the journey, which is full two hundred miles!”
“No, John! That’s not happening. You don’t even have a horse for the trip, and it’s a whole two hundred miles!”
This was true, for Mulrady’s horse, the only one that remained, had not returned. Had he fallen during the attack on his rider, or was he straying in the bush, or had the convicts carried him off?
This was true, since Mulrady’s horse, the only one left, hadn't come back. Did he fall during the attack on his rider, was he wandering in the bush, or did the convicts take him?
“Come what will,” replied Glenarvan, “we will not separate again. Let us wait a week, or a fortnight, till the Snowy falls to its normal level. We can then reach Twofold Bay by short stages, and from there we can send on to the DUNCAN, by a safer channel, the order to meet us.”
“Whatever happens,” Glenarvan replied, “we won't split up again. Let's wait a week or two until the Snowy goes back to its normal level. We can then make our way to Twofold Bay in short stages, and from there we can safely send a message to the DUNCAN to meet us.”
“That seems the only plan,” said Paganel.
"That looks like the only plan," said Paganel.
“Therefore, my friends,” rejoined Glenarvan, “no more parting. It is too great a risk for one man to venture alone into a robber-haunted waste. And now, may God save our poor sailor, and protect the rest of us!”
“Therefore, my friends,” Glenarvan replied, “no more goodbyes. It's too dangerous for one person to go alone into a place full of thieves. And now, may God save our poor sailor and protect the rest of us!”
Glenarvan was right in both points; first in prohibiting all isolated attempts, and second, in deciding to wait till the passage of the Snowy River was practicable. He was scarcely thirty miles from Delegete, the first frontier village of New South Wales, where he would easily find the means of transport to Twofold Bay, and from there he could telegraph to Melbourne his orders about the DUNCAN.
Glenarvan was correct on both counts; first, in forbidding any solo attempts, and second, in choosing to wait until crossing the Snowy River became possible. He was barely thirty miles from Delegete, the first frontier village of New South Wales, where he could easily find transportation to Twofold Bay, and from there, he could send a telegram to Melbourne with his instructions for the DUNCAN.
These measures were wise, but how late! If Glenarvan had not sent Mulrady to Lucknow what misfortunes would have been averted, not to speak of the assassination of the sailor!
These actions were smart, but they came too late! If Glenarvan hadn’t sent Mulrady to Lucknow, what disasters could have been avoided, not to mention the sailor’s assassination!
When he reached the camp he found his companions in better spirits. They seemed more hopeful than before. “He is better! he is better!” cried Robert, running out to meet Lord Glenarvan.
When he arrived at the camp, he found his friends in a better mood. They seemed more optimistic than before. “He’s getting better! He’s getting better!” shouted Robert, rushing out to greet Lord Glenarvan.
“Mulrady?—”
“Mulrady?”
“Yes, Edward,” answered Lady Helena. “A reaction has set in. The Major is more confident. Our sailor will live.”
“Yes, Edward,” replied Lady Helena. “There’s been a turnaround. The Major is feeling more sure. Our sailor will pull through.”
“Where is McNabbs?” asked Glenarvan.
“Where's McNabbs?” asked Glenarvan.
“With him. Mulrady wanted to speak to him, and they must not be disturbed.”
“With him. Mulrady wanted to talk to him, and they shouldn't be interrupted.”
He then learned that about an hour since, the wounded man had awakened from his lethargy, and the fever had abated. But the first thing he did on recovering his memory and speech was to ask for Lord Glenarvan, or, failing him, the Major. McNabbs seeing him so weak, would have forbidden any conversation; but Mulrady insisted with such energy that the Major had to give in. The interview had already lasted some minutes when Glenarvan returned. There was nothing for it but to await the return of McNabbs.
He then found out that about an hour ago, the injured man had woken up from his stupor, and the fever had gone down. But the first thing he did when he regained his memory and ability to speak was to ask for Lord Glenarvan, or, if he wasn't available, the Major. McNabbs, seeing him so weak, wanted to stop any conversation; but Mulrady insisted so strongly that the Major had to agree. The meeting had already been going on for a few minutes when Glenarvan came back. There was nothing to do but wait for McNabbs to return.
Presently the leather curtains of the wagon moved, and the Major appeared. He rejoined his friends at the foot of a gum-tree, where the tent was placed. His face, usually so stolid, showed that something disturbed him. When his eyes fell on Lady Helena and the young girl, his glance was full of sorrow.
Currently, the leather curtains of the wagon shifted, and the Major came out. He rejoined his friends at the base of a gum tree, where the tent was set up. His face, typically so unmoved, revealed that something was bothering him. When he saw Lady Helena and the young girl, his gaze was filled with sadness.
Glenarvan questioned him, and extracted the following information: When he left the camp Mulrady followed one of the paths indicated by Paganel. He made as good speed as the darkness of the night would allow. He reckoned that he had gone about two miles when several men—five, he thought—sprang to his horse’s head. The animal reared; Mulrady seized his revolver and fired. He thought he saw two of his assailants fall. By the flash he recognized Ben Joyce. But that was all. He had not time to fire all the barrels. He felt a violent blow on his side and was thrown to the ground.
Glenarvan asked him questions and got the following details: After he left the camp, Mulrady took one of the paths Paganel had pointed out. He moved as quickly as the darkness would allow. He estimated he had traveled about two miles when several men—five, he believed—jumped in front of his horse. The horse reared up; Mulrady grabbed his revolver and shot. He thought he saw two of his attackers go down. From the flash, he recognized Ben Joyce. But that was all he managed to see. He didn't have time to use all the bullets. Then, he felt a sharp blow to his side and was thrown to the ground.
Still he did not lose consciousness. The murderers thought he was dead. He felt them search his pockets, and then heard one of them say: “I have the letter.”
Still, he didn't lose consciousness. The murderers thought he was dead. He felt them searching his pockets, and then heard one of them say, “I have the letter.”
“Give it to me,” returned Ben Joyce, “and now the DUNCAN is ours.”
“Give it to me,” replied Ben Joyce, “and now the DUNCAN is ours.”
At this point of the story, Glenarvan could not help uttering a cry.
At this point in the story, Glenarvan couldn't help but let out a cry.
McNabbs continued: “‘Now you fellows,’ added Ben Joyce, ‘catch the horse. In two days I shall be on board the DUNCAN, and in six I shall reach Twofold Bay. This is to be the rendezvous. My Lord and his party will be still stuck in the marshes of the Snowy River. Cross the river at the bridge of Kemple Pier, proceed to the coast, and wait for me. I will easily manage to get you on board. Once at sea in a craft like the DUNCAN, we shall be masters of the Indian Ocean.’ ‘Hurrah for Ben Joyce!’ cried the convicts. Mulrady’s horse was brought, and Ben Joyce disappeared, galloping on the Lucknow Road, while the band took the road southeast of the Snowy River. Mulrady, though severely wounded, had the strength to drag himself to within three hundred paces from the camp, whence we found him almost dead. There,” said McNabbs, “is the history of Mulrady; and now you can understand why the brave fellow was so determined to speak.”
McNabbs continued: “‘Now you guys,’ added Ben Joyce, ‘catch the horse. In two days, I'll be on board the DUNCAN, and in six days, I'll reach Twofold Bay. This is where we'll meet. My Lord and his crew will still be stuck in the marshes of the Snowy River. Cross the river at the Kemple Pier bridge, head to the coast, and wait for me. I’ll easily get you on board. Once we’re at sea in a vessel like the DUNCAN, we’ll control the Indian Ocean.’ ‘Hurrah for Ben Joyce!’ cheered the convicts. Mulrady’s horse was brought, and Ben Joyce took off, galloping down the Lucknow Road, while the group headed southeast of the Snowy River. Mulrady, despite being badly injured, managed to drag himself within three hundred paces of the camp, where we found him nearly dead. There,” said McNabbs, “is the story of Mulrady; and now you understand why that brave guy was so desperate to talk.”
This revelation terrified Glenarvan and the rest of the party.
This revelation scared Glenarvan and the rest of the group.
“Pirates! pirates!” cried Glenarvan. “My crew massacred! my DUNCAN in the hands of these bandits!”
“Pirates! Pirates!” shouted Glenarvan. “My crew is wiped out! My DUNCAN is in the hands of these thugs!”
“Yes, for Ben Joyce will surprise the ship,” said the Major, “and then—”
“Yes, Ben Joyce will surprise the ship,” said the Major, “and then—”
“Well, we must get to the coast first,” said Paganel.
“Well, we need to get to the coast first,” said Paganel.
“But how are we to cross the Snowy River?” said Wilson.
“But how are we supposed to cross the Snowy River?” Wilson asked.
“As they will,” replied Glenarvan. “They are to cross at Kemple Pier Bridge, and so will we.”
“As they will,” replied Glenarvan. “They’re going to cross at Kemple Pier Bridge, and so will we.”
“But about Mulrady?” asked Lady Helena.
“But what about Mulrady?” asked Lady Helena.
“We will carry him; we will have relays. Can I leave my crew to the mercy of Ben Joyce and his gang?”
“We'll carry him; we'll have relays. Can I really leave my crew at the mercy of Ben Joyce and his crew?”
To cross the Snowy River at Kemple Pier was practicable, but dangerous. The convicts might entrench themselves at that point, and defend it. They were at least thirty against seven! But there are moments when people do not deliberate, or when they have no choice but to go on.
Crossing the Snowy River at Kemple Pier was doable, but risky. The convicts could set themselves up there and fight back. They were at least thirty to just seven! But there are times when people don’t think things through, or when they have no option but to move forward.
“My Lord,” said John Mangles, “before we throw away our chance, before venturing to this bridge, we ought to reconnoiter, and I will undertake it.”
“Sir,” said John Mangles, “before we waste our opportunity, before we risk going to this bridge, we should scout the area, and I’ll take care of it.”
“I will go with you, John,” said Paganel.
“I'll go with you, John,” said Paganel.
This proposal was agreed to, and John Mangles and Paganel prepared to start immediately. They were to follow the course of the Snowy River, follow its banks till they reached the place indicated by Ben Joyce, and especially they were to keep out of sight of the convicts, who were probably scouring the bush.
This proposal was accepted, and John Mangles and Paganel got ready to leave right away. They were going to follow the path of the Snowy River, stick to its banks until they reached the location mentioned by Ben Joyce, and most importantly, they needed to stay out of sight of the convicts, who were likely searching the bush.
So the two brave comrades started, well provisioned and well armed, and were soon out of sight as they threaded their way among the tall reeds by the river. The rest anxiously awaited their return all day. Evening came, and still the scouts did not return. They began to be seriously alarmed. At last, toward eleven o’clock, Wilson announced their arrival. Paganel and John Mangles were worn out with the fatigues of a ten-mile walk.
So the two brave friends set out, well-prepared and well-armed, and quickly disappeared as they made their way through the tall reeds by the river. The others anxiously waited for their return all day. Evening arrived, and the scouts had still not come back. They started to get really worried. Finally, around eleven o’clock, Wilson reported that they had returned. Paganel and John Mangles were exhausted from their ten-mile trek.
“Well, what about the bridge? Did you find it?” asked Glenarvan, with impetuous eagerness.
“Well, what about the bridge? Did you find it?” Glenarvan asked, eagerly.
“Yes, a bridge of supple-jacks,” said John Mangles. “The convicts passed over, but—”
“Yes, a bridge of supple-jacks,” said John Mangles. “The convicts crossed over, but—”
“But what?” said Glenarvan, who foreboded some new misfortune.
“But what?” Glenarvan asked, sensing some new misfortune ahead.
“They burned it after they passed!” said Paganel.
“They burned it after they passed!” said Paganel.
CHAPTER XIX HELPLESS AND HOPELESS
IT was not a time for despair, but action. The bridge at Kemple Pier was destroyed, but the Snowy River must be crossed, come what might, and they must reach Twofold Bay before Ben Joyce and his gang, so, instead of wasting time in empty words, the next day (the 16th of January) John Mangles and Glenarvan went down to examine the river, and arrange for the passage over.
IT was not a time for despair, but for action. The bridge at Kemple Pier was destroyed, but they had to cross the Snowy River, no matter what, and reach Twofold Bay before Ben Joyce and his gang. So, instead of wasting time with empty words, the next day (January 16th), John Mangles and Glenarvan went down to check out the river and plan for the crossing.
The swollen and tumultuous waters had not gone down the least. They rushed on with indescribable fury. It would be risking life to battle with them. Glenarvan stood gazing with folded arms and downcast face.
The swollen and chaotic waters hadn’t calmed at all. They surged on with unstoppable fury. It would be risking life to take them on. Glenarvan stood there, arms crossed and expression downcast.
“Would you like me to try and swim across?” said John Mangles.
"Do you want me to try swimming across?" John Mangles asked.
“No, John, no!” said Lord Glenarvan, holding back the bold, daring young fellow, “let us wait.”
“No, John, no!” said Lord Glenarvan, stopping the bold, daring young man, “let’s wait.”
And they both returned to the camp. The day passed in the most intense anxiety. Ten times Lord Glenarvan went to look at the river, trying to invent some bold way of getting over; but in vain. Had a torrent of lava rushed between the shores, it could not have been more impassable.
And they both went back to the camp. The day went by filled with intense anxiety. Ten times Lord Glenarvan went to check the river, trying to come up with a bold way to cross it; but it was no use. It could not have been more impossible to get across if a torrent of lava had surged between the banks.
During these long wasted hours, Lady Helena, under the Major’s advice, was nursing Mulrady with the utmost skill. The sailor felt a throb of returning life. McNabbs ventured to affirm that no vital part was injured. Loss of blood accounted for the patient’s extreme exhaustion. The wound once closed and the hemorrhage stopped, time and rest would be all that was needed to complete his cure. Lady Helena had insisted on giving up the first compartment of the wagon to him, which greatly tried his modesty. The poor fellow’s greatest trouble was the delay his condition might cause Glenarvan, and he made him promise that they should leave him in the camp under Wilson’s care, should the passage of the river become practicable.
During those long, wasted hours, Lady Helena, following the Major’s advice, was taking care of Mulrady with great skill. The sailor felt a surge of life returning. McNabbs confidently stated that no vital part was damaged. The loss of blood explained the patient’s extreme fatigue. Once the wound was closed and the bleeding stopped, all that would be needed to fully heal him was time and rest. Lady Helena insisted on giving up the front compartment of the wagon for him, which tested his modesty. The poor guy’s biggest concern was the delay his condition might cause Glenarvan, and he made him promise that they would leave him at the camp under Wilson’s care if crossing the river became possible.
But, unfortunately, no passage was practicable, either that day or the next (January 17); Glenarvan was in despair. Lady Helena and the Major vainly tried to calm him, and preached patience.
But unfortunately, there was no way through, either that day or the next (January 17); Glenarvan was in despair. Lady Helena and the Major tried in vain to calm him and preached patience.
Patience, indeed, when perhaps at this very moment Ben Joyce was boarding the yacht; when the DUNCAN, loosing from her moorings, was getting up steam to reach the fatal coast, and each hour was bringing her nearer.
Patience, indeed, when maybe at this very moment Ben Joyce was getting on the yacht; when the DUNCAN, coming loose from her moorings, was generating steam to reach the dangerous coast, and each hour was bringing her closer.
John Mangles felt in his own breast all that Glenarvan was suffering. He determined to conquer the difficulty at any price, and constructed a canoe in the Australian manner, with large sheets of bark of the gum-trees. These sheets were kept together by bars of wood, and formed a very fragile boat. The captain and the sailor made a trial trip in it during the day. All that skill, and strength, and tact, and courage could do they did; but they were scarcely in the current before they were upside down, and nearly paid with their lives for the dangerous experiment. The boat disappeared, dragged down by the eddy. John Mangles and Wilson had not gone ten fathoms, and the river was a mile broad, and swollen by the heavy rains and melted snows.
John Mangles felt everything that Glenarvan was going through. He decided to overcome the challenge no matter what and built a canoe in the Australian style using large sheets of eucalyptus bark. These sheets were held together by wooden bars, creating a very delicate boat. The captain and the sailor took it out for a test run during the day. They did everything they could with their skill, strength, tact, and courage; but as soon as they hit the current, they were tipped upside down and nearly lost their lives in the risky venture. The boat vanished, pulled under by the current. John Mangles and Wilson hadn’t gone ten fathoms, while the river was a mile wide and swollen from heavy rains and melting snow.
Thus passed the 19th and 20th of January. The Major and Glenarvan went five miles up the river in search of a favorable passage, but everywhere they found the same roaring, rushing, impetuous torrent. The whole southern slope of the Australian Alps poured its liquid masses into this single bed.
Thus passed the 19th and 20th of January. The Major and Glenarvan went five miles up the river looking for a better route, but everywhere they encountered the same roaring, rushing, chaotic torrent. The entire southern slope of the Australian Alps poured its water into this one single channel.
All hope of saving the DUNCAN was now at an end. Five days had elapsed since the departure of Ben Joyce. The yacht must be at this moment at the coast, and in the hands of the convicts.
All hope of saving the DUNCAN was now gone. Five days had passed since Ben Joyce left. The yacht must now be on the coast and in the hands of the convicts.
However, it was impossible that this state of things could last. The temporary influx would soon be exhausted, and the violence also. Indeed, on the morning of the 21st, Paganel announced that the water was already lower. “What does it matter now?” said Glenarvan. “It is too late!”
However, it was impossible for this situation to continue. The temporary influx would soon run out, and the violence would fade as well. In fact, on the morning of the 21st, Paganel announced that the water was already lower. “What does it matter now?” Glenarvan said. “It's too late!”
“That is no reason for our staying longer here,” said the Major.
"That's not a reason for us to stay here any longer," said the Major.
“Certainly not,” replied John Mangles. “Perhaps tomorrow the river may be practicable.”
“Definitely not,” replied John Mangles. “Maybe tomorrow the river will be passable.”
“And will that save my unhappy men?” cried Glenarvan.
“And will that save my unhappy men?” Glenarvan exclaimed.
“Will your Lordship listen to me?” returned John Mangles. “I know Tom Austin. He would execute your orders, and set out as soon as departure was possible. But who knows whether the DUNCAN was ready and her injury repaired on the arrival of Ben Joyce. And suppose the yacht could not go to sea; suppose there was a delay of a day, or two days.”
“Will you please listen to me, my Lord?” replied John Mangles. “I know Tom Austin. He would follow your orders and leave as soon as he could. But who knows if the DUNCAN was ready and her damage fixed by the time Ben Joyce arrived? And what if the yacht couldn't go out to sea; what if there was a delay of a day or two?”
“You are right, John,” replied Glenarvan. “We must get to Twofold Bay; we are only thirty-five miles from Delegete.”
"You’re right, John," replied Glenarvan. "We have to get to Twofold Bay; we're just thirty-five miles from Delegete."
“Yes,” added Paganel, “and that’s a town where we shall find rapid means of conveyance. Who knows whether we shan’t arrive in time to prevent a catastrophe.”
“Yeah,” added Paganel, “and that’s a town where we’ll find quick transportation. Who knows if we’ll get there in time to prevent a disaster?”
“Let us start,” cried Glenarvan.
“Let's get started,” shouted Glenarvan.
John Mangles and Wilson instantly set to work to construct a canoe of larger dimensions. Experience had proved that the bark was powerless against the violence of the torrent, and John accordingly felled some of the gum-trees, and made a rude but solid raft with the trunks. It was a long task, and the day had gone before the work was ended. It was completed next morning.
John Mangles and Wilson quickly got to work building a larger canoe. They had learned from experience that bark couldn’t withstand the force of the current, so John chopped down some gum trees and created a rough but sturdy raft using the trunks. It took a long time, and the day was nearly over by the time they finished. They completed it the next morning.
By this time the waters had visibly diminished; the torrent had once more become a river, though a very rapid one, it is true. However, by pursuing a zigzag course, and overcoming it to a certain extent, John hoped to reach the opposite shore. At half-past twelve, they embarked provisions enough for a couple of days. The remainder was left with the wagon and the tent. Mulrady was doing well enough to be carried over; his convalescence was rapid.
By this time, the water had noticeably decreased; the rushing stream had once again turned into a river, albeit a very fast one. Still, by taking a zigzag route and managing to navigate it to some extent, John hoped to reach the other side. At 12:30, they loaded enough supplies for a couple of days. The rest was left with the wagon and the tent. Mulrady was well enough to be carried across; he was recovering quickly.
At one o’clock, they all seated themselves on the raft, still moored to the shore. John Mangles had installed himself at the starboard, and entrusted to Wilson a sort of oar to steady the raft against the current, and lessen the leeway. He took his own stand at the back, to steer by means of a large scull; but, notwithstanding their efforts, Wilson and John Mangles soon found themselves in an inverse position, which made the action of the oars impossible.
At one o’clock, they all sat down on the raft, which was still tied to the shore. John Mangles positioned himself on the right side and handed Wilson an oar to help keep the raft steady against the current and reduce drift. He took his place at the back to steer with a large oar; however, despite their efforts, Wilson and John Mangles quickly ended up in a reversed position that made it impossible to use the oars effectively.
There was no help for it; they could do nothing to arrest the gyratory movement of the raft; it turned round with dizzying rapidity, and drifted out of its course. John Mangles stood with pale face and set teeth, gazing at the whirling current.
There was no way to stop it; they couldn't do anything to halt the spinning motion of the raft; it revolved with dizzying speed and drifted off course. John Mangles stood with a pale face and clenched teeth, staring at the swirling water.
However, the raft had reached the middle of the river, about half a mile from the starting point. Here the current was extremely strong, and this broke the whirling eddy, and gave the raft some stability. John and Wilson seized their oars again, and managed to push it in an oblique direction. This brought them nearer to the left shore. They were not more than fifty fathoms from it, when Wilson’s oar snapped short off, and the raft, no longer supported, was dragged away. John tried to resist at the risk of breaking his own oar, too, and Wilson, with bleeding hands, seconded his efforts with all his might.
However, the raft had reached the middle of the river, about half a mile from where they started. Here, the current was really strong, and it broke the swirling eddy, giving the raft some stability. John and Wilson grabbed their oars again and managed to steer it at an angle. This brought them closer to the left shore. They were only about fifty fathoms away when Wilson’s oar snapped short, and the raft, no longer supported, was pulled away. John tried to hold on, risking breaking his own oar as well, and Wilson, with bleeding hands, did his best to help him.
At last they succeeded, and the raft, after a passage of more than half an hour, struck against the steep bank of the opposite shore. The shock was so violent that the logs became disunited, the cords broke, and the water bubbled up between. The travelers had barely time to catch hold of the steep bank. They dragged out Mulrady and the two dripping ladies. Everyone was safe; but the provisions and firearms, except the carbine of the Major, went drifting down with the DEBRIS of the raft.
Finally, they succeeded, and after more than half an hour, the raft hit the steep bank on the other side. The impact was so intense that the logs came apart, the ropes snapped, and water surged between them. The travelers hardly had time to grab onto the steep bank. They managed to pull out Mulrady and the two soaking wet ladies. Everyone was safe; however, the supplies and firearms—except for the Major's carbine—were carried away with the debris of the raft.
The river was crossed. The little company found themselves almost without provisions, thirty-five miles from Delegete, in the midst of the unknown deserts of the Victoria frontier. Neither settlers nor squatters were to be met with; it was entirely uninhabited, unless by ferocious bushrangers and bandits.
The river had been crossed. The small group found themselves nearly out of supplies, thirty-five miles from Delegete, in the middle of the unknown deserts of the Victoria frontier. There were no settlers or squatters around; it was completely uninhabited, except for fierce bushrangers and bandits.
They resolved to set off without delay. Mulrady saw clearly that he would be a great drag on them, and he begged to be allowed to remain, and even to remain alone, till assistance could be sent from Delegete.
They decided to leave right away. Mulrady realized that he would slow them down, and he asked to stay behind, even if it meant being alone, until help could arrive from Delegete.
Glenarvan refused. It would be three days before he could reach Delegete, and five the shore—that is to say, the 26th of January. Now, as the DUNCAN had left Melbourne on the 16th, what difference would a few days’ delay make?
Glenarvan declined. It would take him three days to get to Delegete and five days to reach the shore—that is, by January 26th. Since the DUNCAN had left Melbourne on the 16th, what difference would a few days' delay make?
“No, my friend,” he said, “I will not leave anyone behind. We will make a litter and carry you in turn.”
“No, my friend,” he said, “I won’t leave anyone behind. We’ll make a stretcher and take turns carrying you.”
The litter was made of boughs of eucalyptus covered with branches; and, whether he would or not, Mulrady was obliged to take his place on it. Glenarvan would be the first to carry his sailor. He took hold of one end and Wilson of the other, and all set off.
The stretcher was made of eucalyptus branches covered with twigs; and, whether he wanted to or not, Mulrady had to take his place on it. Glenarvan was the first to carry his sailor. He grabbed one end while Wilson took the other, and they all set off.
What a sad spectacle, and how lamentably was this expedition to end which had commenced so well. They were no longer in search of Harry Grant. This continent, where he was not, and never had been, threatened to prove fatal to those who sought him. And when these intrepid countrymen of his should reach the shore, they would find the DUNCAN waiting to take them home again. The first day passed silently and painfully. Every ten minutes the litter changed bearers. All the sailor’s comrades took their share in this task without murmuring, though the fatigue was augmented by the great heat.
What a sad sight, and how unfortunate that this journey, which had started off so well, was coming to an end. They were no longer looking for Harry Grant. This continent, where he wasn't and never had been, seemed likely to be deadly for those searching for him. When these brave compatriots finally reached the shore, they would find the DUNCAN waiting to take them home again. The first day passed silently and painfully. Every ten minutes, the litter changed hands. All of the sailor’s friends took their turn with this task without complaining, even though the heat made the fatigue worse.
In the evening, after a journey of only five miles, they camped under the gum-trees. The small store of provisions saved from the raft composed the evening meal. But all they had to depend upon now was the Major’s carbine.
In the evening, after a trip of just five miles, they set up camp under the gum trees. The little bit of food they salvaged from the raft made up their evening meal. But all they could rely on now was the Major’s carbine.
It was a dark, rainy night, and morning seemed as if it would never dawn. They set off again, but the Major could not find a chance of firing a shot. This fatal region was only a desert, unfrequented even by animals. Fortunately, Robert discovered a bustard’s nest with a dozen of large eggs in it, which Olbinett cooked on hot cinders. These, with a few roots of purslain which were growing at the bottom of a ravine, were all the breakfast of the 22d.
It was a dark, rainy night, and it felt like morning would never come. They set off again, but the Major couldn’t find an opportunity to take a shot. This cursed area was just a barren wasteland, rarely visited even by animals. Luckily, Robert found a bustard’s nest containing a dozen large eggs, which Olbinett cooked on hot coals. Along with a few purslane roots growing at the bottom of a ravine, that was all the breakfast they had on the 22nd.
The route now became extremely difficult. The sandy plains were bristling with SPINIFEX, a prickly plant, which is called in Melbourne the porcupine. It tears the clothing to rags, and makes the legs bleed. The courageous ladies never complained, but footed it bravely, setting an example, and encouraging one and another by word or look.
The path was now really tough. The sandy plains were covered in SPINIFEX, a thorny plant known as porcupine in Melbourne. It ripped clothes to shreds and left legs bleeding. The brave women never complained; they walked on fearlessly, setting an example and motivating each other with words and glances.
They stopped in the evening at Mount Bulla Bulla, on the edge of the Jungalla Creek. The supper would have been very scant, if McNabbs had not killed a large rat, the mus conditor, which is highly spoken of as an article of diet. Olbinett roasted it, and it would have been pronounced even superior to its reputation had it equaled the sheep in size. They were obliged to be content with it, however, and it was devoured to the bones.
They stopped in the evening at Mount Bulla Bulla, near Jungalla Creek. Dinner would have been pretty meager if McNabbs hadn’t caught a large rat, the mus conditor, which is often praised as a food source. Olbinett roasted it, and it would have been considered even better than its reputation if it had been the size of a sheep. However, they had to make do with it, and it was eaten down to the bones.
On the 23d the weary but still energetic travelers started off again. After having gone round the foot of the mountain, they crossed the long prairies where the grass seemed made of whalebone. It was a tangle of darts, a medley of sharp little sticks, and a path had to be cut through either with the hatchet or fire.
On the 23rd, the tired but still lively travelers set off again. After going around the base of the mountain, they crossed the long prairies where the grass felt like whalebone. It was a tangle of darts, a mix of sharp little sticks, and they had to clear a path either with a hatchet or by using fire.
That morning there was not even a question of breakfast. Nothing could be more barren than this region strewn with pieces of quartz. Not only hunger, but thirst began to assail the travelers. A burning atmosphere heightened their discomfort. Glenarvan and his friends could only go half a mile an hour. Should this lack of food and water continue till evening, they would all sink on the road, never to rise again.
That morning, breakfast wasn't even a consideration. This area, littered with pieces of quartz, was completely desolate. The travelers were feeling the effects of not just hunger, but also thirst. The sweltering heat added to their misery. Glenarvan and his friends could only manage to move half a mile per hour. If they didn't find food and water by evening, they risked collapsing on the path and never getting back up.
But when everything fails a man, and he finds himself without resources, at the very moment when he feels he must give up, then Providence steps in. Water presented itself in the CEPHALOTES, a species of cup-shaped flower, filled with refreshing liquid, which hung from the branches of coralliform-shaped bushes. They all quenched their thirst with these, and felt new life returning.
But when a man loses everything and finds himself out of options, at that moment when he feels like he has to give up, Providence intervenes. Water appeared in the CEPHALOTES, a type of cup-shaped flower filled with refreshing liquid, which hung from the branches of coral-like bushes. They all drank from these and felt new life returning.
The only food they could find was the same as the natives were forced to subsist upon, when they could find neither game, nor serpents, nor insects. Paganel discovered in the dry bed of a creek, a plant whose excellent properties had been frequently described by one of his colleagues in the Geographical Society.
The only food they could find was the same as what the locals had to eat when they couldn’t find any game, snakes, or insects. Paganel came across a plant in the dry bed of a creek that one of his colleagues in the Geographical Society had often praised for its great qualities.
It was the NARDOU, a cryptogamous plant of the family Marsilacea, and the same which kept Burke and King alive in the deserts of the interior. Under its leaves, which resembled those of the trefoil, there were dried sporules as large as a lentil, and these sporules, when crushed between two stones, made a sort of flour. This was converted into coarse bread, which stilled the pangs of hunger at least. There was a great abundance of this plant growing in the district, and Olbinett gathered a large supply, so that they were sure of food for several days.
It was the NARDOU, a type of plant from the Marsilaceae family, and the same one that kept Burke and King alive in the deserts. Under its leaves, which looked like those of clover, there were dried spores the size of lentils, and when these spores were crushed between two stones, they turned into a kind of flour. This was made into rough bread that at least eased their hunger. There was plenty of this plant in the area, and Olbinett collected a large stash, ensuring they had enough food for several days.
The next day, the 24th, Mulrady was able to walk part of the way. His wound was entirely cicatrized. The town of Delegete was not more than ten miles off, and that evening they camped in longitude 140 degrees, on the very frontier of New South Wales.
The next day, the 24th, Mulrady was able to walk part of the way. His wound had completely healed. The town of Delegete was less than ten miles away, and that evening they set up camp at longitude 140 degrees, right on the edge of New South Wales.
For some hours, a fine but penetrating rain had been falling. There would have been no shelter from this, if by chance John Mangles had not discovered a sawyer’s hut, deserted and dilapidated to a degree. But with this miserable cabin they were obliged to be content. Wilson wanted to kindle a fire to prepare the NARDOU bread, and he went out to pick up the dead wood scattered all over the ground. But he found it would not light, the great quantity of albuminous matter which it contained prevented all combustion. This is the incombustible wood put down by Paganel in his list of Australian products.
For several hours, a light but steady rain had been falling. There wouldn’t have been any shelter from it if John Mangles hadn’t happened to find a sawyer's hut, which was abandoned and in a terrible state. But they had to make do with this rundown cabin. Wilson wanted to start a fire to cook the NARDOU bread, so he went outside to gather the dead wood scattered around. However, he discovered that it wouldn’t catch fire; the high amount of albumin in it prevented any combustion. This is the non-flammable wood noted by Paganel in his list of Australian products.
They had to dispense with fire, and consequently with food too, and sleep in their wet clothes, while the laughing jackasses, concealed in the high branches, seemed to ridicule the poor unfortunates. However, Glenarvan was nearly at the end of his sufferings. It was time. The two young ladies were making heroic efforts, but their strength was hourly decreasing. They dragged themselves along, almost unable to walk.
They had to go without fire, and as a result, without food too, and sleep in their wet clothes, while the laughing jackasses, hidden in the high branches, seemed to mock the poor unfortunates. However, Glenarvan was close to the end of his suffering. It was time. The two young ladies were making heroic efforts, but their strength was fading by the hour. They pulled themselves along, barely able to walk.
Next morning they started at daybreak. At 11 A. M. Delegete came in sight in the county of Wellesley, and fifty miles from Twofold Bay.
Next morning, they set out at dawn. By 11 A.M., Delegete appeared in view in the county of Wellesley, fifty miles from Twofold Bay.
Means of conveyance were quickly procured here. Hope returned to Glenarvan as they approached the coast. Perhaps there might have been some slight delay, and after all they might get there before the arrival of the DUNCAN. In twenty-four hours they would reach the bay.
Means of transportation were quickly arranged here. Glenarvan felt hopeful as they neared the coast. Maybe there had been a slight delay, and they could still arrive before the DUNCAN showed up. In twenty-four hours, they would reach the bay.
At noon, after a comfortable meal, all the travelers installed in a mail-coach, drawn by five strong horses, left Delegete at a gallop. The postilions, stimulated by a promise of a princely DOUCEUR, drove rapidly along over a well-kept road. They did not lose a minute in changing horses, which took place every ten miles. It seemed as if they were infected with Glenarvan’s zeal. All that day, and night, too, they traveled on at the rate of six miles an hour.
At noon, after a nice meal, all the travelers got into a mail coach pulled by five strong horses and took off from Delegete at a fast pace. The drivers, motivated by the promise of a generous tip, drove quickly along a well-maintained road. They didn’t waste any time changing horses, which happened every ten miles. It felt like they were energized by Glenarvan’s enthusiasm. They traveled all day and into the night at a speed of six miles an hour.
In the morning at sunrise, a dull murmur fell on their ears, and announced their approach to the Indian Ocean. They required to go round the bay to gain the coast at the 37th parallel, the exact point where Tom Austin was to wait their arrival.
In the morning at sunrise, a low murmur reached their ears, signaling their approach to the Indian Ocean. They needed to go around the bay to reach the coast at the 37th parallel, the exact spot where Tom Austin was supposed to wait for them.
When the sea appeared, all eyes anxiously gazed at the offing. Was the DUNCAN, by a miracle of Providence, there running close to the shore, as a month ago, when they crossed Cape Corrientes, they had found her on the Argentine coast? They saw nothing. Sky and earth mingled in the same horizon. Not a sail enlivened the vast stretch of ocean.
When the sea came into view, everyone watched the horizon with anticipation. Was the DUNCAN, by some miracle of fate, close to the shore, just like a month ago when they spotted her on the Argentine coast after crossing Cape Corrientes? They saw nothing. The sky and land blended at the horizon. Not a single sail broke the emptiness of the ocean.
One hope still remained. Perhaps Tom Austin had thought it his duty to cast anchor in Twofold Bay, for the sea was heavy, and a ship would not dare to venture near the shore. “To Eden!” cried Glenarvan. Immediately the mail-coach resumed the route round the bay, toward the little town of Eden, five miles distant. The postilions stopped not far from the lighthouse, which marks the entrance of the port. Several vessels were moored in the roadstead, but none of them bore the flag of Malcolm.
One hope still remained. Maybe Tom Austin had felt it was his duty to anchor in Twofold Bay because the sea was rough, and no ship would risk coming near the shore. “To Eden!” shouted Glenarvan. Right away, the mail coach continued the route around the bay toward the small town of Eden, five miles away. The drivers stopped not far from the lighthouse that marks the entrance to the port. Several ships were anchored in the harbor, but none of them flew Malcolm's flag.
Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Paganel got out of the coach, and rushed to the custom-house, to inquire about the arrival of vessels within the last few days.
Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Paganel jumped out of the coach and hurried to the customs house to ask about any ships that had arrived in the last few days.
No ship had touched the bay for a week.
No ship had entered the bay for a week.
“Perhaps the yacht has not started,” Glenarvan said, a sudden revulsion of feeling lifting him from despair. “Perhaps we have arrived first.”
“Maybe the yacht hasn’t left yet,” Glenarvan said, a sudden wave of hope pulling him up from despair. “Maybe we got here first.”
John Mangles shook his head. He knew Tom Austin. His first mate would not delay the execution of an order for ten days.
John Mangles shook his head. He knew Tom Austin. His first mate wouldn't hold off on carrying out an order for ten days.
“I must know at all events how they stand,” said Glenarvan. “Better certainty than doubt.”
“I need to know for sure how things are,” said Glenarvan. “Certainty is better than uncertainty.”
A quarter of an hour afterward a telegram was sent to the syndicate of shipbrokers in Melbourne. The whole party then repaired to the Victoria Hotel.
A quarter of an hour later, a telegram was sent to the group of shipbrokers in Melbourne. The entire group then headed to the Victoria Hotel.
At 2 P.M. the following telegraphic reply was received: “LORD GLENARVAN, Eden.
At 2 PM, the following telegraphic reply was received: “LORD GLENARVAN, Eden.
“Twofold Bay.
Twofold Bay.
“The DUNCAN left on the 16th current. Destination unknown. J. ANDREWS, S. B.”
“The DUNCAN left on the 16th. Destination unknown. J. ANDREWS, S. B.”
The telegram dropped from Glenarvan’s hands.
The telegram fell from Glenarvan’s hands.
There was no doubt now. The good, honest Scotch yacht was now a pirate ship in the hands of Ben Joyce!
There was no doubt now. The good, honest Scottish yacht was now a pirate ship in the hands of Ben Joyce!
So ended this journey across Australia, which had commenced under circumstances so favorable. All trace of Captain Grant and his shipwrecked men seemed to be irrevocably lost. This ill success had cost the loss of a ship’s crew. Lord Glenarvan had been vanquished in the strife; and the courageous searchers, whom the unfriendly elements of the Pampas had been unable to check, had been conquered on the Australian shore by the perversity of man.
So ended this journey across Australia, which had started under such favorable conditions. All trace of Captain Grant and his shipwrecked crew seemed to be permanently lost. This unfortunate outcome had resulted in the loss of a ship's crew. Lord Glenarvan had been defeated in the struggle; and the brave searchers, whom the harsh conditions of the Pampas had been unable to deter, had been overcome on the Australian shore by human stubbornness.
IN SEARCH OF THE CASTAWAYS
OR THE CHILDREN OF CAPTAIN GRANT
NEW ZEALAND
[page intentionally blank]
CHAPTER I A ROUGH CAPTAIN
IF ever the searchers after Captain Grant were tempted to despair, surely it was at this moment when all their hopes were destroyed at a blow. Toward what quarter of the world should they direct their endeavors? How were they to explore new countries? The DUNCAN was no longer available, and even an immediate return to their own land was out of the question. Thus the enterprise of these generous Scots had failed! Failed! a despairing word that finds no echo in a brave soul; and yet under the repeated blows of adverse fate, Glenarvan himself was compelled to acknowledge his inability to prosecute his devoted efforts.
If the searchers for Captain Grant ever felt like giving up, it was definitely at this moment when all their hopes were crushed in an instant. Where should they turn their efforts? How could they explore new lands? The DUNCAN was no longer an option, and going back home right away wasn’t possible either. So, the mission of these generous Scots had failed! Failed! A word filled with despair that resonates with a brave heart; yet, after facing so many setbacks, Glenarvan had to admit he couldn't continue his determined efforts.
Mary Grant at this crisis nerved herself to the resolution never to utter the name of her father. She suppressed her own anguish, when she thought of the unfortunate crew who had perished. The daughter was merged in the friend, and she now took upon her to console Lady Glenarvan, who till now had been her faithful comforter. She was the first to speak of returning to Scotland. John Mangles was filled with admiration at seeing her so courageous and so resigned. He wanted to say a word further in the Captain’s interest, but Mary stopped him with a glance, and afterward said to him: “No, Mr. John, we must think of those who ventured their lives. Lord Glenarvan must return to Europe!”
Mary Grant, at this moment, resolved to never mention her father’s name again. She pushed aside her own pain as she thought of the unfortunate crew who had died. The daughter became the friend, and she took it upon herself to comfort Lady Glenarvan, who had always been her support. She was the first to suggest returning to Scotland. John Mangles was filled with admiration seeing her so brave and composed. He wanted to say something in the Captain’s favor, but Mary stopped him with a look and then said, “No, Mr. John, we need to focus on those who risked their lives. Lord Glenarvan must return to Europe!”
“You are right, Miss Mary,” answered John Mangles; “he must. Beside, the English authorities must be informed of the fate of the DUNCAN. But do not despair. Rather than abandon our search I will resume it alone! I will either find Captain Grant or perish in the attempt!”
“You're right, Miss Mary,” replied John Mangles; “he has to. Besides, the English authorities need to be updated on what happened to the DUNCAN. But don’t lose hope. Instead of giving up on our search, I’ll continue it on my own! I will either find Captain Grant or die trying!”
It was a serious undertaking to which John Mangles bound himself; Mary accepted, and gave her hand to the young captain, as if to ratify the treaty. On John Mangles’ side it was a life’s devotion; on Mary’s undying gratitude.
It was a serious commitment that John Mangles made; Mary accepted and gave her hand to the young captain, as if to confirm the agreement. For John Mangles, it was a lifelong devotion; for Mary, it was everlasting gratitude.
During that day, their departure was finally arranged; they resolved to reach Melbourne without delay. Next day John went to inquire about the ships ready to sail. He expected to find frequent communication between Eden and Victoria.
During that day, their departure was finally set; they decided to head to Melbourne without delay. The next day, John went to check on the ships ready to sail. He expected to see regular trips between Eden and Victoria.
He was disappointed; ships were scarce. Three or four vessels, anchored in Twofold Bay, constituted the mercantile fleet of the place; none of them were bound for Melbourne, nor Sydney, nor Point de Galle, at any of which ports Glenarvan would have found ships loading for England. In fact, the Peninsular and Oriental Company has a regular line of packets between these points and England.
He was disappointed; there weren't many ships. Three or four vessels, anchored in Twofold Bay, made up the commercial fleet in the area; none of them were headed to Melbourne, Sydney, or Point de Galle, where Glenarvan could have found ships loading for England. In fact, the Peninsular and Oriental Company has a regular service of packets between these locations and England.
Under these circumstances, what was to be done? Waiting for a ship might be a tedious affair, for Twofold Bay is not much frequented. Numbers of ships pass by without touching. After due reflection and discussion, Glenarvan had nearly decided to follow the coast road to Sydney, when Paganel made an unexpected proposition.
Under these circumstances, what should be done? Waiting for a ship could be a boring situation, since Twofold Bay isn’t very busy. Many ships pass by without stopping. After careful thought and discussion, Glenarvan was almost ready to take the coastal road to Sydney when Paganel came up with a surprising suggestion.
The geographer had visited Twofold Bay on his own account, and was aware that there were no means of transport for Sydney or Melbourne. But of the three vessels anchored in the roadstead one was loading for Auckland, the capital of the northern island of New Zealand. Paganel’s proposal was to take the ship in question, and get to Auckland, whence it would be easy to return to Europe by the boats of the Peninsular and Oriental Company.
The geographer had visited Twofold Bay on his own initiative and knew that there was no transport available to Sydney or Melbourne. However, among the three ships anchored in the bay, one was loading for Auckland, the capital of New Zealand's North Island. Paganel suggested taking that ship to Auckland, from where it would be easy to return to Europe with the boats of the Peninsular and Oriental Company.
This proposition was taken into serious consideration. Paganel on this occasion dispensed with the volley of arguments he generally indulged in. He confined himself to the bare proposition, adding that the voyage to New Zealand was only five or six days—the distance, in fact, being only about a thousand miles.
This proposal was given serious thought. On this occasion, Paganel skipped the usual flood of arguments he liked to engage in. He stuck to the simple point, noting that the trip to New Zealand was just five or six days—the distance being only about a thousand miles.
By a singular coincidence Auckland is situated on the self-same parallel—the thirty-seventh—which the explorers had perseveringly followed since they left the coast of Araucania. Paganel might fairly have used this as an argument in favor of his scheme; in fact, it was a natural opportunity of visiting the shores of New Zealand.
By a rare coincidence, Auckland is located on the same parallel—the thirty-seventh—that the explorers had tirelessly followed since they left the coast of Araucania. Paganel could have reasonably used this as evidence supporting his plan; in fact, it was a perfect chance to visit the shores of New Zealand.
But Paganel did not lay stress on this argument. After two mistakes, he probably hesitated to attempt a third interpretation of the document. Besides, what could he make of it? It said positively that a “continent” had served as a refuge for Captain Grant, not an island. Now, New Zealand was nothing but an island. This seemed decisive. Whether, for this reason, or for some other, Paganel did not connect any idea of further search with this proposition of reaching Auckland. He merely observed that regular communication existed between that point and Great Britain, and that it was easy to take advantage of it.
But Paganel didn’t focus on this argument. After two mistakes, he probably hesitated to make a third interpretation of the document. Besides, what could he take from it? It clearly stated that a “continent” had been a refuge for Captain Grant, not an island. Now, New Zealand was nothing but an island. This seemed conclusive. Whether for this reason or another, Paganel didn’t associate the idea of further searching with the proposition of going to Auckland. He simply noted that there was regular communication between that point and Great Britain, and that it was easy to use it.
John Mangles supported Paganel’s proposal. He advised its adoption, as it was hopeless to await the problematical arrival of a vessel in Twofold Bay. But before coming to any decision, he thought it best to visit the ship mentioned by the geographer. Glenarvan, the Major, Paganel, Robert, and Mangles himself, took a boat, and a few strokes brought them alongside the ship anchored two cables’ length from the quay.
John Mangles backed Paganel's suggestion. He recommended going for it since waiting for a potentially arriving ship in Twofold Bay was pointless. However, before making any decision, he believed they should first check out the ship mentioned by the geographer. Glenarvan, the Major, Paganel, Robert, and Mangles himself boarded a boat, and a few strokes later, they reached the ship anchored two cables' length from the dock.
It was a brig of 150 tons, named the MACQUARIE. It was engaged in the coasting trade between the various ports of Australia and New Zealand. The captain, or rather the “master,” received his visitors gruffly enough. They perceived that they had to do with a man of no education, and whose manners were in no degree superior to those of the five sailors of his crew. With a coarse, red face, thick hands, and a broken nose, blind of an eye, and his lips stained with the pipe, Will Halley was a sadly brutal looking person. But they had no choice, and for so short a voyage it was not necessary to be very particular.
It was a 150-ton brig named the MACQUARIE. It was involved in the coasting trade between various ports in Australia and New Zealand. The captain, or rather the “master,” greeted his visitors rather gruffly. They realized they were dealing with a man who had no education and whose manners were no better than those of the five sailors in his crew. With a rough, red face, big hands, a broken nose, one eye blind, and lips stained from his pipe, Will Halley looked quite brutal. But they had no choice, and for such a short journey, it wasn't necessary to be too particular.
“What do you want?” asked Will Halley, when the strangers stepped on the poop of his ship.
“What do you want?” asked Will Halley, when the strangers stepped onto the deck of his ship.
“The captain,” answered John Mangles.
“Captain,” answered John Mangles.
“I am the captain,” said Halley. “What else do you want?”
“I’m the captain,” said Halley. “What else do you need?”
“The MACQUARIE is loading for Auckland, I believe?”
“The MACQUARIE is getting ready to load for Auckland, right?”
“Yes. What else?”
"Yes. What more?"
“What does she carry?”
"What is she carrying?"
“Everything salable and purchasable. What else?”
“Everything that's for sale and can be bought. What more is there?”
“When does she sail?”
“When does she set sail?”
“To-morrow at the mid-day tide. What else?”
"Tomorrow at noon. Anything else?"
“Does she take passengers?”
"Is she taking passengers?"
“That depends on who the passengers are, and whether they are satisfied with the ship’s mess.”
“That depends on who the passengers are and whether they’re happy with the ship’s food.”
“They would bring their own provisions.”
“They would bring their own supplies.”
“What else?”
"What else is there?"
“What else?”
"What else is there?"
“Yes. How many are there?”
“Yes. How many are there?”
“Nine; two of them are ladies.”
“Nine; two of them are women.”
“I have no cabins.”
"I don't have any cabins."
“We will manage with such space as may be left at their disposal.”
“We will make do with whatever space they have available.”
“What else?”
“What else is there?”
“Do you agree?” said John Mangles, who was not in the least put out by the captain’s peculiarities.
“Do you agree?” John Mangles asked, not the least bit bothered by the captain’s quirks.
“We’ll see,” said the master of the MACQUARIE.
“We’ll see,” said the captain of the MACQUARIE.
Will Halley took two or three turns on the poop, making it resound with iron-heeled boots, and then he turned abruptly to John Mangles.
Will Halley walked back and forth on the deck, making it echo with his heavy boots, and then he suddenly turned to John Mangles.
“What would you pay?” said he.
“What would you pay?” he asked.
“What do you ask?” replied John.
“What do you want?” replied John.
“Fifty pounds.”
"£50."
Glenarvan looked consent.
Glenarvan seemed agreeable.
“Very good! Fifty pounds,” replied John Mangles.
“Great! Fifty pounds,” replied John Mangles.
“But passage only,” added Halley.
“But just passage,” added Halley.
“Yes, passage only.”
"Yes, just passage."
“Food extra.”
"Extra food."
“Extra.”
“Extra.”
“Agreed. And now,” said Will, putting out his hand, “what about the deposit money?”
“Agreed. And now,” said Will, extending his hand, “what about the deposit money?”
“Here is half of the passage-money, twenty-five pounds,” said Mangles, counting out the sum to the master.
“Here is half of the fare, twenty-five pounds,” said Mangles, counting out the amount to the master.
“All aboard to-morrow,” said he, “before noon. Whether or no, I weigh anchor.”
“All aboard tomorrow,” he said, “before noon. Whether you like it or not, I’m weighing anchor.”
“We will be punctual.”
"We'll be on time."
This said, Glenarvan, the Major, Robert, Paganel, and John Mangles left the ship, Halley not so much as touching the oilskin that adorned his red locks.
That being said, Glenarvan, the Major, Robert, Paganel, and John Mangles left the ship, while Halley didn't even touch the oilskin that was draped over his red hair.
“What a brute,” exclaimed John.
"What a jerk," exclaimed John.
“He will do,” answered Paganel. “He is a regular sea-wolf.”
“He’s good enough,” replied Paganel. “He’s a real sea wolf.”
“A downright bear!” added the Major.
“A total bear!” added the Major.
“I fancy,” said John Mangles, “that the said bear has dealt in human flesh in his time.”
“I think,” said John Mangles, “that this bear has had its share of human flesh at some point.”
“What matter?” answered Glenarvan, “as long as he commands the MACQUARIE, and the MACQUARIE goes to New Zealand. From Twofold Bay to Auckland we shall not see much of him; after Auckland we shall see him no more.”
“What does it matter?” Glenarvan replied. “As long as he’s in charge of the MACQUARIE, and the MACQUARIE is headed to New Zealand. From Twofold Bay to Auckland, we won’t see much of him; after Auckland, we won’t see him at all.”
Lady Helena and Mary Grant were delighted to hear that their departure was arranged for to-morrow. Glenarvan warned them that the MACQUARIE was inferior in comfort to the DUNCAN. But after what they had gone through, they were indifferent to trifling annoyances. Wilson was told off to arrange the accommodation on board the MACQUARIE. Under his busy brush and broom things soon changed their aspect.
Lady Helena and Mary Grant were thrilled to learn that their departure was set for tomorrow. Glenarvan warned them that the MACQUARIE offered less comfort than the DUNCAN. However, after everything they had been through, they didn’t care about minor inconveniences. Wilson was assigned to organize the accommodations on the MACQUARIE. With his busy hands and broom, things quickly started to look different.
Will Halley shrugged his shoulders, and let the sailor have his way. Glenarvan and his party gave him no concern. He neither knew, nor cared to know, their names. His new freight represented fifty pounds, and he rated it far below the two hundred tons of cured hides which were stowed away in his hold. Skins first, men after. He was a merchant. As to his sailor qualification, he was said to be skillful enough in navigating these seas, whose reefs make them very dangerous.
Will Halley shrugged and let the sailor do what he wanted. Glenarvan and his group didn’t bother him at all. He neither knew nor cared to know their names. His new cargo was worth fifty pounds, which he considered way less valuable than the two hundred tons of cured hides packed in his hold. Skins come first, people come later. He was a merchant. As for his sailing skills, he was said to be good enough at navigating these treacherous seas with their dangerous reefs.
As the day drew to a close, Glenarvan had a desire to go again to the point on the coast cut by the 37th parallel. Two motives prompted him. He wanted to examine once more the presumed scene of the wreck. Ayrton had certainly been quartermaster on the BRITANNIA, and the BRITANNIA might have been lost on this part of the Australian coast; on the east coast if not on the west. It would not do to leave without thorough investigation, a locality which they were never to revisit.
As the day came to an end, Glenarvan felt the urge to return to the spot on the coast marked by the 37th parallel. He was driven by two reasons. First, he wanted to take another look at what he believed was the site of the wreck. Ayrton had definitely been the quartermaster on the BRITANNIA, and the BRITANNIA could have gone down somewhere along this stretch of the Australian coast; on the east coast if not on the west. They couldn’t leave without a detailed examination of a place they would never come back to.
And then, failing the BRITANNIA, the DUNCAN certainly had fallen into the hands of the convicts. Perhaps there had been a fight? There might yet be found on the coast traces of a struggle, a last resistance. If the crew had perished among the waves, the waves probably had thrown some bodies on the shore.
And then, after the BRITANNIA failed, the DUNCAN had definitely fallen into the hands of the convicts. Maybe there was a fight? There might still be signs of a struggle along the coast, a final stand. If the crew had drowned in the waves, those waves probably washed some bodies ashore.
Glenarvan, accompanied by his faithful John, went to carry out the final search. The landlord of the Victoria Hotel lent them two horses, and they set out on the northern road that skirts Twofold Bay.
Glenarvan, with his loyal friend John, went to conduct the final search. The owner of the Victoria Hotel lent them two horses, and they headed out on the northern road that runs along Twofold Bay.
It was a melancholy journey. Glenarvan and Captain John trotted along without speaking, but they understood each other. The same thoughts, the same anguish harrowed both their hearts. They looked at the sea-worn rocks; they needed no words of question or answer. John’s well-tried zeal and intelligence were a guarantee that every point was scrupulously examined, the least likely places, as well as the sloping beaches and sandy plains where even the slight tides of the Pacific might have thrown some fragments of wreck. But no indication was seen that could suggest further search in that quarter—all trace of the wreck escaped them still.
It was a sad journey. Glenarvan and Captain John rode along in silence, but they understood each other. They shared the same thoughts and the same pain in their hearts. They gazed at the weathered rocks; no words were needed for questions or answers. John's proven enthusiasm and intelligence ensured that every area was thoroughly checked, including the least likely spots, as well as the sloping beaches and sandy plains where even the smallest waves of the Pacific might have washed up some wreckage. But no signs were found that would indicate further investigation in that area—all traces of the wreck remained elusive.
As to the DUNCAN, no trace either. All that part of Australia, bordering the ocean, was desert.
As for the DUNCAN, there was no sign of it either. That whole area of Australia by the ocean was just desert.
Still John Mangles discovered on the skirts of the shore evident traces of camping, remains of fires recently kindled under solitary Myall-trees. Had a tribe of wandering blacks passed that way lately? No, for Glenarvan saw a token which furnished incontestable proof that the convicts had frequented that part of the coast.
Still, John Mangles found clear signs of recent camping on the edge of the shore, with remains of fires that had just been lit under solitary Myall trees. Had a group of wandering Indigenous people passed through recently? No, because Glenarvan noticed a clue that provided undeniable proof that the convicts had been in that area of the coast.
This token was a grey and yellow garment worn and patched, an ill-omened rag thrown down at the foot of a tree. It bore the convict’s original number at the Perth Penitentiary. The felon was not there, but his filthy garments betrayed his passage. This livery of crime, after having clothed some miscreant, was now decaying on this desert shore.
This token was a gray and yellow piece of clothing, worn and patched, an ominous rag tossed at the base of a tree. It had the convict’s original number from the Perth Penitentiary. The criminal wasn't there, but his filthy clothes showed he had been. This uniform of crime, after having covered some wrongdoer, was now rotting on this desolate shore.
“You see, John,” said Glenarvan, “the convicts got as far as here! and our poor comrades of the DUNCAN—”
“You see, John,” said Glenarvan, “the convicts made it this far! And our poor friends from the DUNCAN—”
“Yes,” said John, in a low voice, “they never landed, they perished!”
“Yes,” John said softly, “they never made it, they died!”
“Those wretches!” cried Glenarvan. “If ever they fall into my hands I will avenge my crew—”
“Those miserable people!” shouted Glenarvan. “If they ever fall into my hands, I will get revenge for my crew—”
Grief had hardened Glenarvan’s features. For some minutes he gazed at the expanse before him, as if taking a last look at some ship disappearing in the distance. Then his eyes became dim; he recovered himself in a moment, and without a word or look, set off at a gallop toward Eden.
Grief had stiffened Glenarvan’s face. For a few minutes, he stared at the wide view in front of him, as if saying goodbye to a ship fading into the distance. Then his eyes clouded over; he regained his composure quickly and, without a word or glance, took off at a gallop toward Eden.
The wanderers passed their last evening sadly enough. Their thoughts recalled all the misfortunes they had encountered in this country. They remembered how full of well-warranted hope they had been at Cape Bernouilli, and how cruelly disappointed at Twofold Bay!
The wanderers spent their last evening feeling quite sad. Their minds drifted back to all the hardships they had faced in this country. They recalled how hopeful they had been at Cape Bernouilli, and how deeply disappointed they felt at Twofold Bay!
Paganel was full of feverish agitation. John Mangles, who had watched him since the affair at Snowy River, felt that the geographer was hesitating whether to speak or not to speak. A thousand times he had pressed him with questions, and failed in obtaining an answer.
Paganel was filled with restless energy. John Mangles, who had been watching him since the incident at Snowy River, sensed that the geographer was unsure whether to say something or keep quiet. He had asked him countless questions, but had not received any answers.
But that evening, John, in lighting him to his room, asked him why he was so nervous.
But that evening, John, while showing him to his room, asked him why he was so anxious.
“Friend John,” said Paganel, evasively, “I am not more nervous to-night than I always am.”
“Friend John,” said Paganel, avoiding the issue, “I’m not any more nervous tonight than I usually am.”
“Mr. Paganel,” answered John, “you have a secret that chokes you.”
“Mr. Paganel,” John replied, “you have a secret that's weighing you down.”
“Well!” cried the geographer, gesticulating, “what can I do? It is stronger than I!”
"Well!" exclaimed the geographer, waving his arms, "what can I do? It's beyond my control!"
“What is stronger?”
“Which is stronger?”
“My joy on the one hand, my despair on the other.”
“My joy on one side, my despair on the other.”
“You rejoice and despair at the same time!”
“You feel both joy and sadness at the same time!”
“Yes; at the idea of visiting New Zealand.”
“Yes; at the thought of going to New Zealand.”
“Why! have you any trace?” asked John, eagerly. “Have you recovered the lost tracks?”
“Why! Do you have any clues?” asked John, eagerly. “Have you found the lost tracks?”
“No, friend John. No one returns from New Zealand; but still—you know human nature. All we want to nourish hope is breath. My device is ‘Spiro spero,’ and it is the best motto in the world!”
“No, friend John. No one comes back from New Zealand; but still—you know people. All we need to keep hope alive is to keep breathing. My motto is ‘Spiro spero,’ and it’s the best motto in the world!”
CHAPTER II NAVIGATORS AND THEIR DISCOVERIES
NEXT day, the 27th of January, the passengers of the MACQUARIE were installed on board the brig. Will Halley had not offered his cabin to his lady passengers. This omission was the less to be deplored, for the den was worthy of the bear.
NEXT day, the 27th of January, the passengers of the MACQUARIE were settled on board the brig. Will Halley hadn't offered his cabin to the female passengers. This oversight was less regrettable, as the cabin was unfit for anyone.
At half past twelve the anchor was weighed, having been loosed from its holding-ground with some difficulty. A moderate breeze was blowing from the southwest. The sails were gradually unfurled; the five hands made slow work. Wilson offered to assist the crew; but Halley begged him to be quiet and not to interfere with what did not concern him. He was accustomed to manage his own affairs, and required neither assistance nor advice.
At 12:30, the anchor was lifted after some struggle. A light breeze was blowing from the southwest. The sails were slowly unfurled, and the five crew members were taking their time. Wilson offered to help, but Halley told him to be quiet and not meddle in things that weren’t his business. He was used to handling his own matters and didn’t need help or advice.
This was aimed at John Mangles, who had smiled at the clumsiness of some maneuver. John took the hint, but mentally resolved that he would nevertheless hold himself in readiness in case the incapacity of the crew should endanger the safety of the vessel.
This was directed at John Mangles, who had laughed at the awkwardness of a few maneuvers. John got the message but mentally decided he would still be prepared in case the crew's inability put the safety of the ship at risk.
However, in time, the sails were adjusted by the five sailors, aided by the stimulus of the captain’s oaths. The MACQUARIE stood out to sea on the larboard tack, under all her lower sails, topsails, topgallants, cross-jack, and jib. By and by, the other sails were hoisted. But in spite of this additional canvas the brig made very little way. Her rounded bow, the width of her hold, and her heavy stern, made her a bad sailor, the perfect type of a wooden shoe.
However, eventually, the sails were adjusted by the five sailors, encouraged by the captain’s curses. The MACQUARIE headed out to sea on the left tack, fully rigged with her lower sails, topsails, topgallants, cross-jack, and jib. Soon after, the other sails were raised. But despite this extra canvas, the brig made very little progress. Her rounded bow, wide hold, and heavy stern made her a poor sailor—the ideal example of a wooden shoe.
They had to make the best of it. Happily, five days, or, at most, six, would take them to Auckland, no matter how bad a sailor the MACQUARIE was.
They had to make the most of it. Luckily, it would take them five days, or at most six, to reach Auckland, no matter how poor a sailor the MACQUARIE was.
At seven o’clock in the evening the Australian coast and the lighthouse of the port of Eden had faded out of sight. The ship labored on the lumpy sea, and rolled heavily in the trough of the waves. The passengers below suffered a good deal from this motion. But it was impossible to stay on deck, as it rained violently. Thus they were condemned to close imprisonment.
At seven o'clock in the evening, the Australian coast and the lighthouse at the port of Eden had disappeared from view. The ship struggled on the choppy sea and swayed heavily in the trough of the waves. The passengers below were quite affected by this motion. However, staying on deck was not an option because it was raining heavily. So, they were stuck in close quarters.
Each one of them was lost in his own reflections. Words were few. Now and then Lady Helena and Miss Grant exchanged a few syllables. Glenarvan was restless; he went in and out, while the Major was impassive. John Mangles, followed by Robert, went on the poop from time to time, to look at the weather. Paganel sat in his corner, muttering vague and incoherent words.
Each of them was absorbed in their own thoughts. Words were scarce. Every now and then, Lady Helena and Miss Grant would exchange a few words. Glenarvan was fidgety; he kept coming and going, while the Major remained stoic. John Mangles, followed by Robert, occasionally went up on the poop to check the weather. Paganel sat in his corner, muttering unclear and disjointed phrases.
What was the worthy geographer thinking of? Of New Zealand, the country to which destiny was leading him. He went mentally over all his history; he called to mind the scenes of the past in that ill-omened country.
What was the geographer thinking about? About New Zealand, the place where fate was taking him. He mentally reviewed all his experiences; he remembered the events of the past in that cursed country.
But in all that history was there a fact, was there a solitary incident that could justify the discoverers of these islands in considering them as “a continent.” Could a modern geographer or a sailor concede to them such a designation. Paganel was always revolving the meaning of the document. He was possessed with the idea; it became his ruling thought. After Patagonia, after Australia, his imagination, allured by a name, flew to New Zealand. But in that direction, one point, and only one, stood in his way.
But throughout all that history, was there any fact, any single incident that could justify the discoverers of these islands in calling them “a continent”? Could a modern geographer or sailor agree to that label? Paganel kept thinking about the meaning of the document. He was obsessed with the idea; it consumed him. After Patagonia and Australia, his imagination, drawn by a name, moved on to New Zealand. But there was one thing, and only one, that stood in his way.
“Contin—contin,” he repeated, “that must mean continent!”
“Contin—contin,” he said again, “that has to mean continent!”
And then he resumed his mental retrospect of the navigators who made known to us these two great islands of the Southern Sea.
And then he continued to think back on the explorers who introduced us to these two amazing islands in the Southern Sea.
It was on the 13th of December, 1642, that the Dutch navigator Tasman, after discovering Van Diemen’s Land, sighted the unknown shores of New Zealand. He coasted along for several days, and on the 17th of December his ships penetrated into a large bay, which, terminating in a narrow strait, separated the two islands.
It was on December 13, 1642, that the Dutch navigator Tasman, after discovering Van Diemen’s Land, spotted the unknown shores of New Zealand. He sailed along the coast for several days, and on December 17, his ships entered a large bay that ended in a narrow strait, separating the two islands.
The northern island was called by the natives Ikana-Mani, a word which signifies the fish of Mani. The southern island was called Tavai-Pouna-Mou, “the whale that yields the green-stones.”
The northern island was called by the natives Ikana-Mani, a word that means the fish of Mani. The southern island was called Tavai-Pouna-Mou, “the whale that gives the greenstones.”
Abel Tasman sent his boats on shore, and they returned accompanied by two canoes and a noisy company of natives. These savages were middle height, of brown or yellow complexion, angular bones, harsh voices, and black hair, which was dressed in the Japanese manner, and surmounted by a tall white feather.
Abel Tasman sent his boats to shore, and they came back with two canoes and a loud group of locals. These people were of average height, with brown or yellow skin, angular features, rough voices, and black hair styled in a Japanese fashion, topped with a tall white feather.
This first interview between Europeans and aborigines seemed to promise amicable and lasting intercourse. But the next day, when one of Tasman’s boats was looking for an anchorage nearer to the land, seven canoes, manned by a great number of natives, attacked them fiercely. The boat capsized and filled. The quartermaster in command was instantly struck with a badly-sharpened spear, and fell into the sea. Of his six companions four were killed; the other two and the quartermaster were able to swim to the ships, and were picked up and recovered.
This first meeting between Europeans and the indigenous people seemed to offer the possibility of friendly and lasting relations. However, the next day, when one of Tasman’s boats was searching for a place to anchor closer to land, seven canoes filled with a large number of natives fiercely attacked them. The boat capsized and filled with water. The quartermaster in charge was immediately struck by a poorly sharpened spear and fell into the sea. Of his six companions, four were killed; the other two and the quartermaster managed to swim back to the ships, where they were rescued and recovered.
After this sad occurrence Tasman set sail, confining his revenge to giving the natives a few musket-shots, which probably did not reach them. He left this bay—which still bears the name of Massacre Bay—followed the western coast, and on the 5th of January, anchored near the northern-most point. Here the violence of the surf, as well as the unfriendly attitude of the natives, prevented his obtaining water, and he finally quitted these shores, giving them the name Staten-land or the Land of the States, in honor of the States-General.
After this tragic event, Tasman set sail, taking his revenge by firing a few musket shots at the natives, which probably didn't hit them. He left this bay—still known as Massacre Bay—traveled along the western coast, and on January 5th, anchored near the northernmost point. Here, the rough surf and the hostile attitude of the natives made it impossible for him to get water, so he ultimately left these shores, naming them Staten-land or the Land of the States, in honor of the States-General.
The Dutch navigator concluded that these islands were adjacent to the islands of the same name on the east of Terra del Fuego, at the southern point of the American continent. He thought he had found “the Great Southern Continent.”
The Dutch navigator decided that these islands were next to the islands with the same name located east of Tierra del Fuego, at the southern tip of the American continent. He believed he had discovered “the Great Southern Continent.”
“But,” said Paganel to himself, “what a seventeenth century sailor might call a ‘continent’ would never stand for one with a nineteenth century man. No such mistake can be supposed! No! there is something here that baffles me.”
"But," Paganel said to himself, "what a 17th-century sailor would call a 'continent' definitely wouldn't be the same for someone from the 19th century. There's no way that could be mistaken! No! There's something here that's confusing me."
CHAPTER III THE MARTYR-ROLL OF NAVIGATORS
ON the 31st of January, four days after starting, the MACQUARIE had not done two-thirds of the distance between Australia and New Zealand. Will Halley took very little heed to the working of the ship; he let things take their chance. He seldom showed himself, for which no one was sorry. No one would have complained if he had passed all his time in his cabin, but for the fact that the brutal captain was every day under the influence of gin or brandy. His sailors willingly followed his example, and no ship ever sailed more entirely depending on Providence than the MACQUARIE did from Twofold Bay.
On January 31st, four days after setting out, the MACQUARIE hadn’t covered two-thirds of the distance between Australia and New Zealand. Will Halley paid little attention to how the ship was operating; he let things unfold as they would. He rarely showed himself, and no one minded that. No one would have complained if he had spent all his time in his cabin, except for the fact that the harsh captain was under the influence of gin or brandy every day. His crew eagerly followed his lead, and no ship ever relied more entirely on fate than the MACQUARIE did after leaving Twofold Bay.
This unpardonable carelessness obliged John Mangles to keep a watchful eye ever open. Mulrady and Wilson more than once brought round the helm when some careless steering threatened to throw the ship on her beam-ends. Often Will Halley would interfere and abuse the two sailors with a volley of oaths. The latter, in their impatience, would have liked nothing better than to bind this drunken captain, and lower him into the hold, for the rest of the voyage. But John Mangles succeeded, after some persuasion, in calming their well-grounded indignation.
This unforgivable negligence forced John Mangles to stay alert all the time. Mulrady and Wilson repeatedly took over the helm whenever some careless steering nearly tipped the ship over. Often, Will Halley would step in and curse at the two sailors with a stream of insults. The sailors, frustrated, would have preferred to tie up this drunken captain and toss him into the hold for the rest of the trip. But after some convincing, John Mangles managed to calm their justified anger.
Still, the position of things filled him with anxiety; but, for fear of alarming Glenarvan, he spoke only to Paganel or the Major. McNabbs recommended the same course as Mulrady and Wilson.
Still, the situation made him anxious; but, not wanting to worry Glenarvan, he only spoke to Paganel or the Major. McNabbs suggested the same approach as Mulrady and Wilson.
“If you think it would be for the general good, John,” said McNabbs, “you should not hesitate to take the command of the vessel. When we get to Auckland the drunken imbecile can resume his command, and then he is at liberty to wreck himself, if that is his fancy.”
“If you think it would be for the common good, John,” said McNabbs, “you shouldn’t hesitate to take charge of the ship. When we reach Auckland, the drunken idiot can take back his command, and then he can ruin himself if that’s what he wants.”
“All that is very true, Mr. McNabbs, and if it is absolutely necessary I will do it. As long as we are on open sea, a careful lookout is enough; my sailors and I are watching on the poop; but when we get near the coast, I confess I shall be uneasy if Halley does not come to his senses.”
“All that is very true, Mr. McNabbs, and if it’s absolutely necessary, I’ll do it. As long as we’re on open water, keeping a careful lookout is enough; my crew and I are watching from the stern; but when we get closer to the coast, I must admit I’ll be worried if Halley doesn’t come to his senses.”
“Could not you direct the course?” asked Paganel.
“Could you not direct the course?” asked Paganel.
“That would be difficult,” replied John. “Would you believe it that there is not a chart on board?”
"That would be tough," John replied. "Can you believe there isn’t a map on board?"
“Is that so?”
“Really?”
“It is indeed. The MACQUARIE only does a coasting trade between Eden and Auckland, and Halley is so at home in these waters that he takes no observations.”
“It really is. The MACQUARIE only operates along the coast between Eden and Auckland, and Halley is so familiar with these waters that he doesn’t take any readings.”
“I suppose he thinks the ship knows the way, and steers herself.” “Ha! ha!” laughed John Mangles; “I do not believe in ships that steer themselves; and if Halley is drunk when we get among soundings, he will get us all into trouble.”
“I guess he thinks the ship knows the route and can steer itself.” “Ha! ha!” laughed John Mangles; “I don't believe in ships that steer themselves; and if Halley is drunk when we take soundings, he’ll get us all in trouble.”
“Let us hope,” said Paganel, “that the neighborhood of land will bring him to his senses.”
“Let’s hope,” said Paganel, “that being around land will bring him back to his senses.”
“Well, then,” said McNabbs, “if needs were, you could not sail the MACQUARIE into Auckland?”
"Well, then," McNabbs said, "if it came down to it, you couldn't sail the MACQUARIE into Auckland?"
“Without a chart of the coast, certainly not. The coast is very dangerous. It is a series of shallow fiords as irregular and capricious as the fiords of Norway. There are many reefs, and it requires great experience to avoid them. The strongest ship would be lost if her keel struck one of those rocks that are submerged but a few feet below the water.”
“Definitely not without a map of the coast. It’s very hazardous. The coast consists of a series of shallow inlets that are as unpredictable and uneven as the fjords in Norway. There are many reefs, and you need a lot of experience to navigate them safely. Even the toughest ship would be wrecked if its keel hit one of those rocks that sit just a few feet underwater.”
“In that case those on board would have to take refuge on the coast.”
“In that case, those on board would have to seek shelter on the coast.”
“If there was time.”
“If there were time.”
“A terrible extremity,” said Paganel, “for they are not hospitable shores, and the dangers of the land are not less appalling than the dangers of the sea.”
“A terrible situation,” said Paganel, “because they are not welcoming shores, and the dangers of the land are just as frightening as the dangers of the sea.”
“You refer to the Maories, Monsieur Paganel?” asked John Mangles.
“You're talking about the Maoris, right, Monsieur Paganel?” asked John Mangles.
“Yes, my friend. They have a bad name in these waters. It is not a matter of timid or brutish Australians, but of an intelligent and sanguinary race, cannibals greedy of human flesh, man-eaters to whom we should look in vain for pity.”
“Yes, my friend. They have a terrible reputation in these waters. It’s not about shy or violent Australians, but about a clever and bloodthirsty people, cannibals who crave human flesh, man-eaters who will not show us any mercy.”
“Well, then,” exclaimed the Major, “if Captain Grant had been wrecked on the coast of New Zealand, you would dissuade us from looking for him.”
“Well, then,” the Major exclaimed, “if Captain Grant had been shipwrecked on the coast of New Zealand, you’d try to talk us out of searching for him.”
“Oh, you might search on the coasts,” replied the geographer, “because you might find traces of the BRITANNIA, but not in the interior, for it would be perfectly useless. Every European who ventures into these fatal districts falls into the hands of the Maories, and a prisoner in the hands of the Maories is a lost man. I have urged my friends to cross the Pampas, to toil over the plains of Australia, but I will never lure them into the mazes of the New Zealand forest. May heaven be our guide, and keep us from ever being thrown within the power of those fierce natives!”
“Oh, you could look along the coasts,” replied the geographer, “because you might find evidence of the BRITANNIA, but not in the interior; that would be completely pointless. Every European who dares to enter these dangerous areas ends up in the hands of the Maories, and a prisoner of the Maories is as good as dead. I’ve urged my friends to cross the Pampas and trek across the plains of Australia, but I will never entice them into the tangled forests of New Zealand. May heaven guide us and keep us from ever falling into the control of those fierce natives!”
CHAPTER IV THE WRECK OF THE “MACQUARIE”
STILL this wearisome voyage dragged on. On the 2d of February, six days from starting, the MACQUARIE had not yet made a nearer acquaintance with the shores of Auckland. The wind was fair, nevertheless, and blew steadily from the southwest; but the currents were against the ship’s course, and she scarcely made any way. The heavy, lumpy sea strained her cordage, her timbers creaked, and she labored painfully in the trough of the sea. Her standing rigging was so out of order that it allowed play to the masts, which were violently shaken at every roll of the sea.
STILL, this exhausting journey dragged on. On February 2nd, six days after setting off, the MACQUARIE still hadn’t gotten any closer to the shores of Auckland. The wind was favorable, blowing steadily from the southwest, but the currents were against the ship’s path, and she hardly made any progress. The rough, choppy sea strained her ropes, her timbers creaked, and she struggled heavily in the waves. Her standing rigging was so messed up that it let the masts wobble, which were violently shaken with every roll of the sea.
Fortunately, Will Halley was not a man in a hurry, and did not use a press of canvas, or his masts would inevitably have come down. John Mangles therefore hoped that the wretched hull would reach port without accident; but it grieved him that his companions should have to suffer so much discomfort from the defective arrangements of the brig.
Fortunately, Will Halley wasn't rushed and didn't use a canvas press, or his masts would definitely have come down. John Mangles hoped that the miserable hull would make it to port without any issues; however, he felt bad that his friends had to endure so much discomfort because of the brig’s poor setup.
But neither Lady Helena nor Mary Grant uttered a word of complaint, though the continuous rain obliged them to stay below, where the want of air and the violence of the motion were painfully felt. They often braved the weather, and went on the poop till driven down again by the force of a sudden squall. Then they returned to the narrow space, fitter for stowing cargo than accommodating passengers, especially ladies.
But neither Lady Helena nor Mary Grant complained, even though the constant rain forced them to stay below deck, where the lack of fresh air and the rough movement felt extremely uncomfortable. They often ventured out and went on deck until a sudden squall forced them back inside. Then they returned to the cramped space, more suited for storing cargo than for accommodating passengers, especially women.
Their friends did their best to amuse them. Paganel tried to beguile the time with his stories, but it was a hopeless case. Their minds were so distracted at this change of route as to be quite unhinged. Much as they had been interested in his dissertation on the Pampas, or Australia, his lectures on New Zealand fell on cold and indifferent ears. Besides, they were going to this new and ill-reputed country without enthusiasm, without conviction, not even of their own free will, but solely at the bidding of destiny.
Their friends did everything they could to cheer them up. Paganel tried to entertain them with his stories, but it was a lost cause. Their thoughts were so scattered about this change in plans that they were completely unbalanced. Although they had been intrigued by his discussions about the Pampas or Australia, his talks on New Zealand were met with disinterest. Furthermore, they were heading to this new and poorly regarded country without any excitement, without any belief, not even by their own choice, but simply because of fate's command.
Of all the passengers on board the MACQUARIE, the most to be pitied was Lord Glenarvan. He was rarely to be seen below. He could not stay in one place. His nervous organization, highly excited, could not submit to confinement between four narrow bulkheads. All day long, even all night, regardless of the torrents of rain and the dashing waves, he stayed on the poop, sometimes leaning on the rail, sometimes walking to and fro in feverish agitation. His eyes wandered ceaselessly over the blank horizon. He scanned it eagerly during every short interval of clear weather. It seemed as if he sought to question the voiceless waters; he longed to tear away the veil of fog and vapor that obscured his view. He could not be resigned, and his features expressed the bitterness of his grief. He was a man of energy, till now happy and powerful, and deprived in a moment of power and happiness. John Mangles bore him company, and endured with him the inclemency of the weather. On this day Glenarvan looked more anxiously than ever at each point where a break in the mist enabled him to do so. John came up to him and said, “Your Lordship is looking out for land?”
Of all the passengers on the MACQUARIE, the one to be most pitied was Lord Glenarvan. He was rarely seen below deck. He couldn't stay in one place. His highly excitable nerves couldn't handle being confined within four narrow walls. All day long, even at night, regardless of the pouring rain and crashing waves, he stayed on the deck, sometimes leaning on the railing, sometimes pacing back and forth in a feverish state. His eyes constantly scanned the empty horizon. He eagerly searched it during every brief moment of clear weather. It seemed like he was trying to communicate with the silent waters; he desperately wanted to lift the fog and mist that blocked his view. He couldn't resign himself to the situation, and his face showed the pain of his sorrow. He was a man of action, once happy and powerful, suddenly stripped of his power and happiness in an instant. John Mangles kept him company, enduring the harsh weather alongside him. On this day, Glenarvan looked more anxiously than ever at each spot where a break in the mist allowed him to see. John approached him and said, “Your Lordship is looking out for land?”
Glenarvan shook his head in dissent.
Glenarvan shook his head in disagreement.
“And yet,” said the young captain, “you must be longing to quit this vessel. We ought to have seen the lights of Auckland thirty-six hours ago.”
“And yet,” said the young captain, “you must be eager to leave this ship. We should have spotted the lights of Auckland thirty-six hours ago.”
Glenarvan made no reply. He still looked, and for a moment his glass was pointed toward the horizon to windward.
Glenarvan didn't respond. He continued to look, and for a moment, he aimed his binoculars at the horizon in the direction of the wind.
“The land is not on that side, my Lord,” said John Mangles. “Look more to starboard.”
“The land isn’t over there, my Lord,” said John Mangles. “Look more to the right.”
“Why, John?” replied Glenarvan. “I am not looking for the land.”
“Why, John?” Glenarvan responded. “I’m not searching for the land.”
“What then, my Lord?”
"What now, my Lord?"
“My yacht! the DUNCAN,” said Glenarvan, hotly. “It must be here on these coasts, skimming these very waves, playing the vile part of a pirate! It is here, John; I am certain of it, on the track of vessels between Australia and New Zealand; and I have a presentiment that we shall fall in with her.”
“My yacht! the DUNCAN,” said Glenarvan, angrily. “It has to be here in these waters, gliding over these very waves, playing the despicable role of a pirate! It's here, John; I'm sure of it, somewhere along the route between Australia and New Zealand; and I have a feeling that we’ll come across her.”
“God keep us from such a meeting!”
“May God protect us from such a meeting!”
“Why, John?”
“Why, John?”
“Your Lordship forgets our position. What could we do in this ship if the DUNCAN gave chase. We could not even fly!”
“Your Lordship forgets where we stand. What could we do on this ship if the DUNCAN pursued us? We couldn't even take off!”
“Fly, John?”
"Travel, John?"
“Yes, my Lord; we should try in vain! We should be taken, delivered up to the mercy of those wretches, and Ben Joyce has shown us that he does not stop at a crime! Our lives would be worth little. We would fight to the death, of course, but after that! Think of Lady Glenarvan; think of Mary Grant!”
“Yes, my Lord; it would be pointless! We would be captured and handed over to those monsters, and Ben Joyce has proven that he doesn’t hesitate to commit a crime! Our lives wouldn’t mean much. We would fight to the death, of course, but then what? Think about Lady Glenarvan; think about Mary Grant!”
“Poor girls!” murmured Glenarvan. “John, my heart is broken; and sometimes despair nearly masters me. I feel as if fresh misfortunes awaited us, and that Heaven itself is against us. It terrifies me!”
“Poor girls!” Glenarvan said softly. “John, my heart is shattered; and sometimes despair almost overwhelms me. I feel like new misfortunes are coming our way, and that even Heaven is against us. It frightens me!”
“You, my Lord?”
"You, my Lord?"
“Not for myself, John, but for those I love—whom you love, also.”
“Not for me, John, but for the people I care about—who you care about too.”
“Keep up your heart, my Lord,” said the young captain. “We must not look out for troubles. The MACQUARIE sails badly, but she makes some way nevertheless. Will Halley is a brute, but I am keeping my eyes open, and if the coast looks dangerous, I will put the ship’s head to sea again. So that, on that score, there is little or no danger. But as to getting alongside the DUNCAN! God forbid! And if your Lordship is bent on looking out for her, let it be in order to give her a wide berth.”
“Stay strong, my Lord,” said the young captain. “We shouldn’t focus on problems. The MACQUARIE doesn’t sail well, but it’s still moving forward. Will Halley is a jerk, but I’m staying alert, and if the coast looks risky, I’ll turn the ship back to sea. So, in that regard, there’s little to worry about. But as for getting close to the DUNCAN! God forbid! And if you’re determined to look for her, let it be to avoid her entirely.”
John Mangles was right. An encounter with the DUNCAN would have been fatal to the MACQUARIE. There was every reason to fear such an engagement in these narrow seas, in which pirates could ply their trade without risk. However, for that day at least, the yacht did not appear, and the sixth night from their departure from Twofold Bay came, without the fears of John Mangles being realized.
John Mangles was correct. An encounter with the DUNCAN would have been deadly for the MACQUARIE. There was every reason to worry about such a fight in these narrow waters, where pirates could operate without danger. However, at least for that day, the yacht did not show up, and the sixth night since they left Twofold Bay arrived, with John Mangles' fears not coming true.
But that night was to be a night of terrors. Darkness came on almost suddenly at seven o’clock in the evening; the sky was very threatening. The sailor instinct rose above the stupefaction of the drunkard and roused Will Halley. He left his cabin, rubbed his eyes, and shook his great red head. Then he drew a great deep breath of air, as other people swallow a draught of water to revive themselves. He examined the masts. The wind freshened, and veering a point more to the westward, blew right for the New Zealand coast.
But that night was going to be a night of terrors. Darkness fell almost suddenly at seven o'clock in the evening; the sky looked really ominous. The sailor's instincts kicked in, breaking through the haze of the drunkard and waking Will Halley. He stepped out of his cabin, rubbed his eyes, and shook his large red head. Then he took a deep breath of air, like others do when they drink water to wake up. He checked the masts. The wind picked up, shifting a bit more to the west, and blew straight toward the New Zealand coast.
[illustration omitted] [page intentionally blank]
[illustration omitted] [page intentionally blank]
Will Halley, with many an oath, called his men, tightened his topmast cordage, and made all snug for the night. John Mangles approved in silence. He had ceased to hold any conversation with the coarse seaman; but neither Glenarvan nor he left the poop. Two hours after a stiff breeze came on. Will Halley took in the lower reef of his topsails. The maneuver would have been a difficult job for five men if the MACQUARIE had not carried a double yard, on the American plan. In fact, they had only to lower the upper yard to bring the sail to its smallest size.
Will Halley, swearing a lot, called his crew, tightened the ropes on his topmast, and secured everything for the night. John Mangles silently approved. He had stopped talking to the rough sailor; however, neither he nor Glenarvan left the deck. Two hours later, a strong wind picked up. Will Halley took in the lower reef of his topsails. It would have been a tough task for five men if the MACQUARIE hadn’t had a double yard, designed in the American style. In fact, they only had to lower the upper yard to make the sail as small as possible.
Two hours passed; the sea was rising. The MACQUARIE was struck so violently that it seemed as if her keel had touched the rocks. There was no real danger, but the heavy vessel did not rise easily to the waves. By and by the returning waves would break over the deck in great masses. The boat was washed out of the davits by the force of the water.
Two hours went by; the sea was getting rough. The MACQUARIE was hit so hard that it felt like her keel had hit the rocks. There wasn't really any danger, but the heavy ship didn't respond well to the waves. Eventually, the returning waves would crash over the deck in large amounts. The boat was pulled out of the davits by the force of the water.
John Mangles never released his watch. Any other ship would have made no account of a sea like this; but with this heavy craft there was a danger of sinking by the bow, for the deck was filled at every lurch, and the sheet of water not being able to escape quickly by the scuppers, might submerge the ship. It would have been the wisest plan to prepare for emergency by knocking out the bulwarks with an ax to facilitate their escape, but Halley refused to take this precaution.
John Mangles kept an eye on his watch the whole time. Any other ship wouldn't have thought twice about a sea like this, but with this heavy vessel, there was a real risk of sinking from the bow. With every lurch, the deck filled up, and because the water couldn't drain out quickly through the scuppers, it might end up drowning the ship. It would have been smartest to prepare for an emergency by cutting down the bulwarks with an axe to help the water escape, but Halley wouldn’t agree to take that precaution.
But a greater danger was at hand, and one that it was too late to prevent. About half-past eleven, John Mangles and Wilson, who stayed on deck throughout the gale, were suddenly struck by an unusual noise. Their nautical instincts awoke. John seized the sailor’s hand. “The reef!” said he.
But a bigger danger was looming, and it was too late to stop it. Around 11:30, John Mangles and Wilson, who had stayed on deck during the storm, were suddenly hit by an unusual noise. Their instincts kicked in. John grabbed the sailor’s hand. “The reef!” he said.
“Yes,” said Wilson; “the waves breaking on the bank.”
“Yes,” Wilson said, “the waves crashing on the shore.”
“Not more than two cables’ length off?”
“Isn’t it more than two cable lengths away?”
“At farthest? The land is there!”
“At the farthest? The land is right there!”
John leaned over the side, gazed into the dark water, and called out, “Wilson, the lead!”
John leaned over the edge, looked into the dark water, and shouted, “Wilson, the lead!”
The master, posted forward, seemed to have no idea of his position. Wilson seized the lead-line, sprang to the fore-chains, and threw the lead; the rope ran out between his fingers, at the third knot the lead stopped.
The captain in front seemed completely unaware of his situation. Wilson grabbed the lead-line, jumped to the fore-chains, and cast the lead; the rope slipped through his fingers, and at the third knot, the lead came to a stop.
“Three fathoms,” cried Wilson.
“Three fathoms,” shouted Wilson.
“Captain,” said John, running to Will Halley, “we are on the breakers.”
“Captain,” John shouted as he ran to Will Halley, “we're on the rocks.”
Whether or not he saw Halley shrug his shoulders is of very little importance. But he hurried to the helm, put it hard down, while Wilson, leaving the line, hauled at the main-topsail brace to bring the ship to the wind. The man who was steering received a smart blow, and could not comprehend the sudden attack.
Whether or not he noticed Halley shrug his shoulders doesn't really matter. But he rushed to the helm, pushed it hard down, while Wilson, leaving the line, pulled at the main-topsail brace to angle the ship into the wind. The guy steering got hit hard and couldn't understand the sudden assault.
“Let her go! Let her go!” said the young captain, working her to get away from the reefs.
“Let her go! Let her go!” shouted the young captain, trying to get her away from the reefs.
For half a minute the starboard side of the vessel was turned toward them, and, in spite of the darkness, John could discern a line of foam which moaned and gleamed four fathoms away.
For thirty seconds, the right side of the ship was facing them, and, despite the darkness, John could make out a line of foam that moaned and shimmered four fathoms away.
At this moment, Will Halley, comprehending the danger, lost his head. His sailors, hardly sobered, could not understand his orders. His incoherent words, his contradictory orders showed that this stupid sot had quite lost his self-control. He was taken by surprise at the proximity of the land, which was eight miles off, when he thought it was thirty or forty miles off. The currents had thrown him out of his habitual track, and this miserable slave of routine was left quite helpless.
At that moment, Will Halley, realizing the danger, lost his cool. His sailors, barely sober, couldn’t grasp his orders. His jumbled words and mixed messages made it clear that this foolish drunk had completely lost his grip. He was caught off guard by how close the land was, only eight miles away when he thought it was thirty or forty miles distant. The currents had pulled him off his usual course, and this pathetic creature of habit was left completely powerless.
Still the prompt maneuver of John Mangles succeeded in keeping the MACQUARIE off the breakers. But John did not know the position. For anything he could tell he was girdled in by reefs. The wind blew them strongly toward the east, and at every lurch they might strike.
Still, John Mangles' quick maneuver successfully kept the MACQUARIE off the rocks. But John didn’t know where they were. For all he could tell, they were surrounded by reefs. The wind was pushing them strongly toward the east, and with every lurch, they could hit something.
In fact, the sound of the reef soon redoubled on the starboard side of the bow. They must luff again. John put the helm down again and brought her up. The breakers increased under the bow of the vessel, and it was necessary to put her about to regain the open sea. Whether she would be able to go about under shortened sail, and badly trimmed as she was, remained to be seen, but there was nothing else to be done.
In fact, the sound of the reef quickly grew louder on the right side of the bow. They had to turn into the wind again. John lowered the helm again and steered her upwards. The waves crashed harder under the front of the boat, and they needed to turn around to get back to open water. It was uncertain whether she could turn with less sail up and in such poor shape, but there was no other option.
“Helm hard down!” cried Mangles to Wilson.
“Turn the helm hard down!” shouted Mangles to Wilson.
The MACQUARIE began to near the new line of reefs: in another moment the waves were seen dashing on submerged rocks. It was a moment of inexpressible anxiety. The spray was luminous, just as if lit up by sudden phosphorescence. The roaring of the sea was like the voice of those ancient Tritons whom poetic mythology endowed with life. Wilson and Mulrady hung to the wheel with all their weight. Some cordage gave way, which endangered the foremast. It seemed doubtful whether she would go about without further damage.
The MACQUARIE was getting closer to the new line of reefs; in just a moment, we could see the waves crashing against submerged rocks. It was a time of intense worry. The spray shimmered, almost as if it was glowing with unexpected brightness. The sound of the sea roared like the voices of those mythical Tritons that poetry brought to life. Wilson and Mulrady clung to the wheel with all their strength. Some ropes snapped, putting the foremast at risk. It was uncertain whether the ship could change direction without sustaining more damage.
Suddenly the wind fell and the vessel fell back, and turning her became hopeless. A high wave caught her below, carried her up on the reefs, where she struck with great violence. The foremast came down with all the fore-rigging. The brig rose twice, and then lay motionless, heeled over on her port side at an angle of 30 degrees.
Suddenly, the wind died down, and the ship started to drift back, making turning her impossible. A huge wave hit her from below, lifting her onto the reefs, where she slammed down with intense force. The foremast collapsed along with all the rigging in the front. The brig surged up twice, then lay still, tilted over on her left side at an angle of 30 degrees.
The glass of the skylight had been smashed to powder. The passengers rushed out. But the waves were sweeping the deck from one side to the other, and they dared not stay there. John Mangles, knowing the ship to be safely lodged in the sand, begged them to return to their own quarters.
The skylight glass was shattered into tiny pieces. The passengers hurried out. But the waves were crashing over the deck back and forth, and they were afraid to stay there. John Mangles, knowing the ship was securely stuck in the sand, urged them to go back to their cabins.
“Tell me the truth, John,” said Glenarvan, calmly.
“Tell me the truth, John,” Glenarvan said calmly.
“The truth, my Lord, is that we are at a standstill. Whether the sea will devour us is another question; but we have time to consider.”
“The truth, my Lord, is that we are stuck. Whether the sea will swallow us is another issue; but we have time to think it over.”
“It is midnight?”
"Is it midnight?"
“Yes, my Lord, and we must wait for the day.”
“Yes, my Lord, and we need to wait for the day.”
“Can we not lower the boat?”
"Can we lower the boat?"
“In such a sea, and in the dark, it is impossible. And, besides, where could we land?”
“In a sea like this, and in the dark, it's impossible. Plus, where could we even land?”
“Well, then, John, let us wait for the daylight.”
“Well, John, let's wait for the day.”
Will Halley, however, ran up and down the deck like a maniac. His crew had recovered their senses, and now broached a cask of brandy, and began to drink. John foresaw that if they became drunk, terrible scenes would ensue.
Will Halley, however, was running up and down the deck like a crazy person. His crew had regained their composure and now opened a cask of brandy and started to drink. John realized that if they got drunk, terrible things would happen.
The captain could not be relied on to restrain them; the wretched man tore his hair and wrung his hands. His whole thought was his uninsured cargo. “I am ruined! I am lost!” he would cry, as he ran from side to side.
The captain couldn't be counted on to control them; the miserable man ripped his hair out and wrung his hands. All he could think about was his uninsured cargo. “I’m ruined! I’m lost!” he would shout as he ran back and forth.
John Mangles did not waste time on him. He armed his two companions, and they all held themselves in readiness to resist the sailors who were filling themselves with brandy, seasoned with fearful blasphemies.
John Mangles didn’t waste any time on him. He armed his two companions, and they all prepared to fight back against the sailors who were getting drunk on brandy, mixed with harsh curses.
“The first of these wretches that comes near the ladies, I will shoot like a dog,” said the Major, quietly.
“The first of these losers that gets close to the ladies, I’ll shoot like a dog,” said the Major, calmly.
The sailors doubtless saw that the passengers were determined to hold their own, for after some attempts at pillage, they disappeared to their own quarters. John Mangles thought no more of these drunken rascals, and waited impatiently for the dawn. The ship was now quite motionless. The sea became gradually calmer. The wind fell. The hull would be safe for some hours yet. At daybreak John examined the landing-place; the yawl, which was now their only boat, would carry the crew and the passengers. It would have to make three trips at least, as it could only hold four.
The sailors could see that the passengers were determined to stand their ground, so after a few attempts to loot, they went back to their own quarters. John Mangles didn’t think much more about those drunken troublemakers and waited impatiently for dawn. The ship was completely still now. The sea was getting calmer. The wind had died down. The hull would be safe for a few more hours. At daybreak, John checked the landing area; the yawl, which was now their only boat, would carry the crew and the passengers. It would need to make at least three trips since it could only hold four people at a time.
As he was leaning on the skylight, thinking over the situation of affairs, John Mangles could hear the roaring of the surf. He tried to pierce the darkness. He wondered how far it was to the land they longed for no less than dreaded. A reef sometimes extends for miles along the coast. Could their fragile boat hold out on a long trip?
As he leaned on the skylight, pondering the situation, John Mangles could hear the sound of the crashing waves. He tried to see through the darkness. He wondered how far away the land was that they both longed for and feared. A reef can stretch for miles along the coast. Would their fragile boat survive a long journey?
While John was thus ruminating and longing for a little light from the murky sky, the ladies, relying on him, slept in their little berths. The stationary attitude of the brig insured them some hours of repose. Glenarvan, John, and their companions, no longer disturbed by the noise of the crew who were now wrapped in a drunken sleep, also refreshed themselves by a short nap, and a profound silence reigned on board the ship, herself slumbering peacefully on her bed of sand.
While John was deep in thought, hoping for a bit of light from the dark sky, the ladies, depending on him, slept in their small beds. The stillness of the brig ensured they could rest for a few hours. Glenarvan, John, and their friends, no longer bothered by the crew's noise as they were now in a drunken sleep, also took a short nap, and a deep silence filled the ship, which lay peacefully on its sandy bed.
Toward four o’clock the first peep of dawn appeared in the east. The clouds were dimly defined by the pale light of the dawn. John returned to the deck. The horizon was veiled with a curtain of fog. Some faint outlines were shadowed in the mist, but at a considerable height. A slight swell still agitated the sea, but the more distant waves were undistinguishable in a motionless bank of clouds.
Around four o’clock, the first hint of dawn emerged in the east. The clouds were subtly outlined by the soft light of early morning. John walked back to the deck. The horizon was shrouded in a thick layer of fog. Some faint shapes could be seen through the mist, but they were quite high up. There was a gentle swell still stirring the sea, but the farther waves were hidden in a still mass of clouds.
John waited. The light gradually increased, and the horizon acquired a rosy hue. The curtain slowly rose over the vast watery stage. Black reefs rose out of the waters. Then a line became defined on the belt of foam, and there gleamed a luminous beacon-light point behind a low hill which concealed the scarcely risen sun. There was the land, less than nine miles off.
John waited. The light gradually got brighter, and the horizon turned a rosy color. The curtain slowly lifted over the vast watery stage. Dark reefs emerged from the water. Then a line appeared on the frothy border, and a bright beacon light shone behind a low hill that hid the barely risen sun. There was land, less than nine miles away.
“Land ho!” cried John Mangles.
“Land ahead!” shouted John Mangles.
His companions, aroused by his voice, rushed to the poop, and gazed in silence at the coast whose outline lay on the horizon. Whether they were received as friends or enemies, that coast must be their refuge.
His friends, alerted by his voice, hurried to the back of the ship and quietly stared at the coastline that stood on the horizon. Regardless of whether they were welcomed as allies or foes, that shoreline had to be their safe haven.
“Where is Halley?” asked Glenarvan.
“Where's Halley?” asked Glenarvan.
“I do not know, my Lord,” replied John Mangles.
“I don’t know, my Lord,” replied John Mangles.
“Where are the sailors?”
“Where are the sailors at?”
“Invisible, like himself.”
“Invisible, like him.”
“Probably dead drunk, like himself,” added McNabbs.
“Probably completely wasted, like he is,” added McNabbs.
“Let them be called,” said Glenarvan, “we cannot leave them on the ship.”
“Call them,” said Glenarvan, “we can’t leave them on the ship.”
Mulrady and Wilson went down to the forecastle, and two minutes after they returned. The place was empty! They then searched between decks, and then the hold. But found no trace of Will Halley nor his sailors.
Mulrady and Wilson went down to the forecastle, and two minutes later they came back. The place was empty! They then searched between the decks and the hold, but found no sign of Will Halley or his sailors.
“What! no one?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“What! No one?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Could they have fallen into the sea?” asked Paganel.
“Could they have fallen into the ocean?” asked Paganel.
“Everything is possible,” replied John Mangles, who was getting uneasy. Then turning toward the stern: “To the boat!” said he.
“Everything is possible,” replied John Mangles, who was starting to feel uneasy. Then turning toward the back: “To the boat!” he said.
Wilson and Mulrady followed to launch the yawl. The yawl was gone.
Wilson and Mulrady went to launch the yawl. The yawl was missing.
CHAPTER V CANNIBALS
WILL HALLEY and his crew, taking advantage of the darkness of night and the sleep of the passengers, had fled with the only boat. There could be no doubt about it. The captain, whose duty would have kept him on board to the last, had been the first to quit the ship.
WILL HALLEY and his crew, using the cover of night and the passengers' sleep, had escaped with the only boat. There was no doubt about it. The captain, who should have stayed on board until the end, was the first to leave the ship.
“The cowards are off!” said John Mangles. “Well, my Lord, so much the better. They have spared us some trying scenes.”
“The cowards are gone!” said John Mangles. “Well, my Lord, that’s a relief. They’ve saved us from some difficult moments.”
“No doubt,” said Glenarvan; “besides we have a captain of our own, and courageous, if unskillful sailors, your companions, John. Say the word, and we are ready to obey.”
“No doubt,” said Glenarvan; “besides, we have our own captain and brave, if inexperienced, sailors, your friends, John. Just say the word, and we’re ready to follow your lead.”
The Major, Paganel, Robert, Wilson, Mulrady, Olbinett himself, applauded Glenarvan’s speech, and ranged themselves on the deck, ready to execute their captain’s orders.
The Major, Paganel, Robert, Wilson, Mulrady, and Olbinett all cheered for Glenarvan’s speech and lined up on the deck, ready to carry out their captain’s orders.
“What is to be done?” asked Glenarvan.
“What should we do?” asked Glenarvan.
It was evident that raising the MACQUARIE was out of the question, and no less evident that she must be abandoned. Waiting on board for succor that might never come, would have been imprudence and folly. Before the arrival of a chance vessel on the scene, the MACQUARIE would have broken up. The next storm, or even a high tide raised by the winds from seaward, would roll it on the sands, break it up into splinters, and scatter them on the shore. John was anxious to reach the land before this inevitable consummation.
It was clear that salvaging the MACQUARIE was not an option, and it was equally clear that she had to be abandoned. Staying on board while waiting for help that might never arrive would have been unwise and foolish. Before a passing ship arrived, the MACQUARIE would be in pieces. The next storm, or even a high tide driven by winds from the sea, would toss it onto the sand, break it apart into fragments, and scatter them across the shore. John was eager to reach land before this unavoidable outcome.
He proposed to construct a raft strong enough to carry the passengers, and a sufficient quantity of provisions, to the coast of New Zealand.
He suggested building a raft that was strong enough to carry the passengers and enough supplies to reach the coast of New Zealand.
There was no time for discussion, the work was to be set about at once, and they had made considerable progress when night came and interrupted them.
There was no time for discussion; they needed to start right away, and they had made a lot of progress by the time night came and interrupted them.
Toward eight o’clock in the evening, after supper, while Lady Helena and Mary Grant slept in their berths, Paganel and his friends conversed on serious matters as they walked up and down the deck. Robert had chosen to stay with them. The brave boy listened with all his ears, ready to be of use, and willing to enlist in any perilous adventure.
Toward eight o’clock in the evening, after dinner, while Lady Helena and Mary Grant slept in their cabins, Paganel and his friends talked about serious topics as they walked back and forth on the deck. Robert had decided to stay with them. The brave boy listened intently, eager to help and ready to take part in any dangerous adventure.
Paganel asked John Mangles whether the raft could not follow the coast as far as Auckland, instead of landing its freight on the coast.
Paganel asked John Mangles if the raft could follow the coast all the way to Auckland, instead of unloading its cargo on the shore.
John replied that the voyage was impossible with such an unmanageable craft.
John replied that the trip was impossible with such an unmanageable boat.
“And what we cannot do on a raft could have been done in the ship’s boat?”
“And what we can’t do on a raft could have been done in the ship’s boat?”
“Yes, if necessary,” answered John; “but we should have had to sail by day and anchor at night.”
“Yes, if we need to,” John replied; “but we would have had to sail during the day and anchor at night.”
“Then those wretches who abandoned us—”
“Then those miserable people who left us—”
“Oh, as for them,” said John, “they were drunk, and in the darkness I have no doubt they paid for their cowardice with their lives.”
“Oh, as for them,” said John, “they were drunk, and in the dark I’m sure they paid for their cowardice with their lives.”
“So much the worse for them and for us,” replied Paganel; “for the boat would have been very useful to us.”
“So much the worse for them and for us,” replied Paganel; “because the boat would have been really helpful to us.”
“What would you have, Paganel? The raft will bring us to the shore,” said Glenarvan.
“What do you want, Paganel? The raft will get us to the shore,” said Glenarvan.
“The very thing I would fain avoid,” exclaimed the geographer.
“The very thing I would love to avoid,” exclaimed the geographer.
“What! do you think another twenty miles after crossing the Pampas and Australia, can have any terrors for us, hardened as we are to fatigue?”
“What! Do you really think another twenty miles after crossing the Pampas and Australia can scare us, toughened as we are to exhaustion?”
“My friend,” replied Paganel, “I do not call in question our courage nor the bravery of our friends. Twenty miles would be nothing in any other country than New Zealand. You cannot suspect me of faint-heartedness. I was the first to persuade you to cross America and Australia. But here the case is different. I repeat, anything is better than to venture into this treacherous country.”
“My friend,” replied Paganel, “I’m not doubting our courage or our friends’ bravery. Twenty miles wouldn’t be a big deal in any country other than New Zealand. You can’t accuse me of being faint-hearted. I was the first to convince you to cross America and Australia. But here, it’s a different story. I say again, anything is better than risking a journey into this dangerous land.”
“Anything is better, in my judgment,” said John Mangles, “than braving certain destruction on a stranded vessel.”
“Anything is better, in my opinion,” said John Mangles, “than facing certain death on a stranded ship.”
“What is there so formidable in New Zealand?” asked Glenarvan.
“What’s so intimidating about New Zealand?” asked Glenarvan.
“The savages,” said Paganel.
“The savages,” Paganel said.
“The savages!” repeated Glenarvan. “Can we not avoid them by keeping to the shore? But in any case what have we to fear? Surely, two resolute and well-armed Europeans need not give a thought to an attack by a handful of miserable beings.”
“The savages!” repeated Glenarvan. “Can we avoid them by staying close to the shore? But either way, what do we have to be afraid of? Surely, two determined and well-armed Europeans shouldn’t worry about an attack from a small group of miserable beings.”
Paganel shook his head. “In this case there are no miserable beings to contend with. The New Zealanders are a powerful race, who are rebelling against English rule, who fight the invaders, and often beat them, and who always eat them!”
Paganel shook his head. “In this case, there are no miserable beings to deal with. The New Zealanders are a strong people who are resisting English rule, fighting off the invaders, often defeating them, and always eating them!”
“Cannibals!” exclaimed Robert, “cannibals?” Then they heard him whisper, “My sister! Lady Helena.”
“Cannibals!” Robert exclaimed, “cannibals?” Then they heard him whisper, “My sister! Lady Helena.”
“Don’t frighten yourself, my boy,” said Glenarvan; “our friend Paganel exaggerates.”
“Don’t scare yourself, my boy,” said Glenarvan; “our friend Paganel is exaggerating.”
“Far from it,” rejoined Paganel. “Robert has shown himself a man, and I treat him as such, in not concealing the truth from him.”
“Not at all,” replied Paganel. “Robert has proven himself to be a man, and I treat him as one by not hiding the truth from him.”
Paganel was right. Cannibalism has become a fixed fact in New Zealand, as it is in the Fijis and in Torres Strait. Superstition is no doubt partly to blame, but cannibalism is certainly owing to the fact that there are moments when game is scarce and hunger great. The savages began by eating human flesh to appease the demands of an appetite rarely satiated; subsequently the priests regulated and satisfied the monstrous custom. What was a meal, was raised to the dignity of a ceremony, that is all.
Paganel was correct. Cannibalism has become a reality in New Zealand, just like in Fiji and Torres Strait. Superstition is definitely part of the problem, but cannibalism also arises from times when game is scarce and hunger is intense. The tribes began by consuming human flesh to satisfy an appetite that was rarely filled; later, the priests controlled and legitimized this gruesome practice. What started as a meal was elevated to the status of a ceremony, that’s all.
Besides, in the eyes of the Maories, nothing is more natural than to eat one another. The missionaries often questioned them about cannibalism. They asked them why they devoured their brothers; to which the chiefs made answer that fish eat fish, dogs eat men, men eat dogs, and dogs eat one another. Even the Maori mythology has a legend of a god who ate another god; and with such a precedent, who could resist eating his neighbor?
Besides, in the eyes of the Maoris, nothing feels more natural than eating one another. The missionaries often asked them about cannibalism. They inquired why they would consume their own kind; to which the chiefs replied that fish eat fish, dogs eat people, people eat dogs, and dogs eat each other. Even Maori mythology has a story about a god who ate another god; and with such a precedent, who could blame someone for eating their neighbor?
Another strange notion is, that in eating a dead enemy they consume his spiritual being, and so inherit his soul, his strength and his bravery, which they hold are specially lodged in the brain. This accounts for the fact that the brain figures in their feasts as the choicest delicacy, and is offered to the most honored guest.
Another odd belief is that by eating a dead enemy, they take in his spiritual essence, thereby inheriting his soul, strength, and bravery, which they believe are especially stored in the brain. This explains why the brain is featured at their feasts as the most prized delicacy and is offered to the most esteemed guest.
But while he acknowledged all this, Paganel maintained, not without a show of reason, that sensuality, and especially hunger, was the first cause of cannibalism among the New Zealanders, and not only among the Polynesian races, but also among the savages of Europe.
But while he recognized all this, Paganel argued, not without a basis for his thoughts, that sensual desires, particularly hunger, were the primary reasons for cannibalism among the New Zealanders, and not just within the Polynesian groups, but also among the primitive tribes of Europe.
“For,” said he, “cannibalism was long prevalent among the ancestors of the most civilized people, and especially (if the Major will not think me personal) among the Scotch.”
“For,” he said, “cannibalism was common among the ancestors of the most civilized people, and especially (if the Major won’t take it personally) among the Scottish.”
“Really,” said McNabbs.
“Seriously,” said McNabbs.
“Yes, Major,” replied Paganel. “If you read certain passages of Saint Jerome, on the Atticoli of Scotland, you will see what he thought of your forefathers. And without going so far back as historic times, under the reign of Elizabeth, when Shakespeare was dreaming out his Shy-lock, a Scotch bandit, Sawney Bean, was executed for the crime of cannibalism. Was it religion that prompted him to cannibalism? No! it was hunger.”
“Yes, Major,” Paganel replied. “If you read certain passages from Saint Jerome about the Atticoli of Scotland, you'll see what he thought of your ancestors. And if you look beyond historic times, during Elizabeth's reign when Shakespeare was creating his Shylock, a Scottish outlaw named Sawney Bean was executed for cannibalism. Was it religion that drove him to cannibalism? No! It was hunger.”
“Hunger?” said John Mangles.
"Hunger?" asked John Mangles.
“Hunger!” repeated Paganel; “but, above all, the necessity of the carnivorous appetite of replacing the bodily waste, by the azote contained in animal tissues. The lungs are satisfied with a provision of vegetable and farinaceous food. But to be strong and active the body must be supplied with those plastic elements that renew the muscles. Until the Maories become members of the Vegetarian Association they will eat meat, and human flesh as meat.”
“Hunger!” echoed Paganel; “but, more importantly, the need to satisfy the carnivorous urge to replace bodily waste with the nitrogen found in animal tissues. The lungs can get by on vegetable and starchy foods. However, to be strong and active, the body needs those essential components that replenish the muscles. Until the Maoris join the Vegetarian Association, they will continue to eat meat, including human flesh.”
“Why not animal flesh?” asked Glenarvan.
“Why not meat?” asked Glenarvan.
“Because they have no animals,” replied Paganel; “and that ought to be taken into account, not to extenuate, but to explain, their cannibal habits. Quadrupeds, and even birds, are rare on these inhospitable shores, so that the Maories have always eaten human flesh. There are even ‘man-eating seasons,’ as there are in civilized countries hunting seasons. Then begin the great wars, and whole tribes are served up on the tables of the conquerors.”
“Because they have no animals,” replied Paganel; “and that should be considered, not to excuse, but to explain their cannibal habits. Four-legged animals, and even birds, are scarce on these harsh shores, so the Maories have always resorted to eating human flesh. There are even ‘man-eating seasons,’ just like hunting seasons in more civilized countries. That’s when the big wars start, and entire tribes are laid out on the tables of the victors.”
“Well, then,” said Glenarvan, “according to your mode of reasoning, Paganel, cannibalism will not cease in New Zealand until her pastures teem with sheep and oxen.”
“Well, then,” said Glenarvan, “according to your way of thinking, Paganel, cannibalism won’t stop in New Zealand until its pastures are full of sheep and cattle.”
“Evidently, my dear Lord; and even then it will take years to wean them from Maori flesh, which they prefer to all others; for the children will still have a relish for what their fathers so highly appreciated. According to them it tastes like pork, with even more flavor. As to white men’s flesh, they do not like it so well, because the whites eat salt with their food, which gives a peculiar flavor, not to the taste of connoisseurs.”
“Clearly, my dear Lord; and even then it will take years to get them away from eating Maori flesh, which they prefer above all else; because the kids will still crave what their fathers enjoyed so much. They say it tastes like pork, but with even more flavor. As for white people's flesh, they don’t like it as much because white people use salt in their food, which gives it a distinct taste that isn’t appealing to true connoisseurs.”
“They are dainty,” said the Major. “But, black or white, do they eat it raw, or cook it?”
“They're delicate,” said the Major. “But whether black or white, do they eat it raw or cooked?”
“Why, what is that to you, Mr. McNabbs?” cried Robert.
“Why does that matter to you, Mr. McNabbs?” Robert shouted.
“What is that to me!” exclaimed the Major, earnestly. “If I am to make a meal for a cannibal, I should prefer being cooked.”
“What does that matter to me!” the Major exclaimed earnestly. “If I have to prepare a meal for a cannibal, I’d rather be the one getting cooked.”
“Why?”
“Why?”
“Because then I should be sure of not being eaten alive!”
“Because then I can be sure I won't be eaten alive!”
“Very good. Major,” said Paganel; “but suppose they cooked you alive?”
“Sounds good. Major,” said Paganel; “but what if they cooked you alive?”
“The fact is,” answered the Major, “I would not give half-a-crown for the choice!”
“The fact is,” replied the Major, “I wouldn’t pay half a crown for the choice!”
“Well, McNabbs, if it will comfort you—you may as well be told—the New Zealanders do not eat flesh without cooking or smoking it. They are very clever and experienced in cookery. For my part, I very much dislike the idea of being eaten! The idea of ending one’s life in the maw of a savage! bah!”
"Well, McNabbs, if it makes you feel better—you might as well know—the New Zealanders don’t eat meat without cooking or smoking it. They are quite skilled and experienced in cooking. As for me, I absolutely hate the idea of being eaten! The thought of ending my life in the jaws of a savage! Ugh!"
“The conclusion of all,” said John Mangles, “is that we must not fall into their hands. Let us hope that one day Christianity will abolish all these monstrous customs.”
"The bottom line," said John Mangles, "is that we must not let them capture us. Let's hope that one day Christianity will put an end to all these horrible traditions."
“Yes, we must hope so,” replied Paganel; “but, believe me, a savage who has tasted human flesh, is not easily persuaded to forego it. I will relate two facts which prove it.”
“Yes, we must hope so,” replied Paganel; “but trust me, a savage who has tasted human flesh is not easily convinced to give it up. I'll share two facts that demonstrate this.”
“By all means let us have the facts, Paganel,” said Glenarvan.
“Of course, let's hear the facts, Paganel,” said Glenarvan.
“The first is narrated in the chronicles of the Jesuit Society in Brazil. A Portuguese missionary was one day visiting an old Brazilian woman who was very ill. She had only a few days to live. The Jesuit inculcated the truths of religion, which the dying woman accepted, without objection. Then having attended to her spiritual wants, he bethought himself of her bodily needs, and offered her some European delicacies. ‘Alas,’ said she, ‘my digestion is too weak to bear any kind of food. There is only one thing I could fancy, and nobody here could get it for me.’ ‘What is it?’ asked the Jesuit. ‘Ah! my son,’ said she, ‘it is the hand of a little boy! I feel as if I should enjoy munching the little bones!’”
"The first story is recounted in the records of the Jesuit Society in Brazil. A Portuguese missionary was visiting an elderly Brazilian woman who was very sick and had only a few days left to live. The Jesuit shared the truths of religion, which the dying woman accepted without any objections. After addressing her spiritual needs, he thought about her physical needs and offered her some European treats. ‘Unfortunately,’ she said, ‘my stomach is too weak to handle any kind of food. There’s only one thing I could crave, but no one here can get it for me.’ ‘What is it?’ the Jesuit asked. ‘Ah! my son,’ she replied, ‘it’s the hand of a little boy! I feel like I would enjoy munching on the little bones!’”
“Horrid! but I wonder is it so very nice?” said Robert.
“Horrible! But I wonder, is it really that great?” said Robert.
“My second tale will answer you, my boy,” said Paganel: “One day a missionary was reproving a cannibal for the horrible custom, so abhorrent to God’s laws, of eating human flesh! ‘And beside,’ said he, ‘it must be so nasty!’ ‘Oh, father,’ said the savage, looking greedily at the missionary, ‘say that God forbids it! That is a reason for what you tell us. But don’t say it is nasty! If you had only tasted it!’”
“My second story will explain it to you, my boy,” said Paganel. “One day, a missionary was scolding a cannibal for the terrible practice, so against God’s laws, of eating human flesh! ‘And besides,’ he said, ‘it must be so disgusting!’ ‘Oh, father,’ replied the savage, eyeing the missionary hungrily, ‘just say that God prohibits it! That gives us a reason for what you’re telling us. But don’t say it’s disgusting! If you had only tried it!’”
CHAPTER VI A DREADED COUNTRY
PAGANEL’S facts were indisputable. The cruelty of the New Zealanders was beyond a doubt, therefore it was dangerous to land. But had the danger been a hundredfold greater, it had to be faced. John Mangles felt the necessity of leaving without delay a vessel doomed to certain and speedy destruction. There were two dangers, one certain and the other probable, but no one could hesitate between them.
PAGANEL’S facts were undeniable. The brutality of the New Zealanders was clear, so landing was risky. But even if the danger had been a hundred times worse, it still had to be confronted. John Mangles understood that they needed to leave immediately a ship that was destined for sure and swift destruction. There were two threats, one definite and the other likely, but no one could hesitate between them.
As to their chance of being picked up by a passing vessel, they could not reasonably hope for it. The MACQUARIE was not in the track of ships bound to New Zealand. They keep further north for Auckland, further south for New Plymouth, and the ship had struck just between these two points, on the desert region of the shores of Ika-na-Mani, a dangerous, difficult coast, and infested by desperate characters.
As for their chances of being rescued by a passing ship, they couldn't realistically expect it. The MACQUARIE wasn’t on the usual route for ships headed to New Zealand. They generally go further north to Auckland or further south to New Plymouth, and the ship had wrecked right in between those two locations, on the barren shores of Ika-na-Mani, a treacherous and challenging coast, known for its dangerous people.
“When shall we get away?” asked Glenarvan.
“When are we leaving?” asked Glenarvan.
“To-morrow morning at ten o’clock,” replied John Mangles. “The tide will then turn and carry us to land.”
“Tomorrow morning at ten o’clock,” replied John Mangles. “The tide will then turn and carry us to shore.”
Next day, February 5, at eight o’clock, the raft was finished. John had given all his attention to the building of this structure. The foreyard, which did very well for mooring the anchors, was quite inadequate to the transport of passengers and provisions. What was needed was a strong, manageable raft, that would resist the force of the waves during a passage of nine miles. Nothing but the masts could supply suitable materials.
Next day, February 5, at eight o’clock, the raft was finished. John had put all his focus into building this structure. The foreyard, while useful for securing the anchors, was not enough for carrying passengers and supplies. What was needed was a sturdy, easy-to-handle raft that could withstand the waves during a nine-mile journey. Only the masts could provide the right materials for that.
Wilson and Mulrady set to work; the rigging was cut clear, and the mainmast, chopped away at the base, fell over the starboard rail, which crashed under its weight. The MACQUARIE was thus razed like a pontoon.
Wilson and Mulrady got to work; they cut the rigging free, and the mainmast, chopped off at the base, fell over the starboard side, which collapsed under its weight. The MACQUARIE was then brought down like a floating platform.
When the lower mast, the topmasts, and the royals were sawn and split, the principal pieces of the raft were ready. They were then joined to the fragments of the foremast and the whole was fastened securely together. John took the precaution to place in the interstices half a dozen empty barrels, which would raise the structure above the level of the water. On this strong foundation, Wilson laid a kind of floor in open work, made of the gratings off the hatches. The spray could then dash on the raft without staying there, and the passengers would be kept dry. In addition to this, the hose-pipes firmly lashed together formed a kind of circular barrier which protected the deck from the waves.
When the lower mast, the topmasts, and the royals were cut and split, the main parts of the raft were ready. They were then attached to the pieces of the foremast, and everything was securely fastened together. John took the precaution of placing half a dozen empty barrels in the gaps, which would lift the structure above water level. On this sturdy foundation, Wilson laid a kind of open floor made from the hatch gratings. This way, the spray could hit the raft without pooling, keeping the passengers dry. Additionally, the hose-pipes tied together formed a circular barrier that shielded the deck from the waves.
That morning, John seeing that the wind was in their favor, rigged up the royal-yard in the middle of the raft as a mast. It was stayed with shrouds, and carried a makeshift sail. A large broad-bladed oar was fixed behind to act as a rudder in case the wind was sufficient to require it. The greatest pains had been expended on strengthening the raft to resist the force of the waves, but the question remained whether, in the event of a change of wind, they could steer, or indeed, whether they could hope ever to reach the land.
That morning, John noticed that the wind was in their favor, so he set up the royal-yard in the middle of the raft as a mast. It was secured with shrouds and had a makeshift sail. A large, broad-bladed oar was attached behind to serve as a rudder if the wind was strong enough to need it. They had put a lot of effort into reinforcing the raft to withstand the waves, but the question remained whether they could steer in the event of a change in wind, or if they could even hope to reach land at all.
At nine o’clock they began to load. First came the provisions, in quantity sufficient to last till they should reach Auckland, for they could not count on the productions of this barren region.
At nine o’clock they started loading. First, they brought in enough supplies to last until they reached Auckland, since they couldn't rely on the resources from this desolate area.
Olbinett’s stores furnished some preserved meat which remained of the purchase made for their voyage in the MACQUARIE. This was but a scanty resource. They had to fall back on the coarse viands of the ship; sea biscuits of inferior quality, and two casks of salt fish. The steward was quite crestfallen.
Olbinett's stores provided some preserved meat left over from their purchase for the voyage on the MACQUARIE. This was a limited supply. They had to rely on the rough food from the ship: low-quality sea biscuits and two barrels of salt fish. The steward was pretty downcast.
These provisions were put in hermetically sealed cases, staunch and safe from sea water, and then lowered on to the raft and strongly lashed to the foot of the mast. The arms and ammunition were piled in a dry corner. Fortunately the travelers were well armed with carbines and revolvers.
These provisions were placed in airtight containers, secure and safe from seawater, and then lowered onto the raft, tightly secured to the base of the mast. The weapons and ammunition were stacked in a dry corner. Luckily, the travelers were well-equipped with rifles and handguns.
A holding anchor was also put on board in case John should be unable to make the land in one tide, and would have to seek moorings.
A holding anchor was also placed on board in case John couldn't reach the shore in one tide and needed to find a place to dock.
At ten o’clock the tide turned. The breeze blew gently from the northwest, and a slight swell rocked the frail craft.
At ten o’clock, the tide changed. A gentle breeze came from the northwest, and a slight wave rocked the small boat.
“Are we ready?” asked John.
“Are we ready?” John asked.
“All ready, captain,” answered Wilson.
"All set, captain," replied Wilson.
“All aboard!” cried John.
“Everyone on board!” shouted John.
Lady Helena and Mary Grant descended by a rope ladder, and took their station at the foot of the mast on the cases of provisions, their companions near them. Wilson took the helm. John stood by the tackle, and Mulrady cut the line which held the raft to the ship’s side.
Lady Helena and Mary Grant climbed down a rope ladder and took their place at the base of the mast on the supply crates, with their companions nearby. Wilson took over the steering. John stood by the equipment, and Mulrady cut the rope that secured the raft to the ship.
The sail was spread, and the frail structure commenced its progress toward the land, aided by wind and tide. The coast was about nine miles off, a distance that a boat with good oars would have accomplished in three hours. But with a raft allowance must be made. If the wind held, they might reach the land in one tide. But if the breeze died away, the ebb would carry them away from the shore, and they would be compelled to anchor and wait for the next tide, a serious consideration, and one that filled John Mangles with anxiety.
The sail was set, and the fragile structure started its journey toward the shore, helped by the wind and tide. The coast was about nine miles away, a distance that a boat with good oars could cover in three hours. But with a raft, adjustments had to be made. If the wind stayed strong, they might reach the land with the next tide. However, if the breeze died down, the outgoing tide would pull them away from the shore, forcing them to anchor and wait for the next tide, a significant concern that filled John Mangles with worry.
Still he hoped to succeed. The wind freshened. The tide had turned at ten o’clock, and by three they must either make the land or anchor to save themselves from being carried out to sea. They made a good start. Little by little the black line of the reefs and the yellow banks of sand disappeared under the swelling tide. Extreme watchfulness and perfect skill were necessary to avoid these submerged rocks, and steer a bark that did not readily answer to the helm, and that constantly broke off.
Still, he hoped to succeed. The wind picked up. The tide had turned at ten o’clock, and by three, they had to either reach the shore or anchor to avoid being swept out to sea. They got off to a good start. Bit by bit, the black outline of the reefs and the yellow sandy banks vanished under the rising tide. Extreme vigilance and perfect skill were needed to steer clear of these hidden rocks and manage a boat that didn’t respond well to the wheel and that was continually drifting off course.
At noon they were still five miles from shore. A tolerably clear sky allowed them to make out the principal features of the land. In the northeast rose a mountain about 2,300 feet high, whose sharply defined outline was exactly like the grinning face of a monkey turned toward the sky. It was Pirongia, which the map gave as exactly on the 38th parallel.
At noon, they were still five miles from shore. The sky was reasonably clear, letting them see the main features of the land. In the northeast, a mountain rising about 2,300 feet had a sharply defined outline that looked just like a grinning monkey's face turned toward the sky. It was Pirongia, marked on the map as exactly on the 38th parallel.
At half-past twelve, Paganel remarked that all the rocks had disappeared under the rising tide.
At 12:30, Paganel pointed out that all the rocks had vanished beneath the rising tide.
“All but one,” answered Lady Helena.
"All except one," replied Lady Helena.
“Which, Madam?” asked Paganel.
“Which one, Madam?” asked Paganel.
“There,” replied she, pointing to a black speck a mile off.
“There,” she said, pointing to a black dot a mile away.
“Yes, indeed,” said Paganel. “Let us try to ascertain its position, so as not to get too near it, for the sea will soon conceal it.”
“Yes, definitely,” said Paganel. “Let’s figure out where it is, so we don’t get too close to it, because the sea will cover it up soon.”
“It is exactly in a line with the northern slope of the mountain,” said John Mangles. “Wilson, mind you give it a wide berth.”
“It’s right in line with the northern slope of the mountain,” said John Mangles. “Wilson, make sure to give it a wide berth.”
“Yes, captain,” answered the sailor, throwing his whole weight on the great oar that steered the raft.
“Yes, captain,” replied the sailor, putting all his strength into the large oar that steered the raft.
In half an hour they had made half a mile. But, strange to say, the black point still rose above the waves.
In thirty minutes, they had covered half a mile. Yet, oddly enough, the black spot still loomed above the waves.
John looked attentively, and in order to make it out, borrowed Paganel’s telescope.
John looked closely, and to figure it out, he borrowed Paganel’s telescope.
“That is no reef,” said he, after a moment; “it is something floating, which rises and falls with the swell.”
"That’s not a reef," he said after a moment. "It's something floating that goes up and down with the waves."
“Is it part of the mast of the MACQUARIE?” asked Lady Helena.
“Is it part of the mast of the MACQUARIE?” Lady Helena asked.
“No,” said Glenarvan, “none of her timbers could have come so far.”
“No,” Glenarvan said, “none of her timbers could have traveled this far.”
“Stay!” said John Mangles; “I know it! It is the boat.”
“Wait!” said John Mangles; “I know it! It’s the boat.”
“The ship’s boat?” exclaimed Glenarvan.
"The ship's boat?" exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Yes, my lord. The ship’s boat, keel up.”
“Yes, my lord. The ship’s boat is upside down.”
“The unfortunate creatures,” cried Lady Helena, “they have perished!”
“The poor things,” Lady Helena exclaimed, “they're gone!”
“Yes, Madam,” replied John Mangles, “they must have perished, for in the midst of these breakers in a heavy swell on that pitchy night, they ran to certain death.”
“Yes, ma'am,” replied John Mangles, “they must have died, because in the middle of these waves during that dark night, they ran to certain death.”
For a few minutes the passengers were silent. They gazed at the frail craft as they drew near it. It must evidently have capsized about four miles from the shore, and not one of the crew could have escaped.
For a few minutes, the passengers were quiet. They looked at the fragile boat as they got closer. It clearly must have overturned about four miles from the shore, and not one of the crew could have survived.
“But this boat may be of use to us,” said Glenarvan.
“But this boat might be useful to us,” said Glenarvan.
“That is true,” answered John Mangles. “Keep her up, Wilson.”
"That's right," replied John Mangles. "Steady her, Wilson."
The direction was slightly changed, but the breeze fell gradually, and it was two hours before they reached the boat.
The direction shifted a bit, but the breeze slowly died down, and it took them two hours to reach the boat.
Mulrady, stationed forward, fended off the blow, and the yawl was drawn alongside.
Mulrady, positioned at the front, blocked the attack, and the yawl was pulled up alongside.
“Empty?” asked John Mangles.
"Empty?" John Mangles asked.
“Yes, captain,” answered the sailor, “the boat is empty, and all its seams are open. It is of no use to us.”
“Yes, captain,” replied the sailor, “the boat is empty, and all its seams are open. It’s useless to us.”
“No use at all?” said McNabbs.
“No use at all?” McNabbs said.
“None at all,” said John Mangles.
“None at all,” said John Mangles.
“It is good for nothing but to burn.”
“It’s good for nothing but to burn.”
“I regret it,” said Paganel, “for the yawl might have taken us to Auckland.”
“I regret it,” said Paganel, “because the yawl could have taken us to Auckland.”
“We must bear our fate, Monsieur Paganel,” replied John Mangles. “But, for my part, in such a stormy sea I prefer our raft to that crazy boat. A very slight shock would be enough to break her up. Therefore, my lord, we have nothing to detain us further.”
“We have to accept our fate, Monsieur Paganel,” John Mangles replied. “But personally, in such a rough sea, I prefer our raft to that unstable boat. Just a small bump could break her apart. So, my lord, there's nothing left to keep us here.”
“As you think best, John.”
"Do what you think is best, John."
“On then, Wilson,” said John, “and bear straight for the land.”
“Let’s go, Wilson,” said John, “and head straight for the land.”
There was still an hour before the turn of the tide. In that time they might make two miles. But the wind soon fell almost entirely, and the raft became nearly motionless, and soon began to drift to seaward under the influence of the ebb-tide.
There was still an hour before the tide turned. In that time, they could cover two miles. But the wind quickly died down, and the raft became almost still, then started to drift out to sea with the outgoing tide.
John did not hesitate a moment.
John didn't hesitate at all.
“Let go the anchor,” said he.
"Drop the anchor," he said.
Mulrady, who stood to execute this order, let go the anchor in five fathoms water. The raft backed about two fathoms on the line, which was then at full stretch. The sail was taken in, and everything made snug for a tedious period of inaction.
Mulrady, who was about to carry out this task, dropped the anchor in five fathoms of water. The raft moved back about two fathoms on the line, which was then fully extended. The sail was taken in, and everything was secured for a long stretch of inactivity.
The returning tide would not occur till nine o’clock in the evening; and as John Mangles did not care to go on in the dark, the anchorage was for the night, or at least till five o’clock in the morning, land being in sight at a distance of less than three miles.
The tide wouldn't come back until nine in the evening, and since John Mangles didn't want to continue in the dark, they decided to anchor for the night, or at least until five in the morning, with land visible less than three miles away.
A considerable swell raised the waves, and seemed to set in continuously toward the coast, and perceiving this, Glenarvan asked John why he did not take advantage of this swell to get nearer to the land.
A big swell lifted the waves and seemed to keep pushing toward the coast, and noticing this, Glenarvan asked John why he wasn't using this swell to get closer to the shore.
“Your Lordship is deceived by an optical illusion,” said the young captain. “Although the swell seems to carry the waves landward, it does not really move at all. It is mere undulating molecular motion, nothing more. Throw a piece of wood overboard and you will see that it will remain quite stationary except as the tide affects it. There is nothing for it but patience.”
“Your Lordship is mistaken due to an optical illusion,” said the young captain. “Although the swell appears to push the waves toward the shore, it isn’t really moving at all. It's just simple undulating molecular motion, nothing more. Toss a piece of wood overboard, and you’ll see it will stay completely still except for the effects of the tide. All we can do is be patient.”
“And dinner,” said the Major.
"And dinner," the Major said.
Olbinett unpacked some dried meat and a dozen biscuits. The steward blushed as he proffered the meager bill of fare. But it was received with a good grace, even by the ladies, who, however, had not much appetite, owing to the violent motion.
Olbinett took out some dried meat and a dozen biscuits. The steward turned red as he presented the limited menu. But it was accepted with good grace, even by the ladies, who, however, didn't have much of an appetite due to the rough motion.
This motion, produced by the jerking of the raft on the cable, while she lay head on to the sea, was very severe and fatiguing. The blows of the short, tumbling seas were as severe as if she had been striking on a submerged rock. Sometimes it was hard to believe that she was not aground. The cable strained violently, and every half hour John had to take in a fathom to ease it. Without this precaution it would certainly have given way, and the raft must have drifted to destruction.
This movement, caused by the raft jerking on the cable while it faced the sea, was really intense and exhausting. The impact of the short, choppy waves felt as harsh as if the raft were hitting a hidden rock. At times, it was hard to believe that the raft wasn't stuck on something. The cable was under a lot of strain, and every half hour, John had to pull in a length of it to relieve the tension. If he hadn't done this, it would have definitely snapped, and the raft would have drifted into danger.
John’s anxiety may easily be understood. His cable might break, or his anchor lose its hold, and in either case the danger was imminent.
John's anxiety is easy to understand. His cable could snap, or his anchor might lose grip, and in either case, the danger was close at hand.
Night drew on; the sun’s disc, enlarged by refraction, was dipping blood-red below the horizon. The distant waves glittered in the west, and sparkled like sheets of liquid silver. Nothing was to be seen in that direction but sky and water, except one sharply-defined object, the hull of the MACQUARIE motionless on her rocky bed.
Night fell; the sun, appearing larger due to refraction, was sinking blood-red below the horizon. The distant waves glimmered in the west, sparkling like sheets of liquid silver. In that direction, there was nothing but sky and water, except for one clearly defined object, the hull of the MACQUARIE, motionless on her rocky bed.
The short twilight postponed the darkness only by a few minutes, and soon the coast outline, which bounded the view on the east and north, was lost in darkness.
The brief twilight delayed the darkness by just a few minutes, and soon the outline of the coast, which framed the view to the east and north, disappeared into the night.
The shipwrecked party were in an agonizing situation on their narrow raft, and overtaken by the shades of night.
The shipwrecked group was in a desperate situation on their small raft, and they were engulfed by the darkness of night.
Some of the party fell into a troubled sleep, a prey to evil dreams; others could not close an eye. When the day dawned, the whole party were worn out with fatigue.
Some members of the group fell into a restless sleep, plagued by bad dreams; others couldn’t sleep at all. When morning came, the entire group was exhausted from fatigue.
With the rising tide the wind blew again toward the land. It was six o’clock in the morning, and there was no time to lose. John arranged everything for resuming their voyage, and then he ordered the anchor to be weighed. But the anchor flukes had been so imbedded in the sand by the repeated jerks of the cable, that without a windlass it was impossible to detach it, even with the tackle which Wilson had improvised.
With the rising tide, the wind blew back toward shore again. It was six o’clock in the morning, and there was no time to waste. John got everything ready to continue their journey, and then he ordered the anchor to be raised. But the anchor flukes had sunk so deep into the sand from the repeated pulls of the cable that, without a windlass, it was impossible to free it, even with the setup Wilson had made.
Half an hour was lost in vain efforts. John, impatient of delay, cut the rope, thus sacrificing his anchor, and also the possibility of anchoring again if this tide failed to carry them to land. But he decided that further delay was not to be thought of, and an ax-blow committed the raft to the mercy of the wind, assisted by a current of two knots an hour.
Half an hour was wasted in pointless attempts. John, tired of waiting, cut the rope, sacrificing his anchor and the chance to anchor again if this tide didn’t take them to shore. But he decided that any more delay wasn't an option, and with a single blow of the ax, he let the raft go to the mercy of the wind, helped by a current of two knots an hour.
The sail was spread. They drifted slowly toward the land, which rose in gray, hazy masses, on a background of sky illumined by the rising sun. The reef was dexterously avoided and doubled, but with the fitful breeze the raft could not get near the shore. What toil and pain to reach a coast so full of danger when attained.
The sail was out. They slowly drifted toward the land, which loomed in gray, hazy shapes against a sky lit up by the rising sun. They skillfully avoided the reef and navigated around it, but with the unpredictable breeze, the raft couldn’t get close to the shore. What effort and struggle to reach a coast that was so fraught with danger once they got there.
At nine o’clock, the land was less than a mile off. It was a steeply-shelving shore, fringed with breakers; a practicable landing-place had to be discovered.
At nine o’clock, the land was less than a mile away. It was a steep shoreline, lined with waves; we needed to find a suitable place to land.
Gradually the breeze grew fainter, and then ceased entirely. The sail flapped idly against the mast, and John had it furled. The tide alone carried the raft to the shore, but steering had become impossible, and its passage was impeded by immense bands of FUCUS.
Gradually, the breeze weakened and then completely stopped. The sail flapped lazily against the mast, and John rolled it up. The tide was the only thing moving the raft to the shore, but steering had become impossible, and its journey was blocked by huge strands of FUCUS.
At ten o’clock John found himself almost at a stand-still, not three cables’ lengths from the shore. Having lost their anchor, they were at the mercy of the ebb-tide.
At ten o’clock, John was nearly at a standstill, just three cable lengths from the shore. Having lost their anchor, they were at the mercy of the outgoing tide.
John clenched his hands; he was racked with anxiety, and cast frenzied glances toward this inaccessible shore.
John clenched his hands, overwhelmed with anxiety, and shot frantic looks toward the unreachable shore.
In the midst of his perplexities, a shock was felt. The raft stood still. It had landed on a sand-bank, twenty-five fathoms from the coast.
In the middle of his confusion, a shock was felt. The raft stopped moving. It had hit a sandbank, twenty-five fathoms from the shore.
Glenarvan, Robert, Wilson, and Mulrady, jumped into the water. The raft was firmly moored to the nearest rocks. The ladies were carried to land without wetting a fold of their dresses, and soon the whole party, with their arms and provisions, were finally landed on these much dreaded New Zealand shores.
Glenarvan, Robert, Wilson, and Mulrady jumped into the water. The raft was securely tied to the nearby rocks. The ladies were taken to shore without getting a single fold of their dresses wet, and soon the entire group, along with their supplies, was safely on the feared shores of New Zealand.
CHAPTER VII THE MAORI WAR
GLENARVAN would have liked to start without an hour’s delay, and follow the coast to Auckland. But since the morning heavy clouds had been gathering, and toward eleven o’clock, after the landing was effected, the vapors condensed into violent rain, so that instead of starting they had to look for shelter.
GLENARVAN wanted to leave right away, without waiting an hour, and head along the coast to Auckland. But since the morning, thick clouds had been building up, and by eleven o’clock, after they had landed, the moisture turned into a heavy downpour, forcing them to find shelter instead of setting off.
Wilson was fortunate enough to discover what just suited their wants: a grotto hollowed out by the sea in the basaltic rocks. Here the travelers took shelter with their arms and provisions. In the cave they found a ready-garnered store of dried sea-weed, which formed a convenient couch; for fire, they lighted some wood near the mouth of the cavern, and dried themselves as well as they could.
Wilson was lucky enough to find exactly what they needed: a cave carved out by the sea in the basalt rocks. The travelers took shelter there with their gear and supplies. Inside the cave, they discovered a ready supply of dried seaweed, which served as a comfy bed; for a fire, they lit some wood near the entrance of the cave and tried to warm up as best as they could.
John hoped that the duration of this deluge of rain would be in an inverse ratio to its violence, but he was doomed to disappointment. Hours passed without any abatement of its fury. Toward noon the wind freshened, and increased the force of the storm. The most patient of men would have rebelled at such an untoward incident; but what could be done; without any vehicle, they could not brave such a tempest; and, after all, unless the natives appeared on the scene, a delay of twelve hours was not so much consequence, as the journey to Auckland was only a matter of a few days. During this involuntary halt, the conversation turned on the incidents of the New Zealand war. But to understand and appreciate the critical position into which these MACQUARIE passengers were thrown, something ought to be known of the history of the struggle which had deluged the island of Ika-na-Mani with blood.
John hoped that the length of this heavy rain would be inversely related to its intensity, but he was in for a letdown. Hours went by without any sign of it letting up. Around noon, the wind picked up, making the storm even stronger. Even the most patient person would have been frustrated by such a misfortune; but what could be done? Without any vehicle, they couldn't face such a storm; and anyway, unless the locals showed up, a twelve-hour delay wasn't a big deal since getting to Auckland was just a matter of a few days. During this unexpected break, they talked about the events of the New Zealand war. However, to fully understand and appreciate the tough situation these MACQUARIE passengers found themselves in, it’s important to know some background about the conflict that had drenched the island of Ika-na-Mani in blood.
Since the arrival of Abel Tasman in Cook’s Strait, on the 16th of December, 1642, though the New Zealanders had often been visited by European vessels, they had maintained their liberty in their several islands. No European power had thought of taking possession of this archipelago, which commands the whole Pacific Ocean. The missionaries stationed at various points were the sole channels of Christian civilization. Some of them, especially the Anglicans, prepared the minds of the New Zealand chiefs for submitting to the English yoke. It was cleverly managed, and these chiefs were influenced to sign a letter addressed to Queen Victoria to ask her protection. But the most clearsighted of them saw the folly of this step; and one of them, after having affixed his tattoo-mark to the letter by way of signature, uttered these prophetic words: “We have lost our country! henceforth it is not ours; soon the stranger will come and take it, and we shall be his slaves.”
Since Abel Tasman arrived in Cook’s Strait on December 16, 1642, even though the New Zealanders had often encountered European ships, they had kept their freedom across their various islands. No European nation had considered claiming this archipelago, which commands the entire Pacific Ocean. The missionaries stationed at different locations were the only means of introducing Christian civilization. Some of them, particularly the Anglicans, laid the groundwork for the New Zealand chiefs to accept English authority. This was done cleverly, and these chiefs were persuaded to sign a letter to Queen Victoria asking for her protection. However, the most perceptive among them recognized the foolishness of this move; one chief, after marking the letter with his tattoo as a signature, famously said, “We have lost our country! From now on it is not ours; soon the stranger will come and take it, and we shall be his slaves.”
And so it was; on January 29, 1840, the English corvette HERALD arrived to claim possession.
And so it was; on January 29, 1840, the English corvette HERALD arrived to take possession.
From the year 1840, till the day the DUNCAN left the Clyde, nothing had happened here that Paganel did not know and he was ready to impart his information to his companions.
From the year 1840 until the day the DUNCAN left the Clyde, nothing had happened here that Paganel didn’t know, and he was eager to share his knowledge with his companions.
“Madam,” said he, in answer to Lady Helena’s questions, “I must repeat what I had occasion to remark before, that the New Zealanders are a courageous people, who yielded for a moment, but afterward fought foot to foot against the English invaders. The Maori tribes are organized like the old clans of Scotland. They are so many great families owning a chief, who is very jealous of his prerogative. The men of this race are proud and brave, one tribe tall, with straight hair, like the Maltese, or the Jews of Bagdad; the other smaller, thickset like mulattoes, but robust, haughty, and warlike. They had a famous chief, named Hihi, a real Vercingetorix, so that you need not be astonished that the war with the English has become chronic in the Northern Island, for in it is the famous tribe of the Waikatos, who defend their lands under the leadership of William Thompson.”
“Madam,” he replied to Lady Helena’s questions, “I have to reiterate what I mentioned earlier: the New Zealanders are a brave people who momentarily surrendered but then fought back fiercely against the English invaders. The Maori tribes are structured like the old Scottish clans. They consist of many large families led by a chief who guards his authority fiercely. The men of this race are proud and courageous; one tribe is tall, with straight hair, resembling the Maltese or the Jews of Baghdad; the other is shorter and stockier, like mulattoes, but still strong, proud, and warrior-like. They had a renowned chief named Hihi, a true Vercingetorix, so it’s no surprise that the war with the English has become a long-standing issue in the North Island, where the famous Waikato tribe defends their land under the leadership of William Thompson.”
“But,” said John Mangles, “are not the English in possession of the principal points in New Zealand?”
“But,” said John Mangles, “don’t the English have control over the main territories in New Zealand?”
“Certainly, dear John,” replied Paganel. “After Captain Hobson took formal possession, and became governor, nine colonies were founded at various times between 1840 and 1862, in the most favorable situations. These formed the nucleus of nine provinces, four in the North Island and five in the southern island, with a total population of 184,346 inhabitants on the 30th of June, 1864.”
“Of course, dear John,” replied Paganel. “After Captain Hobson officially took control and became governor, nine colonies were established at different times between 1840 and 1862, in the best locations. These became the core of nine provinces, four in the North Island and five in the South Island, with a total population of 184,346 people on June 30, 1864.”
“But what about this interminable war?” asked John Mangles.
“But what about this endless war?” asked John Mangles.
“Well,” said Paganel, “six long months have gone by since we left Europe, and I cannot say what may have happened during that time, with the exception of a few facts which I gathered from the newspapers of Maryborough and Seymour during our Australian journey. At that time the fighting was very lively in the Northern Island.”
“Well,” said Paganel, “six long months have passed since we left Europe, and I can’t say what might have happened during that time, except for a few things I learned from the newspapers in Maryborough and Seymour during our trip in Australia. At that point, the fighting was quite intense in the Northern Island.”
“And when did the war commence?” asked Mary Grant.
"And when did the war start?" asked Mary Grant.
“Recommence, you mean, my dear young lady,” replied Paganel; “for there was an insurrection so far back as 1845. The present war began toward the close of 1863; but long before that date the Maories were occupied in making preparations to shake off the English yoke. The national party among the natives carried on an active propaganda for the election of a Maori ruler. The object was to make old Potatau king, and to fix as the capital of the new kingdom his village, which lay between the Waikato and Waipa Rivers. Potatau was an old man, remarkable rather for cunning than bravery; but he had a Prime Minister who was both intelligent and energetic, a descendant of the Ngatihahuas, who occupied the isthmus before the arrival of the strangers. This minister, William Thompson, became the soul of the War of Independence, and organized the Maori troops, with great skill. Under this guidance a Taranaki chief gathered the scattered tribes around the same flag; a Waikato chief formed a ‘Land League,’ intended to prevent the natives from selling their land to the English Government, and warlike feasts were held just as in civilized countries on the verge of revolution. The English newspapers began to notice these alarming symptoms, and the government became seriously disturbed at these ‘Land League’ proceedings. In short, the train was laid, and the mine was ready to explode. Nothing was wanted but the spark, or rather the shock of rival interests to produce the spark.
“Start over, you mean, my dear young lady,” replied Paganel; “because there was an uprising way back in 1845. The current war began toward the end of 1863; but long before that, the Maories were busy preparing to break free from English rule. The national party among the natives actively campaigned for the election of a Maori king. Their goal was to make old Potatau king and set his village, located between the Waikato and Waipa Rivers, as the capital of the new kingdom. Potatau was an old man known more for his cunning than for his bravery; however, he had a Prime Minister who was both smart and proactive, a descendant of the Ngatihahuas who lived in the isthmus before the arrival of outsiders. This minister, William Thompson, became the driving force behind the War of Independence, skillfully organizing the Maori troops. Under his leadership, a Taranaki chief gathered the scattered tribes under one flag; a Waikato chief formed a ‘Land League’ aimed at preventing the natives from selling their land to the English Government, and warlike feasts were held just like in civilized nations on the brink of revolution. The English newspapers started to take note of these alarming signs, and the government became seriously worried about these ‘Land League’ activities. In short, the conditions were set, and the situation was ready to ignite. All that was needed was the spark, or rather the clash of conflicting interests to create the spark.”
“This shock took place in 1860, in the Taranaki province on the southwest coast of Ika-na-Mani. A native had six hundred acres of land in the neighborhood of New Plymouth. He sold them to the English Government; but when the surveyor came to measure the purchased land, the chief Kingi protested, and by the month of March he had made the six hundred acres in question into a fortified camp, surrounded with high palisades. Some days after Colonel Gold carried this fortress at the head of his troops, and that day heard the first shot fired of the native war.”
“This shock happened in 1860, in the Taranaki province on the southwest coast of Ika-na-Mani. A local had six hundred acres of land near New Plymouth. He sold it to the English Government; however, when the surveyor arrived to measure the land that was bought, the chief Kingi protested, and by March, he had turned the six hundred acres in question into a fortified camp, surrounded by tall palisades. A few days later, Colonel Gold took this fortress at the head of his troops, and that day, he heard the first shot fired in the native war.”
“Have the rebels been successful up to this time?”
“Have the rebels been successful so far?”
“Yes, Madam, and the English themselves have often been compelled to admire the courage and bravery of the New Zealanders. Their mode of warfare is of the guerilla type; they form skirmishing parties, come down in small detachments, and pillage the colonists’ homes. General Cameron had no easy time in the campaigns, during which every bush had to be searched. In 1863, after a long and sanguinary struggle, the Maories were entrenched in strong and fortified position on the Upper Waikato, at the end of a chain of steep hills, and covered by three miles of forts. The native prophets called on all the Maori population to defend the soil, and promised the extermination of the pakekas, or white men. General Cameron had three thousand volunteers at his disposal, and they gave no quarter to the Maories after the barbarous murder of Captain Sprent. Several bloody engagements took place; in some instances the fighting lasted twelve hours before the Maories yielded to the English cannonade. The heart of the army was the fierce Waikato tribe under William Thompson. This native general commanded at the outset 2,500 warriors, afterward increased to 8,000. The men of Shongi and Heki, two powerful chiefs, came to his assistance. The women took their part in the most trying labors of this patriotic war. But right has not always might. After severe struggles General Cameron succeeded in subduing the Waikato district, but empty and depopulated, for the Maories escaped in all directions. Some wonderful exploits were related. Four hundred Maories who were shut up in the fortress of Orakau, besieged by 1,000 English, under Brigadier-General Carey, without water or provisions, refused to surrender, but one day at noon cut their way through the then decimated 40th Regiment, and escaped to the marshes.”
“Yes, Madam, and the English have often had to admire the courage and bravery of the New Zealanders. Their way of fighting is guerrilla-style; they form skirmishing teams, come down in small groups, and raid the colonists’ homes. General Cameron faced tough challenges in the campaigns, having to search every bush. In 1863, after a long and bloody struggle, the Maoris were entrenched in a strong, fortified position on the Upper Waikato, at the end of a chain of steep hills, covered by three miles of forts. The native prophets urged all the Maori people to defend their land and promised the destruction of the pakehas, or white men. General Cameron had three thousand volunteers at his disposal, and they offered no mercy to the Maoris after the brutal murder of Captain Sprent. Several bloody battles occurred; in some cases, the fighting lasted twelve hours before the Maoris surrendered to the English cannon fire. The heart of the army was the fierce Waikato tribe led by William Thompson. This native general initially commanded 2,500 warriors, which later grew to 8,000. The men of Shongi and Heki, two powerful chiefs, came to support him. The women played a crucial role in the harsh efforts of this patriotic war. But justice has not always prevailed. After fierce struggles, General Cameron managed to subdue the Waikato district, but it was left empty and depopulated, as the Maoris fled in all directions. Some remarkable feats were reported. Four hundred Maoris, who were trapped in the fortress of Orakau and besieged by 1,000 English soldiers under Brigadier-General Carey, without water or food, refused to surrender but, one day at noon, cut their way through the then-weak 40th Regiment and escaped to the marshes.”
“But,” asked John Mangles, “did the submission of the Waikato district put an end to this sanguinary war?”
“But,” asked John Mangles, “did the surrender of the Waikato district put an end to this bloody war?”
“No, my friend,” replied Paganel. “The English resolved to march on Taranaki province and besiege Mataitawa, William Thompson’s fortress. But they did not carry it without great loss. Just as I was leaving Paris, I heard that the Governor and the General had accepted the submission of the Tauranga tribes, and left them in possession of three-fourths of their lands. It was also rumored that the principal chief of the rebellion, William Thompson, was inclined to surrender, but the Australian papers have not confirmed this, but rather the contrary, and I should not be surprised to find that at this moment the war is going on with renewed vigor.”
“No, my friend,” replied Paganel. “The English decided to march into Taranaki province and lay siege to Mataitawa, William Thompson’s stronghold. However, they did not achieve it without significant losses. Just as I was leaving Paris, I heard that the Governor and the General had accepted the surrender of the Tauranga tribes and allowed them to keep three-quarters of their land. It was also rumored that the main leader of the rebellion, William Thompson, was considering surrendering, but the Australian newspapers have not confirmed this; in fact, they suggest the opposite, and I wouldn’t be surprised if the war is currently intensifying.”
“Then, according to you, Paganel,” said Glenarvan, “this struggle is still going on in the provinces of Auckland and Taranaki?”
“Then, according to you, Paganel,” Glenarvan said, “this struggle is still happening in the provinces of Auckland and Taranaki?”
“I think so.”
"I believe so."
“This very province where the MACQUARIE’S wreck has deposited us.”
“This very province where the MACQUARIE’s wreck has brought us.”
“Exactly. We have landed a few miles above Kawhia harbor, where the Maori flag is probably still floating.”
“Exactly. We’ve landed a few miles above Kawhia harbor, where the Maori flag is probably still flying.”
“Then our most prudent course would be to keep toward the north,” remarked Glenarvan.
“Then our smartest move would be to head north,” said Glenarvan.
“By far the most prudent,” said Paganel. “The New Zealanders are incensed against Europeans, and especially against the English. Therefore let us avoid falling into their hands.”
“Definitely the smartest choice,” said Paganel. “The New Zealanders are really angry at Europeans, especially the English. So, let’s make sure we don’t end up in their grasp.”
“We might have the good fortune to fall in with a detachment of European troops,” said Lady Helena.
“We might be lucky enough to run into a group of European troops,” said Lady Helena.
“We may, Madam,” replied the geographer; “but I do not expect it. Detached parties do not like to go far into the country, where the smallest tussock, the thinnest brushwood, may conceal an accomplished marksman. I don’t fancy we shall pick up an escort of the 40th Regiment. But there are mission-stations on this west coast, and we shall be able to make them our halting-places till we get to Auckland.”
“We might, Madam,” replied the geographer; “but I really don’t expect it. Independent groups tend to avoid going too far into the countryside, where even the smallest bump in the ground or the lightest brush could hide a skilled shooter. I doubt we’ll find an escort from the 40th Regiment. However, there are mission stations along this west coast, and we can use them as stops until we reach Auckland.”
CHAPTER VIII ON THE ROAD TO AUCKLAND
ON the 7th of February, at six o’clock in the morning, the signal for departure was given by Glenarvan. During the night the rain had ceased. The sky was veiled with light gray clouds, which moderated the heat of the sun, and allowed the travelers to venture on a journey by day.
ON the 7th of February, at six o’clock in the morning, Glenarvan signaled for departure. The rain had stopped during the night. The sky was covered with light gray clouds, which kept the sun’s heat in check and made it possible for the travelers to set out on their journey during the day.
Paganel had measured on the map a distance of eighty miles between Point Kawhia and Auckland; it was an eight days’ journey if they made ten miles a day. But instead of following the windings of the coast, he thought it better to make for a point thirty miles off, at the confluence of the Waikato and the Waipa, at the village of Ngarnavahia. The “overland track” passes that point, and is rather a path than a road, practicable for the vehicles which go almost across the island, from Napier, in Hawke’s Bay, to Auckland. From this village it would be easy to reach Drury, and there they could rest in an excellent hotel, highly recommended by Dr. Hochstetter.
Paganel measured a distance of eighty miles on the map between Point Kawhia and Auckland; it would take eight days if they traveled ten miles a day. Instead of sticking to the coastal route, he thought it would be better to head for a point thirty miles away, where the Waikato and Waipa rivers meet, at the village of Ngarnavahia. The “overland track” goes through this point and is more of a path than a road, suitable for the vehicles that travel almost all the way across the island, from Napier in Hawke’s Bay to Auckland. From this village, it would be easy to get to Drury, where they could rest in a great hotel highly recommended by Dr. Hochstetter.
The travelers, each carrying a share of the provisions, commenced to follow the shore of Aotea Bay. From prudential motives they did not allow themselves to straggle, and by instinct they kept a look-out over the undulating plains to the eastward, ready with their loaded carbines. Paganel, map in hand, took a professional pleasure in verifying the minutest details.
The travelers, each carrying some supplies, started to follow the shore of Aotea Bay. To stay safe, they didn’t let themselves fall behind, and instinctively kept an eye on the rolling plains to the east, ready with their loaded guns. Paganel, with a map in hand, took professional satisfaction in checking every little detail.
The country looked like an immense prairie which faded into distance, and promised an easy walk. But the travelers were undeceived when they came to the edge of this verdant plain. The grass gave way to a low scrub of small bushes bearing little white flowers, mixed with those innumerable tall ferns with which the lands of New Zealand abound. They had to cut a path across the plain, through these woody stems, and this was a matter of some difficulty, but at eight o’clock in the evening the first slopes of the Hakarihoata Ranges were turned, and the party camped immediately. After a fourteen miles’ march, they might well think of resting.
The country looked like a vast prairie that stretched into the distance and seemed to promise an easy walk. But the travelers quickly realized the truth when they reached the edge of this green plain. The grass gave way to a low shrub area filled with small bushes that had tiny white flowers, mixed with countless tall ferns that are abundant in New Zealand. They had to carve a path through these woody stems, which was somewhat challenging. However, by eight o’clock in the evening, they had finally turned the first slopes of the Hakarihoata Ranges and set up camp right away. After a fourteen-mile trek, they definitely deserved a rest.
Neither wagon or tent being available, they sought repose beneath some magnificent Norfolk Island pines. They had plenty of rugs which make good beds. Glenarvan took every possible precaution for the night. His companions and he, well armed, were to watch in turns, two and two, till daybreak. No fires were lighted. Barriers of fire are a potent preservation from wild beasts, but New Zealand has neither tiger, nor lion, nor bear, nor any wild animal, but the Maori adequately fills their place, and a fire would only have served to attract this two-footed jaguar.
With no wagon or tent available, they decided to rest under some stunning Norfolk Island pines. They had plenty of rugs that made comfortable beds. Glenarvan took every precaution for the night. He and his companions, well-armed, were going to take turns watching in pairs until dawn. No fires were lit. While fires can be a strong defense against wild animals, New Zealand has no tigers, lions, bears, or any other wild beasts; instead, the Maori fills that role, and a fire would only attract this two-legged predator.
The night passed pleasantly with the exception of the attack of the sand-flies, called by the natives, “ngamu,” and the visit of the audacious family of rats, who exercised their teeth on the provisions.
The night went by nicely, except for the sand-flies, which the locals called "ngamu," and the bold family of rats that gnawed on the food supplies.
Next day, on the 8th of February, Paganel rose more sanguine, and almost reconciled to the country. The Maories, whom he particularly dreaded, had not yet appeared, and these ferocious cannibals had not molested him even in his dreams. “I begin to think that our little journey will end favorably. This evening we shall reach the confluence of the Waipa and Waikato, and after that there is not much chance of meeting natives on the way to Auckland.”
Next day, on February 8th, Paganel felt more hopeful and almost at peace with the country. The Maoris, whom he feared the most, had not shown up yet, and these fierce cannibals hadn't even bothered him in his dreams. "I'm starting to think our little journey will have a good ending. This evening we'll get to where the Waipa and Waikato rivers meet, and after that, there's not much chance of running into any natives on the way to Auckland."
“How far is it now,” said Glenarvan, “to the confluence of the Waipa and Waikato?”
“How far is it now,” Glenarvan asked, “to the meeting point of the Waipa and Waikato rivers?”
“Fifteen miles; just about what we did yesterday.”
“Fifteen miles; that's pretty much what we covered yesterday.”
“But we shall be terribly delayed if this interminable scrub continues to obstruct our path.”
“But we'll be seriously delayed if this endless brush keeps blocking our way.”
“No,” said Paganel, “we shall follow the banks of the Waipa, and then we shall have no obstacle, but on the contrary, a very easy road.”
“No,” said Paganel, “we'll follow the banks of the Waipa, and then we won’t face any obstacles; instead, it’ll be a very easy path.”
“Well, then,” said Glenarvan, seeing the ladies ready, “let us make a start.”
“Well, then,” said Glenarvan, seeing the ladies ready, “let’s get going.”
During the early part of the day, the thick brushwood seriously impeded their progress. Neither wagon nor horses could have passed where travelers passed, so that their Australian vehicle was but slightly regretted. Until practicable wagon roads are cut through these forests of scrub, New Zealand will only be accessible to foot passengers. The ferns, whose name is legion, concur with the Maories in keeping strangers off the lands.
During the morning, the dense underbrush really slowed them down. Neither the wagon nor the horses could have made it through where the travelers went, so they hardly missed their Australian vehicle. Until proper wagon roads are made through these scrub forests, New Zealand will only be reachable on foot. The various ferns, combined with the local Maori culture, work together to keep outsiders away from the land.
The little party overcame many obstacles in crossing the plains in which the Hakarihoata Ranges rise. But before noon they reached the banks of the Waipa, and followed the northward course of the river.
The small group faced numerous challenges while crossing the plains where the Hakarihoata Ranges stand. But before noon, they arrived at the banks of the Waipa and continued traveling north along the river.
The Major and Robert, without leaving their companions, shot some snipe and partridge under the low shrubs of the plain. Olbinett, to save time, plucked the birds as he went along.
The Major and Robert, still with their friends, shot some snipe and partridge under the low bushes of the plain. Olbinett, to save time, plucked the birds as he moved along.
Paganel was less absorbed by the culinary importance of the game than by the desire of obtaining some bird peculiar to New Zealand. His curiosity as a naturalist overcame his hunger as a traveler. He called to mind the peculiarities of the “tui” of the natives, sometimes called the mocking-bird from its incessant chuckle, and sometimes “the parson,” in allusion to the white cravat it wears over its black, cassock-like plumage.
Paganel was more interested in finding a bird unique to New Zealand than in the culinary value of the game. His curiosity as a naturalist outweighed his hunger as a traveler. He remembered the characteristics of the “tui” mentioned by the locals, which is sometimes referred to as the mockingbird because of its constant chuckling, and at other times called “the parson” due to the white cravat it wears over its black, robe-like feathers.
“The tui,” said Paganel to the Major, “grows so fat during the Winter that it makes him ill, and prevents him from flying. Then he tears his breast with his beak, to relieve himself of his fat, and so becomes lighter. Does not that seem to you singular, McNabbs?”
“The tui,” Paganel said to the Major, “gets so fat during the winter that it makes him sick and stops him from flying. Then he pecks at his chest to get rid of the fat, which makes him lighter. Doesn’t that seem strange to you, McNabbs?”
“So singular that I don’t believe a word of it,” replied the Major.
“So unique that I don’t believe a word of it,” replied the Major.
Paganel, to his great regret, could not find a single specimen, or he might have shown the incredulous Major the bloody scars on the breast. But he was more fortunate with a strange animal which, hunted by men, cats and dogs, has fled toward the unoccupied country, and is fast disappearing from the fauna of New Zealand. Robert, searching like a ferret, came upon a nest made of interwoven roots, and in it a pair of birds destitute of wings and tail, with four toes, a long snipe-like beak, and a covering of white feathers over the whole body, singular creatures, which seemed to connect the oviparous tribes with the mammifers.
Paganel, much to his disappointment, couldn't find a single specimen to show the skeptical Major the bloody scars on his chest. However, he had better luck with a strange animal that, hunted by humans, cats, and dogs, has fled to the unoccupied areas and is quickly disappearing from New Zealand's wildlife. Robert, searching like a ferret, stumbled upon a nest made of interwoven roots, and inside it were a pair of birds that lacked wings and a tail. They had four toes, a long beak similar to a snipe, and were covered in white feathers. These unusual creatures seemed to link the egg-laying species with mammals.
It was the New Zealand “kiwi,” the Apteryx australis of naturalists, which lives with equal satisfaction on larvae, insects, worms or seeds. This bird is peculiar to the country. It has been introduced into very few of the zoological collections of Europe. Its graceless shape and comical motions have always attracted the notice of travelers, and during the great exploration of the Astrolabe and the Zelee, Dumont d’Urville was principally charged by the Academy of Sciences to bring back a specimen of these singular birds. But in spite of rewards offered to the natives, he could not obtain a single specimen.
It was the New Zealand “kiwi,” the Apteryx australis of naturalists, which happily feeds on larvae, insects, worms, or seeds. This bird is unique to the country. It has been included in very few of the zoological collections in Europe. Its awkward shape and funny movements have always caught the attention of travelers, and during the major exploration of the Astrolabe and the Zelee, Dumont d’Urville was mainly tasked by the Academy of Sciences to bring back a specimen of these unusual birds. But despite the rewards offered to the locals, he couldn't secure a single specimen.
Paganel, who was elated at such a piece of luck, tied the two birds together, and carried them along with the intention of presenting them to the Jardin des Plantes, in Paris. “Presented by M. Jacques Paganel.” He mentally saw the flattering inscription on the handsomest cage in the gardens. Sanguine geographer!
Paganel, who was thrilled by such a stroke of luck, tied the two birds together and carried them with the plan of donating them to the Jardin des Plantes in Paris. “Presented by M. Jacques Paganel.” He imagined the flattering inscription on the most beautiful cage in the gardens. Optimistic geographer!
The party pursued their way without fatigue along the banks of the Waipa. The country was quite deserted; not a trace of natives, nor any track that could betray the existence of man. The stream was fringed with tall bushes, or glided along sloping banks, so that nothing obstructed the view of the low range of hills which closed the eastern end of the valley. With their grotesque shapes, and their outlines lost in a deceptive haze, they brought to mind giant animals, worthy of antediluvian times. They might have been a herd of enormous whales, suddenly turned to stone. These disrupted masses proclaimed their essentially volcanic character. New Zealand is, in fact, a formation of recent plutonic origin. Its emergence from the sea is constantly increasing. Some points are known to have risen six feet in twenty years. Fire still runs across its center, shakes it, convulses it, and finds an outlet in many places by the mouths of geysers and the craters of volcanoes.
The group moved along the banks of the Waipa without getting tired. The area was pretty empty; there wasn’t a single sign of locals or any path that hinted at human presence. The stream was lined with tall bushes and flowed along sloping banks, ensuring an unobstructed view of the low hills that framed the eastern end of the valley. Their strange shapes and hazy outlines reminded one of giant creatures from ancient times. They could have been a herd of massive whales that had suddenly turned to stone. These broken formations revealed their volcanic nature. New Zealand is actually a relatively new land formed from volcanic activity. It’s continually rising from the sea, with some areas known to have gone up six feet in just twenty years. Fire still runs through its center, shaking and convulsing the land, and it escapes in many places through geysers and volcano craters.
At four in the afternoon, nine miles had been easily accomplished. According to the map which Paganel constantly referred to, the confluence of the Waipa and Waikato ought to be reached about five miles further on, and there the night halt could be made. Two or three days would then suffice for the fifty miles which lay between them and the capital; and if Glenarvan happened to fall in with the mail coach that plies between Hawkes’ Bay and Auckland twice a month, eight hours would be sufficient.
At four in the afternoon, they had easily covered nine miles. According to the map that Paganel kept checking, they should reach the point where the Waipa and Waikato rivers meet about five miles ahead, and they could stop for the night there. It would take two or three days to travel the fifty miles to the capital, and if Glenarvan managed to catch the mail coach that runs twice a month between Hawkes’ Bay and Auckland, eight hours would be enough.
“Therefore,” said Glenarvan, “we shall be obliged to camp during the night once more.”
“Therefore,” said Glenarvan, “we’ll have to camp out again tonight.”
“Yes,” said Paganel, “but I hope for the last time.”
“Yes,” said Paganel, “but I hope it’s the last time.”
“I am very glad to think so, for it is very trying for Lady Helena and Mary Grant.”
“I’m really glad to hear that, because it’s really tough for Lady Helena and Mary Grant.”
“And they never utter a murmur,” added John Mangles. “But I think I heard you mention a village at the confluence of these rivers.”
“And they never make a sound,” added John Mangles. “But I think I heard you mention a village where these rivers meet.”
“Yes,” said the geographer, “here it is, marked on Johnston’s map. It is Ngarnavahia, two miles below the junction.”
“Yes,” said the geographer, “here it is, marked on Johnston’s map. It’s Ngarnavahia, two miles down from the junction.”
“Well, could we not stay there for the night? Lady Helena and Miss Grant would not grudge two miles more to find a hotel even of a humble character.”
“Well, can we just stay there for the night? Lady Helena and Miss Grant wouldn’t mind walking two more miles to find a hotel, even if it’s a basic one.”
“A hotel!” cried Paganel, “a hotel in a Maori village! you would not find an inn, not a tavern! This village will be a mere cluster of huts, and so far from seeking rest there, my advice is that you give it a wide berth.”
“A hotel!” shouted Paganel, “a hotel in a Maori village! You wouldn’t find an inn, not even a tavern! This village is just a bunch of huts, and instead of trying to rest there, I suggest you steer clear of it.”
“Your old fears, Paganel!” retorted Glenarvan.
“Your old fears, Paganel!” responded Glenarvan.
“My dear Lord, where Maories are concerned, distrust is safer than confidence. I do not know on what terms they are with the English, whether the insurrection is suppressed or successful, or whether indeed the war may not be going on with full vigor. Modesty apart, people like us would be a prize, and I must say, I would rather forego a taste of Maori hospitality. I think it certainly more prudent to avoid this village of Ngarnavahia, to skirt it at a distance, so as to avoid all encounters with the natives. When we reach Drury it will be another thing, and there our brave ladies will be able to recruit their strength at their leisure.”
"My dear Lord, when it comes to Maoris, it's safer to be distrustful than trusting. I'm not sure what their relationship is with the English, whether the rebellion has been quelled or is still going strong, or if the war is still active. Putting modesty aside, people like us would be a valuable target, and honestly, I’d prefer to pass on experiencing Maori hospitality. I think it’s definitely wiser to steer clear of this village of Ngarnavahia and keep our distance to avoid any encounters with the locals. Once we get to Drury, it'll be a different story, and our brave ladies will have a chance to regain their strength at their own pace."
This advice prevailed. Lady Helena preferred to pass another night in the open air, and not to expose her companions to danger. Neither Mary Grant or she wished to halt, and they continued their march along the river.
This advice won out. Lady Helena decided to spend another night outside, not wanting to put her companions in danger. Neither Mary Grant nor she wanted to stop, so they continued their journey along the river.
Two hours later, the first shades of evening began to fall. The sun, before disappearing below the western horizon, darted some bright rays through an opening in the clouds. The distant eastern summits were empurpled with the parting glories of the day. It was like a flying salute addressed to the way-worn travelers.
Two hours later, the first hints of evening started to appear. The sun, before sinking below the western horizon, shot some bright rays through a gap in the clouds. The far-off eastern peaks were tinged with the fading glories of the day. It felt like a farewell salute to the weary travelers.
Glenarvan and his friends hastened their steps, they knew how short the twilight is in this high latitude, and how quickly the night follows it. They were very anxious to reach the confluence of the two rivers before the darkness overtook them. But a thick fog rose from the ground, and made it very difficult to see the way.
Glenarvan and his friends picked up the pace; they knew how brief twilight is in this high latitude and how fast night comes after it. They were eager to get to the confluence of the two rivers before darkness set in. However, a thick fog rose from the ground, making it hard to see the path.
Fortunately hearing stood them in the stead of sight; shortly a nearer sound of water indicated that the confluence was at hand. At eight o’clock the little troop arrived at the point where the Waipa loses itself in the Waikato, with a moaning sound of meeting waves.
Fortunately, hearing replaced sight for them; soon, the closer sound of water signaled that they were approaching the confluence. At eight o’clock, the small group reached the spot where the Waipa merges with the Waikato, accompanied by the moaning sound of the meeting waves.
“There is the Waikato!” cried Paganel, “and the road to Auckland is along its right bank.”
“There’s the Waikato!” shouted Paganel, “and the road to Auckland runs along its right bank.”
“We shall see that to-morrow,” said the Major, “Let us camp here. It seems to me that that dark shadow is that of a little clump of trees grown expressly to shelter us. Let us have supper and then get some sleep.”
“Let’s check it out tomorrow,” said the Major. “Let’s set up camp here. That dark shadow looks like a little group of trees that have grown just to give us some shelter. Let’s have dinner and then get some sleep.”
“Supper by all means,” said Paganel, “but no fire; nothing but biscuit and dried meat. We have reached this spot incognito, let us try and get away in the same manner. By good luck, the fog is in our favor.”
“Supper for sure,” said Paganel, “but no fire; just biscuits and dried meat. We’ve come to this place without being noticed, so let’s try to leave the same way. Luckily, the fog is on our side.”
The clump of trees was reached and all concurred in the wish of the geographer. The cold supper was eaten without a sound, and presently a profound sleep overcame the travelers, who were tolerably fatigued with their fifteen miles’ march.
The group arrived at the clump of trees and everyone agreed with the geographer's wish. They quietly ate their cold supper, and soon a deep sleep washed over the travelers, who were fairly tired from their fifteen-mile trek.
CHAPTER IX INTRODUCTION TO THE CANNIBALS
THE next morning at daybreak a thick fog was clinging to the surface of the river. A portion of the vapors that saturated the air were condensed by the cold, and lay as a dense cloud on the water. But the rays of the sun soon broke through the watery mass and melted it away.
THE next morning at daybreak, a thick fog was hovering over the river. Some of the moisture in the air had condensed from the cold, forming a dense layer on the water. But the sun's rays quickly pierced through the mist and cleared it away.
A tongue of land, sharply pointed and bristling with bushes, projected into the uniting streams. The swifter waters of the Waipa rushed against the current of the Waikato for a quarter of a mile before they mingled with it; but the calm and majestic river soon quieted the noisy stream and carried it off quietly in its course to the Pacific Ocean.
A narrow piece of land, sharply pointed and covered in bushes, jutted into the merging streams. The faster waters of the Waipa clashed against the current of the Waikato for about a quarter of a mile before blending with it; however, the calm and grand river quickly settled the turbulent stream and carried it smoothly along its journey to the Pacific Ocean.
When the vapor disappeared, a boat was seen ascending the current of the Waikato. It was a canoe seventy feet long, five broad, and three deep; the prow raised like that of a Venetian gondola, and the whole hollowed out of a trunk of a kahikatea. A bed of dry fern was laid at the bottom. It was swiftly rowed by eight oars, and steered with a paddle by a man seated in the stern.
When the mist cleared, a boat was spotted moving up the Waikato River. It was a canoe that was seventy feet long, five feet wide, and three feet deep; the front was raised like a Venetian gondola, and it was carved from a kahikatea tree trunk. A bed of dry fern was spread out at the bottom. It was quickly propelled by eight oars, and guided by a man sitting at the back with a paddle.
This man was a tall Maori, about forty-five years of age, broad-chested, muscular, with powerfully developed hands and feet. His prominent and deeply-furrowed brow, his fierce look, and sinister expression, gave him a formidable aspect.
This man was a tall Maori, around forty-five years old, broad-chested, muscular, with strong hands and feet. His pronounced and deeply-lined forehead, intense gaze, and intimidating expression gave him a powerful presence.
Tattooing, or “moko,” as the New Zealanders call it, is a mark of great distinction. None is worthy of these honorary lines, who has not distinguished himself in repeated fights. The slaves and the lower class can not obtain this decoration. Chiefs of high position may be known by the finish and precision and truth of the design, which sometimes covers their whole bodies with the figures of animals. Some are found to undergo the painful operation of “moko” five times. The more illustrious, the more illustrated, is the rule of New Zealand.
Tattooing, or “moko,” as it's known in New Zealand, is a symbol of great honor. Only those who have proven themselves through multiple battles are worthy of these esteemed designs. Slaves and those of lower social status cannot receive this decoration. High-ranking chiefs can be recognized by the detail, craftsmanship, and accuracy of their tattoos, which often cover their entire bodies with animal images. It's common for some to endure the painful process of getting “moko” five times. In New Zealand, the idea is that the more distinguished you are, the more decorated you become.
Dumont D’Urville has given some curious details as to this custom. He justly observes that “moko” is the counterpart of the armorial bearings of which many families in Europe are so vain. But he remarks that there is this difference: the armorial bearings of Europe are frequently a proof only of the merits of the first who bore them, and are no certificate of the merits of his descendants; while the individual coat-of-arms of the Maori is an irrefragible proof that it was earned by the display of extraordinary personal courage.
Dumont D’Urville shared some interesting insights about this custom. He rightly points out that “moko” is similar to the coats of arms that many families in Europe take pride in. However, he notes a key difference: the coats of arms in Europe often only reflect the achievements of the first person to use them and don’t guarantee anything about the accomplishments of their descendants. In contrast, the personal coat-of-arms of the Maori is undeniable proof that it was earned through exceptional personal bravery.
The practice of tattooing, independently of the consideration it procures, has also a useful aspect. It gives the cutaneous system an increased thickness, enabling it to resist the inclemency of the season and the incessant attacks of the mosquito.
The practice of tattooing, aside from the attention it gets, also has a practical side. It makes the skin thicker, helping it withstand harsh weather and constant mosquito bites.
As to the chief who was steering the canoe, there could be no mistake. The sharpened albatross bone used by the Maori tattooer, had five times scored his countenance. He was in his fifth edition, and betrayed it in his haughty bearing.
As for the chief who was steering the canoe, there was no doubt about it. The sharpened albatross bone used by the Maori tattoo artist had carved his face five times. He was on his fifth version, and you could see it in his proud demeanor.
His figure, draped in a large mat woven of “phormium” trimmed with dogskins, was clothed with a pair of cotton drawers, blood-stained from recent combats. From the pendant lobe of his ears hung earrings of green jade, and round his neck a quivering necklace of “pounamous,” a kind of jade stone sacred among the New Zealanders. At his side lay an English rifle, and a “patou-patou,” a kind of two-headed ax of an emerald color, and eighteen inches long. Beside him sat nine armed warriors of inferior rank, ferocious-looking fellows, some of them suffering from recent wounds. They sat quite motionless, wrapped in their flax mantles. Three savage-looking dogs lay at their feet. The eight rowers in the prow seemed to be servants or slaves of the chief. They rowed vigorously, and propelled the boat against the not very rapid current of the Waikato, with extraordinary velocity.
His figure, wrapped in a large mat made of "phormium" and trimmed with dogskin, wore a pair of cotton underpants, stained with blood from recent battles. Hanging from the lobes of his ears were earrings made of green jade, and around his neck was a quivering necklace of "pounamous," a type of jade stone considered sacred by the New Zealanders. At his side lay an English rifle and a "patou-patou," a two-headed ax in an emerald color, about eighteen inches long. Next to him sat nine armed warriors of lower rank, fierce-looking guys, some of them with recent wounds. They sat completely still, wrapped in their flax cloaks. Three savage-looking dogs rested at their feet. The eight rowers in the front of the boat appeared to be servants or slaves of the chief. They rowed hard and propelled the boat against the not-so-strong current of the Waikato with remarkable speed.
In the center of this long canoe, with their feet tied together, sat ten European prisoners closely packed together.
In the middle of this long canoe, with their feet tied together, sat ten European prisoners tightly packed together.
It was Glenarvan and Lady Helena, Mary Grant, Robert, Paganel, the Major, John Mangles, the steward, and the two sailors.
It was Glenarvan, Lady Helena, Mary Grant, Robert, Paganel, the Major, John Mangles, the steward, and the two sailors.
The night before, the little band had unwittingly, owing to the mist, encamped in the midst of a numerous party of natives. Toward the middle of the night they were surprised in their sleep, were made prisoners, and carried on board the canoe. They had not been ill-treated, so far, but all attempts at resistance had been vain. Their arms and ammunition were in the hands of the savages, and they would soon have been targets for their own balls.
The night before, the small group had unknowingly set up camp in the middle of a large gathering of locals due to the fog. In the middle of the night, they were unexpectedly woken from sleep, captured, and taken onto the canoe. They hadn’t been harmed yet, but any efforts to fight back had been pointless. Their weapons and ammunition were with the locals, and they would soon become targets for their own bullets.
They were soon aware, from a few English words used by the natives, that they were a retreating party of the tribe who had been beaten and decimated by the English troops, and were on their way back to the Upper Waikato. The Maori chief, whose principal warriors had been picked off by the soldiers of the 42nd Regiment, was returning to make a final appeal to the tribes of the Waikato district, so that he might go to the aid of the indomitable William Thompson, who was still holding his own against the conquerors. The chief’s name was “Kai-Koumou,” a name of evil boding in the native language, meaning “He who eats the limbs of his enemy.” He was bold and brave, but his cruelty was equally remarkable. No pity was to be expected at his hands. His name was well known to the English soldiers, and a price had been set on his head by the governor of New Zealand.
They quickly realized, from a few English words spoken by the locals, that they were a retreating group from the tribe that had been defeated and heavily impacted by the English troops, and were heading back to the Upper Waikato. The Maori chief, whose main warriors had been taken out by the soldiers of the 42nd Regiment, was returning to make a final plea to the tribes of the Waikato area, so he could assist the determined William Thompson, who was still holding his ground against the conquerors. The chief was named “Kai-Koumou,” a name with ominous implications in the native language, meaning “He who eats the limbs of his enemy.” He was bold and courageous, but his cruelty was equally infamous. No mercy could be expected from him. His name was well known among the English soldiers, and a bounty had been placed on his head by the governor of New Zealand.
This terrible blow befell Glenarvan at the very moment when he was about to reach the long-desired haven of Auckland, and so regain his own country; but no one who looked at his cool, calm features, could have guessed the anguish he endured. Glenarvan always rose to his misfortunes. He felt that his part was to be the strength and the example of his wife and companions; that he was the head and chief; ready to die for the rest if circumstances required it. He was of a deeply religious turn of mind, and never lost his trust in Providence nor his belief in the sacred character of his enterprise. In the midst of this crowning peril he did not give way to any feeling of regret at having been induced to venture into this country of savages.
This terrible blow struck Glenarvan just as he was about to reach the long-awaited haven of Auckland and return to his homeland. However, anyone who looked at his calm, composed face wouldn't have guessed the pain he was feeling. Glenarvan always rose to his challenges. He understood that his role was to be the strength and example for his wife and companions; he was the leader, ready to sacrifice himself for the others if needed. He had a deeply religious mindset and never lost faith in Providence or belief in the noble purpose of his mission. Even amid this greatest danger, he didn’t feel any regret for having taken the risk to venture into this land of savages.
His companions were worthy of him; they entered into his lofty views; and judging by their haughty demeanor, it would scarcely have been supposed that they were hurrying to the final catastrophe. With one accord, and by Glenarvan’s advice, they resolved to affect utter indifference before the natives. It was the only way to impress these ferocious natures. Savages in general, and particularly the Maories, have a notion of dignity from which they never derogate. They respect, above all things, coolness and courage. Glenarvan was aware that by this mode of procedure, he and his companions would spare themselves needless humiliation.
His companions were just as impressive as he was; they grasped his grand ideas, and judging by their arrogant attitude, you would hardly think they were rushing toward disaster. Together, and following Glenarvan's suggestion, they decided to act completely indifferent in front of the locals. It was the only way to make an impression on these fierce people. Savages in general, especially the Maories, have a sense of dignity they never compromise. They value calmness and bravery above all else. Glenarvan knew that by taking this approach, he and his companions would avoid unnecessary humiliation.
From the moment of embarking, the natives, who were very taciturn, like all savages, had scarcely exchanged a word, but from the few sentences they did utter, Glenarvan felt certain that the English language was familiar to them. He therefore made up his mind to question the chief on the fate that awaited them. Addressing himself to Kai-Koumou, he said in a perfectly unconcerned voice:
From the moment they set off, the natives, who were pretty quiet, like all unsophisticated people, hardly said a word. But from the few things they did say, Glenarvan was sure they understood English. So, he decided to ask the chief about what was in store for them. Speaking to Kai-Koumou, he said in a completely casual tone:
“Where are we going, chief?”
“Where are we heading, boss?”
Kai-Koumou looked coolly at him and made no answer.
Kai-Koumou looked at him calmly and didn't respond.
“What are you going to do with us?” pursued Glenarvan.
“What are you going to do with us?” Glenarvan asked.
A sudden gleam flashed into the eyes of Kai-Koumou, and he said in a deep voice:
A sudden spark lit up Kai-Koumou's eyes, and he said in a deep voice:
“Exchange you, if your own people care to have you; eat you if they don’t.”
“Trade you to your own people if they want you; eat you if they don’t.”
Glenarvan asked no further questions; but hope revived in his heart. He concluded that some Maori chiefs had fallen into the hands of the English, and that the natives would try to get them exchanged. So they had a chance of salvation, and the case was not quite so desperate.
Glenarvan didn’t ask any more questions, but hope sparked back to life in his heart. He figured that some Maori chiefs had been captured by the English, and that the locals would try to negotiate their release. So there was a chance for salvation, and things weren’t quite as hopeless as before.
The canoe was speeding rapidly up the river. Paganel, whose excitable temperament always rebounded from one extreme to the other, had quite regained his spirits. He consoled himself that the natives were saving them the trouble of the journey to the English outposts, and that was so much gain. So he took it quite quietly and followed on the map the course of the Waikato across the plains and valleys of the province. Lady Helena and Mary Grant, concealing their alarm, conversed in a low voice with Glenarvan, and the keenest physiognomists would have failed to see any anxiety in their faces.
The canoe was speeding quickly up the river. Paganel, whose excitable nature always swung from one extreme to another, had regained his spirits. He reassured himself that the locals were sparing them the hassle of traveling to the British outposts, which was a definite advantage. So he took it easy and followed the course of the Waikato on the map across the plains and valleys of the province. Lady Helena and Mary Grant, hiding their worry, spoke quietly with Glenarvan, and even the most perceptive observers wouldn’t have noticed any concern on their faces.
The Waikato is the national river in New Zealand. It is to the Maories what the Rhine is to the Germans, and the Danube to the Slavs. In its course of 200 miles it waters the finest lands of the North Island, from the province of Wellington to the province of Auckland. It gave its name to all those indomitable tribes of the river district, which rose en masse against the invaders.
The Waikato is New Zealand's national river. It's to the Māori what the Rhine is to the Germans and the Danube is to the Slavs. Over its 200-mile journey, it irrigates some of the best land in the North Island, from Wellington to Auckland. It was named after all those resilient tribes in the river area that united against the invaders.
The waters of this river are still almost strangers to any craft but the native canoe. The most audacious tourist will scarcely venture to invade these sacred shores; in fact, the Upper Waikato is sealed against profane Europeans.
The waters of this river are still mostly unfamiliar to any boats except the native canoe. Even the boldest tourist hardly dares to explore these sacred shores; in reality, the Upper Waikato is closed off to disrespectful Europeans.
Paganel was aware of the feelings of veneration with which the natives regard this great arterial stream. He knew that the English and German naturalists had never penetrated further than its junction with the Waipa. He wondered how far the good pleasure of Kai-Koumou would carry his captives? He could not have guessed, but for hearing the word “Taupo” repeatedly uttered between the chief and his warriors. He consulted his map and saw that “Taupo” was the name of a lake celebrated in geographical annals, and lying in the most mountainous part of the island, at the southern extremity of Auckland province. The Waikato passes through this lake and then flows on for 120 miles.
Paganel understood the deep respect the locals had for this major river. He knew that English and German naturalists had never gone beyond its meeting point with the Waipa. He wondered how far Kai-Koumou would take his captives. He couldn't have guessed, if he hadn't heard the word "Taupo" mentioned frequently between the chief and his warriors. He checked his map and found that "Taupo" was the name of a well-known lake in geography, located in the most mountainous area of the island, at the southern edge of Auckland province. The Waikato flows through this lake and continues for 120 miles.
CHAPTER X A MOMENTOUS INTERVIEW
AN unfathomable gulf twenty-five miles long, and twenty miles broad was produced, but long before historic times, by the falling in of caverns among the trachytic lavas of the center of the island. And these waters falling from the surrounding heights have taken possession of this vast basin. The gulf has become a lake, but it is also an abyss, and no lead-line has yet sounded its depths.
A huge gulf, twenty-five miles long and twenty miles wide, was formed long before recorded history when caves collapsed among the trachytic lavas in the center of the island. The waters that pour down from the surrounding heights have filled this enormous basin. The gulf has turned into a lake, but it’s also a deep abyss, and no one has been able to measure its depths yet.
Such is the wondrous lake of Taupo, lying 1,250 feet above the level of the sea, and in view of an amphitheater of mountains 2,400 feet high. On the west are rocky peaks of great size; on the north lofty summits clothed with low trees; on the east a broad beach with a road track, and covered with pumice stones, which shimmer through the leafy screen of the bushes; on the southern side rise volcanic cones behind a forest flat. Such is the majestic frame that incloses this vast sheet of water whose roaring tempests rival the cyclones of Ocean.
Such is the amazing Lake Taupo, sitting 1,250 feet above sea level, surrounded by mountains that rise 2,400 feet high. To the west are massive rocky peaks; to the north are tall summits covered with small trees; to the east is a wide beach with a dirt road, scattered with pumice stones that shine through the leafy cover of the bushes; and on the southern side, volcanic cones rise behind a flat forest. This is the breathtaking setting that surrounds this vast body of water, where roaring storms rival the cyclones of the ocean.
The whole region boils like an immense cauldron hung over subterranean fires. The ground vibrates from the agitation of the central furnace. Hot springs filter out everywhere. The crust of the earth cracks in great rifts like a cake, too quickly baked.
The entire area bubbles like a giant pot over underground flames. The ground shakes from the energy of the central heat source. Hot springs are bubbling up everywhere. The earth’s crust splits in huge cracks like a cake that was baked too quickly.
About a quarter of a mile off, on a craggy spur of the mountain stood a “pah,” or Maori fortress. The prisoners, whose feet and hands were liberated, were landed one by one, and conducted into it by the warriors. The path which led up to the intrenchment, lay across fields of “phormium” and a grove of beautiful trees, the “kai-kateas” with persistent leaves and red berries; “dracaenas australis,” the “ti-trees” of the natives, whose crown is a graceful counterpart of the cabbage-palm, and “huious,” which are used to give a black dye to cloth. Large doves with metallic sheen on their plumage, and a world of starlings with reddish carmeles, flew away at the approach of the natives.
About a quarter of a mile away, on a rocky outcrop of the mountain, stood a “pah,” or Maori fortress. The prisoners, whose hands and feet were freed, were brought in one by one by the warriors. The path leading up to the fort was lined with fields of “phormium” and a grove of beautiful trees, the “kai-kateas” with their thick leaves and red berries; “dracaenas australis,” the “ti-trees” of the locals, which have graceful tops like cabbage palms, and “huious,” used to make a black dye for cloth. Large doves with shiny plumage and a host of starlings with reddish carmels took off at the approach of the natives.
After a rather circuitous walk, Glenarvan and his party arrived at the “pah.”
After a long and winding walk, Glenarvan and his group reached the “pah.”
The fortress was defended by an outer inclosure of strong palisades, fifteen feet high; a second line of stakes; then a fence composed of osiers, with loop-holes, inclosed Verne the inner space, that is the plateau of the “pah,” on which were erected the Maori buildings, and about forty huts arranged symmetrically.
The fortress was protected by a strong outer fence made of high wooden stakes, fifteen feet tall; a second line of stakes; and a fence made of willow branches with openings to shoot through, surrounding the inner area, which was the plateau of the “pah,” where the Maori buildings stood along with about forty huts arranged in a symmetrical layout.
When the captives approached they were horror-struck at the sight of the heads which adorned the posts of the inner circle. Lady Helena and Mary Grant turned away their eyes more with disgust than with terror. These heads were those of hostile chiefs who had fallen in battle, and whose bodies had served to feed the conquerors. The geographer recognized that it was so, from their eye sockets being hollow and deprived of eye-balls.
When the captives got closer, they were horrified by the sight of the heads decorating the posts of the inner circle. Lady Helena and Mary Grant turned away, feeling more disgust than fear. These heads belonged to enemy leaders who had died in battle, and their bodies had been used to feed the victors. The geographer realized this, noting their hollow eye sockets, which were missing eyeballs.
Glenarvan and his companions had taken in all this scene at a glance. They stood near an empty house, waiting the pleasure of the chief, and exposed to the abuse of a crowd of old crones. This troop of harpies surrounded them, shaking their fists, howling and vociferating. Some English words that escaped their coarse mouths left no doubt that they were clamoring for immediate vengeance.
Glenarvan and his friends took in the whole scene in an instant. They stood by an empty house, waiting for the chief, while being exposed to the insults of a group of old women. This crowd of shrieking women surrounded them, shaking their fists, shouting and screaming. A few English words that slipped from their rough mouths made it clear they were demanding immediate revenge.
In the midst of all these cries and threats, Lady Helena, tranquil to all outward seeming, affected an indifference she was far from feeling. This courageous woman made heroic efforts to restrain herself, lest she should disturb Glenarvan’s coolness. Poor Mary Grant felt her heart sink within her, and John Mangles stood by ready to die in her behalf. His companions bore the deluge of invectives each according to his disposition; the Major with utter indifference, Paganel with exasperation that increased every moment.
In the chaos of all the yelling and threats, Lady Helena, appearing calm on the outside, pretended to be indifferent, even though she wasn't. This brave woman made strong efforts to hold herself together to avoid upsetting Glenarvan's composure. Poor Mary Grant felt her heart drop, while John Mangles stood by, prepared to do anything for her. His companions handled the storm of insults in their own ways; the Major remained completely indifferent, while Paganel's frustration grew by the minute.
Glenarvan, to spare Lady Helena the attacks of these witches, walked straight up to Kai-Koumou, and pointing to the hideous group:
Glenarvan, to protect Lady Helena from the assaults of these witches, walked right up to Kai-Koumou and pointed at the ugly group:
“Send them away,” said he.
"Send them away," he said.
The Maori chief stared fixedly at his prisoner without speaking; and then, with a nod, he silenced the noisy horde. Glenarvan bowed, as a sign of thanks, and went slowly back to his place.
The Maori chief stared intently at his prisoner without saying a word; then, with a nod, he quieted the loud crowd. Glenarvan nodded as a sign of thanks and slowly returned to his spot.
At this moment a hundred Maories were assembled in the “pah,” old men, full grown men, youths; the former were calm, but gloomy, awaiting the orders of Kai-Koumou; the others gave themselves up to the most violent sorrow, bewailing their parents and friends who had fallen in the late engagements.
At that moment, a hundred Māori were gathered in the "pah"—old men, grown men, and young men. The older men were calm but somber, waiting for Kai-Koumou's orders, while the younger ones were overwhelmed with intense grief, mourning their parents and friends who had died in the recent battles.
Kai-Koumou was the only one of all the chiefs that obeyed the call of William Thompson, who had returned to the lake district, and he was the first to announce to his tribe the defeat of the national insurrection, beaten on the plains of the lower Waikato. Of the two hundred warriors who, under his orders, hastened to the defence of the soil, one hundred and fifty were missing on his return. Allowing for a number being made prisoners by the invaders, how many must be lying on the field of battle, never to return to the country of their ancestors!
Kai-Koumou was the only chief who responded to William Thompson’s call when he returned to the lake district. He was the first to inform his tribe about the defeat of the national uprising, which was crushed on the plains of the lower Waikato. Out of the two hundred warriors who rushed to defend their land under his command, one hundred and fifty were unaccounted for when he came back. Considering that some were captured by the invaders, how many must be lying on the battlefield, never to return to their ancestors’ land?
This was the secret of the outburst of grief with which the tribe saluted the arrival of Kai-Koumou. Up to that moment nothing had been known of the last defeat, and the fatal news fell on them like a thunder clap.
This was the reason for the intense grief with which the tribe welcomed the arrival of Kai-Koumou. Until that moment, they had no idea about the latest defeat, and the shocking news hit them like a thunderclap.
Among the savages, sorrow is always manifested by physical signs; the parents and friends of deceased warriors, the women especially, lacerated their faces and shoulders with sharpened shells. The blood spurted out and blended with their tears. Deep wounds denoted great despair. The unhappy Maories, bleeding and excited, were hideous to look upon.
Among the tribes, grief is always shown through physical signs; the parents and friends of fallen warriors, especially the women, would cut their faces and shoulders with sharp shells. Blood would gush out and mix with their tears. Deep wounds indicated profound sorrow. The distressed Maories, bleeding and agitated, looked terrible to behold.
There was another serious element in their grief. Not only had they lost the relative or friend they mourned, but his bones would be missing in the family mausoleum. In the Maori religion the possession of these relics is regarded as indispensable to the destinies of the future life; not the perishable flesh, but the bones, which are collected with the greatest care, cleaned, scraped, polished, even varnished, and then deposited in the “oudoupa,” that is the “house of glory.” These tombs are adorned with wooden statues, representing with perfect exactness the tattoo of the deceased. But now their tombs would be left empty, the religious rites would be unsolemnized, and the bones that escaped the teeth of the wild dog would whiten without burial on the field of battle.
There was another serious aspect to their grief. Not only had they lost the relative or friend they mourned, but his bones would be absent from the family mausoleum. In Maori beliefs, having these remains is crucial to the fate of the afterlife; it's not the decaying flesh, but the bones that are carefully collected, cleaned, scraped, polished, and even varnished before being placed in the “oudoupa,” or “house of glory.” These tombs are decorated with wooden statues that accurately reflect the deceased's tattoos. But now their tombs would remain empty, the religious ceremonies would go unheld, and the bones that escaped the wild dogs' teeth would lay unburied on the battlefield.
Then the sorrowful chorus redoubled. The menaces of the women were intensified by the imprecations of the men against the Europeans. Abusive epithets were lavished, the accompanying gestures became more violent. The howl was about to end in brutal action.
Then the sad chorus grew louder. The threats from the women were fueled by the men's curses directed at the Europeans. Insults flew, and the gestures became more aggressive. The yelling was on the verge of turning into violent action.
Kai-Koumou, fearing that he might be overpowered by the fanatics of his tribe, conducted his prisoners to a sacred place, on an abruptly raised plateau at the other end of the “pah.” This hut rested against a mound elevated a hundred feet above it, which formed the steep outer buttress of the entrenchment. In this “Ware-Atoua,” sacred house, the priests or arikis taught the Maories about a Triune God, father, son, and bird, or spirit. The large, well constructed hut, contained the sacred and choice food which Maoui-Ranga-Rangui eats by the mouths of his priests.
Kai-Koumou, worried that he might be overwhelmed by the fanatics in his tribe, took his prisoners to a sacred place on a steep plateau at the far end of the “pah.” This hut stood against a mound that was a hundred feet high, forming the steep outer wall of the entrenchment. In this “Ware-Atoua,” a sacred house, the priests or arikis taught the Maoris about a Triune God: father, son, and bird, or spirit. The large, well-built hut held the sacred and special food that Maoui-Ranga-Rangui consumed through the mouths of his priests.
In this place, and safe for the moment from the frenzied natives, the captives lay down on the flax mats. Lady Helena was quite exhausted, her moral energies prostrate, and she fell helpless into her husband’s arms.
In this place, and safe for the moment from the frantic natives, the captives lay down on the flax mats. Lady Helena was completely worn out, her moral strength drained, and she fell helplessly into her husband’s arms.
Glenarvan pressed her to his bosom and said:
Glenarvan pulled her close and said:
“Courage, my dear Helena; Heaven will not forsake us!”
“Courage, my dear Helena; heaven won’t abandon us!”
Robert was scarcely in when he jumped on Wilson’s shoulders, and squeezed his head through a crevice left between the roof and the walls, from which chaplets of amulets were hung. From that elevation he could see the whole extent of the “pah,” and as far as Kai-Koumou’s house.
Robert had barely entered when he jumped onto Wilson's shoulders and squeezed his head through a gap between the roof and the walls, where strings of amulets were hanging. From that height, he could see the entire area of the “pah” and all the way to Kai-Koumou’s house.
“They are all crowding round the chief,” said he softly. “They are throwing their arms about. . . . They are howling. . . . . Kai-Koumou is trying to speak.”
“They're all gathered around the chief,” he said quietly. “They're throwing their arms around... They're howling... Kai-Koumou is trying to speak.”
Then he was silent for a few minutes.
Then he was quiet for a few minutes.
“Kai-Koumou is speaking. . . . The savages are quieter. . . . . They are listening. . . . .”
“Kai-Koumou is speaking... The savages are quieter... They are listening...”
“Evidently,” said the Major, “this chief has a personal interest in protecting us. He wants to exchange his prisoners for some chiefs of his tribe! But will his warriors consent?”
“Clearly,” said the Major, “this chief is personally invested in protecting us. He wants to trade his prisoners for some leaders of his tribe! But will his warriors agree?”
“Yes! . . . They are listening. . . . . They have dispersed, some are gone into their huts. . . . The others have left the intrenchment.”
“Yes! . . . They are listening. . . . . They have spread out, some have gone into their huts. . . . The others have left the fortification.”
“Are you sure?” said the Major.
“Are you sure?” asked the Major.
“Yes, Mr. McNabbs,” replied Robert, “Kai-Koumou is left alone with the warriors of his canoe. . . . . Oh! one of them is coming up here. . . . .”
“Yes, Mr. McNabbs,” replied Robert, “Kai-Koumou is left alone with the warriors from his canoe. . . . . Oh! one of them is coming up here. . . . .”
“Come down, Robert,” said Glenarvan.
“Come down, Robert,” Glenarvan said.
At this moment, Lady Helena who had risen, seized her husband’s arm.
At that moment, Lady Helena, who had stood up, grabbed her husband’s arm.
“Edward,” she said in a resolute tone, “neither Mary Grant nor I must fall into the hands of these savages alive!”
“Edward,” she said firmly, “neither Mary Grant nor I can end up in the hands of these savages alive!”
And so saying, she handed Glenarvan a loaded revolver.
And with that, she handed Glenarvan a loaded revolver.
“Fire-arm!” exclaimed Glenarvan, with flashing eyes.
“Gun!” exclaimed Glenarvan, his eyes shining.
“Yes! the Maories do not search their prisoners. But, Edward, this is for us, not for them.”
“Yes! The Maoris don’t search their prisoners. But, Edward, this is for us, not for them.”
Glenarvan slipped the revolver under his coat; at the same moment the mat at the entrance was raised, and a native entered.
Glenarvan slid the revolver under his coat; just then, the mat at the entrance was lifted, and a local walked in.
He motioned to the prisoners to follow him. Glenarvan and the rest walked across the “pah” and stopped before Kai-Koumou. He was surrounded by the principal warriors of his tribe, and among them the Maori whose canoe joined that of the Kai-Koumou at the confluence of Pohain-henna, on the Waikato. He was a man about forty years of age, powerfully built and of fierce and cruel aspect. His name was Kara-Tete, meaning “the irascible” in the native tongue. Kai-Koumou treated him with a certain tone of respect, and by the fineness of his tattoo, it was easy to perceive that Kara-Tete held a lofty position in the tribe, but a keen observer would have guessed the feeling of rivalry that existed between these two chiefs. The Major observed that the influence of Kara-Tete gave umbrage to Kai-Koumou. They both ruled the Waikato tribes, and were equal in authority. During this interview Kai-Koumou smiled, but his eyes betrayed a deep-seated enmity.
He signaled the prisoners to follow him. Glenarvan and the others walked across the “pah” and stopped in front of Kai-Koumou. He was surrounded by the main warriors of his tribe, including the Maori whose canoe had joined that of the Kai-Koumou at the confluence of Pohain-henna on the Waikato. He was about forty years old, strongly built, and had a fierce and cruel look. His name was Kara-Tete, which means “the irascible” in the native language. Kai-Koumou treated him with a certain level of respect, and his intricate tattoos made it clear that Kara-Tete held a high position in the tribe, but a keen observer would have sensed the rivalry between these two chiefs. The Major noticed that Kara-Tete's influence irritated Kai-Koumou. They both ruled the Waikato tribes and held equal authority. During this meeting, Kai-Koumou smiled, but his eyes revealed a deep-seated animosity.
Kai-Koumou interrogated Glenarvan.
Kai-Koumou questioned Glenarvan.
“You are English?” said he.
"Are you English?" he asked.
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, unhesitatingly, as his nationality would facilitate the exchange.
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan, without hesitation, since his nationality would make the exchange easier.
“And your companions?” said Kai-Koumou.
“And your friends?” said Kai-Koumou.
“My companions are English like myself. We are shipwrecked travelers, but it may be important to state that we have taken no part in the war.”
“My companions are English just like me. We’re shipwrecked travelers, but it’s worth mentioning that we haven’t been involved in the war.”
“That matters little!” was the brutal answer of Kara-Tete. “Every Englishman is an enemy. Your people invaded our island! They robbed our fields! they burned our villages!”
“That doesn’t matter much!” was Kara-Tete’s harsh reply. “Every Englishman is an enemy. Your people invaded our island! They stole from our fields! They burned our villages!”
“They were wrong!” said Glenarvan, quietly. “I say so, because I think it, not because I am in your power.”
“They were wrong!” Glenarvan said softly. “I believe that, not because you have control over me, but because it's what I think.”
“Listen,” said Kai-Koumou, “the Tohonga, the chief priest of Noui-Atoua has fallen into the hands of your brethren; he is a prisoner among the Pakekas. Our deity has commanded us to ransom him. For my own part, I would rather have torn out your heart, I would have stuck your head, and those of your companions, on the posts of that palisade. But Noui-Atoua has spoken.”
“Listen,” said Kai-Koumou, “the Tohonga, the chief priest of Noui-Atoua, has been captured by your people; he’s a prisoner among the Pakekas. Our god has ordered us to rescue him. Personally, I would have preferred to rip out your heart, to display your head and those of your friends on the posts of that palisade. But Noui-Atoua has spoken.”
As he uttered these words, Kai-Koumou, who till now had been quite unmoved, trembled with rage, and his features expressed intense ferocity.
As he spoke those words, Kai-Koumou, who had until now remained completely calm, shook with anger, and his face showed intense fury.
Then after a few minutes’ interval he proceeded more calmly.
Then, after a few minutes, he continued more calmly.
“Do you think the English will exchange you for our Tohonga?”
“Do you think the English will trade you for our Tohonga?”
Glenarvan hesitated, all the while watching the Maori chief.
Glenarvan hesitated, keeping an eye on the Maori chief.
“I do not know,” said he, after a moment of silence.
“I don’t know,” he said after a moment of silence.
“Speak,” returned Kai-Koumou, “is your life worth that of our Tohonga?”
“Speak,” replied Kai-Koumou, “is your life worth more than that of our Tohonga?”
“No,” replied Glenarvan. “I am neither a chief nor a priest among my own people.”
“No,” replied Glenarvan. “I’m neither a leader nor a priest among my own people.”
Paganel, petrified at this reply, looked at Glenarvan in amazement. Kai-Koumou appeared equally astonished.
Paganel, shocked by this reply, stared at Glenarvan in disbelief. Kai-Koumou seemed just as surprised.
“You doubt it then?” said he.
“You're doubting it then?” he asked.
“I do not know,” replied Glenarvan.
"I have no idea," replied Glenarvan.
“Your people will not accept you as an exchange for Tohonga?”
“Your people won't accept you in exchange for Tohonga?”
“Me alone? no,” repeated Glenarvan. “All of us perhaps they might.”
“Me alone? No,” repeated Glenarvan. “All of us, maybe they would.”
“Our Maori custom,” replied Kai-Koumou, “is head for head.”
“Our Māori custom,” replied Kai-Koumou, “is eye for an eye.”
“Offer first these ladies in exchange for your priest,” said Glenarvan, pointing to Lady Helena and Mary Grant.
“First, offer these ladies in exchange for your priest,” said Glenarvan, pointing to Lady Helena and Mary Grant.
Lady Helena was about to interrupt him. But the Major held her back.
Lady Helena was about to interrupt him. But the Major stopped her.
“Those two ladies,” continued Glenarvan, bowing respectfully toward Lady Helena and Mary Grant, “are personages of rank in their own country.”
“Those two ladies,” continued Glenarvan, bowing respectfully toward Lady Helena and Mary Grant, “are important figures in their own country.”
The warrior gazed coldly at his prisoner. An evil smile relaxed his lips for a moment; then he controlled himself, and in a voice of ill-concealed anger:
The warrior looked coldly at his prisoner. A wicked smile briefly crossed his lips; then he composed himself and said in a voice filled with barely hidden anger:
“Do you hope to deceive Kai-Koumou with lying words, accursed Pakeka? Can not the eyes of Kai-Koumou read hearts?”
“Do you think you can fool Kai-Koumou with your lies, cursed Pakeka? Can't Kai-Koumou see what's in your heart?”
And pointing to Lady Helena: “That is your wife?” he said.
And pointing to Lady Helena, he said, “Is that your wife?”
“No! mine!” exclaimed Kara-Tete.
“No! It's mine!” exclaimed Kara-Tete.
And then pushing his prisoners aside, he laid his hand on the shoulder of Lady Helena, who turned pale at his touch.
And then, pushing his prisoners aside, he put his hand on Lady Helena's shoulder, causing her to go pale at his touch.
“Edward!” cried the unfortunate woman in terror.
“Edward!” the scared woman yelled.
Glenarvan, without a word, raised his arm, a shot! and Kara-Tete fell at his feet.
Glenarvan, without a word, raised his arm, fired a shot! and Kara-Tete fell at his feet.
The sound brought a crowd of natives to the spot. A hundred arms were ready, and Glenarvan’s revolver was snatched from him.
The sound attracted a crowd of locals to the area. A hundred hands were ready, and Glenarvan’s revolver was taken from him.
Kai-Koumou glanced at Glenarvan with a curious expression: then with one hand protecting Glenarvan, with the other he waved off the crowd who were rushing on the party.
Kai-Koumou looked at Glenarvan with a curious expression; then, with one hand shielding Glenarvan, he used the other to signal the crowd that was rushing towards the group.
At last his voice was heard above the tumult.
At last, his voice was heard above the noise.
“Taboo! Taboo!” he shouted.
“Taboo! Taboo!” he yelled.
At that word the crowd stood still before Glenarvan and his companions, who for the time were preserved by a supernatural influence.
At that word, the crowd froze in front of Glenarvan and his companions, who, for the moment, were protected by a supernatural force.
A few minutes after they were re-conducted to Ware-Atoua, which was their prison. But Robert Grant and Paganel were not with them.
A few minutes after they were taken back to Ware-Atoua, which was their prison. But Robert Grant and Paganel weren't with them.
CHAPTER XI THE CHIEF’S FUNERAL
KAI-KOUMOU, as frequently happens among the Maories, joined the title of ariki to that of tribal chief. He was invested with the dignity of priest, and, as such, he had the power to throw over persons or things the superstitious protection of the “taboo.”
KAI-KOUMOU, like many Maoris, combined the titles of ariki and tribal chief. He was granted the honor of being a priest, which gave him the ability to impose the superstitious protection of the “taboo” on people or objects.
The “taboo,” which is common to all the Polynesian races, has the primary effect of isolating the “tabooed” person and preventing the use of “tabooed” things. According to the Maori doctrine, anyone who laid sacrilegious hands on what had been declared “taboo,” would be punished with death by the insulted deity, and even if the god delayed the vindication of his power, the priests took care to accelerate his vengeance.
The "taboo," which is found among all Polynesian cultures, primarily serves to isolate the "tabooed" individual and restrict the use of "tabooed" items. According to Maori beliefs, anyone who desecrated what was considered "taboo" would face death from the offended deity. Even if the god took time to respond, the priests made sure to hasten his wrath.
By the chiefs, the “taboo” is made a political engine, except in some cases, for domestic reasons. For instance, a native is tabooed for several days when his hair is cut; when he is tattooed; when he is building a canoe, or a house; when he is seriously ill, and when he is dead. If excessive consumption threatens to exterminate the fish of a river, or ruin the early crop of sweet potatoes, these things are put under the protection of the taboo. If a chief wishes to clear his house of hangers-on, he taboos it; if an English trader displeases him he is tabooed. His interdict has the effect of the old royal “veto.”
By the chiefs, the “taboo” becomes a tool for political control, except in certain domestic situations. For example, a person is considered taboo for several days when they get their hair cut, when they get tattooed, when they are building a canoe or a house, when they are seriously ill, and when they pass away. If overfishing threatens to wipe out the fish in a river or ruin the early sweet potato harvest, these issues come under the protection of the taboo. If a chief wants to get rid of unwanted visitors at his house, he places it under taboo; if an English trader displeases him, he is also tabooed. His ban works like the old royal “veto.”
If an object is tabooed, no one can touch it with impunity. When a native is under the interdict, certain aliments are denied him for a prescribed period. If he is relieved, as regards the severe diet, his slaves feed him with the viands he is forbidden to touch with his hands; if he is poor and has no slaves, he has to take up the food with his mouth, like an animal.
If something is considered taboo, no one can touch it without consequences. When a person is under this restriction, certain foods are denied to them for a specific time. If they are allowed to eat normally again, their servants feed them the foods they are forbidden to touch with their hands; if they are poor and have no servants, they have to pick up the food with their mouths, like an animal.
In short, the most trifling acts of the Maories are directed and modified by this singular custom, the deity is brought into constant contact with their daily life. The taboo has the same weight as a law; or rather, the code of the Maories, indisputable and undisputed, is comprised in the frequent applications of the taboo.
In short, even the smallest actions of the Maoris are shaped and influenced by this unique custom, bringing the divine into their everyday lives. The taboo carries as much weight as a law; in fact, the Maori code, accepted without question, is made up of the regular enforcement of the taboo.
As to the prisoners confined in the Ware-Atoua, it was an arbitrary taboo which had saved them from the fury of the tribe. Some of the natives, friends and partisans of Kai-Koumou, desisted at once on hearing their chief’s voice, and protected the captives from the rest.
As for the prisoners held in the Ware-Atoua, it was a random taboo that had spared them from the tribe's anger. Some of the locals, allies and supporters of Kai-Koumou, immediately stopped when they heard their leader's voice and defended the captives from the others.
Glenarvan cherished no illusive hopes as to his own fate; nothing but his death could atone for the murder of a chief, and among these people death was only the concluding act of a martyrdom of torture. Glenarvan, therefore, was fully prepared to pay the penalty of the righteous indignation that nerved his arm, but he hoped that the wrath of Kai-Koumou would not extend beyond himself.
Glenarvan held no false hopes about his own fate; only his death could make up for the murder of a chief, and for these people, death was just the final blow in a painful journey. Glenarvan was ready to face the consequences of the righteous anger that fueled him, but he hoped that Kai-Koumou's fury wouldn’t reach anyone else but him.
What a night he and his companions passed! Who could picture their agonies or measure their sufferings? Robert and Paganel had not been restored to them, but their fate was no doubtful matter. They were too surely the first victims of the frenzied natives. Even McNabbs, who was always sanguine, had abandoned hope. John Mangles was nearly frantic at the sight of Mary Grant’s despair at being separated from her brother. Glenarvan pondered over the terrible request of Lady Helena, who preferred dying by his hand to submitting to torture and slavery. How was he to summon the terrible courage!
What a night he and his friends had! Who could imagine their pain or gauge their suffering? Robert and Paganel were still missing, but their fate was clear. They were definitely the first casualties of the crazed locals. Even McNabbs, who was usually optimistic, had given up hope. John Mangles was almost beside himself seeing Mary Grant's anguish at being apart from her brother. Glenarvan contemplated Lady Helena's awful request, where she would rather die by his hand than endure torture and slavery. How was he supposed to muster the dreadful courage?
“And Mary? who has a right to strike her dead?” thought John, whose heart was broken.
“And Mary? Who has the right to kill her?” thought John, whose heart was shattered.
Escape was clearly impossible. Ten warriors, armed to the teeth, kept watch at the door of Ware-Atoua.
Escape was clearly impossible. Ten warriors, fully armed, stood guard at the door of Ware-Atoua.
The morning of February 13th arrived. No communication had taken place between the natives and the “tabooed” prisoners. A limited supply of provisions was in the house, which the unhappy inmates scarcely touched. Misery deadened the pangs of hunger. The day passed without change, and without hope; the funeral ceremonies of the dead chief would doubtless be the signal for their execution.
The morning of February 13th came. There had been no communication between the natives and the “tabooed” prisoners. A small amount of food was in the house, which the unfortunate captives barely touched. Their misery numbed their hunger. The day went by without any changes or hope; the funeral ceremonies for the deceased chief would surely be the signal for their execution.
Although Glenarvan did not conceal from himself the probability that Kai-Koumou had given up all idea of exchange, the Major still cherished a spark of hope.
Although Glenarvan acknowledged the likelihood that Kai-Koumou had abandoned any thought of a trade, the Major still held on to a glimmer of hope.
“Who knows,” said he, as he reminded Glenarvan of the effect produced on the chief by the death of Kara-Tete—“who knows but that Kai-Koumou, in his heart, is very much obliged to you?”
“Who knows,” he said, reminding Glenarvan of the impact the death of Kara-Tete had on the chief—“who knows, maybe Kai-Koumou is actually very grateful to you in his heart?”
But even McNabbs’ remarks failed to awaken hope in Glenarvan’s mind. The next day passed without any appearance of preparation for their punishment; and this was the reason of the delay.
But even McNabbs' comments couldn't spark any hope in Glenarvan's mind. The next day went by without any sign of getting ready for their punishment, and that was the reason for the delay.
The Maories believe that for three days after death the soul inhabits the body, and therefore, for three times twenty-four hours, the corpse remains unburied. This custom was rigorously observed. Till February 15th the “pah” was deserted.
The Maori believe that for three days after death, the soul stays in the body, so for three times twenty-four hours, the corpse is left unburied. This tradition was strictly followed. Until February 15th, the village was empty.
John Mangles, hoisted on Wilson’s shoulders, frequently reconnoitered the outer defences. Not a single native was visible; only the watchful sentinels relieving guard at the door of the Ware-Atoua.
John Mangles, carried on Wilson’s shoulders, often surveyed the outer defenses. Not a single native was in sight; only the alert sentinels changing shifts at the door of the Ware-Atoua.
But on the third day the huts opened; all the savages, men, women, and children, in all several hundred Maories, assembled in the “pah,” silent and calm.
But on the third day, the huts opened; all the locals—men, women, and children—several hundred Maoris gathered in the “pah,” quiet and composed.
Kai-Koumou came out of his house, and surrounded by the principal chiefs of his tribe, he took his stand on a mound some feet above the level, in the center of the enclosure. The crowd of natives formed in a half circle some distance off, in dead silence.
Kai-Koumou stepped out of his house, and surrounded by the main leaders of his tribe, he positioned himself on a mound a few feet higher than the ground, in the middle of the enclosure. The group of locals gathered in a half circle a short distance away, remaining completely silent.
At a sign from Kai-Koumou, a warrior bent his steps toward Ware-Atoua.
At a signal from Kai-Koumou, a warrior headed towards Ware-Atoua.
“Remember,” said Lady Helena to her husband. Glenarvan pressed her to his heart, and Mary Grant went closer to John Mangles, and said hurriedly:
“Remember,” said Lady Helena to her husband. Glenarvan held her close, and Mary Grant moved closer to John Mangles and said quickly:
“Lord and Lady Glenarvan cannot but think if a wife may claim death at her husband’s hands, to escape a shameful life, a betrothed wife may claim death at the hands of her betrothed husband, to escape the same fate. John! at this last moment I ask you, have we not long been betrothed to each other in our secret hearts? May I rely on you, as Lady Helena relies on Lord Glenarvan?”
“Lord and Lady Glenarvan can't help but wonder if a wife can choose death at her husband's hands to avoid a shameful life, then a fiancée should be able to choose death at the hands of her fiancé to escape the same fate. John! In this final moment, I ask you, haven't we been secretly engaged to each other in our hearts for a long time? Can I count on you, just like Lady Helena counts on Lord Glenarvan?”
“Mary!” cried the young captain in his despair. “Ah! dear Mary—”
“Mary!” cried the young captain in his despair. “Ah! dear Mary—”
The mat was lifted, and the captives led to Kai-Koumou; the two women were resigned to their fate; the men dissembled their sufferings with superhuman effort.
The mat was lifted, and the captives were brought to Kai-Koumou; the two women accepted their fate, while the men hid their pain with incredible effort.
They arrived in the presence of the Maori chief.
They arrived in front of the Maori chief.
“You killed Kara-Tete,” said he to Glenarvan.
“You killed Kara-Tete,” he said to Glenarvan.
“I did,” answered Glenarvan.
“I did,” replied Glenarvan.
“You die to-morrow at sunrise.”
“You die tomorrow at sunrise.”
“Alone?” asked Glenarvan, with a beating heart.
“Alone?” Glenarvan asked, his heart racing.
“Oh! if our Tohonga’s life was not more precious than yours!” exclaimed Kai-Koumou, with a ferocious expression of regret.
“Oh! if our Tohonga’s life wasn’t more valuable than yours!” exclaimed Kai-Koumou, showcasing a fierce expression of regret.
At this moment there was a commotion among the natives. Glenarvan looked quickly around; the crowd made way, and a warrior appeared heated by running, and sinking with fatigue.
At that moment, there was a lot of noise among the locals. Glenarvan quickly looked around; the crowd parted, and a warrior emerged, out of breath from running and exhausted.
Kai-Koumou, as soon as he saw him, said in English, evidently for the benefit of the captives:
Kai-Koumou, as soon as he saw him, said in English, clearly for the benefit of the captives:
“You come from the camp of the Pakekas?”
“You come from the camp of the Pakekas?”
“Yes,” answered the Maori.
“Yes,” replied the Māori.
“You have seen the prisoner, our Tohonga?”
“You've seen the prisoner, our Tohonga?”
“I have seen him.”
“I’ve seen him.”
“Alive?”
"Are you alive?"
“Dead! English have shot him.”
“Dead! The English have shot him.”
It was all over with Glenarvan and his companions.
It was all over for Glenarvan and his friends.
“All!” cried Kai-Koumou; “you all die to-morrow at daybreak.”
“All!” shouted Kai-Koumou; “you all will die tomorrow at dawn.”
Punishment fell on all indiscriminately. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were grateful to Heaven for the boon.
Punishment came down on everyone without exception. Lady Helena and Mary Grant were thankful to God for the blessing.
The captives were not taken back to Ware-Atoua. They were destined to attend the obsequies of the chief and the bloody rites that accompanied them. A guard of natives conducted them to the foot of an immense kauri, and then stood on guard without taking their eyes off the prisoners.
The captives weren't taken back to Ware-Atoua. Instead, they were meant to participate in the chief's funeral and the bloody rituals that went along with it. A group of locals escorted them to the base of a huge kauri tree and then stood watch, keeping their eyes fixed on the prisoners.
The three prescribed days had elapsed since the death of Kara-Tete, and the soul of the dead warrior had finally departed; so the ceremonies commenced.
The three designated days had passed since Kara-Tete's death, and the soul of the fallen warrior had finally moved on; so the ceremonies began.
The body was laid on a small mound in the central enclosure. It was clothed in a rich dress, and wrapped in a magnificent flax mat. His head, adorned with feathers, was encircled with a crown of green leaves. His face, arms, and chest had been rubbed with oil, and did not show any sign of decay.
The body was placed on a small hill in the central area. It was dressed in an luxurious outfit and wrapped in a beautiful flax mat. His head, decorated with feathers, was surrounded by a crown of green leaves. His face, arms, and chest had been covered in oil, and showed no signs of decay.
The parents and friends arrived at the foot of the mound, and at a certain moment, as if the leader of an orchestra were leading a funeral chant, there arose a great wail of tears, sighs, and sobs. They lamented the deceased with a plaintive rhythm and doleful cadence. The kinsmen beat their heads; the kinswomen tore their faces with their nails and lavished more blood than tears. But these demonstrations were not sufficient to propitiate the soul of the deceased, whose wrath might strike the survivors of his tribe; and his warriors, as they could not recall him to life, were anxious that he should have nothing to wish for in the other world. The wife of Kara-Tete was not to be parted from him; indeed, she would have refused to survive him. It was a custom, as well as a duty, and Maori history has no lack of such sacrifices.
The parents and friends gathered at the base of the mound, and at a certain moment, as if the conductor of an orchestra were leading a funeral song, a loud wail of tears, sighs, and sobs arose. They mourned the deceased with a sorrowful rhythm and mournful tone. The male relatives beat their heads; the female relatives scratched their faces with their nails, shedding more blood than tears. But these displays weren’t enough to soothe the soul of the deceased, whose anger could affect the surviving tribe members; and since his warriors couldn’t bring him back to life, they were determined that he should have no unfulfilled wishes in the afterlife. Kara-Tete’s wife wasn't willing to be separated from him; in fact, she would have refused to live without him. It was both a tradition and a duty, and Maori history is full of such sacrifices.
This woman came on the scene; she was still young. Her disheveled hair flowed over her shoulders. Her sobs and cries filled the air. Incoherent words, regrets, sobs, broken phrases in which she extolled the virtues of the dead, alternated with her moans, and in a crowning paroxysm of sorrow, she threw herself at the foot of the mound and beat her head on the earth.
This woman appeared; she was still young. Her messy hair fell over her shoulders. Her cries and sobs filled the air. Jumbled words, regrets, sobs, and fragmented phrases praising the deceased mixed with her wails, and in a moment of overwhelming grief, she threw herself at the foot of the mound and pounded her head into the ground.
The Kai-Koumou drew near; suddenly the wretched victim rose; but a violent blow from a “MERE,” a kind of club brandished by the chief, struck her to the ground; she fell senseless.
The Kai-Koumou approached; suddenly, the unfortunate victim rose; but a powerful hit from a “MERE,” a type of club swung by the chief, knocked her to the ground; she collapsed, unconscious.
Horrible yells followed; a hundred arms threatened the terror-stricken captives. But no one moved, for the funeral ceremonies were not yet over.
Horrible shouts followed; a hundred arms threatened the terrified captives. But no one moved, because the funeral ceremonies weren't over yet.
The wife of Kara-Tete had joined her husband. The two bodies lay stretched side by side. But in the future life, even the presence of his faithful companion was not enough. Who would attend on them in the realm of Noui-Atoua, if their slaves did not follow them into the other world.
The wife of Kara-Tete had joined her husband. The two bodies lay stretched side by side. But in the afterlife, even the presence of his faithful companion wasn’t enough. Who would take care of them in the realm of Noui-Atoua if their slaves didn’t follow them into the next world?
Six unfortunate fellows were brought to the mound. They were attendants whom the pitiless usages of war had reduced to slavery. During the chief’s lifetime they had borne the severest privations, and been subjected to all kinds of ill-usage; they had been scantily fed, and incessantly occupied like beasts of burden, and now, according to Maori ideas, they were to resume to all eternity this life of bondage.
Six unfortunate men were brought to the mound. They were attendants who, due to the harsh realities of war, had been turned into slaves. Throughout their chief's life, they endured extreme hardships and experienced all types of mistreatment; they were poorly fed and constantly forced to work like pack animals. Now, according to Maori beliefs, they were destined to live this life of servitude for all eternity.
These poor creatures appeared quite resigned to their destiny. They were not taken by surprise. Their unbound hands showed that they met their fate without resistance.
These unfortunate beings seemed to accept their fate. They weren't caught off guard. Their free hands indicated that they faced their end without fighting back.
Their death was speedy and not aggravated by tedious suffering; torture was reserved for the authors of the murder, who, only twenty paces off, averted their eyes from the horrible scene which was to grow yet more horrible.
Their death was quick and not made worse by prolonged suffering; the torment was saved for the ones responsible for the murder, who, just twenty steps away, turned their eyes away from the dreadful scene that was about to become even more terrible.
Six blows of the MERE, delivered by the hands of six powerful warriors, felled the victims in the midst of a sea of blood.
Six strikes of the MERE, from the hands of six mighty warriors, took down the victims in a sea of blood.
This was the signal for a fearful scene of cannibalism. The bodies of slaves are not protected by taboo like those of their masters. They belong to the tribe; they were a sort of small change thrown among the mourners, and the moment the sacrifice was over, the whole crowd, chiefs, warriors, old men, women, children, without distinction of age, or sex, fell upon the senseless remains with brutal appetite. Faster than a rapid pen could describe it, the bodies, still reeking, were dismembered, divided, cut up, not into morsels, but into crumbs. Of the two hundred Maories present everyone obtained a share. They fought, they struggled, they quarreled over the smallest fragment. The drops of hot blood splashed over these festive monsters, and the whole of this detestable crew groveled under a rain of blood. It was like the delirious fury of tigers fighting over their prey, or like a circus where the wild beasts devour the deer. This scene ended, a score of fires were lit at various points of the “pah”; the smell of charred flesh polluted the air; and but for the fearful tumult of the festival, but for the cries that emanated from these flesh-sated throats, the captives might have heard the bones crunching under the teeth of the cannibals.
This was the signal for a terrifying scene of cannibalism. The bodies of slaves aren't protected by taboos like those of their masters. They belong to the tribe; they were like small change tossed among the mourners, and as soon as the sacrifice was over, the entire crowd—chiefs, warriors, old men, women, children, regardless of age or sex—pounced on the lifeless remains with a savage appetite. Faster than a swift pen could write, the bodies, still dripping, were torn apart, divided, chopped up, not into pieces, but into bits. Out of the two hundred Maories present, everyone got a share. They fought, struggled, and argued over the tiniest scraps. Drops of hot blood splattered over these celebratory monsters, and this entire gruesome group wallowed under a shower of blood. It resembled the frenzied rage of tigers battling over their prey or a circus where wild animals devour the deer. Once this scene was over, several fires were lit at different spots in the “pah”; the smell of burnt flesh polluted the air; and if it weren't for the terrifying chaos of the festival, and the cries coming from these meat-filled throats, the captives might have heard the bones crunching under the teeth of the cannibals.
Glenarvan and his companions, breathless with horror, tried to conceal this fearful scene from the eyes of the two poor ladies. They understood then what fate awaited them next day at dawn, and also with what cruel torture this death would be preceded. They were dumb with horror.
Glenarvan and his companions, gasping in fear, tried to hide this terrible scene from the two poor ladies. They understood what fate awaited them the next day at dawn and how brutally they would suffer before that death. They were speechless with terror.
The funeral dances commenced. Strong liquors distilled from the “piper excelsum” animated the intoxication of the natives. They had nothing human left. It seemed possible that the “taboo” might be forgotten, and they might rush upon the prisoners, who were already terrified at their delirious gestures.
The funeral dances started. Strong drinks made from the “piper excelsum” fueled the natives' intoxication. They had lost all sense of humanity. It seemed possible that the “taboo” could be ignored, and they might attack the prisoners, who were already frightened by their wild movements.
But Kai-Koumou had kept his own senses amidst the general delirium. He allowed an hour for this orgy of blood to attain its maximum and then cease, and the final scene of the obsequies was performed with the accustomed ceremonial.
But Kai-Koumou maintained his composure amid the widespread chaos. He gave it an hour for this bloodbath to reach its peak and then stop, and the final part of the funeral was carried out with the usual ceremony.
The corpses of Kara-Tete and his wife were raised, the limbs were bent, and laid against the stomach according to the Maori usage; then came the funeral, not the final interment, but a burial until the moment when the earth had destroyed the flesh and nothing remained but the skeleton.
The bodies of Kara-Tete and his wife were moved, their limbs were bent and positioned against their stomachs in the Maori tradition; then the funeral took place, not the final burial, but a temporary grave until the earth had decomposed the flesh and only the skeleton was left.
The place of “oudoupa,” or the tomb, had been chosen outside the fortress, about two miles off at the top of a low hill called Maunganamu, situated on the right bank of the lake, and to this spot the body was to be taken. Two palanquins of a very primitive kind, hand-barrows, in fact, were brought to the foot of the mound, and the corpses doubled up so that they were sitting rather than lying, and their garments kept in place by a band of hanes, were placed on them. Four warriors took up the litters on their shoulders, and the whole tribe, repeating their funeral chant, followed in procession to the place of sepulture.
The site of “oudoupa,” or the tomb, was chosen just outside the fortress, about two miles away at the top of a low hill known as Maunganamu, located on the right bank of the lake, and this is where the body was to be taken. Two very basic palanquins, basically hand-barrows, were brought to the foot of the mound, and the corpses were bent so that they were sitting rather than lying down, their clothes secured by a band of hanes. Four warriors lifted the litters onto their shoulders, and the entire tribe, chanting their funeral song, followed in procession to the burial site.
The captives, still strictly guarded, saw the funeral cortege leave the inner inclosure of the “pah”; then the chants and cries grew fainter. For about half an hour the funeral procession remained out of sight, in the hollow valley, and then came in sight again winding up the mountain side; the distance gave a fantastic effect to the undulating movement of this long serpentine column.
The captives, still closely watched, saw the funeral procession leave the inner area of the “pah”; then the songs and cries faded away. For about thirty minutes, the funeral procession was out of sight in the valley, and then it reappeared, winding up the mountainside; the distance made the long, winding line look almost surreal.
The tribe stopped at an elevation of about 800 feet, on the summit of Maunganamu, where the burial place of Kara-Tete had been prepared. An ordinary Maori would have had nothing but a hole and a heap of earth. But a powerful and formidable chief destined to speedy deification, was honored with a tomb worthy of his exploits.
The tribe paused at about 800 feet up, at the top of Maunganamu, where they had prepared the burial site for Kara-Tete. A typical Maori would have just had a hole and a pile of dirt. But a powerful and impressive chief, who was destined to be honored quickly, received a tomb that matched his achievements.
The “oudoupa” had been fenced round, and posts, surmounted with faces painted in red ochre, stood near the grave where the bodies were to lie. The relatives had not forgotten that the “Waidoua,” the spirit of the dead, lives on mortal food, as the body did in this life. Therefore, food was deposited in the inclosure as well as the arms and clothing of the deceased. Nothing was omitted for comfort. The husband and wife were laid side by side, then covered with earth and grass, after another series of laments.
The “oudoupa” was surrounded by a fence, with posts topped by faces painted in red ochre standing near the grave where the bodies would rest. The relatives remembered that the “Waidoua,” the spirit of the dead, continues to survive on earthly food, just like the body did in life. So, food was placed inside the enclosure along with the deceased's weapons and clothing. Nothing was left out for their comfort. The husband and wife were buried side by side, then covered with earth and grass after another round of mourning.
Then the procession wound slowly down the mountain, and henceforth none dare ascend the slope of Maunganamu on pain of death, for it was “tabooed,” like Tongariro, where lie the ashes of a chief killed by an earthquake in 1846.
Then the procession slowly made its way down the mountain, and from that point on, no one dared to climb the slope of Maunganamu under the threat of death, because it was "taboo," like Tongariro, where the ashes of a chief who died in an earthquake in 1846 are laid to rest.
CHAPTER XII STRANGELY LIBERATED
JUST as the sun was sinking beyond Lake Taupo, behind the peaks of Tuhahua and Pukepapu, the captives were conducted back to their prison. They were not to leave it again till the tops of the Wahiti Ranges were lit with the first fires of day.
JUST as the sun was setting behind Lake Taupo, beyond the peaks of Tuhahua and Pukepapu, the captives were taken back to their prison. They wouldn’t leave it again until the tops of the Wahiti Ranges were illuminated by the first light of day.
They had one night in which to prepare for death. Overcome as they were with horror and fatigue, they took their last meal together.
They had one night to get ready for death. Exhausted and filled with dread, they shared their last meal together.
“We shall need all our strength,” Glenarvan had said, “to look death in the face. We must show these savages how Europeans can die.”
“We'll need all our strength,” Glenarvan said, “to face death head-on. We have to show these savages how Europeans die.”
The meal ended. Lady Helena repeated the evening prayer aloud, her companions, bare-headed, repeated it after her. Who does not turn his thoughts toward God in the hour of death? This done, the prisoners embraced each other. Mary Grant and Helena, in a corner of the hut, lay down on a mat. Sleep, which keeps all sorrow in abeyance, soon weighed down their eyelids; they slept in each other’s arms, overcome by exhaustion and prolonged watching.
The meal was over. Lady Helena said the evening prayer out loud, and her companions, without their hats on, echoed her words. Who doesn’t think about God in their final moments? Once that was done, the prisoners hugged each other. Mary Grant and Helena, in a corner of the hut, lay down on a mat. Sleep, which eases all grief, quickly made their eyelids heavy; they fell asleep in each other’s arms, worn out from fatigue and sleeplessness.
Then Glenarvan, taking his friends aside, said: “My dear friends, our lives and the lives of these poor women are in God’s hands. If it is decreed that we die to-morrow, let us die bravely, like Christian men, ready to appear without terror before the Supreme Judge. God, who reads our hearts, knows that we had a noble end in view. If death awaits us instead of success, it is by His will. Stern as the decree may seem, I will not repine. But death here, means not death only, it means torture, insult, perhaps, and here are two ladies—”
Then Glenarvan, pulling his friends aside, said: “My dear friends, our lives and the lives of these poor women are in God’s hands. If it’s meant that we die tomorrow, let’s die bravely, like honorable men, ready to face the Supreme Judge without fear. God, who knows our hearts, understands that we had a noble purpose. If death comes instead of success, it’s by His will. As harsh as that may seem, I won’t complain. But death here doesn’t just mean dying; it means torture, insult, and we have two ladies here—”
Glenarvan’s voice, firm till now, faltered. He was silent a moment, and having overcome his emotion, he said, addressing the young captain:
Glenarvan’s voice, steady until now, wavered. He paused for a moment, and after regaining his composure, he spoke to the young captain:
“John, you have promised Mary what I promised Lady Helena. What is your plan?”
“John, you promised Mary what I promised Lady Helena. What’s your plan?”
“I believe,” said John, “that in the sight of God I have a right to fulfill that promise.”
“I believe,” said John, “that in God's eyes I have the right to fulfill that promise.”
“Yes, John; but we are unarmed.”
“Yes, John, but we don’t have any weapons.”
“No!” replied John, showing him a dagger. “I snatched it from Kara-Tete when he fell at your feet. My Lord, whichever of us survives the other will fulfill the wish of Lady Helena and Mary Grant.”
“No!” John said, brandishing a dagger. “I took it from Kara-Tete when he fell at your feet. My Lord, whoever of us survives the other will carry out the wishes of Lady Helena and Mary Grant.”
After these words were said, a profound silence ensued. At last the Major said: “My friends, keep that to the last moment. I am not an advocate of irremediable measures.”
After these words were spoken, a deep silence followed. Finally, the Major said: “My friends, hold on to that until the very end. I’m not a proponent of irreversible actions.”
“I did not speak for ourselves,” said Glenarvan. “Be it as it may, we can face death! Had we been alone, I should ere now have cried, ‘My friends, let us make an effort. Let us attack these wretches!’ But with these poor girls—”
“I didn’t speak for us,” said Glenarvan. “Regardless, we can face death! If we were alone, I would have already shouted, ‘My friends, let’s make an effort. Let’s take on these bastards!’ But with these poor girls—”
At this moment John raised the mat, and counted twenty-five natives keeping guard on the Ware-Atoua. A great fire had been lighted, and its lurid glow threw into strong relief the irregular outlines of the “pah.” Some of the savages were sitting round the brazier; the others standing motionless, their black outlines relieved against the clear background of flame. But they all kept watchful guard on the hut confided to their care.
At that moment, John lifted the mat and counted twenty-five natives watching over the Ware-Atoua. A large fire had been lit, and its bright glow highlighted the uneven shapes of the “pah.” Some of the warriors were sitting around the fire, while others stood still, their dark figures contrasting against the bright flames. But they all remained alert, keeping a close watch on the hut entrusted to them.
It has been said that between a vigilant jailer and a prisoner who wishes to escape, the chances are in favor of the prisoner; the fact is, the interest of the one is keener than that of the other. The jailer may forget that he is on guard; the prisoner never forgets that he is guarded. The captive thinks oftener of escaping than the jailer of preventing his flight, and hence we hear of frequent and wonderful escapes.
It’s been said that when a watchful jailer faces a prisoner who wants to break free, the odds are often in favor of the prisoner; the reality is that the prisoner’s desire is stronger than the jailer’s vigilance. The jailer might lose focus on his duty, but the prisoner always remembers that he’s being watched. The captive thinks about escaping much more than the jailer thinks about stopping him, which is why we hear about many incredible escapes.
But in the present instance hatred and revenge were the jailers—not an indifferent warder; the prisoners were not bound, but it was because bonds were useless when five-and-twenty men were watching the only egress from the Ware-Atoua.
But in this case, hatred and revenge were the jailers—not a careless guard; the prisoners weren't tied up, but that was because restraints were pointless when twenty-five men were keeping an eye on the only exit from the Ware-Atoua.
This house, with its back to the rock which closed the fortress, was only accessible by a long, narrow promontory which joined it in front to the plateau on which the “pah” was erected. On its two other sides rose pointed rocks, which jutted out over an abyss a hundred feet deep. On that side descent was impossible, and had it been possible, the bottom was shut in by the enormous rock. The only outlet was the regular door of the Ware-Atoua, and the Maories guarded the promontory which united it to the “pah” like a drawbridge. All escape was thus hopeless, and Glenarvan having tried the walls for the twentieth time, was compelled to acknowledge that it was so.
This house, facing the rock that enclosed the fortress, could only be reached by a long, narrow promontory that connected it to the plateau where the “pah” was built. On its other two sides, steep rocks jutted out over a hundred-foot abyss. On that side, getting down was impossible, and even if it were, the bottom was blocked by a massive rock. The only way out was through the regular door of the Ware-Atoua, and the Maories guarded the promontory linking it to the “pah” like a drawbridge. This made any escape completely hopeless, and after trying the walls for the twentieth time, Glenarvan had to admit that it was true.
The hours of this night, wretched as they were, slipped away. Thick darkness had settled on the mountain. Neither moon nor stars pierced the gloom. Some gusts of wind whistled by the sides of the “pah,” and the posts of the house creaked: the fire outside revived with the puffs of wind, and the flames sent fitful gleams into the interior of Ware-Atoua. The group of prisoners was lit up for a moment; they were absorbed in their last thoughts, and a deathlike silence reigned in the hut.
The hours of this night, as miserable as they were, passed by. Thick darkness had settled on the mountain. Neither the moon nor stars broke through the gloom. Some gusts of wind whistled by the sides of the dwelling, and the posts of the house creaked: the fire outside flickered back to life with the puffs of wind, and the flames cast brief flashes of light into the interior of Ware-Atoua. For a moment, the group of prisoners was illuminated; they were lost in their final thoughts, and a deathly silence filled the hut.
It might have been about four o’clock in the morning when the Major’s attention was called to a slight noise which seemed to come from the foundation of the posts in the wall of the hut which abutted on the rock. McNabbs was at first indifferent, but finding the noise continue, he listened; then his curiosity was aroused, and he put his ear to the ground; it sounded as if someone was scraping or hollowing out the ground outside.
It was probably around four in the morning when the Major noticed a faint sound that seemed to be coming from the base of the posts in the wall of the hut next to the rock. McNabbs was initially uninterested, but when the noise persisted, he listened in. His curiosity was piqued, and he pressed his ear to the ground; it seemed like someone was scraping or digging outside.
As soon as he was sure of it, he crept over to Glenarvan and John Mangles, and startling them from their melancholy thoughts, led them to the end of the hut.
As soon as he was certain about it, he quietly approached Glenarvan and John Mangles, and, startling them out of their gloomy thoughts, guided them to the end of the hut.
“Listen,” said he, motioning them to stoop.
"Listen," he said, gesturing for them to bend down.
The scratching became more and more audible; they could hear the little stones grate on a hard body and roll away.
The scratching grew louder; they could hear the small stones grinding against a solid surface and rolling away.
“Some animal in his burrow,” said John Mangles.
“Some animal in his burrow,” said John Mangles.
Glenarvan struck his forehead.
Glenarvan hit his forehead.
“Who knows?” said he, “it might be a man.”
“Who knows?” he said, “it could be a guy.”
“Animal or man,” answered the Major, “I will soon find out!”
“Animal or human,” replied the Major, “I'll find out soon enough!”
Wilson and Olbinett joined their companions, and all united to dig through the wall—John with his dagger, the others with stones taken from the ground, or with their nails, while Mulrady, stretched along the ground, watched the native guard through a crevice of the matting.
Wilson and Olbinett joined their friends, and they all worked together to dig through the wall—John using his dagger, the others with stones they picked up from the ground or with their nails, while Mulrady, lying on the ground, watched the native guard through a gap in the matting.
These savages sitting motionless around the fire, suspected nothing of what was going on twenty feet off.
These people sitting still around the fire had no idea what was happening twenty feet away.
The soil was light and friable, and below lay a bed of silicious tufa; therefore, even without tools, the aperture deepened quickly. It soon became evident that a man, or men, clinging to the sides of the “pah,” were cutting a passage into its exterior wall. What could be the object? Did they know of the existence of the prisoners, or was it some private enterprise that led to the undertaking?
The soil was loose and crumbly, and underneath was a layer of silicious tufa; because of this, even without tools, the opening quickly grew deeper. It soon became clear that a man, or possibly men, hanging onto the sides of the “pah,” were digging a way through its outer wall. What could their goal be? Did they know about the prisoners, or was this a personal mission that led to their actions?
The prisoners redoubled their efforts. Their fingers bled, but still they worked on; after half an hour they had gone three feet deep; they perceived by the increased sharpness of the sounds that only a thin layer of earth prevented immediate communication.
The prisoners pushed harder. Their fingers were bleeding, but they kept going; after half an hour, they had dug three feet down. They noticed that the sounds had become sharper, indicating that only a thin layer of dirt was blocking them from communicating immediately.
Some minutes more passed, and the Major withdrew his hand from the stroke of a sharp blade. He suppressed a cry.
Some more minutes went by, and the Major pulled his hand away from the edge of a sharp blade. He stifled a cry.
John Mangles, inserting the blade of his poniard, avoided the knife which now protruded above the soil, but seized the hand that wielded it.
John Mangles, sliding his dagger in, dodged the knife that was now sticking up from the ground, but grabbed the hand that was holding it.
It was the hand of a woman or child, a European! On neither side had a word been uttered. It was evidently the cue of both sides to be silent.
It was the hand of a woman or child, a European! Neither side had spoken a word. It was clearly understood by both sides that they were to remain silent.
“Is it Robert?” whispered Glenarvan.
“Is that Robert?” whispered Glenarvan.
But softly as the name was breathed, Mary Grant, already awakened by the sounds in the hut, slipped over toward Glenarvan, and seizing the hand, all stained with earth, she covered it with kisses.
But softly as the name was spoken, Mary Grant, already awake from the noises in the hut, moved over to Glenarvan and, taking his hand, which was all dirty, she covered it with kisses.
“My darling Robert,” said she, never doubting, “it is you! it is you!”
“My darling Robert,” she said, completely convinced, “it’s you! It’s you!”
“Yes, little sister,” said he, “it is I am here to save you all; but be very silent.”
“Yes, little sister,” he said, “I’m here to save you all; but you need to be very quiet.”
“Brave lad!” repeated Glenarvan.
“Brave guy!” repeated Glenarvan.
“Watch the savages outside,” said Robert.
“Look at the savages outside,” said Robert.
Mulrady, whose attention was distracted for a moment by the appearance of the boy, resumed his post.
Mulrady, momentarily distracted by the sight of the boy, returned to his position.
“It is all right,” said he. “There are only four awake; the rest are asleep.”
“It’s all good,” he said. “Only four are awake; the others are asleep.”
A minute after, the hole was enlarged, and Robert passed from the arms of his sister to those of Lady Helena. Round his body was rolled a long coil of flax rope.
A minute later, the hole was bigger, and Robert moved from his sister's arms to Lady Helena's. A long coil of flax rope was wrapped around his body.
“My child, my child,” murmured Lady Helena, “the savages did not kill you!”
“My child, my child,” whispered Lady Helena, “the savages didn’t kill you!”
“No, madam,” said he; “I do not know how it happened, but in the scuffle I got away; I jumped the barrier; for two days I hid in the bushes, to try and see you; while the tribe were busy with the chief’s funeral, I came and reconnoitered this side of the path, and I saw that I could get to you. I stole this knife and rope out of the desert hut. The tufts of bush and the branches made me a ladder, and I found a kind of grotto already hollowed out in the rock under this hut; I had only to bore some feet in soft earth, and here I am.”
“No, ma'am,” he said; “I don't know how it happened, but in the struggle, I managed to escape; I jumped over the barrier; for two days I hid in the bushes, trying to catch a glimpse of you. While the tribe was occupied with the chief’s funeral, I came and scoped out this side of the path, and I saw that I could reach you. I took this knife and rope from the desert hut. The clumps of bushes and branches formed a sort of ladder, and I found a small grotto already carved out in the rock beneath this hut; I just had to dig a few feet in the soft earth, and here I am.”
Twenty noiseless kisses were his reward.
Twenty silent kisses were his reward.
“Let us be off!” said he, in a decided tone.
“Let’s go!” he said, in a firm tone.
“Is Paganel below?” asked Glenarvan.
“Is Paganel down there?” asked Glenarvan.
“Monsieur Paganel?” replied the boy, amazed.
“Monsieur Paganel?” the boy answered, astonished.
“Yes; is he waiting for us?”
“Yes; is he waiting for us?”
“No, my Lord; but is he not here?” inquired Robert.
“No, my Lord; but isn't he here?” asked Robert.
“No, Robert!” answered Mary Grant.
“No, Robert!” replied Mary Grant.
“Why! have you not seen him?” asked Glenarvan. “Did you lose each other in the confusion? Did you not get away together?”
“Why! Haven't you seen him?” Glenarvan asked. “Did you get separated in the chaos? Didn't you escape together?”
“No, my Lord!” said Robert, taken aback by the disappearance of his friend Paganel.
“No, my Lord!” said Robert, surprised by the sudden disappearance of his friend Paganel.
“Well, lose no more time,” said the Major. “Wherever Paganel is, he cannot be in worse plight than ourselves. Let us go.”
“Well, let’s not waste any more time,” said the Major. “No matter where Paganel is, he can’t be in a worse situation than we are. Let’s go.”
Truly, the moments were precious. They had to fly. The escape was not very difficult, except the twenty feet of perpendicular fall outside the grotto.
Truly, the moments were priceless. They had to hurry. The escape wasn't very hard, except for the twenty-foot straight drop outside the cave.
After that the slope was practicable to the foot of the mountain. From this point the prisoners could soon gain the lower valleys; while the Maories, if they perceived the flight of the prisoners, would have to make a long round to catch them, being unaware of the gallery between the Ware-Atoua and the outer rock.
After that, the slope was easy to navigate to the base of the mountain. From there, the prisoners could quickly reach the lower valleys; meanwhile, the Maoris, if they noticed the prisoners escaping, would have to take a long detour to catch them, not knowing about the path between the Ware-Atoua and the outer rock.
The escape was commenced, and every precaution was taken. The captives passed one by one through the narrow passage into the grotto. John Mangles, before leaving the hut, disposed of all the evidences of their work, and in his turn slipped through the opening and let down over it the mats of the house, so that the entrance to the gallery was quite concealed.
The escape began, and every precaution was taken. The captives passed one by one through the narrow passage into the cave. John Mangles, before leaving the hut, got rid of all the evidence of their activities, and then he slipped through the opening and lowered the mats from the house over it, so that the entrance to the tunnel was completely hidden.
The next thing was to descend the vertical wall to the slope below, and this would have been impracticable, but that Robert had brought the flax rope, which was now unrolled and fixed to a projecting point of rock, the end hanging over.
The next thing to do was to climb down the vertical wall to the slope below, and this would have been impossible if Robert hadn’t brought the flax rope, which was now unrolled and secured to a jutting rock, with the end hanging down.
John Mangles, before his friends trusted themselves to this flax rope, tried it; he did not think it very strong; and it was of importance not to risk themselves imprudently, as a fall would be fatal.
John Mangles, before his friends depended on this flax rope, tested it; he didn't find it very strong; and it was crucial not to take unnecessary risks, as a fall could be deadly.
“This rope,” said he, “will only bear the weight of two persons; therefore let us go in rotation. Lord and Lady Glenarvan first; when they arrive at the bottom, three pulls at the rope will be a signal to us to follow.”
“This rope,” he said, “can only hold the weight of two people; so let’s take turns. Lord and Lady Glenarvan go first; when they reach the bottom, three pulls on the rope will signal us to follow.”
“I will go first,” said Robert. “I discovered a deep hollow at the foot of the slope where those who come down can conceal themselves and wait for the rest.”
“I’ll go first,” said Robert. “I found a deep dip at the bottom of the slope where those coming down can hide and wait for the others.”
“Go, my boy,” said Glenarvan, pressing Robert’s hand.
“Go ahead, my boy,” said Glenarvan, squeezing Robert’s hand.
Robert disappeared through the opening out of the grotto. A minute after, the three pulls at the cord informed them the boy had alighted safely.
Robert slipped out of the grotto. A minute later, three tugs on the cord signaled that the boy had made it down safely.
Glenarvan and Lady Helena immediately ventured out of the grotto. The darkness was still very great, though some grayish streaks were already visible on the eastern summits.
Glenarvan and Lady Helena quickly left the grotto. The darkness was still thick, but some grayish lines were starting to show on the eastern peaks.
The biting cold of the morning revived the poor young lady. She felt stronger and commenced her perilous descent.
The biting cold of the morning woke the poor young lady up. She felt stronger and started her risky descent.
Glenarvan first, then Lady Helena, let themselves down along the rope, till they came to the spot where the perpendicular wall met the top of the slope. Then Glenarvan going first and supporting his wife, began to descend backward.
Glenarvan first, then Lady Helena, lowered themselves down the rope until they reached the point where the sheer wall met the top of the slope. Then Glenarvan, leading the way and supporting his wife, started to back down.
He felt for the tufts and grass and shrubs able to afford a foothold; tried them and then placed Lady Helena’s foot on them. Some birds, suddenly awakened, flew away, uttering feeble cries, and the fugitives trembled when a stone loosened from its bed rolled to the foot of the mountain.
He searched for the tufts of grass and shrubs that could provide a foothold; tested them, and then placed Lady Helena's foot on them. Some birds, suddenly startled, flew away, making weak sounds, and the escapees flinched when a stone broke free from its resting place and rolled down to the base of the mountain.
They had reached half-way down the slope, when a voice was heard from the opening of the grotto.
They had made it halfway down the slope when a voice came from the entrance of the cave.
“Stop!” whispered John Mangles.
“Stop!” whispered John Mangles.
Glenarvan, holding with one hand to a tuft of tetragonia, with the other holding his wife, waited with breathless anxiety.
Glenarvan, gripping a clump of tetragonia with one hand and holding his wife with the other, waited with intense anxiety.
Wilson had had an alarm. Having heard some unusual noise outside the Ware-Atoua, he went back into the hut and watched the Maories from behind the mat. At a sign from him, John stopped Glenarvan.
Wilson had an alarm. After hearing some strange noise outside the Ware-Atoua, he went back into the hut and observed the Maoris from behind the mat. At his signal, John halted Glenarvan.
One of the warriors on guard, startled by an unusual sound, rose and drew nearer to the Ware-Atoua. He stood still about two paces from the hut and listened with his head bent forward. He remained in that attitude for a minute that seemed an hour, his ear intent, his eye peering into the darkness. Then shaking his head like one who sees he is mistaken, he went back to his companions, took an armful of dead wood, and threw it into the smouldering fire, which immediately revived. His face was lighted up by the flame, and was free from any look of doubt, and after having glanced to where the first light of dawn whitened the eastern sky, stretched himself near the fire to warm his stiffened limbs.
One of the guards, startled by an unusual sound, got up and moved closer to the Ware-Atoua. He paused about two steps from the hut and listened with his head leaned forward. He stayed like that for what felt like an hour, focused on the sound, his eyes straining to see into the darkness. Then, shaking his head as if realizing he was mistaken, he returned to his friends, grabbed a load of firewood, and tossed it into the smoldering fire, which flared back to life. The flames illuminated his face, and he looked completely confident. After glancing at the first light of dawn brightening the eastern sky, he settled down by the fire to warm his stiff limbs.
“All’s well!” whispered Wilson.
"All good!" whispered Wilson.
John signaled to Glenarvan to resume his descent.
John signaled to Glenarvan to continue his descent.
Glenarvan let himself gently down the slope; soon Lady Helena and he landed on the narrow track where Robert waited for them.
Glenarvan carefully made his way down the slope; soon, he and Lady Helena arrived at the narrow path where Robert was waiting for them.
The rope was shaken three times, and in his turn John Mangles, preceding Mary Grant, followed in the dangerous route.
The rope was shaken three times, and then John Mangles, leading the way for Mary Grant, took the risky path.
He arrived safely; he rejoined Lord and Lady Glenarvan in the hollow mentioned by Robert.
He arrived safely and rejoined Lord and Lady Glenarvan in the hollow that Robert mentioned.
Five minutes after, all the fugitives had safely escaped from the Ware-Atoua, left their retreat, and keeping away from the inhabited shores of the lakes, they plunged by narrow paths into the recesses of the mountains.
Five minutes later, all the fugitives had successfully escaped from the Ware-Atoua, left their hiding place, and stayed clear of the populated shores of the lakes as they made their way along narrow paths into the depths of the mountains.
They walked quickly, trying to avoid the points where they might be seen from the pah. They were quite silent, and glided among the bushes like shadows. Whither? Where chance led them, but at any rate they were free.
They walked quickly, trying to stay out of sight from the path. They were completely silent, moving through the bushes like shadows. Where were they going? Wherever fate took them, but at least they were free.
Toward five o’clock, the day began to dawn, bluish clouds marbled the upper stratum of clouds. The misty summits began to pierce the morning mists. The orb of day was soon to appear, and instead of giving the signal for their execution, would, on the contrary, announce their flight.
Toward five o’clock, the day started to break, bluish clouds streaked the upper layer of clouds. The misty peaks began to break through the morning fog. The sun was about to rise, and instead of signaling their execution, it would, on the contrary, announce their escape.
It was of vital importance that before the decisive moment arrived they should put themselves beyond the reach of the savages, so as to put them off their track. But their progress was slow, for the paths were steep. Lady Glenarvan climbed the slopes, supported, not to say carried, by Glenarvan, and Mary Grant leaned on the arm of John Mangles; Robert, radiant with joy, triumphant at his success, led the march, and the two sailors brought up the rear.
It was crucial that before the pivotal moment arrived, they put themselves out of the savages' reach to throw them off their trail. However, their progress was slow because the paths were steep. Lady Glenarvan climbed the slopes, being supported, if not actually carried, by Glenarvan, while Mary Grant leaned on John Mangles' arm. Robert, beaming with joy and triumphant over his success, led the way, and the two sailors brought up the rear.
Another half an hour and the glorious sun would rise out of the mists of the horizon. For half an hour the fugitives walked on as chance led them. Paganel was not there to take the lead. He was now the object of their anxiety, and whose absence was a black shadow between them and their happiness. But they bore steadily eastward, as much as possible, and faced the gorgeous morning light. Soon they had reached a height of 500 feet above Lake Taupo, and the cold of the morning, increased by the altitude, was very keen. Dim outlines of hills and mountains rose behind one another; but Glenarvan only thought how best to get lost among them. Time enough by and by to see about escaping from the labyrinth.
In another half hour, the beautiful sun would emerge from the mist on the horizon. For thirty minutes, the escapees walked on as chance guided them. Paganel was not there to lead the way. His absence was a heavy weight on their minds, casting a shadow over their happiness. But they continued steadily eastward, making the most of it, and faced the stunning morning light. Soon, they had climbed to an altitude of 500 feet above Lake Taupo, and the morning chill, heightened by the elevation, was very sharp. Faint shapes of hills and mountains loomed one after another; but Glenarvan only thought about how to get lost among them. There would be time later to figure out how to escape from the maze.
At last the sun appeared and sent his first rays on their path.
At last, the sun came out and sent its first rays along their way.
Suddenly a terrific yell from a hundred throats rent the air. It came from the pah, whose direction Glenarvan did not know. Besides, a thick veil of fog, which, spread at his feet, prevented any distinct view of the valleys below.
Suddenly, a loud yell from a hundred voices filled the air. It came from the pah, the direction of which Glenarvan didn’t know. Also, a thick layer of fog spread out at his feet, blocking a clear view of the valleys below.
But the fugitives could not doubt that their escape had been discovered; and now the question was, would they be able to elude pursuit? Had they been seen? Would not their track betray them?
But the fugitives couldn't doubt that their escape had been discovered; and now the question was, would they be able to avoid getting caught? Had anyone seen them? Would their path give them away?
At this moment the fog in the valley lifted, and enveloped them for a moment in a damp mist, and at three hundred feet below they perceived the swarming mass of frantic natives.
At that moment, the fog in the valley cleared, momentarily surrounding them in a damp mist, and three hundred feet below, they saw the chaotic crowd of frantic locals.
While they looked they were seen. Renewed howls broke forth, mingled with the barking of dogs, and the whole tribe, after vainly trying to scale the rock of Ware-Atoua, rushed out of the pah, and hastened by the shortest paths in pursuit of the prisoners who were flying from their vengeance.
While they watched, they were noticed. Fresh howls rang out, mixed with the barking of dogs, and the entire tribe, after unsuccessfully trying to climb the rock of Ware-Atoua, rushed out of the fort and quickly took the shortest routes to chase down the prisoners who were fleeing from their anger.
CHAPTER XIII THE SACRED MOUNTAIN
THE summit of the mountain was still a hundred feet above them. The fugitives were anxious to reach it that they might continue their flight on the eastern slope out of the view of their pursuers. They hoped then to find some practicable ridge that would allow of a passage to the neighboring peaks that were thrown together in an orographic maze, to which poor Paganel’s genius would doubtless have found the clew.
THE summit of the mountain was still a hundred feet above them. The fugitives were eager to reach it so they could continue their escape down the eastern slope and out of sight of their pursuers. They hoped to find a suitable ridge that would provide a way to the nearby peaks, which were tangled in a confusing landscape, a puzzle that poor Paganel’s brilliance would likely have solved.
They hastened up the slope, spurred on by the loud cries that drew nearer and nearer. The avenging crowd had already reached the foot of the mountain.
They rushed up the hill, driven by the loud shouts that grew closer and closer. The angry crowd had already reached the base of the mountain.
“Courage! my friends,” cried Glenarvan, urging his companions by voice and look.
“Stay strong, my friends,” shouted Glenarvan, encouraging his companions with his words and expression.
In less than five minutes they were at the top of the mountain, and then they turned to judge of their position, and decide on a route that would baffle their pursuers.
In under five minutes, they reached the top of the mountain, and then they turned to assess their location and figure out a route that would throw off their pursuers.
From their elevated position they could see over Lake Taupo, which stretched toward the west in its setting of picturesque mountains. On the north the peaks of Pirongia; on the south the burning crater of Tongariro. But eastward nothing but the rocky barrier of peaks and ridges that formed the Wahiti ranges, the great chain whose unbroken links stretch from the East Cape to Cook’s Straits. They had no alternative but to descend the opposite slope and enter the narrow gorges, uncertain whether any outlet existed.
From their high viewpoint, they could see over Lake Taupo, which extended westward amid stunning mountains. To the north were the peaks of Pirongia, and to the south was the active crater of Tongariro. But to the east, there was only the rocky barrier of peaks and ridges that made up the Wahiti ranges, the vast chain that stretches unbroken from the East Cape to Cook’s Straits. They had no choice but to go down the opposite slope and enter the narrow gorges, unsure if any way out was available.
Glenarvan could not prolong the halt for a moment. Wearied as they might be, they must fly or be discovered.
Glenarvan couldn't stay stopped for even a moment. No matter how tired they were, they had to hurry or they would be found.
“Let us go down!” cried he, “before our passage is cut off.”
“Let’s go down!” he shouted, “before we get trapped.”
But just as the ladies had risen with a despairing effort, McNabbs stopped them and said:
But just as the ladies had gotten up with a desperate effort, McNabbs stopped them and said:
“Glenarvan, it is useless. Look!”
"Glenarvan, it's pointless. Look!"
And then they all perceived the inexplicable change that had taken place in the movements of the Maories.
And then they all noticed the strange change that had happened in the movements of the Maoris.
Their pursuit had suddenly stopped. The ascent of the mountain had ceased by an imperious command. The natives had paused in their career, and surged like the sea waves against an opposing rock. All the crowd, thirsting for blood, stood at the foot of the mountain yelling and gesticulating, brandishing guns and hatchets, but not advancing a foot. Their dogs, rooted to the spot like themselves, barked with rage.
Their chase had come to an abrupt halt. The climb up the mountain stopped due to a commanding order. The locals halted in their movement, surging like waves crashing against a stubborn rock. The mob, eager for violence, stood at the base of the mountain, shouting and waving their guns and hatchets, but not moving forward at all. Their dogs, just as frozen as they were, barked furiously.
What stayed them? What occult power controlled these savages? The fugitives looked without understanding, fearing lest the charm that enchained Kai-Koumou’s tribe should be broken.
What held them back? What hidden force was controlling these savages? The fugitives gazed in confusion, worried that the spell keeping Kai-Koumou’s tribe bound would be broken.
Suddenly John Mangles uttered an exclamation which attracted the attention of his companions. He pointed to a little inclosure on the summit of the cone.
Suddenly, John Mangles shouted something that caught the attention of his friends. He pointed to a small area at the top of the cone.
“The tomb of Kara-Tete!” said Robert.
“The tomb of Kara-Tete!” Robert exclaimed.
“Are you sure, Robert?” said Glenarvan.
“Are you sure, Robert?” Glenarvan asked.
“Yes, my Lord, it is the tomb; I recognize it.”
“Yes, my Lord, that is the tomb; I recognize it.”
Robert was right. Fifty feet above, at the extreme peak of the mountain, freshly painted posts formed a small palisaded inclosure, and Glenarvan too was convinced that it was the chief’s burial place. The chances of their flight had led them to the crest of Maunganamu.
Robert was right. Fifty feet above, at the very top of the mountain, freshly painted posts formed a small fenced area, and Glenarvan was also convinced that it was the chief’s burial site. Their journey had brought them to the summit of Maunganamu.
Glenarvan, followed by the rest, climbed to the foot of the tomb. A large opening, covered with mats, led into it. Glenarvan was about to invade the sanctity of the “oudoupa,” when he reeled backward.
Glenarvan, followed by the others, climbed to the base of the tomb. A large entrance, covered with mats, led inside. Glenarvan was about to enter the sacred space of the “oudoupa” when he stumbled back.
“A savage!” said he.
“A savage!” he exclaimed.
“In the tomb?” inquired the Major.
"In the tomb?" asked the Major.
“Yes, McNabbs.”
"Yes, McNabbs."
“No matter; go in.”
“It's fine; go in.”
Glenarvan, the Major, Robert and John Mangles entered. There sat a Maori, wrapped in a large flax mat; the darkness of the “oudoupa” preventing them from distinguishing his features. He was very quiet, and was eating his breakfast quite coolly.
Glenarvan, the Major, Robert, and John Mangles entered. There sat a Maori, wrapped in a large flax mat; the darkness of the “oudoupa” making it hard for them to see his features. He was very calm and was eating his breakfast quite leisurely.
Glenarvan was about to speak to him when the native forestalled him by saying gayly and in good English:
Glenarvan was about to speak to him when the native interrupted him by saying cheerfully and in fluent English:
“Sit down, my Lord; breakfast is ready.”
“Have a seat, my Lord; breakfast is ready.”
It was Paganel. At the sound of his voice they all rushed into the “oudoupa,” and he was cordially embraced all round. Paganel was found again. He was their salvation. They wanted to question him; to know how and why he was here on the summit of Maunganamu; but Glenarvan stopped this misplaced curiosity.
It was Paganel. When they heard his voice, everyone rushed into the “oudoupa,” and he was warmly embraced all around. Paganel was back. He was their savior. They wanted to ask him questions; to understand how and why he was here at the top of Maunganamu; but Glenarvan put a stop to their unnecessary curiosity.
“The savages?” said he.
"The savages?" he asked.
“The savages,” said Paganel, shrugging his shoulders. “I have a contempt for those people! Come and look at them.”
“The savages,” said Paganel, shrugging his shoulders. “I have a disdain for those people! Come and see them.”
They all followed Paganel out of the “oudoupa.” The Maories were still in the same position round the base of the mountain, uttering fearful cries.
They all followed Paganel out of the “oudoupa.” The Maories were still in the same position around the base of the mountain, making terrified shouts.
“Shout! yell! till your lungs are gone, stupid wretches!” said Paganel. “I dare you to come here!”
“Shout! Yell! Until your lungs give out, you pathetic fools!” said Paganel. “I dare you to come here!”
“But why?” said Glenarvan.
“But why?” asked Glenarvan.
“Because the chief is buried here, and the tomb protects us, because the mountain is tabooed.”
“Since the chief is buried here, and the tomb keeps us safe, because the mountain is off-limits.”
“Tabooed?”
“Taboo?”
“Yes, my friends! and that is why I took refuge here, as the malefactors used to flee to the sanctuaries in the middle ages.”
“Yes, my friends! And that’s why I sought shelter here, just like criminals used to escape to sanctuaries in the Middle Ages.”
“God be praised!” said Lady Helena, lifting her hands to heaven.
“Thank God!” said Lady Helena, raising her hands to the sky.
The fugitives were not yet out of danger, but they had a moment’s respite, which was very welcome in their exhausted state.
The fugitives weren't completely out of danger yet, but they had a brief moment of relief, which was greatly appreciated in their tired condition.
Glenarvan was too much overcome to speak, and the Major nodded his head with an air of perfect content.
Glenarvan was too overwhelmed to say anything, and the Major nodded his head with a look of complete satisfaction.
“And now, my friends,” said Paganel, “if these brutes think to exercise their patience on us, they are mistaken. In two days we shall be out of their reach.”
“And now, my friends,” said Paganel, “if these beasts think they can wear us down, they’re wrong. In two days, we’ll be out of their reach.”
“By flight!” said Glenarvan. “But how?”
“By flight!” said Glenarvan. “But how?”
“That I do not know,” answered Paganel, “but we shall manage it.”
"That I don't know," replied Paganel, "but we’ll figure it out."
And now everybody wanted to know about their friend’s adventures. They were puzzled by the reserve of a man generally so talkative; on this occasion they had to drag the words out of his mouth; usually he was a ready story-teller, now he gave only evasive answers to the questions of the rest.
And now everyone was eager to hear about their friend’s adventures. They were confused by the quietness of someone who was usually so chatty; this time they had to pull the words from him. Normally, he was quick to share stories, but now he only provided vague answers to everyone’s questions.
“Paganel is another man!” thought McNabbs.
“Paganel is a different person!” thought McNabbs.
His face was really altered. He wrapped himself closely in his great flax mat and seemed to deprecate observation. Everyone noticed his embarrassment, when he was the subject of conversation, though nobody appeared to remark it; when other topics were under discussion, Paganel resumed his usual gayety.
His face had really changed. He wrapped himself tightly in his big flax mat and seemed to avoid being noticed. Everyone could see he was embarrassed when people talked about him, even though no one directly pointed it out; when other topics came up, Paganel went back to his usual cheerful self.
Of his adventures all that could be extracted from him at this time was as follows:
Of all his adventures, all that could be extracted from him at this time was as follows:
After the murder of Kara-Tete, Paganel took advantage, like Robert, of the commotion among the natives, and got out of the inclosure. But less fortunate than young Grant, he walked straight into a Maori camp, where he met a tall, intelligent-looking chief, evidently of higher rank than all the warriors of his tribe. The chief spoke excellent English, and he saluted the new-comer by rubbing the end of his nose against the end of the geographer’s nose.
After Kara-Tete was killed, Paganel, like Robert, seized the chance during the chaos among the locals and escaped from the enclosure. But unlike young Grant, he ended up right in a Maori camp, where he encountered a tall, sharp-looking chief, clearly of higher status than the other warriors in his tribe. The chief spoke great English and greeted the newcomer by rubbing the tip of his nose against the tip of the geographer's nose.
Paganel wondered whether he was to consider himself a prisoner or not. But perceiving that he could not stir without the polite escort of the chief, he soon made up his mind on that point.
Paganel was unsure if he should see himself as a prisoner. However, realizing that he couldn’t move without the respectful company of the chief, he quickly made a decision about it.
This chief, Hihi, or Sunbeam, was not a bad fellow. Paganel’s spectacles and telescope seemed to give him a great idea of Paganel’s importance, and he manifested great attachment to him, not only by kindness, but by a strong flax rope, especially at night.
This leader, Hihi, or Sunbeam, was actually a decent guy. Paganel’s glasses and telescope made him seem really important to Hihi, who showed a lot of affection for him, not just through kindness but also by a sturdy flax rope, especially at night.
This lasted for three days; to the inquiry whether he was well treated, he said “Yes and no!” without further answer; he was a prisoner, and except that he expected immediate execution, his state seemed to him no better than that in which he had left his unfortunate friends.
This went on for three days; when asked if he was being treated well, he replied, “Yes and no!” without saying anything more. He was a prisoner, and aside from expecting to be executed soon, he felt his situation was no better than the one he had left his unfortunate friends in.
One night, however, he managed to break his rope and escape. He had seen from afar the burial of the chief, and knew that he was buried on the top of Maunganamu, and he was well acquainted with the fact that the mountain would be therefore tabooed. He resolved to take refuge there, being unwilling to leave the region where his companions were in durance. He succeeded in his dangerous attempt, and had arrived the previous night at the tomb of Kara-Tete, and there proposed to recruit his strength while he waited in the hope that his friends might, by Divine mercy, find the means of escape.
One night, though, he managed to break free from his rope and escape. He had seen from a distance the chief's burial and knew that he was laid to rest on top of Maunganamu, and he was well aware that the mountain would be off-limits. He decided to take refuge there, not wanting to leave the area where his friends were trapped. He succeeded in his risky mission and arrived the previous night at Kara-Tete’s tomb, where he planned to regain his strength while hoping that his friends might, through divine intervention, find a way to escape.
Such was Paganel’s story. Did he designedly conceal some incident of his captivity? More than once his embarrassment led them to that conclusion. But however that might be, he was heartily congratulated on all sides. And then the present emergency came on for serious discussion. The natives dare not climb Maunganamu, but they, of course, calculated that hunger and thirst would restore them their prey. It was only a question of time, and patience is one of the virtues of all savages. Glenarvan was fully alive to the difficulty, but made up his mind to watch for an opportunity, or make one. First of all he made a thorough survey of Maunganamu, their present fortress; not for the purpose of defence, but of escape. The Major, John, Robert, Paganel, and himself, made an exact map of the mountain. They noted the direction, outlet and inclination of the paths. The ridge, a mile in length, which united Maunganamu to the Wahiti chain had a downward inclination. Its slope, narrow and jagged though it was, appeared the only practicable route, if they made good their escape at all. If they could do this without observation, under cover of night, they might possibly reach the deep valleys of the Range and put the Maories off the scent.
That was Paganel’s story. Did he purposely hide some part of his captivity? His embarrassment made them think so more than once. But regardless, everyone was congratulating him wholeheartedly. Then, they shifted to discussing the current situation seriously. The natives were too scared to climb Maunganamu, but they figured that hunger and thirst would eventually lead them back to their prize. It was just a matter of time, and patience is a virtue that all savages possess. Glenarvan understood the challenge fully, but he decided to wait for an opportunity or create one. First, he thoroughly inspected Maunganamu, their current stronghold; not for defense, but for escape. The Major, John, Robert, Paganel, and he made an accurate map of the mountain. They noted the direction, exits, and slope of the paths. The ridge, which was a mile long and connected Maunganamu to the Wahiti range, sloped downward. Although narrow and jagged, it seemed to be the only viable route for an escape. If they could slip away unnoticed under the cover of night, they might reach the deep valleys of the Range and throw the Maoris off their trail.
But there were dangers in this route; the last part of it was within pistol shot of natives posted on the lower slopes. Already when they ventured on the exposed part of the crest, they were saluted with a hail of shot which did not reach them. Some gun wads, carried by the wind, fell beside them; they were made of printed paper, which Paganel picked up out of curiosity, and with some trouble deciphered.
But there were risks on this route; the final stretch was within shooting range of locals stationed on the lower slopes. Already, when they moved onto the exposed part of the ridge, they were greeted with a shower of bullets that didn't hit them. Some gun wads, blown by the wind, landed nearby; they were made of printed paper, which Paganel picked up out of curiosity and managed to decipher after some effort.
“That is a good idea! My friends, do you know what those creatures use for wads?”
“That’s a great idea! Hey friends, do you know what those creatures use for wads?”
“No, Paganel!” said Glenarvan.
“No, Paganel!” Glenarvan said.
“Pages of the Bible! If that is the use they make of the Holy Book, I pity the missionaries! It will be rather difficult to establish a Maori library.”
“Pages of the Bible! If that's how they’re using the Holy Book, I feel sorry for the missionaries! It’ll be pretty hard to set up a Maori library.”
“And what text of scripture did they aim at us?”
“And what scripture were they targeting at us?”
“A message from God Himself!” exclaimed John Mangles, who was in the act of reading the scorched fragment of paper. “It bids us hope in Him,” added the young captain, firm in the faith of his Scotch convictions.
“A message from God Himself!” exclaimed John Mangles, who was in the process of reading the burnt piece of paper. “It tells us to have hope in Him,” added the young captain, confident in his Scottish beliefs.
“Read it, John!” said Glenarvan.
"Read it, John!" said Glenarvan.
And John read what the powder had left visible: “I will deliver him, for he hath trusted in me.”
And John read what the powder had revealed: “I will deliver him, because he has trusted in me.”
“My friends,” said Glenarvan, “we must carry these words of hope to our dear, brave ladies. The sound will bring comfort to their hearts.”
“My friends,” said Glenarvan, “we need to share these words of hope with our dear, brave ladies. Hearing them will bring comfort to their hearts.”
Glenarvan and his companions hastened up the steep path to the cone, and went toward the tomb. As they climbed they were astonished to perceive every few moments a kind of vibration in the soil. It was not a movement like earthquake, but that peculiar tremor that affects the metal of a boiler under high pressure. It was clear the mountain was the outer covering of a body of vapor, the product of subterranean fires.
Glenarvan and his friends quickly climbed the steep path to the cone and headed towards the tomb. As they ascended, they were surprised to notice a kind of vibration in the ground every few moments. It wasn't like an earthquake, but rather that strange tremor that metal experiences in a high-pressure boiler. It was obvious that the mountain was the outer layer of a body of vapor, created by underground fires.
This phenomenon of course excited no surprise in those that had just traveled among the hot springs of the Waikato. They knew that the central region of the Ika-na-Mani is essentially volcanic. It is a sieve, whose interstices furnish a passage for the earth’s vapors in the shape of boiling geysers and solfataras.
This phenomenon didn’t surprise those who had just visited the hot springs of Waikato. They knew that the central area of Ika-na-Mani is mostly volcanic. It acts like a sieve, with gaps that allow the earth’s vapors to escape in the form of boiling geysers and solfataras.
Paganel, who had already noticed this, called the attention of his friends to the volcanic nature of the mountain. The peak of Maunganamu was only one of the many cones which bristle on this part of the island. It was a volcano of the future. A slight mechanical change would produce a crater of eruption in these slopes, which consisted merely of whitish silicious tufa.
Paganel, who had already seen this, pointed out to his friends that the mountain was volcanic. The peak of Maunganamu was just one of the many cones scattered across this part of the island. It was a volcano waiting to happen. A small shift in the mechanics could create a crater on these slopes, which were made up simply of whitish silicious tufa.
“That may be,” said Glenarvan, “but we are in no more danger here than standing by the boiler of the DUNCAN; this solid crust is like sheet iron.”
"That might be true," said Glenarvan, "but we're no safer here than standing next to the boiler of the DUNCAN; this strong crust is like sheet metal."
“I agree with you,” added the Major, “but however good a boiler may be, it bursts at last after too long service.”
"I agree with you," said the Major, "but no matter how good a boiler is, it eventually bursts after too much use."
“McNabbs,” said Paganel, “I have no fancy for staying on the cone. When Providence points out a way, I will go at once.”
“McNabbs,” said Paganel, “I’m not keen on staying on the cone. When fate shows me a way, I’ll go right away.”
“I wish,” remarked John, “that Maunganamu could carry us himself, with all the motive power that he has inside. It is too bad that millions of horse-power should lie under our feet unavailable for our needs. Our DUNCAN would carry us to the end of the world with the thousandth part of it.”
“I wish,” said John, “that Maunganamu could take us himself, with all the power he has inside. It’s too bad that millions of horsepower are just sitting beneath us, not available for our needs. Our DUNCAN would take us to the ends of the earth with just a tiny fraction of it.”
The recollections of the DUNCAN evoked by John Mangles turned Glenarvan’s thoughts into their saddest channel; for desperate as his own case was he often forgot it, in vain regret at the fate of his crew.
The memories of the DUNCAN that John Mangles brought up plunged Glenarvan’s thoughts into their deepest sorrow; because as hopeless as his own situation was, he often overlooked it in his futile longing for the fate of his crew.
His mind still dwelt on it when he reached the summit of Maunganamu and met his companions in misfortune.
His mind was still on it when he reached the top of Maunganamu and met his companions in hardship.
Lady Helena, when she saw Glenarvan, came forward to meet him.
Lady Helena, upon seeing Glenarvan, stepped forward to greet him.
“Dear Edward,” said she, “you have made up your mind? Are we to hope or fear?”
“Dear Edward,” she said, “have you made up your mind? Should we hope or be worried?”
“Hope, my dear Helena,” replied Glenarvan. “The natives will never set foot on the mountain, and we shall have time to devise a plan of escape.”
“Don’t worry, my dear Helena,” replied Glenarvan. “The locals will never come up the mountain, and we’ll have time to come up with an escape plan.”
“More than that, madam, God himself has encouraged us to hope.”
“Even more, ma'am, God Himself has motivated us to have hope.”
And so saying, John Mangles handed to Lady Helena the fragment of paper on which was legible the sacred words; and these young women, whose trusting hearts were always open to observe Providential interpositions, read in these words an indisputable sign of salvation.
And with that, John Mangles handed Lady Helena the piece of paper with the sacred words written on it. These young women, who always had trusting hearts ready to see divine interventions, interpreted these words as a clear sign of salvation.
“And now let us go to the ‘oudoupa!’” cried Paganel, in his gayest mood. “It is our castle, our dining-room, our study! None can meddle with us there! Ladies! allow me to do the honors of this charming abode.”
“And now let’s head to the ‘oudoupa!’” Paganel exclaimed, in his happiest mood. “It’s our castle, our dining room, our study! No one can bother us there! Ladies! Let me show you around this lovely place.”
They followed Paganel, and when the savages saw them profaning anew the tabooed burial place, they renewed their fire and their fearful yells, the one as loud as the other. But fortunately the balls fell short of our friends, though the cries reached them.
They followed Paganel, and when the locals saw them disrespecting the forbidden burial site again, they started firing and yelling in fear, both as loud as the other. But luckily, the bullets missed our friends, though the cries reached them.
Lady Helena, Mary Grant, and their companions were quite relieved to find that the Maories were more dominated by superstition than by anger, and they entered the monument.
Lady Helena, Mary Grant, and their companions were quite relieved to discover that the Maoris were more influenced by superstition than by anger, and they entered the monument.
It was a palisade made of red-painted posts. Symbolic figures, tattooed on the wood, set forth the rank and achievements of the deceased. Strings of amulets, made of shells or cut stones, hung from one part to another. In the interior, the ground was carpeted with green leaves, and in the middle, a slight mound betokened the place of the newly made grave. There lay the chief’s weapons, his guns loaded and capped, his spear, his splendid ax of green jade, with a supply of powder and ball for the happy hunting grounds.
It was a fence made of red-painted posts. Symbolic figures carved into the wood showed the rank and accomplishments of the deceased. Strings of amulets made of shells or broken stones hung from one side to the other. Inside, the ground was covered with green leaves, and in the center, a small mound marked the spot of the freshly dug grave. There lay the chief’s weapons, his guns loaded and ready, his spear, his beautiful green jade axe, along with a supply of powder and bullets for the afterlife.
“Quite an arsenal!” said Paganel, “of which we shall make a better use. What ideas they have! Fancy carrying arms in the other world!”
“Quite a collection!” said Paganel, “which we’ll put to better use. What a notion they have! Can you believe bringing weapons to the afterlife!”
“Well!” said the Major, “but these are English firearms.”
"Well!" said the Major, "but these are British firearms."
“No doubt,” replied Glenarvan, “and it is a very unwise practice to give firearms to savages! They turn them against the invaders, naturally enough. But at any rate, they will be very valuable to us.”
“No doubt,” replied Glenarvan, “and it’s a really unwise idea to give guns to savages! They naturally turn them against the invaders. But either way, they’ll be really valuable to us.”
“Yes,” said Paganel, “but what is more useful still is the food and water provided for Kara-Tete.”
“Yes,” said Paganel, “but what’s even more useful is the food and water provided for Kara-Tete.”
Things had been handsomely done for the deceased chief; the amount of provisions denoted their esteem for the departed. There was food enough to sustain ten persons for fifteen days, or the dead man forever.
Things had been done really well for the deceased chief; the amount of provisions showed their respect for the departed. There was enough food to sustain ten people for fifteen days, or the dead man for eternity.
The vegetable aliments consisted of edible ferns, sweet potatoes, the “convolvulus batatas,” which was indigenous, and the potato which had been imported long before by the Europeans. Large jars contained pure water, and a dozen baskets artistically plaited contained tablets of an unknown green gum.
The vegetable foods included edible ferns, sweet potatoes, the native "convolvulus batatas," and potatoes that had been brought over by Europeans a long time ago. Large jars held clean water, and a dozen intricately woven baskets contained blocks of an unknown green gum.
The fugitives were therefore provided for some days against hunger and thirst, and they needed no persuasion to begin their attack on the deceased chief’s stores. Glenarvan brought out the necessary quantity and put them into Olbinett’s hands. The steward, who never could forget his routine ideas, even in the most exceptional circumstances, thought the meal a slender one. He did not know how to prepare the roots, and, besides, had no fire.
The fugitives were therefore taken care of for a few days against hunger and thirst, and they needed no convincing to start their raid on the deceased chief’s supplies. Glenarvan handed over the required amount and gave it to Olbinett. The steward, who could never shake off his routine mindset, even in unusual situations, thought the meal was meager. He didn’t know how to cook the roots, and besides, he had no fire.
But Paganel soon solved the difficulty by recommending him to bury his fern roots and sweet potatoes in the soil. The temperature of the surface stratum was very high, and a thermometer plunged into the soil would have marked from 160 to 170 degrees; in fact, Olbinett narrowly missed being scalded, for just as he had scooped a hole for the roots, a jet of vapor sprang up and with a whistling sound rose six feet above the ground.
But Paganel quickly figured out the solution by suggesting that he bury his fern roots and sweet potatoes in the ground. The temperature at the surface was extremely high, and a thermometer stuck into the soil would have registered between 160 and 170 degrees; in fact, Olbinett just barely avoided getting burned, because as he was digging a hole for the roots, a burst of steam shot up and whistled as it rose six feet into the air.
The steward fell back in terror.
The steward stumbled back in fear.
“Shut off steam!” cried the Major, running to close the hole with the loose drift, while Paganel pondering on the singular phenomenon muttered to himself:
“Turn off the steam!” shouted the Major, rushing to cover the gap with the loose drift, while Paganel, contemplating the strange phenomenon, muttered to himself:
“Let me see! ha! ha! Why not?”
“Let me see! Haha! Why not?”
“Are you hurt?” inquired McNabbs of Olbinett.
“Are you hurt?” McNabbs asked Olbinett.
“No, Major,” said the steward, “but I did not expect—”
“No, Major,” said the steward, “but I didn’t expect—”
“That Providence would send you fire,” interrupted Paganel in a jovial tone. “First the larder of Kara-Tete and then fire out of the ground! Upon my word, this mountain is a paradise! I propose that we found a colony, and cultivate the soil and settle here for life! We shall be the Robinsons of Maunganamu. We should want for nothing.”
“Can you believe Providence would send you fire?” Paganel chimed in cheerfully. “First, we had the pantry of Kara-Tete, and now fire coming out of the ground! Honestly, this mountain is amazing! I say we start a colony, farm the land, and live here forever! We could be the Robinsons of Maunganamu. We wouldn’t lack for anything.”
“If it is solid ground,” said John Mangles.
“If it’s solid ground,” said John Mangles.
“Well! it is not a thing of yesterday,” said Paganel. “It has stood against the internal fire for many a day, and will do so till we leave it, at any rate.”
“Well! It’s not a new thing,” said Paganel. “It has withstood the internal fire for many days, and it will continue to do so until we leave it, at least.”
“Breakfast is ready,” announced Olbinett with as much dignity as if he was in Malcolm Castle.
“Breakfast is ready,” announced Olbinett with as much dignity as if he were in Malcolm Castle.
Without delay, the fugitives sat down near the palisade, and began one of the many meals with which Providence had supplied them in critical circumstances. Nobody was inclined to be fastidious, but opinions were divided as regarded the edible fern. Some thought the flavor sweet and agreeable, others pronounced it leathery, insipid, and resembling the taste of gum. The sweet potatoes, cooked in the burning soil, were excellent. The geographer remarked that Kara-Tete was not badly off after all.
Without wasting any time, the fugitives sat down by the fence and started one of the many meals that fate had provided them in tough situations. No one was picky, but people had different opinions about the edible fern. Some found its taste sweet and pleasant, while others described it as tough, bland, and similar to chewing gum. The sweet potatoes, cooked in the hot ground, were fantastic. The geographer noted that Kara-Tete was actually doing pretty well after all.
And now that their hunger was appeased, it was time to decide on their plan of escape.
And now that they weren't hungry anymore, it was time to figure out their escape plan.
“So soon!” exclaimed Paganel in a piteous tone. “Would you quit the home of delight so soon?”
“So soon!” Paganel exclaimed in a sad tone. “Are you really going to leave this wonderful place so quickly?”
“But, Monsieur Paganel,” interposed Lady Helena, “if this be Capua, you dare not intend to imitate Hannibal!”
“But, Mr. Paganel,” interrupted Lady Helena, “if this is Capua, you can't possibly be thinking of imitating Hannibal!”
“Madam, I dare not contradict you, and if discussion is the order of the day, let it proceed.”
“Ma'am, I can’t argue with you, and if discussing this is what we’re doing today, then let’s go for it.”
“First,” said Glenarvan, “I think we ought to start before we are driven to it by hunger. We are revived now, and ought to take advantage of it. To-night we will try to reach the eastern valleys by crossing the cordon of natives under cover of the darkness.”
“First,” said Glenarvan, “I think we should get moving before hunger forces us to. We're feeling refreshed now, and we should make the most of it. Tonight, we’ll try to reach the eastern valleys by crossing the group of natives under the cover of darkness.”
“Excellent,” answered Paganel, “if the Maories allow us to pass.”
“Great,” replied Paganel, “if the Maoris let us through.”
“And if not?” asked John Mangles.
“And if not?” asked John Mangles.
“Then we will use our great resources,” said Paganel.
“Then we will use our amazing resources,” said Paganel.
“But have we great resources?” inquired the Major.
“But do we have enough resources?” asked the Major.
“More than we can use!” replied Paganel, without any further explanation.
“More than we can use!” Paganel replied, offering no further explanation.
And then they waited for the night.
And then they waited for the night.
The natives had not stirred. Their numbers seemed even greater, perhaps owing to the influx of the stragglers of the tribe. Fires lighted at intervals formed a girdle of flame round the base of the mountain, so that when darkness fell, Maunganamu appeared to rise out of a great brasier, and to hide its head in the thick darkness. Five hundred feet below they could hear the hum and the cries of the enemy’s camp.
The natives hadn't moved. Their numbers seemed even larger, maybe because of the arrival of more tribe members. Fires lit at intervals created a ring of flames around the base of the mountain, so that when night came, Maunganamu looked like it was emerging from a huge bonfire, hiding its peak in the heavy darkness. Five hundred feet below, they could hear the buzzing and shouting from the enemy camp.
At nine o’clock the darkness being very intense, Glenarvan and John Mangles went out to reconnoiter before embarking the whole party on this critical journey. They made the descent noiselessly, and after about ten minutes, arrived on the narrow ridge that crossed the native lines, fifty feet above the camp.
At nine o’clock, with the darkness very thick, Glenarvan and John Mangles went out to scout before taking the whole group on this important journey. They descended silently, and after about ten minutes, reached the narrow ridge that ran across the native camp, fifty feet above the campsite.
All went well so far. The Maories, stretched beside the fires, did not appear to observe the two fugitives. But in an instant a double fusillade burst forth from both sides of the ridge.
All was going smoothly up to that point. The Maoris, lying next to the fires, didn’t seem to notice the two runaways. But in an instant, a double gunfire erupted from both sides of the ridge.
“Back,” exclaimed Glenarvan; “those wretches have the eyes of cats and the guns of riflemen!”
“Back,” Glenarvan exclaimed; “those wretches have the eyes of cats and the guns of marksmen!”
And they turned, and once more climbed the steep slope of the mountain, and then hastened to their friends who had been alarmed at the firing. Glenarvan’s hat was pierced by two balls, and they concluded that it was out of the question to venture again on the ridge between two lines of marksmen.
And they turned, climbed the steep slope of the mountain again, and hurried to their friends who had been worried by the gunfire. Glenarvan’s hat was shot through by two bullets, and they decided it was definitely not safe to try crossing the ridge between two lines of shooters again.
“Wait till to-morrow,” said Paganel, “and as we cannot elude their vigilance, let me try my hand on them.”
“Wait until tomorrow,” said Paganel, “and since we can’t escape their watch, let me give it a shot.”
The night was cold; but happily Kara-Tete had been furnished with his best night gear, and the party wrapped themselves each in a warm flax mantle, and protected by native superstition, slept quietly inside the inclosure, on the warm ground, still violating with the violence of the internal ebullition.
The night was cold, but luckily Kara-Tete had brought his best nighttime gear, and the group wrapped themselves in warm flax cloaks. They were shielded by local superstitions and slept peacefully inside the enclosure on the warm ground, still grappling with the intense turmoil within.
CHAPTER XIV A BOLD STRATAGEM
NEXT day, February 17th, the sun’s first rays awoke the sleepers of the Maunganamu. The Maories had long since been astir, coming and going at the foot of the mountain, without leaving their line of observation. Furious clamor broke out when they saw the Europeans leave the sacred place they had profaned.
NEXT day, February 17th, the sun’s first rays woke the sleepers of the Maunganamu. The Maoris had long since been awake, coming and going at the foot of the mountain, while keeping an eye on their vantage point. A furious uproar erupted when they saw the Europeans leave the sacred place they had desecrated.
Each of the party glanced first at the neighboring mountains, and at the deep valleys still drowned in mist, and over Lake Taupo, which the morning breeze ruffled slightly. And then all clustered round Paganel eager to hear his project.
Each person in the group first looked at the nearby mountains, then at the deep valleys still covered in mist, and over Lake Taupo, which the morning breeze gently stirred. After that, they all gathered around Paganel, eager to hear his plan.
Paganel soon satisfied their curiosity. “My friends,” said he, “my plan has one great recommendation; if it does not accomplish all that I anticipate, we shall be no worse off than we are at present. But it must, it will succeed.”
Paganel quickly addressed their curiosity. “Friends,” he said, “my plan has one major advantage; if it doesn’t achieve all that I expect, we won’t be any worse off than we are now. But it will succeed, it has to.”
“And what is it?” asked McNabbs.
“And what is it?” McNabbs asked.
“It is this,” replied Paganel, “the superstition of the natives has made this mountain a refuge for us, and we must take advantage of their superstition to escape. If I can persuade Kai-Koumou that we have expiated our profanation, that the wrath of the Deity has fallen on us: in a word, that we have died a terrible death, do you think he will leave the plateau of Maunganamu to return to his village?”
“It’s this,” replied Paganel, “the locals’ superstitions have turned this mountain into a sanctuary for us, and we need to use their beliefs to our advantage to get away. If I can convince Kai-Koumou that we’ve atoned for our wrongdoing, that the Deity’s anger has struck us: in short, that we’ve suffered a dreadful fate, do you think he’ll leave the Maunganamu plateau to go back to his village?”
“Not a doubt of it,” said Glenarvan.
“Absolutely no doubt about it,” said Glenarvan.
“And what is the horrible death you refer to?” asked Lady Helena.
“And what is the terrible death you’re talking about?” Lady Helena asked.
“The death of the sacrilegious, my friends,” replied Paganel. “The avenging flames are under our feet. Let us open a way for them!”
“The death of the profane, my friends,” replied Paganel. “The avenging flames are beneath us. Let’s clear a path for them!”
“What! make a volcano!” cried John Mangles.
“What! Create a volcano!” shouted John Mangles.
“Yes, an impromptu volcano, whose fury we can regulate. There are plenty of vapors ready to hand, and subterranean fires ready to issue forth. We can have an eruption ready to order.”
“Yes, a spontaneous volcano, whose rage we can control. There are plenty of vapors on hand, and underground fires ready to break out. We can have an eruption on demand.”
“An excellent idea, Paganel; well conceived,” said the Major.
“Great idea, Paganel; well thought out,” said the Major.
“You understand,” replied the geographer, “we are to pretend to fall victims to the flames of the Maori Pluto, and to disappear spiritually into the tomb of Kara-Tete. And stay there three, four, even five days if necessary—that is to say, till the savages are convinced that we have perished, and abandon their watch.”
“You understand,” replied the geographer, “we're supposed to pretend to fall victim to the flames of the Maori Pluto and spiritually disappear into the tomb of Kara-Tete. And we'll stay there for three, four, or even five days if necessary—that is, until the savages are convinced that we have died and stop watching us.”
“But,” said Miss Grant, “suppose they wish to be sure of our punishment, and climb up here to see?”
“But,” said Miss Grant, “what if they want to make sure we get punished and come up here to check?”
“No, my dear Mary,” returned Paganel. “They will not do that. The mountain is tabooed, and if it devoured its sacrilegious intruders, it would only be more inviolably tabooed.”
“No, my dear Mary,” Paganel replied. “They won't do that. The mountain is off-limits, and if it swallowed its disrespectful intruders, it would just become even more strictly off-limits.”
“It is really a very clever plan,” said Glenarvan. “There is only one chance against it; that is, if the savages prolong their watch at the foot of Maunganamu, we may run short of provisions. But if we play our game well there is not much fear of that.”
“It’s actually a really smart plan,” said Glenarvan. “There’s only one risk to it; if the savages keep their watch at the foot of Maunganamu, we might run low on supplies. But if we execute our strategy well, that’s not likely to happen.”
“And when shall we try this last chance?” asked Lady Helena.
“And when are we going to take this last chance?” asked Lady Helena.
“To-night,” rejoined Paganel, “when the darkness is the deepest.”
“Tonight,” replied Paganel, “when the darkness is at its deepest.”
“Agreed,” said McNabbs; “Paganel, you are a genius! and I, who seldom get up an enthusiasm, I answer for the success of your plan. Oh! those villains! They shall have a little miracle that will put off their conversion for another century. I hope the missionaries will forgive us.”
“Agreed,” said McNabbs, “Paganel, you’re a genius! And I, who rarely get excited, can vouch for the success of your plan. Oh! Those villains! They’re in for a little miracle that will delay their conversion for another century. I hope the missionaries will forgive us.”
The project of Paganel was therefore adopted, and certainly with the superstitious ideas of the Maories there seemed good ground for hope. But brilliant as the idea might be, the difficulty was in the modus operandi. The volcano might devour the bold schemers, who offered it a crater. Could they control and direct the eruption when they had succeeded in letting loose its vapor and flames, and lava streams? The entire cone might be engulfed. It was meddling with phenomena of which nature herself has the absolute monopoly.
The project suggested by Paganel was accepted, and with the superstitions of the Maoris, there seemed to be a good chance for success. However brilliant the idea might be, the challenge lay in the modus operandi. The volcano could consume the daring planners who dared to offer it a crater. Could they manage and control the eruption once they succeeded in releasing its steam, flames, and lava flows? The whole cone could be swallowed up. It was tampering with forces that nature holds complete control over.
Paganel had thought of all this; but he intended to act prudently and without pushing things to extremes. An appearance would be enough to dupe the Maories, and there was no need for the terrible realities of an eruption.
Paganel had considered all of this, but he planned to act carefully and without going overboard. A simple show would be enough to fool the Maoris, and there was no need for the horrible truths of an eruption.
How long that day seemed. Each one of the party inwardly counted the hours. All was made ready for flight. The oudoupa provisions were divided and formed very portable packets. Some mats and firearms completed their light equipment, all of which they took from the tomb of the chief. It is needless to say that their preparations were made within the inclosure, and that they were unseen by the savages.
How long that day felt. Each member of the group quietly counted the hours. Everything was set for their escape. The food supplies were split into very manageable packets. Some mats and guns rounded out their lightweight gear, all of which they took from the chief's tomb. It's worth mentioning that they made their preparations inside the enclosure, out of sight from the savages.
At six o’clock the steward served up a refreshing meal. Where or when they would eat in the valleys of the Ranges no one could foretell. So that they had to take in supplies for the future. The principal dish was composed of half a dozen rats, caught by Wilson and stewed. Lady Helena and Mary Grant obstinately refused to taste this game, which is highly esteemed by the natives; but the men enjoyed it like the real Maories. The meat was excellent and savory, and the six devourers were devoured down to the bones.
At six o'clock, the steward served a refreshing meal. No one could predict where or when they would eat in the valleys of the Ranges, so they had to stock up on supplies for the future. The main dish consisted of half a dozen rats, caught by Wilson and stewed. Lady Helena and Mary Grant stubbornly refused to try this game, which the locals highly valued; however, the men enjoyed it like true Maoris. The meat was excellent and flavorful, and the six diners picked the bones clean.
The evening twilight came on. The sun went down in a stormy-looking bank of clouds. A few flashes of lightning glanced across the horizon and distant thunder pealed through the darkened sky.
The evening twilight set in. The sun dipped below a stormy-looking bank of clouds. A few flashes of lightning flashed across the horizon, and distant thunder rumbled through the darkening sky.
Paganel welcomed the storm, which was a valuable aid to his plans, and completed his program. The savages are superstitiously affected by the great phenomena of nature. The New Zealanders think that thunder is the angry voice of Noui-Atoua, and lightning the fierce gleam of his eyes. Thus their deity was coming personally to chastise the violators of the taboo.
Paganel welcomed the storm, which was a helpful boost to his plans, and completed his agenda. The locals are superstitious about the major forces of nature. The New Zealanders believe that thunder is the angry voice of Noui-Atoua, and lightning is the fierce glare of his eyes. Thus, their deity was coming down personally to punish those who broke the taboo.
At eight o’clock, the summit of the Maunganamu was lost in portentous darkness. The sky would supply a black background for the blaze which Paganel was about to throw on it. The Maories could no longer see their prisoners; and this was the moment for action. Speed was necessary. Glenarvan, Paganel, McNabbs, Robert, the steward, and the two sailors, all lent a hand.
At eight o’clock, the top of Maunganamu was engulfed in ominous darkness. The sky would provide a dark backdrop for the fire that Paganel was about to ignite. The Maoris could no longer see their captives; this was the moment to act. They needed to move quickly. Glenarvan, Paganel, McNabbs, Robert, the steward, and the two sailors all pitched in.
The spot for the crater was chosen thirty paces from Kara-Tete’s tomb. It was important to keep the oudoupa intact, for if it disappeared, the taboo of the mountain would be nullified. At the spot mentioned Paganel had noticed an enormous block of stone, round which the vapors played with a certain degree of intensity. This block covered a small natural crater hollowed in the cone, and by its own weight prevented the egress of the subterranean fire. If they could move it from its socket, the vapors and the lava would issue by the disencumbered opening.
The location for the crater was selected thirty steps from Kara-Tete’s tomb. It was crucial to keep the oudoupa intact because if it vanished, the mountain's taboo would be invalidated. At the specified location, Paganel had noticed a huge stone block, around which the vapors danced with noticeable intensity. This block covered a small natural crater formed in the cone and, due to its weight, stopped the underground fire from escaping. If they could shift it from its place, the vapors and the lava would flow through the cleared opening.
The workers used as levers some posts taken from the interior of the oudoupa, and they plied their tools vigorously against the rocky mass. Under their united efforts the stone soon moved. They made a little trench so that it might roll down the inclined plane. As they gradually raised it, the vibrations under foot became more distinct. Dull roarings of flame and the whistling sound of a furnace ran along under the thin crust. The intrepid la-borers, veritable Cyclops handling Earth’s fires, worked in silence; soon some fissures and jets of steam warned them that their place was growing dangerous. But a crowning effort moved the mass which rolled down and disappeared. Immediately the thin crust gave way. A column of fire rushed to the sky with loud detonations, while streams of boiling water and lava flowed toward the native camp and the lower valleys.
The workers used some posts from the interior of the oudoupa as levers and worked hard with their tools against the rocky mass. With their combined efforts, the stone started to move quickly. They created a small trench so it could roll down the incline. As they lifted it gradually, the vibrations beneath them became more pronounced. Deep rumbles of flame and the whistling of a furnace echoed beneath the thin surface. The fearless laborers, true Cyclops handling Earth’s fires, worked in silence; soon, some cracks and jets of steam warned them that their position was becoming unsafe. But with one final push, the mass rolled down and vanished. Immediately, the thin surface broke apart. A column of fire shot into the sky with loud explosions, while streams of boiling water and lava flowed toward the native camp and the lower valleys.
All the cone trembled as if it was about to plunge into a fathomless gulf.
All the cone shook as if it was about to fall into an endless abyss.
Glenarvan and his companions had barely time to get out of the way; they fled to the enclosure of the oudoupa, not without having been sprinkled with water at 220 degrees. This water at first spread a smell like soup, which soon changed into a strong odor of sulphur.
Glenarvan and his friends hardly had time to get out of the way; they rushed to the oudoupa enclosure, not without being splashed with water at 220 degrees. This water initially gave off a smell like soup, which quickly turned into a strong sulfur scent.
Then the mud, the lava, the volcanic stones, all spouted forth in a torrent. Streams of fire furrowed the sides of Maunganamu. The neighboring mountains were lit up by the glare; the dark valleys were also filled with dazzling light.
Then the mud, the lava, and the volcanic rocks all burst out in a rush. Streams of fire streaked down the sides of Maunganamu. The nearby mountains were illuminated by the brightness; the dark valleys were also filled with blinding light.
All the savages had risen, howling under the pain inflicted by the burning lava, which was bubbling and foaming in the midst of their camp.
All the savages had gotten up, howling from the pain caused by the burning lava, which was bubbling and foaming right in the middle of their camp.
Those whom the liquid fire had not touched fled to the surrounding hills; then turned, and gazed in terror at this fearful phenomenon, this volcano in which the anger of their deity would swallow up the profane intruders on the sacred mountain. Now and then, when the roar of the eruption became less violent, their cry was heard:
Those who were not affected by the molten fire ran to the nearby hills; then turned and looked in fear at this terrifying sight, this volcano where their god’s wrath would consume the disrespectful intruders on the sacred mountain. Occasionally, when the eruption's roar grew quieter, their cries could be heard:
“Taboo! taboo! taboo!”
“Taboo! taboo! taboo!”
An enormous quantity of vapors, heated stones and lava was escaping by this crater of Maunganamu. It was not a mere geyser like those that girdle round Mount Hecla, in Iceland, it was itself a Hecla. All this volcanic commotion was confined till then in the envelope of the cone, because the safety valve of Tangariro was enough for its expansion; but when this new issue was afforded, it rushed forth fiercely, and by the laws of equilibrium, the other eruptions in the island must on that night have lost their usual intensity.
A massive amount of steam, heated rocks, and lava was pouring out of the crater of Maunganamu. It wasn’t just a regular geyser like those around Mount Hecla in Iceland; it was like Hecla itself. All this volcanic activity had been contained within the cone's structure because the safety valve of Tangariro was sufficient for its expansion. But when this new outlet opened up, it surged out violently, and according to the laws of balance, the other eruptions on the island must have decreased in intensity that night.
An hour after this volcano burst upon the world, broad streams of lava were running down its sides. Legions of rats came out of their holes, and fled from the scene.
An hour after this volcano erupted, wide streams of lava were flowing down its sides. Groups of rats emerged from their holes and ran away from the area.
All night long, and fanned by the tempest in the upper sky, the crater never ceased to pour forth its torrents with a violence that alarmed Glenarvan. The eruption was breaking away the edges of the opening. The prisoners, hidden behind the inclosure of stakes, watched the fearful progress of the phenomenon.
All night long, driven by the storm in the sky, the crater kept spewing its torrents with a force that worried Glenarvan. The eruption was eroding the edges of the opening. The prisoners, concealed behind the barrier of stakes, observed the terrifying unfolding of the event.
Morning came. The fury of the volcano had not slackened. Thick yellowish fumes were mixed with the flames; the lava torrents wound their serpentine course in every direction.
Morning arrived. The volcano's rage hadn't subsided. Thick yellowish smoke blended with the flames; the lava flowed in winding paths everywhere.
Glenarvan watched with a beating heart, looking from all the interstices of the palisaded enclosure, and observed the movements in the native camp.
Glenarvan watched with a pounding heart, looking through the gaps in the fenced enclosure, and observed the activity in the native camp.
The Maories had fled to the neighboring ledges, out of the reach of the volcano. Some corpses which lay at the foot of the cone, were charred by the fire. Further off toward the “pah,” the lava had reached a group of twenty huts, which were still smoking. The Maories, forming here and there groups, contemplated the canopied summit of Maunganamu with religious awe.
The Maoris had escaped to the nearby ledges, away from the volcano. Some bodies at the base of the cone were burned by the fire. Further out toward the “pah,” the lava had reached a cluster of twenty huts, which were still smoking. The Maoris, forming groups here and there, looked at the canopied peak of Maunganamu with a sense of reverence.
Kai-Koumou approached in the midst of his warriors, and Glenarvan recognized him. The chief advanced to the foot of the hill, on the side untouched by the lava, but he did not ascend the first ledge.
Kai-Koumou came forward with his warriors, and Glenarvan recognized him. The chief moved to the bottom of the hill, on the side that wasn’t affected by the lava, but he didn’t climb up the first ledge.
Standing there, with his arms stretched out like an exerciser, he made some grimaces, whose meaning was obvious to the prisoners. As Paganel had foreseen, Kai-Koumou launched on the avenging mountain a more rigorous taboo.
Standing there, with his arms stretched out like someone working out, he made some faces that clearly conveyed his feelings to the prisoners. As Paganel had predicted, Kai-Koumou enforced a stricter taboo on the avenging mountain.
Soon after the natives left their positions and followed the winding paths that led toward the pah.
Soon after the locals left their spots and followed the winding paths that led to the village.
“They are going!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “They have left their posts! God be praised! Our stratagem has succeeded! My dear Lady Helena, my brave friends, we are all dead and buried! But this evening when night comes, we shall rise and leave our tomb, and fly these barbarous tribes!”
“They're leaving!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “They've abandoned their positions! Thank God! Our plan has worked! My dear Lady Helena, my brave friends, we’re all finished! But tonight, when darkness falls, we’ll rise from our graves and escape these savage tribes!”
It would be difficult to conceive of the joy that pervaded the oudoupa. Hope had regained the mastery in all hearts. The intrepid travelers forgot the past, forgot the future, to enjoy the present delight! And yet the task before them was not an easy one—to gain some European outpost in the midst of this unknown country. But Kai-Koumou once off their track, they thought themselves safe from all the savages in New Zealand.
It was hard to imagine the joy that filled the oudoupa. Hope had taken control of everyone's hearts. The brave travelers forgot the past and the future to fully enjoy the present! Yet, the task ahead of them was not simple—securing a European outpost in the middle of this unfamiliar land. But once they were off Kai-Koumou's trail, they believed they were safe from all the dangers in New Zealand.
A whole day had to elapse before they could make a start, and they employed it in arranging a plan of flight. Paganel had treasured up his map of New Zealand, and on it could trace out the best roads.
A whole day had to pass before they could begin, and they used it to come up with a flight plan. Paganel had kept his map of New Zealand, and he could mark out the best routes on it.
After discussion, the fugitives resolved to make for the Bay of Plenty, towards the east. The region was unknown, but apparently desert. The travelers, who from their past experience, had learned to make light of physical difficulties, feared nothing but meeting Maories. At any cost they wanted to avoid them and gain the east coast, where the missionaries had several stations. That part of the country had hitherto escaped the horrors of war, and the natives were not in the habit of scouring the country.
After discussing it, the fugitives decided to head to the Bay of Plenty, towards the east. The area was unfamiliar, but seemed to be uninhabited. The travelers, having learned from their past experiences to not worry about physical challenges, were only afraid of running into Maoris. They wanted to avoid them at all costs and make it to the east coast, where the missionaries had several stations. That part of the country had so far been spared from the horrors of war, and the locals weren’t known for roaming the land.
As to the distance that separated Lake Taupo from the Bay of Plenty, they calculated it about a hundred miles. Ten days’ march at ten miles a day, could be done, not without fatigue, but none of the party gave that a thought. If they could only reach the mission stations they could rest there while waiting for a favorable opportunity to get to Auckland, for that was the point they desired to reach.
As for the distance between Lake Taupo and the Bay of Plenty, they estimated it to be around a hundred miles. It could take ten days of traveling at ten miles a day, which would be tiring, but none of the group worried about that. If they could just reach the mission stations, they could rest there while waiting for a good chance to get to Auckland, as that was their main destination.
This question settled, they resumed their watch of the native proceedings, and continued so doing till evening fell. Not a solitary native remained at the foot of the mountain, and when darkness set in over the Taupo valleys, not a fire indicated the presence of the Maories at the base. The road was free.
This question resolved, they went back to watching the locals, and kept doing so until evening came. No natives were left at the foot of the mountain, and when darkness covered the Taupo valleys, not a single fire showed that the Maoris were at the base. The road was clear.
At nine o’clock, the night being unusually dark, Glenarvan gave the order to start. His companions and he, armed and equipped at the expense of Kara-Tete, began cautiously to descend the slopes of Maunganamu, John Mangles and Wilson leading the way, eyes and ears on the alert. They stopped at the slightest sound, they started at every passing cloud. They slid rather than walked down the spur, that their figures might be lost in the dark mass of the mountain. At two hundred feet below the summit, John Mangles and his sailors reached the dangerous ridge that had been so obstinately defended by the natives. If by ill luck the Maories, more cunning than the fugitives, had only pretended to retreat; if they were not really duped by the volcanic phenomenon, this was the spot where their presence would be betrayed. Glenarvan could not but shudder, in spite of his confidence, and in spite of the jokes of Paganel. The fate of the whole party would hang in the balance for the ten minutes required to pass along that ridge. He felt the beating of Lady Helena’s heart, as she clung to his arm.
At nine o’clock, with the night unusually dark, Glenarvan gave the order to start. He and his companions, armed and equipped at Kara-Tete's expense, began to cautiously descend the slopes of Maunganamu, with John Mangles and Wilson leading the way, keeping their eyes and ears alert. They paused at the slightest sound and flinched at every passing cloud. They slid rather than walked down the spur so that their figures would blend into the dark mass of the mountain. Two hundred feet below the summit, John Mangles and his sailors reached the dangerous ridge that had been stubbornly defended by the natives. If by bad luck the Maoris, more cunning than the fugitives, had only pretended to retreat; if they were not genuinely fooled by the volcanic phenomenon, this was the spot where their presence would be revealed. Glenarvan couldn’t help but shudder, despite his confidence and the jokes from Paganel. The fate of the whole group would hang in the balance for the ten minutes needed to pass along that ridge. He felt the beating of Lady Helena’s heart as she clung to his arm.
He had no thought of turning back. Neither had John. The young captain, followed closely by the whole party, and protected by the intense darkness, crept along the ridge, stopping when some loose stone rolled to the bottom. If the savages were still in the ambush below, these unusual sounds might provoke from both sides a dangerous fusillade.
He had no intention of turning back. Neither did John. The young captain, followed closely by the entire group and shielded by the thick darkness, quietly moved along the ridge, pausing whenever a loose stone tumbled to the bottom. If the attackers were still lying in wait below, these unusual noises could trigger a dangerous exchange of gunfire from both sides.
But speed was impossible in their serpent-like progress down this sloping crest. When John Mangles had reached the lowest point, he was scarcely twenty-five feet from the plateau, where the natives were encamped the night before, and then the ridge rose again pretty steeply toward a wood for about a quarter of a mile.
But speed was impossible in their snake-like journey down this sloping ridge. When John Mangles reached the bottom, he was barely twenty-five feet from the plateau, where the natives had camped the night before, and then the ridge climbed back up pretty steeply toward a forest for about a quarter of a mile.
All this lower part was crossed without molestation, and they commenced the ascent in silence. The clump of bush was invisible, though they knew it was there, and but for the possibility of an ambush, Glenarvan counted on being safe when the party arrived at that point. But he observed that after this point, they were no longer protected by the taboo. The ascending ridge belonged not to Maunganamu, but to the mountain system of the eastern side of Lake Taupo, so that they had not only pistol shots, but hand-to-hand fighting to fear. For ten minutes, the little band ascended by insensible degrees toward the higher table-land. John could not discern the dark wood, but he knew it ought to be within two hundred feet. Suddenly he stopped; almost retreated. He fancied he heard something in the darkness; his stoppage interrupted the march of those behind.
They crossed the lower part without any trouble and started climbing in silence. The clump of bushes was out of sight, but they knew it was there, and Glenarvan felt they would be safe once the group reached that point, except for the risk of being ambushed. He noticed that beyond this point, they were no longer protected by the taboo. The ridge they were climbing belonged to the mountain range on the eastern side of Lake Taupo, meaning they had to worry not just about gunfire but also close combat. For ten minutes, the small group climbed gradually towards the higher plateau. John couldn’t see the dark woods, but he knew it should be within two hundred feet. Suddenly, he stopped and almost backed away. He thought he heard something in the darkness, and his stopping disrupted the march of those behind him.
He remained motionless long enough to alarm his companions. They waited with unspeakable anxiety, wondering if they were doomed to retrace their steps, and return to the summit of Maunganamu.
He stayed completely still for so long that it worried his friends. They waited with intense anxiety, wondering if they were going to have to go back and return to the top of Maunganamu.
But John, finding that the noise was not repeated, resumed the ascent of the narrow path of the ridge. Soon they perceived the shadowy outline of the wood showing faintly through the darkness. A few steps more and they were hid from sight in the thick foliage of the trees.
But John, noticing that the noise didn't happen again, continued up the narrow path of the ridge. Soon they saw the shadowy outline of the woods faintly showing through the darkness. A few more steps, and they were hidden from view in the thick foliage of the trees.
CHAPTER XV FROM PERIL TO SAFETY
THE night favored their escape, and prudence urged them to lose no time in getting away from the fatal neighborhood of Lake Taupo. Paganel took the post of leader, and his wonderful instinct shone out anew in this difficult mountain journey. His nyctalopia was a great advantage, his cat-like sight enabling him to distinguish the smallest object in the deepest gloom.
THE night was on their side for their escape, and caution urged them to hurry away from the dangerous area around Lake Taupo. Paganel took the lead, and his incredible instincts stood out again during this challenging mountain trek. His night blindness actually worked in his favor, as his cat-like vision allowed him to see even the smallest details in the darkest shadows.
For three hours they walked on without halting along the far-reaching slope of the eastern side. Paganel kept a little to the southeast, in order to make use of a narrow passage between the Kaimanawa and the Wahiti Ranges, through which the road from Hawkes’ Bay to Auckland passes. Once through that gorge, his plan was to keep off the road, and, under the shelter of the high ranges, march to the coast across the inhabited regions of the province.
For three hours, they walked on without stopping along the long slope of the eastern side. Paganel stayed a bit to the southeast to use a narrow passage between the Kaimanawa and the Wahiti Ranges, where the road from Hawkes’ Bay to Auckland runs. Once they were through that gorge, his plan was to avoid the road and, under the protection of the high ranges, make their way to the coast across the populated areas of the province.
At nine o’clock in the morning, they had made twelve miles in twelve hours. The courageous women could not be pressed further, and, besides, the locality was suitable for camping. The fugitives had reached the pass that separates the two chains. Paganel, map in hand, made a loop toward the northeast, and at ten o’clock the little party reached a sort of redan, formed by a projecting rock.
At nine in the morning, they had covered twelve miles in twelve hours. The brave women couldn’t go any further, and also, the area was good for camping. The escapees had arrived at the pass that divides the two mountain ranges. Paganel, with the map in hand, veered northeast, and by ten o’clock, the small group reached a kind of outcrop formed by a jutting rock.
The provisions were brought out, and justice was done to their meal. Mary Grant and the Major, who had not thought highly of the edible fern till then, now ate of it heartily.
The food was served, and they enjoyed their meal. Mary Grant and the Major, who hadn't thought much of the edible fern until that moment, now ate it eagerly.
The halt lasted till two o’clock in the afternoon, then they resumed their journey; and in the evening they stopped eight miles from the mountains, and required no persuasion to sleep in the open air.
The break lasted until two o’clock in the afternoon, then they continued their journey; and in the evening, they stopped eight miles from the mountains and needed no convincing to sleep outdoors.
Next day was one of serious difficulties. Their route lay across this wondrous region of volcanic lakes, geysers, and solfataras, which extended to the east of the Wahiti Ranges. It is a country more pleasant for the eye to ramble over, than for the limbs. Every quarter of a mile they had to turn aside or go around for some obstacle, and thus incurred great fatigue; but what a strange sight met their eyes! What infinite variety nature lavishes on her great panoramas!
The next day was filled with serious challenges. Their path took them through a stunning area of volcanic lakes, geysers, and hot springs that spread east of the Wahiti Ranges. This land is more enjoyable to look at than to walk through. Every few hundred yards, they had to detour or navigate around an obstacle, which resulted in a lot of exhaustion; but what a bizarre sight they encountered! What incredible diversity nature pours into her vast landscapes!
On this vast extent of twenty miles square, the subterranean forces had a field for the display of all their varied effects. Salt springs, of singular transparency, peopled by myriads of insects, sprang up from thickets of tea-tree scrub. They diffused a powerful odor of burnt powder, and scattered on the ground a white sediment like dazzling snow. The limpid waters were nearly at boiling point, while some neighboring springs spread out like sheets of glass. Gigantic tree-ferns grew beside them, in conditions analogous to those of the Silurian vegetation.
On this vast area of twenty square miles, the underground forces had a canvas to showcase all their diverse effects. Clear salt springs, filled with countless insects, emerged from clusters of tea-tree bushes. They emitted a strong scent of burnt gunpowder and left a white residue on the ground that looked like bright snow. The crystal-clear water was almost boiling, while some nearby springs spread out like sheets of glass. Huge tree ferns grew next to them, resembling the conditions of Silurian-era plants.
On every side jets of water rose like park fountains, out of a sea of vapor; some of them continuous, others intermittent, as if a capricious Pluto controlled their movements. They rose like an amphitheater on natural terraces; their waters gradually flowed together under folds of white smoke, and corroding the edges of the semi-transparent steps of this gigantic staircase. They fed whole lakes with their boiling torrents.
On all sides, jets of water shot up like park fountains from a sea of vapor; some flowed continuously, while others spurted intermittently, as if a playful Pluto was controlling their movement. They rose like an amphitheater on natural terraces; their waters gradually merged under waves of white mist, eroding the edges of the semi-transparent steps of this massive staircase. They fed entire lakes with their rushing torrents.
Farther still, beyond the hot springs and tumultuous geysers, came the solfataras. The ground looked as if covered with large pustules. These were slumbering craters full of cracks and fissures from which rose various gases. The air was saturated with the acrid and unpleasant odor of sulphurous acid. The ground was encrusted with sulphur and crystalline concretions. All this incalculable wealth had been accumulating for centuries, and if the sulphur beds of Sicily should ever be exhausted, it is here, in this little known district of New Zealand, that supplies must be sought.
Further on, past the hot springs and noisy geysers, came the solfataras. The ground looked like it was covered with large blisters. These were dormant craters filled with cracks and splits from which various gases emerged. The air was thick with the bitter and unpleasant smell of sulfuric acid. The ground was covered in sulfur and crystalline formations. All this immense wealth had been building up for centuries, and if the sulfur deposits in Sicily were ever used up, it is here, in this little-known area of New Zealand, that supplies should be looked for.
The fatigue in traveling in such a country as this will be best understood. Camping was very difficult, and the sportsmen of the party shot nothing worthy of Olbinett’s skill; so that they had generally to content themselves with fern and sweet potato—a poor diet which was scarcely sufficient to recruit the exhausted strength of the little party, who were all anxious to escape from this barren region.
The exhaustion from traveling in a country like this will be best understood. Camping was really tough, and the hunters in the group didn’t shoot anything that matched Olbinett’s skill; so they mostly had to make do with ferns and sweet potatoes—a poor diet that barely replenished the energy of the small group, all of whom were eager to get away from this desolate area.
But four days at least must elapse before they could hope to leave it. On February 23, at a distance of fifty miles from Maunganamu, Glenarvan called a halt, and camped at the foot of a nameless mountain, marked on Paganel’s map. The wooded plains stretched away from sight, and great forests appeared on the horizon.
But at least four days had to pass before they could hope to leave. On February 23, fifty miles from Maunganamu, Glenarvan called for a stop and set up camp at the base of a nameless mountain marked on Paganel’s map. The wooded plains extended out of sight, and large forests emerged on the horizon.
That day McNabbs and Robert killed three kiwis, which filled the chief place on their table, not for long, however, for in a few moments they were all consumed from the beaks to the claws.
That day, McNabbs and Robert killed three kiwis, which quickly became the main dish on their table. But not for long, because within a few moments, they were all gone, eaten from beak to claw.
At dessert, between the potatoes and sweet potatoes, Paganel moved a resolution which was carried with enthusiasm. He proposed to give the name of Glenarvan to this unnamed mountain, which rose 3,000 feet high, and then was lost in the clouds, and he printed carefully on his map the name of the Scottish nobleman.
At dessert, between the potatoes and sweet potatoes, Paganel put forward a resolution that was enthusiastically accepted. He suggested naming this unnamed mountain, which rose 3,000 feet high and then disappeared into the clouds, Glenarvan, and he carefully wrote the name of the Scottish nobleman on his map.
It would be idle to narrate all the monotonous and uninteresting details of the rest of the journey. Only two or three occurrences of any importance took place on the way from the lakes to the Pacific Ocean. The march was all day long across forests and plains. John took observations of the sun and stars. Neither heat nor rain increased the discomfort of the journey, but the travelers were so reduced by the trials they had undergone, that they made very slow progress; and they longed to arrive at the mission station.
It would be pointless to go over all the dull and uninteresting details of the rest of the journey. Only a couple of significant events happened on the way from the lakes to the Pacific Ocean. The march lasted all day across forests and plains. John took measurements of the sun and stars. Neither the heat nor the rain worsened the discomfort of the journey, but the travelers were so worn down by the hardships they had faced that they moved very slowly; they were eager to reach the mission station.
They still chatted, but the conversation had ceased to be general. The little party broke up into groups, attracted to each other, not by narrow sympathies, but by a more personal communion of ideas.
They still talked, but the conversation stopped being general. The small group split into clusters, drawn to each other, not by limited interests, but by a deeper sharing of thoughts.
Glenarvan generally walked alone; his mind seemed to recur to his unfortunate crew, as he drew nearer to the sea. He apparently lost sight of the dangers which lay before them on their way to Auckland, in the thought of his massacred men; the horrible picture haunted him.
Glenarvan usually walked alone; his mind kept drifting back to his unfortunate crew as he got closer to the sea. He seemed to overlook the dangers ahead of them on their journey to Auckland, wrapped up in thoughts of his slaughtered men; the terrifying image stayed with him.
Harry Grant was never spoken of; they were no longer in a position to make any effort on his behalf. If his name was uttered at all, it was between his daughter and John Mangles.
Harry Grant was never mentioned; they could no longer do anything to help him. If his name came up at all, it was only between his daughter and John Mangles.
John had never reminded Mary of what she had said to him on that last night at Ware-Atoua. He was too wise to take advantage of a word spoken in a moment of despair. When he mentioned Captain Grant, John always spoke of further search. He assured Mary that Lord Glenarvan would re-embark in the enterprise. He persistently returned to the fact that the authenticity of the document was indisputable, and that therefore Harry Grant was somewhere to be found, and that they would find him, if they had to try all over the world. Mary drank in his words, and she and John, united by the same thought, cherished the same hope. Often Lady Helena joined in the conversation; but she did not participate in their illusions, though she refrained from chilling their enthusiasm.
John never brought up what Mary had said to him on that last night at Ware-Atoua. He was too smart to use a comment made in a moment of despair against her. Whenever he mentioned Captain Grant, John always talked about further searches. He reassured Mary that Lord Glenarvan would get back on board with the mission. He kept stressing that the authenticity of the document was undeniable, and that meant Harry Grant was somewhere out there, and they would find him, even if they had to search all over the world. Mary absorbed his words, and she and John, connected by the same thoughts, shared the same hope. Often, Lady Helena joined in the discussion; but she didn’t share their illusions, even though she didn’t dampen their enthusiasm.
McNabbs, Robert, Wilson, and Mulrady kept up their hunting parties, without going far from the rest, and each one furnished his QUOTA of game.
McNabbs, Robert, Wilson, and Mulrady continued their hunting trips, without straying too far from the others, and each provided their share of game.
Paganel, arrayed in his flax mat, kept himself aloof, in a silent and pensive mood.
Paganel, dressed in his linen mat, stayed distant, lost in silent and thoughtful reflection.
And yet, it is only justice to say, in spite of the general rule that, in the midst of trials, dangers, fatigues, and privations, the most amiable dispositions become ruffled and embittered, all our travelers were united, devoted, ready to die for one another.
And yet, it’s only fair to say that despite the common belief that in the face of trials, dangers, exhaustion, and hardships, even the most pleasant people can become upset and resentful, all our travelers were united, committed, and willing to die for each other.
On the 25th of February, their progress was stopped by a river which answered to the Wakari on Paganel’s map, and was easily forded. For two days plains of low scrub succeeded each other without interruption. Half the distance from Lake Taupo to the coast had been traversed without accident, though not without fatigue.
On February 25th, their progress was halted by a river that matched the Wakari on Paganel's map and was easy to cross. For two days, they moved through uninterrupted plains of low scrub. They had covered half the distance from Lake Taupo to the coast without any accidents, though it wasn’t without its challenges.
Then the scene changed to immense and interminable forests, which reminded them of Australia, but here the kauri took the place of the eucalyptus. Although their enthusiasm had been incessantly called forth during their four months’ journey, Glenarvan and his companions were compelled to admire and wonder at those gigantic pines, worthy rivals of the Cedars of Lebanon, and the “Mammoth trees” of California. The kauris measured a hundred feet high, before the ramification of the branches. They grew in isolated clumps, and the forest was not composed of trees, but of innumerable groups of trees, which spread their green canopies in the air two hundred feet from the ground.
Then the scene shifted to vast and endless forests that reminded them of Australia, but here the kauri took the place of the eucalyptus. Even though their excitement had been continually stirred during their four-month journey, Glenarvan and his companions couldn’t help but admire and marvel at those giant pines, true competitors to the Cedars of Lebanon and the "Mammoth trees" of California. The kauris reached a height of a hundred feet before their branches spread out. They grew in isolated clusters, and the forest was made up of countless groups of trees, which unfurled their green canopies two hundred feet up in the air.
Some of these pines, still young, about a hundred years old, resembled the red pine of Europe. They had a dark crown surmounted by a dark conical shoot. Their older brethren, five or six hundred years of age, formed great green pavilions supported on the inextricable network of their branches. These patriarchs of the New Zealand forest measured fifty yards in circumference, and the united arms of all the travelers could not embrace the giant trunk.
Some of these pines, still young at about a hundred years old, looked like the red pine from Europe. They had a dark crown topped with a dark conical shoot. Their older relatives, five or six hundred years old, created massive green canopies supported by the tangled network of their branches. These giants of the New Zealand forest measured fifty yards around, and the combined reach of all the travelers couldn't wrap around the giant trunk.
For three days the little party made their way under these vast arches, over a clayey soil which the foot of man had never trod. They knew this by the quantity of resinous gum that lay in heaps at the foot of the trees, and which would have lasted for native exportation many years.
For three days, the small group traveled beneath these massive arches, across a clayey ground that no human foot had ever touched. They realized this by the amount of resinous gum piled up at the base of the trees, which would have been sufficient for local trade for many years.
The sportsmen found whole coveys of the kiwi, which are scarce in districts frequented by the Maories; the native dogs drive them away to the shelter of these inaccessible forests. They were an abundant source of nourishing food to our travelers.
The athletes discovered entire flocks of kiwi, which are rare in areas visited by the Maoris; the local dogs scare them off to the safety of these hard-to-reach forests. They were a plentiful source of nutritious food for our travelers.
Paganel also had the good fortune to espy, in a thicket, a pair of gigantic birds; his instinct as a naturalist was awakened. He called his companions, and in spite of their fatigue, the Major, Robert, and he set off on the track of these animals.
Paganel also had the luck to spot a pair of huge birds in a thicket; his instincts as a naturalist kicked in. He called to his friends, and despite their exhaustion, the Major, Robert, and he set off to track these animals.
His curiosity was excusable, for he had recognized, or thought he had recognized, these birds as “moas” belonging to the species of “dinornis,” which many naturalists class with the extinct birds. This, if Paganel was right, would confirm the opinion of Dr. Hochstetter and other travelers on the present existence of the wingless giants of New Zealand.
His curiosity was understandable, as he had identified, or thought he had identified, these birds as "moas" from the species "dinornis," which many naturalists categorize as extinct. If Paganel was correct, this would support the views of Dr. Hochstetter and other travelers about the current existence of the wingless giants of New Zealand.
These moas which Paganel was chasing, the contemporaries of the Megatherium and the Pterodactyles, must have been eighteen feet high. They were huge ostriches, timid too, for they fled with extreme rapidity. But no shot could stay their course. After a few minutes of chase, these fleet-footed moas disappeared among the tall trees, and the sportsmen lost their powder and their pains.
These moas that Paganel was chasing, the contemporaries of the Megatherium and the Pterodactyls, must have been eighteen feet tall. They were huge ostriches, and quite timid too, as they ran away quickly. But no shot could stop them. After a few minutes of pursuit, these fast-moving moas vanished among the tall trees, and the hunters lost both their ammunition and their efforts.
That evening, March 1, Glenarvan and his companions, emerging at last from the immense kauri-forest, camped at the foot of Mount Ikirangi, whose summit rose five thousand five hundred feet into the air. At this point they had traveled a hundred miles from Maunganamu, and the shore was still thirty miles away. John Mangles had calculated on accomplishing the whole journey in ten days, but he did not foresee the physical difficulties of the country.
That evening, on March 1, Glenarvan and his companions finally emerged from the vast kauri forest and set up camp at the base of Mount Ikirangi, which reached a height of 5,500 feet. By this point, they had traveled a hundred miles from Maunganamu, with the shore still thirty miles away. John Mangles had planned to complete the entire journey in ten days, but he didn’t anticipate the physical challenges of the terrain.
On the whole, owing to the circuits, the obstacles, and the imperfect observations, the journey had been extended by fully one-fifth, and now that they had reached Mount Ikirangi, they were quite worn out.
Overall, due to the detours, challenges, and incomplete observations, the journey had taken nearly one-fifth longer, and now that they had arrived at Mount Ikirangi, they were completely exhausted.
Two long days of walking were still to be accomplished, during which time all their activity and vigilance would be required, for their way was through a district often frequented by the natives. The little party conquered their weariness, and set out next morning at daybreak.
Two long days of walking still lay ahead, during which all their energy and watchfulness would be needed, as their route passed through an area often visited by the locals. The small group pushed through their fatigue and set out the next morning at dawn.
Between Mount Ikirangi which was left to the right, and Mount Hardy whose summit rose on the left to a height of 3,700 feet, the journey was very trying; for about ten miles the bush was a tangle of “supple-jack,” a kind of flexible rope, appropriately called “stifling-creeper,” that caught the feet at every step. For two days, they had to cut their way with an ax through this thousand-headed hydra. Hunting became impossible, and the sportsmen failed in their accustomed tribute. The provisions were almost exhausted, and there was no means of renewing them; their thirst was increasing by fatigue, and there was no water wherewith to quench it.
Between Mount Ikirangi on the right and Mount Hardy on the left, which stood 3,700 feet tall, the journey was really challenging. For about ten miles, the bush was a jumbled mess of “supple-jack,” a type of flexible vine fittingly called “stifling-creeper,” that snagged their feet with every step. For two days, they had to chop their way through this tangled mess. Hunting became impossible, and the hunters couldn’t bring in their usual catch. The supplies were running low, and there was no way to replenish them; they were getting thirstier from fatigue, and there was no water to drink.
The sufferings of Glenarvan and his party became terrible, and for the first time their moral energy threatened to give way. They no longer walked, they dragged themselves along, soulless bodies, animated only by the instinct of self-preservation which survives every other feeling, and in this melancholy plight they reached Point Lottin on the shores of the Pacific.
The suffering of Glenarvan and his group grew intense, and for the first time, their moral strength seemed like it might fail. They no longer walked; they dragged themselves along like soulless bodies, driven only by the instinct to survive, which outlasts all other feelings. In this sad state, they arrived at Point Lottin on the shores of the Pacific.
Here they saw several deserted huts, the ruins of a village lately destroyed by the war, abandoned fields, and everywhere signs of pillage and incendiary fires.
Here they saw several empty huts, the remnants of a village recently destroyed by the war, abandoned fields, and everywhere signs of looting and fires.
They were toiling painfully along the shore, when they saw, at a distance of about a mile, a band of natives, who rushed toward them brandishing their weapons. Glenarvan, hemmed in by the sea, could not fly, and summoning all his remaining strength he was about to meet the attack, when John Mangles cried:
They were laboring hard along the shore when they spotted a group of locals about a mile away, charging toward them with their weapons raised. Glenarvan, trapped by the sea, couldn't escape, and gathering all his remaining strength, he was about to face the attack when John Mangles shouted:
“A boat! a boat!”
"A boat! A boat!"
And there, twenty paces off, a canoe with six oars lay on the beach. To launch it, jump in and fly from the dangerous shore, was only a minute’s work. John Mangles, McNabbs, Wilson and Mulrady took the oars; Glenarvan the helm; the two women, Robert and Olbinett stretched themselves beside him. In ten minutes the canoe was a quarter of a mile from the shore. The sea was calm. The fugitives were silent. But John, who did not want to get too far from land, was about to give the order to go up the coast, when he suddenly stopped rowing.
And there, twenty steps away, a canoe with six oars rested on the beach. Launching it, jumping in, and racing away from the dangerous shore took just a minute. John Mangles, McNabbs, Wilson, and Mulrady took the oars; Glenarvan handled the helm, while the two women, Robert, and Olbinett lay beside him. In ten minutes, the canoe was a quarter of a mile from the shore. The sea was calm. The fugitives were quiet. But John, not wanting to drift too far from land, was about to signal to head up the coast when he suddenly stopped rowing.
He saw three canoes coming out from behind Point Lottin and evidently about to give chase.
He saw three canoes emerging from behind Point Lottin and clearly getting ready to chase after him.
“Out to sea! Out to sea!” he exclaimed. “Better to drown if we must!”
“Out to sea! Out to sea!” he shouted. “We’d be better off drowning if that’s what it comes to!”
The canoe went fast under her four rowers. For half an hour she kept her distance; but the poor exhausted fellows grew weaker, and the three pursuing boats began to gain sensibly on them. At this moment, scarcely two miles lay between them. It was impossible to avoid the attack of the natives, who were already preparing to fire their long guns.
The canoe sped quickly with her four rowers. For half an hour, they maintained their distance; but the poor exhausted guys grew weaker, and the three chasing boats started to catch up noticeably. At this moment, there were barely two miles between them. It was impossible to dodge the attack from the natives, who were already getting ready to fire their long guns.
What was Glenarvan about?—standing up in the stern he was looking toward the horizon for some chimerical help. What did he hope for? What did he wish? Had he a presentiment?
What was Glenarvan thinking about?—standing up in the back, he was gazing toward the horizon for some imaginary help. What was he hoping for? What did he desire? Did he have a feeling about something?
In a moment his eyes gleamed, his hand pointed out into the distance.
In an instant, his eyes sparkled, and his hand gestured into the distance.
“A ship! a ship!” he cried. “My friends, row! row hard!”
“A ship! A ship!” he shouted. “My friends, paddle! Paddle hard!”
Not one of the rowers turned his head—not an oar-stroke must be lost. Paganel alone rose, and turned his telescope to the point indicated.
Not one of the rowers turned their head—not a single oar-stroke could be wasted. Only Paganel stood up and pointed his telescope at the indicated spot.
“Yes,” said he, “a ship! a steamer! they are under full steam! they are coming to us! Found now, brave comrades!”
“Yes,” he said, “a ship! A steamer! They’re full steam ahead! They’re coming to us! Found now, brave comrades!”
The fugitives summoned new energy, and for another half hour, keeping their distance, they rowed with hasty strokes. The steamer came nearer and nearer. They made out her two masts, bare of sails, and the great volumes of black smoke. Glenarvan, handing the tiller to Robert, seized Paganel’s glass, and watched the movements of the steamer.
The fugitives found new energy, and for another half hour, maintaining their distance, they rowed quickly. The steamer got closer and closer. They spotted her two masts, stripped of sails, and the thick black smoke. Glenarvan, handing the tiller to Robert, grabbed Paganel’s binoculars and observed the steamer's movements.
John Mangles and his companions were lost in wonder when they saw Glenarvan’s features contract and grow pale, and the glass drop from his hands. One word explained it.
John Mangles and his friends were filled with amazement when they saw Glenarvan’s face tense up and turn pale, and the glass slip from his hands. One word made it clear.
“The DUNCAN!” exclaimed Glenarvan. “The DUNCAN, and the convicts!”
“The DUNCAN!” Glenarvan shouted. “The DUNCAN, and the convicts!”
“The DUNCAN!” cried John, letting go his oar and rising.
“The DUNCAN!” shouted John, dropping his oar and standing up.
“Yes, death on all sides!” murmured Glenarvan, crushed by despair.
“Yes, death everywhere!” murmured Glenarvan, overwhelmed by despair.
It was indeed the yacht, they could not mistake her—the yacht and her bandit crew!
It was definitely the yacht; they couldn't mistake her—the yacht and her crew of bandits!
The major could scarcely restrain himself from cursing their destiny.
The major could hardly stop himself from swearing at their fate.
The canoe was meantime standing still. Where should they go? Whither fly? What choice was there between the convicts and the savages?
The canoe was standing still. Where should they go? Where should they flee? What choice was there between the convicts and the savages?
A shot was fired from the nearest of the native boats, and the ball struck Wilson’s oar.
A shot was fired from the closest native boat, and the bullet hit Wilson's oar.
A few strokes then carried the canoe nearer to the DUNCAN.
A few strokes then brought the canoe closer to the DUNCAN.
The yacht was coming down at full speed, and was not more than half a mile off.
The yacht was speeding down and was no more than half a mile away.
John Mangles, between two enemies, did not know what to advise, whither to fly! The two poor ladies on their knees, prayed in their agony.
John Mangles, caught between two enemies, didn’t know what to suggest or where to run! The two poor ladies, on their knees, prayed desperately in their anguish.
The savages kept up a running fire, and shots were raining round the canoe, when suddenly a loud report was heard, and a ball from the yacht’s cannon passed over their heads, and now the boat remained motionless between the DUNCAN and the native canoes.
The natives kept shooting, and bullets were flying all around the canoe when suddenly a loud bang was heard, and a cannonball from the yacht flew over their heads. Now the boat stayed still between the DUNCAN and the native canoes.
John Mangles, frenzied with despair, seized his ax. He was about to scuttle the boat and sink it with his unfortunate companions, when a cry from Robert arrested his arm.
John Mangles, overwhelmed with despair, grabbed his ax. He was about to destroy the boat and sink it with his unfortunate companions when a shout from Robert stopped him.
“Tom Austin! Tom Austin!” the lad shouted. “He is on board! I see him! He knows us! He is waving his hat.”
“Tom Austin! Tom Austin!” the boy shouted. “He’s on the ship! I see him! He knows us! He’s waving his hat.”
The ax hung useless in John’s hand.
The ax hung uselessly in John’s hand.
A second ball whistled over his head, and cut in two the nearest of the three native boats, while a loud hurrah burst forth on board the DUNCAN.
A second shot whizzed over his head and sliced the nearest of the three native boats in half, while a loud cheer erupted on the DUNCAN.
The savages took flight, fled and regained the shore.
The savages ran away, escaped, and reached the shore again.
“Come on, Tom, come on!” cried John Mangles in a joyous voice.
“Come on, Tom, come on!” shouted John Mangles happily.
And a few minutes after, the ten fugitives, how, they knew not, were all safe on board the DUNCAN.
And a few minutes later, the ten escapees, not knowing how, were all safely on board the DUNCAN.
CHAPTER XVI WHY THE “DUNCAN” WENT TO NEW ZEALAND
IT would be vain to attempt to depict the feelings of Glenarvan and his friends when the songs of old Scotia fell on their ears. The moment they set foot on the deck of the DUNCAN, the piper blew his bagpipes, and commenced the national pibroch of the Malcolm clan, while loud hurrahs rent the air.
It would be pointless to try to describe the feelings of Glenarvan and his friends when the songs of Scotland reached their ears. The moment they stepped onto the deck of the DUNCAN, the piper played his bagpipes and began the national tune of the Malcolm clan, while loud cheers filled the air.
Glenarvan and his whole party, even the Major himself, were crying and embracing each other. They were delirious with joy. The geographer was absolutely mad. He frisked about, telescope in hand, pointing it at the last canoe approaching the shore.
Glenarvan and his entire group, including the Major, were crying and hugging each other. They were overcome with joy. The geographer was completely ecstatic. He jumped around with his telescope in hand, aiming it at the last canoe coming ashore.
But at the sight of Glenarvan and his companions, with their clothing in rags, and thin, haggard faces, bearing marks of horrible sufferings, the crew ceased their noisy demonstrations. These were specters who had returned—not the bright, adventurous travelers who had left the yacht three months before, so full of hope! Chance, and chance only, had brought them back to the deck of the yacht they never thought to see again. And in what a state of exhaustion and feebleness. But before thinking of fatigue, or attending to the imperious demands of hunger and thirst, Glenarvan questioned Tom Austin about his being on this coast.
But when they saw Glenarvan and his friends, with their clothes in tatters and lean, gaunt faces showing signs of terrible suffering, the crew quieted down. These were not the bright, adventurous travelers who had left the yacht three months ago, full of hope! It was pure luck that had brought them back to the deck of the yacht they never expected to see again. And in such a state of exhaustion and weakness. But before thinking about being tired or addressing the urgent needs of hunger and thirst, Glenarvan asked Tom Austin why he was on this coast.
Why had the DUNCAN come to the eastern coast of New Zealand? How was it not in the hands of Ben Joyce? By what providential fatality had God brought them in the track of the fugitives?
Why had the DUNCAN come to the eastern coast of New Zealand? How was it not under Ben Joyce's control? By what chance or fate had God brought them into the path of the runaways?
Why? how? and for what purpose? Tom was stormed with questions on all sides. The old sailor did not know which to listen to first, and at last resolved to hear nobody but Glenarvan, and to answer nobody but him.
Why? How? And for what purpose? Tom was bombarded with questions from all sides. The old sailor didn’t know which one to listen to first, so he finally decided to hear only Glenarvan and to answer only him.
“But the convicts?” inquired Glenarvan. “What did you do with them?”
“But what about the convicts?” Glenarvan asked. “What happened to them?”
“The convicts?” replied Tom, with the air of a man who does not in the least understand what he is being asked.
“The convicts?” replied Tom, sounding like someone who doesn't at all get what he's being asked.
“Yes, the wretches who attacked the yacht.”
“Yes, those miserable people who attacked the yacht.”
“What yacht? Your Honor’s?”
"What yacht? Your Honor's?"
“Why, of course, Tom. The DUNCAN, and Ben Joyce, who came on board.”
“Sure thing, Tom. The DUNCAN, and Ben Joyce, who joined us.”
“I don’t know this Ben Joyce, and have never seen him.”
“I don’t know this Ben Joyce, and I’ve never seen him.”
“Never seen him!” exclaimed Paganel, stupefied at the old sailor’s replies. “Then pray tell me, Tom, how it is that the DUNCAN is cruising at this moment on the coast of New Zealand?”
“Never seen him!” Paganel exclaimed, astonished by the old sailor’s responses. “Then, please tell me, Tom, how is it that the DUNCAN is currently cruising along the coast of New Zealand?”
But if Glenarvan and his friends were totally at a loss to understand the bewilderment of the old sailor, what was their amazement when he replied in a calm voice:
But if Glenarvan and his friends were completely confused by the old sailor's bewilderment, they were astonished when he responded in a calm voice:
“The DUNCAN is cruising here by your Honor’s orders.”
“The DUNCAN is sailing here on your Honor’s orders.”
“By my orders?” cried Glenarvan.
"By my orders?" shouted Glenarvan.
“Yes, my Lord. I only acted in obedience to the instructions sent in your letter of January fourteenth.”
"Yes, my Lord. I was only following the instructions from your letter dated January 14th."
“My letter! my letter!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“My letter! My letter!” exclaimed Glenarvan.
The ten travelers pressed closer round Tom Austin, devouring him with their eyes. The letter dated from Snowy River had reached the DUNCAN, then.
The ten travelers gathered closer around Tom Austin, eagerly watching him. The letter sent from Snowy River had arrived at the DUNCAN, then.
“Let us come to explanations, pray, for it seems to me I am dreaming. You received a letter, Tom?”
“Let’s get to the explanations, please, because I feel like I’m dreaming. Did you get a letter, Tom?”
“Yes, a letter from your Honor.”
“Yes, a letter from you, Your Honor.”
“At Melbourne?”
"At Melbourne?"
“At Melbourne, just as our repairs were completed.”
“At Melbourne, just as we finished our repairs.”
“And this letter?”
“And this note?”
“It was not written by you, but bore your signature, my Lord.”
“It wasn't written by you, but it had your signature, my Lord.”
“Just so; my letter was brought by a convict called Ben Joyce.”
“Exactly; my letter was delivered by a convict named Ben Joyce.”
“No, by a sailor called Ayrton, a quartermaster on the BRITANNIA.”
“No, by a sailor named Ayrton, a quartermaster on the BRITANNIA.”
“Yes, Ayrton or Ben Joyce, one and the same individual. Well, and what were the contents of this letter?”
“Yes, Ayrton or Ben Joyce, they are the same person. So, what was in this letter?”
“It contained orders to leave Melbourne without delay, and go and cruise on the eastern coast of—”
“It had orders to leave Melbourne immediately and go cruise along the eastern coast of—”
“Australia!” said Glenarvan with such vehemence that the old sailor was somewhat disconcerted.
“Australia!” Glenarvan exclaimed with such intensity that the old sailor felt a bit unsettled.
“Of Australia?” repeated Tom, opening his eyes. “No, but New Zealand.”
“Of Australia?” Tom repeated, opening his eyes. “No, but New Zealand.”
“Australia, Tom! Australia!” they all cried with one voice.
“Australia, Tom! Australia!” they all shouted together.
Austin’s head began to feel in a whirl. Glenarvan spoke with such assurance that he thought after all he must have made a mistake in reading the letter. Could a faithful, exact old servant like himself have been guilty of such a thing! He turned red and looked quite disturbed.
Austin's head started spinning. Glenarvan spoke with such confidence that he thought maybe he had misread the letter after all. Could a loyal, meticulous old servant like him really have made such a mistake? He flushed and looked genuinely unsettled.
“Never mind, Tom,” said Lady Helena. “God so willed it.”
“Don't worry about it, Tom,” said Lady Helena. “It was meant to be.”
“But, no, madam, pardon me,” replied old Tom. “No, it is impossible, I was not mistaken. Ayrton read the letter as I did, and it was he, on the contrary, who wished to bring me to the Australian coast.”
“But, no, ma'am, excuse me,” replied old Tom. “No, it’s impossible, I wasn’t wrong. Ayrton read the letter just like I did, and it was actually him who wanted to take me to the Australian coast.”
“Ayrton!” cried Glenarvan.
“Ayrton!” shouted Glenarvan.
“Yes, Ayrton himself. He insisted it was a mistake: that you meant to order me to Twofold Bay.”
“Yes, Ayrton himself. He insisted it was a mistake: that you intended to order me to Twofold Bay.”
“Have you the letter still, Tom?” asked the Major, extremely interested in this mystery.
“Do you still have the letter, Tom?” asked the Major, very interested in this mystery.
“Yes, Mr. McNabbs,” replied Austin. “I’ll go and fetch it.”
“Yes, Mr. McNabbs,” Austin replied. “I’ll go get it.”
He ran at once to his cabin in the forecastle. During his momentary absence they gazed at each other in silence, all but the Major, who crossed his arms and said:
He immediately ran to his cabin in the forecastle. During his brief absence, they looked at each other in silence, except for the Major, who crossed his arms and said:
“Well, now, Paganel, you must own this would be going a little too far.”
“Well, Paganel, you have to admit this is going a bit too far.”
“What?” growled Paganel, looking like a gigantic note of interrogation, with his spectacles on his forehead and his stooping back.
“What?” growled Paganel, looking like a giant question mark, with his glasses pushed up on his forehead and his hunched back.
Austin returned directly with the letter written by Paganel and signed by Glenarvan.
Austin returned right away with the letter that Paganel wrote and which was signed by Glenarvan.
“Will your Honor read it?” he said, handing it to him.
“Will you read it, Your Honor?” he asked, handing it to him.
Glenarvan took the letter and read as follows:
Glenarvan took the letter and read it as follows:
“Order to Tom Austin to put out to sea without delay, and to take the Duncan, by latitude 37 degrees to the eastern coast of New Zealand!”
“Order Tom Austin to set sail immediately and to take the Duncan, heading for the eastern coast of New Zealand at latitude 37 degrees!”
“New Zealand!” cried Paganel, leaping up.
“New Zealand!” Paganel exclaimed, jumping up.
And he seized the letter from Glenarvan, rubbed his eyes, pushed down his spectacles on his nose, and read it for himself.
And he grabbed the letter from Glenarvan, rubbed his eyes, pushed his glasses down on his nose, and read it for himself.
“New Zealand!” he repeated in an indescribable tone, letting the order slip between his fingers.
“New Zealand!” he repeated in a way that was hard to describe, letting the order slip through his fingers.
That same moment he felt a hand laid on his shoulder, and turning round found himself face to face with the Major, who said in a grave tone:
That same moment, he felt a hand on his shoulder, and when he turned around, he found himself face to face with the Major, who said in a serious tone:
“Well, my good Paganel, after all, it is a lucky thing you did not send the DUNCAN to Cochin China!”
“Well, my good Paganel, it’s a good thing you didn’t send the DUNCAN to Cochin China!”
This pleasantry finished the poor geographer. The crew burst out into loud Homeric laughter. Paganel ran about like a madman, seized his head with both hands and tore his hair. He neither knew what he was doing nor what he wanted to do. He rushed down the poop stairs mechanically and paced the deck, nodding to himself and going straight before without aim or object till he reached the forecastle. There his feet got entangled in a coil of rope. He stumbled and fell, accidentally catching hold of a rope with both hands in his fall.
This joke finished off the poor geographer. The crew burst into loud, hearty laughter. Paganel ran around like a madman, grabbing his head with both hands and pulling his hair. He had no idea what he was doing or what he wanted to do. He mindlessly rushed down the rear stairs and walked the deck, nodding to himself, aimlessly moving straight ahead until he reached the front of the ship. There, his feet got tangled in a coil of rope. He stumbled and fell, accidentally grabbing a rope with both hands as he fell.
Suddenly a tremendous explosion was heard. The forecastle gun had gone off, riddling the quiet calm of the waves with a volley of small shot. The unfortunate Paganel had caught hold of the cord of the loaded gun. The geographer was thrown down the forecastle ladder and disappeared below.
Suddenly, a huge explosion erupted. The forecastle gun had fired, breaking the peaceful calm of the waves with a burst of small shot. The unfortunate Paganel had grabbed the cord of the loaded gun. The geographer was knocked down the forecastle ladder and vanished below.
A cry of terror succeeded the surprise produced by the explosion. Everybody thought something terrible must have happened. The sailors rushed between decks and lifted up Paganel, almost bent double. The geographer uttered no sound.
A scream of fear followed the shock of the explosion. Everyone assumed something awful had occurred. The sailors hurried below deck and picked up Paganel, who was almost doubled over. The geographer didn’t make a sound.
They carried his long body onto the poop. His companions were in despair. The Major, who was always the surgeon on great occasions, began to strip the unfortunate that he might dress his wounds; but he had scarcely put his hands on the dying man when he started up as if touched by an electrical machine.
They carried his long body onto the deck. His friends were in despair. The Major, who was always the surgeon during major events, began to strip the unfortunate man so he could treat his wounds; but he had barely laid his hands on the dying man when he suddenly shot up as if jolted by an electrical shock.
“Never! never!” he exclaimed, and pulling his ragged coat tightly round him, he began buttoning it up in a strangely excited manner.
“Never! Never!” he shouted, and pulling his tattered coat tightly around him, he started buttoning it up in an unusually excited way.
“But, Paganel,” began the Major.
“But, Paganel,” said the Major.
“No, I tell you!”
“No way, I’m serious!”
“I must examine—”
"I need to examine—"
“You shall not examine.”
"Do not examine."
“You may perhaps have broken—” continued McNabbs.
“You might have broken—” continued McNabbs.
“Yes,” continued Paganel, getting up on his long legs, “but what I have broken the carpenter can mend.”
“Yes,” continued Paganel, standing up on his long legs, “but what I’ve broken, the carpenter can fix.”
“What is it, then?”
"What's going on, then?"
“There.”
"There."
Bursts of laughter from the crew greeted this speech. Paganel’s friends were quite reassured about him now. They were satisfied that he had come off safe and sound from his adventure with the forecastle gun.
Bursts of laughter from the crew welcomed this speech. Paganel’s friends felt much better about him now. They were relieved that he had come through his encounter with the forecastle gun safe and sound.
“At any rate,” thought the Major, “the geographer is wonderfully bashful.”
“At any rate,” the Major thought, “the geographer is really shy.”
But now Paganel was recovered a little, he had to reply to a question he could not escape.
But now Paganel had somewhat recovered, he had to answer a question he could not avoid.
“Now, Paganel,” said Glenarvan, “tell us frankly all about it. I own that your blunder was providential. It is sure and certain that but for you the DUNCAN would have fallen into the hands of the convicts; but for you we should have been recaptured by the Maories. But for my sake tell me by what supernatural aberration of mind you were induced to write New Zealand instead of Australia?”
“Now, Paganel,” Glenarvan said, “we need you to be honest about everything. I’ll admit that your mistake turned out to be a good thing. It's clear that without you, the DUNCAN would have ended up with the convicts; without you, we would have been caught again by the Maoris. For my sake, can you explain what kind of crazy thinking made you write New Zealand instead of Australia?”
“Well, upon my oath,” said Paganel, “it is—”
“Well, I swear,” said Paganel, “it is—”
But the same instant his eyes fell on Mary and Robert Grant, and he stopped short and then went on:
But the moment his eyes landed on Mary and Robert Grant, he halted abruptly and then continued on:
“What would you have me say, my dear Glenarvan? I am mad, I am an idiot, an incorrigible fellow, and I shall live and die the most terrible absent man. I can’t change my skin.”
“What do you want me to say, my dear Glenarvan? I’m crazy, I’m a fool, I’m hopeless, and I’ll live and die as the most awful absent-minded person. I can’t change who I am.”
“Unless you get flayed alive.”
“Unless you get skinned alive.”
“Get flayed alive!” cried the geographer, with a furious look. “Is that a personal allusion?”
“Get flayed alive!” shouted the geographer, his face twisted in anger. “Is that a personal jab?”
“An allusion to what?” asked McNabbs, quietly. This was all that passed. The mystery of the DUNCAN’S presence on the coast was explained, and all that the travelers thought about now was to get back to their comfortable cabins, and to have breakfast.
“An allusion to what?” McNabbs asked softly. That was all that was said. The mystery of the DUNCAN's presence on the coast was cleared up, and all the travelers could think about now was getting back to their cozy cabins and having breakfast.
However, Glenarvan and John Mangles stayed behind with Tom Austin after the others had retired. They wished to put some further questions to him.
However, Glenarvan and John Mangles stayed behind with Tom Austin after the others had left. They wanted to ask him a few more questions.
“Now, then, old Austin,” said Glenarvan, “tell me, didn’t it strike you as strange to be ordered to go and cruise on the coast of New Zealand?”
“Now, then, old Austin,” said Glenarvan, “tell me, didn’t it seem odd to you that you were told to go and cruise along the coast of New Zealand?”
“Yes, your Honor,” replied Tom. “I was very much surprised, but it is not my custom to discuss any orders I receive, and I obeyed. Could I do otherwise? If some catastrophe had occurred through not carrying out your injunctions to the letter, should not I have been to blame? Would you have acted differently, captain?”
“Yes, Your Honor,” Tom replied. “I was really surprised, but I don’t usually talk about the orders I get, so I followed them. Could I do anything else? If something went wrong because I didn’t follow your instructions exactly, wouldn’t that make me responsible? Would you have acted differently, Captain?”
“No, Tom,” replied John Mangles.
“No, Tom,” John Mangles answered.
“But what did you think?” asked Glenarvan.
“But what did you think?” Glenarvan asked.
“I thought, your Honor, that in the interest of Harry Grant, it was necessary to go where I was told to go. I thought that in consequence of fresh arrangements, you were to sail over to New Zealand, and that I was to wait for you on the east coast of the island. Moreover, on leaving Melbourne, I kept our destination a secret, and the crew only knew it when we were right out at sea, and the Australian continent was finally out of sight. But one circumstance occurred which greatly perplexed me.”
“I thought, Your Honor, that for Harry Grant's sake, it was necessary to go where I was instructed. I believed that due to some new arrangements, you were set to sail to New Zealand, and I was supposed to wait for you on the east coast of the island. Furthermore, when we left Melbourne, I kept our destination a secret, and the crew only found out when we were well out at sea and the Australian continent was completely out of sight. However, one thing happened that really confused me.”
“What was it, Tom?” asked Glenarvan.
“What was it, Tom?” Glenarvan asked.
“Just this, that when the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA heard our destination—”
“Just this: when the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA heard where we were headed—”
“Ayrton!” cried Glenarvan. “Then he is on board?”
“Ayrton!” yelled Glenarvan. “So he’s on board?”
“Yes, your Honor.”
“Yeah, your Honor.”
“Ayrton here?” repeated Glenarvan, looking at John Mangles.
“Ayrton here?” Glenarvan asked again, looking at John Mangles.
“God has so willed!” said the young captain.
"God has willed it!" said the young captain.
In an instant, like lightning, Ayrton’s conduct, his long-planned treachery, Glenarvan’s wound, Mulrady’s assassination, the sufferings of the expedition in the marshes of the Snowy River, the whole past life of the miscreant, flashed before the eyes of the two men. And now, by the strangest concourse of events, the convict was in their power.
In a split second, like a bolt of lightning, Ayrton's actions, his carefully plotted betrayal, Glenarvan's injury, Mulrady's murder, the hardships faced by the expedition in the marshes of the Snowy River, and the entire troubled past of the criminal flashed before the eyes of the two men. And now, by the most unusual turn of events, the convict was in their control.
“Where is he?” asked Glenarvan eagerly.
“Where is he?” Glenarvan asked eagerly.
“In a cabin in the forecastle, and under guard.”
“In a cabin in the front of the ship, and under guard.”
“Why was he imprisoned?”
“Why was he locked up?”
“Because when Ayrton heard the vessel was going to New Zealand, he was in a fury; because he tried to force me to alter the course of the ship; because he threatened me; and, last of all, because he incited my men to mutiny. I saw clearly he was a dangerous individual, and I must take precautions against him.”
“Because when Ayrton heard the ship was heading to New Zealand, he was furious; he tried to make me change the ship's course; he threatened me; and, finally, he encouraged my crew to mutiny. I could see clearly that he was a dangerous person, and I had to take precautions against him.”
“And since then?”
"And what happened since then?"
“Since then he has remained in his cabin without attempting to go out.”
“Since then, he has stayed in his cabin without trying to step outside.”
“That’s well, Tom.”
“That's good, Tom.”
Just at this moment Glenarvan and John Mangles were summoned to the saloon where breakfast, which they so sorely needed, was awaiting them. They seated themselves at the table and spoke no more of Ayrton.
Just then, Glenarvan and John Mangles were called to the saloon where breakfast, which they really needed, was ready for them. They sat down at the table and didn't say anything more about Ayrton.
But after the meal was over, and the guests were refreshed and invigorated, and they all went upon deck, Glenarvan acquainted them with the fact of the quartermaster’s presence on board, and at the same time announced his intention of having him brought before them.
But after the meal was done, and the guests felt refreshed and energized, they all went up on deck. Glenarvan informed them that the quartermaster was on board and announced his plan to have him brought before them.
“May I beg to be excused from being present at his examination?” said Lady Helena. “I confess, dear Edward, it would be extremely painful for me to see the wretched man.”
“Can I please be excused from being there for his examination?” said Lady Helena. “I admit, dear Edward, it would be very painful for me to see the miserable man.”
“He must be confronted with us, Helena,” replied Lord Glenarvan; “I beg you will stay. Ben Joyce must see all his victims face to face.”
“He needs to face us, Helena,” replied Lord Glenarvan; “please stay. Ben Joyce has to see all his victims in person.”
Lady Helena yielded to his wish. Mary Grant sat beside her, near Glenarvan. All the others formed a group round them, the whole party that had been compromised so seriously by the treachery of the convict. The crew of the yacht, without understanding the gravity of the situation, kept profound silence.
Lady Helena agreed to his request. Mary Grant sat next to her, close to Glenarvan. Everyone else gathered around them, the entire group that had been seriously affected by the convict's betrayal. The yacht's crew, not grasping the seriousness of the situation, remained completely silent.
“Bring Ayrton here,” said Glenarvan.
“Bring Ayrton here,” said Glenarvan.
CHAPTER XVII AYRTON’S OBSTINACY
AYRTON came. He crossed the deck with a confident tread, and mounted the steps to the poop. His eyes were gloomy, his teeth set, his fists clenched convulsively. His appearance betrayed neither effrontery nor timidity. When he found himself in the presence of Lord Glenarvan he folded his arms and awaited the questions calmly and silently.
AYRTON arrived. He walked across the deck with confidence and climbed the steps to the poop. His expression was dark, his jaw tight, and his fists clenched tight. He showed neither arrogance nor fear in his demeanor. When he stood before Lord Glenarvan, he crossed his arms and calmly waited for the questions to come.
“Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, “here we are then, you and us, on this very DUNCAN that you wished to deliver into the hands of the convicts of Ben Joyce.”
“Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, “here we are then, you and us, on this very DUNCAN that you wanted to hand over to the convicts of Ben Joyce.”
The lips of the quartermaster trembled slightly and a quick flush suffused his impassive features. Not the flush of remorse, but of shame at failure. On this yacht which he thought he was to command as master, he was a prisoner, and his fate was about to be decided in a few seconds.
The quartermaster's lips trembled slightly, and a quick flush spread across his otherwise expressionless face. It wasn't a flush of guilt, but of embarrassment at failure. On this yacht that he had believed he would command as captain, he was now a prisoner, and his fate was about to be determined in just a few seconds.
However, he made no reply. Glenarvan waited patiently. But Ayrton persisted in keeping absolute silence.
However, he didn't respond. Glenarvan waited patiently. But Ayrton continued to remain completely silent.
“Speak, Ayrton, what have you to say?” resumed Glenarvan.
“Speak, Ayrton, what do you want to say?” Glenarvan continued.
Ayrton hesitated, the wrinkles in his forehead deepened, and at length he said in calm voice:
Ayrton hesitated, the lines on his forehead deepened, and finally he spoke in a calm voice:
“I have nothing to say, my Lord. I have been fool enough to allow myself to be caught. Act as you please.”
"I have nothing to say, my Lord. I've been foolish enough to let myself get caught. Do what you want."
Then he turned his eyes away toward the coast which lay on the west, and affected profound indifference to what was passing around him. One would have thought him a stranger to the whole affair. But Glenarvan was determined to be patient. Powerful motives urged him to find out certain details concerning the mysterious life of Ayrton, especially those which related to Harry Grant and the BRITANNIA. He therefore resumed his interrogations, speaking with extreme gentleness and firmly restraining his violent irritation against him.
Then he shifted his gaze to the coast to the west, acting completely indifferent to everything happening around him. You would have assumed he was an outsider to the whole situation. But Glenarvan was committed to being patient. Strong reasons pushed him to uncover specific details about Ayrton's mysterious life, especially those involving Harry Grant and the BRITANNIA. So, he continued his questioning, speaking very kindly and keeping his anger in check.
“I think, Ayrton,” he went on, “that you will not refuse to reply to certain questions that I wish to put to you; and, first of all, ought I to call you Ayrton or Ben Joyce? Are you, or are you not, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA?”
“I think, Ayrton,” he continued, “that you won’t refuse to answer some questions I’d like to ask you; and first of all, should I call you Ayrton or Ben Joyce? Are you, or aren't you, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA?”
Ayrton remained impassive, gazing at the coast, deaf to every question.
Ayrton stayed silent, staring at the coast, ignoring every question.
Glenarvan’s eyes kindled, as he said again:
Glenarvan's eyes lit up as he said again:
“Will you tell me how you left the BRITANNIA, and why you are in Australia?”
“Can you tell me how you left the BRITANNIA and why you're in Australia?”
The same silence, the same impassibility.
The same silence, the same calmness.
“Listen to me, Ayrton,” continued Glenarvan; “it is to your interest to speak. Frankness is the only resource left to you, and it may stand you in good stead. For the last time, I ask you, will you reply to my questions?”
“Listen to me, Ayrton,” Glenarvan continued; “it's in your best interest to talk. Honesty is your only option now, and it could really help you. I'm asking you one last time, will you answer my questions?”
Ayrton turned his head toward Glenarvan, and looked into his eyes.
Ayrton turned his head toward Glenarvan and looked him in the eyes.
“My Lord,” he said, “it is not for me to answer. Justice may witness against me, but I am not going to witness against myself.”
“My Lord,” he said, “I can’t answer that. Justice might hold it against me, but I’m not going to incriminate myself.”
“Proof will be easy,” said Glenarvan.
“Proof will be easy,” said Glenarvan.
“Easy, my Lord,” repeated Ayrton, in a mocking tone. “Your honor makes rather a bold assertion there, it seems to me. For my own part, I venture to affirm that the best judge in the Temple would be puzzled what to make of me. Who will say why I came to Australia, when Captain Grant is not here to tell? Who will prove that I am the Ben Joyce placarded by the police, when the police have never had me in their hands, and my companions are at liberty? Who can damage me except yourself, by bringing forward a single crime against me, or even a blameable action? Who will affirm that I intended to take possession of this ship and deliver it into the hands of the convicts? No one, I tell you, no one. You have your suspicions, but you need certainties to condemn a man, and certainties you have none. Until there is a proof to the contrary, I am Ayrton, quartermaster of the BRITANNIA.”
“Easy there, my Lord,” Ayrton repeated mockingly. “You’re making quite a bold claim, it seems to me. For my part, I dare say that even the best judge would be confused about me. Who can say why I came to Australia when Captain Grant isn’t here to explain? Who can prove that I’m the Ben Joyce the police have been looking for, when they’ve never caught me, and my companions are all free? Who can do me harm but you, by alleging a single crime against me, or even an action that could be criticized? Who can claim that I meant to take over this ship and hand it over to the convicts? No one, I tell you, no one. You have your suspicions, but to convict a man, you need facts, and you don’t have any. Until there’s proof to the contrary, I am Ayrton, quartermaster of the BRITANNIA.”
Ayrton had become animated while he was speaking, but soon relapsed into his former indifference.
Ayrton had become lively while he was speaking, but soon fell back into his previous indifference.
He, no doubt, expected that his reply would close the examination, but Glenarvan commenced again, and said:
He probably thought his response would end the questioning, but Glenarvan started again and said:
“Ayrton, I am not a Crown prosecutor charged with your indictment. That is no business of mine. It is important that our respective situations should be clearly defined. I am not asking you anything that could compromise you. That is for justice to do. But you know what I am searching for, and a single word may put me on the track I have lost. Will you speak?”
“Ayrton, I'm not a Crown prosecutor handling your case. That's not my concern. It's important that we clearly understand our roles. I'm not asking you anything that could put you at risk. That's up to justice. But you know what I'm trying to find out, and one word could get me back on the path I've lost. Will you talk?”
Ayrton shook his head like a man determined to be silent.
Ayrton shook his head like someone who was set on staying quiet.
“Will you tell me where Captain Grant is?” asked Glenarvan.
“Can you tell me where Captain Grant is?” Glenarvan asked.
“No, my Lord,” replied Ayrton.
“No, my Lord,” Ayrton said.
“Will you tell me where the BRITANNIA was wrecked?”
“Can you tell me where the BRITANNIA went down?”
“No, neither the one nor the other.”
“No, neither one nor the other.”
“Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, in almost beseeching tones, “if you know where Harry Grant is, will you, at least, tell his poor children, who are waiting for you to speak the word?”
“Ayrton,” Glenarvan said, almost pleading, “if you know where Harry Grant is, will you at least tell his poor kids, who are waiting for you to say something?”
Ayrton hesitated. His features contracted, and he muttered in a low voice, “I cannot, my Lord.”
Ayrton paused. His face tightened, and he said quietly, “I can’t, my Lord.”
Then he added with vehemence, as if reproaching himself for a momentary weakness:
Then he added forcefully, as if scolding himself for a brief moment of weakness:
“No, I will not speak. Have me hanged, if you choose.”
“No, I won’t say anything. Go ahead and hang me if you want.”
“Hanged!” exclaimed Glenarvan, overcome by a sudden feeling of anger.
“Hanged!” Glenarvan exclaimed, suddenly filled with anger.
But immediately mastering himself, he added in a grave voice:
But quickly getting a grip on himself, he said in a serious tone:
“Ayrton, there is neither judge nor executioner here. At the first port we touch at, you will be given up into the hands of the English authorities.”
“Ayrton, there’s no judge or executioner here. When we reach the first port, you’ll be handed over to the English authorities.”
“That is what I demand,” was the quartermaster’s reply.
“That’s what I demand,” the quartermaster replied.
Then he turned away and quietly walked back to his cabin, which served as his prison. Two sailors kept guard at the door, with orders to watch his slightest movement. The witnesses of this examination retired from the scene indignant and despairing.
Then he turned away and quietly walked back to his cabin, which was like his prison. Two sailors stood guard at the door, instructed to watch his every move. The witnesses of this examination left the scene feeling angry and hopeless.
As Glenarvan could make no way against Ayrton’s obstinacy, what was to be done now? Plainly no course remained but to carry out the plan formed at Eden, of returning to Europe and giving up for the time this unsuccessful enterprise, for the traces of the BRITANNIA seemed irrevocably lost, and the document did not appear to allow any fresh interpretation. On the 37th parallel there was not even another country, and the DUNCAN had only to turn and go back.
As Glenarvan couldn’t get past Ayrton’s stubbornness, what was there left to do? Clearly, the only option was to stick to the plan made in Eden, which was to head back to Europe and abandon this unsuccessful venture for now, since the clues about the BRITANNIA seemed completely lost, and the document didn’t seem to allow for any new interpretation. At the 37th parallel, there wasn’t even another country to consider, and the DUNCAN had no choice but to turn around and head back.
After Glenarvan had consulted his friends, he talked over the question of returning, more particularly with the captain. John examined the coal bunkers, and found there was only enough to last fifteen days longer at the outside. It was necessary, therefore, to put in at the nearest port for a fresh supply.
After Glenarvan talked to his friends, he discussed the idea of going back, especially with the captain. John checked the coal bunkers and discovered there was only enough to last another fifteen days at most. So, it was essential to stop at the nearest port for a new supply.
John proposed that he should steer for the Bay of Talcahuano, where the DUNCAN had once before been revictualed before she commenced her voyage of circumnavigation. It was a direct route across, and lay exactly along the 37th parallel. From thence the yacht, being amply provisioned, might go south, double Cape Horn, and get back to Scotland by the Atlantic route.
John suggested that he should head for the Bay of Talcahuano, where the DUNCAN had been restocked before she started her journey around the world. It was a straight path across, aligning perfectly with the 37th parallel. From there, the yacht, being well stocked with supplies, could head south, round Cape Horn, and return to Scotland via the Atlantic route.
This plan was adopted, and orders were given to the engineer to get up the steam. Half an hour afterward the beak-head of the yacht was turned toward Talcahuano, over a sea worthy of being called the Pacific, and at six P. M. the last mountains of New Zealand had disappeared in warm, hazy mist on the horizon.
This plan was put into action, and the engineer was instructed to start up the steam. Half an hour later, the front of the yacht was pointed toward Talcahuano, across a sea truly deserving of the name Pacific, and by 6 P.M., the last mountains of New Zealand had faded away into a warm, hazy mist on the horizon.
The return voyage was fairly commenced. A sad voyage, for the courageous searching party to come back to the port without bringing home Harry Grant with them! The crew, so joyous at departure and so hopeful, were coming back to Europe defeated and discouraged. There was not one among the brave fellows whose heart did not swell at the thought of seeing his own country once more; and yet there was not one among them either who would not have been willing to brave the perils of the sea for a long time still if they could but find Captain Grant.
The return journey had begun. A somber journey, as the brave search team came back to port without bringing Harry Grant home with them! The crew, who had been so cheerful and hopeful at the start, were returning to Europe feeling defeated and disheartened. There was not a single one of those brave men whose heart did not swell at the thought of seeing their homeland again; yet, there was also not a single one among them who wouldn't have been willing to face the dangers of the sea for a long while longer if it meant they could find Captain Grant.
Consequently, the hurrahs which greeted the return of Lord Glenarvan to the yacht soon gave place to dejection. Instead of the close intercourse which had formerly existed among the passengers, and the lively conversations which had cheered the voyage, each one kept apart from the others in the solitude of his own cabin, and it was seldom that anyone appeared on the deck of the DUNCAN.
As a result, the cheers that welcomed Lord Glenarvan back to the yacht quickly turned into disappointment. Instead of the close bonds that used to exist among the passengers and the lively conversations that had made the journey enjoyable, everyone isolated themselves in their own cabins, and it was rare for anyone to come out on the deck of the DUNCAN.
Paganel, who generally shared in an exaggerated form the feelings of those about him, whether painful or joyous—a man who could have invented hope if necessary—even Paganel was gloomy and taciturn. He was seldom visible; his natural loquacity and French vivacity gave place to silence and dejection. He seemed even more downhearted than his companions. If Glenarvan spoke at all of renewing the search, he shook his head like a man who has given up all hope, and whose convictions concerning the fate of the shipwrecked men appeared settled. It was quite evident he believed them irrevocably lost.
Paganel, who usually mirrored the emotions of those around him, whether they were sad or happy—a guy who could create hope if he needed to—even he was feeling gloomy and quiet. He was rarely seen; his usual talkativeness and French enthusiasm were replaced by silence and sadness. He seemed even more downcast than his friends. When Glenarvan mentioned trying to search again, Paganel shook his head like someone who had lost all hope, convinced that the fate of the shipwrecked men was sealed. It was clear he thought they were hopelessly lost.
And yet there was a man on board who could have spoken the decisive word, and refused to break his silence. This was Ayrton. There was no doubt the fellow knew, if not the present whereabouts of the captain, at least the place of shipwreck. But it was evident that were Grant found, he would be a witness against him. Hence his persistent silence, which gave rise to great indignation on board, especially among the crew, who would have liked to deal summarily with him.
And yet there was a man on board who could have said something important, but he chose to stay silent. This was Ayrton. There was no doubt that he knew, if not where the captain was right now, at least where the shipwreck had happened. But it was clear that if Grant were found, he would testify against him. That's why he kept quiet, which made everyone on board very angry, especially the crew, who wanted to take matters into their own hands.
Glenarvan repeatedly renewed his attempts with the quartermaster, but promises and threats were alike useless. Ayrton’s obstinacy was so great, and so inexplicable, that the Major began to believe he had nothing to reveal. His opinion was shared, moreover, by the geographer, as it corroborated his own notion about Harry Grant.
Glenarvan kept trying to persuade the quartermaster, but both promises and threats had no effect. Ayrton's stubbornness was so intense and so baffling that the Major started to think he had nothing to say. The geographer also agreed with this, as it supported his own theory about Harry Grant.
But if Ayrton knew nothing, why did he not confess his ignorance? It could not be turned against him. His silence increased the difficulty of forming any new plan. Was the presence of the quartermaster on the Australian continent a proof of Harry Grant’s being there? It was settled that they must get this information out of Ayrton.
But if Ayrton knew nothing, why didn’t he admit it? It wouldn’t have been used against him. His silence made it harder to come up with a new plan. Did the quartermaster’s presence on the Australian continent prove that Harry Grant was there? It was decided that they needed to get this information out of Ayrton.
Lady Helena, seeing her husband’s ill-success, asked his permission to try her powers against the obstinacy of the quartermaster. When a man had failed, a woman perhaps, with her gentler influence, might succeed. Is there not a constant repetition going on of the story of the fable where the storm, blow as it will, cannot tear the cloak from the shoulders of the traveler, while the first warm rays of sunshine make him throw it off immediately?
Lady Helena, noticing her husband’s lack of success, asked if she could try her skills to handle the stubborn quartermaster. When a man has failed, a woman, with her softer approach, might just succeed. Isn’t there a recurring theme in the story of the fable where the storm, no matter how hard it blows, can't rip the cloak off the traveler’s shoulders, while the first warm rays of sunshine cause him to take it off right away?
Glenarvan, knowing his young wife’s good sense, allowed her to act as she pleased.
Glenarvan, trusting his young wife's good judgment, let her do as she wished.
The same day (the 5th of March), Ayrton was conducted to Lady Helena’s saloon. Mary Grant was to be present at the interview, for the influence of the young girl might be considerable, and Lady Helena would not lose any chance of success.
The same day (March 5th), Ayrton was taken to Lady Helena’s lounge. Mary Grant was going to be there for the meeting because the young girl's influence could be significant, and Lady Helena didn't want to miss any opportunity for success.
For a whole hour the two ladies were closeted with the quartermaster, but nothing transpired about their interview. What had been said, what arguments they used to win the secret from the convict, or what questions were asked, remained unknown; but when they left Ayrton, they did not seem to have succeeded, as the expression on their faces denoted discouragement.
For a full hour, the two women were locked in a room with the quartermaster, but nothing was disclosed about their meeting. What had been discussed, what tactics they used to extract the secret from the convict, or what questions were asked all remained a mystery; however, when they left Ayrton, they didn't appear to have been successful, as their expressions showed disappointment.
In consequence of this, when the quartermaster was being taken back to his cabin, the sailors met him with violent menaces. He took no notice except by shrugging his shoulders, which so increased their rage, that John Mangles and Glenarvan had to interfere, and could only repress it with difficulty.
As a result, when the quartermaster was being taken back to his cabin, the sailors confronted him with angry threats. He ignored them, just shrugging his shoulders, which only fueled their anger further, making it so that John Mangles and Glenarvan had to step in, and they could only manage to calm things down with great effort.
But Lady Helena would not own herself vanquished. She resolved to struggle to the last with this pitiless man, and went next day herself to his cabin to avoid exposing him again to the vindictiveness of the crew.
But Lady Helena refused to admit defeat. She decided to fight to the very end against this ruthless man, and the next day she went to his cabin herself to spare him once again from the crew's wrath.
The good and gentle Scotchwoman stayed alone with the convict leader for two long hours. Glenarvan in a state of extreme nervous anxiety, remained outside the cabin, alternately resolved to exhaust completely this last chance of success, alternately resolved to rush in and snatch his wife from so painful a situation.
The kind and gentle Scottish woman stayed alone with the convict leader for two long hours. Glenarvan, feeling extremely anxious, waited outside the cabin, torn between using this last chance to succeed and rushing in to rescue his wife from such a distressing situation.
But this time when Lady Helena reappeared, her look was full of hope. Had she succeeded in extracting the secret, and awakening in that adamant heart a last faint touch of pity?
But this time when Lady Helena came back, her expression was full of hope. Had she managed to uncover the secret and spark a last hint of pity in that unyielding heart?
McNabbs, who first saw her, could not restrain a gesture of incredulity.
McNabbs, who saw her first, couldn't help but gesture in disbelief.
However the report soon spread among the sailors that the quartermaster had yielded to the persuasions of Lady Helena. The effect was electrical. The entire crew assembled on deck far quicker than Tom Austin’s whistle could have brought them together.
However, the news quickly spread among the sailors that the quartermaster had given in to Lady Helena's charms. The impact was immediate. The whole crew gathered on deck much faster than Tom Austin could have called them together with his whistle.
Glenarvan had hastened up to his wife and eagerly asked:
Glenarvan rushed over to his wife and eagerly asked:
“Has he spoken?”
"Has he talked?"
“No,” replied Lady Helena, “but he has yielded to my entreaties, and wishes to see you.”
“No,” Lady Helena replied, “but he has given in to my requests and wants to see you.”
“Ah, dear Helena, you have succeeded!”
“Hey, dear Helena, you did it!”
“I hope so, Edward.”
“I hope so, Edward.”
“Have you made him any promise that I must ratify?”
"Have you made him any promises that I need to confirm?"
“Only one; that you will do all in your power to mitigate his punishment.”
"Just one thing: that you'll do everything you can to lessen his punishment."
“Very well, dear Helena. Let Ayrton come immediately.”
“Sure, dear Helena. Have Ayrton come right away.”
Lady Helena retired to her cabin with Mary Grant, and the quartermaster was brought into the saloon where Lord Glenarvan was expecting him.
Lady Helena went back to her cabin with Mary Grant, and the quartermaster was brought into the lounge where Lord Glenarvan was waiting for him.
CHAPTER XVIII A DISCOURAGING CONFESSION
As soon as the quartermaster was brought into the presence of Lord Glenarvan, his keepers withdrew.
As soon as the quartermaster was brought in front of Lord Glenarvan, his escorts left the room.
“You wanted to speak to me, Ayrton?” said Glenarvan.
“You wanted to talk to me, Ayrton?” Glenarvan said.
“Yes, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster.
“Yes, my Lord,” answered the quartermaster.
“Did you wish for a private interview?”
“Did you want a private meeting?”
“Yes, but I think if Major McNabbs and Mr. Paganel were present it would be better.”
“Yes, but I think it would be better if Major McNabbs and Mr. Paganel were here.”
“For whom?”
"Who for?"
“For myself.”
"For me."
Ayrton spoke quite calmly and firmly. Glenarvan looked at him for an instant, and then sent to summon McNabbs and Paganel, who came at once.
Ayrton spoke calmly and confidently. Glenarvan glanced at him for a moment, then called for McNabbs and Paganel, who arrived immediately.
“We are all ready to listen to you,” said Glenarvan, when his two friends had taken their place at the saloon table.
“We're all set to listen to you,” said Glenarvan, when his two friends had taken their seats at the saloon table.
Ayrton collected himself, for an instant, and then said:
Ayrton took a moment to steady himself, and then said:
“My Lord, it is usual for witnesses to be present at every contract or transaction between two parties. That is why I desire the presence of Messrs. Paganel and McNabbs, for it is, properly speaking, a bargain which I propose to make.”
“My Lord, it’s common for witnesses to be present at every contract or transaction between two parties. That’s why I want Messrs. Paganel and McNabbs to be here, because it is essentially a deal I’m proposing.”
Glenarvan, accustomed to Ayrton’s ways, exhibited no surprise, though any bargaining between this man and himself seemed strange.
Glenarvan, used to Ayrton's behavior, showed no surprise, even though it felt odd to be negotiating with this man.
“What is the bargain?” he said.
"What's going on?" he asked.
“This,” replied Ayrton. “You wish to obtain from me certain facts which may be useful to you. I wish to obtain from you certain advantages which would be valuable to me. It is giving for giving, my Lord. Do you agree to this or not?”
“This,” Ayrton replied. “You want to get some information from me that might help you. I want to get some benefits from you that would be helpful to me. It's a trade, my Lord. Do you agree to this or not?”
“What are the facts?” asked Paganel eagerly.
“What are the facts?” Paganel asked eagerly.
“No,” said Glenarvan. “What are the advantages?”
“No,” Glenarvan said. “What are the benefits?”
Ayrton bowed in token that he understood Glenarvan’s distinction.
Ayrton bowed to show that he understood Glenarvan's point.
“These,” he said, “are the advantages I ask. It is still your intention, I suppose, to deliver me up to the English authorities?”
“These,” he said, “are the advantages I’m asking for. It's still your plan, I assume, to hand me over to the English authorities?”
“Yes, Ayrton, it is only justice.”
“Yes, Ayrton, that’s only fair.”
“I don’t say it is not,” replied the quartermaster quietly. “Then of course you would never consent to set me at liberty.”
"I’m not saying it isn’t," the quartermaster replied calmly. "So, you would never agree to set me free."
Glenarvan hesitated before replying to a question so plainly put. On the answer he gave, perhaps the fate of Harry Grant might depend!
Glenarvan paused before answering a question that was so straightforward. The response he gave could determine Harry Grant's fate!
However, a feeling of duty toward human justice compelled him to say:
However, a sense of responsibility toward human justice drove him to say:
“No, Ayrton, I cannot set you at liberty.”
“No, Ayrton, I can't set you free.”
“I do not ask it,” said the quartermaster proudly.
“I’m not asking for it,” said the quartermaster proudly.
“Then, what is it you want?”
“So, what do you want?”
“A middle place, my Lord, between the gibbet that awaits me and the liberty which you cannot grant me.”
“A middle ground, my Lord, between the gallows that await me and the freedom that you cannot give me.”
“And that is—”
“And that’s—”
“To allow me to be left on one of the uninhabited islands of the Pacific, with such things as are absolute necessaries. I will manage as best I can, and will repent if I have time.”
“To let me be stranded on one of the uninhabited islands of the Pacific, with only the essentials. I’ll do my best to cope, and I’ll regret it if I have the chance.”
Glenarvan, quite unprepared for such a proposal, looked at his two friends in silence. But after a brief reflection, he replied:
Glenarvan, totally caught off guard by such a suggestion, stared at his two friends in silence. But after a moment of thought, he responded:
“Ayrton, if I agree to your request, you will tell me all I have an interest in knowing.”
“Ayrton, if I agree to your request, you’ll tell me everything I need to know.”
“Yes, my Lord, that is to say, all I know about Captain Grant and the BRITANNIA.”
“Yes, my Lord, that is to say, everything I know about Captain Grant and the BRITANNIA.”
“The whole truth?”
"The complete truth?"
“The whole.”
"The whole thing."
“But what guarantee have I?”
“But what guarantee do I have?”
“Oh, I see what you are uneasy about. You need a guarantee for me, for the truth of a criminal. That’s natural. But what can you have under the circumstances. There is no help for it, you must either take my offer or leave it.”
“Oh, I get why you're feeling uneasy. You want some assurance from me, for the truth about a crime. That's understandable. But what can you expect in this situation? There's no way around it, you either take my offer or you don't.”
“I will trust to you, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, simply.
“I’ll trust you, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, plainly.
“And you do right, my Lord. Besides, if I deceive you, vengeance is in your own power.”
“And you’re right, my Lord. Besides, if I trick you, revenge is in your hands.”
“How?”
“How?”
“You can come and take me again from where you left me, as I shall have no means of getting away from the island.”
“You can come and pick me up again from where you found me, since I won't have any way to escape from the island.”
Ayrton had an answer for everything. He anticipated the difficulties and furnished unanswerable arguments against himself. It was evident he intended to affect perfect good faith in the business. It was impossible to show more complete confidence. And yet he was prepared to go still further in disinterestedness.
Ayrton had a response for everything. He predicted the challenges and provided unbeatable arguments against his own points. It was clear he aimed to demonstrate complete honesty in the matter. It was impossible to display more total confidence. And yet he was ready to take his selflessness even further.
“My Lord and gentlemen,” he added, “I wish to convince you of the fact that I am playing cards on the table. I have no wish to deceive you, and I am going to give you a fresh proof of my sincerity in this matter. I deal frankly with you, because I reckon on your honor.”
“My Lord and gentlemen,” he continued, “I want to assure you that I'm playing cards on the table. I have no intention to mislead you, and I'm going to provide you with another demonstration of my honesty in this situation. I’m being upfront with you because I trust your integrity.”
“Speak, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan.
“Go ahead, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan.
“My Lord, I have not your promise yet to accede to my proposal, and yet I do not scruple to tell you that I know very little about Harry Grant.”
“My Lord, I don’t have your promise yet to agree to my proposal, and still, I don’t hesitate to say that I know very little about Harry Grant.”
“Very little,” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Not much,” exclaimed Glenarvan.
“Yes, my Lord, the details I am in a position to give you relate to myself. They are entirely personal, and will not do much to help you to recover the lost traces of Captain Grant.”
“Yes, my Lord, the details I can share with you are about myself. They are completely personal and won’t do much to help you find the whereabouts of Captain Grant.”
Keen disappointment was depicted on the faces of Glenarvan and the Major. They thought the quartermaster in the possession of an important secret, and he declared that his communications would be very nearly barren. Paganel’s countenance remained unmoved.
Keen disappointment was visible on the faces of Glenarvan and the Major. They believed the quartermaster had an important secret, but he stated that his information would be almost empty. Paganel's expression stayed unchanged.
Somehow or other, this avowal of Ayrton, and surrender of himself, so to speak, unconditionally, singularly touched his auditors, especially when the quartermaster added:
Somehow, Ayrton's confession and his unconditional surrender, so to speak, really affected his listeners, especially when the quartermaster added:
“So I tell you beforehand, the bargain will be more to my profit than yours.”
“So I’m letting you know in advance, this deal will benefit me more than it will benefit you.”
“It does not signify,” replied Glenarvan. “I accept your proposal, Ayrton. I give you my word to land you on one of the islands of the Pacific Ocean.”
“It doesn’t matter,” replied Glenarvan. “I accept your offer, Ayrton. I promise to drop you off on one of the islands in the Pacific Ocean.”
“All right, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster.
“All right, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster.
Was this strange man glad of this decision? One might have doubted it, for his impassive countenance betokened no emotion whatever. It seemed as if he were acting for someone else rather than himself.
Was this strange man happy about this decision? One might have questioned it, because his expression showed no emotion at all. It felt like he was doing this for someone else rather than himself.
“I am ready to answer,” he said.
“I’m ready to answer,” he said.
“We have no questions to put to you,” said Glenarvan. “Tell us all you know, Ayrton, and begin by declaring who you are.”
“We don’t have any questions for you,” said Glenarvan. “Just tell us everything you know, Ayrton, and start by saying who you are.”
“Gentlemen,” replied Ayrton, “I am really Tom Ayrton, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA. I left Glasgow on Harry Grant’s ship on the 12th of March, 1861. For fourteen months I cruised with him in the Pacific in search of an advantageous spot for founding a Scotch colony. Harry Grant was the man to carry out grand projects, but serious disputes often arose between us. His temper and mine could not agree. I cannot bend, and with Harry Grant, when once his resolution is taken, any resistance is impossible, my Lord. He has an iron will both for himself and others.
“Gentlemen,” replied Ayrton, “I’m actually Tom Ayrton, the quartermaster of the BRITANNIA. I left Glasgow on Harry Grant’s ship on March 12, 1861. For fourteen months, I sailed with him in the Pacific looking for a good place to establish a Scottish colony. Harry Grant was the right person to execute ambitious plans, but we often had serious disagreements. Our tempers just didn’t match. I can’t back down, and once Harry Grant makes up his mind, there's no way to resist him, my Lord. He has a strong will for himself and for others.”
“But in spite of that, I dared to rebel, and I tried to get the crew to join me, and to take possession of the vessel. Whether I was to blame or not is of no consequence. Be that as it may, Harry Grant had no scruples, and on the 8th of April, 1862, he left me behind on the west coast of Australia.”
“But despite that, I had the courage to rebel, and I tried to get the crew to join me and take control of the ship. It doesn’t matter whether I was at fault or not. Regardless, Harry Grant had no moral issues, and on April 8, 1862, he left me behind on the west coast of Australia.”
“Of Australia!” said the Major, interrupting Ayrton in his narrative. “Then of course you had quitted the BRITANNIA before she touched at Callao, which was her last date?”
“Of Australia!” said the Major, interrupting Ayrton in his story. “Then you must have left the BRITANNIA before she stopped at Callao, which was her last stop?”
“Yes,” replied the quartermaster, “for the BRITANNIA did not touch there while I was on board. And how I came to speak of Callao at Paddy O’Moore’s farm was that I learned the circumstances from your recital.”
“Yes,” replied the quartermaster, “because the BRITANNIA didn’t stop there while I was on board. The reason I brought up Callao at Paddy O’Moore’s farm is that I heard about it from your story.”
“Go on, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan.
“Go ahead, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan.
“I found myself abandoned on a nearly desert coast, but only forty miles from the penal settlement at Perth, the capital of Western Australia. As I was wandering there along the shore, I met a band of convicts who had just escaped, and I joined myself to them. You will dispense, my Lord, with any account of my life for two years and a half. This much, however, I must tell you, that I became the leader of the gang, under the name of Ben Joyce. In September, 1864, I introduced myself at the Irish farm, where I engaged myself as a servant in my real name, Ayrton. I waited there till I should get some chance of seizing a ship. This was my one idea. Two months afterward the DUNCAN arrived. During your visit to the farm you related Captain Grant’s history, and I learned then facts of which I was not previously aware—that the BRITANNIA had touched at Callao, and that her latest news was dated June, 1862, two months after my disembarkation, and also about the document and the loss of the ship somewhere along the 37th parallel; and, lastly, the strong reasons you had for supposing Harry Grant was on the Australian continent. Without the least hesitation I determined to appropriate the DUNCAN, a matchless vessel, able to outdistance the swiftest ships in the British Navy. But serious injuries had to be repaired. I therefore let it go to Melbourne, and joined myself to you in my true character as quartermaster, offering to guide you to the scene of the shipwreck, fictitiously placed by me on the east coast of Australia. It was in this way, followed or sometimes preceded by my gang of convicts, I directed your expedition toward the province of Victoria. My men committed a bootless crime at Camden Bridge; since the DUNCAN, if brought to the coast, could not escape me, and with the yacht once mine, I was master of the ocean. I led you in this way unsuspectingly as far as the Snowy River. The horses and bullocks dropped dead one by one, poisoned by the gastrolobium. I dragged the wagon into the marshes, where it got half buried. At my instance—but you know the rest, my Lord, and you may be sure that but for the blunder of Mr. Paganel, I should now command the DUNCAN. Such is my history, gentlemen. My disclosures, unfortunately, cannot put you on the track of Harry Grant, and you perceive that you have made but a poor bargain by coming to my terms.”
“I found myself abandoned on a nearly deserted coast, just forty miles from the penal settlement in Perth, the capital of Western Australia. While wandering along the shore, I came across a group of escaped convicts and decided to join them. You can skip over the details of my life for the next two and a half years. However, I must tell you that I became the leader of the gang, going by the name Ben Joyce. In September 1864, I introduced myself at an Irish farm, where I worked as a servant under my real name, Ayrton. I waited there for a chance to seize a ship. That was my sole focus. Two months later, the DUNCAN arrived. During your visit to the farm, you talked about Captain Grant’s story, and I learned some facts I hadn’t known before—that the BRITANNIA had stopped in Callao, and her latest news was from June 1862, two months after I disembarked, along with information about the document and the ship’s loss along the 37th parallel; also, the strong reasons you believed Harry Grant was on the Australian continent. Without hesitation, I decided to take the DUNCAN, a remarkable vessel that could outrun the fastest ships in the British Navy. But it needed serious repairs. So, I let it go to Melbourne and joined you as a quartermaster, offering to guide you to the site of the shipwreck, which I had fictitiously placed on the east coast of Australia. This way, with my gang of convicts sometimes following or leading, I directed your expedition toward Victoria. My men committed a pointless crime at Camden Bridge; if the DUNCAN made it to the coast, it couldn’t escape me, and with the yacht in my possession, I would be master of the ocean. I led you unsuspectingly as far as the Snowy River. The horses and cattle dropped dead one by one, poisoned by the gastrolobium. I dragged the wagon into the marshes, where it got half-buried. At my suggestion—but you know the rest, my Lord, and you can be sure that if it weren’t for Mr. Paganel’s blunder, I would now be in command of the DUNCAN. This is my story, gentlemen. Unfortunately, my revelations can’t help you find Harry Grant, and you can see that you haven’t made a great deal by agreeing to my terms.”
The quartermaster said no more, but crossed his arms in his usual fashion and waited. Glenarvan and his friends kept silence. They felt that this strange criminal had spoken the whole truth. He had only missed his coveted prize, the DUNCAN, through a cause independent of his will. His accomplices had gone to Twofold Bay, as was proved by the convict blouse found by Glenarvan. Faithful to the orders of their chief, they had kept watch on the yacht, and at length, weary of waiting, had returned to the old haunt of robbers and incendiaries in the country parts of New South Wales.
The quartermaster didn’t say anything else but crossed his arms as usual and waited. Glenarvan and his friends stayed silent. They sensed that this unusual criminal had told the whole truth. He had only missed out on his desired prize, the DUNCAN, due to circumstances beyond his control. His accomplices had gone to Twofold Bay, as the convict blouse found by Glenarvan confirmed. Staying true to their leader's orders, they had been keeping an eye on the yacht, and eventually, tired of waiting, returned to the old hideout of thieves and arsonists in the rural areas of New South Wales.
The Major put the first question, his object being to verify the dates of the BRITANNIA.
The Major asked the first question, aiming to confirm the dates of the BRITANNIA.
“You are sure then,” he said, “that it was on the 8th of April you were left on the west coast of Australia?”
“You're sure then,” he said, “that you were left on the west coast of Australia on the 8th of April?”
“On that very day,” replied Ayrton.
“On that very day,” Ayrton replied.
“And do you know what projects Harry Grant had in view at the time?”
“And do you know what plans Harry Grant had in mind at the time?”
“In an indefinite way I do.”
“In a vague sort of way, I do.”
“Say all you can, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, “the least indication may set us in the right course.”
“Tell us everything you can, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, “even the slightest clue could point us in the right direction.”
“I only know this much, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster, “that Captain Grant intended to visit New Zealand. Now, as this part of the programme was not carried out while I was on board, it is not impossible that on leaving Callao the BRITANNIA went to reconnoiter New Zealand. This would agree with the date assigned by the document to the shipwreck—the 27th of June, 1862.”
“I only know this much, my Lord,” replied the quartermaster, “that Captain Grant planned to visit New Zealand. Since this part of the plan wasn’t executed while I was on board, it’s possible that after leaving Callao, the BRITANNIA went to scout New Zealand. This would match the date given in the document for the shipwreck—June 27, 1862.”
“Clearly,” said Paganel.
"Clearly," Paganel said.
“But,” objected Glenarvan, “there is nothing in the fragmentary words in the document that could apply to New Zealand.”
“But,” Glenarvan argued, “there's nothing in the fragmented words of the document that relates to New Zealand.”
“That I cannot answer,” said the quartermaster.
"That's something I can't answer," said the quartermaster.
“Well, Ayrton,” said Glenarvan, “you have kept your word, and I will keep mine. We have to decide now on what island of the Pacific Ocean you are to be left?”
“Well, Ayrton,” Glenarvan said, “you’ve kept your promise, and I’ll keep mine. Now we need to decide which island in the Pacific Ocean you’ll be dropped off on.”
“It matters little, my Lord,” replied Ayrton.
“It doesn't matter much, my Lord,” replied Ayrton.
“Return to your cabin,” said Glenarvan, “and wait our decision.”
“Go back to your cabin,” said Glenarvan, “and wait for our decision.”
The quartermaster withdrew, guarded by the two sailors.
The quartermaster stepped back, accompanied by the two sailors.
“That villain might have been a man,” said the Major.
"That villain could have been a man," said the Major.
“Yes,” returned Glenarvan; “he is a strong, clear-headed fellow. Why was it that he must needs turn his powers to such evil account?”
“Yes,” replied Glenarvan; “he’s a strong, clear-minded guy. Why did he have to use his talents for such negative purposes?”
“But Harry Grant?”
“But Harry Grant though?”
“I must fear he is irrevocably lost. Poor children! Who can tell them where their father is?”
“I’m afraid he’s definitely lost. Poor kids! Who can tell them where their dad is?”
“I can!” replied Paganel. “Yes; I can!” One could not help remarking that the geographer, so loquacious and impatient usually, had scarcely spoken during Ayrton’s examination. He listened without opening his mouth. But this speech of his now was worth many others, and it made Glenarvan spring to his feet, crying out: “You, Paganel! you know where Captain Grant is?”
“I can!” replied Paganel. “Yes; I can!” It was hard not to notice that the geographer, who was usually so talkative and restless, had hardly said a word during Ayrton’s questioning. He listened without saying anything. But his words now were worth more than many others, and they made Glenarvan jump to his feet, exclaiming: “You, Paganel! You know where Captain Grant is?”
“Yes, as far as can be known.”
“Yes, as far as we can tell.”
“How do you know?”
"How do you know that?"
“From that infernal document.”
“From that terrible document.”
“Ah!” said the Major, in a tone of the most profound incredulity.
“Wow!” said the Major, sounding completely disbelieving.
“Hear me first, and shrug your shoulders afterward,” said Paganel. “I did not speak sooner, because you would not have believed me. Besides, it was useless; and I only speak to-day because Ayrton’s opinion just supports my own.”
“Hear me out first, and roll your eyes later,” said Paganel. “I didn’t say anything earlier because you wouldn’t have believed me. Also, it was pointless; I’m only speaking up today because Ayrton’s opinion backs me up.”
“Then it is New Zealand?” asked Glenarvan.
“Is it New Zealand then?” asked Glenarvan.
“Listen and judge,” replied Paganel. “It is not without reason, or, rather, I had a reason for making the blunder which has saved our lives. When I was in the very act of writing the letter to Glenarvan’s dictation, the word ZEALAND was swimming in my brain. This is why. You remember we were in the wagon. McNabbs had just apprised Lady Helena about the convicts; he had given her the number of the Australian and New Zealand Gazette which contained the account of the catastrophe at Camden Bridge. Now, just as I was writing, the newspaper was lying on the ground, folded in such a manner that only two syllables of the title were visible; these two syllables were ALAND. What a sudden light flashed on my mind. ALAND was one of the words in the English document, one that hitherto we had translated a terre, and which must have been the termination of the proper noun, ZEALAND.”
"Listen and judge," replied Paganel. "It's not without reason, or rather, I had a reason for the mistake that ended up saving our lives. When I was in the middle of writing the letter as dictated by Glenarvan, the word ZEALAND kept popping into my head. Here's why. You remember we were in the wagon. McNabbs had just informed Lady Helena about the convicts; he had given her the number of the Australian and New Zealand Gazette that included the report on the disaster at Camden Bridge. At that moment, the newspaper was lying on the ground, folded in such a way that only two syllables of the title were visible; those two syllables were ALAND. In that instant, everything clicked for me. ALAND was one of the words in the English document, one that until now we had translated a terre, and it must have been the ending of the proper noun, ZEALAND."
“Indeed!” said Glenarvan.
"Absolutely!" said Glenarvan.
“Yes,” continued Paganel, with profound conviction; “this meaning had escaped me, and do you know why? Because my wits were exercised naturally on the French document, as it was most complete, and in that this important word was wanting.”
“Yes,” continued Paganel, with strong conviction; “I completely missed this meaning, and do you know why? Because my attention was focused on the French document, which was very detailed, and it didn’t include this important word.”
“Oh, oh!” said the Major; “your imagination goes too far, Paganel; and you forget your former deductions.”
“Oh, oh!” said the Major. “You're letting your imagination run wild, Paganel, and you're forgetting your previous conclusions.”
“Go on, Major; I am ready to answer you.”
“Go ahead, Major; I’m ready to answer you.”
“Well, then, what do you make of your word AUSTRA?”
“Well, then, what do you think of your word AUSTRA?”
“What it was at first. It merely means southern countries.”
“What it was at first. It just means southern countries.”
“Well, and this syllable, INDI, which was first the root of the INDIANS, and second the root of the word indigenes?”
“Well, this syllable, INDI, was originally the root of the INDIANS, and also the root of the word indigenes?”
“Well, the third and last time,” replied Paganel, “it will be the first syllable of the word INDIGENCE.”
“Well, the third and final time,” replied Paganel, “it will be the first syllable of the word INDIGENCE.”
“And CONTIN?” cried McNabbs. “Does that still mean CONTINENT?”
“And CONTIN?” shouted McNabbs. “Does that still mean CONTINENT?”
“No; since New Zealand is only an island.”
“No; since New Zealand is just an island.”
“What then?” asked Glenarvan.
“What now?” asked Glenarvan.
“My dear lord,” replied Paganel, “I am going to translate the document according to my third interpretation, and you shall judge. I only make two observations beforehand. First, forget as much as possible preceding interpretations, and divest your mind of all preconceived notions. Second, certain parts may appear to you strained, and it is possible that I translate them badly; but they are of no importance; among others, the word AGONIE, which chokes me; but I cannot find any other explanation. Besides, my interpretation was founded on the French document; and don’t forget it was written by an Englishman, who could not be familiar with the idioms of the French language. Now then, having said this much, I will begin.”
“My dear lord,” replied Paganel, “I’m going to translate the document based on my third interpretation, and you can judge for yourself. I have just two points to mention first. First, try to set aside any previous interpretations and clear your mind of all preconceived notions. Second, some parts might seem a bit forced, and it’s possible that I might not translate them perfectly; but they’re not crucial. One example is the word AGONIE, which really stumps me, but I can’t find a better explanation. Also, my interpretation was based on the French document; and remember, it was written by an Englishman who might not be familiar with the idioms of the French language. With that said, I’ll begin.”
And slowly articulating each syllable, he repeated the following sentences:
And slowly pronouncing each syllable, he repeated these sentences:
“LE 27th JUIN, 1862, le trois-mats Britannia, de Glasgow, a sombre apres une longue AGONIE dans les mers AUSTRALES sur les cotes de la Nouvelle ZELANDE—in English Zealand. Deux matelots et le Capitaine Grant ont pu y ABORDER. La CONTINUellement en PRoie a une CRUELle INDIgence, ils ont jete ce document par—de longitude ET 37 degrees 11’ de LATItude. Venex a leur secours, ou ils sont PERDUS!” (On the 27th of June, 1865, the three-mast vessel BRITANNIA, of Glasgow, has foundered after a long AGOnie in the Southern Seas, on the coast of New Zealand. Two sailors and Captain Grant have succeeded in landing. Continually a prey to cruel indigence, they have thrown this document into the sea in—longitude and 37 degrees 11’ latitude. Come to their help, or they are lost.)
“ON JUNE 27, 1862, the three-masted Britannia, from Glasgow, sank after a long AGONY in the Southern Seas off the coast of New Zealand—in English Zealand. Two sailors and Captain Grant managed to make land. Constantly falling victim to severe hardship, they have thrown this document overboard at—longitude and 37 degrees 11’ latitude. Come to their rescue, or they are lost!”
Paganel stopped. His interpretation was admissible. But precisely because it appeared as likely as the preceding, it might be as false. Glenarvan and the Major did not then try and discuss it. However, since no traces of the BRITANNIA had yet been met with, either on the Patagonian or Australian coasts, at the points where these countries are crossed by the 37th parallel, the chances were in favor of New Zealand.
Paganel stopped. His interpretation was reasonable. But since it seemed just as likely as the previous one, it could also be incorrect. Glenarvan and the Major didn’t attempt to discuss it further. However, since they hadn't found any signs of the BRITANNIA on either the Patagonian or Australian coasts, at the locations where these countries cross the 37th parallel, the odds were leaning towards New Zealand.
“Now, Paganel,” said Glenarvan, “will you tell me why you have kept this interpretation secret for nearly two months?”
“Now, Paganel,” Glenarvan said, “can you tell me why you’ve kept this interpretation a secret for almost two months?”
“Because I did not wish to buoy you up again with vain hopes. Besides, we were going to Auckland, to the very spot indicated by the latitude of the document.”
“Because I didn't want to lift your spirits with false hopes again. Plus, we were heading to Auckland, to exactly the location specified by the latitude in the document.”
“But since then, when we were dragged out of the route, why did you not speak?”
“But since then, when we were pulled off the path, why didn’t you say anything?”
“Because, however just the interpretation, it could do nothing for the deliverance of the captain.”
“Even though the interpretation was fair, it couldn't help the captain at all.”
“Why not, Paganel?”
"Why not, Paganel?"
“Because, admitting that the captain was wrecked on the New Zealand coast, now that two years have passed and he has not reappeared, he must have perished by shipwreck or by the New Zealanders.”
“Because, if we acknowledge that the captain was stranded on the New Zealand coast, now that two years have gone by and he hasn’t shown up, he must have died in a shipwreck or at the hands of the New Zealanders.”
“Then you are of the opinion,” said Glenarvan, “that—”
“Then you think,” said Glenarvan, “that—”
“That vestiges of the wreck might be found; but that the survivors of the BRITANNIA have, beyond doubt, perished.”
"That remnants of the wreck might be found; but that the survivors of the BRITANNIA have, without a doubt, perished."
“Keep all this silent, friends,” said Glenarvan, “and let me choose a fitting moment to communicate these sad tidings to Captain Grant’s children.”
“Keep this to yourselves, friends,” said Glenarvan, “and let me find the right time to share this sad news with Captain Grant’s kids.”
CHAPTER XIX A CRY IN THE NIGHT
THE crew soon heard that no light had been thrown on the situation of Captain Grant by the revelations of Ayrton, and it caused profound disappointment among them, for they had counted on the quartermaster, and the quartermaster knew nothing which could put the DUNCAN on the right track.
THE crew soon learned that Ayrton's revelations hadn't shed any light on Captain Grant's situation, and it deeply disappointed them, as they had relied on the quartermaster, who knew nothing that could help the DUNCAN get on the right track.
The yacht therefore continued her course. They had yet to select the island for Ayrton’s banishment.
The yacht continued on its path. They still needed to choose the island for Ayrton’s exile.
Paganel and John Mangles consulted the charts on board, and exactly on the 37th parallel found a little isle marked by the name of Maria Theresa, a sunken rock in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, 3,500 miles from the American coast, and 1,500 miles from New Zealand. The nearest land on the north was the Archipelago of Pomotou, under the protectorate of France; on the south there was nothing but the eternal ice-belt of the Polar Sea. No ship would come to reconnoiter this solitary isle. No echoes from the world would ever reach it. The storm birds only would rest awhile on it during their long flight, and in many charts the rock was not even marked.
Paganel and John Mangles looked at the charts on board and found a small island labeled Maria Theresa right on the 37th parallel. It was a submerged rock in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, 3,500 miles from the American coast and 1,500 miles from New Zealand. The closest land to the north was the Pomotou Archipelago, under French protection, while to the south, there was nothing but the endless ice of the Polar Sea. No ship would come to explore this lonely island. No sounds from the outside world would ever reach it. Only storm birds would stop for a moment during their long journeys, and many maps didn’t even show the rock.
If ever complete isolation was to be found on earth, it was on this little out-of-the-way island. Ayrton was informed of its situation, and expressed his willingness to live there apart from his fellows. The head of the vessel was in consequence turned toward it immediately.
If there was ever a place of total isolation on earth, it was this small, remote island. Ayrton was told about its location and said he was willing to live there away from others. As a result, the ship's course was immediately changed to head toward it.
Two days later, at two o’clock, the man on watch signaled land on the horizon. This was Maria Theresa, a low, elongated island, scarcely raised above the waves, and looking like an enormous whale. It was still thirty miles distant from the yacht, whose stem was rapidly cutting her way over the water at the rate of sixteen knots an hour.
Two days later, at two o'clock, the lookout signaled that land was in sight on the horizon. It was Maria Theresa, a low, elongated island, barely above the waves, looking like a giant whale. The yacht was still thirty miles away, cruising over the water at a swift sixteen knots an hour.
Gradually the form of the island grew more distinct on the horizon. The orb of day sinking in the west, threw up its peculiar outlines in sharp relief. A few peaks of no great elevation stood out here and there, tipped with sunlight. At five o’clock John Mangles could discern a light smoke rising from it.
Slowly, the shape of the island became clearer on the horizon. The sun setting in the west highlighted its unique outlines in sharp contrast. A few low peaks could be seen scattered around, catching the sunlight. At five o'clock, John Mangles noticed a thin column of smoke rising from it.
“Is it a volcano?” he asked of Paganel, who was gazing at this new land through his telescope.
“Is that a volcano?” he asked Paganel, who was watching this new land through his telescope.
“I don’t know what to think,” replied the geographer; “Maria Theresa is a spot little known; nevertheless, it would not be surprising if its origin were due to some submarine upheaval, and consequently it may be volcanic.”
“I’m not sure what to think,” replied the geographer. “Maria Theresa is not very well known; however, it wouldn’t be surprising if its origin came from some underwater upheaval, so it might be volcanic.”
“But in that case,” said Glenarvan, “is there not reason to fear that if an eruption produced it, an eruption may carry it away?”
“But in that case,” Glenarvan said, “isn’t there a reason to worry that if an eruption created it, an eruption might wash it away?”
“That is not possible,” replied Paganel. “We know of its existence for several centuries, which is our security. When the Isle Julia emerged from the Mediterranean, it did not remain long above the waves, and disappeared a few months after its birth.”
"That's not possible," Paganel replied. "We've known about its existence for several centuries, which gives us confidence. When Isle Julia appeared in the Mediterranean, it didn't stay above the waves for long and disappeared a few months after it first emerged."
“Very good,” said Glenarvan. “Do you think, John, we can get there to-night?”
“Great,” said Glenarvan. “Do you think, John, we can get there tonight?”
“No, your honor, I must not risk the DUNCAN in the dark, for I am unacquainted with the coast. I will keep under steam, but go very slowly, and to-morrow, at daybreak, we can send off a boat.”
“No, your honor, I can’t risk the DUNCAN in the dark because I’m not familiar with the coast. I’ll keep the engine running but go very slowly, and tomorrow at daybreak, we can send a boat out.”
At eight o’clock in the evening, Maria Theresa, though five miles to leeward, appeared only an elongated shadow, scarcely visible. The DUNCAN was always getting nearer.
At eight o’clock in the evening, Maria Theresa, even though five miles downwind, looked like just a long shadow, barely visible. The DUNCAN was constantly getting closer.
At nine o’clock, a bright glare became visible, and flames shot up through the darkness. The light was steady and continued.
At nine o’clock, a bright light appeared, and flames burst up through the darkness. The light was steady and persistent.
“That confirms the supposition of a volcano,” said Paganel, observing it attentively.
“That confirms the idea of a volcano,” said Paganel, watching it closely.
“Yet,” replied John Mangles, “at this distance we ought to hear the noise which always accompanies an eruption, and the east wind brings no sound whatever to our ear.”
“Yet,” replied John Mangles, “from this distance, we should be able to hear the noise that always comes with an eruption, and the east wind brings no sound at all to us.”
“That’s true,” said Paganel. “It is a volcano that blazes, but does not speak. The gleam seems intermittent too, sometimes, like that of a lighthouse.”
"That's right," said Paganel. "It's a volcano that erupts, but doesn’t make a sound. The light flickers, sometimes, like that of a lighthouse."
“You are right,” said John Mangles, “and yet we are not on a lighted coast.”
“You're right,” said John Mangles, “but we’re not by a lit-up coast.”
“Ah!” he exclaimed, “another fire? On the shore this time! Look! It moves! It has changed its place!”
“Wow!” he shouted, “another fire? On the beach this time! Look! It's moving! It changed its spot!”
John was not mistaken. A fresh fire had appeared, which seemed to die out now and then, and suddenly flare up again.
John was right. A new fire had started, flickering out occasionally and then suddenly flaring back up.
“Is the island inhabited then?” said Glenarvan.
“Is the island populated then?” asked Glenarvan.
“By savages, evidently,” replied Paganel.
"Clearly by savages," replied Paganel.
“But in that case, we cannot leave the quartermaster there.”
“But in that case, we can't leave the quartermaster there.”
“No,” replied the Major, “he would be too bad a gift even to bestow on savages.”
“No,” replied the Major, “he would be too awful a gift to even give to savages.”
“We must find some other uninhabited island,” said Glenarvan, who could not help smiling at the delicacy of McNabbs. “I promised Ayrton his life, and I mean to keep my promise.”
“We need to find another uninhabited island,” Glenarvan said, unable to suppress a smile at McNabbs' sensitivity. “I promised Ayrton his life, and I intend to keep that promise.”
“At all events, don’t let us trust them,” added Paganel. “The New Zealanders have the barbarous custom of deceiving ships by moving lights, like the wreckers on the Cornish coast in former times. Now the natives of Maria Theresa may have heard of this proceeding.”
“At all events, let's not trust them,” added Paganel. “The New Zealanders have the savage habit of tricking ships with moving lights, just like the wreckers on the Cornish coast used to do. Now the locals of Maria Theresa might have heard about this tactic.”
“Keep her off a point,” called out John to the man at the helm. “To-morrow at sunrise we shall know what we’re about.”
“Keep her off a point,” John shouted to the guy at the wheel. “Tomorrow at sunrise, we’ll know what we’re dealing with.”
At eleven o’clock, the passengers and John Mangles retired to their cabins. In the forepart of the yacht the man on watch was pacing the deck, while aft, there was no one but the man at the wheel.
At eleven o'clock, the passengers and John Mangles headed to their cabins. In the front of the yacht, the watchman was pacing the deck, while at the back, there was only the guy at the wheel.
At this moment Mary Grant and Robert came on the poop.
At that moment, Mary Grant and Robert stepped onto the deck.
The two children of the captain, leaning over the rail, gazed sadly at the phosphorescent waves and the luminous wake of the DUNCAN. Mary was thinking of her brother’s future, and Robert of his sister’s. Their father was uppermost in the minds of both. Was this idolized parent still in existence? Must they give him up? But no, for what would life be without him? What would become of them without him? What would have become of them already, but for Lord Glenarvan and Lady Helena?
The captain's two children leaned over the railing, watching the glowing waves and the bright wake of the DUNCAN with sadness. Mary was thinking about her brother’s future, while Robert thought of his sister’s. Their father was the top concern for both of them. Was this beloved parent still alive? Would they have to let him go? But no, what would life be without him? What would happen to them without him? What would have happened to them already if it weren’t for Lord Glenarvan and Lady Helena?
The young boy, old above his years through trouble, divined the thoughts that troubled his sister, and taking her hand in his own, said, “Mary, we must never despair. Remember the lessons our father gave us. Keep your courage up and no matter what befalls you, let us show this obstinate courage which can rise above everything. Up to this time, sister, you have been working for me, it is my turn now, and I will work for you.”
The young boy, wise beyond his years from hardship, sensed the worries troubling his sister. Taking her hand in his, he said, “Mary, we must never lose hope. Remember our father's lessons. Stay strong, and no matter what happens, let's show this stubborn courage that can get us through anything. Until now, sister, you've been working for me; now it’s my turn, and I’ll work for you.”
“Dear Robert!” replied the young girl.
“Dear Robert!” the young girl replied.
“I must tell you something,” resumed Robert. “You mustn’t be vexed, Mary!”
“I have to tell you something,” Robert continued. “Please don’t be upset, Mary!”
“Why should I be vexed, my child?”
“Why should I be upset, my child?”
“And you will let me do it?”
“And you’ll let me do it?”
“What do you mean?” said Mary, getting uneasy.
“What do you mean?” Mary asked, feeling uneasy.
“Sister, I am going to be a sailor!”
“Sister, I'm going to be a sailor!”
“You are going to leave me!” cried the young girl, pressing her brother’s hand.
“You're going to leave me!” cried the young girl, gripping her brother’s hand.
“Yes, sister; I want to be a sailor, like my father and Captain John. Mary, dear Mary, Captain John has not lost all hope, he says. You have confidence in his devotion to us, and so have I. He is going to make a grand sailor out of me some day, he has promised me he will; and then we are going to look for our father together. Tell me you are willing, sister mine. What our father would have done for us it is our duty, mine, at least, to do for him. My life has one purpose to which it should be entirely consecrated—that is to search, and never cease searching for my father, who would never have given us up. Ah, Mary, how good our father was!”
“Yes, sister; I want to be a sailor, just like my father and Captain John. Mary, dear Mary, Captain John hasn’t given up hope, he says. You believe in his loyalty to us, and so do I. He’s going to turn me into a great sailor one day; he promised me he would. Then we will set out to find our father together. Please tell me you’re on board, sister. What our father would have done for us, I feel it’s my duty, at least mine, to do for him. My life has one purpose that I should dedicate myself to completely—that is to search and never stop searching for my father, who would never have abandoned us. Ah, Mary, how wonderful our father was!”
“And so noble, so generous!” added Mary. “Do you know, Robert, he was already a glory to our country, and that he would have been numbered among our great men if fate had not arrested his course.”
“And so noble, so generous!” Mary added. “You know, Robert, he was already a glory to our country, and he would have been counted among our great men if fate hadn't interrupted his journey.”
“Yes, I know it,” said Robert.
“Yes, I know,” Robert replied.
Mary put her arm around the boy, and hugged him fondly as he felt her tears fall on his forehead.
Mary wrapped her arm around the boy and hugged him tightly while he felt her tears drip onto his forehead.
“Mary, Mary!” he cried, “it doesn’t matter what our friends say, I still hope, and will always hope. A man like my father doesn’t die till he has finished his work.”
“Mary, Mary!” he shouted, “it doesn’t matter what our friends say, I still hope, and will always hope. A man like my father doesn’t die until he has finished his work.”
Mary Grant could not reply. Sobs choked her voice. A thousand feelings struggled in her breast at the news that fresh attempts were about to be made to recover Harry Grant, and that the devotion of the captain was so unbounded.
Mary Grant couldn't respond. Her voice was choked with sobs. A thousand emotions battled inside her at the news that new efforts were about to be made to rescue Harry Grant, and that the captain's devotion was so limitless.
“And does Mr. John still hope?” she asked.
“And does Mr. John still have hope?” she asked.
“Yes,” replied Robert. “He is a brother that will never forsake us, never! I will be a sailor, you’ll say yes, won’t you, sister? And let me join him in looking for my father. I am sure you are willing.”
“Yeah,” Robert replied. “He’s a brother who will never abandon us, never! I want to be a sailor; you’ll agree, won’t you, sis? And let me join him in searching for my dad. I’m sure you’re on board.”
“Yes, I am willing,” said Mary. “But the separation!” she murmured.
“Yes, I’m willing,” said Mary. “But the separation!” she whispered.
“You will not be alone, Mary, I know that. My friend John told me so. Lady Helena will not let you leave her. You are a woman; you can and should accept her kindness. To refuse would be ungrateful, but a man, my father has said a hundred times, must make his own way.”
“You won't be alone, Mary, I promise you that. My friend John told me so. Lady Helena won’t let you go. You’re a woman; you can and should accept her kindness. Turning it down would be ungrateful, but a man, as my father has said countless times, has to forge his own path.”
“But what will become of our own dear home in Dundee, so full of memories?”
“But what will happen to our beloved home in Dundee, so full of memories?”
“We will keep it, little sister! All that is settled, and settled so well, by our friend John, and also by Lord Glenarvan. He is to keep you at Malcolm Castle as if you were his daughter. My Lord told my friend John so, and he told me. You will be at home there, and have someone to speak to about our father, while you are waiting till John and I bring him back to you some day. Ah! what a grand day that will be!” exclaimed Robert, his face glowing with enthusiasm.
“We're going to keep it, little sister! It's all settled, and it's been settled really well by our friend John and by Lord Glenarvan too. He’s going to look after you at Malcolm Castle as if you were his own daughter. My Lord mentioned this to John, and John told me. You’ll feel at home there and have someone to talk to about our dad while you wait for John and me to bring him back to you one day. Ah! What an amazing day that will be!” Robert exclaimed, his face beaming with excitement.
“My boy, my brother,” replied Mary, “how happy my father would be if he could hear you. How much you are like him, dear Robert, like our dear, dear father. When you grow up you’ll be just himself.”
“My boy, my brother,” replied Mary, “how happy Dad would be if he could hear you. You’re so much like him, dear Robert, just like our beloved father. When you grow up, you’ll be just like him.”
“I hope I may,” said Robert, blushing with filial and sacred pride.
“I hope so,” said Robert, blushing with a mix of pride for his family and something meaningful.
“But how shall we requite Lord and Lady Glenarvan?” said Mary Grant.
“But how are we going to repay Lord and Lady Glenarvan?” said Mary Grant.
“Oh, that will not be difficult,” replied Robert, with boyish confidence. “We will love and revere them, and we will tell them so; and we will give them plenty of kisses, and some day, when we can get the chance, we will die for them.”
“Oh, that won’t be hard,” replied Robert, with youthful confidence. “We’ll love and respect them, and we’ll let them know it; we’ll give them lots of kisses, and someday, when we get the chance, we’ll die for them.”
“We’ll live for them, on the contrary,” replied the young girl, covering her brother’s forehead with kisses. “They will like that better, and so shall I.”
“We’ll live for them, actually,” replied the young girl, kissing her brother’s forehead. “They’ll appreciate that more, and so will I.”
The two children then relapsed into silence, gazing out into the dark night, and giving way to long reveries, interrupted occasionally by a question or remark from one to the other. A long swell undulated the surface of the calm sea, and the screw turned up a luminous furrow in the darkness.
The two children fell silent again, staring out into the dark night, lost in their thoughts and occasionally breaking the silence with a question or a comment to each other. A long swell rippled across the surface of the calm sea, and the screw created a bright trail in the darkness.
A strange and altogether supernatural incident now occurred. The brother and sister, by some of those magnetic communications which link souls mysteriously together, were the subjects at the same time and the same instant of the same hallucination.
A weird and completely supernatural event happened now. The brother and sister, through one of those magnetic connections that mysteriously link souls, experienced the same hallucination at the exact same moment.
Out of the midst of these waves, with their alternations of light and shadow, a deep plaintive voice sent up a cry, the tones of which thrilled through every fiber of their being.
Out of the midst of these waves, with their shifts of light and shadow, a deep, mournful voice let out a cry, the sound of which resonated in every fiber of their being.
“Come! come!” were the words which fell on their ears.
“Come! come!” were the words that reached their ears.
They both started up and leaned over the railing, and peered into the gloom with questioning eyes.
They both stood up and leaned over the railing, looking into the darkness with curious eyes.
“Mary, you heard that? You heard that?” cried Robert.
“Mary, did you hear that? Did you hear that?” cried Robert.
But they saw nothing but the long shadow that stretched before them.
But they saw nothing except the long shadow that stretched out in front of them.
“Robert,” said Mary, pale with emotion, “I thought—yes, I thought as you did, that—We must both be ill with fever, Robert.”
“Robert,” Mary said, looking pale with emotion, “I thought—yes, I thought the same as you did, that—We must both be sick with a fever, Robert.”
A second time the cry reached them, and this time the illusion was so great, that they both exclaimed simultaneously, “My father! My father!”
A second cry reached them, and this time the illusion was so strong that they both shouted at the same time, “My dad! My dad!”
It was too much for Mary. Overcome with emotion, she fell fainting into Robert’s arms.
It was too overwhelming for Mary. Overcome with emotion, she fainted into Robert’s arms.
“Help!” shouted Robert. “My sister! my father! Help! Help!”
“Help!” shouted Robert. “My sister! My father! Help! Help!”
The man at the wheel darted forward to lift up the girl. The sailors on watch ran to assist, and John Mangles, Lady Helena, and Glenarvan were hastily roused from sleep.
The man at the wheel quickly rushed forward to pick up the girl. The sailors on duty ran to help, and John Mangles, Lady Helena, and Glenarvan were hurriedly awakened from their sleep.
“My sister is dying, and my father is there!” exclaimed Robert, pointing to the waves.
“My sister is dying, and my dad is there!” exclaimed Robert, pointing to the waves.
They were wholly at a loss to understand him.
They were completely confused by him.
“Yes!” he repeated, “my father is there! I heard my father’s voice; Mary heard it too!”
“Yes!” he repeated, “my dad is there! I heard my dad’s voice; Mary heard it too!”
Just at this moment, Mary Grant recovering consciousness, but wandering and excited, called out, “My father! my father is there!”
Just then, Mary Grant regained consciousness, but she was confused and agitated, calling out, “My dad! My dad is there!”
And the poor girl started up, and leaning over the side of the yacht, wanted to throw herself into the sea.
And the poor girl jumped up and leaned over the side of the yacht, wanting to throw herself into the sea.
“My Lord—Lady Helena!” she exclaimed, clasping her hands, “I tell you my father is there! I can declare that I heard his voice come out of the waves like a wail, as if it were a last adieu.”
“My Lord—Lady Helena!” she exclaimed, clasping her hands, “I tell you my father is out there! I swear I heard his voice rise from the waves like a cry, as if it were a final goodbye.”
The young girl went off again into convulsions and spasms, which became so violent that she had to be carried to her cabin, where Lady Helena lavished every care on her. Robert kept on repeating, “My father! my father is there! I am sure of it, my Lord!”
The young girl started having convulsions and spasms again, so violently that she had to be carried to her cabin, where Lady Helena took care of her with great attention. Robert kept saying, “My father! My father is there! I’m sure of it, my Lord!”
The spectators of this painful scene saw that the captain’s children were laboring under an hallucination. But how were they to be undeceived?
The onlookers of this painful scene realized that the captain’s children were experiencing a delusion. But how could they be brought back to reality?
Glenarvan made an attempt, however. He took Robert’s hand, and said, “You say you heard your father’s voice, my dear boy?”
Glenarvan made an effort, though. He took Robert’s hand and said, “You say you heard your dad’s voice, my dear boy?”
“Yes, my Lord; there, in the middle of the waves. He cried out, ‘Come! come!’”
“Yes, my Lord; there, in the middle of the waves. He shouted, ‘Come! Come!’”
“And did you recognize his voice?”
“And did you recognize his voice?”
“Yes, I recognized it immediately. Yes, yes; I can swear to it! My sister heard it, and recognized it as well. How could we both be deceived? My Lord, do let us go to my father’s help. A boat! a boat!”
“Yes, I recognized it right away. Yes, yes; I can swear to it! My sister heard it and recognized it too. How could we both be mistaken? My Lord, please let us go help my father. A boat! A boat!”
Glenarvan saw it was impossible to undeceive the poor boy, but he tried once more by saying to the man at the wheel:
Glenarvan realized it was impossible to get through to the poor boy, but he made one more attempt by saying to the man at the wheel:
“Hawkins, you were at the wheel, were you not, when Miss Mary was so strangely attacked?”
“Hawkins, you were driving, right, when Miss Mary was attacked in such a strange way?”
“Yes, your Honor,” replied Hawkins.
“Yes, Your Honor,” replied Hawkins.
“And you heard nothing, and saw nothing?”
“And you didn’t hear anything or see anything?”
“Nothing.”
“Nothing.”
“Now Robert, see?”
"Look, Robert."
“If it had been Hawkins’s father,” returned the boy, with indomitable energy, “Hawkins would not say he had heard nothing. It was my father, my lord! my father.”
“If it had been Hawkins’s dad,” replied the boy, with unwavering determination, “Hawkins wouldn’t say he heard nothing. It was my dad, my lord! My dad.”
Sobs choked his voice; he became pale and silent, and presently fell down insensible, like his sister.
Sobs caught in his throat; he turned pale and silent, and soon collapsed, unconscious, just like his sister.
Glenarvan had him carried to his bed, where he lay in a deep swoon.
Glenarvan had him taken to his bed, where he lay in a deep unconscious state.
“Poor orphans,” said John Mangles. “It is a terrible trial they have to bear!”
“Poor orphans,” said John Mangles. “It’s such a tough burden for them to carry!”
“Yes,” said Glenarvan; “excessive grief has produced the same hallucination in both of them, and at the same time.”
“Yes,” said Glenarvan; “extreme sadness has caused the same delusion in both of them, and at the same time.”
“In both of them!” muttered Paganel; “that’s strange, and pure science would say inadmissible.”
“In both of them!” muttered Paganel; “that’s odd, and pure science would deem it unacceptable.”
He leaned over the side of the vessel, and listened attentively, making a sign to the rest to keep still.
He leaned over the side of the boat and listened carefully, signaling the others to be quiet.
But profound silence reigned around. Paganel shouted his loudest. No response came.
But a deep silence surrounded them. Paganel yelled as loud as he could. No reply came.
“It is strange,” repeated the geographer, going back to his cabin. “Close sympathy in thought and grief does not suffice to explain this phenomenon.”
“It’s strange,” the geographer said again as he went back to his cabin. “A close connection in thought and pain doesn’t really explain this situation.”
Next day, March 4, at 5 A. M., at dawn, the passengers, including Mary and Robert, who would not stay behind, were all assembled on the poop, each one eager to examine the land they had only caught a glimpse of the night before.
Next day, March 4, at 5 A.M., at dawn, the passengers, including Mary and Robert, who refused to stay back, were all gathered on the deck, each eager to check out the land they had only seen a little of the night before.
The yacht was coasting along the island at the distance of about a mile, and its smallest details could be seen by the eye.
The yacht was cruising along the island about a mile away, and even its smallest details could be seen clearly.
Suddenly Robert gave a loud cry, and exclaimed he could see two men running about and gesticulating, and a third was waving a flag.
Suddenly, Robert let out a loud shout and said he could see two men running around and gesturing, while a third was waving a flag.
“The Union Jack,” said John Mangles, who had caught up a spy-glass.
“The Union Jack,” said John Mangles, who had grabbed a telescope.
“True enough,” said Paganel, turning sharply round toward Robert.
“That's true,” said Paganel, turning quickly to face Robert.
“My Lord,” said Robert, trembling with emotion, “if you don’t want me to swim to the shore, let a boat be lowered. Oh, my Lord, I implore you to let me be the first to land.”
“My Lord,” said Robert, shaking with emotion, “if you don’t want me to swim to shore, let a boat be lowered. Oh, my Lord, I beg you to let me be the first to land.”
No one dared to speak. What! on this little isle, crossed by the 37th parallel, there were three men, shipwrecked Englishmen! Instantaneously everyone thought of the voice heard by Robert and Mary the preceding night. The children were right, perhaps, in the affirmation. The sound of a voice might have reached them, but this voice—was it their father’s? No, alas, most assuredly no. And as they thought of the dreadful disappointment that awaited them, they trembled lest this new trial should crush them completely. But who could stop them from going on shore? Lord Glenarvan had not the heart to do it.
No one dared to speak. What! On this small island, located at the 37th parallel, there were three men, shipwrecked Englishmen! Immediately, everyone thought of the voice that Robert and Mary had heard the night before. The children might have been right about it. Some sound could have reached them, but was it their father’s voice? No, unfortunately not. And as they contemplated the terrible disappointment that awaited them, they shivered at the thought that this new trial could utterly break them. But who could prevent them from going ashore? Lord Glenarvan didn't have the heart to stop them.
“Lower a boat,” he called out.
“Lower a boat,” he yelled.
Another minute and the boat was ready. The two children of Captain Grant, Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Paganel, rushed into it, and six sailors, who rowed so vigorously that they were presently almost close to the shore.
Another minute and the boat was ready. Captain Grant's two kids, Glenarvan, John Mangles, and Paganel, jumped in, and six sailors rowed so hard that they were soon almost close to the shore.
At ten fathoms’ distance a piercing cry broke from Mary’s lips.
At ten fathoms away, a sharp cry escaped Mary’s lips.
“My father!” she exclaimed.
"My dad!" she exclaimed.
A man was standing on the beach, between two others. His tall, powerful form, and his physiognomy, with its mingled expression of boldness and gentleness, bore a resemblance both to Mary and Robert. This was indeed the man the children had so often described. Their hearts had not deceived them. This was their father, Captain Grant!
A man was standing on the beach, between two others. His tall, strong build and his face, showing a mix of confidence and kindness, looked like both Mary and Robert. This was definitely the man the kids had talked about so many times. Their instincts hadn't let them down. This was their father, Captain Grant!
The captain had heard Mary’s cry, for he held out his arms, and fell flat on the sand, as if struck by a thunderbolt.
The captain heard Mary’s shout, so he reached out his arms and collapsed onto the sand, as if hit by a lightning bolt.
CHAPTER XX CAPTAIN GRANT’S STORY
JOY does not kill, for both father and children recovered before they had reached the yacht. The scene which followed, who can describe? Language fails. The whole crew wept aloud at the sight of these three clasped together in a close, silent embrace.
JOY does not kill, because both the father and the children recovered before they got to the yacht. What happened next is beyond description. Words just can’t capture it. The entire crew cried out at the sight of the three of them wrapped in a tight, silent hug.
The moment Harry Grant came on deck, he knelt down reverently. The pious Scotchman’s first act on touching the yacht, which to him was the soil of his native land, was to return thanks to the God of his deliverance. Then, turning to Lady Helena and Lord Glenarvan, and his companions, he thanked them in broken words, for his heart was too full to speak. During the short passage from the isle to the yacht, his children had given him a brief sketch of the DUNCAN’S history.
The moment Harry Grant stepped onto the deck, he knelt down with respect. The devout Scotsman’s first action upon reaching the yacht, which felt like the soil of his homeland, was to give thanks to the God who had saved him. Then, turning to Lady Helena, Lord Glenarvan, and his companions, he expressed his gratitude in shaky words, as his emotions were too strong for him to speak. During the quick trip from the island to the yacht, his children had shared a brief overview of the DUNCAN’S history.
What an immense debt he owed to this noble lady and her friends! From Lord Glenarvan, down to the lowest sailor on board, how all had struggled and suffered for him! Harry Grant expressed his gratitude with such simplicity and nobleness, his manly face suffused with pure and sweet emotion, that the whole crew felt amply recompensed for the trials they had undergone. Even the impassable Major himself felt a tear steal down his cheek in spite of all his self-command; while the good, simple Paganel cried like a child who does not care who sees his tears.
What an enormous debt he owed to this noble woman and her friends! From Lord Glenarvan to the lowest sailor on board, everyone had struggled and suffered for him! Harry Grant expressed his gratitude with such simplicity and grace, his strong face filled with pure and heartfelt emotion, that the entire crew felt truly rewarded for the challenges they had faced. Even the stoic Major couldn’t help but let a tear roll down his cheek despite all his self-control, while the kind, sincere Paganel cried like a child who didn’t care who witnessed his tears.
Harry Grant could not take his eyes off his daughter. He thought her beautiful, charming; and he not only said so to himself, but repeated it aloud, and appealed to Lady Helena for confirmation of his opinion, as if to convince himself that he was not blinded by his paternal affection. His boy, too, came in for admiration. “How he has grown! he is a man!” was his delighted exclamation. And he covered the two children so dear to him with the kisses he had been heaping up for them during his two years of absence.
Harry Grant couldn’t take his eyes off his daughter. He thought she was beautiful and charming; he not only told himself this but also said it out loud, asking Lady Helena to confirm his opinion, as if to reassure himself that he wasn't just being blinded by his fatherly love. His son also received admiration. “Wow, he’s grown! He’s a man now!” was his excited exclamation. He showered the two children he loved so much with the kisses he had been saving for them during his two years away.
Robert then presented all his friends successively, and found means always to vary the formula of introduction, though he had to say the same thing about each. The fact was, each and all had been perfect in the children’s eyes.
Robert then introduced all his friends one by one and managed to change up his introduction each time, even though he had to say the same thing about each of them. The truth was, each and every one had been perfect in the kids' eyes.
John Mangles blushed like a child when his turn came, and his voice trembled as he spoke to Mary’s father.
John Mangles blushed like a kid when his turn came, and his voice shook as he talked to Mary’s dad.
Lady Helena gave Captain Grant a narrative of the voyage, and made him proud of his son and daughter. She told him of the young hero’s exploits, and how the lad had already paid back part of the paternal debt to Lord Glenarvan. John Mangles sang Mary’s praises in such terms, that Harry Grant, acting on a hint from Lady Helena, put his daughter’s hand into that of the brave young captain, and turning to Lord and Lady Glenarvan, said: “My Lord, and you, Madam, also give your blessing to our children.”
Lady Helena shared the story of the voyage with Captain Grant, making him proud of his son and daughter. She recounted the young hero’s adventures and how the lad had already repaid part of the family debt to Lord Glenarvan. John Mangles praised Mary so highly that Harry Grant, acting on a suggestion from Lady Helena, placed his daughter’s hand in that of the brave young captain and turned to Lord and Lady Glenarvan, saying: “My Lord, and you, Madam, please also bless our children.”
When everything had been said and re-said over and over again, Glenarvan informed Harry Grant about Ayrton. Grant confirmed the quartermaster’s confession as far as his disembarkation on the coast of Australia was concerned.
When everything had been said and repeated countless times, Glenarvan informed Harry Grant about Ayrton. Grant confirmed the quartermaster’s confession regarding his exit on the coast of Australia.
“He is an intelligent, intrepid man,” he added, “whose passions have led him astray. May reflection and repentance bring him to a better mind!”
“He's a smart, fearless guy,” he added, “whose passions have led him off course. I hope that reflection and regret help him find a better path!”
But before Ayrton was transferred, Harry Grant wished to do the honors of his rock to his friends. He invited them to visit his wooden house, and dine with him in Robinson Crusoe fashion.
But before Ayrton was moved, Harry Grant wanted to show off his rock to his friends. He invited them to come to his wooden house and have dinner with him like Robinson Crusoe.
Glenarvan and his friends accepted the invitation most willingly. Robert and Mary were eagerly longing to see the solitary house where their father had so often wept at the thought of them. A boat was manned, and the Captain and his two children, Lord and Lady Glenarvan, the Major, John Mangles, and Paganel, landed on the shores of the island.
Glenarvan and his friends eagerly accepted the invitation. Robert and Mary were excited to see the lonely house where their father had often cried thinking about them. A boat was ready, and the Captain along with his two children, Lord and Lady Glenarvan, the Major, John Mangles, and Paganel, landed on the island's shores.
A few hours sufficed to explore the whole domain of Harry Grant. It was in fact the summit of a submarine mountain, a plateau composed of basaltic rocks and volcanic DEBRIS. During the geological epochs of the earth, this mountain had gradually emerged from the depths of the Pacific, through the action of the subterranean fires, but for ages back the volcano had been a peaceful mountain, and the filled-up crater, an island rising out of the liquid plain. Then soil formed. The vegetable kingdom took possession of this new land. Several whalers landed domestic animals there in passing; goats and pigs, which multiplied and ran wild, and the three kingdoms of nature were now displayed on this island, sunk in mid ocean.
A few hours were enough to explore the entire territory of Harry Grant. It was actually the peak of an underwater mountain, a plateau made up of basalt rocks and volcanic debris. Over geological time, this mountain slowly rose from the depths of the Pacific due to underground volcanic activity, but for ages, the volcano had been dormant, and its filled crater had become an island rising from the ocean's surface. Then, soil developed. The plant kingdom took over this new land. Several whalers brought domestic animals there during their travels; goats and pigs, which thrived and ran wild, showcasing the three kingdoms of nature now present on this island, lost in the middle of the ocean.
When the survivors of the shipwrecked BRITANNIA took refuge there, the hand of man began to organize the efforts of nature. In two years and a half, Harry Grant and his two sailors had metamorphosed the island. Several acres of well-cultivated land were stocked with vegetables of excellent quality.
When the survivors of the shipwrecked BRITANNIA took refuge there, people began to harness the power of nature. In two and a half years, Harry Grant and his two sailors transformed the island. Several acres of well-tended land were filled with high-quality vegetables.
The house was shaded by luxuriant gum-trees. The magnificent ocean stretched before the windows, sparkling in the sunlight. Harry Grant had the table placed beneath the grand trees, and all the guests seated themselves. A hind quarter of a goat, nardou bread, several bowls of milk, two or three roots of wild endive, and pure fresh water, composed the simple repast, worthy of the shepherds of Arcadia.
The house was shaded by lush gum trees. The stunning ocean stretched out before the windows, sparkling in the sunlight. Harry Grant had the table set up under the grand trees, and all the guests took their seats. A hind quarter of goat, nardou bread, several bowls of milk, a few roots of wild endive, and pure fresh water made up the simple meal, fitting for the shepherds of Arcadia.
Paganel was enchanted. His old fancies about Robinson Crusoe revived in full force. “He is not at all to be pitied, that scoundrel, Ayrton!” he exclaimed, enthusiastically. “This little isle is just a paradise!”
Paganel was thrilled. His old fantasies about Robinson Crusoe came rushing back. "That rascal, Ayrton, is definitely not someone to feel sorry for!" he exclaimed, excitedly. "This little island is just paradise!"
“Yes,” replied Harry Grant, “a paradise to these poor, shipwrecked fellows that Heaven had pity on, but I am sorry that Maria Theresa was not an extensive and fertile island, with a river instead of a stream, and a port instead of a tiny bay exposed to the open sea.”
“Yes,” replied Harry Grant, “a paradise for these poor, shipwrecked guys that Heaven took pity on, but I wish Maria Theresa had been a larger and more fertile island, with a river instead of a stream, and a harbor instead of a small bay open to the open sea.”
“And why, captain?” asked Glenarvan.
“And why, captain?” asked Glenarvan.
“Because I should have made it the foundation of the colony with which I mean to dower Scotland.”
“Because I should have made it the foundation of the colony with which I intend to support Scotland.”
“Ah, Captain Grant, you have not given up the project, then, which made you so popular in our old country?”
“Ah, Captain Grant, you haven't dropped the project that made you so popular back in our old country?”
“No, my Lord, and God has only saved me through your efforts that I might accomplish my task. My poor brothers in old Caledonia, all who are needy must have a refuge provided for them in another land against their misery, and my dear country must have a colony of her own, for herself alone, somewhere in these seas, where she may find that independence and comfort she so lacks in Europe.”
“No, my Lord, and God has only saved me through your efforts so that I can complete my task. My poor brothers in old Caledonia, all those who are in need, must have a refuge provided for them in another land to escape their misery, and my beloved country must have a colony of its own, just for itself, somewhere in these seas, where it can find the independence and comfort it lacks in Europe.”
“Ah, that is very true, Captain Grant,” said Lady Helena. “This is a grand project of yours, and worthy of a noble heart. But this little isle—”
“Ah, that's very true, Captain Grant,” said Lady Helena. “This is a great project of yours, and it's worthy of a noble heart. But this little island—”
“No, madam, it is a rock only fit at most to support a few settlers; while what we need is a vast country, whose virgin soil abounds in untouched stores of wealth,” replied the captain.
“No, ma'am, it’s just a rock that can barely support a few settlers; what we really need is a large land with rich, untouched soil full of resources,” replied the captain.
“Well, captain,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “the future is ours, and this country we will seek for together.”
“Well, captain,” exclaimed Glenarvan, “the future is ours, and we will explore this country together.”
And the two brave Scotchmen joined hands in a hearty grip and so sealed the compact.
And the two courageous Scotsmen shook hands firmly and so sealed the agreement.
A general wish was expressed to hear, while they were on the island, the account of the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA, and of the two years spent by the survivors in this very place. Harry Grant was delighted to gratify their curiosity, and commenced his narration forthwith.
A general desire was shared to hear, while they were on the island, the story of the shipwreck of the BRITANNIA and the two years the survivors spent in this very spot. Harry Grant was pleased to satisfy their curiosity and started his tale right away.
“My story,” he said, “is that of all the Robinson Crusoes cast upon an island, with only God and themselves to rely on, and feeling it a duty to struggle for life with the elements.
“My story,” he said, “is like that of all the Robinson Crusoes stranded on an island, with only God and themselves to depend on, and feeling it's their duty to fight for survival against the elements.
“It was during the night of the 26th or 27th of June, 1862, that the BRITANNIA, disabled by a six days’ storm, struck against the rocks of Maria Theresa. The sea was mountains high, and lifeboats were useless. My unfortunate crew all perished, except Bob Learce and Joe Bell, who with myself managed to reach shore after twenty unsuccessful attempts.
“It was during the night of June 26th or 27th, 1862, that the BRITANNIA, damaged by a six-day storm, ran aground on the rocks of Maria Theresa. The waves were enormous, and lifeboats were of no use. My unfortunate crew all perished, except for Bob Learce and Joe Bell, who, along with me, managed to reach the shore after twenty failed attempts."
“The land which received us was only an uninhabited island, two miles broad and five long, with about thirty trees in the interior, a few meadows, and a brook of fresh water, which fortunately never dried up. Alone with my sailors, in this corner of the globe, I did not despair. I put my trust in God, and accustomed myself to struggle resolutely for existence. Bob and Joe, my brave companions in misfortune, my friends, seconded me energetically.
“The land that welcomed us was just a deserted island, two miles wide and five miles long, with about thirty trees in the interior, a few meadows, and a freshwater stream that thankfully never ran dry. Alone with my crew in this part of the world, I didn’t lose hope. I relied on God and got used to fighting hard for survival. Bob and Joe, my brave companions in this hardship, my friends, supported me wholeheartedly.”
“We began like the fictitious Robinson Crusoe of Defoe, our model, by collecting the planks of the ship, the tools, a little powder, and firearms, and a bag of precious seeds. The first few days were painful enough, but hunting and fishing soon afforded us a sure supply of food, for wild goats were in abundance in the interior of the island, and marine animals abounded on the coast. By degrees we fell into regular ways and habits of life.
“We started out like the fictional Robinson Crusoe from Defoe, our inspiration, by gathering the ship's planks, tools, some gunpowder, firearms, and a bag of valuable seeds. The first few days were quite tough, but hunting and fishing quickly gave us a reliable food source, as wild goats were plentiful in the island's interior, and marine animals were abundant along the coast. Gradually, we settled into a routine and established our daily habits.”
“I had saved my instruments from the wreck, and knew exactly the position of the island. I found we were out of the route of vessels, and could not be rescued unless by some providential chance. I accepted our trying lot composedly, always thinking, however, of my dear ones, remembering them every day in my prayers, though never hoping to see them again.
“I had saved my tools from the wreck and knew exactly where the island was. I realized we were off the main shipping route and wouldn’t be rescued unless by some miraculous chance. I accepted our tough situation calmly, always thinking of my loved ones, remembering them every day in my prayers, even though I never expected to see them again.”
“However, we toiled on resolutely, and before long several acres of land were sown with the seed off the BRITANNIA; potatoes, endive, sorrel, and other vegetables besides, gave wholesome variety to our daily fare. We caught some young kids, which soon grew quite tame. We had milk and butter. The nardou, which grew abundantly in dried up creeks, supplied us with tolerably substantial bread, and we had no longer any fears for our material life.
“However, we worked hard and before long, several acres of land were planted with seeds from the BRITANNIA. Potatoes, endive, sorrel, and other vegetables added a healthy variety to our daily meals. We caught some young goats that soon became quite tame. We had milk and butter. The nardou, which grew plentifully in dried-up creeks, provided us with fairly decent bread, and we no longer worried about our basic needs.”
“We had built a log hut with the DEBRIS of the BRITANNIA, and this was covered over with sail cloth, carefully tarred over, and beneath this secure shelter the rainy season passed comfortably. Many a plan was discussed here, and many a dream indulged in, the brightest of which is this day realized.
“We had built a log cabin using scraps from the BRITANNIA, and it was covered with sailcloth, carefully tarred for protection. Under this secure shelter, we got through the rainy season comfortably. We discussed many plans here and indulged in many dreams, the brightest of which is being realized today."
“I had at first the idea of trying to brave the perils of the ocean in a canoe made out of the spars of the ship, but 1,500 miles lay between us and the nearest coast, that is to say the islands of the Archipelago of Pomotou. No boat could have stood so long a voyage. I therefore relinquished my scheme, and looked for no deliverance except from a divine hand.
"I initially thought about trying to brave the dangers of the ocean in a canoe made from the ship's spars, but 1,500 miles separated us from the closest coast, which is the islands of the Pomotou Archipelago. No boat could survive such a long journey. So, I gave up on my plan and sought help only from a divine power."
“Ah, my poor children! how often we have stood on the top of the rocks and watched the few vessels passing in the distance far out at sea. During the whole period of our exile only two or three vessels appeared on the horizon, and those only to disappear again immediately. Two years and a half were spent in this manner. We gave up hoping, but yet did not despair. At last, early yesterday morning, when I was standing on the highest peak of the island, I noticed a light smoke rising in the west. It increased, and soon a ship appeared in sight. It seemed to be coming toward us. But would it not rather steer clear of an island where there was no harbor.
“Ah, my poor kids! How many times have we stood on top of the rocks and watched the few ships passing far out at sea. Throughout our whole time in exile, only two or three boats showed up on the horizon, and they vanished again almost immediately. We spent two and a half years like this. We stopped hoping, but we didn’t lose all hope. Finally, early yesterday morning, while I was standing on the highest point of the island, I noticed a thin plume of smoke rising in the west. It grew stronger, and soon a ship came into view. It looked like it was heading our way. But wouldn’t it rather avoid an island with no harbor?
“Ah, what a day of agony that was! My heart was almost bursting. My comrades kindled a fire on one of the peaks. Night came on, but no signal came from the yacht. Deliverance was there, however. Were we to see it vanish from our eyes?
“Ah, what a day of suffering that was! My heart felt like it was going to burst. My friends started a fire on one of the peaks. Night fell, but we still hadn’t seen any signal from the yacht. Yet, hope was still there. Were we really going to watch it disappear from our sight?
“I hesitated no longer. The darkness was growing deeper. The ship might double the island during the night. I jumped into the sea, and attempted to make my way toward it. Hope trebled my strength, I cleft the waves with superhuman vigor, and had got so near the yacht that I was scarcely thirty fathoms off, when it tacked about.
“I didn't hesitate any longer. The darkness was getting thicker. The ship might circle the island during the night. I jumped into the sea and tried to swim toward it. Hope gave me extra strength; I cut through the waves with incredible energy, and I got so close to the yacht that I was barely thirty fathoms away when it changed direction.”
“This provoked me to the despairing cry, which only my two children heard. It was no illusion.
“This made me cry out in despair, a sound that only my two children heard. It was no illusion.
“Then I came back to the shore, exhausted and overcome with emotion and fatigue. My two sailors received me half dead. It was a horrible night this last we spent on the island, and we believed ourselves abandoned forever, when day dawned, and there was the yacht sailing nearly alongside, under easy steam. Your boat was lowered—we were saved—and, oh, wonder of Divine goodness, my children, my beloved children, were there holding out their arms to me!”
“Then I returned to the shore, worn out and overwhelmed with emotion and fatigue. My two sailors found me nearly dead. That last night we spent on the island was terrible, and we thought we were abandoned forever, when daybreak came, and there was the yacht sailing almost right next to us, moving smoothly. Your boat was lowered—we were saved—and, oh, what a miracle of Divine goodness, my children, my beloved children, were there reaching out their arms to me!”
Robert and Mary almost smothered their father with kisses and caresses as he ended his narrative.
Robert and Mary nearly overwhelmed their dad with kisses and affection as he finished his story.
It was now for the first time that the captain heard that he owed his deliverance to the somewhat hieroglyphical document which he had placed in a bottle and confined to the mercy of the ocean.
It was the first time the captain learned that he owed his rescue to the somewhat cryptic note he had put in a bottle and left to the whims of the sea.
But what were Jacques Paganel’s thoughts during Captain Grant’s recital? The worthy geographer was turning over in his brain for the thousandth time the words of the document. He pondered his three successive interpretations, all of which had proved false. How had this island, called Maria Theresa, been indicated in the papers originally?
But what was Jacques Paganel thinking during Captain Grant’s story? The dedicated geographer was going over the words of the document in his mind for the thousandth time. He was reflecting on his three different interpretations, all of which had turned out to be wrong. How was this island, called Maria Theresa, originally described in the papers?
At last Paganel could contain himself no longer, and seizing Harry Grant’s hand, he exclaimed:
At last, Paganel couldn't hold himself back any longer, and grabbing Harry Grant's hand, he exclaimed:
“Captain! will you tell me at last what really was in your indecipherable document?”
“Captain! Will you finally tell me what was actually in your confusing document?”
A general curiosity was excited by this question of the geographer, for the enigma which had been for nine months a mystery was about to be explained.
A general curiosity was sparked by this question from the geographer, as the riddle that had been a mystery for nine months was about to be revealed.
“Well, captain,” repeated Paganel, “do you remember the precise words of the document?”
“Well, captain,” Paganel repeated, “do you remember the exact words of the document?”
“Exactly,” replied Harry Grant; “and not a day has passed without my recalling to memory words with which our last hopes were linked.”
"Exactly," replied Harry Grant, "and not a day has gone by without me remembering the words that were tied to our last hopes."
“And what are they, captain?” asked Glenarvan. “Speak, for our amour propre is wounded to the quick!”
“And what are they, captain?” Glenarvan asked. “Speak, because our pride is seriously hurt!”
“I am ready to satisfy you,” replied Harry Grant; “but, you know, to multiply the chances of safety, I had inclosed three documents in the bottle, in three different languages. Which is it you wish to hear?”
“I’m ready to satisfy you,” replied Harry Grant; “but, you know, to increase the chances of safety, I included three documents in the bottle, in three different languages. Which one do you want to hear?”
“They are not identical, then?” cried Paganel.
“They're not identical, then?” Paganel exclaimed.
“Yes, they are, almost to a word.”
“Yes, they are, nearly word for word.”
“Well, then, let us have the French document,” replied Glenarvan. “That is the one that is most respected by the waves, and the one on which our interpretations have been mostly founded.”
“Well, then, let’s get the French document,” replied Glenarvan. “That’s the one that the waves respect the most, and it’s the one our interpretations have mainly been based on.”
“My Lord, I will give it you word for word,” replied Harry Grant.
“My Lord, I’ll give it to you exactly as it is,” replied Harry Grant.
“LE 27 JUIN, 1862, le trois-mats Britannia, de Glasgow, s’est perdu a quinze cents lieues de la Patagonie, dans l’hemisphere austral. Partes a terre, deux matelots et le Capitaine Grant ont atteint l’ile Tabor—”
“ON JUNE 27, 1862, the three-masted Britannia from Glasgow was lost fifteen hundred leagues off the coast of Patagonia, in the southern hemisphere. Two sailors and Captain Grant made it to Tabor Island—”
“Oh!” exclaimed Paganel.
“Oh!” Paganel exclaimed.
“LA,” continued Harry Grant, “continuellement en proie a une cruelle indigence, ils ont jete ce document par 153 degrees de longitude et 37 degrees 11’ de latitude. Venes a leur secours, ou ils sont perdus.”
“LA,” continued Harry Grant, “constantly suffering from severe poverty, they have thrown this document at 153 degrees longitude and 37 degrees 11’ latitude. Come to their aid, or they're lost.”
At the name of Tabor, Paganel had started up hastily, and now being unable to restrain himself longer, he called out:
At the mention of Tabor, Paganel jumped up quickly, and now unable to hold himself back any longer, he shouted:
“How can it be Isle Tabor? Why, this is Maria Theresa!”
“How can it be Isle Tabor? This is Maria Theresa!”
“Undoubtedly, Monsieur Paganel,” replied Harry Grant. “It is Maria Theresa on the English and German charts, but is named Tabor on the French ones!”
“Definitely, Monsieur Paganel,” replied Harry Grant. “It's Maria Theresa on the English and German maps, but it's called Tabor on the French ones!”
At this moment a vigorous thump on Paganel’s shoulder almost bent him double. Truth obliges us to say it was the Major that dealt the blow, though strangely contrary to his usual strict politeness.
At that moment, a strong thump on Paganel’s shoulder nearly doubled him over. We have to admit it was the Major who delivered the blow, which was oddly out of character for his usually strict politeness.
“Geographer!” said McNabbs, in a tone of the most supreme contempt.
“Geographer!” McNabbs said, with a tone of utter contempt.
But Paganel had not even felt the Major’s hand. What was that compared to the geographical blow which had stunned him?
But Paganel hadn’t even noticed the Major’s hand. What did that matter compared to the geographical shock that had left him reeling?
He had been gradually getting nearer the truth, however, as he learned from Captain Grant. He had almost entirely deciphered the indecipherable document. The names Patagonia, Australia, New Zealand, had appeared to him in turn with absolute certainty. CONTIN, at first CONTINENT, had gradually reached its true meaning, continuelle. Indi had successively signified indiens, indigenes, and at last the right word was found—INDIGENCE. But one mutilated word, ABOR, had baffled the geographer’s sagacity. Paganel had persisted in making it the root of the verb ABORDER, and it turned out to be a proper name, the French name of the Isle Tabor, the isle which had been a refuge for the shipwrecked sailors of the BRITANNIA. It was difficult to avoid falling into the error, however, for on the English planispheres on the DUNCAN, the little isle was marked Maria Theresa.
He had been gradually getting closer to the truth as he learned from Captain Grant. He had almost entirely figured out the indecipherable document. The names Patagonia, Australia, and New Zealand had appeared to him one after another with complete certainty. CONTIN, initially CONTINENT, had finally revealed its actual meaning, continuelle. Indi had represented indiens, indigenes, and ultimately the correct word was found—INDIGENCE. But one damaged word, ABOR, had confused the geographer's insight. Paganel had insisted on making it the root of the verb ABORDER, but it turned out to be a proper name, the French name for Isle Tabor, which had been a refuge for the shipwrecked sailors of the BRITANNIA. It was hard to avoid the mistake, though, because on the English maps on the DUNCAN, the small island was labeled Maria Theresa.
“No matter?” cried Paganel, tearing his hair; “I ought not to have forgotten its double appellation. It is an unpardonable mistake, one unworthy of a secretary of the Geographical Society. I am disgraced!”
“No way?” cried Paganel, pulling at his hair. “I shouldn’t have forgotten its double name. It’s an unforgivable mistake, one that's not fitting for a secretary of the Geographical Society. I’m humiliated!”
“Come, come, Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena; “moderate your grief.”
“Come on, Monsieur Paganel,” said Lady Helena; “calm down your sadness.”
“No, madam, no; I am a mere ass!”
“No, ma'am, no; I'm just a fool!”
“And not even a learned one!” added the Major, by way of consolation.
“And not even a smart one!” added the Major, trying to be reassuring.
When the meal was over, Harry Grant put everything in order in his house. He took nothing away, wishing the guilty to inherit the riches of the innocent. Then they returned to the vessel, and, as Glenarvan had determined to start the same day, he gave immediate orders for the disembarkation of the quartermaster. Ayrton was brought up on the poop, and found himself face to face with Harry Grant.
When the meal was finished, Harry Grant tidied up his house. He left everything as it was, wanting the guilty to take over the wealth of the innocent. Then they went back to the ship, and since Glenarvan had decided to leave that same day, he quickly ordered the quartermaster to be brought ashore. Ayrton was brought up to the deck and came face to face with Harry Grant.
“It is I, Ayrton!” said Grant
“It's me, Ayrton!” said Grant.
“Yes, it is you, captain,” replied Ayrton, without the least sign of surprise at Harry Grant’s recovery. “Well, I am not sorry to see you again in good health.”
“Yes, it’s you, captain,” replied Ayrton, showing no surprise at Harry Grant’s recovery. “Well, I’m glad to see you back in good health.”
“It seems, Ayrton, that I made a mistake in landing you on an inhabited coast.”
“It looks like, Ayrton, that I made a mistake by landing you on a coast with people.”
“It seems so, captain.”
"Looks that way, captain."
“You are going to take my place on this uninhabited island. May Heaven give you repentance!”
“You're going to take my spot on this deserted island. I hope you find some regret!”
“Amen,” said Ayrton, calmly.
“Amen,” Ayrton said calmly.
Glenarvan then addressed the quartermaster.
Glenarvan then spoke to the quartermaster.
“It is still your wish, then, Ayrton, to be left behind?”
“It’s still your wish, then, Ayrton, to be left behind?”
“Yes, my Lord!”
"Yes, my Lord!"
“And Isle Tabor meets your wishes?”
“And Isle Tabor fulfills your wishes?”
“Perfectly.”
"Absolutely."
“Now then, listen to my last words, Ayrton. You will be cut off here from all the world, and no communication with your fellows is possible. Miracles are rare, and you will not be able to quit this isle. You will be alone, with no eye upon you but that of God, who reads the deepest secrets of the heart; but you will be neither lost nor forsaken, as Captain Grant was. Unworthy as you are of anyone’s remembrance, you will not be dropped out of recollection. I know where you are, Ayrton; I know where to find you—I shall never forget.”
“Now, listen to my final words, Ayrton. You’re going to be cut off here from the entire world, and you won’t be able to communicate with anyone else. Miracles are rare, and you won’t be able to leave this island. You will be alone, with only God's eyes watching you, who knows the deepest secrets of your heart; but you won't be lost or abandoned like Captain Grant was. Even though you might think you don’t deserve anyone’s remembrance, you won’t be forgotten. I know exactly where you are, Ayrton; I know how to find you—I won’t ever forget.”
“God keep your Honor,” was all Ayrton’s reply.
“God keep your Honor,” was all Ayrton replied.
These were the final words exchanged between Glenarvan and the quartermaster. The boat was ready and Ayrton got into it.
These were the last words exchanged between Glenarvan and the quartermaster. The boat was ready, and Ayrton climbed in.
John Mangles had previously conveyed to the island several cases of preserved food, besides clothing, and tools and firearms, and a supply of powder and shot. The quartermaster could commence a new life of honest labor. Nothing was lacking, not even books; among others, the Bible, so dear to English hearts.
John Mangles had previously brought several cases of preserved food to the island, along with clothing, tools, firearms, and a supply of powder and shot. The quartermaster could start a new life of honest work. Nothing was missing, not even books; among them, the Bible, which is so cherished by English hearts.
The parting hour had come. The crew and all the passengers were assembled on deck. More than one felt his heart swell with emotion. Mary Grant and Lady Helena could not restrain their feelings.
The time to say goodbye had arrived. The crew and all the passengers were gathered on deck. More than a few felt their hearts swell with emotion. Mary Grant and Lady Helena couldn't hold back their feelings.
“Must it be done?” said the young wife to her husband. “Must the poor man be left there?”
“Does it have to be done?” the young wife asked her husband. “Does the poor guy have to be left there?”
“He must, Helena,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “It is in expiation of his crimes.”
“He has to, Helena,” replied Lord Glenarvan. “It’s to make up for his wrongdoings.”
At that moment the boat, in charge of John Mangles, turned away. Ayrton, who remained standing, and still unmoved, took off his cap and bowed gravely.
At that moment, the boat, helmed by John Mangles, turned away. Ayrton, who stayed standing and still, removed his cap and bowed seriously.
Glenarvan uncovered, and all the crew followed his example, as if in presence of a man who was about to die, and the boat went off in profound silence.
Glenarvan stood up, and the entire crew followed suit, as if they were in the presence of someone about to die, and the boat set off in complete silence.
On reaching land, Ayrton jumped on the sandy shore, and the boat returned to the yacht. It was then four o’clock in the afternoon, and from the poop the passengers could see the quartermaster gazing at the ship, standing with folded arms on a rock, motionless as a statue.
Upon reaching land, Ayrton jumped onto the sandy shore, and the boat went back to the yacht. It was around four o’clock in the afternoon, and from the back of the ship, the passengers could see the quartermaster staring at the ship, standing with his arms crossed on a rock, still as a statue.
“Shall we set sail, my Lord?” asked John Mangles.
“Should we set sail, my Lord?” asked John Mangles.
“Yes, John,” replied Glenarvan, hastily, more moved than he cared to show.
“Yes, John,” replied Glenarvan quickly, more affected than he wanted to reveal.
“Go on!” shouted John to the engineer.
“Go ahead!” shouted John to the engineer.
The steam hissed and puffed out, the screw began to stir the waves, and by eight o’clock the last peaks of Isle Tabor disappeared in the shadows of the night.
The steam hissed and puffed out, the screw started to churn the waves, and by eight o’clock the last peaks of Isle Tabor faded into the darkness of the night.
CHAPTER XXI PAGANEL’S LAST ENTANGLEMENT
ON the 19th of March, eleven days after leaving the island, the DUNCAN sighted the American coast, and next day dropped anchor in the bay of Talcahuano. They had come back again after a voyage of five months, during which, and keeping strictly along the 37th parallel, they had gone round the world. The passengers in this memorable expedition, unprecedented in the annals of the Travelers’ Club, had visited Chili, the Pampas, the Argentine Republic, the Atlantic, the island of Tristan d’Acunha, the Indian Ocean, Amsterdam Island, Australia, New Zealand, Isle Tabor, and the Pacific. Their search had not been fruitless, for they were bringing back the survivors of the shipwrecked BRITANNIA.
ON March 19th, eleven days after leaving the island, the DUNCAN spotted the American coast and the next day dropped anchor in Talcahuano Bay. They had returned after a five-month voyage, during which they circled the globe while strictly following the 37th parallel. The passengers on this remarkable journey, unmatched in the history of the Travelers’ Club, had explored Chile, the Pampas, the Argentine Republic, the Atlantic, the island of Tristan d’Acunha, the Indian Ocean, Amsterdam Island, Australia, New Zealand, Isle Tabor, and the Pacific. Their search had been rewarding, as they were bringing back the survivors of the shipwrecked BRITANNIA.
Not one of the brave Scots who set out at the summons of their chief, but could answer to their names; all were returning to their old Scotia.
Not a single brave Scot who responded to their chief's call was missing; all were heading back to their beloved Scotland.
As soon as the DUNCAN had re-provisioned, she sailed along the coast of Patagonia, doubled Cape Horn, and made a swift run up the Atlantic Ocean. No voyage could be more devoid of incident. The yacht was simply carrying home a cargo of happiness. There was no secret now on board, not even John Mangles’s attachment to Mary Grant.
As soon as the DUNCAN restocked, she sailed along the coast of Patagonia, rounded Cape Horn, and made a quick trip up the Atlantic Ocean. No journey could be more uneventful. The yacht was just bringing back a load of happiness. There were no secrets on board now, not even John Mangles’s feelings for Mary Grant.
Yes, there was one mystery still, which greatly excited McNabbs’s curiosity. Why was it that Paganel remained always hermetically fastened up in his clothes, with a big comforter round his throat and up to his very ears? The Major was burning with desire to know the reason of this singular fashion. But in spite of interrogations, allusions, and suspicions on the part of McNabbs, Paganel would not unbutton.
Yes, there was still one mystery that really piqued McNabbs’s curiosity. Why did Paganel always keep himself bundled up in his clothes, with a thick scarf wrapped around his neck and up to his ears? The Major was eager to find out the reason behind this strange habit. But despite McNabbs’s questions, hints, and suspicions, Paganel wouldn’t budge.
Not even when the DUNCAN crossed the line, and the heat was so great that the seams of the deck were melting. “He is so DISTRAIT that he thinks he is at St. Petersburg,” said the Major, when he saw the geographer wrapped in an immense great-coat, as if the mercury had been frozen in the thermometer.
Not even when the DUNCAN crossed the line, and the heat was so intense that the seams of the deck were melting. “He is so DISTRACTED that he thinks he is in St. Petersburg,” said the Major, when he saw the geographer wrapped in a massive overcoat, as if the mercury had frozen in the thermometer.
At last on the 9th of May, fifty-three days from the time of leaving Talcahuano, John Mangles sighted the lights of Cape Clear. The yacht entered St. George’s Channel, crossed the Irish Sea, and on the 10th of May reached the Firth of Clyde. At 11 o’clock she dropped anchor off Dunbarton, and at 2 P.M. the passengers arrived at Malcolm Castle amidst the enthusiastic cheering of the Highlanders.
At last, on May 9th, fifty-three days after leaving Talcahuano, John Mangles spotted the lights of Cape Clear. The yacht entered St. George’s Channel, crossed the Irish Sea, and on May 10th, reached the Firth of Clyde. At 11 a.m., she dropped anchor off Dunbarton, and at 2 p.m., the passengers arrived at Malcolm Castle to the enthusiastic cheers of the Highlanders.
As fate would have it then, Harry Grant and his two companions were saved. John Mangles wedded Mary Grant in the old cathedral of St. Mungo, and Mr. Paxton, the same clergyman who had prayed nine months before for the deliverance of the father, now blessed the marriage of his daughter and his deliverer. Robert was to become a sailor like Harry Grant and John Mangles, and take part with them in the captain’s grand projects, under the auspices of Lord Glenarvan.
As fate would have it, Harry Grant and his two companions were saved. John Mangles married Mary Grant in the old cathedral of St. Mungo, and Mr. Paxton, the same clergyman who had prayed nine months earlier for the father's rescue, now blessed the marriage of his daughter and her savior. Robert was set to become a sailor like Harry Grant and John Mangles, joining them in the captain’s ambitious plans under the support of Lord Glenarvan.
But fate also decreed that Paganel was not to die a bachelor? Probably so.
But fate also decided that Paganel was not meant to die single, right? Probably so.
The fact was, the learned geographer after his heroic exploits, could not escape celebrity. His blunders made quite a FURORE among the fashionables of Scotland, and he was overwhelmed with courtesies.
The truth was, the knowledgeable geographer, after his daring adventures, couldn’t avoid becoming famous. His mistakes caused quite a stir among the trendy people of Scotland, and he was showered with kindness.
It was then that an amiable lady, about thirty years of age, in fact, a cousin of McNabbs, a little eccentric herself, but good and still charming, fell in love with the geographer’s oddities, and offered him her hand. Forty thousand pounds went with it, but that was not mentioned.
It was then that a friendly woman, around thirty years old, who happened to be McNabb's cousin, a bit eccentric herself but kind and still charming, fell for the geographer's quirks and proposed to him. Along with her hand came forty thousand pounds, though that wasn't brought up.
Paganel was far from being insensible to the sentiments of Miss Arabella, but yet he did not dare to speak. It was the Major who was the medium of communication between these two souls, evidently made for each other. He even told Paganel that his marriage was the last freak he would be able to allow himself. Paganel was in a great state of embarrassment, but strangely enough could not make up his mind to speak the fatal word.
Paganel was definitely aware of Miss Arabella's feelings, but he still didn’t have the courage to say anything. It was the Major who acted as the go-between for these two people, clearly meant for one another. He even told Paganel that his marriage would be the last thing he would allow himself. Paganel felt very uncomfortable, but strangely, he couldn’t bring himself to say the pivotal word.
“Does not Miss Arabella please you then?” asked McNabbs.
“Don’t you like Miss Arabella then?” asked McNabbs.
“Oh, Major, she is charming,” exclaimed Paganel, “a thousand times too charming, and if I must tell you all, she would please me better if she were less so. I wish she had a defect!”
“Oh, Major, she’s delightful,” Paganel exclaimed, “a thousand times too delightful, and to be honest, I’d prefer her more if she were a little less so. I wish she had a flaw!”
“Be easy on that score,” replied the Major, “she has, and more than one. The most perfect woman in the world has always her quota. So, Paganel, it is settled then, I suppose?”
“Don't worry about that,” replied the Major, “she has, and more than one. The most perfect woman in the world always has her share. So, Paganel, it's settled then, I guess?”
“I dare not.”
“I won't.”
“Come, now, my learned friend, what makes you hesitate?”
“Come on, my knowledgeable friend, what’s holding you back?”
“I am unworthy of Miss Arabella,” was the invariable reply of the geographer. And to this he would stick.
“I don’t deserve Miss Arabella,” was always the geographer's response. And he would stand by it.
At last, one day being fairly driven in a corner by the intractable Major, he ended by confiding to him, under the seal of secrecy, a certain peculiarity which would facilitate his apprehension should the police ever be on his track.
At last, one day, feeling trapped by the stubborn Major, he finally opened up to him, under the promise of confidentiality, about a specific detail that would make his capture easier if the police ever came looking for him.
“Bah!” said the Major.
“Ugh!” said the Major.
“It is really as I tell you,” replied Paganel.
“It’s really just as I said,” replied Paganel.
“What does it matter, my worthy friend?”
“What does it matter, my good friend?”
“Do you think so, Major?”
“Do you really think that, Major?”
“On the contrary, it only makes you more uncommon. It adds to your personal merits. It is the very thing to make you the nonpareil husband that Arabella dreams about.”
“On the contrary, it just makes you even more unique. It adds to your personal qualities. It’s exactly what will make you the perfect husband that Arabella dreams about.”
And the Major with imperturbable gravity left Paganel in a state of the utmost disquietude.
And the Major, with unwavering seriousness, left Paganel feeling extremely anxious.
A short conversation ensued between McNabbs and Miss Arabella. A fortnight afterwards, the marriage was celebrated in grand style in the chapel of Malcolm Castle. Paganel looked magnificent, but closely buttoned up, and Miss Arabella was arrayed in splendor.
A brief conversation took place between McNabbs and Miss Arabella. Two weeks later, the wedding was held in grand style at the chapel of Malcolm Castle. Paganel looked amazing, though his outfit was tightly buttoned, and Miss Arabella was dressed in elegance.
And this secret of the geographer would have been forever buried in oblivion, if the Major had not mentioned it to Glenarvan, and he could not hide it from Lady Helena, who gave a hint to Mrs. Mangles. To make a long story short, it got in the end to M. Olbinett’s ears, and soon became noised abroad.
And this geographer's secret would have been completely forgotten if the Major hadn't mentioned it to Glenarvan, who couldn't keep it from Lady Helena, who then hinted at it to Mrs. Mangles. To cut a long story short, it eventually reached M. Olbinett’s ears and quickly spread around.
Jacques Paganel, during his three days’ captivity among the Maories, had been tattooed from the feet to the shoulders, and he bore on his chest a heraldic kiwi with outspread wings, which was biting at his heart.
Jacques Paganel, during his three days in captivity with the Maoris, had been tattooed from his feet to his shoulders, and he had a heraldic kiwi with its wings spread out, biting at his heart, inked on his chest.
This was the only adventure of his grand voyage that Paganel could never get over, and he always bore a grudge to New Zealand on account of it. It was for this reason too, that, notwithstanding solicitation and regrets, he never would return to France. He dreaded lest he should expose the whole Geographical Society in his person to the jests of caricaturists and low newspapers, by their secretary coming back tattooed.
This was the only incident from his grand voyage that Paganel could never shake off, and he always held a grudge against New Zealand because of it. For this reason, even with requests and apologies, he refused to go back to France. He feared that he would make the entire Geographical Society a target for ridicule from cartoonists and tabloids, just by having their secretary return covered in tattoos.
The return of the captain to Scotland was a national event, and Harry Grant was soon the most popular man in old Caledonia. His son Robert became a sailor like himself and Captain Mangles, and under the patronage of Lord Glenarvan they resumed the project of founding a Scotch colony in the Southern Seas.
The captain's return to Scotland was a big event, and Harry Grant quickly became the most popular man in old Caledonia. His son Robert followed in his footsteps and became a sailor like him and Captain Mangles, and with the support of Lord Glenarvan, they picked up the plan to establish a Scottish colony in the Southern Seas.
Transcribers Note: I have made the following changes to the text: PAGE LINE ORIGINAL CHANGED TO 5 31 drank drunk 13 22 shores. shores.” 13 27 Lady Glenarvan. Lord Glenarvan. 16 29 up ,Halbert.” up, Halbert.” 25 13 sang froid. SANG-FROID. 25 26 maneuvring maneuvering 31 12 unmistakingly unmistakably 34 19 Celedonian Caledonian 36 27 France. France.” 40 28 occular ocular 51 38 exceptions exception 52 6 prisoniers, prisonniers, 53 34 reconnoitred reconnoitered 54 38 Corientes Corrientes 56 10 Colts Colt’s 63 32 have attempted would have attempted 67 30 Mount Blanc. Mont Blanc. 67 36 Nevados Nevadas 62 38 impassible.” impassable.” 83 20 returns returned 83 38 Cameans, Camoens, 87 12 Argentile Argentine 96 25 sore of sort of 98 26 had drank had drunk 99 18 Vantana, Ventana, 100 21 drank drunk 102 19 minute’s minutes’ 103 29 comrades’ comrade’s 104 21 them. them.” 104 24 rio a ramada rio a ramada 109 21 time. time.” 110 34 wolf wolf; 112 33 never! never!” 113 38 RAMADO, RAMADA, 116 13 drank drunk 116 15 nandou NANDOU 118 30 estancias, ESTANCIAS, 120 28 TOLDERAI, TOLDERIA, 133 28 fugitive fugitives 134 21 tumultous tumultuous 135 21 hilgueros, HILGUEROS, 144 1 thegonie, theogonie, 144 30 Glascow Glasgow 144 36 prisoniers prisonniers 144 39 aplied applied 147 15 sub-species. sub-species.” 152 4 aproaching approaching 153 17 mation. mation.” 156 36 terra firma. terra firma. 159 1 Glenarvan. Glenarvan, 176 40 Mangle’s Mangles’ 178 16 DEBRIS DEBRIS 180 8 ports port 187 33 Purday-Moore Purdy-Moore 190 5 longtitude longitude 191 37 warning warring 193 10 DENOUEMENT DENOUEMENT 195 19 rectillinear rectilinear 196 31 Pour “Pour 199 20 shipwrecked. shipwrecked 200 33 Britany. Britanny. 202 24 handsbreath. handsbreadth. 205 16 kow know 205 39 37 degrees” 37 degrees.” 206 42 Glasglow Glasgow 214 41 ROLE role 218 10 mounteback’s mountebank’s 219 18 day’s days’ 222 13 monothremes; monotremes; 223 21 mleancholy melancholy 232 35 Glenarvan, Glenarvan 234 32 able but ible but 243 10 Pomoton?” Pomotou?” 243 37 Britanic Britannic 249 6 McNabb’s McNabbs 250 24 midst. mist. 251 40 but “but 253 29 terrestial terrestrial 256 11 his oasis, this oasis, 261 28 continuel continual 268 33 alluvion, alluvium, 271 26 aerial aerial 272 3 wagan, wagon, 272 7 gastralobium, gastrolobium, 272 34 Wimmero.” Wimmera.” 273 37 sang sang- 273 41 wo- woe- 274 40 two “two 280 11 disapepared. disappeared. 281 6 DENOUEMENT DENOUEMENT 281 13 Joye, Joyce, 282 29 It it It is 284 9 sorrrow, sorrow, 284 23 eurus emus 287 35 37 degree 37th degree 288 15 sang froid sang-froid 312 29 wretches?” wretches!” 314 24 impassible. impassive. 316 41 fancy. fancy.” 326 35 impossisble impossible 327 41 him. him.” 335 27 patience. patience.” 339 15 1864. 1864.” 339 41 Tarankai Taranaki 340 10 Taranak Taranaki 341 15 Taranki Taranaki 347 11 Waikato?” Waikato!” 347 18 buscuit biscuit 348 30 irrefragable irrefragible 348 37 musquito. mosquito. 350 35 Adressing Addressing 352 42 lines of line of 356 41 Tohongo, Tohonga, 357 8 tuers tures 360 24 McNabb’s McNabbs’ 364 20 orgie orgy 374 5 piron- Piron- 378 36 Ikana-Mani Ika-na-Mani 386 41 soup ,which soup, which 395 10 “moas’ “moas” 402 14 exciting excited 418 13 JUIN ,1862 JUIN, 1862 On page 390 I have omitted the following redundant line 40, which properly begins page 391, as in the original text: and his wonderful instinct shone out anew in this difficult
Transcribers Note: I have made the following changes to the text: PAGE LINE ORIGINAL CHANGED TO 5 31 drank drunk 13 22 shores. shores.” 13 27 Lady Glenarvan. Lord Glenarvan. 16 29 up ,Halbert.” up, Halbert.” 25 13 sang froid. SANG-FROID. 25 26 maneuvring maneuvering 31 12 unmistakingly unmistakably 34 19 Celedonian Caledonian 36 27 France. France.” 40 28 occular ocular 51 38 exceptions exception 52 6 prisoniers, prisonniers, 53 34 reconnoitred reconnoitered 54 38 Corientes Corrientes 56 10 Colts Colt’s 63 32 have attempted would have attempted 67 30 Mount Blanc. Mont Blanc. 67 36 Nevados Nevadas 62 38 impassible.” impassable.” 83 20 returns returned 83 38 Cameans, Camoens, 87 12 Argentile Argentine 96 25 sore of sort of 98 26 had drank had drunk 99 18 Vantana, Ventana, 100 21 drank drunk 102 19 minute’s minutes’ 103 29 comrades’ comrade’s 104 21 them. them.” 104 24 rio a ramada rio a ramada 109 21 time. time.” 110 34 wolf wolf; 112 33 never! never!” 113 38 RAMADO, RAMADA, 116 13 drank drunk 116 15 nandou NANDOU 118 30 estancias, ESTANCIAS, 120 28 TOLDERAI, TOLDERIA, 133 28 fugitive fugitives 134 21 tumultous tumultuous 135 21 hilgueros, HILGUEROS, 144 1 thegonie, theogonie, 144 30 Glascow Glasgow 144 36 prisoniers prisonniers 144 39 aplied applied 147 15 sub-species. sub-species.” 152 4 aproaching approaching 153 17 mation. mation.” 156 36 terra firma. terra firma. 159 1 Glenarvan. Glenarvan, 176 40 Mangle’s Mangles’ 178 16 DEBRIS DEBRIS 180 8 ports port 187 33 Purday-Moore Purdy-Moore 190 5 longtitude longitude 191 37 warning warring 193 10 DENOUEMENT DENOUEMENT 195 19 rectillinear rectilinear 196 31 Pour “Pour 199 20 shipwrecked. shipwrecked 200 33 Britany. Britanny. 202 24 handsbreath. handsbreadth. 205 16 kow know 205 39 37 degrees” 37 degrees.” 206 42 Glasglow Glasgow 214 41 ROLE role 218 10 mounteback’s mountebank’s 219 18 day’s days’ 222 13 monothremes; monotremes; 223 21 mleancholy melancholy 232 35 Glenarvan, Glenarvan 234 32 able but ible but 243 10 Pomoton?” Pomotou?” 243 37 Britanic Britannic 249 6 McNabb’s McNabbs 250 24 midst. mist. 251 40 but “but 253 29 terrestial terrestrial 256 11 his oasis, this oasis, 261 28 continuel continual 268 33 alluvion, alluvium, 271 26 aerial aerial 272 3 wagan, wagon, 272 7 gastralobium, gastrolobium, 272 34 Wimmero.” Wimmera.” 273 37 sang sang- 273 41 wo- woe- 274 40 two “two 280 11 disapepared. disappeared. 281 6 DENOUEMENT DENOUEMENT 281 13 Joye, Joyce, 282 29 It it It is 284 9 sorrrow, sorrow, 284 23 eurus emus 287 35 37 degree 37th degree 288 15 sang froid sang-froid 312 29 wretches?” wretches!” 314 24 impassible. impassive. 316 41 fancy. fancy.” 326 35 impossisble impossible 327 41 him. him.” 335 27 patience. patience.” 339 15 1864. 1864.” 339 41 Tarankai Taranaki 340 10 Taranak Taranaki 341 15 Taranki Taranaki 347 11 Waikato?” Waikato!” 347 18 buscuit biscuit 348 30 irrefragable irrefragable 348 37 musquito. mosquito. 350 35 Adressing Addressing 352 42 lines of line of 356 41 Tohongo, Tohonga, 357 8 tuers tures 360 24 McNabb’s McNabbs’ 364 20 orgie orgy 374 5 piron- Piron- 378 36 Ikana-Mani Ika-na-Mani 386 41 soup ,which soup, which 395 10 “moas’ “moas” 402 14 exciting excited 418 13 JUIN ,1862 JUIN, 1862 On page 390 I have omitted the following redundant line 40, which properly begins page 391, as in the original text: and his wonderful instinct shone out anew in this difficult
In addition, I have made the following changes to the chapter headings and running heads: PAGE ORIGINAL CHANGED TO 24 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 25 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 27 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 35 JAQUES JACQUES 37 JAQUES JACQUES 204 BRITANNIA “BRITANNIA” 398 DUNCAN “DUNCAN”
In addition, I have made the following changes to the chapter headings and running heads: PAGE ORIGINAL CHANGED TO 24 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 25 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 27 DUNCAN “DUNCAN” 35 JAQUES JACQUES 37 JAQUES JACQUES 204 BRITANNIA “BRITANNIA” 398 DUNCAN “DUNCAN”
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!